Preface

Fundamental safety
instructions 1

Fundamentals 2
SINUMERIK
Description of functions 3
SINUMERIK 840D sl
Tool Management
Commissioning 4

Programming 5
Function Manual
Code carrier connection -
Tool Ident Connection 6
(option)

Machine data 7
Signal description of the PLC
interface 8

Alarms 9

Appendix A

Valid for:
Control system
SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl
Software version
CNC software 4.7 SP2

10/2015
6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Document order number: 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 Copyright © Siemens AG 2009 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 01/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

SINUMERIK documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in the following categories:
● General documentation
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/service documentation

Additional information
You can find information on the following topics at www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu:
● Ordering documentation/overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following address:
docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com

My Documentation Manager (MDM)

Under the following link you will find information to individually compile OEM-specific machine
documentation based on the Siemens content:
www.siemens.com/mdm

Training
For information about the range of training courses, refer under:
● www.siemens.com/sitrain
SITRAIN - Siemens training for products, systems and solutions in automation technology
● www.siemens.com/sinutrain
SinuTrain - training software for SINUMERIK

FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product
Support. http://support.automation.siemens.com

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 3
Preface

SINUMERIK
You can find information on SINUMERIK under the following link:
www.siemens.com/sinumerik

Target group
The Function Manual is intended for:
● Project engineers
● Technologists (from machine manufacturers)
● System and machine commissioning engineers
● Programmers

Benefits
The Function Manual describes the functions so that the target group knows them and can
select them. It provides the target group with the information required to implement the
functions.

Standard scope
This documentation describes the functionality of the standard scope. Additions or changes
made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This
does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when
servicing.
Furthermore, for the sake of clarity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information
about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation
or maintenance.

Technical Support
You will find telephone numbers for other countries for technical support in the Internet under
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Tool Management
4 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Table of contents

Preface.........................................................................................................................................................3
1 Fundamental safety instructions.................................................................................................................13
1.1 General safety instructions.....................................................................................................13
1.2 Industrial security...................................................................................................................14
2 Fundamentals.............................................................................................................................................15
2.1 Explanation of terms..............................................................................................................15
2.2 Function structure of tool management..................................................................................21
2.3 HMI/PLC - NCK data structure (OPI).....................................................................................22
2.4 PLC – NCK interfaces............................................................................................................24
2.5 Magazine configuration..........................................................................................................26
2.6 Access protection, protection levels.......................................................................................27
3 Description of functions..............................................................................................................................29
3.1 Magazines..............................................................................................................................29
3.1.1 Buffer......................................................................................................................................29
3.1.2 Loading magazine..................................................................................................................29
3.1.3 Box-type and chain magazines..............................................................................................30
3.1.4 Circular magazine..................................................................................................................32
3.1.5 Other magazine types............................................................................................................32
3.1.6 Wear group............................................................................................................................33
3.1.7 Background magazine...........................................................................................................34
3.1.8 Consider adjacent location.....................................................................................................35
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool).....................................................................37
3.2.1 Brief description.....................................................................................................................37
3.2.2 Programming..........................................................................................................................40
3.2.3 $TC_MTP - multitool data......................................................................................................41
3.2.4 $TC_MTPP - Multitool location data.......................................................................................51
3.2.5 Tool change with a tool from a multitool.................................................................................55
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines..................................................................72
3.3.1 Prepare a tool change............................................................................................................72
3.3.2 General tool change sequence..............................................................................................74
3.3.3 Monitoring the maximum speed of a tool...............................................................................78
3.3.4 Selecting a tool and a cutting edge........................................................................................83
3.3.5 Predecoding (preprocessing) and block execution (main run)...............................................85
3.3.6 Traverse axes while tool is being changed............................................................................87
3.3.7 Tool change in the spindle for chain and box-type magazines..............................................87
3.3.8 Special cases "T0", empty spindle, multiple T selection........................................................91
3.3.9 Tool change with turret...........................................................................................................92
3.3.10 Number of replacement tools.................................................................................................92
3.3.11 Tool changing errors..............................................................................................................93

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 5
Table of contents

3.3.12 Manual tools (adding tools during machining)........................................................................94

3.3.13 Tool changes in the NCK using synchronized actions.........................................................100
3.3.14 Function replacement...........................................................................................................103
3.3.15 Block search.........................................................................................................................107
3.3.16 Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management.........................................109
3.3.17 System variables for state before block search...................................................................112
3.3.17.1 Description of the variables..................................................................................................112
3.3.17.2 Example...............................................................................................................................113
3.3.18 Program test.........................................................................................................................116
3.3.19 Several spindles in one channel or TO unit.........................................................................118
3.3.20 Decoupling the tool management from the spindle number.................................................119
3.3.21 Several spindles/toolholders................................................................................................125
3.3.22 Several magazines in one channel or one TO unit..............................................................126
3.3.23 Reset and start mode...........................................................................................................127
3.3.24 Repeating a tool change with the same tool identifier..........................................................134
3.4 Search for tool......................................................................................................................137
3.4.1 Strategies for tool searches.................................................................................................137
3.5 Empty location search..........................................................................................................139
3.5.1 Empty location search for a tool – from spindle to magazine...............................................139
3.5.2 Search strategy for empty locations.....................................................................................140
3.5.3 Assigning a hierarchy to the location types..........................................................................141
3.5.4 New type of location type hierarchy.....................................................................................142
3.5.5 Search procedure for empty locations.................................................................................143
3.5.6 Search strategy, 1:1 exchange (old for new).......................................................................144
3.5.7 Tool search in wear group....................................................................................................146
3.6 Loading................................................................................................................................150
3.6.1 Loading sequence................................................................................................................150
3.6.2 Function of the PLC when loading?.....................................................................................150
3.6.3 Loading by directly assigning the T number.........................................................................152
3.6.4 Load tools via a part program..............................................................................................152
3.6.5 Retroload tool data...............................................................................................................153
3.7 Unloading.............................................................................................................................156
3.7.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................156
3.7.2 PLC function when unloading..............................................................................................156
3.7.3 Unloading by deleting the T number from the magazine location........................................158
3.8 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine....................................................................159
3.8.1 Relocate (task from TM system)..........................................................................................159
3.8.2 Relocation by the PLC.........................................................................................................159
3.8.3 Positioning the magazine.....................................................................................................161
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)................................................................163
3.9.1 Monitoring types...................................................................................................................163
3.9.2 Tool life monitoring...............................................................................................................165
3.9.3 Workpiece count monitoring.................................................................................................166
3.9.4 Wear monitoring...................................................................................................................167
3.9.5 Signals to and from the PLC................................................................................................170
3.10 Tool monitoring without active tool management.................................................................173
3.10.1 Tool monitoring overview.....................................................................................................173
3.10.2 Tool life monitoring...............................................................................................................174
3.10.3 Workpiece count monitoring.................................................................................................175

Tool Management
6 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Table of contents

3.10.4 Wear monitoring...................................................................................................................176

3.10.5 Monitoring the additive offset...............................................................................................176
3.10.6 Working with replacement tools...........................................................................................176
3.10.7 Examples.............................................................................................................................176
3.10.8 NC language commands......................................................................................................177
3.11 Variants of D-number assignments......................................................................................178
3.11.1 Relative D No. for each T - standard....................................................................................178
3.11.2 Absolute D No. without reference to the T number (flat D No.)............................................178
3.11.3 Free selection of D numbers for every T..............................................................................179
3.11.4 Location-dependent offsets (additive offsets)......................................................................181
3.12 Adapter data.........................................................................................................................185
3.12.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................185
3.12.2 Description of function..........................................................................................................185
3.12.3 Activation..............................................................................................................................186
3.12.4 Transformed data of the active tool $P_ADT[n]...................................................................195
3.13 Power failure while tool command is in progress.................................................................196
3.14 PLC description....................................................................................................................197
3.14.1 Interfaces.............................................................................................................................197
3.14.2 Definitions of acknowledgement status................................................................................202
3.14.3 Simplified acknowledgement of tool management commands............................................206
3.14.4 Diagnostics for communication between NC and PLC........................................................207
3.14.5 Function blocks....................................................................................................................210
4 Commissioning.........................................................................................................................................211
4.1 Input of the machine data.....................................................................................................211
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks.......................................................................215
4.2.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................215
4.2.2 Create PLC data..................................................................................................................216
4.2.3 Description of the test blocks...............................................................................................218
4.2.4 Delete pending tasks............................................................................................................222
5 Programming............................................................................................................................................223
5.1 Overview of OPI and system variables................................................................................223
5.2 Cutting edge data.................................................................................................................226
5.2.1 Cutting edge data.................................................................................................................226
5.2.2 Cutting edge parameters......................................................................................................226
5.2.3 User cutting edge data.........................................................................................................228
5.2.4 Cutting edge-related tool monitoring....................................................................................229
5.2.5 User cutting-edge monitoring...............................................................................................230
5.2.6 Location-dependent offsets, fine (additive offsets)...............................................................231
5.2.7 Location-dependent offsets, coarse (setting-up offsets)......................................................231
5.3 Tool data..............................................................................................................................233
5.3.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................233
5.3.2 Tool-related data..................................................................................................................233
5.3.3 Tool-related grinding data....................................................................................................239
5.3.4 Tool-related user data..........................................................................................................239
5.4 Magazine data......................................................................................................................241
5.4.1 Overview of magazine data..................................................................................................241

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 7
Table of contents

5.4.2 Magazine description data...................................................................................................241

5.4.3 Magazine user data..............................................................................................................243
5.4.4 Magazine location data........................................................................................................244
5.4.5 Magazine location user data................................................................................................248
5.4.6 Magazine location type hierarchy.........................................................................................249
5.4.7 Distance to change position.................................................................................................250
5.4.8 Magazine blocks..................................................................................................................253
5.4.9 Assigning buffers to spindles...............................................................................................260
5.5 Adapter data.........................................................................................................................262
5.6 Toolholder data....................................................................................................................263
5.7 User-definable variables......................................................................................................266
5.8 NC language commands......................................................................................................268
5.8.1 CHKDNO - Uniqueness check for D number.......................................................................268
5.8.2 CHKDM - Uniqueness check within a magazine..................................................................269
5.8.3 GETACTTD - Determining the T No. for a unique D No......................................................269
5.8.4 GETDNO - Rename D numbers..........................................................................................270
5.8.5 SETDNO - Rename D numbers...........................................................................................270
5.8.6 DZERO - Invalidate D numbers...........................................................................................271
5.8.7 DELDL - Delete additive offsets...........................................................................................271
5.8.8 NEWT - Create a new tool...................................................................................................271
5.8.9 NEWMT - create new multitool............................................................................................272
5.8.10 DELT - Delete tool................................................................................................................273
5.8.11 DELMT - deleting a multitool................................................................................................273
5.8.12 $TC_MTPN - Deletion of one or all multitools......................................................................274
5.8.13 GETT - Read T No...............................................................................................................274
5.8.14 SETPIECE - decrementing the workpiece counter..............................................................275
5.8.15 GETSELT - Read the selected T No....................................................................................277
5.8.16 GETEXET - Reading of the loaded T number......................................................................279
5.8.17 $P_MTHSDC - master tool holder with regard to the D offset selection..............................283
5.8.18 $P_TH_OF_D - master tool holder with regard to the current D offset.................................284
5.8.19 GETACTT - Read the active internal T No...........................................................................285
5.8.20 SETMS - Spindle can be declared a master spindle............................................................287
5.8.21 SETMTH - Set master toolholder number............................................................................287
5.8.22 POSM - Positioning the magazine.......................................................................................289
5.8.23 POSMT - positioning a multitool on a toolholder to the location number.............................292
5.8.24 MVTOOL - Language command to move tool.....................................................................295
5.8.25 SETTIA - Deactivate tool from wear group..........................................................................298
5.8.26 SETTA - Activate tool from wear group................................................................................299
5.8.27 RESETMON - Language command for setpoint activation..................................................300
5.8.28 DELTC - Delete toolholder data record................................................................................304
5.8.29 TCA - Tool selection/tool change irrespective of tool status................................................305
5.8.30 Replacement of the TCA command.....................................................................................308
5.8.31 TCI - Change tool from buffer into magazine.......................................................................310
5.8.32 GETFREELOC - Search for empty location.........................................................................311
5.8.33 DELMLRES - Delete location status "reserved for tool in the buffer"...................................317
5.8.34 DELMLOWNER - Delete owner magazine location of the tool............................................318
5.8.35 $P_USEKT - Tool change only with tools of subgroup........................................................319
5.8.36 TOOLGNT/TOOLGT - Tool groups......................................................................................323
5.8.37 $P_TMNOIS - is a number, T number, magazine number or MT number...........................323
5.8.38 $P_TOOLEXIST - define the existence of a tool..................................................................324

Tool Management
8 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Table of contents

5.8.39 $A_TOOLMN - Read magazine No. of tool..........................................................................325

5.8.40 $P_MTOOLN / $P_MTOOLMT - determine the number of multitools /MT number.............325
5.8.41 $P_MTOOLNT / $P_MTOOLT - number of tools in the multitool.........................................326
5.8.42 $A_TOOLMLN - Read magazine location No. of tool..........................................................327
5.8.43 $P_TOOLND - Read number of cutting edges for tool.........................................................327
5.8.44 $A_MONIFACT - Factor for reading tool life monitoring......................................................328
5.8.45 $AC_MONMIN - Factor for tool search................................................................................329
5.8.46 $P_TOOLNG - Number of tool groups.................................................................................333
5.8.47 $A_MYMN / $A_MYMLN - Owner magazine/location of the tool.........................................333
5.8.48 $A_MYMTN / $A_MYMTLN - $A_TOOLMTN / $A_TOOLMTLN - tools in the multitool.......334
5.8.49 $P_TOOLNT / $P_TOOLT - T numbers...............................................................................336
5.8.50 $P_TOOLD - D numbers......................................................................................................336
5.8.51 $P_TOOLNDL - Number of defined DL offsets....................................................................337
5.8.52 $A_USEDND - Workpiece counting....................................................................................338
5.8.53 $A_USEDT - Workpiece counting........................................................................................339
5.8.54 $A_USEDD - Workpiece count............................................................................................340
5.8.55 $P_MAGN / $P_MAG - Magazine........................................................................................341
5.8.56 $P_MAGNDIS / $P_MAGDISS / $P_MAGDISL - magazine distance tables.......................342
5.8.57 $P_MAGNS / $P_MAGS - Toolholder..................................................................................343
5.8.58 $P_MAGNREL / $P_MAGREL - Assigned buffer.................................................................344
5.8.59 Example of magazine configuration system variables.........................................................345
5.8.60 $P_MAGNH / $P_MAGNHLT / $P_MAGHLT - Location type hierarchies...........................348
5.8.61 $P_MAGNA / $P_MAGA - Tool adapter...............................................................................349
5.8.62 Additional language commands...........................................................................................350
5.8.63 Variables for subroutine replacement technique..................................................................358
5.8.64 Variables for tool change in synchronized action.................................................................359
5.9 Definitions when programming data.....................................................................................361
5.9.1 Tool and cutting edge data...................................................................................................361
5.9.2 Magazine data......................................................................................................................362
5.9.3 Tool change.........................................................................................................................364
5.9.4 Cutting edge selection..........................................................................................................365
5.9.5 Tool transfer from program test............................................................................................366
5.10 Programming T=location number.........................................................................................368
5.11 Call multiple turrets with "T=location number"......................................................................370
5.12 Programming examples.......................................................................................................371
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management................................................372
5.13.1 Magazine data, directory......................................................................................................372
5.13.2 Tool data, directory..............................................................................................................372
5.13.3 Parameterization, return parameters _N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC.......................................372
5.13.4 Working offsets....................................................................................................................373
5.13.5 PI services and language commands for tool management................................................374
6 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)........................................................................381
6.1 Installation............................................................................................................................381
6.1.1 System requirements...........................................................................................................381
6.1.2 Installation of Tool Ident Connection....................................................................................382
6.1.2.1 Activation of Tool Ident Connection.....................................................................................382
6.1.2.2 Installation of Wkonvert wizard............................................................................................383
6.2 Configuration........................................................................................................................389

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 9
Table of contents

6.2.1 Configuration schematic.......................................................................................................389

6.2.2 Configuration of the tool lists................................................................................................389
6.2.3 TDIIdentCfg.xml...................................................................................................................390
6.2.4 Read/write device at the PLC...............................................................................................393
6.2.5 Data conversion...................................................................................................................394
6.2.5.1 Using the Wkonvert wizard..................................................................................................396
6.2.5.2 Messages of the Wkonvert wizard.......................................................................................397
6.2.6 Conversion files wkonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt................................................................398
6.2.6.1 Structure of the description file wkonvert.txt........................................................................398
6.2.6.2 Examples for the description files wkonvert.txt....................................................................403
6.2.6.3 Tool data initialization file DefToolDat.txt.............................................................................406
6.2.7 Conversion rule based on the MCIS-C script language.......................................................408
6.2.7.1 Structure of the conversion rule...........................................................................................408
6.2.7.2 Access to tool data...............................................................................................................410
6.2.7.3 Auxiliary functions for numerical coding...............................................................................412
6.2.7.4 Configuration of ToolSpec.xml.............................................................................................418
6.2.7.5 Description of the MCIS-C script language..........................................................................419
6.2.8 Examples.............................................................................................................................420
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19....................................................................................................425
6.3.1 Structure...............................................................................................................................425
6.3.2 Function call of the PLC interface........................................................................................425
6.3.3 Assignment of the PLC for transfer parameters...................................................................426
6.3.4 Assignment of the PLC for return values.............................................................................427
6.3.5 Executing functions..............................................................................................................427
6.3.5.1 General sequence when executing functions......................................................................427
6.3.5.2 Pulse diagram for positive execution of a function...............................................................429
6.3.5.3 Pulse diagram when negative execution of a function.........................................................430
6.3.5.4 Pulse diagram "Ident_Ready" signal....................................................................................430
6.3.6 PLC interface for the Parameter operating area..................................................................431
6.3.6.1 Assignment of the PLC interface for the Parameter area....................................................431
6.3.6.2 Load the tool........................................................................................................................432
6.3.6.3 Sequence ............................................................................................................................433
6.3.6.4 Sequence when canceled by the PLC.................................................................................434
6.3.6.5 Unloading a tool...................................................................................................................435
6.3.6.6 Diagnostics...........................................................................................................................435
6.3.6.7 Restrictions..........................................................................................................................437
6.3.6.8 Error messages....................................................................................................................437
6.3.7 PLC data types.....................................................................................................................437
6.4 Command codes..................................................................................................................439
6.4.1 Functional scope of the PLC interface (K codes).................................................................439
6.4.2 Parameter description..........................................................................................................439
6.4.3 Loading from the code carrier (K code = 0)..........................................................................440
6.4.4 Unload to code carrier (K code = 1).....................................................................................441
6.4.5 Loading a tool from the tool list (K code = 7)........................................................................442
6.4.6 Unloading a tool in the tool list (K code = 8).........................................................................443
6.4.7 Empty location search (K code = 9).....................................................................................445
6.4.8 Deleting a tool in the NCK (K code = 10).............................................................................446
6.4.9 Updating the code carrier (K code = 14)..............................................................................447
6.4.10 Reading data from the code carrier (K code = 15)...............................................................448
6.4.11 Error codes...........................................................................................................................449
6.5 Examples.............................................................................................................................455

Tool Management
10 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Table of contents

6.5.1 Loading the code carrier via PLC interface..........................................................................455

6.5.2 Unloading to the code carrier via PLC interface...................................................................458
7 Machine data............................................................................................................................................461
7.1 NC-specific machine data....................................................................................................461
7.2 Channel-specific machine data............................................................................................485
7.3 Machine data for function replacement................................................................................503
7.4 Machine data for the Siemens user data.............................................................................507
8 Signal description of the PLC interface....................................................................................................509
8.1 Overview of data blocks.......................................................................................................509
8.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine............................................................................510
8.3 Interface for spindle as change position...............................................................................515
8.4 Interface for turrets as change position................................................................................522
8.5 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (multitool) (DB 1071)..........................................527
8.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB 1072)...........................................................................529
8.7 Interface for revolver (multitool) (DB 1073)..........................................................................534
8.8 Interface NC channels..........................................................................................................539
8.9 Interface magazine configuration.........................................................................................541
9 Alarms......................................................................................................................................................543
9.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................543
9.2 Alarm description.................................................................................................................546
A Appendix...................................................................................................................................................577
A.1 List of abbreviations.............................................................................................................577
A.2 Documentation overview......................................................................................................579
Glossary...................................................................................................................................................581
Index.........................................................................................................................................................591

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 11
Table of contents

Tool Management
12 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Risk of death if the safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully observed
If the safety instructions and residual risks are not observed in the associated hardware
documentation, accidents involving severe injuries or death can occur.
● Observe the safety instructions given in the hardware documentation.
● Consider the residual risks for the risk evaluation.

WARNING
Danger to life or malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed
parameterization
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
● Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
● Respond to possible malfunctions by applying suitable measures (e.g. EMERGENCY
STOP or EMERGENCY OFF).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 13
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Industrial security

1.2 Industrial security

Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that
you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also
be considered. For more information about industrial security, visit this address (http://
www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. For more information, visit this address (http://support.automation.siemens.com).

WARNING
Danger as a result of unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulation (e.g. by viruses, Trojan horses, malware, worms) can cause unsafe
operating states to develop in your installation which can result in death, severe injuries and/
or material damage.
● Keep the software up to date.
You will find relevant information and newsletters at this address (http://
support.automation.siemens.com).
● Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
You will find further information at this address (http://www.siemens.com/
industrialsecurity).
● Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.

Tool Management
14 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Fundamentals 2
2.1 Explanation of terms
The "tool management" function (TOOLMAN) ensures that at any given time, the correct tool
is in the correct location and that the data assigned to the tool is up to date. The function is
used on machine tools with circular magazines, chain magazines or box magazines. It also
allows fast tool changes and avoids scrap by monitoring the tool service life and machine
downtimes by using spare tools.

Quantity structure NCU 730 NCU 720 NCU 710

Number of magazines 64 32 32
Number of cutting edges 3000 1500 1500
Number of tools per multitool 64 32 32

Functions of the tool management

There are four different function versions when handling tools:
● TMBF: Tool Management (Base Functions) (also available without active tool
management)
Default setting in NC
(TMBF = Tool Management Base Functions)
● TMFD: Tool Management Flat D Numbers (only without active tool management)
(TMFD = Tool Management Flat D Numbers)
● TMMO: Tool Management Tool (Monitoring)
(TMMO = Tool Management Tool Monitoring)
● TMMG: Tool Management Magazines (only available with active tool management)
(TMMG = Tool Management Magazines)
Included in the basic version of SINUMERIK 840D sl are:
● TMBF or
● TMBF + TMFD + TMMG
The function is capable of managing up to 64 real magazines with a total of 1500 magazine
locations and 1500 tools, and up to 12 cutting edges per tool (max. 3000 cutting edges). The
maximum number of edges per tool depends on the software version and machine data
settings.

Basic functions
The basic functions are generally available, even in systems without active tool management.
Basic functions include, for example, creating and deleting tools, entering offsets and tool
changes. On the basic function level, a specific number (max. 12) of cutting edges (D numbers)
is assigned to each T number (tool identification).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 15
Fundamentals
2.1 Explanation of terms

Alternatively, the TMFD or "Flat D numbers" (freely selectable D number independently of the
T number) function can be activated in systems without active tool management. You can
select any number of tool edges per tool; the number of tool edges per tool is not limited to 12.
With "Flat D numbers", the user is responsible for the management and assignment of T
numbers to D numbers.

Note
SINUMERIK Operate does not support the "Flat D numbers" function.

Basic functions (standard)

Basic functions of the tool management (standard) SINUMERIK Operate

System screens in the standard software X
Options for configuring screen forms and softkeys X
User-friendly commissioning via system screens X
Editing tool data X
Magazine and tool list X
Empty location search and location positioning X
Loading and unloading of tools X
Easy search for empty locations using softkeys X
Several real magazines are possible X
Several loading and unloading points per magazine X
"Relative" D numbers that can be freely numbered -
Adapter data -
Location-dependent offsets -
Data backup via USB X
Data backup on hard disk -
Data backup on CF Card X

Special functions
The special functions of tool management are magazine management, tool and empty location
search and monitoring the tool life, workpiece numbers or wear values. These additional
functions are only available when tool management is active.
Without active tool management, the magazine management must be implemented by the
machine manufacturer in the PLC user program.

Magazine management
Magazine management administers magazine locations. These locations might be empty,
loaded with tools or assigned to oversized tools in adjacent locations.
Empty locations can be "loaded" with other tools. The tool management provides the machine
manufacturer with optimized management of tools and magazine locations.

Tool Management
16 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Fundamentals
2.1 Explanation of terms

Magazine management provides extended functions such as load, unload or position tools. It
also includes searches for tools, magazine locations and search strategies for replacement
tools. For the tool monitoring functions, while the activated monitoring is running, tools are
disabled and no longer used. For further machining, if a similar tool (duplo tool) is present
which is not disabled, then this tool is used automatically.
In the simplest case, all that needs to be configured when tool management is active are
magazines, loading magazines, spindles, grippers, etc. Furthermore, the interfaces (DB 71 to
DB 73) must be processed in the PLC.
Task-related tool motions (e.g. position chain, swivel gripper) are derived from the interface
processing. After tool movements, the positions and task status should be acknowledged via
basic program blocks (FC6, FC7 and FC8). A detailed description of the acknowledgements
is provided under the index entries "Acknowledgement: simplified", "Acknowledgement status"
and "Changing acknowledgement data".
If necessary, create another cycle (or ASUP) for the NC program where tool changing is
programmed with the required travel motions. An identifier is programmed for the tool change
or tool preselection when the TOOLMAN system is active. A duplo number is also available
to support unique identification of replacement tools. Tool identifier and duplo numbers are
always mapped on an internally assigned T number. This internally assigned T number is used
for addressing the variables described in the following.

OPI variables
Additional functions are available using OPI variables on the PLC or HMI side. The NC program
(e.g. cycle, ASUP) provides corresponding language commands to achieve optimum
adaptation of the tool management to the machine environment. You can obtain a clear
overview from the data structures that form the basis of the tool management. They are
represented in the form of NC data blocks.

Operator panels
The following operator panels can be used for tool management:
● OP177, e.g. for loading magazines
● OP8T, e.g. for box-type magazines

Data
Data storage and management is carried out in the NC and SINUMERIK Operate. All data can
be read and written manually via the NC program or by data transfer.

Operation via system screens

Operation is mainly performed via system screens. There are system screens for
commissioning and for tool management operation (magazine lists, tool lists, loading/
unloading).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 17
Fundamentals
2.1 Explanation of terms

Configuration of user-specific screens

Tool-specific data that is not displayed via SINUMERIK Operate system screens can be
displayed and changed in configurable user-specific screens.
The configuration of user-specific screens is described in:

References
● SINUMERIK 840D sl: Commissioning Manual, Base Software and Operating Software;
Section "SINUMERIK Integrate Run MyScreens (BE2)"
● SINUMERIK 828D: Commissioning Manual; Section "SINUMERIK Integrate Run
MyScreens (BE2)"

Programming in the NC part program

The tool management function makes it possible to call a tool in the part program using a name
(identifier), e.g. T = "end mill 120 mm".
Tool call is still possible via the T no. (tool number). The T No. is then the name of the tool
(e.g. T=12345678).
A tool is uniquely defined by its name and duplo number. Furthermore, each tool can be
uniquely identified by its "internal" T number. The internal T number is generally assigned by
the NC and is not used for programming a tool change in the part program.
Using a machine data, it can be set as to whether the change is realized using the T command
(typical for lathes) or whether the tool is prepared using T programming and then it is first
changed with M06. This machine data setting is independent of the magazine type.
The following characters are permitted for the identifier:
[ _ ] [ a...z ] [ A...Z ] [ 0...9 ] ; [ + - . , ]
Identifiers are case-sensitive, i.e. differentiate between upper-case and lower-case characters.

PLC
There are data blocks (DB71-73) as well as DB1071-1073 for receiving tool management
commands and function blocks (FC6, FC7, FC8) for acknowledging the tool management
commands. A "fast acknowledgement" is implemented for simple applications in data blocks
DB71...73.
Another block, FC22, is used as a direction selection for magazines.
Tool management data can also be read and written via FB2 and FB3. Complex tool
management services can be initiated via FB4.

Magazine types
Turret, chain magazines and box magazines can be managed. Other magazine types, e.g.
pick-up magazine, are mapped onto these.
Real magazines can be defined as a turret, chain or box-type. Loading points or loading
stations shall be used as the magazine type for loading and unloading.

Tool Management
18 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Fundamentals
2.1 Explanation of terms

A magazine buffer combines all other locations in which tools can be placed (spindle,
gripper, ...).

Location coding
Fixed location coding as well as variable location coding are supported for the tools.

Location type
The location type defines the type and shape of the location. By assigning location types to
magazine locations it is possible to subdivide a magazine into areas. This means that different
types of special tools, e.g. "especially_large, "especially_heavy" can be assigned to specific
locations.
The location types can be placed in ascending order - a so called hierarchy. This order
determines that a tool that is supposed to be inserted in a "small" location type can also be
placed in a "larger" location type if no "smaller" location type is vacant.

Monitoring functions
In tool management, it is possible to select either workpiece counts or tool life monitoring (with
reference to the cutting edges). Further, a wear monitoring function is available. Replacement
tools (duplo tools) are differentiated by means of a duplo number.

Search strategy
Various strategies are possible for tool search and to search for the empty location of the "old
tool".
The empty location search strategy is used for loading tools.

Excerpt from TOOLMAN basic data

Term Data/Range
Magazine configuration per channel 1
Total number of magazines Max. 64
Total number of magazine locations Max. 1500
Total number of tools Max. 1500 per TO unit / max. 1500 across all TO
units
Programming tools (names) in the NC program e.g. T="angled miller_32"
using 32 alphanumeric characters
Duplo number 1) 1 – 32000
Total number of cutting edges Max. 3000
Location type definition Yes
Viewing adjacent locations in half locations 2dimensional
Location coding Fixed or variable
Strategy for tool search can be set (programmable) via system variables
Strategy for empty location search can be set (programmable) via system variables

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 19
Fundamentals
2.1 Explanation of terms

Term Data/Range
M06 command for tool change M code, settable via MD, channel-specific
Tool change with M06 or T command settable via MD, channel-specific
Wear monitoring For every cutting edge
Wear monitoring according to tool life Resolution ms
Wear monitoring according to number of workpie‐ Counters
ces
Access to tool management data via NC program System variables
Automatic decoding stop until tool is selected Yes
T=Location No. settable via MD

1) The duplo number or the duplo tool is called "sistertool" in SINUMERIK Operate.

Option
Tool management with more than two real magazines is an OPTION.

Tool Management
20 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Fundamentals
2.2 Function structure of tool management

2.2 Function structure of tool management

HMI
● Tool list
● Tool wear list
● OEM tool list
● Magazine list
NCK
● Manage tool data
State
Monitoring
Offsets
● Manage magazine data
Magazine
Magazine locations
● Tool management
Search for tool
Search for empty location
Change tool
Load, unload
PLC
● Magazine control
● Gripper control
● Spindle control
● Safety interlocks
● Execute tool change
● Calculation of position, if necessary
● Own change strategy, if required

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 21
 0DJD]LQHGDWD 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD

22
0DJD]LQHGLUHFWRU\

2.3
707&B0$3[>\@ 7367&B033[>[\@
709
0DJD]LQH1R /RFDWLRQQXPEHU 7 LGHQWLILHU

Image 2-1
4W\0DJ 7RROGDWDLQJHQHUDO
,GHQWLILHU /RFDWLRQNLQG 7'7&B73[>\@
0DJ1R 0DJLGHQW 7\SH /RFDWLRQW\SH 71R 787&B73&[>\@
Fundamentals

6WDWH 71R ,GHQWLILHU

0DJ1R 0DJLGHQW
0DQDJ &RQVLGHUDGMORF\Q 'XSORQXPEHU
7RROVL]H 8VHUGDWDSHU
0DQDJ 6WDWH 0DJORFDWLRQW\SH WRRO
1XPEHURIORFDWLRQV 0DJ'HVFULSWLRQ 6WDWH
&XUUHQWORFDWLRQ 7\SHLQGH[ HJVSLQGOH 0RQLWRULQJW\SH
5HSODFHPHQWVHTXHQFH 07'7&B073&[>\@

&RPPXQLFDWLRQ 07GDWD
/RFDWLRQQXPEHU 8VHUGDWDSHU
0DJD]LQHFRQWUROEORFN 07'7&B073[>\@ PXOWLWRRO
7807&B0$3&[>\@ /RFDWLRQNLQG
70&7&B0$03[ /RFDWLRQW\SH ,GHQWLILHU
1XPEHURIORFDWLRQV
8VHUGDWDSHU 71R
7RROVL]H 07'7&B0733[>\]@
2.3 HMI/PLC - NCK data structure (OPI)

1RORDGLQJPDJD]LQH PDJD]LQH &RQVLGHUDGMORF\Q 6WDWH

6WDWH 0DJORFDWLRQW\SH
 07ORFDWLRQGDWD
1REXIIHU 0DJ'HVFULSWLRQ
0XOWLSOHDVVLJQPHQWV 7\SHLQGH[ HJVSLQGOH
1XPEHURIORFDWLRQV

Structure of magazine data and tool data

7307&B0'3[>\]@ 07837&B0733&[>\]@
7837&B033&B[>\]@
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ 07XVHU
'LVWDQFHVWLQWPDJ /RFDWLRQGDWD
8VHUGDWDSHU
ORFDWLRQ
'LVWDQFHQGLQWPDJ 3HUFXWWLQJHGJH
7RROGDWDGLUHFWRU\ 7RROFXWWLQJHGJHGDWD 767&B023[>\]@
$'
79 727&B'3[>\@
7RROOLIHFRXQW
HMI/PLC - NCK data structure (OPI)

,QWHUQDOFRPPXQLFDWLRQ ' SUHZDUQLQJ

*HRPHWU\FXWWLQJHGJH OLPLW
ZLWK+0, $GDSWHUGDWD
$VVLJQPHQWEXIIHU
ORFDWLRQVWRVSLQGOHV ...

7&B0/65>[\@ 7827&B023&[>\]@
'
*HRPHWU\FXWWLQJHGJH 8VHUGDWD
0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQKLHUDUFK\ PRQLWRULQJ
777&B037+>[\@ 78(7&B73&[>\]@
$VVLJQPHQWPDJD]LQH
72(726
ORFDWLRQRIWKHEXIIHU
/RFDWLRQW\SH ' 7&B(&37&B6&3
PDJD]LQHWRDVSLQGOH 8VHUGDWDFXWWLQJHGJH
KLHUDUFK\
IRUHDFKORFDWLRQ ... /RFDWLRQ
GHSHQGHQW
' 8VHUGDWDFXWWLQJHGJH RIIVHWVVHWWLQJXS
YDOXHZHDUYDOXH

Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3

Tool Management
 Fundamentals
2.3 HMI/PLC - NCK data structure (OPI)

Unchecked boxes mark the previous data of the tool management. Checked boxes show the
user data.
New data blocks are displayed as checked and grayed boxes.

TOA area
A TOA area constitutes and independent group in tool management. There is no link existing
to other TOA areas.
Up to 10 independent TOA areas may be created depending on the number of channels
available. Several channels can be assigned to one TOA area but one channel cannot be
assigned to more than one TOA area. A subset of magazines, buffer locations and loading
magazines can be assigned to one TOA area.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 23
Fundamentals
2.4 PLC – NCK interfaces

2.4 PLC – NCK interfaces

Overview
The heart of the SINUMERIK 840D sl tool management system is located on the NCK. The
PLC merely contains the interfaces for the machine-specific part.

3/& 1&.
'%

'%
3DUDPHWHUV
/RDGLQJ DVVLJQPHQW
XQORDGLQJVW EXIIHUHWF
0DFKLQH
'% GDWD
/RDGLQJ
XQORDGLQJVW
72GDWD
'%
%DVLF
6SLQGOH SURJUDP 7RRO
'% )% PDQDJHPHQW
6SLQGOH

'% 0DJD]LQH
GDWD
7XUUHW
'%

7XUUHW

)&
/RFWRROROG
70B75$16
/RFWRROQHZ
)&
70B',5
6HWSRLQWSRV 'LUHFWLRQ
'LUHFWLRQ
$FWXDOSRV 6HOHFWLRQ 'LVWDQFHWRJR

Image 2-2 Data structure and PLC - NCK interface

Tool Management
24 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Fundamentals
2.4 PLC – NCK interfaces

3& 3/& 1&.

1&9$5[\PGE 8VHU'%

7RROPDQDJH 1&9$5 $GGUHVVHVRI1&

PHQWYDULDEOHV VHOHFWRU YDULDEOHV
72GDWD
7RROPDQDJHPHQW
YDULDEOHV

)%

5HDG*(7
0DJD]LQH
1&YDULDEOH
GDWD

)%

:ULWH387
1&YDULDEOH
7RRO
PDQDJHPHQW
'% )%)%
7RRO
PDQDJH
PHQW3,
VHUYLFHV

Image 2-3 Extended interface for tool management between PLC and NCK

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 25
Fundamentals
2.5 Magazine configuration

2.5 Magazine configuration

Magazine configuration
In a configuring process, (HMI or NC program) one or several real (actual magazine to store
tools, NCK can manage several magazines), magazines can be combined on the HMI to form
a magazine configuration. All the magazines of one configuration can be operated
simultaneously in one channel. Several magazine configurations can be defined but only one
configuration can be active in one channel at one time.
Magazine and tool data are stored in the NC in the so-called TO area. The TO area can in turn
be sub-divided by machine data into individual TO units. It must further be defined by machine
data, which channel works or which channels work on which TO units. Only one magazine
configuration can be active at any one time per TO unit. If several channels are assigned to a
TO unit, then the magazine configuration applies for all assigned channels.

$FWLYDWH 0DFKLQH
+0,configuration
FRQI GDWD

&RPPLVVLRQLQJ +0, 1&722/0$1

72BQ &KDQQHOQ

N P 
...
  &KDQQHO
 72B

&KDQQHO
 72B

 &KDQQHO
0DJ
5HDO FRQI
PDJ

5HDOPDJD]LQHV PPDJD]LQHFRQI P72XQLWVRQH QFKDQQHOV

NPDJD]LQHV PDJD]LQHFRQI
SHU72BXQLW

Image 2-4 Assignment of magazines to channels

Tool Management
26 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Fundamentals
2.6 Access protection, protection levels

2.6 Access protection, protection levels

The access to programs, data and functions is protected via eight hierarchical levels according
to customer requirements. These are divided into
● Four password levels for Siemens, machine manufacturers and end users
● Four keyswitch positions for end users

Protec‐ Locked by: User

tion level
0 Password Siemens
1 Password Machine manufacturer: Development
2 Password Machine manufacturer: Commissioning engineer
3 Password End user: Service
4 Keyswitch, position 3 End user: Programmer, machine setter
5 Keyswitch, position 2 End user: Qualified operator, who does not program
6 Keyswitch, position 1 End user: Selected operator, who does not program
7 Keyswitch, position 0 End user: Semi-skilled operator

Examples of functions that can be disabled with SINUMERIK Operate:

● Loading
● Unloading
● Magazine list, tool list display
● Tool cabinet, tool catalog
● Loading the magazine configuration

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 27
Fundamentals
2.6 Access protection, protection levels

Tool Management
28 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Description of functions 3
3.1 Magazines

3.1.1 Buffer
A buffer involves the 2nd internal magazine. The magazine number is always 9998. The buffer
includes the spindle, tool holder, gripper, loader and transfer location. The locations are
numbered, just like a real magazine, ascending from 1-n. Every location has a location index.
Here, it is assigned as to which is the 1st spindle or the 1st gripper. Any numbering can be
used. However, transparency is improved if the locations of a location type (all spindles, all
grippers,...) are numbered in an ascending sequence. See also Section "Overview of magazine
data (Page 241)".
The NCK only makes a differentiation between spindles or toolholders and grippers. Other
"location types" such as loaders or the transfer location are mapped on the gripper.
Example: Assigning the locations in the buffer magazine

No. Name Type Index Assignment to Distances to

spindles magazine
1 Spindle_1 Spindle 1 0
2 Gripper_1 Gripper 1 0
3 Gripper_2 Gripper 2 0
4 Loader_1 Loader 3 0
5 Loader_2 Loader 4 0
6 Transfer_1 Transfer location 5 0

3.1.2 Loading magazine

The loading magazine is the 1st internal tool magazine and always has magazine number
9999. The loading magazine contains loading locations.
These are sub-divided into
● Loading points and
● Loading stations
Loading points and stations are provided for loading and unloading tools. The allocation of
locations is fixed, all other locations can be assigned freely. Location 1 in the loading magazine
is used for the fixed assignment.
Location 1 is reserved for loading/unloading in all spindles / tool holders, as well as to load
and replace manual tools (see Manual tools (adding tools during machining) (Page 94)). A
loading point is an open entry to the magazine where tools can be manually put into and taken
directly from the magazine.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 29
Description of functions
3.1 Magazines

A loading station is viewed as an "external magazine location" which a gripper, for example,
can access to transport a tool to the magazine during loading.
The difference between a loading point and a loading station is as follows:
When loading a tool at a loading/unloading point, the tool is automatically removed from this
location, wheres when unloading to an unload station, it remains at the loading or unloading
location - it must then be removed from there by the application (HMI, NC cycle or PLC).

3.1.3 Box-type and chain magazines

Fundamentals
Chain and box-type magazines do not as a rule have any additional buffer available for
transportation between magazine and spindle. These additional buffers can temporarily
contain tools.
The command is distributed in the PLC using the basic program. In this case, DB72 is used
as the user interface. There is a separate interface area for each spindle in the interface. A
new command from the NC is only then entered in the interface once the previous command
has been acknowledged with status values 1 to 7 via FC8/FC6.
1. The programming function T = identifier is implemented in the PLC in DB72. Bit "Prepare
tool" is set in the associated interface.
2. Programming function M06 is also implemented in DB72. In this instance, bit "Change tool"
is set in the activated interface. The bit "Prepare tool" from an earlier T command is not
reset here. If the bit "Prepare tool" shall no longer be set for the M06, then it is the task of
the user program to reset this bit as part of acknowledging the last T command.
3. Programming functions T and M06 in the same block set the "Prepare tool" and "Change
tool" bits simultaneously in the activated DB72 interface.
Exceptional cases which are mapped in the PLC identically to case 3 above are as follows:
● Initiation of a tool change after block search (last accumulated tool change for the active
tool)
● Initiation of a tool change for initialization blocks (reset and start mode), if this was set via
the machine data.
Note
Special cases, box-type and chain magazines
In these exceptional cases, the subroutine (macro, cycle) in which M06 is normally
programmed is not executed.

Tool Management
30 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.1 Magazines

Example for machine tools with chain and box-type magazines

*ULSSHU *ULSSHU

   

6SLQGOH
 
&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ
IRUVSLQGOH
 

0DJD]LQH
 

 

   
0DJ QR
0DJ EXIIHU
0DJ ORDGLQJVWDWLRQ /RDGLQJVWDWLRQ
6SLQGOH PDJORFDWLRQ 1R
*ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ
*ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ

Image 3-1 Machine tool with chain magazine

*ULSSHU

&KDQJH
SRVLWLRQ *ULSSHU
0DJD]LQH IRUVSLQGOH

       
6SLQGOH
   &KDQJH  

SRVLWLRQ
    *ULSSHU
IRUVSLQGOH  
*ULSSHU 0DJD]LQH
     
6SLQGOH PDJORFDWLRQ
    *ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ  
*ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ
    *ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ    
*ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ

0DJ QRPDJ QR

/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ 0DJ DOOEXIIHUV /RDGLQJVWDWLRQ
0DJ DOOORDGLQJVWDWLRQV 1R
1R

Image 3-2 Machine tool with chain and box-type magazine

The magazine zero point is defined by $TC_MDP2 (with value assignment of 0). The change
position (spindle) is normally assigned on this basis.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 31
Description of functions
3.1 Magazines

3.1.4 Circular magazine

Generally, turret magazines do not have any additional buffer with which tools can be
transported from the magazine to the spindle. The tools on turret magazines are not physically
transported into the spindle, but are moved into a defined position through rotation of the turret
so that machining can take place with one particular tool. The tool is only transported to the
spindle or holder in the software.
If the value 1 is also set for the turret in MD22550: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE, the
statement made for the chain and box-type magazines also applies here.
The programming command T = identifier initiates the tool change. T = location can be
programmed as an alternative. If T = location, no tool need actually be stored in the location.
The command is distributed in the PLC using the basic program. In this case, DB73 is shown
as the interface for the user (if TOOL_CHANGE_MODE is set to 0). There is a separate
interface area for each turret. The turret numbers are assigned successively in ascending
sequence according to magazine numbers during commissioning. The permissible magazine
range is 1 ... maximum number of real magazines. A new command from the NCK is only
entered in the interface when the previous command has been acknowledged via FC7
(alternatively also via FC8/FC6).

7XUUHW

/RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQW

6SLQGOH

/RDGLQJXQORDGLQJSRLQW

7XUUHW

Image 3-3 Double-slide turning machine with direct loading/unloading point in the turret

3.1.5 Other magazine types

In practice, there are other types of magazines in addition to the ones listed above. These are
e.g. disk-type, washer, pick-up, rack, cage magazines (and many more). Such types must be
mapped to the three types of magazines supported by the tool management.

Tool Management
32 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.1 Magazines

3.1.6 Wear group

Fundamentals
Locations in a magazine are linked to form an area referred to as the wear group. In this way,
locations of a magazine can be reserved for particular machining operations.
A wear group number is assigned to each of these locations and the magazine is thereby
divided into several different areas. Only tools from one of the areas are then used for a specific
machining operation.
The wear group number for each magazine location is defined via system variable
$TC_MPP5[m,p] (m: Magazine number, p: Location number).
Values from -32000 to +32000 are possible.
Value > 0:
The specified number is assigned to the location (e.g. $TC_MPP5[1,3] = 2 assigns the third
location of magazine 1 to wear group number 2).
Value = 0:
The location is not assigned to a wear group, threfore the magazine locations are generally
included in tool searches.
Values < 0:
The wear group whose number corresponds to the absolute value of this number is disabled
(e.g. $TC_MPP5[1,3] = - -2 disables wear group number 2 of the magazine with number 1).
This applies even if there is only one disabled location in the wear group.

Note
Wear groups are only available for real magazines. The definitions for $TC_MPP5 do not affect
the status of tools.
Up to eight wear groups per magazine are possible.

Activate wear group

System variable $TC_MAP9 defines which wear group (magazine area) is active. To change
the active wear group, the corresponding number is set in this system variable, thereby defining
which wear group will be used to start the machining operation.
The default setting is 0.
The wear group can also be set active internally by a tool change or by the user via NC
commands/OPI.

Disable wear group

If there is no longer any tool that is ready for use at the location of an active wear group, then
the system switches to the next wear group and the old wear group is disabled.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 33
Description of functions
3.1 Magazines

Machining is continued by activating the next group and searching for a suitable replacement
tool.
The wear group is also disabled if one of the locations has been disabled via system variable
$TC_MPP5 (negative value).

Activate (internally)
Bit 0 of system variable $TC_MAMP3 can be set to determine how internal activation of a wear
group will affect the status of the associated tools.
Value 0:
The tool status is not changed (preset).
Value 1:
When activated, one tool from each included tool group is set to "active". Tools already set
earlier as active are not reset.

Disable (internally)
Bit 1 of system variable $TC_MAMP3 can be set to determine how internal deactivation of a
wear group will affect the status of the associated tools.
Value 0:
The tool status is not changed (preset).
Value 1:
When a wear group is disabled all active tools are reset.

Note
For a tool search in the wear group, see Section "Tool search in wear group (Page 146)".

3.1.7 Background magazine

Background magazines are not directly supported by the tool management. However,
functions for background magazines can be activated by setting the system variable
selectively. System variable $TC_7 MAMP2, bit 7 can be used to set whether the tool search
begins in the magazine last used for tool replacement (bit 7 = 0) or whether the search is
carried out in the order defined by "Spindle to magazine" (bit 7 = 1).
Generally, this system variable is set when configuring the magazine. A change can be made
at any time via the part program or OPI.
The assignment of "spindle to magazine" is set via system variable $TC_MDP2[n,m]; the order
corresponds to the order in which this variable is written. This is also pre-assigned by the
magazine configuration.
Example for four magazines and one spindle:
$TC_MAMP2=385 (bits 0, 7 and 8 set).
$TC_MDP2[1,1]=0

Tool Management
34 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.1 Magazines

$TC_MDP2[2,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[3,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[4,1]=0
... this assigns the first buffer (spindle) to magazines 1 to 4; a tool search would therefore start
in magazine 1, followed by magazine 2, etc. up to magazine 4.
You can modify this search order by setting this system variable as follows:
1. Deleting the assignment
$TC_MDP2[1,0]=9999
$TC_MDP2[2,0]=9999
$TC_MDP2[3,0]=9999
$TC_MDP2[4,0]=9999
2. Re-assigning in a different order
$TC_MDP2[2,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[3,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[4,1]=0
$TC_MDP2[1,1]=0
... resulting in the search order of magazine 2, 3, 4, 1
The trigger criterion for changing the order of assignment can be the information in the change
cycle that the new tool was found in another magazine. This can be read in the program via
$A_TOOLMN[t], whereby "t" is the internal T number of the tool. The new tool is obtained via
GETSELT. You must remember the previous foreground magazine.

3.1.8 Consider adjacent location

Fundamentals
Consider adjacent location is used for oversized tools. When searching for empty locations
(loading, relocating, changing) bits 4 to 11 are evaluated in the magazine location parameter
$TC_MPP4 (half location occupied/reserved). As this function requires additional memory
space, the default setting is 0.
To activate the function, set the following:
$MN_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 3 = 1
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 3 = 1
In addition, for every magazine location that is to be considered, parameter $TC_MPP3 = 1
must be set.
Two functions are available when the consider adjacent location is active.

Overlap disabled magazine locations

The function is activated by setting the magazine location parameter $TC_MPP4 bit 13 = 1. If
a location is disabled, it can now be "overlapped" by an oversized tool. This means the consider
adjacent location ignores the disabled state of a magazine location.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 35
Description of functions
3.1 Magazines

Example:
Chain magazine, location 12 is disabled (e.g. the tool acceptance is defective). An oversized
tool (size 2/2/1/1) is loaded or is positioned in the spindle. The tool can now be stored at location
11 or 13.
The following can be selected as default setting:
As soon as a location is disabled, "Overlapping active" is automatically set or reset as soon
as the location is enabled.
This setting is made in machine data $MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK, bit 4 = 1.

Overlapping magazine edge locations

This function is activated by setting the magazine description parameter $TC_MAP3, bits 8 to
11.
The following definition applies:
(Definition: smallest magazine location number is at the top left, the largest magazine location
number is at the bottom right).
Bit 8 Left edge location must not be covered
Bit 9 Right edge location must not be covered
Bit 10 Top edge location must not be covered
Bit 11 Bottom edge location must not be covered
The default setting for these bits is 0.
Example:
Box-type magazine
Due to the mechanical conditions, oversized tools can cover the edge at the top and on the
right.
The following must be set:
$TC_MAP3[magazine no.], bit 8 = 1
$TC_MAP3[magazine no.], bit 11 = 1

Tool Management
36 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

3.2.1 Brief description

Overview
With the TMMG function (magazine management) and when the "multitools" function (MT) is
activated, so-called multitools (mini turrets) with a number of tools can be loaded into a
magazine and unloaded from a magazine like a tool.

Note
This function is supported in SINUMERIK Operate only.

Note
The following functions are not implemented in the current version:
● Manual tool (a multitool cannot be a manual tool)
● Magazine location adapter (a multitool can be located on an adapter, but adapters are not
permitted on multitool locations)

The T selection in the part program also detects and checks the tools of a multitool when
searching for a tool.
A multitool has a definable number of MT locations, where tools can be located. The
geometrical arrangement of the MT locations can either be defined using the MT location
number, an angle or via a distance.
The commands to select a tool and to change a tool sent to the PLC have additional information
regarding the distance reference point or the machining position:
● MT location number of the tool in the multitool, or
● Angle, or
● Distance of the tool within the multitool
This type of distance coding can be defined for each MT. The PLC then initiates the
corresponding machine handling, e.g. moving a positioning axis.
A new acknowledgement block is available in the basic PLC program, the FC6. The block
corresponds to the already known FC8. It only has one additional parameter
"MultitoolPosition". The FC6 includes the complete FC8 functionality, so that the FC6 can
completely replace the FC8. Analogous to DB71, DB72 and DB73, data blocks DB1071,
DB1072 and DB1073 are available as user interface. If, for example, a multitool is changed,
then the complete information of the "carrier tool" is contained in DB72, and all the information
about the individual tool in DB1072.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 37
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW

/RFDWLRQ
 

/RFDWLRQ


 


/RFDWLRQQXPEHUGHILQLWLRQIRUWKH07ORFDWLRQGLVWDQFH
07ORFDWLRQ 07ORFDWLRQ 07ORFDWLRQ 

Image 3-4 Location number

The figure shows the distance coding of the locations in the multitool, i.e. the MT location
number of the particular MT location itself. This distance coding is especially suitable for
machines that operate with similar multitool geometries, e.g. only mini turrets.

'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW 'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW

G
˞
G
 

G

 ˞
:=ರ$ರ :=ರ$ರ :=ರ%ರ
GXSOR GXSOR GXSOR
 
  
˞

$QJOHGHILQLWLRQ /HQJWKGHILQLWLRQ
IRUWKH07ORFDWLRQGLVWDQFH IRUWKH07ORFDWLRQGLVWDQFH
˞  ˞ DQJOHWRORFDWLRQ G G DQJOHWRORFDWLRQ

Image 3-5 Angle and length

Typical geometries can be seen in this figure. Angle α and the lengths are output on the PLC.
This means, for example, that multitools can be used on a machine and handled by the PLC,
which have different geometries (MT locations are not symmetrically arranged: Although
multitools are inherently symmetrical, different multitools have different distances between the
MT locations).

Tool Management
38 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

The distance reference point or the machining position is defined machine-specifically. The
assignment of the MT location numbers to the multitool locations must correspond to the
machine construction.
A multitool can contain tools from different tool groups, i.e. the names can be different.
Nothing changes when programming a tool change in the part program. Formally, the
commands are identical to existing commands; i.e. the tool change is programmed using T
and/or M06.
For the function T = turret location number, it is also necessary to define which tool of the turret
magazine is meant when the location contains more than one tool.

Note
Presently, SINUMERIK Operate supports the distance coding "angle" and "location number".

0DJD]LQH

0DJD]LQH 0DJD]LQH 0DJD]LQH

ORFDWLRQ ORFDWLRQ ORFDWLRQ

0XOWLWRRO 0DJD]LQH
0XOWLWRRO ORFDWLRQDGDSWHU 0XOWLWRRO
0XOWLWRRO
ORFDWLRQ ORFDWLRQ
ORFDWLRQ 0XOWLWRRO

7RRO 7RRO
0XOWLWRRO
7RRO ORFDWLRQ
7RRO
7RRO
7RRO
0DJD]LQH7&B0$3 7RRO
0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQ7&B0$33
7RRO7&B737&B'3
0XOWLWRRO7&B073
0XOWLWRROORFDWLRQ7&B0733

Image 3-6 Multitool shown in the magazine

The following machine data and language commands are available for the "multitool" function:
Machine data
● $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 10
Activation of the MT function
● $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL
Number of defined MT (limit values: 0-1500; max. 600 per channel)
● $MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
Max. number of tool locations per MT (limit values: 2-64)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 39
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Language commands / system parameters

● $TC_MTP, $TC_MTPP
Data definition for MT and MT location
● $TC_MTPC, $TC_MTPPC
MT OEM data for tool management
● $TC_MTPCS, $TC_MTPPCS
MT OEM data for Siemens
● NEWMT, DELMT
Creating, deleting
● POSMT
Positioning MT on tool holder MT location number
● $P_TMNOIS
What type does the number refer to: Magazine, tool or MT
● $P_MTOOLN, $P_MTOOLMT
Number of multitools, MT number of the i-th MT
● $P_MTOOLNT, $P_MTOOLT
Number of tools in the multitool, T number of the i-th tool
● $A_TOOLMTN, $A_TOOLMTLN
Location of the tool in the multitool, MT number / MT location number
● Synchronized action access in the tool management PLC command
$AC_TC_MTTN, $AC_TC_MTLTN, $AC_TC_MTNLOC, $AC_TC_TOOLIS,
$AC_TC_MTDIST
NC commands
● RESETMON
Can reset the tool monitoring data of the tools in an MT to their setpoints
● GETT
Determines T no., MT no. for the name
● DELMLOWNER
Deletes the magazine owner location of the tool or MT
● MVTOOL
Moves tool or MT
● GETFREELOC
Searches for an empty location in the magazine for tool or MT, searches for an empty
location in the MT for tool

3.2.2 Programming

MT numbers
The multitool numbers originate from the same number space as the T numbers and the
magazine numbers.

Tool Management
40 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Numbers 1-32000 are permitted for the T and magazine numbers. This allows multitools to be
handled just like simple tools (T number at the magazine location, T number as parameter in
the OPI PI service to load and unload tools, etc.). In addition, in some instances MT numbers
can be handled just like magazine numbers.
Users can explicitly enter T or MT numbers in the NC programming, if they want to create a
tool or multitool by programming $TC_TPx or $TC_MTPx. Explicitly programmed MT numbers
must not collide with already defined T numbers or magazine numbers. The programming is
then aborted with an alarm. However, if users create a new tool with the language command
NEWT – or for multitools with NEWMT – then the NCK automatically allocates the T or MT
numbers. When automatically allocating an MT number, it is ensured that this is neither an
already defined tool nor an already defined magazine.
NC language commands or system parameters, which have a tool T number or magazine
number as parameter or index, and which are called using an MT number, generate an alarm
if the associated functionality for multitool is not explicitly defined.
The same number can be used for a tool and a magazine.
Example 1:
The magazine numbers 1, 2, 3, -, 5, -, -, - and the T numbers 1, -, 3, -, 5, 6, -, -, have already
been defined.
Then -, -, -, 4, -, -, 7, 8 are available for the MT numbers.
Example 2:
The magazine numbers 1, 2, 3, -, 5, -, -, - and the MT numbers -, -, -, 4, -, 6, 7, -, have already
been defined.
Then 1, 2, 3, -, 5, -, -, 8 are available for the T numbers.

MT names
Multitool names come from the same namespace as the tool names and magazine names.
Different multitools must have different names, i.e. a duplo number is not defined.
An MT name must not be the same as a tool name and not the same as a magazine name.
Hoever, a magazine name can be the same as a tool name.

3.2.3 $TC_MTP - multitool data

Overview
A multitool is a combination of several tools to form a unit. The following parameters allow a
multitool to be described so that it fits into the systemology of the tool magazine function.
All of the parameters in the following table have no physical units. The default access right is
"key-operated switch position 0" - for access operations from the NC program as well as for
access operations from the OPI. Access rights can be restricted using the REDEF command.
$TC_MTPx[y]
x: Parameters 1 …8, …PROTA

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 41
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

y: = Multitool number MT = 1 …32000

NCK identifier Description Format Pre-assigned limit values

$TC_MTPN The number of locations INT 2
is defined as delete com‐ 2-$MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
mand
$TC_MTP2 Identifiers STRIN MT number
G
$TC_MTP3 Size to the left in half lo‐ INT 1
cations (= towards a low‐ 1-7
er location number)
$TC_MTP4 Size to the right in half lo‐ INT 1
cations (= towards a 1-7
higher location number)
$TC_MTP5 Size upwards in half lo‐ INT 1
cations (= towards a low‐ 1-7
er location number)
$TC_MTP6 Size downwards in half INT 1
locations (= towards a 1-7
higher location number)
$TC_MTP7 Magazine location type INT 9999 (not defined)
0 - 32000
$TC_MTP8 State; bit-coded INT 0 (not enabled)
0 - "4000"
$TC_MTP_POS MT position. The follow‐ INT 0 (not defined)
ing applies: Position 1 is 0-$MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
defined as "location 1 in
the machining position"
$TC_MTP_KD Type of distance coding INT 0 (not defined)
1 (= location number)
2 (= length)
3 (= angle)
$TC_MTP_PROTA Name of the protection STRIN ""(= not defined)
zone or name of the file, G
which contains the de‐
scription of the protec‐
tion zone.

$TC_MTPN - number of MT locations

The multitool does not have a duplo number like the tool. The parameter $TC_MTPN contains
the number of locations, which the multitool offers to accept tools. In addition, by programming
$TC_MTPN[mtNr] = 0 the multitool is deleted. After MT locations have been generated, the
parameter can no longer be changed.
A multitool is similar to a chain magazine with regard to its locations, i.e. for tool search
strategies, empty location search strategies. Since the results depend on the type of magazine,
the displayed property is like that of a chain magazine.

Tool Management
42 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

$TC_MTP2 - MT name
Multitools can be assigned names, so that a multitool can be uniquely defined by its name or
by its number. The rules that apply when assigning names are the same as those that apply
to tool names. Multitool names must be different from tool names and magazine names within
a TO unit.

$TC_MTTP3 $TC_MTP6 - MT size

The size data of a multitool is essentially the same as the size data of a tool - and is used to
find an optimally suitable magazine location for the multitool when loading into the magazine
(empty location search) when consider adjacent location is active. The rules that apply when
changing the multitool size correspond to the rules that apply when changing the tool size.
The MT size of a multitool can be changed, as long as the MT is not assigned to an owner
location.

$TC_MTP7
The magazine location type of the multitool is essentially the same as the magazine location
type of a simple tool and is required for the empty location search, empty location check
(loading operations into the magazine, tool change). The permitted values and rules to change
data correspond to those that apply for the corresponding data in the tool. The value cannot
be changed if the multitool is loaded into the magazine.
For multitools, which are contained in the loading magazines or buffer magazines, and still do
not have an owner location (i.e. that are logically valid as unloaded – $A_MYMN=0,
$A_MYMLN=0), the magazine location type can be changed. The magazine location type of
a multitool can be changed, as long as the multitool is still not assigned to an owner location.

$TC_MTP8 - MT state
The state of a multitool corresponds to the state of an individual tool. The defined states are
the same as those of an individual tool as defined under $TC_TP.
The following additional definitions apply:

Bit Meaning Comment

0 Active Reserved
Multitools do not have the "active" state defined. Only tools contained in them can
assume the state.
1 enabled Equipped multitools have this state, so that a tool in them can be selected.
2 disabled Multitool can be disabled. Independent of the state of the contained tools, the
selection of these tools can be prevented. The PLC signal "ignore disabled state"
also ignores the disabled state of the multitool. The tool change command TCA
for a tool ignores the disabled state of the multitool.
3 measured Reserved
Multitools cannot be measured. Only tools contained in them can assume the
state.
4 Prewarning limit reached Reserved
Multitools cannot be monitored. Only tools contained in them can assume the
state.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 43
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Bit Meaning Comment

5 Is being changed Protect the multitool during tool selection from competing additional tool selection/
MT motion. This means that it is not possible to select a tool within the MT, as
long as this state is set due to the selection of a tool in the MT.
If the state is set, it is permitted to select another tool from the MT, if this selection
regarding the same toolholder is realized just like the selection, that had set the
state of the MT. In this case, there is no competing tool selection, but instead a
replacing one. If the state is set, then a tool in this MT also has this state set. The
state is reset again together with that of the tool. Bit 21 from $TC_TOOL_MAN‐
AGEMENT_MASK refers to the tool and the MT.
The state is reset at POWER ON.
6 Fixed-location-coded Multitools can be fixed-location-coded
7 was in use The state of multitools is defined the same as that of the tool. After unloading a
tool from the tool holder, the MT and the old tool are assigned the state.
8 Autom. return transport Regarding the tool transport, multitools behave just the same as basic tools.
$TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit15 also refers to this state.
9 ignore disabled The state is internally set and reset. The rules are essentially the same as the
rules for the tool.
10 MT is to be unloaded Multitools can be selected for unloading
11 MT is to be loaded Multitool can be selected for loading
12 Master tool Multitool can be selected as master tool
13 Reserved Reserved
14 Selected for 1:1 exchange Multitool is selected for the pending 1:1 exchange. The rules as for a tool apply
15 Manual tool The multitool is used as manual tool. The state is set and reset again for the MT
as part of the tool selection. The tool to be selected and its MT change state
synchronously. The tools not involved with the tool selection do not experience a
state change.
16 MT is disabled, if a tool in the If a tool contained in the MT has made the state transition to "disabled", then the
MT is disabled MT also assumes this state (bit 2). After a tool has made the state transition to
"not disabled", and then there is no longer any tool in the multitool that has the
"disabled" state, then the MT itself also loses the "disabled" state.
Loading/removing a disabled / enabled tool to the MT or from the MT can change
the MT state "disabled/enabled".
Example: Loading to a disabled tool corresponds to an MT state transition to
"disabled".

Note
Reserved or non-defined MT state bits cannot be written to. Writing to such a bit results in
Alarm 17050 "illegal value".

Tool Management
44 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Interdependencies between the tool and multitool states

Tools, which are loaded in the multitool, can influence the state of the multitool and for MT
transport operations, the MT can influence the tool status of the loaded tool.

Bit Meaning Comment

1 enabled Users allocate tools and multitools a status independent of one another. (Enabled
tools can be loaded into a multitool that has not been enabled. Tools that have
not been enabled can be loaded into an enabled MT.)
2 disabled Changing this state is initiated from the tool as part of the tool monitoring and the
command RESETMON . Examples 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b at the end of this table show
how the state of loaded tools can influence that of the multitool.
User-specific changes to the MT state are not transferred to the loaded tools.
5 Is being changed The state is set and reset again for the MT as part of the tool selection. The tool
to be selected and its MT change the state synchronously. The tools not involved
with the tool selection do not experience a state change.
The state is always reset at POWER ON.
6 Fixed-location-coded Tools loaded in the MT are implicitly fixed-location-coded, i.e. the state has no
significance for the tool in the MT. For the MT itself, the state is defined; however,
this has no influence on the loaded tools. If the tool state changes, this has no
effect on the state of the multitool.
7 was in use The state is automatically set as part of the tool change for the MT and the tool in
the MT involved in the change. Tools in the MT, not involved in the tool change,
do not change the state.
The user is responsible for the reset. If the last tool contained in the MT loses this
state, then the MT also loses this state. If the user deletes the multitool state, then
the states of all of the tools contained in it are also deleted.
If the user sets this MT state, it has no effect on the loaded tools in the MT.
8 Autom. return transport At the tool change, the state is automatically set and reset for the MT only, however
not for the tools contained in the MT.
9 ignore disabled The state is set and reset automatically. The state is set and reset for the tool to
be loaded and for the MT in which this tool is loaded. For the other tools not
involved in the change, the state remains unchanged.
10 MT is to be unloaded When unloading from the magazine, the MT and the its loaded tools lose this state.
If a tool that has this state set is removed from the MT, then the state in the tool
that has been removed is reset.
11 MT is to be loaded When loaded to a magazine location, the MT and the tools loaded in it lose this
state. If a tool that has this state set is loaded into an MT, then the tool state:
– is not changed, if the MT has the state set
– is reset, if the MT does not have this state set.
12 Master tool The user allocates the state. The tool state does not influence the MT – and vice
versa.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 45
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Bit Meaning Comment

14 selected for 1:1 exchange This state is not required for tools loaded in the MT. As part of the empty location
search, it is only automatically set for the MT and reset again at the end of the
command.
16 MT is disabled, if a tool in the See examples 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b at the end of this table.
MT is disabled Notice
If tools are in the MT at the time of the state change, then the following applies:
When the state is changed, the state of the loaded tools is checked and the MT
state "disabled" set or reset.
Notice
The loading/removing of a tool to the MT / from the MT results in the states of the
tools loaded to the MT being checked after the operation and the MT state "disa‐
bled" is set accordingly. See examples 4a, 4b.

Example 1a:
Bit 2 = 0 and bit 16 = 1
The MT has three tools that are not disabled and have been enabled. The MT itself is also not
disabled and has been enabled. Bit 16 is set to 1.
If the "disabled" state of any tool in this MT is set (either manually or automatically), then in
addition, the "disabled" state is set in the MT, although there are still two tools where the
"disabled" state has not been set (i.e. these tools can still be used).
Example 1b:
Bit 2 = 1 and bit 16 = 1
The MT has three tools that are disabled and have been enabled. The MT itself is also disabled
and has been enabled. Bit 16 = 1 is set.
If the "disabled" state of two of the three tools is deleted in the MT, then the "disabled" state
of the multitool itself remains unchanged. If, for the last tool with the "disabled" state, the
"disabled" state is deleted (either manually or automatically), then the "disabled" state is also
deleted in the MT.
Example 2a:
Bit 2 = 0 and bit 16 = 0
The MT has three tools that are not disabled and can be used. The MT itself is also not disabled
and has been enabled. Bit 16 = 0 is set.
If the "disabled" state of two of the three tools is set in the MT (either manually or automatically),
then the status value of bits 2 in the MT remain unchanged. This means that the last "not
disabled" tool of the multitool can still be loaded. The MT is only set into the "disabled" state
when this tool – as the last tool – also assumes the "disabled" state.
Example 2b:
Bit 2 = 1 and bit 16 = 0
The MT has three tools that are disabled and can be used. The MT itself is also disabled and
enabled. Bit 16 = 0 is set.
If the "disabled" state of a tool in the MT is deleted (either manually or automatically), then in
addition, the "disabled" state in the MT is also deleted, independent of the state of the other
tools in the MT.

Tool Management
46 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Bit 16 = 0 is advantageous, for example, if the MT only contains identical tools. All tools can
then be used until their relevant monitoring limit has been reached.
Bit 16 = 1 is advantageous, for example, if an MT is to be loaded and the tools it contains are
different and have to perform various machining operations. If one of these tools is now
disabled due to the monitoring function, then another MT must be loaded, which contains a
complete set of tools that are ready for use for this particular machining operation.
A graphic representation of the "disabled" state coupling is again shown in the following two
diagrams:

07VWDWH7&B073 7RROVWDWH7&B73

'LVDEOHG * 'LVDEOHG  *
1RWGLVDEOHG ) 1RWGLVDEOHG  )

) ) ) * ) )

) ) * * * )

) * * * * *
) ) ) * ) )

7&B073%LW 
5HFWDQJOHFRUUHVSRQGVWRPXOWLWRROFLUFOHLQUHFWDQJOHFRUUHVSRQGVWRWRRO

Image 3-7 Automatic state change of the multitool depending on the state of the loaded tools and bit 16 of $TC_MTP8

Example 3a:
Bit 16 = 0:
If in the figure above bit 16 is changed from 0 to 1 at the time when the state is the same as
shown in the fifth MT state figure from the left (MT with F), then the state of the MT changes
from F to G because at least one tool with the state G has been loaded after the bit value
change and therefore the MT also assumes the state G. When the bit value changes from 0
to 1, the figure changes to the following.
Example 4a:
Bit 16 = 0:
If in the third MT state figure from the left (MT with F), the tool with F is removed from the
multitool, the state of the MT changes from F to G because only two tools with the state G are
loaded after the tool removal and therefore the MT also assumes the state G.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 47
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

07VWDWH7&B073 07VWDWH7&B073

'LVDEOHG * 'LVDEOHG  *

1RWGLVDEOHG ) 1RWGLVDEOHG )

) ) ) * ) )

) ) * * * )

) * * * * *

) * * * * *

7&B073%LW 
5HFWDQJOHFRUUHVSRQGVWRPXOWLWRROFLUFOHLQUHFWDQJOHFRUUHVSRQGVWRWRRO

Image 3-8 Automatic state change of the multitool depending on the state of the loaded tools and bit
16 of $TC_MTP8

Example 4b:
Bit 16 = 1:
If in the second MT state figure from the left (MT with G), the tool with G is removed from the
multitool, the state of the MT changes from G to F because only two tools with the state F are
loaded after the tool removal and therefore the MT also assumes the state F.

$TC_MTP_POS - MT position
The position of the multitool is the MT location number of the location, which is in the machining
position, and which typically contains the machining (active) tool; see the next figure.
With the final acknowledgement (PLC status value = 1) of a tool change command for a tool
in the MT, the MT position is set to the value of the MT location number of the MT location,
which contains the tool that was loaded. The other PLC status values (e.g. status_105) do not
change the MT position value.
With the end acknowledgement (PLC status value = 1) of an MT positioning command
(POSMT, _N_POSMT), the MT position is set to the value of the programmed MT location
number. The other PLC status values are not permitted for the MT positioning command and
are rejected with Alarm 6405 "incorrect acknowledgement data".
With an asynchronous transfer control, the PLC can position the multitool.
If a command output to the PLC is not acknowledged with "end" (e.g. cancel, status_3), then
the MT position in the NCK is not updated (even if the positioning has already been
mechanically carried out).
The MT position of a multitool, which is not located in a toolholder, has no further significance.
The exception is programming T="magazine location number", which is typically used for
revolvers.

Tool Management
48 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW 'LVWDQFHUHIHUHQFHSRLQW

7&B073B326>@ 
7&B073B326>@ 

/RFDWLRQ /RFDWLRQ
 

/RFDWLRQ /RFDWLRQ
 

   

07SRVLWLRQ

Image 3-9 The location on the machining position determines the MT position

Example 1:
An MT is moved to the tool holder with a tool motion command (e.g. MVTOOL). The parameters
are set according to the current MT position.
With the final acknowledgement of the MT motion command, the PLC can inform the NCK
whether and how the position of the multitool is to be updated.
● The FC6 is parameterized with MultitoolLoc=0. NCK does not perform a position
synchronization, the mechanical position can differ from the data position.
● The FC6 is parameterized with MultitoolLoc=1 (valid MT location number). This means that
the NCK synchronizes the MT position with the acknowledged position.
If subsequently a tool change is programmed for a tool of this MT on the tool holder, a tool
change command is output to the PLC with which the MT positioning data is sent to the PLC.
With the final acknowledgement of the tool change, the MT position is updated to the value
that belongs to the tool that is to be loaded. The PLC must have performed the MT positioning
before the final acknowledgement is sent to the NCK. The PLC must not change the MT
position for the tool selection, tool change commands specified by the NCK in the
acknowledgement data. The attempt is rejected with alarm 6405 "Command has invalid PLC
acknowledgement parameter".
Example 2:
An MT is moved to the tool holder with a tool motion command (e.g. MVTOOL). As in example
1, the MT positioning/synchronization depends on the PLC application.
If subsequently a RESET is executed, then – when RESET is configured with "Activate tool
on the master tool holder" – a tool change command is output to the PLC with which the data
of the tool to be activated and the MT positioning data is sent to the PLC. With RESET, the
tool to be activated is specified in the NCK as the tool at the MT location displayed at the MT
position output to the PLC. This means that in this example, it depends on the PLC logic for
the tool motion on the master master tool holder, which tool is activated at RESET. If a different
tool is to be activated, this must be specified in the application , for example, by positioning
the MT appropriately first with the NC program command POSMT (or similar PI _N_POSMT
by the HMI or PLC). It is also possible to set the MT position in the NCK directly to the desired

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 49
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

value before the RESET (by programming parameter $TC_MTP8 or by writing the position via
the operator panel interface (by the HMI or PLC), or the PLC positions the multitool with an
asynchronous transfer).

$TC_MTP_KD - type of distance coding for the MT locations

The location distances (KindOfDistance) within the multitool can be defined in a variety of ways:

$TC_MTP_KD[y] = 1 The distance coding uses the MT location number. The location
number is automatically allocated when creating the MT locations.
$TC_MTPPL, $TC_MTPPA cannot be written except with the value
0.0.
$TC_MTP_KD[y] = 2 The distance coding is via length specifications. $TC_MTPPL can be
written, $TC_MTPPA cannot be written, except $TC_MTPPA[...]=0.0.
$TC_MTP_KD[y] = 3 The distance coding is via angle specifications. $TC_MTPPA can be
written, $TC_MTPPL cannot be written, except $TC_MTPPL[...]=0.0.
The type of distance coding can only be changed as long as no MT locations have been
created. Otherwise Alarm 6438 "Inconsistent data modification is not permitted" is generated.
Example:
If, for distance coding, the location number has been defined ($TC_MTP_KD[ y ] = 1), then
writing $TC_MTPPL, $TC_MTPPA with values other than 0.0 results in alarm 6464 "Command
cannot be programmed for the current multitool distance coding".
Example:
The multitool is defined. Although the number of MT locations has been defined, they have
still not been created.

$TC_MTP_KD[200] = 1 ;subsequently writing to $TC_MTPPL or $TC_MTPPA results in

;Alarm "Command cannot be programmed for the defined multitool
distance coding"
$TC_MTP_KD[300] = 2 ;subsequently writing to $TC_MTPPL is permitted.
;subsequently writing to $TC_MTPPA results in Alarm
;"Command cannot be programmed for the defined
;multitool distance coding"
The MT locations are now created, e.g. by writing to the system of parameters:

$TC_MTPPL[300, 1] = 30.0 ; all MT locations are implicitly created using the command
Then an attempt is made to change the distance type (that was previously defined using
$TC_MTP_KD[300] = 2):

$TC_MTPPL[300, 1] = 3 ;After the MT locations have been created, the type of

;distance coding must no longer be changed:
;Alarm "Inconsistent data change not permitted"

Tool Management
50 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

3.2.4 $TC_MTPP - Multitool location data

Overview
The default access right of the following parameters is "key switch position 0" (everyone has
access), for access operations from the NC program as well as for access operations from the
OPI. Access rights can be restricted using the REDEF command.
$TC_MTPPx[y, z]
x:= 2, 4, 6, 7, L, A (see table)
y: = multitool numer MT=1...32000
z: = n-th location in the multitool; 1,...$MN_MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
The x parameter numbers are based on the values of the magazine location parameters.
The x numbers of the parameters are based on the numbers of the $TC_MPP1,... magazine
location parameters.

NCK identifier Description Format Physical unit Pre-assigned

limit values
$TC_MTPP2 Multitool location type INT None 0 (=every tool fits the
(corresponds to the significance of the mag‐ location)
azine location type) 0 - 32000
$TC_MTPP4 MT location state INT None 0 (=every tool fits the
location)
0-3
$TC_MTPP6 T number of the tool contained INT None 0
0 - 32000
$TC_MTPP7 Reserved for magazine location data
$TC_MTPPL Distance to the reference location; "length" REAL Length 0
unit (L stands for length) [mm/inch] 0 - 1000
$TC_MTPPA Distance to the reference location; "angle" REAL Angle 0
unit (A stands for angle) [degrees] 0 - 360

Example:Transporting a multitool (loading into the magazine or onto the spindle)

"Multitool_2" has been created (T-no. 25), with six locations and distance coding "location".
The multitool is directly loaded onto the spindle, e.g. via the user interface. As a consequence
positioning is not involved.
The NCK generates a transport task (CMD1)
ID:00000/00000 ------ CMD:00001
NewTool: from M: 09999 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00025 TMMVTL-chan: 00000
isMultitool: 00001 MTPN: 00006 MT-Dist: 00000/0.00
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
The multitool is loaded just like an individual tool.
Additional information is contained in the command: Multitool, distance coding "location"

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 51
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

The user interface looks like this:

DB71 DBB0 00000001 Interface 1 active

DBBn 00000001 Loading
DBB(n+1) 10000000 Data available in the extended range, i.e.
it is a multitool

DBW(n+20) 0 Magazine no. (source)

DBW(n+22) 0 Location no. (source)
DBW(n+24) 9998 Magazine no. (target)
DBW(n+26) 1 Location no. (target)

DB1071 DBW(n+0) 1 Multitool, distance coding is "location"

....
All other data is "0" – there is no additional information from the NCK
There are now two options for acknowledging:
● The multitool position remains undetermined, i.e. the init blocks do not output a command
and no offset is selected. This option makes sense if the tool is loaded into the magazine
(the multitool position is not evaluated) or if the tool is loaded via the spindle. The multitool
must be positioned if a tool in the multitool is now to be brought into the machining position
(from a data perspective).
● The PLC specifies a position. This means that the NCK synchronizes to the acknowledged
position. An init block can activate the tool that is at this location.
FC6 can be parameterized as follows:

FC6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB71 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of the active interface
NewToolMag 9998 Target for the new tool: Magazine DB71.DBW(n+24) –
NewToolLoc 1 Target for the new tool: Location DB71.DBW(n+26)
OldToolMag 0 Source for the old tool: Magazine= "0"" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Source for the old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Operation completed
MultitoolLoc 0/x In case_1, "0" should be entered here. The multitool position remains undeter‐
mined, alternatively "-1".
In case_2, the multitool location, which is in the machining position, is entered
here.
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

Positioning a multitool
It is only possible to position a multitool, if

Tool Management
52 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

a) It is located on a tool holder

b) No offset is active. This means that none of the tools in this multitool may be active.
Positioning can be performed via the language command POSMT or the similar PI service
(POSMT). Positioning from the PLC via an asynchronous transfer is also possible.
The multitool loaded onto the spindle in the previous example is now positioned to location_5
using a part program.
N10 POSMT(state 5,1); position the multitool to tool holder_1 at position 5
NCK generates a command 1
ID:00001/00000 ------ CMD:00001
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00025 Spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 00001 MTPN: 00006 MT-Dist: 00005/5.00
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
New tool from spindle to spindle, i.e. it is already located on the spindle. T-No=25, spindle=1
Multitool with distance coding "location", number of locations of the multitool=6, target
position=5.
There is no old tool
The user interface looks like this:

DB71 DBB0 00000001 Interface 1 active

DBBn 00110000 Positioning the multitool / command comes
from the part program
DBB(n+1) 10000000 Data available in the extended range, i.e.
it is a multitool

DBW(n+20) 9998 Magazine no. (source)

DBW(n+22) 1 Location no. (source)
DBW(n+24) 9998 Magazine no. (target)
DBW(n+26) 1 Location no. (target)

DB1071 DBW(n+0) 1 Multitool, distance coding is "location"

DBW(n+2) 6 Number of locations of the multitool
DBD(n+4) 5.0 Location distance
DBW(n+8) 25 T no. of the multitool
DBW(n+10) 5 Location no. in the multitool
....
All other data is "0"
FC6 can be parameterized as follows:

FC6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB71 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of the active interface
NewToolMag 9998 Target for the new tool: Magazine DB71.DBW(n+24) –

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 53
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

NewToolLoc 1 Target for the new tool: Location DB71.DBW(n+26)

OldToolMag 0 Source for the old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Source for the old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Operation completed
MultitoolLoc 5 Multitool position - DB1071.DBW(n+10)
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

$TC_MTPP2 - MT location type

The location type of a tool must match the location type of the MT location. It is checked when
the multitool is loaded by writing parameter $TC_MTPP6.
The location type may only be changed when the new value is compatible with the value of
the location type of a loaded tool.
The default value is selected (each tool fits the MT location) in such a way that, when the
"Location type check" function is not required in the specific application for the tool loading
operation, the parameter does not have to be considered, and therefore the default setting is
already suitable.

$TC_MTPP4 - MT location state

The following location states have been defined (bit numbers and definition based on the state
of the magazine location; $TC_MPP4):
0 Disabled
1 Free to accept a tool

$TC_MTPP6 - T number of the loaded tool

The locations of the multitools can be loaded with tools. The loading can only be defined with
the aid of parameter $TC_MTPP6. In particular, loading involving the PLC has not been
defined. (The OPI PI service _N_TMMVTL and the NC language command MVTOOL are
exclusively for the loading/unloading of tools and multitools to and from magazines.) With
$TC_MTPP6[MT no., loc. no.] = T number, loading is performed. With $TC_MTPP6[MT no.,
loc. no.] = 0, a tool is removed from the multitool.
The multitool can contain tools with the same or different names. Each tool fits into each
location of a multitool with the default value of $TC_MTPP2. Generally, it is assumed that a
multitool is a mechanical entity whose correct loading is the sole responsibility of the user.
If $TC_MTP8, bit 16 = 1 has been set for the MT state, the following must be considered:
When loading a tool to an MT or removing a tool from an MT, the MT state "disabled"/"not
disabled" can change. The following applies: After loading, the states of the tools in the MT
determine whether and how the state of the multitool is changed automatically. After removing
a tool from the MT, the states of the remaining tools in the MT determine whether and how the
state of the multitool is changed automatically.
Formally, a tool can be loaded to an MT or removed from an MT at any time. It is the
responsibility of the user to ensure compliance with the application. For example, the user

Tool Management
54 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

must know what it means to remove an MT loaded on a tool holder from the tool holder, or to
remove and active tool from an MT.
A tool can be assigned either to a magazine or to an MT, but not to both at the same time.
Such an attempt is rejected with alarm 17260 "Illegal magazine location definition".
When loading a tool to an MT, the magazine location type of the tool and the MT location are
checked for compatibility if the MT location type does not have the value "Every tool fits the
location" (this is the default value). A tool can only be loaded to an MT location when the state
of the MT location is "Free".

Note
Multitools do not have a "Consider adjacent location" function for oversized tools. This means
that the tool size is not evaluated when loading a tool to an MT location.

$TC_MTPPL, $TC_MTPPA - Location distance

The distance between the tools in the multitool is defined alternatively with one of these
parameters. Which parameter is to be defined for the specific multitool is determined via the
MT parameter $TC_MTP_KD. The change rules for the date are those that have also been
defined for the multitool sizes. System parameters are not required for the distance coding
"MT location number". When creating the locations for an MT, the locations are automatically
assigned the numbers 1, 2, ...

3.2.5 Tool change with a tool from a multitool

Overview
Programming tool change commands remains unchanged. The programming
T= "Miller_150"
M06
D1
selects an appropriate tool from the tool group "Miller_150" and loads this. If, corresponding
to the tool search strategy, the tool found is located in a multitool, then this does not play a
role regarding activating the offset. The multitool is only involved when the data for the tool
change command has been compiled. The NCK determines the distance value (–>MT location
number or $TC_MTPPL/$TC_MTPPA) and adds this to the PLC command. For the tool change
itself, the multitool (with its individual tools) is moved from the magazine to the tool holder.
Using the data "Multitool location distance" that the NCK sends with the tool change data to
the PLC, the PLC program must appropriately initiate the machine so that the active tool within
the multitool can machine the workpiece.
The state of tools within the multitool in question, which are not involved in an MT motion
operation, tool selection, tool change, does not change.
If programmed
T="name"’ M06 D1

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 55
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

and the name is that of a multitool, then Alarm 6404 "Tool change not possible" is generated.

Tool change from a multitool to a tool holder - PLC request

Example 1:
A multitool with four locations is in magazine 1, location 10, and has the TNo = 23. Angle
distance coding has been selected for the multitool; i.e. $TC_MTP_KD[23] = 3
The setting is $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1, i.e. change with M06.
The data of the defined and loaded multitool looks like this:

$TC_MTPN[23]=4 Number of locations

$TC_MTP2[23]="Multitool_0" Identifiers
$TC_MTP3[23]=2 Number of half locations (right), i.e. the multitool is oversized
$TC_MTP4[23]=2 Number of half locations (left)
$TC_MTP5[23]=2 Number of half locations (top)
$TC_MTP6[23]=2 Number of half locations (bottom)
$TC_MTP7[23]=1 Location type
$TC_MTP8[23]=130 Tool status (enabled, was in use)
$TC_MTP_POS[23]=2 MT position (is not evaluated, if the tool is located in the
magazine)
$TC_MTP_KD[23]=3 Distance coding (3 = angle)
$TC_MTP_PROTA[23]="" Data for protection zone
$TC_MTPP2[23,1]=0 Location_1 - location type
$TC_MTPP4[23,1]=0 Location_1 - location state (occupied)
$TC_MTPP6[23,1]=1 Location_1 - equipped with T-No.1 ("Tool1")
$TC_MTPP7[23,1]=0 Location_1 - adapter No.
$TC_MTPPA[23,1]=0 Distance-angular value
$TC_MTPP2[23,2]=0 Location_2 ...
$TC_MTPP4[23,2]=0
$TC_MTPP6[23,2]=2 equipped with T-No.2 ("Tool2")
$TC_MTPP7[23,2]=0
$TC_MTPPA[23,2]=90
$TC_MTPP2[23,3]=0 Location_3 ...
$TC_MTPP4[23,3]=0
$TC_MTPP6[23,3]=3 equipped with T-No.3 ("Tool3")
$TC_MTPP7[23,3]=0
$TC_MTPPA[23,3]=180
$TC_MTPP2[23,4]=0 Location_4
$TC_MTPP4[23,4]=0
$TC_MTPP6[23,4]=4 equipped with T-No.4 ("Tool4")
$TC_MTPP7[23,4]=0
$TC_MTPPA[23,4]=270
The following is programmed:

Tool Management
56 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

T="Tool3" ; generates the PLC command = 2 with data

ID:00002/00000 --------- CMD:00002
NewTool: from M: 00001 P: 00010 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00023/00003 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 00003 MTPN: 00004 MT–Dist: 00003/180.00
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
change tool or multitool from location 1/10 to tool holder 9998/1
the T number 23 of the multitool is output,
as well as the T number 3 of the tool selected in the multitool
isMultitool = 3 tool is contained in the multitool; distance has the unit angle
MT dist = 3/180 - with this data the PLC must bring the tool with T-No. = 3 in multitool T-No.
= 23 to location=3 and distance180 degrees into the machining position
The PLC user interface looks like this:

DB72 DBB0 00000001 Interface 1 active

DBB(n+4) 00000100 Prepare change
DBB(n+5) 10000000 Data available in the extended range (DB
1072)
...
DBW(n+20) 1 Source new tool (magazine)
DBW(n+22) 10 Source new tool (location)
DBW(n+24) 0 Target old tool (magazine)
DBW(n+26) 0 Target old tool (location)
DBW(n+28) 1 New tool: Location type
DBW(n+30) 2 New tool: Size left
...
DBW(n+36) 2 New tool: Size bottom
DBW(n+38) 162 New tool: Status
(enabled, was in use, being changed)
DBW(n+40) 23 New tool: T number
Up until now, data in the usual form. "Carrier tool" is transported in which the preselected tool
is loaded. That it now involves a multitool is indicated by setting DB72.DBB(n+1), bit7
"extended data available (DB1072)".
The data of the specifically preselected tool ("Tool3") is now in DB1072.

DB1072 DBW(n+0) 3 Distance coding (angle)

DBW(n+2) 4 Number of locations in the multitool
DBD(n+4) 180 Location distance (3rd location, corre‐
sponds to 180 degrees)
DBW(n+8) 23 New tool: Multitool number
DBW(n+10) 3 New tool: Location number in the multitool
→ it is mandatory that the PLC acknowledg‐
es this position
DBW(n+12) 0 Old tool: Multitool number
DBW(n+14) 0 Old tool: Location number in the multitool

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 57
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

DBW(n+16) 1 New tool: Location type

DBW(n+18) 1 New tool: Size left
...
DBW(n+24) 1 New tool: Size bottom
DBW(n+26) 42 New tool: Status
DBW(n+28) 3 New tool: T number
DBW(n+30) 1 New tool: Tool holder or spindle number
DBW(n+32) 1 New tool: Original magazine (is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+44)
DBW(n+34) 10 New tool: Original location (is identical with
DB72.DBW(n+46)
The FC6 can be parameterized as follows.
Assumption: the prepared tool or multitool is not moved and remains in the magazine

FC6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 1 Source for new tool: Magazine DB72.DBW(n+20) –
NewToolLoc 10 Source for new tool: Location DB72.DBW(n+22)
OldToolMag 0 Target for old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Target for old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Exit operation
MultitoolLoc xx Multitool position - DB1072.DBW(n+10) The position, in this case (tool remains
in the magazine), has no significance. It can be acknowledged with the position
from DBW(n+10), but also with "0" or "-1".
This also applies to intermediate acknowledgements. The NCK only evaluates
the multitool position with the final acknowledgement of the change.
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

M06 ; generates the PLC command = 3 with the data

ID:00003/00002 ------ CMD:00003
NewTool: from M: 00001 P: 00010 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00023/00003 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 00003 MTPN: 00004 MT-dist: 00003/180.00
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
Just as in all previous versions, this means that the user interface is no longer updated. Only
DB72.DBB(n+0)bit1 "perform change" is set
The FC6 can be parameterized as follows.
Assumption: The prepared tool or multitool was already transported and here, in the example,
only the final acknowledgement is programmed.

FC 6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface

Tool Management
58 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface

NewToolMag 9998 Target for new tool: Magazine = buffer
NewToolLoc 10 Target for new tool: Location = spindle
OldToolMag 0 Target for old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Target for old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Exit operation
MultitoolLoc 3 Multitool position - DB1072.DBW(n+10) must now be forcibly acknowledged
with the correct position from DBW(n+10).
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

D2 ; activate the offset of the tool with T–No. = 3

A new tool is now programmed, which is located in the same multitool.
T="Tool1" ; generates the PLC command = 2 with data
ID:00004/00004 ------ CMD:00002
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00023/00001 spindle: 00001
myM: 00001 myP: 00010 isMultitool: 00003 MTPN: 00004 MT-dist: 00001/0.00
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
The tool/multitool is already on the tool holder. NCK detects the situation and sets 0/0––>0/0
to remove the old tool - there is no old tool to transport. The old tool is removed implicitly by
positioning the new tool (rigid coupling of the new and old tool in the multitool)
For the user interface this means
● No transport task for the "carrier tool".

DB72 DBB0 00000001 Interface 1 active

DBB(n+4) 00000100 Prepare change
DBB(n+5) 10000000 Data in the extended range (DB1072)
...
DBW(n+20) 9998 Source new tool (magazine)
DBW(n+22) 1 Source new tool (location)
DBW(n+24) 0 Target old tool (magazine)
DBW(n+26) 0 Target old tool (location)
DBW(n+28) 1 New tool: Location type
DBW(n+30) 2 New tool: Size left
...
DBW(n+36) 2 New tool: Size bottom
DBW(n+38) 162 New tool: Status (enabled, was in use, be‐
ing changed
DBW(n+40) 23 New tool: T number
● The relevant data for the new tool is located in DB1072.

DB1072 DBW(n+0) 3 Distance coding (angle)

DBW(n+2) 4 Number of locations in the multitool

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 59
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

DBD(n+4) 0 Location distance (1st location, corre‐

sponds to 0 degrees)
DBW(n+8) 23 New tool: Multitool number
DBW(n+10) 1 New tool: Location number in the multitool
→ it is mandatory that the PLC acknowledg‐
es this position
DBW(n+12) 23 Old tool: Multitool number
DBW(n+14) 3 Old tool: Location number in the multitool
DBW(n+16) 1 New tool: Location type
DBW(n+18) 1 New tool: Size left
...
DBW(n+24) 1 New tool: Size bottom
DBW(n+26) 42 New tool: Status
DBW(n+28) 1 New tool: T number
DBW(n+30) 1 New tool: Tool holder or spindle number
DBW(n+32) 1 New tool: Original magazine (is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+44)
DBW(n+34) 10 New tool: Original location (is identical with
DB72.DBW(n+46)
M06 ; generates the PLC command = 3 with the data
ID:00005/00005 ------ CMD:00003
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00023/00001 spindle: 00001
myM: 00001 myP: 00010 isMultitool: 00003 MTPN: 00004 MT-dist: 00001/0.00
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
The FC6 can be parameterized as follows.

FC6 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9998 Target for new tool: Magazine = buffer
NewToolLoc 1 Target for new tool: Location = spindle
OldToolMag 0 Target for old tool: Magazine = "0" there is no old tool
OldToolLoc 0 Target for old tool: Location= "0" there is no old tool
Status 1 Operation completed
MultitoolLoc 1 Multitool position - DB1072.DBW(n+10) must now be forcibly acknowledged
with the correct position from DBW(n+10)
Ready Feedback from FC6
Error Feedback from FC6

D1 ; activate the offset of the tool with T-No. = 17

Tool Management
60 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Tx - Tx programmed: Configuration of the tool selection

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 11 makes it possible to adjust the behavior when
repeatedly programming Tx – Tx. The setting is valid, just as before for the tool to be selected,
however also for the MC itself.
Example:
The following has been set: Tool selection with T, tool change with M code. The following is
programmed:
T="Tool5"
T="Tool5"
The second tool preparation command is a "superfluous" command, which as default setting
does not result in a command being output to the PLC. If "Tool5" is a tool belonging to a
multitool, then with the command, generally
a) a transport task of the MT "from the magazine to the tool holder" is generated, and
b) a positioning command of the MT location with the programmed tool.
If "Tool5" is in an MT, then two basic situations can exist for the MT:
1 the MT is already located on the tool holder
1.1 the programmed tool has already been positioned
1.2 the programmed tool is a different tool than the tool that was positioned
2 the MT is still not located on the tool holder
For case 1.1, the data for a) "MT from tool holder to tool holder"
b) "Position to the already positioned location of the tool "Tool5""
For case 1.2, the data for a) "MT from tool holder to tool holder"
b) "Position to the location of the tool that has still not been positioned "Tool5""
For case 2, the data for a) "MT from magazine to tool holder"
b) "Position to the location of the tool "Tool5""
The general criterion as to whether the second program command is a "superfluous" command
is whether the generated command data for the PLC is identical to that of the first command.
The second command is then not output to the PLC.
This command output can be forced using the bit value 1 of bit 11 from
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 61
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Tool change command canceled before the final acknowledgement

If, within the scope of a tool change, the MT has already been mechanically loaded, but the
MT has not been positioned, and the operation is interrupted in this state (fault, RESET,
EMERGENCY STOP, power off, power failure...), then before continuing, the PLC must ensure
that the previously pending MT positioning is carried out. The PLC must then make sure that
the NCK is informed about the MT change (e.g. using an asynchronous transfer with
acknowledgement status 4 or 5. In so doing, the NCK synchronizes the MT position with the
command data from the PLC). With an asynchronous transfer, the PLC can also communicate
the MT position to the NCK.

Note
Init blocks for START and/or RESET
Especially if init blocks for START and/or RESET are generated via MD settings, with the
property "activate the tool on the tool holder", and the tool on the tool holder is an MT, then
the PLC must ensure that the MT is correctly positioned on the tool holder before the NCK
makes the correction selection (i.e. before the RESET command is sent to the NCK, the MT
must have been positioned)

T0 - tool deselection and return transport of the multitool into the magazine
T0 deselects the tool and loads the associated MT back into the magazine.
Continuation of the example of the previous section:
T0 ; generates the PLC command = 2 with the data
ID:00005/00004 –––––– CMD:00002
NewTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000 TNo: 00000/0000 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 0 MTPN: 0 MT-dist: 0/0.0
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00001 P: 00010
This means, as usual, a T0 is output at the PLC user interface. The "tool carrier" must be
removed from the tool holder. It does not make any difference as to whether it involves an
individual tool or a multitool. DB72.DBB(n+1), bit 7 is not set, as there is no relevant data.
M06 ; generates the PLC command = 3 with the data
ID:00006/00005 ------ CMD:00003
NewTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000 TNo: 00000 spindle: 00001
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00001 P: 00010
If a tool from this multitool that has just been exchanged is again selected/loaded, then the
multitool is again loaded onto the tool holder.
It is not possible to program a T0 with the meaning to deselect the active tool, and at the same
time to keep the MT on the tool holder. T0 M06 D0 means, that after successful execution
- the correction is deselected
- there is no active tool
- there is no tool or MT on the tool holder.

Tool Management
62 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

PLC acknowledgement status 2 and 7

The PLC acknowledgement status numbers 2 and 7 refer to the tool within the multitool. This
means that the tool is rejected, not the multitool. If the newly selected tool is in another multitool,
then the transport task data for the multitool as well as for the newly selected tool contained
in it, are newly determined and output to the PLC. The following apply:
Status=2:
The tool cannot be made available The NCK locks this tool and tries to repeat the tool
preparation with another tool. This status is permissible only in conjunction with a tool change.
Status=7:
Similar to status 2 – with the property that a tool is not disabled (i.e. the same tool can be
selected again).

Tool change with "T=magazine location number" programming ("T=location")

With a multitool, there are three variants of T=location programming:
1. Specification of multitool location and magazine location, e.g. N100 MTL=2 T4
2. With MD20274 $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT
The magazine location is programmed, e.g. T4
The tool at the multitool location specified in the machine data is selected.
3. Via the current multitool position
The magazine location is programmed, e.g. T6
The tool at the multitool location specified in the multitool parameter $TC_MTP_POS is
selected.
In these three options, variant 1 has the highest priority and variant 3 the lowest.
The following examples illustrate this.

Example 1:
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0 applies (tool change only with the T command, i.e. the T
programming results in the output of command number 4 to the PLC).
Multitool with distance coding, location number, $TC_MTP_KD[500]=1, is in turret 1, location
4 and has the MT no. = 500; $TC_MPP6[1, 4] = 500. The MT position is
$TC_MTP_POS[500]=2.
The tool at magazine location 1/1 is loaded onto tool holder 9998/1. The MT on magazine
location 4 has 3 locations.
The following tools are loaded in the multitool:
"tool_1": $TC_MTPP6[500, 1] =11 MT distance $TC_MTPPA[500, 1] = 1
"tool_2": $TC_MTPP6[500, 1] =22 MT distance $TC_MTPPA[500, 2] = 2
– $TC_MTPP6[500, 1] =0 MT distance $TC_MTPPA[500, 3] = 3
There is no tool at location 3 of the multitool. $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT=0 applies.
Tool selection and tool change are programmed with T. The "T=magazine location number"
function is used.
The following command is then programmed:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 63
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

;MT-Position $TC_MTP_POS[500]=2

T4 ;MT position $TC_MTP_POS[500] = 2

;at magazine location 4, in the multitool loaded there, select the tool,
;which is loaded at MT location 2 of the multitool and load the MT - if it is not disabled
- and
;activate the tool.
;If the tool at MT location 2 of the multitool is disabled, then a search is made for
;another matching tool with the name "tool_2", which under certain circumstances –
;depending on the tool –;search strategy, tool equipping –is at some location ;of an‐
other multitool ;or which is contained as individual tool on another
;turret location.
The resulting command to the PLC is as follows:
T4 programming with the result "Multitool 500 is at the programmed magazine location and at
the MT location selected (via the MT position), there is tool "tool_2" with the T no.=22" - supplies
the following (essential) data to the PLC:
ID:00000/00000 –––––– CMD:00004
NewTool: from M: 00001 P: 00004 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00500/00022 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 1 MTPN: 3 MT dist: 2/2.0
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00001 P: 00001

No tool on MT location
For "T=magazine location" and "No tool on the magazine location", it is defined that a regular
tool change command to the PLC is output with the special property "T number of the new tool
= 0".
Similarly for "T=magazine location" and
"An MT is on the magazine location" and
"No tool is on the selected MT location",
it is defined that a regular tool change command to the PLC is output with the special property
a) MT is in the magazine
T number of the tool that is to be moved on the tool holder is the MT number of the MT that is
on the magazine location and the T number of the new tool in the MT = 0.
With the information of the PLC command, the PLC can decide what is to be done in this
situation: Either position the MT on the empty MT location or issue an alarm "There is no tool
on the MT location".

Example 2:
If $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT =3 applies, this results in example 1 – the multitool
position is 2 ($TC_MTP_POS[500]=2), there is no tool on MT location 3 – that the programming
of
T4
has the same effect as if T0 were programmed (a new tool is not available, but the request to
dispose of the old tool is still issued):

Tool Management
64 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

ID:00000/00000 –––––– CMD:00004

NewTool: from M: 00001 P: 00004 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00500/00000 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 1 MTPN: 3 MT dist: 3/3.0
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00001 P: 00001
b) MT is on the tool holder
T number of the tool that is to be moved on the tool holder is the MT number of the MT that is
already on the tool holder (the transport request "From → to" for the MT is "From tool holder →
tool holder") and the
T number of the new tool in the MT = 0.
With the information of the PLC command, the PLC can decide what is to be done in this
situation: Either position the MT on the empty MT location or issue an alarm "There is no tool
on the MT location".

Example 3:
The preconditions are the same as in example 2 with the condition that the MT from location
4 is already on the tool holder. The programming of
T4
has the same effect as if T0 were programmed (a new tool is not available, but the request for
the offset deselection is still issued; the old tool transport data is 0/0 → 0/0) the MT remains on
the tool holder:
ID:00000/00000 –––––– CMD:00004
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00500/00000 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 1 MTPN: 3 MT dist: 3/3.0
OldTool: from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000

Tool change with "T=magazine location number MTL=MT location" programming

As an alternative to the programming described in the section above, the MT location can be
programmed with MTL=p in the multitool (p=location number).
The following applies for the programming:
● MTL is non-modal.
● MTL must be programmed in the NC block before the T command.
● The programmed value for MTL must correspond to an existing location number in the
multitool to be selected. Otherwise, an alarm is output.
MD $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT can be used to define the MT location number which
is used when MTL is not programmed. The MTL programming replaces the default defined
with $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 65
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Example 4:
If $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT =3 applies, this results in example 2 of the section above
– the multitool position is 2 ($TC_MTP_POS[500]=2), there is no tool on MT location 3 – that
the programming of

MTL=1 T4 ;affects precisely T4 in this block,

;which is programmed subsequently in the block.
The value of $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT=3 and the current MT position 2 are ignored
as MTL is explicitly programmed. This selects "tool_1" with the T number 11 and the command
to the PLC is:
ID:00000/00000 –––––– CMD:00004
NewTool: from M: 00001 P: 00004 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00500/00011 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 1 MTPN: 3 MT-dist: 1/1.0
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00001 P: 00001

Example 5:
If $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT =3 applies, this results in example 2 of the section above
– the multitool position is 2 ($TC_MTP_POS[500]=2), there is no tool on MT location 3 – that
the programming of

MTL=1 ;does not affect following block T4 because this is non-modal

...
T4 ;the setting of the MD takes effect
The programmed value MTL=1 remains ineffective and the value of
$MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT=3 takes effect. There is no tool on MT location 3 and
therefore the command to the PLC is:
ID:00000/00000 –––––– CMD:00004
NewTool: from M: 00001 P: 00004 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00500/00000 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 1 MTPN: 3 MT-dist: 3/3.0
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00001 P: 00001

Example 6:
If $MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT =0 applies, this results in example 2 of the section above
– the multitool position is 2 ($TC_MTP_POS[500]=2), there is no tool on MT location 3 – that
the programming of

MTL=1 ;does not affect following block T4 because this is non-modal

...
T4 ;the setting of the MD takes effect - that is now MT position=2
The programmed value MTL=1 remains ineffective and the value of
$MC_MULTITOOLLOC_DEFAULT=0 takes effect, i.e. the value of the MT position=2. The tool
with Tno.=22 is on MT location 2 and therefore the command to the PLC is:
ID:00000/00000 –––––– CMD:00004

Tool Management
66 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

NewTool: from M: 00001 P: 00004 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00500/00022 spindle: 00001
isMultitool: 1 MTPN: 3 MT-dist: 2/2.0
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00001 P: 00001

$C_MTL - transfer of the MTL_value to the replacement cycle

The programmed value for MTL can be read in an existing replacement cycle for T with
$C_MTL.

$C_MTL_PROG - if MTL has been programmed

If MTL has been programmed in the NC block, then this can be determined in an existing
replacement cycle for T with $C_MTL_PROG. $C_MTL_PROG==1 means that MTL has been
programmed. The programmed value can be queried with $C_MTL.

Example:
The multitool function and the function T=location have been configured.
N10 MTL=3 T=8
Then the replacement cycle contains T code of the type for the command:
N140 IF $C_T_PROG == 1
N142 IF $C_MTL_PROG == 1
N144 MTL=$C_MTL T[$C_TE]=$C_T
N146 ELSE
N148 T[$C_TE]=$C_T
N150 ENDIF
N152 ENDIF

Load/move multitool on tool holder and init block

If a multitool is loaded onto a tool holder other than through a tool change (loading operation,
movement command) and for the init block handling (if it is appropriately configured), the active
tool must be subsequently determined, then the following applies:
● If necessary: After loading/moving, set the MT position so that the requested tool can be
activated – or so that the MT position matches the mechanical MT position
● Always issue a tool change command to the PLC which contains the MT position of the
tool to be activated.
● Take the MT which is located on the master tool holder.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 67
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

● Take the tool which is at the MT location with MT location number = "MT position" (=
$TC_MTP_POS), and select it.
● Activate the D offset of this tool with the lowest D number.
Irrespective of the value of bit 12 (bit value==1 corresponds to ’H1000’) of the MD
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, a command is output to the PLC if the activated tool
is not on the MT location which was output last for this tool holder or was contained in the
acknowledged tool change command.
Note
The MT position of the multitool on the tool holder must be synchronized to the mechanical
position of the multitool on the machine. If the MT position when loading does not already
match the MT loading position, then under certain circumstances the PLC can initiate this
synchronization with an asynchronous transfer before the RESET command to the NCK
(that generates the init block).

Example
The init block generation is activated ($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 14 (bit
value==1 corresponds to ’H4000’)).
The part program is exited. The MT remains on the tool holder. The last tool change in the part
program was performed with regard to MT position = 3. The PLC acknowledged the MT tool
change command with MT position = 3.
The init block generated with the operator panel RESET determines the MT on the tool holder,
the tool on the MT location with the number of the MT position. The compensation of the
smallest D number is activated.
Positioning is now performed on a different location with the OPI PI _N_POSMT_. Whereby,
a tool command with the number = 1 (move/position) is output to the PLC and acknowledged
accordingly. The MT now has a different position than at the time of the previous end of the
program. With the operator panel reset, the tool on this MT location is determined and the
compensation activated accordingly. There is no tool change command output to the PLC.
Only the data of the MT position is now changed (e.g. by a write command with
$TC_MTP_POS). Machine and NCK data are now asynchronous. With the operator panel
reset, the tool on this MT location is determined and the compensation activated accordingly.
A tool change command is output to the PLC irrespective of the setting of bit 12 of
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. After correct positioning, the machine and the NCK data
are synchronous again.

Not possible to move the tool from or to the MT location

A tool cannot be transported to or from a multitool location. The PI service as well as the
language command or asynchronous transfer are rejected with an error.
The multitool is considered to be an entity in its own right that is manually equipped, and which
is loaded, unloaded or transported as a whole (complete entity). Movement of tools in the
multitool have not been realized.

Tool Management
68 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

Tool change - tool search

The tool search strategies are described in Section "Prepare a tool change (Page 72)". They
are essentially also applied to the multitool.

NCK identifier Description Format Preassignment

$TC_MAMP" Type of search strategy INT 0
$TC_MAP10 Bit 0 - 7 tool search strategy

Regarding tools in the multitool, the individual tool search strategies behave as follows:
Bit 0 = 1: Select the "active" tool.
If there is more than one suitable tool in the multitool with the "active" state, then the first
checked tool of these tools is selected.
Bit 1 = 1: Select the tool that can be reached over the shortest distance.
Within the multitool there is no "shortest distance" search. With shortest distance, the "shortest
distance within the magazine" is always meant. It does not make any difference whether a tool
or a multitool is at the particular magazine location.
Bit 2 = 1: Select the "active" tool. If there is no active tool available, then select the replacement
tool with the lowest number contained in $TC_TP10.
If there is more than one suitable tool in the multitool with the "active" state, then the first
checked tool of these tools is selected.
Bit 3 = 1: Lowest actual value (residual value) of the monitoring functions.
If there is more than one suitable tool with "lowest actual value" in the multitool, then the first
checked tool of these tools is selected.
Bit 4 = 1: Highest actual value (residual value ) of the monitoring functions.
If there is more than one suitable tool with "highest actual value" in the multitool, then the first
checked tool of these tools is selected.

Note
Further, the tool search is tool-oriented, i.e. the tool of a tool group is checked as to whether
it can be used corresponding to the actual configuration and search strategy.

The MT with suitable tool is already on the tool holder.

If an MT with a tool suitable for the programmed tool change command is already on the
programmed tool holder, then – irrespective of the defined tool search strategy – this tool is
selected or loaded.
Example:
The MT with number = 22 is on the tool holder / spindle with number = 1. The tool with T no.
= 7 is active and is disabled. This tool is loaded to MT location = 1. A tool with the same name
"Tool_1" and the T no. = 8 is on MT location = 2. The tool change command with the tool name
of the tool that is disabled now selects the tool with T no. = 8:
Extract from NC program:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 69
Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

...
N600 T="Tool_1" M06 ; T no. = 7 is loaded
... ; tool is disabled (e.g. because of tool monitoring)
N700 T="Tool_1" M06 ; T no. = 8 is loaded
PLC data output (from the diagnostics file):
ID:00005/00004 N:N600 CMD:00005
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00022/00007 spindle: 00001
myM: 00002 myP: 00005
isMultitool: 00003 MTPN: 00003 MT-dist: 00001/28.10
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
ID:00005/00005 –––––– ACK:00005 St: 00001
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 MTPOS: 00001
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
ID:00006/00005 N:N700 CMD:00005
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00022/00008 spindle: 00001
myM: 00002 myP: 00005
isMultitool: 00003 MTPN: 00003 MT-dist: 00002/30.10
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
ID:00006/00006 –––––– ACK:00005 St: 00001
NewTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001 MTPOS: 00002
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
The MT itself remains at its location (from–>to addresses are 9998/1 –> 9998/1. Only a new
MT position must be assumed (MTPos value 1 –> 2)

Wear group and multitool

All tools within a multitool belong to the wear group of the multitool itself. The locations within
a multitool have the "wear group" property.

Manual tool and multitool

The manual tool function is also available for multitools. As far as this function is concerned,
the MT itself is the manual tool and not the programmed tool. If a tool is programmed which is
in an MT, but this MT is not loaded, then the MT is treated just like a manual tool.
Example:
The name of the multitool is "MT1", the name of the tool - programmed for tool holder 1 - is
"Tool4" with duplo number 5.
The following is programmed
T="Tool4" M06 D1.
This is then followed by the request to load with alarm 17212 "Load manual tool "Tool4", duplo
no. 5 to spindle / tool holder 1".
Manual tools (adding tools during machining) (Page 94)
T0 M06 D0
then correspondingly generates alarm 17214 "Unload manual tool "Tool4" from spindle /tool
holder 1"

Tool Management
70 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.2 Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)

and correspondingly requests that the manual tool (that is an MT or is located in an MT) is
again removed from the tool holder.

Suppressing alarms 17212, 17214, 17215, 17216

The manual tool change request alarms can be suppressed using bit 16 in MD
$MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2. Then, using the tool change command data, the PLC
must correctly load and remove the manual tool.

Empty location search strategy - "replace old tool by new tool" and multitool
Just like tools, for an empty location search, multitools can use the search strategy - "replace
old tool by new tool" (1:1 exchange). The MT has the necessary defined data required for this
purpose - such as location type, tool size.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 71
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

3.3.1 Prepare a tool change

Fundamentals
The tool change type is set using machine data 22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE.
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0
No separate T preparation, change with the T command.
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
Separate T preparation, the change is performed with M06 or the M function, which is set in
machine data $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE.
This setting setting is independent of the magazine type. This means that also for a turret, T
and M06 can be programmed just the same as for a chain magazine only with a T command.

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0
T="Tool identifier" ;Tool preparation and tool change with an NC command (= within
an NC block)
;NCK sends a command to the PLC

If an error is detected during tool preparation, then machining is stopped when the block T =
identifier is read-in.
After correction and NC Start, the block with T = identifier is interpreted again and program
processing is continued.

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1
● Within an NC block

T="Tool identifier" M06 ;Tool preparation and tool change from this programming
results in a command to the PLC

Program tool preparation and tool change in one block (T= "Tool identifier" M06), corresponds
to setting TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0.
● Distributed over two NC blocks

T="Tool identifier" ;Tool preparation

;NCK sends a command to the PLC
M06 ;Tool change (the number of the M code can be set)
;NCK sends a command to the PLC

Tool preparation and tool change are typically programmed in different blocks. Two commands
are transferred to the PLC.

Tool Management
72 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

An alarm is triggered if an error occurs in T="tool identifier". If the MD22562

TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE is set accordingly, the alarm is delayed until the associated
tool change command M06 is interpreted in the program sequence. Only then is the alarm
output. The operator can make corrections in this block.

Note
Offset selection or deselection is automatically made with the tool change command. In so
doing, machine data MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT is evaluated.

Empty spindle
Program commands T0 and M06 remove the tool from the spindle and return it to the magazine.
The spindle is then empty.

Possible problems when programming T/M06

$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0; tool change with T address
The part program is executed through to the block T = "identifier". The following problems can
occur and are handled as follows:
● The tool data record is in the NCK but not assigned to a magazine location. The tool must
be reloaded mechanically, if necessary, e.g. directly onto the spindle. The assignment of
the tool to the magazine location/the spindle takes place, e.g. with the function "Overstore";
$TC_MPP6[m,p] = T no., or by the HMI operation "Load (onto spindle)".
● The tool data record is not in the NCK: Set up data record in the NCK, e.g. by HMI operation.
● Programming error in part program: Correct NC block with error in the part program.
● Alarm 22067:
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified tool group does not contain a "ready
to use" replacement tool which could be loaded. The tool monitoring function may have set
all potentially suitable tools to the "disabled" status.
The Start pushbutton is pressed once the operation has been completed. The NC block T="tool
identifier" is interpreted again and program processing is continued provided operator
intervention was correct. If not, the alarm will be generated again.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 73
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

3.3.2 General tool change sequence

Overview

3/&XVHU
1&. 3/&*3

3DUWSURJUDPFRPPDQG
7 5HI1&.GHWHUPLQHV
3URFHVVDODUP
ORFDWLRQVRIWKHUHOHYDQW
WRROV
'LVWULEXWLRQLQ2%DIWHU &RPPDQGLQ'%
FKHFNLQJZKHWKHULQWHUIDFHLVIUHH &RQWURORIFKDQQHO
VLJQDOVHJUHDGLQGLVDEOH
F\FOH 2%ZDLW

7UDQVPLVVLRQRIF\FOLF
VLJQDOVDQGWUDQVSRUW $FWLRQVIRUSUHSDUDWLRQ
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQWIRU7 HJPDJD]LQHV

)&
6WDWXV
)&
6WDWXV
3URFHVVDODUP 3URFHVVDODUP
3URJUDPFRPPDQG0 7ULJJHUDFWLRQVIRU
'LVWULEXWLRQLQ2%LI'%LQWHUIDFHIUHH SUHSDUDWLRQ

Transport
acknowledgement M06
F\FOH

)&
$VRIKHUHPRWLRQEORFNV 6WDWXV
ZLWKDFWLYHFXWWLQJHGJHV
FDQEHWUDYHUVHG )&
6WDWXV &KDQJHH[HFXWHG

Image 3-10 Preparing and changing a tool

1&. 3/&*3 3/&XVHU

&RPPDQGLQ'%
3URFHVVDODUP 3URFHVVDODUP 7ULJJHUDFWLRQVIRUFKDQJH
3URJUDPFRPPDQG SRVVLEOHLQIOXHQFLQJRI
7 5HI7 ORFDWLRQ 'LVWULEXWLRQLQ2%LI'%LQWHUIDFHIUHH FKDQQHOVLJQDOVHJ
UHDGLQGLVDEOH
7UDQVSRUW
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW7
F\FOH

0RWLRQEORFNVZLWKDFWLYHWRRO
)&
HGJHFDQEHWUDYHUVHGIURP $FNQRZOHGJHPHQWRI
WKLVSRLQW FKDQJHH[HFXWHG

Image 3-11 Tool changing with T command

Tool Management
74 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The prompt for changing the tool is issued by the part program via T command or M command.
1. The tool-management function in NCK searches in accordance with the tool search strategy
for a tool suitable for use (preparation) and, at the same time, searches for an empty location
for the tool to be exchanged.
2. The determined data is provided in DB72/73. The user program must react by making a
new tool available.
3. If machine data MD22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE is set to 1, with the "M06
command" in the part program, the PLC executes the tool change and signals the end of
the change operation.
If the machine data is set to 0, then by programming T, the tool is loaded. In both cases,
the PLC has the option of applying its own tool change strategy. It can choose its own empty
location for storing the old tool.
Note
The tool change is an NCK-internal operation that is executed as an interaction with the
PLC. The HMI only has the task of displaying data and facilitating data input.

Spindle and tool holder

Tool management can also be used for machines that have no spindle (e.g. punch presses or
turrets). In this case the term "spindle" is replaced by "tool holder";
This is defined in MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. If MD > 0, then the
spindle numbers $TC_MPP5 are interpreted as tool holder numbers.

Fixed location coding

If fixed location coding is selected for a tool, the tool will always be returned to the same location
when it is replaced.

Variable location coding

Tools defined with variable location coding can be returned to any location for the appropriate
tool size and location type in the magazine.

Automatic tool return to real magazine

1. An automatic tool return is initiated by the TM only if the tool is transported via several
stations (status 105) after a T preparation command from the PLC and the T preparation
command is finally acknowledged positively with status 1.
The return of a preselected tool from the buffer can be suppressed by setting MD20310:
TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 15 = 1.
2. If a tool change is interrupted because the control is switched off but the tool is already
located in a buffer location (gripper), the next tool change must either return the tool in the
buffer to the spindle or to the real magazine.
3. If several tools are located in the buffer the spindle tool is considered first. If there is no tool
on the spindle, the order for return is in accordance with system variable $TC_MLSR.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 75
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Example for the time sequence of a tool change

The following example shows a typical cut-to-cut sequence of operations for a tool change
with a tool changer and a fixed absolute tool change point on a milling machine.
Machining program

N970 G0 X = Y = Z ;Retraction from the contour

N980 T1 ;Tool preselection
N990 T_CHANGE ;Subprogram call without parameters
N1000 G90 G0 X= Y= Z= M3 S1000 ;Continue machining

Subprogram for the tool change

PROC W_WECHSEL
N10 SPOSA= S0 ;Spindle positioning
N20 G75 FP=2 X1=0 Y1=0 Z1=0; ;Approach tool change point
N30 M06 ;Change tool
N40 M17

Tool Management
76 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

1 1

FXUUHQWORFDWLRQQXPEHU 1 1 1

,6)HHGGLVDEOH 

,60RWLRQFRPPDQG D[LV 
,6([DFWVWRSILQH D[LV

,6([DFWVWRSFRDUVH D[LV 

3/&1HZWRROORDGHG


,65HDGLQHQDEOH 
E\0
,6([DFWVWRSILQH VSLQGOH


3RVLWLRQLQJPRGHDFWLYH


6SLQGOHVSHHGLQUSP
0
7LPH
722/72722/7,0(

&8772&877,0(

W W W W W

Image 3-12 Chronological sequence of tool change

t1 axes stationary, spindle rotating, start of the tool change cycle in N10
t2 Traverse axis with G75 in N20 to tool change point
t3 Spindle reaches programmed position from block N10
t4 Axes reach exact stop coarse from N20; N30 now starts:
M06 removes the previous tool from the spindle and loads and clamps the new tool.
t5 Tool changer swivels back to original position.
Then, in N1000 of the calling main program,
● the new tool offset can be selected,
● the axes can be returned to the contour, or
● the spindle can be accelerated.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 77
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

3.3.3 Monitoring the maximum speed of a tool

If the maximum permissible speed for a tool is exceeded, or the rotary acceleration, e.g. of
large tools, then this represents a danger for man and machine.
The appropriate limit values can be set for each tool via the following system variables:
● Speed limit value: $TC_TP_MAX_VELO[<internal T number>]
● Rotary acceleration limit value: $TC_TP_MAX_ACC[<internal T number>]
This limits the speed and/or the rotary acceleration of the spindle into which the tool is loaded.
The dynamic response limitation is active for the following spindle functions:
● Spindle control mode
● Tapping with G331/G332
● Synchronous following spindle
● Spindle positioning mode
● constant cutting rate (G96, G961, G962)
● constant peripheral grinding speed
● Manual traversing of the spindle in JOG mode

Note
The function is only available when magazine management is active.

Displaying tool parameters on the user interface

In order that the tool parameters $TC_TP_MAX_VELO (speed limit value) and
$TC_TP_MAX_ACC (rotary acceleration limit value) are displayed on the user interface (read/
write), they must be configured accordingly. A detailed description can be found in:

References
● SINUMERIK 840D sl: Commissioning Manual, Base Software and Operating Software;
Section "SINUMERIK Operate (IM9)" → "Tool management" → "Configuring the user
interface" → "Configuring tool lists" ( → "Identifiers of the tool parameters")
● SINUMERIK 828D: Commissioning Manual; Section "SINUMERIK Operate" → "Tool
management" → "Configuring the user interface" → "Configuring tool lists" ( → "Identifiers of
the tool parameters")

The spindle is the tool holder

If the spindle number is also the number of the tool holder
($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0) (this is typical for milling machines), then
the following applies:
The extension when programming the tool change also refers to the spindle whose dynamics
should be limited.

Tool Management
78 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Example: Extension = 3
T3="Miller_10" M3=6 S3=4000
A tool with the identifier "Miller_10" is loaded onto spindle S3. The speed of spindle S3 is limited
by the tool that is located on it.

Note
If an extension has not been programmed, then the tool change - as well as the programmed
speed - refers to the actual master spindle.

The tool holder is not a spindle

If the tool holder is rigid and the tool holder number is not a spindle
($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0) (this is typical for lathes), then there is no
assignment to a spindle.
However, for driven tools, it is necessary to assign the tool holder to a spindle. This is realized
using the magazine location parameter $TC_MPP_SP[buffermagazine No., location No.]. It is
only possible to change this parameter if there is no tool at this buffer magazine location.
If this assignment is not made, then the dynamics are not monitored and are not limited. As a
consequence, for example, it is not possible to limit the dynamics of the spindle of a lathe with
the fixed turning tool.

Example
Tools on tool holder 2 are driven by spindle 5:
(Buffer magazine no. = 9998, arbitrary location no. therein)
$TC_MPP5[9998,location no.]=2
$TC_MPP_SP[9998,location no.]=5
Programming:
"T2="Drill_8" M2=6 S5=4000.
A tool with the identifier "Drill_8" is changed to tool holder 2. The speed of spindle S5 is now
limited by the tool in tool holder 2.

Note
If an extension has not been programmed (e.g. T="Drill" S=4000), then the tool change refers
to the actual master tool holder and the programmed speed on the actual master spindle.

Activation of the limiting when the tool is changed

The dynamic response limitation by the tool on the spindle is only active if the tool is on the
spindle as far as the NC data is concerned. To do this, the PLC acknowledgements are
evaluated.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 79
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

When the change has taken place on the spindle or the tool holder, the NC/PLC interface
signal "Tool with dynamic response limit active" (DB31, ...DBX85.0) is set.

Note
The new NC/PLC interface signal "Tool with dynamic response limit active" (DB31, ...DBX85.0)
displays that a tool with dynamic response limitation is in the spindle. The assignment state of
the spindles can be checked, especially if all tools have a maximum tool speed, which under
certain circumstances is very high so that there is no effective limiting.

Example: Tool change:

Assumptions:
● The tool with the internal T number = 6 with parameterized dynamic response limitation is
in the spindle (old tool, AWZ).
● The tool with the internal T number = 8 with parameterized dynamic response limitation,
"Miller" tool group is loaded into the spindle (new tool, NWZ).

Step No. NC program NC → PLC PLC → NC

1 N100 T1="Miller --- ---
2 --- CMD=2 (tool preparation) ---
NWZ T no=8: Mag./mag.loc.1→ Sp1
AWZ T no=6: Sp1 → Mag./mag.loc.
2
3 --- --- CMD=2, status=1
NWZ T no=8: Mag./mag.loc.1 → Mag./mag.loc.1
AWZ T no=6: Sp1 → Sp1
4 N101 M1=6 --- ---
5 --- CMD=3 (tool change) ---
NWZ T no=8: Mag./mag.loc.1→ Sp1
AWZ T no=6: Sp1 → Mag./mag.loc.
2
6 --- --- CMD=3, status=105
NWZ T no=8: Mag./mag.loc.1 → Mag./mag.loc.1
AWZ T no=6: Sp1 → Mag./mag.loc.2

Tool Management
80 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Step No. NC program NC → PLC PLC → NC

7 --- --- CMD=3, status=105
NWZ T no=8: Mag./mag.loc.1→ Sp1
AWZ T no=6: Mag./mag.loc.2 → Mag./mag.loc.2
8 --- --- CMD=3, status=1
NWZ T no=8: Sp1 → Sp1
AWZ T no=6: Mag./mag.loc.2 → Mag./mag.loc.2

CMD: PLC command

NWZ: New tool
AWZ: Old tool
Mag.: Magazine
Loc.: Location
Sp: Spindle
Up to step 6, the limits of the old tool are active.
In step 6, the PLC acknowledges the NC that the old tool was taken from spindle 1; this means
that there are no limits imposed by the tool.
In step 7, the PLC acknowledges the NC that the new tool has been loaded to spindle 1, i.e.
the limits of the new tool are active.
In step 8, the tool change is formally completed; no tool is moved.

Behavior when special events occur

Warm restart or abort of tool movements

The dynamic response limitation of a spindle by a tool depends on the tool, which, from the
perspective of the NC machine data, is in the particular spindle. If required, the data in the NC
should be aligned with the actual assignment of the spindles. This should be observed for a
warm restart or if tool movements are aborted.

Channel interchange
When the channel is interchanged, the spindle keeps the dynamic limits.

Note
The channel into which the spindle is changed, must work with the same TO unit.

Diagnostics

Determining the cause of the limitation

The cause of a limitation can be determined using the following system variables:
● Limitation of the spindle speed by the current tool in the spindle:
$AC_SMAXVELO_INFO[<n>] == 17, where n = spindle number
● Limitation of the spindle rotary acceleration by the current tool in the spindle:
$AC_SMAXVELO_INFO[<n>] == 12, where n = spindle number

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 81
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Maximum values
The maximum values can be read via the following system variables:
● Speed: $AC_SMAXVELO[<n>]
● Rotary acceleration: $AC_SMAXACCEL_IDX[<n>]
n = spindle number

NC/PLC interface signals

The signal is set irrespective of whether the speed or the acceleration of the spindle is limited
by the current tool:
DB31, ... DBX85.0 == 1 (tool with dynamic response limitation)

Commissioning

Preconditions
● The "Tool monitoring for maximum speed/acceleration" option must be set.
● The tool is loaded into the spindle after setting the speed/acceleration limitation.
Note
A change of the speed limitation in TC_TP_MAX_VELO[<T number>] is not effective if the
tool is already in the spindle / tool holder.

● One TO unit can be assigned to several channels (MD $MC_TOA_UNIT). The spindle
number must also be unique across these channels and not only in the channels in which
it is configured for axis interchange. This is realized using the magazine location data
– $TC_MPP5[<buffer magazine no>., <location no.>] if the MD
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0.
– $TC_MPP_SP[<buffer magazine no>., <location no.>] if the MD
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0.

Note
The application itself must ensure that a spindle interchange in another channel is also
correspondingly taken into account for a tool change.
The PLC can check the synchronization of the tool assignment of the spindles with the data
management of the NC. Tools with a maximum tool speed set the PLC user interface signal
"Tool with dynamic limiting active". This signal can be compared with the assignment
sensors of the spindle.

Parameterization
● Speed limit value: $TC_TP_MAX_VELO[<internal T number>] = <value>, with <value> > 0
● Rotary acceleration limit value: $TC_TP_MAX_ACC[<internal T number>] = <value>, with
<value> > 0

Tool Management
82 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Note
The set values of $TC_TP_MAX_VELO and $TC_TP_MAX_ACC only take effect at the next
loading of the tool into the spindle / tool holder.

Data backup
After importing a data backup with tool data, from the data perspective, tools can be on spindles
or tool holders. The dynamic limit is correspondingly active. It is the task of the PLC user
program to adapt the actual assignment of the spindles to the NC data
Program example

Program code Comment

N10 $TC_TP[10]="Miller" ;T10 = "Miller"
N20 $TC_TP_MAX_VELO[10]=3500 ;Speed limitation from T10: 3500 rpm
...
N100 SETMS(1) ;Spindle 1 = master spindle
N110 M5 ;Spindle stop
N120 T="Miller" M6 ;Tool with T10 is loaded into spindle 1 ⇒
;DB31, ... .DBX85.0 = 1
N125 $AC_SMAXVELO[1]=3000 ;Spindle speed limitation: 3000 rpm
N130 S5000 M3 ;M3: 5000 rpm but limited to 3000 rpm

3.3.4 Selecting a tool and a cutting edge

Precondition

Note
The T number and the M function are no longer transferred to the PLC as an auxiliary function
if tool management is activated.
Numbers are also valid tool names, e.g. "3" instead of T = "3" can be programmed more simply
than T3.
There must be a tool with the T number as the identifier available when working with the T
number.
Example: If you want to call a tool using T3, the tool must have the name "3". A tool CANNOT
be called with the internal T number managed by NCK only.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 83
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Select/deselect tool offset for Reset

The following machine data can be used to control the behavior for RESET:
● MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 14
● MD20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME
● MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
● MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
● MD20132 SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE
You can determine whether to:
● deselect the active tool
● keep the active tool selected or
● set a particular tool (according to MD20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME).
If, in terms of its data, a new tool is selected that is not yet on the master spindle or the master
tool holder (or main spindle, main tool holder), then a tool change is executed for a RESET or
the end of the program. With this type of tool change (in a similar manner to block searches),
the PLC is not capable of influencing the selection of the tool.

Select a tool at start of program

The machine data
● MD20310: TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK bit 14
● MD20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME
● MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
● MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
can be set to define whether:
● the tool on the main spindle or the main tool holder is selected again or remains selected
● or a particular tool is selected (according to MD20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME)
If a new tool is selected which in the data is not yet specified as being on the spindle, a tool
change is performed when the program is started. For this type of tool change the PLC cannot
influence the selection of the tool, just as for block search.

Tool rejection by the PLC

For a block search, selection on reset or program start as well as the setting "PrepSelect",
then the tool is selected during preprocessing. In this case, the PLC is no longer allowed to
reject the tool.

Note
If bit 4 of the machine data MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK is set, then the
PLC usually has the possibility to again request preparation for a tool change, yet this time
with different parameters, i.e. to reject the tool.

Tool Management
84 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Communication between PLC and tool management

The communication between PLC and NCK during a tool change is via the VDI interface. Tool
change is triggered by the tool management in the NCK. The tool management outputs
commands to the PLC which acknowledges them either positively or negatively depending on
the situation. The PLC also has the possibility of independently (non-synchronously)
transferring commands to the NCK, e.g. communicating the magazine position, transport of a
tool, etc.

3.3.5 Predecoding (preprocessing) and block execution (main run)

Sequence
The cutting edge geometry cannot be calculated until the tool management knows the tool that
is actually to be used. Only the identifier is stated in the part program for tool change. Generally,
the tool with the status "active" is then used. But if this is disabled, then one of the other twin
tools, i.e. the replacement tool, is selected instead. The precoding delays selection of the new
offsets until it is clear which tool is to be used. Only then can precalculation of the blocks be
restarted.
Tool change must have been completed before the path can be traversed with the tool offset
of the new tool.
The block is split if the preprocessing run detects that a cutting edge of a new tool has been
selected for the first time and tool preparation has been initiated, but not yet completed.
The following synchronization points exist between predecoding and block execution:
Example:
Programmed NC block:
N1 D1 M06 Txx X100 Y100
Sequential blocks:
N1 Txx M06 end of block
N2 D1 X100 Y100

1. Interpreter detects an offset selection (D number)

2. It determines that a tool change was previously programmed which has not yet resulted in selec‐
tion of a tool.
3. Interpreter carries out "block splitting".
4. Output of block N1:
Block 1 receives a request from the execution blocks to output their collective blocks, and also if
programmed, M06, T numbers, ...
5. Output of block N2:
Block 2 receives the rest, in particular all travel information and any D numbers if programmed.
6. Tool management stops execution of the block during preprocessing until it is clear which tool is
to be used.
7. After receiving the tool preparation acknowledgement, execution of block 2 is continued, or first
the new T number is entered in the block and is used to calculate the contour again.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 85
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Tool change at the main spindle or master tool holder

The main run waits in synchronism with tool change block for transport acknowledgement.
1. Main run waits in synchronism with tool change block for end of acknowledgement (if bit 5
or bit 6 of MD20310 $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK is set), or
2. After a tool change in the main run, the NCK automatically synchronizes with the end of
the tool change in the block in which a cutting edge of the new tool was selected for the
first time.
Note
The transport acknowledgement is an internal acknowledgement of an NCK command. It
indicates to the NCK that the output command was accepted. When a new command is
output to the PLC, the NCK waits for the acknowledgement of the previous command.

Tool already in spindle

If the programmed tool is already in the spindle, by default no task is sent to the PLC. (The
response can be defined by the MD setting.)

Tool change at the secondary spindle or secondary tool holder

1. Main run does not wait. There is no synchronization.
2. Main run waits in synchronism with tool change block for transport acknowledgement.
3. Main run waits in synchronism with tool change block for end of acknowledgement.

Tool change preparation in a main spindle

1. In the main run, the tool management decides which tool is to be used. Until then, the
preprocessor waits at the point in the program at which the compensation values of the
new tool are to be considered for the first time.
2. The PLC can also decide which tool is to be used. In this case, the PLC can reject the
recommended tool with a negative acknowledgement. If rejected by the PLC, the NCK
selects a new, different tool (only if MD20300 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 4
= 1, see also FC8/FC6-description).
3. Even if the function "GETSELT(...,x)" is programmed, the preprocessor again has to wait
until a decision has been made as to which tool is to be used.

Tool Management
86 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Prepare to change tool in a secondary spindle

1. The main run does not wait. There is no synchronization
Note
During a synchronization operation where the new offset is used or allowed for by the
preprocessor, "block splitting" must be performed. This ensures that a preprogrammed tool
change T or M06 is actually performed and not collected in run blocks.
Unlike the STOPRE command, the preprocessor does not necessarily wait until all blocks
have been processed, but only waits if tool selection has not taken place by the appropriate
time. The appropriate time is when programming new offsets after tool change or when
programming GETSELT.

3.3.6 Traverse axes while tool is being changed

After the tool change command M06 the axes can continue travel without having to wait for
the tool change acknowledgement and, e.g., execute traversing blocks without tool offset.
Travel only stops in a block with an offset selected (D No.) until the PLC signals that a tool
change has been completed.
Precondition: MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT= 0 or = -2
Example: Traversing blocks between tool change and cutting edge selection

N10 T="Drill18" ;Tool change preparation

N15 M06 ;Tool change
N20 D0 ;Offset deselection
N25 G00 X100 Z200 ;Traverse machine axes
N30 Y150 M79 ;Traverse machine axes
N35 G01 D1 X10 ;Activate the tool offset.
;Check whether the tool has been changed. Preprocessing
stop until tool change preparations have been completed.
;Main run waits until tool change has been acknowledged
from PLC.

The preprocessing stop is maintained until the tool change preparations have been completed.
The main run waits at N35 (D1) until the tool change has been executed and acknowledged.

3.3.7 Tool change in the spindle for chain and box-type magazines

Spindle/buffer DB72
DB72 is responsible for changing tools in the spindle. This data block also prepares the tool
change. This data block has an interface for every spindle.
User data is available at each interface (sequence in accordance with the spindle number) as
for the loading and unloading points. Data are additionally available for the new tool to be

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 87
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

loaded at change. This data includes location type, sizes, tool status and the T number
internally assigned in the NC.
The buffer address of the spindle is contained in DB72.DBW(n+16) and DBW(n+18) as the
target for the new tool. This position is communicated as the target position of the new tool in
parameters "NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc" when the tool change has been successfully
completed. The target position of the old tool (DB72.DBW(n+24) and DBW(n+26)) is
transferred to FC8/FC6 in parameters "OldToolMag, "OldToolLoc" together with parameter
"Status = 1" after the change tool command has been executed.

Description of tool change operation in spindle

The tool in location 1, magazine 1 is to be loaded to the spindle (magazine no. 9998, location
1) and the tool in the spindle is to be returned to magazine 1 location 8.

*ULSSHU *ULSSHU

   

Spindle 1
 
&KDQJH
SRVLWLRQIRU
VSLQGOH  
0DJQR
 

6SLQGOH PDJORFDWLRQ
*ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ  
*ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ
   

Image 3-13 Tool change in the spindle

The tool change in the spindle is split into two steps (for TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1):
1. Prepare change:
Search for new tool and move to the change position
2. Execute change:
New tool into the spindle and old tool into the magazine at the correct location

1. Prepare change
Bit 2 is set in DB72.DBB n+0. In preparing for the change, the current positions of the tools
are communicated to FC8/FC6 in the associated parameters once the preparation step has
been completed. In this case, "Status" = 1 is parameterized for FC8. This means that the "old
tool" is still in the spindle and that the "new tool" is either still in the source magazine at the
same location or has been placed in a buffer.
The following information is passed to FC8/FC6:
● The new tool is in the change position, but is still located in magazine (NewToolMag = 1
and NewToolLoc = 1).
● The old tool is still in the spindle (OldToolMag = 9998 and OldToolLoc = 1).

Tool Management
88 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

FC 8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 1 (n+20) Mag No. new tool
NewToolLoc 1 (n+22) Loc. No. new tool
OldToolMag 9998 (n+16) Mag. no. Target new tool
OldToolLoc 1 (n+18) Loc. no. Target new tool
Status 1 Operation complete
Ready Feedback from FC8
Error Feedback from FC8

2. Change tool
If the preparation command has been correctly acknowledged with status = 1, the "Change"
bit DB72.DBB n+0 bit 1 is set with the M06 command from the part program. The free
parameters are also transferred again. All other values remain unaffected by the "Change tool"
operation.
Two tools are involved in the tool change procedure. The old tool is in the spindle and the new
tool is in the magazine. The tool transport is executed in this example with gripper 1 and gripper
2. Any change in the position of the tools must be communicated to the tool management with
FC8/FC6. FC8/FC6 must be called twice for this purpose.
FC8/FC6 call with status 105 change in progress
The tool with the dual gripper is withdrawn from the magazine and the spindle. The old tool is
now in gripper 2 at location no. 3 and the new tool in gripper 1 in location no. 2. This results
in the following FC8/FC6 call:

FC 8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9998 (n+16) Mag. no. Spindle
NewToolLoc 2 (n+18) Loc. No. new tool
New tool now in gripper 1
OldToolMag 9998 Mag. No. old tool
OldToolLoc 3 Loc. No. old tool
Old tool now in gripper 2
Status 105 Procedure running
Ready Feedback from FC8
Error Feedback from FC8

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 89
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Note
The operator uses FC8/FC6 to notify the tool management of the new positions of the
exchanged tools.
Tool management knows which is the new (called) tool and which is the old (spindle) tool.
The current positions are also known to the tool management. If these positions change, the
tool management is only informed about this through FC8/FC6.

Note
If T preparation and change signals are simultaneously present, then the tool call and the
change command (T and M) are programmed in one block. When calling FC8/FC6, in such a
case, only the change has to be acknowledged and not the selection.

FC8/FC6 call with status 1 tool change complete

While the gripper is moving the tools, the PLC can read the magazine location for the old tool
(from the spindle) from DB72.DBW (n+24) and (n+26) and move the magazine to the change
position. This position is location 8 in magazine 1 in this example. The tool change can now
be mechanically ended by "inserting" the tools. Tool management shall be informed of this
change in tool positions by a FC8/FC6 call with status = 1. The new tool is placed in the spindle
of magazine No. 9998, location No. 1 and the old tool in magazine No. 1 at location 8.

FC 8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9998 (n+16) Mag. no. Spindle
NewToolLoc 1 (n+22) Loc. no. Spindle
OldToolMag 1 (n+24) Mag No. old tool
OldToolLoc 8 (n+26) Loc. No. old tool
Status 1 Operation complete
Ready Feedback from FC8
Error Feedback from FC8

If the dual gripper is to place the spindle tool in the magazine location of the new tool, the user
must ensure that the magazine location is of the same size and location type as the spindle
tool.
Here too, a 1:1 exchange is supported through appropriate setting of the search strategy by
the tool management; in this case, the NCK checks the location type, size, adjacent location
allocation,...
If this is the case, the transfer can be performed simultaneously (on the dual gripper in the
spindle and in the magazine location at the change position).

Tool Management
90 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

FC8/FC6 must be parameterized as follows:

FC 8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 2 DB72 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9998 (n+16) Mag No. new tool
NewToolLoc 1 (n+18) Loc. No. new tool
OldToolMag 1 (n+20) Mag No. old tool
OldToolLoc 1 (n+26) Loc. No. old tool
Status 1 Operation complete
Ready Feedback from FC8
Error Feedback from FC8

3.3.8 Special cases "T0", empty spindle, multiple T selection

T0: Empty spindle

DB72.DBX(n+0).3 indicates that T0 has been programmed. If the spindle is to be emptied
using T0, this can be identified by the fact that in DB72, DBW (n+20), DBW(n+22) data for new
tool have the value "0".
Then, values NewToolMag and NewToolLoc of FC8/FC6 must be set to "0".
This applies to the preparation and to the change procedure.

Spindle is empty
A tool is to be loaded. This status is indicated by the fact that parameters OldToolMag and
OldToolLoc have the value "0".
In this case, FC8/FC6 parameters OldToolMag and NewToolLoc must be set to "0" for tool
preparation and change.

Multiple T selection
It can happen with multiple T selection that the program cannot be aborted by a RESET.
The abort response can be enhanced as follows:
● Cancel the read-in enable to prevent following blocks from being accepted in the main run.
● Then acknowledge with status 3 via FC8/FC6 (the tool command is rejected by the PLC).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 91
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

3.3.9 Tool change with turret

Turret DB73
DB73 is the block used to "change" tools in the turret (i.e. by rotating the turret so that the
required tool is in the working position). This data block has an interface for every turret. The
turrets are numbered using ascending magazine numbers. User data are available at each
interface as for the loading and unloading point. Data are additionally available for the new
tool to be loaded at change. This data includes location type, sizes, tool status and the T
number internally assigned in the NC.
Following completion of the tool-change operation, loading the new tool shall be acknowledged
by FC7. To this end, the parameter "ChgdRevNo" receives the turret number of the new tool
that has been inserted.

FC 7 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
ChgdRevNo 1 1st turret
Ready Feedback from FC8/FC6
Error Feedback from FC8/FC6

3.3.10 Number of replacement tools

Machine data MD17500 MN_MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS can be set to select the
maximum number of replacement tools.
Once the set threshold for the number of replacement tools has been reached it is no longer
possible to:
● create a new tool with this ID (alarm) or
● assign a tool by renaming an already fully assigned group (alarm).

Alarms
For operation via the HMI, alarm 17192 is output as an indication as soon as the defined limit
is violated.
If programming via a part program an additional interpreter alarm is triggered (e.g. 14020 if
NEWT fails).
For the setting $MN_MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS = 0, the data is not evaluated; this
is the default setting.

Note
Machine data MD17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS has a maximum input value of
"32", i.e. a tool group then contains a maximum of 32 tools.

Tool Management
92 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

3.3.11 Tool changing errors

If an error is detected by the NCK in the programmed tool preparation (e.g. no tool available,
no free position in magazine) program processing is terminated with an alarm.
The operator can assess and rectify various problems without terminating the program.

The following problems can be solved:

● The tool data record is not or not entirely in the NCK.
● The part program contains a programming error.
● No more replacement tools of the tool group in question are present or available (only
applies when tool management is active).
● Alarm 22067 or 22069 is output. The tool data record has been loaded into the NCK but is
not assigned to a magazine location or the magazine of the tool is not accessible to the
tool search (only applies when tool management is active). The tool must be reloaded
"manually" (e.g. directly onto the spindle).
Note
The case of illegal "D number" can occur either if there is an error in the part program or
the data record for the D number is not in the NCK.

Programming example

N10 ...
N100 T="Drill" ;NCK detects an error
N110 ...
N200 M06 ;to the extent that the tool change is explicitly program-
med in the same program for tool preparation
N210 ...

Note
As a rule M06 is not programmed at the program level of tool preparation but rather in a
subprogram, cycle or macro.

Bit 0 of MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE is used to set at which block a stop

is to be made.
TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 0=0:

N10 ...
N100 T="Drill" ;NCK detects an error, program stops at this block
N110 ...
N200 M06
N210 ...

TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 0=1:

N10 ...

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 93
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

N100 T="Drill" ;NCK detects an error

N110 ...
N200 M06 ;Program stops at this block
N210 ...

The error is detected during tool preparation, but is delayed by the NCK. The program
continues and stops at M06. Tool preparation has been completed at this point in time for a
regular program run. In the event of an error, tool preparation with the correct data can be
subsequently repeated. In this situation, the language command GETSELT would supply the
value "-1". With this information, e.g. in a change cycle, a branch can be made to fault handling.
The programming error (in block 100 in this example) is corrected by adding the offset to the
tool change block:
N200 "T=Drill_1" M06
If a tool change (with M06 programming) is realized by means of a subprogram or cycle
program, then the error can be rectified by inserting an overstore block (in the example).

3.3.12 Manual tools (adding tools during machining)

Manual tools are tools whose data are completely available in the NCK, but are not loaded
into the magazine. The function is set with MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE,
bit 1=1. The automatically selected tool must be inserted in the machine manually and removed
again manually after machining.

Responsibility of the operator

The user must ensure that
● the data record of the tool positioned on the spindle is actually in the NCK and
● that he or she places the tool that corresponds to the data record in the NCK on the spindle.
Tools which are loaded manually during machining are referred to as "manual tools".

Note
The responsibility is on the users themselves to comply with the safety regulations via the PLC
program.

Sequence
Internally, the NCK initiates an automatic sequence until the user can perform the tool change
with a manual tool. The NCK searches for the selected tool and detects that a suitable tool is
not available in the magazine. After a suitable tool is not found in the magazine, then a search
is made in the other tools that are not loaded. The tool with the status active is selected from
these. If an active tool does not exist, a replacement tool – corresponding to the selected search
strategy – is selected.
If a suitable tool is found, then the manual tool can be loaded. The manual tools are identified
in the interface to the PLC (VDI) by the Magazine location no. 1 in the magazine 9999. As a

Tool Management
94 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

consequence, the basic PLC program interprets this as involving a manual tool and sets the
interface signals DB72.DBx(n) bit 5 and bit 6 "Replace or load manual tool". The PLC must
ensure that a safe state exists in order that the user can perform the manual tool change.

Note
If the manual tool is loaded, alarm 17212: "Channel %1, Manual tool %3, Duplo No. %2, load
to tool holder %4" is output. The alarm is confirmed by the tool-change acknowledgement from
the PLC
The information alarms can be hidden ($MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2)

Note
It is not permissible that the PLC rejects a manual tool preselected from the NCK (tool rejection,
also refer to MD20310 $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK).
The tool state "CHANGEACTIVE" is taken into account corresponding to the setting in
"$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK".
A manual tool is always inserted via the spindle change position in DB72, also for the setting
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0.

Magazine location 9999/1 for manual tools

For manual tools, magazine location 1 in Magazine 9999 has a special significance.
Typically, as a result of the magazine configuration that is created on the HMI, the magazine
with number 9999 is defined as loading magazine and has at least one magazine location,
which has the number 1. As a consequence, in most cases magazine 9999 has a magazine
location 1 with the property "loading point".
For the preparation and change command from the NCK or its acknowledgment, normally only
locations associated with real magazines and tool holders are involved. However, if magazine
location 1 of magazine 9999 is specified as source location of the tool to be loaded or as target
location of a tool to be changed out, then it involves a "virtual magazine location address",
which under certain circumstances, has nothing to do with the actually available magazine
location 1 in magazine 9999. This can then be identified in so much that
● a tool can be loaded into the actual magazine location without an error message being
output and
● a tool at magazine location 9999/1 - assuming that magazine 9999 is defined as a loading
magazine - is not found when selecting a tool.

Block search, program test

In a block search, there is no difference to a normal tool change. However, the corresponding
alarms are not generated.
No change commands are output to the PLC during the block search. If a manual tool needs
to be loaded when the NC is first started, then this can be achieved using magazine location
1 in magazine 9999 and output of the corresponding alarm.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 95
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The data for the tools and magazines has to remain unchanged in the NCK during the program-
test mode . A manual tool that has been loaded during program-test selection is therefore
removed in terms of its data from the tool holder and saved internally. The stored manual tool
is loaded back into the tool holder in response to PLC task "Return manual tool from magazine
9999, location 1".

Note
Several tool holders and manual tools can exist in the program test mode because of the
technology used for the internal storing.

Boundary conditions
In conjunction with tool selection, tool change and offset selection, only problems associated
with the offset block technique can be rectified that have arisen because of programming errors
or incorrectly defined data in the NCK.

Manual tools for circular magazines (change with T command)

Manual tools are loaded and removed via the spindle interface in the DB72 - with the exception
of a special case. The interface number is the number of the spindle / tool holder that was
assigned to the turret. The special case occurs if the tool in the spindle is a manual tool. A new
tool, which is located in the turret, is programmed. In this case, the command in DB73 is output
in the corresponding turret interface. In this case, the manual tool must first be removed. The
tool be loaded into the turret must be swiveled into the machining position. The command then
has to be acknowledged.

Unique identification of manual tools

Previous behavior:
A manual tool was solely identified due to the fact that it did not have an owner location. This
is then used to derive as to whether (within the scope of a change) it is loaded or removed
from the virtual magazine location 9999/1.
This also means that a tool which, for example, was loaded onto the spindle as a result of an
operator action at the HMI, is a manual tool. As a consequence, it cannot be placed in the
magazine using T0/M06.
The fact that a tool loses its owner location when being transported can be a legal state. This
means that it is no longer possible to reliably identify a manual tool.
New behavior:
A manual tool is assigned a unique identifier, $TC_TP8[T_No] bit 15 =1.
If this state is set, a search is not made for an empty location in a magazine for the tool - and
this (old) tool is directly transported to the virtual magazine location 9999/1 when the tool is
changed. By moving this tool between the locations of the buffer magazine - independent of

Tool Management
96 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

the motion command that initiated this - the "manual tool" state no longer changes. (Exception:
see Section, resetting the "manual tool" state)

Note
As a consequence, a tool that was loaded onto the spindle, e.g. via SINUMERIK Operate, is
now not a manual tool. As a consequence, it is placed in the magazine using T0/M06.

Setting the "manual tool" state

The "manual tool" state of a tool is set if the following condition are fulfilled:
● machine data $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit1 is set
● as part of a tool change, an unloaded tool was selected.
Resetting the "manual tool" state
The "manual tool" state of a tool is reset, if
● the tool is unloaded, i.e. the tool no longer has a current magazine location.
This can especially occur as a result of
unloading the old tool as part of the tool change
transporting a manual tool to a loading position (unloading as a result of an HMI operator
action)
Writing $TC_MPP6[m,p]=0 to the location of the buffer magazine where the manual tool is
currently located. (m=magazine no., p=location no.)
● or the command to select or load a manual tool was interrupted and the tool was still not
moved to a magazine location
● or the tool was allocated an owner location. For example, this can be realized with the
extended NC language command "GETFREELOC" using a reservation parameter.
● or the tool was brought to a location of a real magazine or the loading magazine.
Explicitly writing the state "manual tool" ($TC_TP8, bit 15)
Further, the "manual tool" state of the tool can be set or reset by writing to the system variables
for the tool state ($TC_TP8).
It is not possible to set the "manual tool" tool state, if
● machine data $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit1 is not set. Otherwise, Alarm
17242 ( "Channel %1, block %2, manual tool cannot be set as the function is not active")
is issued.
● It is not possible to set the "manual tool" tool state, if the tool is located
- in a real magazine location,
- in a loading magazine,
- in a buffer magazine location and has an owner location.
If this is set, it is rejected with Alarm 17218 ("Channel %1, block %2, tool %3 cannot become
a manual tool").
If a tool, which is located in a magazine location, is to become a manual tool, then it must
be transported into the buffer or loading magazine (using asynchronous transfer, PI service
or MVTOOL language command). Then, using the NC language command
"DELMLOWNER", the reservation and the owner location can be deleted. Only then can
the "manual tool" state be set.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 97
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

If the tool state "manual tool" is explicitly reset, then initially an empty location search is not
made for the tool and no reservation is made. It is also not allocated an owner location. Only
in subsequent operations can an empty location search be made - and real magazine locations
reserved.
The state "manual tool" can also be set and reset via the OPI interface (block T/TD, column
8).
Properties of the "manual tool" state
For a manual tool, when the tool is being changed, a search is not made for an empty location,
an owner location is not allocated and a reservation is not made. Also for other tool transport
types and search operations, for a manual tool, an empty location is not searched for -
exception, explicit reservation using the NC language command "GETFREELOC".
The command data set, which the NCK sends to the PLC when a tool is being changed, always
contains as target address for a manual tool as old tool, the virtual magazine location 9999/1.
For manual tools, the empty location search strategy "1:1 replacement" is not effective, as the
"manual tool" property has priority, i.e.
● if the new tool is a manual tool and the old tool comes from a location in a real magazine,
then the transport task sent by the NCK to the PLC is as follows: Old tool back into the real
magazine, new tool from virtual magazine location 9999/1.
● And vice versa: If the old tool is a manual tool and the old tool comes from a location in a
real magazine, then the transport task sent by the NCK to the PLC is as follows: Old tool
to virtual magazine location 9999/1, new tool from the location of the real magazine.
The "manual tool" state is effective via a power on.
When unloading a tool to the virtual magazine address 9999/1, the settings of MD
$MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK are not effective, i.e. the corresponding tool states are kept.

Note
Using the NC language command "GETFREELOC" or for the PI service "_N_TMFDPL" or
"_N_TMFPBP", a check is not made as to whether a manual tool is involved. If the NC language
command "GETFREE LOC" is parameterized so that also a buffer location is reserved, then
as a consequence the tool loses its "manual tool" state.

Note
At power on, the "manual tool" state for tools is reset, which
● are at a real magazine location or the loading magazine, or
● are at a buffer magazine location and have an owner location, or
● are not at any magazine location.

Note
If, when writing to $TC_MPP6[m,p] a manual tool is set at a magazine location, the "manual
tool" state is deleted, if
● "m" addresses a real magazine or the loading magazine, or
● "m" addresses the buffer magazine and the tool has an owner location.

Tool Management
98 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Note
If a manual tool should come to the unloading point magazine location 9999/1 for unloading
using an asynchronous transfer, the NC language command "MVTOOL" or the PI service
"_N_TMMVTL", then this location must be defined and also free. On the other hand, for
unloading operations for a manual tool, magazine location 9999/1 does not have to be defined
and does not have to be free.

Behavior, NC language commands "TCA", "TCI" and return transport for manual tools
If the language command TCA programs a certain tool, which is not located at a magazine
location (also not at an internal magazine location), then this tool is selected and changed in
as manual tool.
If the language command TCI is applied to a buffer location where there is a manual tool, then
the target location for the movement is the virtual magazine location 9999/1 (this means that
the TCI instruction does not bring the manual tool into a real magazine corresponding to the
definition of TCI for other tools). Alarm 17215 "Channel %1 tool management: Remove manual
tool %3 from buffer %2" is issued. This alarm is acknowledged by the tool change
acknowledgement from the PLC.
Users must themselves ensure that the safety regulations are maintained through their PLC
programs, such as when loading a manual tool.
The tool state "BACKTRANSFER" for a manual tool is evaluated in the form so that the virtual
magazine location 9999/1 is specified in the PLC command for the manual tool.
Alarm 17215 "Channel %1 tool management: Unload manual tool %3 from buffer location %3."
is issued. This alarm is acknowledged by the tool change acknowledgement from the PLC.
Users must themselves ensure that the safety regulations are maintained through their PLC
programs, such as when loading a manual tool.
Suppressing alarms 17212, 17214, 17215, 17216
The manual tool change request alarms can be suppressed using bit 12 in MD
$MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2. Then, using the tool change command data, the PLC
must correctly load and remove the manual tool.
Example 1
(milling machine, $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1, 1 x spindle, 1 x chain-type magazine,
double gripper)

T=MILLER_120" Task to PLC: new tool from 9999/1 to 9998/1

old tool from 9998/1 to 1/10
"Manual tool" identifier is set
M06 Information alarm "...manual tool "MILLER_120"
17212 Duplo number 00001 load onto spindle / tool hold‐
er 1"
The information alarm is acknowledged with the final acknowledgment
from M06
...
T0 Task to PLC: new tool from 0/0 to 0/0
old tool from 9998/1 to 9999/1

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 99
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

M06 Information alarm "...manual tool "MILLER_120"

17212 Duplo number 00001 take from spindle / tool hold‐
er 1"
With the final acknowledgment from M06
a. The information alarm is acknowledged
b. The identifier "manual tool" is deleted
Example 2
(milling machine, $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1, 1 x spindle, 1 x chain-type magazine,
double gripper)
The "FACE MILLER_120" tool is loaded directly onto the spindle (e.g. using an HMI operator
command) and is then loaded into the magazine using T0/M06.

Task to PLC: new tool from 9999/1 to 9998/1

Identifier "manual tool" is not set, no information alarm
T0 Task to PLC: new tool from 0/0 to 0/0
old tool from 9998/1 to 1/x
As this does not involve a manual tool, the NCK performs an empty lo‐
cation search and places the tool in the magazine.
M06 No information alarm, as it does not involve a manual tool.

3.3.13 Tool changes in the NCK using synchronized actions

Overview
At tool change and at loading/unloading it is often necessary to supply the NC cycles with the
data for the participating tools.
Usually this is done via the "fast data channel" (dual port RAM) using FC21.
The PLC user program checks the interface in DB71/72/73.
If a new command is pending, the data (new location, old location, T_number,...) are read, pre-
processed and supplied to the cycles via FC21. There they are (usually in synchronized
actions) read as variable $A_DBB[...] and, for example, magazine movements are derived from
them.
To reduce the overhead involved and create simpler mechanisms, most of the data of the tool
management interface was mapped onto the NC variables for read access.
This means that all information about the old tool and the new tool can be read directly in the
part program or in synchronized actions; the "detour" via the PLC is no longer needed.
The following variables are used for the mapping process:

$AC_TC_FCT Function no. (command no. of the NCK)

$AC_TC_STATUS Acknowledgement status from the PLC
$AC_TC_THNO Tool holder or spindle no. on which the change was executed
$AC_TC_TNO Internal T no. of the tool to be changed or prepared

Tool Management
100 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

$AC_TC_MFN Source new tool: Magazine number

$AC_TC_LFN Source new tool: Location number
$AC_TC_MTN Target new tool: Magazine number
$AC_TC_LTN Target new tool: Location number
$AC_TC_MFO Source old tool: Magazine number
$AC_TC_LFO Source old tool: Location number
$AC_TC_MTO Target old tool: Magazine number
$A_TC_LTO Target old tool: Location number
$AC_TC_CMDT Trigger variable to output command of the NCK (is set for one IPO)
$AC_TC_ACKT Trigger variable for acknowledgement of the PLC (is set for one IPO)
$AC_TC_CMDC Counter for the command output
$AC_TC_ACKC Counter for the acknowledgements
$AC_TC_MMYN Owner magazine of the new tool
$AC_TC_LMYN Owner location of the new tool
Supplementary variables for multitool
$AC_TC_TOOLIS Transported tool of the type:
0 = Single tool
1 = Multitool with distance coding "location"
2 = Multitool with distance coding "distance"
3 = Multitool with distance coding "angle"
$AC_TC_MTDIST Distance of the MT location with the new tool from the reference point. If the
multitool has "length" as distance coding, the parameter contains the length in
the unit mm or inch as specified by the set dimension system.
$AC_TC_MTNLOC Number of locations in the MT of the new tool
$AC_TC_MTTN MT number of the MT location with the new tool
$AC_TC_MTLTN MT location number with the new tool

Note
The variables are read-only (exception $AC_TC_CMDC and $AC_TC_ACKC). The
acknowledgement mechanism remains unaffected (the PLC still continues to acknowledge all
commands from the NCK via FC8/FC6 or FC7).

Method of operation
The variables are written:
1. with each command from the NCK (CMD)
2. with each acknowledgement from the PLC (ACK)
3. with Power On all are set to value "-1"
The data is retained until it is overwritten by a new command. This means that with commands
of the same type, it is not possible to tell from the function number ($AC_TC_FCT) whether a
new task is present.
The exceptions are:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 101
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

$AC_TC_TNO and $AC_TC_THNO

If, for example, the NCK outputs a T preparation, both of these variables are set to "-1" with
the first PLC acknowledgement via FC8/FC6 (e.g. status 105).

Note
Scanning should only take place in synchronized actions. Depending on the application, this
can then trigger the variables $AC_TC_CMDT and/or $AC_TC_ACKT.

Example 1
Positioning a tool chain onto the old location
Assumption:
The tool chain has 36 locations, is defined as rotary and indexing axis, increments are 10
degrees therefore each graduation corresponds to one magazine location.
Tool_Change_Mode=1, Tool_Change_M-Mode=6
Ids=1 every(($AC_TC_CMDT==1)and(($AC_TC_FCT==2)or($AC_TC_FCT==5))) do
$R10=itor($AC_TC_LTO)
...
if ((R10>0)and($A_DBB[x]==5)) pos[U1]=cdc(R10)
endif
The trigger is sent to the command output of the NCK and with command "2" (T preparation)
or command "5" (T/M06 in one block) the old location is read out and stored in R10
(itor=IntegerToReal - format conversion if the variable is stored in the R-variable in
synchronized actions).
Later in the program, when the enables from the PLC are present (for example as
$A_DBB[x]==5), the magazine axis is traversed to the saved position (old location=
$AC_TC_LTO).
A magazine movement could also be started as follows (shown here in simplified form):
Ids=1 every(((($AC_TC_FCT==2)or(AC_TC_FCT==5))and
($AC_TC_STATUS==105))and(($AC_TC_LTO>0))) do pos[U1]=cdc($AC_TC_LTO)
With commands "2" and "5" (T preparation or T/M06), with old location>0 and PLC
acknowledgement status "105" (serves as enable), the magazine axis is traversed.
Old location>0: If the spindle was empty, there is no old tool and the old location is 0. Therefore,
the magazine axis does not need to move.

Example 2
Swiveling a turret
Assumption:
Turret, 6 locations, the turret is defined as an indexing axis, 60 degree increment, corresponds
to one tool location, 1xSpindle, Tool_Change_Mode=0

Tool Management
102 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Ids=1 every($AC_TC_CMDT==1)and($AC_TC_FCT==4)and($AC_TC_LFN>0) do
$R10=itor($AC_TC_LFN)
...
if ((R10>0)and($A_DBB[x]==5)) pos[B]=cac(R10)
endif
...
The NCK is triggered with the command output and with command "4" (change with T
command) the new location is read out and saved in R10
(itor= IntegerToReal - format conversion if the variable is stored in the R-variable in
synchronized actions).
Later in the program, when the enables from the PLC are present (for example as
$A_DBB[x]==5), the turret is traversed to the saved position (new location=$AC_TC_LFN).
The logic operation $AC_TC_LFN>0 prevents a movement from taking place if, for example,
T0 was programmed.

3.3.14 Function replacement

Overview
The function allows a TCA, T, M or D function to be replaced by a cycle.
The function is available independent of the tool management and is described in detail in the
"Function Manual, Basic Machine, Section 2.11 (mode group, channel, program operation)".
The function is set using the following machine data:

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE Enter the M function that is to be replaced, e.g. "6"

$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Name of the cycle that should be executed instead
of the M function, e.g. "L6"
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Name of the cycle that should be executed instead
of the T function, e.g. "T_cycle"
$MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME Name of the cycle that should be executed instead
of the D function, e.g. "offset"
$MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME Name of the cycle that should be executed instead
of the TCA command, e.g. also "T_cycle"
The mode of operation will now be explained using a T function replacement as an example.

Example
If one of the auxiliary functions to be replaced has been programmed, e.g.
N10 G90 G00 Z-100 S3000 T="Miller_20mm" M65
then the NC executes a so-called block splitting and "splits" this NC block into two blocks
a) G90 G00 Z-100 S3000 M65

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 103
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

b) T="Miller_20mm"
The information "Miller_20mm" is transferred as parameter to the cycle.
If the T call is now again programmed in the replacement cycle, then no additional replacement
is made.
Machine data $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE is used to set whether the cycle is executed
at the block start or at the block end (or also at the start and end).
The offset handling type is also set: If an offset is programmed (e.g. D3) in the NC block, which
is to be split, then it can be set as to whether the offset selection is taken into account or is
transferred as parameter to the replacement cycle.

Transfer variables of the T replacement cycle

$C_T T number of the tool (numerical)

$C_T_Prog Bool variable that shows whether a T word is available in $C_T
$C_TS Tool identifier (string)
$C_TS_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an identifier is available in $C_TS
$C_TE Address extension of the T word
$C_TCA Bool variable that indicates whether the TCA replacement is active
$C_DUPLO_PROG Bool variable that indicates if the Duplo number for the TCA replace‐
ment has been programmed
$C_DUPLO For $C_DUPLO_PROG == TRUE, contains the value of the program‐
med duplo number
$C_THNO_PROG Bool variable that indicates if the tool holder / spindle number for the
TCA replacement has been programmed
$C_THNO For $C_THNO_PROG == TRUE, contains the value of the programmed
tool holder / spindle number
$C_D Programmed D no.
$C_D_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_D
$C_DL Programmed additive/setup offset
$C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL
$C_MTL_PROG Bool variable that shows whether a multitool location is available in
$C_MTL (multitool * T=location)
$C_MTL Programmed multitool position (for T=location)
Example of a T replacement cycle
;T replacement cycle
;
;Machine data to be set
;$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME="T_cycle"
;$MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME="T_cycle"
;
;
def string[32] Ident
def int T_No,Spi_No,T_prep,T_Spi,TH_No
;
;

Tool Management
104 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

;---------------------------------------------------
;--- T command output ---
;---------------------------------------------------
if(($C_T_PROG==1)or($C_TS_PROG==1)or($C_TCA==1))
if $C_T_PROG==1 ;T=numeric
if $C_T==0
if $C_T>=1
T[$C_TE]=0
else
T0
endif
else
if $CTE>=1
if $C_MTL_Prog==true ;multitool T=location
MTL=$C_MTL T[$C_TE]=$C_T
else
T[$C_TE]=$C_T
endif
else
if $C_MTL_Prog==true
MTL=$C_MTL T=$C_T
else
T=$C_T
endif
endif
endif
endif
;
if $C_TS_PROG==1 ;T=string
if $C_TCA==1
if $C_DUPLO_PROG==1
if $C_THNO_PROG>=1
TCA($C_TS, $C_DUPLO, $C_THNO)
else
TCA($C_TS, $C_DUPLO)
endif
else
if $C_THNO_PROG>=1
TCA($C_TS, $C_THNO)
else
TCA($C_TS)
endif
endif
else
if $C_TE>=1
T[$C_TE]=$C_TS
else
T=$C_TS
endif
endif
endif
endif

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 105
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

;
;----------------------------------------------------
;Continuation of the T preparation (machine functions)
;----------------------------------------------------
;
;----------------------------------------------------
;----Tool offset----
;----------------------------------------------------
if (($MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE B_and 'B0')=='B0')
if $C_D_Prog==true
D=$C_D
endif
if $C_DLProg==true
DL=$C_DL
endif
endif
;
msg("")
M17
In the cycle, actions can now be easily executed to prepare the tool, scan the gripper, position
the magazine data transfer to the PLC, start auxiliary channels, etc.

Note
The TCI language command cannot be replaced!

Transfer variables of the D replacement cycle

$C_D Programmed D no.

$C_D_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_D
$C_DL Programmed additive/setup offset
$C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL

Transfer variables of the M replacement cycle

$C_T T number of the tool (numerical)

$C_T_Prog Bool variable that shows whether a T word is available in $C_T
$C_TS Tool identifier (string)
$C_TS_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an identifier is available in $C_TS
$C_TE Address extension of the T word
$C_D Programmed D no.
$C_D_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_D
$C_DL Programmed additive/setup offset
$C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL
$C_ME Address extension of the M word
$C_DL_Prog Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL

Tool Management
106 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

$C_M_PROG TRUE if M function was programmed for tool change

$C_M Value of substituted address M (integer)
There are two different cases:
1. The substitution subprogram for the tool change configured with
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR was called. $C_M then contains the value
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE [$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR].
2. In the case of a tool change with M code, only one substitution subprogram was configured
for the T and/or D/DL addresses. If the M code for the tool change is programmed together
with one of the addresses to be substituted, the value of $MN_TOOL_CHANGE_M_MODE
is transferred to the replacement program in $C_M.
If parameters are to be transferred to the M replacement cycle, then this must be set using
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR = 1
The default setting is "0", i.e. no parameter is transferred.
The parameter transfer refers exclusively to values, which are programmed in this NC block,
i.e. in that block where block splitting is performed.
This application is of interest if Tx M06 is always programmed in an NC block. This means that
the T selection, change as well as offset selection and deselection can be included in just one
single cycle.

Note
Only one function replacement is possible for each NC block.
If, for example, ...T="Miller_20mm" and M06 are programmed in the block, and a replacement
cycle applies to both, then this is rejected with an alarm.

Note
Parameters $C_T_PROG, $C_TS_PROG, $C_D_PROG and $C_DL_PROG act as trigger.
The T no., D no. ... are valid if these parameters have the value "TRUE" - but only then.

Note
More detailed information on replacing NC language commands is provided in the "Function
Manual Basic Functions".

3.3.15 Block search

Block search with calculation

On a block search, selection on reset or start, the tool is selected during preprocessing. In this
case the PLC is not allowed to reject the tool (see bit 4 in MD20310). If it does, an alarm is
generated. The block search must then be repeated. Use of the active tool can only be
prevented from an external source (HMI, PLC).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 107
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

In block search with calculation the program is generally put into a state where the selected
block can be executed. With respect to the tool management function, this means that the tool
that should be located in the spindle when the machining block is reached must now be loaded
to it.
If another tool is located in the spindle a "replace" command is initiated. In such a case, the
signals "Prepare change" (DB72.DBX(n+0).2 and "Execute change" (DB72.DBX(n+0).1 are
present at the same time since the auxiliary functions are output together.
Example: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0
Tool "Drill1" is loaded in the spindle. The new search target has T = "Drilling machine 2" as
the momentary tool programming.
NCK initiates the tool change. PLC must not reject.

Note
Tool rejection by PLC: If bit 4 of MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK is set, then
the PLC usually has the possibility to again request preparation for a tool change, yet this time
with different parameters, i.e. to reject the tool. This is not possible during block search. In this
case, the machine data setting is ignored.

Note
Because the tool change is frequently performed using cycles, a "replace command" generated
by the block search must be executed in an asynchronous subprogram (ASUP). Modal and
static motion-synchronization action is retained at the beginning of ASUP and is also effective
in the asynchronous subprogram. If the asynchronous subprogram is not continued with
Repos, the modified modal and static motion-synchronous actions in the main run remain
operative.
Alternatively, execution of the NC part program can be stopped by halting feed and read-in,
and a fault message "Wrong tool in spindle after the block search" can be generated.

Tool cannot be used

Alarm 22068 is output if the tool to be loaded at the search target cannot be used (it is not
available, disabled, ...), the program must be canceled using a reset.
In order that the block search is not canceled, if the tool involved at the search target is not
the tool to be loaded, then an attempt is made to also permit a disabled tool (and therefore
also an unloaded tool) – assuming that it only has the "enabled" state and therefore has a
defined geometry. This is realized before the alarm is generated.
If an additional tool change is programmed, the tool that is underway that cannot be used is
not noticed and does not stop the operation. However, if an attempt is made to precisely load
this disabled/unloaded/.. tool at the end of the block search after the first START, then this is
noticed in the NCK and acknowledged with alarm 22067; this then no longer allows the program
to be continued. The PLC can permit a disabled tool to be selected (i.e. by setting the interface
signal "Tool disabled ineffective" in the channel DB). However, in a specific case, this must be
realized during the block search, i.e. before the NCK outputs Alarm 22068 or 22067. If, for a
block search, tool programming is initiated in the NCK, and there is neither a tool that can be
used, disabled nor unloaded, then alarm 22068 is output, which then exits the block search.

Tool Management
108 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Example of a search with block splitting effect

N100 T="Tool1" M06 D1
N110 SETMTH(1) ;Tool holder1 becomes master tool holder
N120 T="ToolZ2" M06 D2 ;Target block: is not yet interpreted
N1000 IF($P_PROG_EVENT ==5) ;ASUP is started
.............
N1020 SETMTH(2) ;Tool holder 2 becomes master tool holder
.............
N1040 ENDIF
N1099 REPOSA
N110 SETMTH(1) ;The interrupted main program is continued/started
after the last executable block before the search
target.
;Tool holder 1 becomes master tool holder again.

3.3.16 Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management

The block search has already been described. Here we shall deal with the specific features in
conjunction with active tool management.
The block search establishes the start position of the target block. Auxiliary functions
programmed in the block search are collected and output in action blocks at the end of the
block search.
For now this also applies to the T command and M06. This depends on the setting in machine
data 20128 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE
0 = Neither T preparation nor M06 are output.
1 = T preparation and M06 are collected and output (and must be acknowledged to end the
block search). Default setting.
The following example shows how to proceed with block search.
Configuration: Milling machine, one spindle
Settings:
$MC_Tool_Change_Mode=1, i.e. change with M06

Block search
Tool change should be subsequently executed:
Situation:
T="Face_80mm" is located in the spindle
Block search to N98 (block search with contour calculation)
Target:
In order to continue in the program:
a. Tool "1537" must be loaded

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 109
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

b. Tool "Drill_6mm" must be prepared

...
N10 T="1231" ;T no. 1
...
N20 M06
...
N30 T="Face_80mm" ;T no. 2
...
N70 M06
...
N80 T="1537" ;T no. 3
N90 M06
...
N95 T="Drill_6mm" ;T no. 4
...
N98

Settings:
$MC_Tool_Change_Mode=1
$MC_Collect_Tool_Change=0
$MN_Search_Run_Mode bit 1=1
$MC_Collect_Tool_Change=0 means: No output of T and M06 after block search.
Procedure:
● Negative acknowledgement is not required in the PLC.
● The program "Prog_Event.SPF" is started with the last action block.
The change and preparation must be subsequently carried out.
Note
In order to start the Prog_Event after a block search, settings are required in the machine
data.

Prog_Event.SPF
…
def int T_Vor, T_Spi, T_active
…
GETEXET(T_active) The spindle tool is read from NCK view (blocks N80 and N90)
_active=3
GETSELT(T_Vor) T preparation is read from block N95 T_Vor=4
T_Spi=$TC_MAP6[9998,1] The actual spindle tool is read T_Spi=2
…
;Load correct tool
if ((T_Spi< >T_active)and(T_active>0))

Tool Management
110 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

T=$TC_TP2[T_active] Preparation of tool "1537"

L6 ;change cycle Load tool "1537"
Endif
…
if T_prep< >T_active
if T_prep>0
T=$TC_TP2[T_prep] Preparation of tool "Drill_6mm" from block N95
Endif
If t_prep==0
T0
Endif
Endif

Note
If a change is output by the action blocks (in example block N80 and N90), it is always a
command "5", i.e. "Prepare change" and "Perform change" are pending in DB72 at the same
time.
If the correct tool is already placed in the spindle (i.e. in the block search example at block N70
and $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE=1 is set), the T preparation is issued (from block N30).
The setting for bit 12=0/1 in the MD $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK machine data is not
evaluated.
Difference between the commands GETEXET and $P_TOOLNO:
GETEXET
Reads the T no. of the spindle tool from the NCK perspective.
Independent of the offset selection.
This has been specifically developed for the block search application.
$P_TOOLNO
Reads the T no. of the active tool.
This does not refer to the "active status" of the tool which is set via the T preparation, instead
it refers to the tool whose offset is being calculated. This view of the tools means that a tool
doesn't become an active tool until the offset is selected - which is what is read with
$P_TOOLNO. This means dependency on MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT,

Example:

...
N100 T="Countersink" ;T No. 5
N110 M06
N108 G90 G00 D1 X...
...
N200 T="Drill" ;T No. 32
N210 M06
N212 G90 G00 D1 X...

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 111
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Block search to block N200

1. Setting $MC_Cutting_Edge_Default=-2
GETEXET = 5
$P_TOOLNO = 5
2. $MC_Cutting_Edge_Default=1
GETEXET = 5
$P_TOOLNO = 5
Block search to block N212
1. Setting $MC_Cutting_Edge_Default=-2
GETEXET = 32
$P_TOOLNO = 5
2. $MC_Cutting_Edge_Default=1
GETEXET = 32
$P_TOOLNO = 32

3.3.17 System variables for state before block search

3.3.17.1 Description of the variables

The function is available with TMBF, TMMO and TMMG.
To round off the "block search" function, the active tool offset must be available in an ASUP
before the block search or test mode when the target block of the block search is reached. In
this ASUP, the OEM can implement the steps necessary to place the tools in the state required
in the target block. The following system variables that describe the state in the reset state
before the block search are available for this functionality:

● $P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH Tool holder to which the offset refers. This is normally

the master tool holder.
● $P_D_BEFORE_SSL Active offset in the reset state
● $P_DL_BEFORE_SSL Active total and setup offset in the reset state
These system variables are available in the "without magazine management" and the "with
magazine management" versions.
The selected and loaded tools on the individual tool holders before the block search are
available with the extension of the NC language commands GETSELT - Read the selected T
No. (Page 277) and GETEXET - Reading of the loaded T number (Page 279).
In the "with magazine management" version, the essential information is already available
through the assignment of the tool holders or spindles in the buffer magazine, because the
magazine location assignment is not changed by the block search. However:
● The master tool holder
● The selected tool offset "D" and
● The selected insert offset "DL"
that were valid before the block search, are not available.

Tool Management
112 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

In the "without magazine management" version, there is no information about the state before
the block search. As in this case the NCK does not have any data about the location of the
tool, it can only draw conclusions about the tool location from the last instructions before the
block search.
The state before the block search is the reset state. This means:
● The settings made during the NC reset become the values of the system variables.
● With an NC reset, the master tool holder set during the NC reset determines the active tool
and thus the active offset.
● Therefore the settings from the init block are not included in the system variables at the
start of the block search.
After reaching the block search target, the system variables take on the values of the
corresponding system variables from the NC program, if a new value is set.
Overview of the available system variables for the reconstruction of the selected offset in a
ProgEvent program after a block search:

System variable for the state System variable for the state
before the block search during and after the block search
Without magazine management With magazine management
$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH $P_MTHNUM $P_MTHNUM
GETSELT(tNo,Th,"S") $P_TOOLP GETSELT(tNo,Th)
GETSELT(tNo,Th)
GETEXET(tNo,Th,"S") $P_TOOLNO $P_TOOLNO
GETEXET(tNo,Th) GETEXET(tNo,Th)
$P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH $P_TOOL $P_TOOL
$P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH $P_DLNO $P_DLNO

tNo: Tool number, Th: Tool holder

3.3.17.2 Example
The following settings are active:
● The tool base functionality (TMBF) is activated.
● The tool change is performed with M6.
● Cutting edge default=-2
In the reset state, the following state is reached for the tool offsets:
● Master tool holder = 3
● Active T number on master tool holder = 5
● Active D offset = 2
● Programmed T number on master tool holder from last NC program = 6
This results in:
$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH =3
GETSELT(tNo1, 3) with tNo1=6

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 113
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

GETEXET(tNo2, 3) with tNo2=5

$P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH = 2
$P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH = 0 (The setup offset is not considered further and behaves in the
same way as the D offset selection.)
Sequence:
● The following NC program is to be processed in the block search up to block N220
● The old D offset is selected again in a ProgEvent ASUP in order to safely remove the tool
from the tool holder taking the old D offset values into account and
● The new tool is activated with the D offset in the target block
No new tool has been loaded on tool holder 3 up to the target block.
.....
N100 SETMTH(2)
N110 T8
N120 M6
N130 D3
N200 T9
N210 SETMTH(1)
N220 X10 G0
The meaning of the abbreviations used in the overview is as follows:
MTh: Value of master tool holder ($P_MTHNUM)
SelT(th): Return value of GETSELT for the tool holder "th"
ExeT(th): Return value of GETEXET for the tool holder "th"
DNo: Value of $P_TOOL
The ending S means the value of the corresponding variable "_BEFORE_SEARCH" or with
the optional third parameter "S".

MTh MThS SelT(2) SelTS(2 ExeT(2) Ex‐ SelT(3) SelTS(3 ExeT(3) Ex‐ DNo DNoS
) eTS(2) ) eTS(3)
Before N100
* 3 * * * * * 6 * 5 * 2
After N110 T8
2 3 8 * * * * 6 * 5 * 2
N120 T8
2 3 8 * 8 * * 6 * 5 * 2
N130 D3
2 3 8 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
N200 T9
2 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
N210 SETMTH

Tool Management
114 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

MTh MThS SelT(2) SelTS(2 ExeT(2) Ex‐ SelT(3) SelTS(3 ExeT(3) Ex‐ DNo DNoS
) eTS(2) ) eTS(3)
1 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
N220 X10 G0
1 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2

* Means that the value for this example is irrelevant or indeterminate.

The ProgEvent program has the following rough structure:
N1000 DEF INT TNO1, TNO2
N1010 DEF INT MTH_SAVE, D_NO_SAVE, SELTNO_SAVE, EXETNO_SAVE
N1020 DEF INT SELTNO1_SAVE, EXETNO1_SAVE, TH_OF_D_SAVE
; Save the currently reached state at the end of the block search
N1100 MTH_SAVE = $P_MTHNUM D_NO_SAVE=$P_TOOL TH_OF_D_SAVE =
$P_TH_OF_D
N1110 GETSELT( SELTNO_SAVE, $P_TH_OF_D)
N1120 GETEXET( EXETNO_SAVE, $P_TH_OF_D)
; Collect data on the state before the block search
N1150 GETSELT(TNO1,$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH, "S")
N1160 GETEXET(TNO2,$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH, "S")
N1170 GETSELT(SELTNO1_SAVE,$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH)
N1180 GETEXET(EXETNO1_SAVE,$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH)
; Select old offset again.
N1200 SETMTH($P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH)
N1210 T=TNO2
N1220 IF (EXETNO1_SAVE == TNO2)
; Old tool is still on the tool holder
N1230 M6 M=spec; additional information that M6 does not require a
tool change by PLC
N1240 D=$P_D_NO_BEFORE_SEARCH
N1250 X=x_safe Y=y_safe Z=z_safe G0 N1260 ELSE
....
N1300 ENDIF
; Load desired tool in accordance with target block
N1400 SETMTH(TH_OF_D_SAVE)
N1500 T=EXETNO_SAVE
N1510 M6
N1520 D=D_NO_SAVE
; Restore master tool holder in accordance with target block

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 115
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

N1600 SETMTH(MTH_SAVE)
REPOS

MTh MThS SelT(2) SelTS(2 ExeT(2) Ex‐ SelT(3) SelTS(3 ExeT(3) Ex‐ DNo DNoS
) eTS(2) ) eTS(3)
Before N1200:
1 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
After N1200:
3 3 9 * 8 * * 6 * 5 3 2
N1210:
3 3 9 * 8 * 5 5 * 5 3 2
N1230:
3 3 9 * 8 * 5 5 5 5 3 2
N1240:
3 3 9 * 8 * * 5 5 5 2 2
N1400:
2 2 9 * 8 * 5 5 5 5 2 2
N1500:
2 2 8 8 8 * 5 5 5 5 2 2
N1510:
2 2 9 9 8 8 5 5 5 5 2 2
N1520 D=D_NO_SAVE(=3)
2 2 9 9 8 8 5 5 5 5 3 3
N1600 SETMTH(MTH_SAVE)(=1)
1 1 9 9 8 8 5 5 5 5 3 3

* Means that the value for this example is irrelevant or indeterminate.

Note
It is the responsibility of the NC programmer to check whether the specified tool still exists.

3.3.18 Program test

Overview
The "program test" function can be used to traverse a program without axis motion.
All additional data is determined and taken into account. For tool management, this means
that the tools are searched and the appropriate values transferred to the PLC interface when
the tool is called.
The PLC must acknowledge these tasks without moving the magazine or changing a tool.
Special measures are therefore required on the PLC.

Tool Management
116 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The tool management acts in exactly the same way as it would when a program is running. In
the case of tools without fixed location codes and acknowledgement, this can result in the PLC
data indicating different tool locations to the actual mechanical locations in the magazine. This
can be prevented by configuring FC 8 such that a fixed location is simulated for the duration
of the program test rather than the calculated empty location applied as a parameter.
The old location of the tool is stored in the function block which handles program testing and
returned again to this location in the software (data settings). Any existing spindle tool is also
returned to the spindle in the software at the end of the program test or on a reset. This ensures
that the magazine assignments in the software match the mechanical assignments after
program testing.
For testing programs involving manual tools, see Section "Manual tools (adding tools during
machining) (Page 94)".

Example of how to adapt the PLC in test mode

The following program example can be used as a template for adapting the PLC to the program
test mode. Only the first channel and a spindle are supported as tool change locations.
The tool is always changed directly into the spindle. The spindle is used as the change position
(DB72). Access to the NCK/PLC interface (DB21, DB72) is symbolic. The standard UDTs (UDT
21, 72) are included for this purpose. These are part of the basic program and must be copied
to the project and subsequently compiled.
The following must be entered in the symbol table:

Symbol Address Data type Comment

Channel 1 DB21 UDT 21
SpChPos DB72 UDT 72
TC_VAR DB119 DB119 For testing the tool
change

All necessary variables are stored in the instance data block.

If program test mode is deselected, no action occurs. The target positions suggested by tool
management are confirmed by the PLC.
If program test mode is selected, the target positions are defined by the PLC. These correspond
to the source positions of the respective tools. The target position is only confirmed and saved
by tool management on the first tool change. It is thus possible to undo the first tool change
after program test mode is selected.
Two asynchronous transfers are required for this purpose. The first one returns any tool present
in the spindle to the magazine. The second asynchronous transfer is intended to return a tool
which was loaded in the spindle before program test mode back into the spindle.

Note
The corresponding PLC example is stored in the toolbox. The sample file WZV_PROG.AWL
is packed in file WZV_BSP:EXE.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 117
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Program test - extended

A setting can be selected with the machine data $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 20
such that the NCK cannot issue any tool-changing commands to the PLC in the status
"Program test active". The NCK outputs its own acknowledgement so that no further data-
related tool motion exists.
The default setting is that the Tool_change command is not output.
The following applies for the tool used during program test mode:
The tool status "active" can still be set and the tool status "was in use" is set. This does not
have any further detrimental effects since tool monitoring is not normally active in the test mode.
If bit 20, value 1 is set, generated commands are output to the PLC. Tool / magazine data can
be changed in the NCK depending on the type of acknowledgement by the PLC. If the
acknowledgement parameters for the "target magazine" are set to the values of the "source
magazine", then the tool is not moved and the data therefore not altered in the NCK.
Exception: The tool status of the tool activated in the test mode can take the status "active".

Note
It may not be derived – to the extent the setting "No tool-change commands to PLC" – that the
tool on the spindle in the tool holder during "Program test active" is the active tool.
The search "SERUPRO" search (cross-channel block search) uses the program test.

3.3.19 Several spindles in one channel or TO unit

When using tool management and more than one spindle please note the following:

2 spindles in one channel

Only one tool offset can be active per channel. Spindle 1 defined as master spindle with
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1. Spindle 2 is a secondary spindle.

The master spindle is spindle no. 1 in each case.

2 channels each of which access the same TO memory have been set in the machine data.
One spindle is assigned to each channel. Two spindles are assigned to one magazine in the
magazine configuration.
The master spindle is spindle No. 1 for both channels In order to change a tool in spindle No.
2 as well, the second spindle must be defined as master spindle in the second channel before
the tool is changed. In the TM system, the spindle number is sent to the PLC. This number is
determined from the extended address of T. If this is not programmed, the NCK assigns the
master spindle number of the channel in which the program is running.

Tool Management
118 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Each channel has its own master spindle

2 channels each of which access the same TO memory have been set in the machine data.
One spindle is assigned to each channel.
Two spindles are assigned to one magazine in the magazine configuration.
In each channel the assigned spindle is defined as the master spindle. Tool change is possible
without making any additional definitions in the program.

3.3.20 Decoupling the tool management from the spindle number

The program must specify the location (spindle number on milling machines) at which the tool
is to be changed before the tool management can insert a tool.
Machine data MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER can be set to
determine whether a tool holder number can be assigned to define the location of the tool to
be loaded instead of a spindle number. Thus the appropriate designation (spindle number or
tool holder number) can be used in the event of use.
The following figures show which variable definitions you require for the following variants:
● Working with two spindles in one channel and one TO unit (standard functionality)
● Working with two spindles in one channel (standard functionality)
● Working with two tool holders in two channels (one TO unit)
● Working with two tool holders in one channel

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 119
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Working with spindle numbers

&KDQQHO
6SLQGOH ORFDWLRQ
LQQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH
7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ
7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU
0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1' 

7&B0'3>@ 


 

 &KDQJHSRVLWLRQ


 0DJD]LQH  &KDQQHO
7&B0$3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ 


 6SLQGOH ORFDWLRQ
LQQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH

 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ
 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU
 0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1' 


Image 3-14 Two spindles in two channels and one TO unit

Two channels operating with the data of one TO unit (with one magazine). One spindle is
defined in each channel.
Spindle 1 in channel 1 has been declared the master spindle with MD
SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND=1. Spindle 2 on channel 2 is the master spindle.
Both spindles must be assigned different numbers because the assignment of the spindle to
the second internal magazine (buffer magazine) must be unique.
This assignment is realized by $TC_MPP1 (spindle location) and by $TC_MPP5 (spindle
number).

Tool Management
120 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

6SLQGOH ORFDWLRQ
LQQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH
0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1'  7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ
7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU
PDVWHUVSLQGOHPDFKLQHD[LV $;
0$B63,1'B$66,*1B72B0$&+$;>$;@ 
0$B63,1'B$66,*1B72B0$&+$;>$;@  7&B0'3>@ 

 


 &KDQJHSRVLWLRQ


 0DJD]LQH 
7&B0$3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ 



6SLQGOH ORFDWLRQ
 LQQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH
 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ
 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHQXPEHU
 VHFRQGDU\VSLQGOHPDFKLQHD[LV $;


Image 3-15 Two spindles in one channel

Two spindles of a single channel are operating with one magazine.

Spindle 1 was defined as master spindle with SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1.
Spindle 2 is not a master spindle (secondary spindle).

Example of a part program (for a channel with two spindles)

(Requirement: CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=1; i.e. D1 is implicitly active with the tool change
M06):

T="Miller" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master spindle is addressed,
i.e. spindle 1 = value of machine data $MC_SPIND_DEF_MAS‐
TER_SPIND.
;The tool change takes place in spindle 1.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller" tool.
...
T2="Drill" M2=6 ;Address extension for the secondary spindle has been programmed.
The tool change takes place in the PLC at the tool management inter‐
face for spindle 2.
;The path is still corrected with the offsets of the "Miller" tool
...
SETMS(2) ;Declares spindle no. 2 as master spindle
T="Miller_2" M06 ;No address extension programmed → the master spindle is addressed
(spindle 2).
;The tool change takes place in spindle 2.
;The path is now corrected with the offsets of the "Miller_2" tool
...

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 121
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

T1="Drill_1" M1=6 ;Address extension for the current secondary spindle has been pro‐
grammed.
;The tool change takes place in spindle 1.
;The path is still corrected with values from tool T="Miller_2".
...
SETMS ;Declares the spindle defined by $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
as master spindle
T="Miller_3" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master spindle is addressed
(spindle 1).
;Value of machine data $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND). Tool
change takes place in spindle 1.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller_3" tool.

Further example (starting conditions as above):

N10 SETMS ;Declare spindle no. 1 as master spindle

N20 T2=3
...
N50 M2=6 ;Address extension for the secondary spindle has been programmed. Tool
change takes place on the spindle.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of "Miller_3"
...
N70 D3 ;The path is corrected with the offsets of the active tool (that was activated
before block N10 - here in the example, "Miller_3")
N80 SETMS(2) ;Declare spindle no. 2 as master spindle
T3
M06
N90 D2 ;The path is corrected with the offset of tool "T3".

Note
SETMS does not change the active tool. The new master spindle definition cannot be
referenced until the subsequently programmed tool change.
The following applies: Offset selection is active for the last tool loaded onto a master spindle.

Tool Management
122 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Working with tool holder numbers

&KDQQHO
7RROKROGHU ORFDWLRQ
LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQH
7&B033>@  PDFKLQLQJORFDWLRQ
7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQXPEHU
722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5 
7&B0'3>@ 

6
5 7

4 &KDQJHSRVLWLRQ
8

3 0DJD]LQH 9
&KDQQHO
7&B0$3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 
2
&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ 10

1
11
7RROKROGHU ORFDWLRQ
16
LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQH
12
7&B033>@  PDFKLQLQJORFDWLRQ
15 7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQXPEHU
13
14 722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5 

Image 3-16 Two channels each with one tool holder and one TO unit

(The zero position is located at the change position of the tool holder 1)
Two channels operating with the data of one TO unit (with one magazine). Tool change no
longer requires that a spindle number be specified. The address extensions of T and M now
refer to the value of machine data MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
Instead of "spindle location" the general term "tool holder" (tool machining location) is used
(spindle is standard). If an address extension is not programmed, the address extension is
supplemented by the value of MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0
The previous function remains active (default).
A value greater than zero activates the new function.
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0
If a tool change is programmed to a buffer location of the type "Tool holder" with $TC_MPP5
= TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER, then the offset data defined for this tool corrects
the path.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 123
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

7RROKROGHU ORFDWLRQ
LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQH
7&B033>@  PDFKLQLQJORFDWLRQ
7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQXPEHU
PDVWHUWRROKROGHU

722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5  7&B0'3>@ 

  

&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ
 

 0DJD]LQH 
7&B0$3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ 



7RROKROGHU ORFDWLRQ
 LQWKHEXIIHUPDJD]LQH

7&B033>@  PDFKLQLQJORFDWLRQ
 7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQXPEHU

 VHFRQGDU\WRROKROGHU

Image 3-17 One channel with two tool holders

(The zero position is located at the change position of the tool holder 1)
Two tool holders in a channel are operating with one magazine. Tool holder 1 has been
declared the master using TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 1. Tool holder 2 is thus
the secondary tool holder.

Programming example:
The language command SETMTH (tool holder number) is used to declare one or several tool
holders as the master tool holder.
The initial state after power on is defined using machine data
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER; the behavior at NC start and reset using the
machine data $MC_START_MODE_MASK and $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
SETMTH (tool holder number),

T="Miller" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master tool holder is addressed
(tool holder 1 - value of machine data $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER).
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 1.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller" tool.
...
T2="Drill" M2=6 ;Address extension for the secondary tool holder has been programmed.
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 2.
;The path is not corrected

Tool Management
124 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

...
SETMTH(2) ;Declares tool holder 2 as the master tool holder
T="Miller_2" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master tool holder is addressed
(tool holder 2).
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 2.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller_3" tool.
...
T1="Drill_1" M1=6 ;Address extension for the secondary tool holder has been programmed.
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 1.
;The path is not corrected!
SETMTH ;Declares the tool holder specified in $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER as the master tool holder
T="Miller_3" M06 ;No address extension programmed -> the master tool holder is addressed
(tool holder 1 - value of machine data $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER).
;The tool change is performed at buffer location 1.
;The path is corrected with the offsets of the "Miller_3" tool

Note
SETMTH does not change the active tool. The new master tool holder definition cannot be
referenced until the subsequently programmed tool change.
The following applies: Offset selection is active for the last tool changed into the active tool
holder.

3.3.21 Several spindles/toolholders

Overview
Tool management can work in one channel with more than one tool holder. If several channels
of one TO unit are supplied with data, then make sure that the tool holder numbers have
different (= unique) numbers in the magazine configuration ($TC_MPP5 of buffer locations of
the type ($TC_MPP1) "Spindle"). The spindle numbers of the channels must then be unique
as well (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER=0).

Example
This example shows how to differentiate between an active tool and a programmed tool.
Spindles 1...4 are defined in channel 1; analog to this, spindle locations 1...4 in magazine
configuration 4.

SETMS (2)
T12 ;12 is a programmed tool
M06 D3 ;12 is an active tool, 3 is an active cutting edge
SETMS (4)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 125
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

T22 ;12 remains an active tool, 22 becomes the programmed tool with
respect to spindle=4
T3=33 M3=6 ;T33 is loaded onto the secondary tool holder 3. The tool (T33)
is not active.
SETMS (1) ;Tool holder=1 becomes master spindle, T12 remains active, T22
remains programmed
D5 ;D5=active cutting edge; refers to the active tool, i.e. T12
M00

The following situation is given:

Tool holder number T number D number

1 master spindle - -
2 12 active 5 active
3 33 -
4 22 programmed -

3.3.22 Several magazines in one channel or one TO unit

Address extension
The NC address T can be programmed with an address extension. The tool management
function interprets the programmed address extension as a spindle number or toolholder
number. The NC address T without programmed address extension then refers to the main
spindle (master spindle).

7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ

7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQR 7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQR

7RROKROGHU 7RROKROGHU

'LVWDQFHUHODWLRQVKLS 'LVWDQFHUHODWLRQVKLS
 
 
 
0DJD]LQH 0DJD]LQH

   
 

3DUWSURJUDP

7  0DJD]LQHIRUWRROKROGHUORFDWLRQ
7  0DJD]LQHIRUWRROKROGHUORFDWLRQ
7 
7 

Image 3-18 T="location" and several magazines in the same channel

Tool Management
126 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The diagram shows the procedure for using more than one magazine in a channel (when
programming with T="location" this is usually a turret).

Note
The tool offset is only calculated for the toolholder that is assigned at that point in time to the
master spindle or the master toolholder.

3.3.23 Reset and start mode

Fundamentals
The tool offset selection/deselection can be set in the machine data for program end or reset
as well as for NC Start.
It is also possible to permanently preset the change for a specific tool, e.g. at NC Start.
The settings are made in the following machine data:
● MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
● MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
● MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK
● MD20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
● MD20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
The function and interaction of the machine data are displayed in the following diagram.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 127
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

&KDQQHOVSHFLILFPDFKLQHGDWD
0&B722/B0$1$*(0(17B0$6.ELW 

0'0&B5(6(7B02'(B0$6.



%LW  0'0&B722/B5(6(7B1$0(


 0'0&B&877,1*B('*(B5(6(7B9$/8(

%LW  0'0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1'



%LW  0'0&B722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5

0'0&B67$57B02'(B0$6.


 ,IWRROGLVDEOHGRQ
%LW  VSLQGOH 0'b0&B722/B&+$1*(B(5525B02'(

%LW  0'0&B722/B5(6(7B1$0(


 0'0&B&877,1*B('*(B5(6(7B9$/8(

)LJ  0'0&B63,1'B'()B0$67(5B63,1'



)LJ  0'0&B722/B0$1$*(0(17B722/+2/'(5

Image 3-19 Reset and start mode

MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK

Bit Val Meaning

ue
0 0 The offset remains unchanged, i.e. after end of part program and reset, the last programmed
offset remains active (behavior as with bit 0=1 and 6=1).
1 Reset mode, i.e. evaluation of bits 4 ..11
2 1 Reset behavior (tool offset) with tool management not active. No effect if tool management
active

Tool Management
128 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Bit Val Meaning

ue
6 0 Reset behavior corresponds to MD $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME and $MC_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
1 Current setting for active tool length compensation is retained beyond reset/end of part pro‐
gram.
For active tool management, the tool that is located in the master spindle (general: master
tool holder) is selected.
If the tool in the spindle is disabled, this state is ignored, there is no selection of a replacement
tool! (Replacement tool with Start_INIT only).
Activation takes place on the master spindle defined in MD $MC_SPIND_DEF_MAS‐
TER_SPIND, or on the master tool holder defined in $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER.
The tool in the last programmed master spindle or master tool holder can also be active. Bit
16 or 17 is used for this purpose.

Reset behavior for spindles

Bit Val Meaning

ue
16 0 The master spindle is the spindle defined in MD $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND.
The settings in the machine data below refer to this data:
● $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
● $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
● $MC_START_MODE_MASK
● $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
1 The spindle last programmed with SETMS(x) remains the master spindle after end of pro‐
gram and reset, regardless of the machine data setting.
This means that if bits 0/6=1, the offset remains active for the tool which is placed in the
spindle.
Power on behavior
The machine data setting is active after power on.
This means the offset for the tool which is placed in the spindles specified in MD
$TC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND becomes active; the offset value is that of the smallest
available D no. for this tool.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 129
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Reset behavior for tool holder

Bit Val Meaning

ue
17 0 The master tool holder is the tool holder specified in MD $TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER.
The settings in the machine data below refer to this data:
● $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
● $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
● $MC_START_MODE_MASK
● $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
1 The tool holder last programmed with SETMTH(x) remains the master tool holder after end
of program and reset, regardless of the machine data setting.
This means that if bit 0=1 and bit 6=1, the offset remains active for the tool which is positioned
in this tool holder.
The machine data setting is active after power on.
This means the offset for the tool which is positioned in the tool holder specified in
$MC_TOOL_MANGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER becomes active; the offset value is that of the
smallest available D no. for this tool.

MD22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE

Bit Val Meaning

ue
3 0 Change command for a replacement tool is output.
1 The disabled status of the spindle tool is ignored. The tool becomes active with the last
programmed offset.
4 0 Change command for a replacement tool is output.
1 The spindle tool is set down - "T0" is output.

MD20122 $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
Identifier of tool to be loaded
This tool is either loaded when end of program is reached or at reset or Power On if the
associated setting is made in MD $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, or with NC Start if the
respective setting was made in MD $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
If there are no entries here ($MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME="") this corresponds to "T0".

MD20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
D number of tool which is to be loaded via $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME.
This means the tool becomes active with the offset set here.
If no entries are made in this machine data, the behavior corresponds to "D0".

Tool Management
130 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
Specifies whether a tool holder number or spindle number is to be specified to define the
location of the tool to be loaded.

MD20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
Definition of master spindle in channel. The number of the spindle is set.

MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Bit 14 is used to activate the reset and start behavior. If bit 14 is not set, the settings in machine
data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and $MC_START_MODE_MASK which are specific to tool
management have no meaning.

MD20112 MC_START_MODE_MASK

Bit Val Meaning

ue
6 0 The last programmed offset remains active.
If the tool is disabled on the spindle, bits 3 and 4 are also evaluated in
MD $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE.
1 Start behavior (tool and offset selection) according to MD $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME and
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE

Start behavior for spindles

Bit Val Meaning

ue
16 0 The offset that was last selected remains active.
It does not matter whether the offset was selected in the part program or via settings in MD
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
The offset for the tool placed in the master tool holder that was last programmed can also
be active (see $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK)
1 The tool holder specified in MD $MC_Tool_Management_Toolholder becomes active.
This means an offset selection refers specifically to this tool holder.

Start behavior for tool holder

Bit Val Meaning

ue
17 0 The offset that was last selected remains active.
It does not matter whether the offset was selected in the part program or via settings in MD
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
The offset for the tool placed in the master spindle that was last programmed can also be
active (see $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK).
1 The spindle defined in MD20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND becomes active.
This means an offset selection refers specifically to this spindle.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 131
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

Note
A power on always triggers a reset ⇒ The settings in MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
are active after a power on.

Example 1:
In this example, the tool on the spindle is to remain active after end of program (M02/M30)
and reset.
The following applies:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2
The following settings need to be made:

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 14=1 for reset and start behavior to be active

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bit 0=1, for the tool offset to remain active
Bit 6=1
$MC_START_MODE_MASK Bit 6=0 for the tool offset to remain active

NC program: %MPFxxx1

N110 T="MILLER_10"
N115 M06 ;Tool "MILLER_10" is loaded
N120 G90 G00 D2 X... ;Offset D2 becomes active
…
N850 M30 ;Offset D2 remains active

At the next program start tool "MILLER_10" is active with offset D2.
NC program: %MPFxxx2

N10 G90 G00 Z100 ;This block is executed with offset D2

Example 2:
The spindle tool is to be removed at the end of program and reset ("automatic T0").
The following applies:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2
● One spindle

Tool Management
132 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The following settings need to be made:

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.bit 14 = 1Reset and start behavior is activated

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.bit 0 = 1 and bit Reset behavior:
6=0 ● TOOL_RESET_NAME
● CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
$MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME="" Name of the tool that should be loaded at
change with reset. If no name is entered here,
this has the same meaning as T0
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE = 0 The above mentioned tool becomes active with
this offset ("0" ≙ D0)
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.bit 6=0 The tool offset remains active. In the example:
D0

Example 3:
In this example, a specific tool is to be loaded at NC start, e.g. a probe.
The following applies:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2
● One spindle
The following settings need to be made:

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 14=1 Reset and start behavior is activated

$MC_START_MODE_MASK Bit 6=1 Start behavior
● TOOL_RESET_NAME
● CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
$MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME="Probe_1" Name of the tool that was loaded with reset/
start.
In the example: "Probe_1"
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE=1 The above mentioned tool becomes active with
this offset, here D1
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK Bit 6=0 Is not relevant for this example

Example 4:
In this example, the tool on the master spindle that was last programmed is to remain active
following end of program (M30/M02) and reset.
The following applies:
● $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
● $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2
● Two spindles
● $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTERSPIND=1

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 133
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The following settings need to be made:

$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.bit 14=1 Reset and start behavior is activated

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.bit 0=1 and bit Leave the tool offset active
6=1
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.bit 16=1 The last programmed master spindle remains
active.
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.bit 6=0 The current offset remains active.
NC program

Program code Comment

N05 SETMS(1) ;Spindle becomes master spindle (is also set via MD)
N10 T="Tool1"
N15 M06 ;Change to spindle 1
...
N80 SETMS(2) ;Spindle 2 becomes master spindle
N85 T="Tool2"
N90 M06 ;Change to spindle 2
N95 G90 G00 D2 Z...
...
N230 M30 ;It is active: Tool2 with offset D2 on spindle 2

Note
Using MD20310, bit 12 = 1 and the described settings, for each reset a preparation and change
command is output to the PLC and must be acknowledged by the PLC. The automatic positive
acknowledgement can also be used here.

Note
If a change is triggered by reset mode at POWER ON, the NC is stationary with "No NC ready"
until an end acknowledgment has been received for this change.

3.3.24 Repeating a tool change with the same tool identifier

Overview
The behavior for repeated tool changes with identical tool identifier is set using two bits of MD
20310 $MC_TOOLMANAGEMENT_MASK.

Bit 11 = 1 The tool preparation command is also output, if it was already output for the
tool. This setting is only effective as long as the prepared tool is still not located
on the requesting spindle or tool holder.
Bit 12 = 1 The tool preparation command is also output if the tool is already located in the
spindle / tool holder, however it is only issued just one more time.

Tool Management
134 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

The default setting (bit 11 and bit 12=0) is selected so that the preparation command is not
executed if the tool is already located in the spindle / tool holder – or the same preparation
was programmed a multiple number of times.
Exception: Block search
Here the preparation command is always issued even if the tool is already positioned in the
spindle.

Repeating the T preparation before loading

Bit 11 = 0 Bit 11 = 1
N10 T="Tool1" Tool preparation command is output Tool preparation command is output to
to the PLC the PLC
...
N20 T="Tool1" No output to the PLC (assuming that Tool preparation command is output to
the state of the tool is unchanged) the PLC
N22 M06 Change command to the PLC Change command to the PLC
A typical application is providing a new tool (positioning a chain) and checking before the
change using the repeated T call.

New programming for the tool that is still able to be used on the tool holder

Example 1:

Bit 12 = 0 Bit 12 = 1
N10 T="Tool1" Tool preparation command to the PLCTool preparation command to the PLC
N12 M06 Tool change command to the PLC Tool change command to the PLC
N20 T="Tool2" Tool preparation command to the PLCTool preparation command to the PLC
N30 "T=Tool1" No output to the PLC. This preparation Tool preparation command to the PLC.
replaces the preparation from block This preparation replaces (as for bit 12
N20; it is identified that a tool, which = 0) the preceding T preparation from
can be used from group "Tool1", has N20. The checks on the NCK side are
already been loaded. identical. However, as a result of the
machine data setting, command out‐
put is forced.
N32 M06 No change command to the PLC No change command to the PLC
The preparation command from block N30 was deleted in the NCK; in the programming, it
appears as if N10, N12 and N32 are programmed. As the state of the tool "Tool1" on the tool
holder has not changed, M06 is not output to the PLC.

Example 2:

Bit 12 = 0 Bit 12 = 1
N10 T="Tool1" Tool preparation command to the PLCTool preparation command to the PLC
N12 M06 Tool change command to the PLC Tool change command to the PLC
N20 T="Tool1" No output to the PLC Tool preparation command to the PLC

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 135
Description of functions
3.3 Tool change box-type, chain, circular magazines

N30 "T=Tool1" No output to the PLC No output to the PLC (the preparation
for the same tool is only repeated once)
N32 M06 No change command to the PLC No change command to the PLC
The preparation command from block N20 was deleted in the NCK by the new T programming
in block N30. In the programming, it appears as if N10, N12 and N32 were programmed. As
the state of the tool "Tool1" on the tool holder has not changed, M06 is not output to the PLC.
For these two examples, bit 11 has no significance.

New programming for the tool that is still able to be used on the tool holder
N10 T = "Tool1"
N12 M06
N20 T = "Tool1" ;Preparation command is output
N30 T = "Tool1" ;No command output to the PLC
N32 M06 ;Change and preparation are output together
N20, N30 and N32 are not output to the PLC.

New programming for the tool that can no longer be used on the tool holder
The time monitoring has, for example, set the tool to the "disabled" state.

N10 T = "Tool1" ;Tool preparation command to PLC

N12 M06 ;Tool change command to PLC
N20 T = "Tool2" Tool preparation command to PLC
N30 T = "Tool1" ;This tool preparation replaces the tool preparation from N20; tool man‐
agement detects that a tool from group "Tool1" is loaded but that the tool
can no longer be used. A replacement tool is searched for in the tool group
and the tool preparation command is output to the PLC.
N32 M06 ;The tool change command N32 is output to the PLC.

Condition for processing a new tool preparation command in the NCK

N10 T = "Tool1"
N20 T = "Tool2" ;A command is only processed in the main run if the preceding command
from the PLC was acknowledged with "End".
The does not apply if N20 is not output to the PLC. Then the "End" acknowledgement must
be present for a new tool preparation command to be output to the PLC.

Condition for processing a new tool change command in the NCK

N10 T = "Tool1"
N12 M06 ;A command is also processed in the main run if the preceding command
from the PLC was not yet acknowledged with "End".

Tool Management
136 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.4 Search for tool

3.4 Search for tool

3.4.1 Strategies for tool searches

The tool search is initiated by the preparation command (T selection). The search begins for
a tool to load in the spindle.
In the default setting, tool searches are always performed on a magazine-specific basis, i.e.
with this setting for the search strategy, the search is performed in the magazine from which
the last change was carried out.

Tool search
The tools with the same identifier (name or Ident) but different duplo numbers are combined
to form one tool group. The tool identifier is programmed in the part program with the NC
address, i.e. only the tool group is specified during preparation.
In order to move a tool from a physical magazine to a spindle it must have the following
characteristics:
● Tool status must be "enabled"
● Tool status must not be "disabled" (exceptions: Language command TCA as well as PLC
interface signal "Tool disable inactive")
● Tool status may not be "currently being changed"
● Tool must not already be used by a spindle other than the requesting spindle.
● Tool must be present in the magazine location (except for manual tools)
● This magazine must be linked to the requesting spindle via a distance relationship
($TC_MDP2)
● This magazine must not have the status "disabled".
The explicit tool is requested at the time of the tool call. The request is made for a special
spindle (general tool holder); this is the number of the address extension of T. At this point in
time, user interface DB72 is written for the relevant spindle and must be evaluated by the PLC
user program.
The tool search strategy is defined using the system variable $TC_MAMP2 for the TO area,
with the system variable $TC_MAP10[Mag_No] magazine-specific. With bit 0 to bit 2, a search
is made according to the criteria - active tool, lowest duplo No. and the shortest distance. The
'search criterion' for tool wear uses bit 3 to bit 5. Bit 7 is used to set whether the tool search is
made on a magazine-for-magazine basis or across all linked magazines.
Setting bit 7=1 means that the search strategies defined using bits 0, 1, 2 start with the search
from the 1st magazine of the distance table (the sequence in the distance table is defined using
the programming sequence of $TC_MDP2). The standard setting is bit 7=0. The search starts
in the magazine from which the previous tool that was loaded was taken.
Setting bit 6 means that a search is first made in the magazine currently being considered.
This is only effective in conjunction with bit 7=1. The strategies, where the search always starts

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 137
Description of functions
3.4 Search for tool

in the first magazine of the distance table are described in Section "Magazine blocks
(Page 253)".

Note
Bit 3 = 1 to bit 5 = 1 are only significant when the monitoring function is active (defined by
$TC_TP9). Otherwise they have no effect on the suitability check.

Note
The tool search strategies apply equally for all magazine types (chain, box-type and circular)
but not for the buffer magazine.

Example, tool search routine

A tool change at a spindle shall take place.
The search sequence for the correct tool is as follows:
1. The control checks whether the tool which is called is already located on the spindle.
2. If buffer locations are linked to the spindle (see $TC_MSLR), the control checks whether a
suitable tool is already located in one of these.
3. The tool search starts in the 1st magazine of the distance table ($TC_MDP2) according to
the selected search strategy.
(Applies only if bit 7 of $TC_MAMP2 = 1; otherwise, the search starts in the magazine from
which the last loaded tool was fetched.)
4. If no tool is found in the first magazine, the search is repeated in the next magazine of the
distance table.
5. If all the magazines that are linked to the spindle have been searched and no suitable tool
found, the search is terminated with an alarm (22069 or 22068).
6. If the function "manual tool" is active, after an unsuccessful search in the magazines - a
search is made in the TO unit for an unloaded tool, but a tool that can also be used. If none
is found, the search is terminated with an alarm.
Any suitable tool with the programmed identifier found (not disabled) in one of the stages
described above will be used.

Tool Management
138 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

3.5 Empty location search

3.5.1 Empty location search for a tool – from spindle to magazine

With the T preparation command, a matching empty location is automatically searched for the
spindle tool. The location in which the new tool is stored is still occupied at this time and
cannot therefore be identified as an empty location, the 1:1 interchange is the exception.

Note
Generally, a search is made for an empty location in that magazine from which the current tool
in the toolholder was taken.

Fixed location coding

When searching for an empty location for fixed-location coded tools its previous location in the
magazine is usually retained.
If the search for an empty location for a fixed-location-coded tool is started with a specific
magazine number, that number is ignored. The old tool location is defined as an empty location.
If this number is however an internal magazine number (for a loading or buffer magazine), then
the number is explicitly taken into consideration and the fixed location coding is ignored. This
case arises when loading/unloading tools.
If a location search for a fixed location coded tool is initiated using a specific magazine number
and magazine location number, the fixed location coding is ignored and the specified location
checked as a suitable location for the tool. This is used in the HMI function "Relocating".

Variable location coding

Initially, the procedure for an empty location search is the same as that for a fixed location-
coded tool. If this check fails, the search for a free location is continued. The search is
performed according to the selected search strategy ($TC_MAMP2 / $TC_MAP10). If the
search cannot find an available location with the specified location type in this magazine, a
new search operation based on the location type hierarchy is started in the magazine. A
location is only then considered as a suitable type of location when it applies that "Location
type of the location" is larger than "Location type of the tool", whereby the "larger than"
relationship is defined by the location-type hierarchy. If no free location is found in this
magazine, the search is continued in the next magazine (search strategy).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 139
Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

3.5.2 Search strategy for empty locations

Search strategy
The strategy can be defined with the magazine configuration according to which the search is
made in magazines of TO units for an empty location. If it involves a box-type magazine, then
the search is executed according to the default strategy (forwards search starting at the first
location number).
Possible strategies are listed in the table.

$TC_MAMP2 Search strategies Meaning

Bit 8 = 1 Forwards search The search takes place from location No. 1 in ascending
256 order.
Bit 9 = 1 Forwards search The search takes place from the current location at the
512 change position in ascending order.
Bit 10 =1 Backwards search The search takes place backwards starting from the last
1024 location No.
Bit 11 = 1 Backwards search The search takes place from the current location at the
2048 change position backwards.
Bit 12 = 1 Symmetrical search The search starts at the current location number at the
4096 change position (1st location left, 1st location right, 2nd
location left, 2nd location right, etc.).
Bit 13 = 1 1:1 exchange If the location type and size of the old and new tool are
the same, the magazine location of the "new" tool to be
loaded is transferred to the "old" tool to be unloaded –
and vice versa.
The 1:1 interchange acts in addition to other selected
search strategies. If possible, the 1:1 exchange is treated
as a priority.
Bit 14 Magazine search strat‐ =0
egy First search the magazine with a search run across the
location types of the hierarchy of the tool type. If no loca‐
tion is found, then a search run is performed across the
magazines.
=1
Search the location type of the tool in the magazine. If
nothing is found, search run across the magazines. If a
location is still not found, then a search run is repeated
across all magazines with the next location type from the
type hierarchy.

Note
The empty location search strategy is set TO-specific using $TC_MAMP2, magazine-specific
using $TC_MAP10. If the magazine-specific search is not set, when the NCK boots, it copies
the value from MAMP2 to MAP10.

Tool Management
140 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

Definition of the current magazine position

The current magazine position at the change location is stored in magazine parameter (system
variable) $TC_MAP8. The value is automatically updated by the PLC acknowledgement of a
command, if the new tool is moved. If the magazine or tool is moved without a task from the
NCK, the user must correct the actual position. An NC cycle or also the PLC can write to
parameter $TC_MAP8. Either by writing the OPI variable (selected with NCVAR selector block
TM; variable magNrPaces) or with the FC 8/FC 6 (with the parameters TaskIdent=4
TaslIdentNo=channel number, status=5, OldToolMag=9998,OldToolLoc=1). The current
position is parameterized (referred to spindle) in NewToolMag and NewToolLocspindle.

3.5.3 Assigning a hierarchy to the location types

If a tool is to be loaded from the spindle into the magazine or a tool is to be loaded into the
magazine, then the location type decides which magazine locations are available for selection,
i.e. $TC_TP7 and $TC_MPP2 must be defined and match or $TC_MPP2=0, i.e. every tool type
fits in this location.
If the location type of the tool belongs to the location type hierarchy, then the location
assignment is carried out in accordance with this hierarchy.
Example:
A tool with location type B is to be placed in the magazine or a search made for a free location
with type B.
The following location type hierarchy applies: A < B < C < D
The location type hierarchy is set centrally for the entire TO unit in parameter $TC_MAMP2
with bit 14.
The search is set in $TC_MAMP2 or in $TC_MAP10[Magazine-No.] with bit 14.
Procedure:
Bit 14=0
First a check is performed to see whether there is a location with type B in the magazine to be
searched. If there is not, the search is continued for a type C or D location in the same
magazine. In doing so, only the validity of the location types is tested. If the empty location is
of type C, then the search condition is fulfilled, also if the empty location is of type D. This
means that no search is made for the next largest location type. If a location is not found, the
search is continued in the next, connected magazine.
Bit 14=1
First a check is performed to see whether there is a location with type B in the magazine to be
searched. If not, then a search is made for precisely this location type in all of the linked
magazines. If a location is still not found, then a search run is made across all magazines with
the next larger location type from the type hierarchy.
Several such hierarchies can be set up in one TO unit. A location type may only be entered
into one hierarchy.
Example: def int A,B,C,D,E
The following location type relationships are defined:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 141
Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

First hierarchy
$TC_MPTH[0.0] = A
$TC_MPTH[0.1] = B
$TC_MPTH[0.2] = D
Second hierarchy
$TC_MPTH[1.0] = C
$TC_MPTH[1.1] = E
Type A < type B < type D apply in the first hierarchy and type C < type E in the second hierarchy.
In the first hierachy, location type A is the smallest (and fits on all other location types), location
type D is the largest.
Both the number of different hierarchies as well as the number of entries in a hierarchy can
be set using a machine data (18078 $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIE, 18079
$MN_MM_MAX_HIERARCHIE_ENTRIES).

3.5.4 New type of location type hierarchy

It is now possible to define location types from 1 to 8. A table showing possible alternative
location types can be added to each of these location types. The location types used in the
tables can have values from 1 to 32000. This empty location search is set centrally for the
entire TO unit by setting bit 15 in $TC_MAMP2.
The same location types can be entered into various tables.
A location type hierarchy can comprise a maximum of 8 additional location types. The location
type hierarchy is defined using the already described system parameter $TC_MPTH[n,m] with
n, m = 0,....7. A definition is made that the location type hierarchy of the designated location
type 1 is defined with $TC_MPTH[0,m]. In the NCK, it is not monitored which location types
are entered into the location type hierarchy.

Boundary conditions
This type of hierarchy formation of magazine location types is valid for the TO unit in which
the system parameter $TC_MAMP2 is correspondingly set.

Note
If the location type hierarchies ($TC_MPTH) are defined before the new hierarchy is set in
$TC_MAMP2 with bit 15 = 1, this results in:
a. Deletion of the hierarchies ($TC_MPTH[x,y]=9999)
b. Alarm 17255 "Magazine location hierarchies have been deleted

Tool Management
142 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

Examples
There are three tools with the T and location type numbers = 100 and 1, 200 and 2, 600 and
6. The following definitions are made.

$TC_MPTH[ 0, 0 ] = 10 ; hierarchy of the designated location type = 1

$TC_MPTH[ 0, 1 ] = 21
$TC_MPTH[ 0, 2 ] = 32
$TC_MPTH[ 0, 3 ] = 43
$TC_MPTH[ 0, 4 ] = 54
$TC_MPTH[ 0, 5 ] = 65
$TC_MPTH[ 0, 6 ] = 76
$TC_MPTH[ 0, 7 ] = 87

$TC_MPTH[ 1, 0 ] = 1 ; hierarchy of the designated location type = 2

$TC_MPTH[ 1, 1 ] = 10
$TC_MPTH[ 1, 2 ] = 111

$TC_MPTH[ 5, 0 ] = 1 ; hierarchy of the designated location type = 6

$TC_MPTH[ 5, 1 ] = 10
$TC_MPTH[ 5, 2 ] = 111
$TC_MPTH[ 5, 3 ] = 222

The location types 1, 10 and 111 are included in several hierarchies.

A search is now made for an empty location for tool with T No. = 200 and location type No. =
2. If no type 2 location is empty, then the search is continued by evaluating the type hierarchy
$TC_MPTH[ 1, m ].
T No. = 200 also fits into a location, type 1, 10 or 111.
T No. = 600 with location type No. = 6 - in addition to the preferred location with type = 6, it
also fits in location types 1, 10, 111 or 222.
On the other hand, T No. = 100 with location type number = 1 does not fit in locations of type
= 111 or 222, but only in locations of the preferred type 1, or 10, 21, 32,.... 87.

System variables
AUTOHOTSPOT

3.5.5 Search procedure for empty locations

The following apply as criteria for the empty location search:
● Location type must coincide with location type of tool. A hierarchy is taken into account.
● Check the tool size.
● Location must have the status "free".

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 143
Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

● Location must not be "disabled".

● Magazine must not be "disabled".
The essential search criterion for the empty location search is the magazine location type. The
magazine location type must match the magazine location type entered in the tool-specific
data ($TC_TP). The magazine is searched. Each location is checked. If a suitable location is
found the search is terminated.
If a matching location is not found, then a check is made whether there is a magazine location
type hierarchy for the magazine-location type that is entered in the tool. If there is none, the
next magazine is taken if there are further magazines available. If there is a defined hierarchy,
then the search routine is repeated starting at the magazine that has just been searched. If
this search is also unsuccessful, the search moves to the next magazine, assuming another
one is available.

Note
With oversized tools, the location types of the adjacent location are not considered.

3.5.6 Search strategy, 1:1 exchange (old for new)

With this search option, the magazine location of the "new" tool (tool to be loaded) is made
available as the empty location for the ’old’ tool (tool to be unloaded).
It is not assumed that the "new" tool is stored in the magazine location. It only needs to have
been loaded (it may be located on a gripper, for example). If the location in question is not
suitable for the "old" tool, then another appropriate empty location is sought.
Description of function
The new search strategy for an empty location is preset in the already existing bit-coded system
variable $TC_MAMP2 with bit 13.
If 2 tools (new and old tool) are exchanged 1:1, then the two tools are marked. To do this, bit
15 is set to 1 in the tool status ($TC_TP8).
Boundary conditions
With this empty-location search strategy, the NCK checks a magazine location that at the point
of time of making the check is normally identified as still occupied by the "new" tool or is still
"reserved for tool from buffer location". This location is defined as an empty location for the
"old" tool if the check gives a positive result.

Tool Management
144 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

If the new or old tool is coded as a fixed location tool or the tool size or the location type are
not identical, then the strategy is not used.

Note
The PLC program has to execute the tool transportation operations in the correct sequence
for the tool change:
Remove "new" tool from the magazine location
Bring the "old" tool to the magazine location
Otherwise damage may occur to the machine or tool.
The 1:1 exchange can be set as the only search strategy for the buffer magazine (9998).

The empty location search strategy is only effective within tool changes programmed in the
part program. PI services or language commands for an empty location search cannot use
this.
Example
This strategy is especially suitable for use with double grippers and tools of the same type
(same size and same location type).
The already defined system variable $TC_MAMP2 includes an additional setting option for the
new empty-location search strategy.

Bit Value Meaning

0
... Tool search strategy
7
8
... Search strategy for empty location
13 The magazine location for the "new" tool to be loaded is transferred to the "old"
tool to be replaced and vice versa.
Precondition is that the tool sizes and location types of the tools match or are
compatible in terms of location hierarchy.
The location of the "new" tool is detected as empty location for the "old" tool even
if the "new" tool is still positioned at this location at the time the check is per‐
formed.
The tool transport must be designed so that the "new" tool is first removed from
the magazine location before the "old" tool is taken to it.
Otherwise, depending on the sequence of the mechanical tool transport opera‐
tions, the machine could be damaged.
The type of empty location search is determined via the bits 8 through 12.
It is not possible for tool change to take place if the "old" tool does not have a
magazine location assigned to it. The tool search strategy is then determined via
bits 8 to 12.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 145
Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

3.5.7 Tool search in wear group

Overview
If "Wear group" function is used:
In the case of existing tool-search strategies, the search refers only to the active wear group,
i.e. only those tools are considered during a search within a tool group that are at magazine
locations of the active wear group.
Tools in magazine locations with wear group number 0 are also checked for suitability.
If there are no spare tools available, then all $TC_MPP5 parameters of the current groups are
negated and all locations are individually disabled by this. $TC_MAP9 is also negated (wear
group disabled). All active tools are reset if this response has been configured via $TC_MAMP3
(bit 1 = 1).
The next wear group is called ($TC_MAP9 is assigned the number of the next wear group that
can be activated).
If no further groups are available the search is terminated with an alarm. In such a case, the
disabled tools should be replaced, if necessary. In order to enable the wear groups again, the
wear group numbers of the magazine locations must be again set to values > 0.

Search strategies
There are two search strategies for finding the next available wear group that can be activated:
● Starting from the lowest magazine location number, the replacement tools are searched
through location by location according to the way they are sorted internally (time-optimized
search).
The wear group that is the subject of the search is found by searching for the first tool that
is assigned to a wear group that can be activated.
● A search is made for the wear group with the lowest enabled wear group number (the first
that can be activated).

Search in several magazines

The magazine definition for a machine defines whether the search is to be performed in one
or several magazines.
If the search is conducted in several magazines while several wear groups are being used,
always make sure that a wear group can only ever be assigned to one magazine.
The search is conducted according to the following priorities:
1. The search is performed in a magazine according to the configuration and strategy.
2. The search is performed in the active wear group.
3. The set tool-search strategy is taken into consideration.

Tool Management
146 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

Activation
In order to work with wear groups, the magazine locations must be assigned to wear groups
via system variable $TC_MPP5 and the function must be activated via the machine data.
In addition, the number of the wear group with which machining is to commence must be
assigned to system variable $TC_MAP9 of the magazine to be selected (value > 0).
For the configuration of the machine, it is defined by $TC_MAMP3 how the tool status shall
change when switching from one wear group to the next (defaulted is an unchanged tool status).

Note
The PLC signal "tool selection from disabled tools" has no effect when resetting the tool state.

Example: Tool search in wear group

$TC_MAMP3 = 3 - change "active" status of tools
Target
● The tools must be set to "active" when a wear group is activated.
● When a wear group is disabled all the tools contained in that wear group should also be
deactivated.
Specifications
● Circular magazine number 1 (6 locations)
● The circular magazine is to be divided into two parts:
Locations 2 and 3 form wear group 1.
Locations 4, 5, 6 and 1 form wear group 2.
● $TC_MAP9 = 1 (wear group 1 is "active")
Assignment to the wear group is achieved by:
$TC_MPP5[1,2] = 1
TC_MPP5[1,3] = 1
$TC_MPP5[1,4] = 2
$TC_MPP5[1,5] = 2
$TC_MPP5[1,6] = 2
$TC_MPP5[1,1] = 2
The tools with T=10 and T=11 are assigned to wear group 1. As wear group 1 was activated,
tools T=10, 11 were therefore also set to "active" (via $TC_MAMP3, bit 0=1).

Note
Language command SETTA (see Section "SETTA - Activate tool from wear group (Page 299)")
can also be used to set these tools to active.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 147
Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

Tool assignment:

$TC_MPP6[1,2] = 10 ;T=10 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=1 tool state "ac-

tive"
$TC_MPP6[1,3] = 11 ;T=11 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo no.=1 tool state "ac-
tive"
$TC_MPP6[1,4] = 12 ;T=12 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=2
$TC_MPP6[1,5] = 13 ;T=13 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo no.=2
$TC_MPP6[1,6] = 14 ;T=14 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=3
$TC_MPP6[1,1] = 15 ;T=15 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo no.=3

$TC_MAMP2 = 1
The active tool is to be searched for. If none is available, the next possible tool is to be located.
This tool search strategy is superimposed by a check for the number of the active wear group.
That is to say only those tools are considered during the search for a tool with the status "active"
that are at magazine locations and that have the number of the currently activated wear group.
T="Tool2"
Tool group "Tool2" consists of tools
T=11, 13, 15.
T=11 is positioned in a location of the active wear group (No. 1) and is "active". The result of
the tool search is T=11.
Machining is continued. T=11 is "disabled" during machining.
T="Tool1"
Wear group 1 is still active. T=10 is identified as active and suitable for use.
T="Tool2"
The tool group of identifier "Tool2" now has no active tool (has been disabled) and a new tool
has not yet been set to "active". This step is not taken until "Tool2" is reprogrammed. The tools
of the group are examined. In the locations of wear group 1, which is still active, there is no
tool with identifier "Tool2" or any other suitable tool.
This condition causes the next wear group (2) to be activated. Wear group 1 is now no longer
the active wear group. The status of the tools in wear group 1 has been reset (not "active"),
as configured by $TC_MAMP3, bit 1=1.
The tool search is now performed exclusively in wear group 2. Its tools were set to "active"
when the wear group was activated (one tool from each tool group in the wear group because
setting of $TC_MAMP3, bit 0=1).
The turret is now assigned as follows:

$TC_MPP6[1,2]=10 T=10 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=1 ;tool state "not active"
$TC_MPP6[1,3]=11 T=11 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo no.=1 ;tool state "disabled"
$TC_MPP6[1,4]=12 T=12 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=2 ;tool state "active"
$TC_MPP6[1,5]=13 T=13 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo no.=2 ;tool state "active"
$TC_MPP6[1,6]=14 T=14 has identifier "Tool1"/duplo No.=3
$TC_MPP6[1,1]=15 T=15 has identifier "Tool2"/duplo No.=3

Tool Management
148 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.5 Empty location search

In the example T=13 is now taken as the next available tool "Tool2".

Note
The tool search only then generates an alarm when no further spare tool available in the tool
group with the given identifier is found and no further wear group can be activated.

Control system response

Control behavior at Power On, mode group change, reset, block search and Repos is described
below.
Configuration $TC_MAMP3, bit 0=1 (activate internally)
At Power On, the NCK checks whether the value of $TC_MAP9 > 0, i.e. whether a wear group
has been selected. In this case the tools of that wear group are checked again and the value
for $TC_MPP5 of each location in question is set to positive. In addition, the status of the tool
in the location is set to "active".
Configuration $TC_MAMP3, bit 1=1 (disable internally)
At Power On, the NCK checks whether $TC_MAP9 is negative, i.e. a wear group has been
disabled. In this case the tools of the disabled wear group are checked again and the value
for $TC_MPP5 of the location in question is set to negative. The "active" status of the tool in
the location is reset.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 149
Description of functions
3.6 Loading

3.6 Loading

3.6.1 Loading sequence

Overview
Loading generally involves transporting a tool from a loading point (location in the loading
magazine) into a real magazine. In so doing, the tool is allocated an empty location (the location
where it was loaded). Only then, from the perspective of the NCK, is the tool considered to
have been loaded. This means that a tool that was loaded onto the spindle – e.g. via
SINUMERIK Operate – is considered as not having been loaded.

Loading sequence
In the 1st step, a search is made for a suitable empty location for the tool to be loaded. In the
2nd step, the tool whose data must have been completely created (tool data and at least one
cutting edge), is placed at a loading point. In the 3rd step, the tool is transported.

Note
SINUMERIK Operate automatically handles the loading. The tool data is completely generated.
The tool is placed at the loading point and tool transport initiated. This sequence does not
change, even if the tool is visually created in the magazine list via the user interface.

3.6.2 Function of the PLC when loading?

Loading sequence
When loading, the PLC is informed by the NCK about magazine and location numbers.
When a tool is loaded, the target address is the magazine and the loading location for the tool
(DB71.DBW (n+24) and (n+26). This target address is communicated to FC8/FC6 as
parameters "NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc" and "Status = 1" or "Status = 10" once the load
operation has been successfully completed. Parameters "OldToolMag", "OldTool-Loc" must
be supplied with 0. The number of the active interface identifies the loading location.
The loading procedure is performed as follows:
1. A request is sent to the PLC to load the tool. The information is transferred to the PLC in
DB71.
Example:
Data in DB71 when loading for the 2nd interface,
(location 5 in magazine 1 is to be loaded from loading location 2)

DB71.DBX0.1 = 1 Interface 2 active

DB71.DBX34.0 = 1 Command: Loading

Tool Management
150 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.6 Loading

DB71.DBW50 = 9999 Magazine no. of the loading magazine

DB71.DBW52 = 2 Location no. within the loading magazine
DB71.DBW54 = 0 Magazine no. Source for unloading
DB71.DBW56 = 0 Location no. Source for unloading
DB71.DBW58 = 1 Magazine no. target for loading
DB71.DBW60 = 5 Location no. target for loading

1. Generally, the PLC would now move "location 5" from "magazine No. 1" (into which the tool
should be loaded) to "loading location 2" and execute the load operation.
2. If the tool is physically in the magazine, FC8 must be called from the user program and the
loading operation acknowledged.

Example of FC8/FC6 call when loading

FC 8 parameters Values Comment

Start 1 Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB 71 interface
TaskIdentNo 2 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 1 Mag. No. 1
NewToolLoc 5 Location No. 5
OldToolMag 0 During loading = 0
OldToolLoc 0 During loading = 0
Status 1/10 Operation completed
Ready Feedback from FC8
Error Feedback from FC8

For loading and unloading, as well as for relocating the acknowledgement status = 10 is
available. It has the same effect as status =1 (final acknowledgment; however it does not
change the magazine position ($TC_MAP8). For every final acknowledgment (if the tools were
moved) the magazine position is always aligned.
In this specific case, loading from location 5 into magazine 1, with the final acknowledgment
(status_1) the magazine position is set to 5 (possibly existing offsets are not taken into
consideration). However, this is not always desirable (e.g. when equipping a turret), as HMI
Operate derives this display from the actual magazine position.

Problems during loading

A tool cannot be loaded. Check the following:
● Is the location type correct?
● Is a suitable empty location available?
● Has the number of tools enabled in the NCK (MD18082) been reached?
● Does the tool size include a "0", e.g. "1011"? (this is not permitted).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 151
Description of functions
3.6 Loading

Alarms on the operator panel:

● No suitable empty location available
● "Create tools" command cannot be output to the NCK

3.6.3 Loading by directly assigning the T number

By directly writing to parameter $TC_MPP6[magazine No.,location No.] = T, a tool can be set
to a magazine location (whether it is a real magazine, buffer or loading magazine). For
example, for oversized tools, the NCK automatically reserves adjacent locations.
The NCK checks whether the tool fits at this location (location type, free adjacent locations, ...),
if not, then an alarm is generated.
This does not involve an associated command output to the PLC.

3.6.4 Load tools via a part program

T number
The data required for a tool can also be loaded via a part program.
There are two possibilities to get the T number that addresses the data. You can:
● assign the T number yourself or
● allow the NC to assign the T number
(via the command NEWT(...), see index entry).
The other data can be addressed by the T number determined in this way. Otherwise the T
number can be assigned by the user (refer to the following example):

Example
DEF INT TNo
TNo=NEWT("test",1)
$TC_TP3[TNo]=2 ;Size left
$TC_TP4[TNo]=2 ;Size right
$TC_TP5[TNo]=1 ;Size top
$TC_TP6[TNo]=1 ;Size bottom
$TC_TP7[TNo]=2 ;Location type
$TC_TP8[TNo]=2 ;Tool status
$TC_TP9[TNo]=0 ;Type of monitoring
$TC_TP10[TNo]=0 ;Substitute tool strategy
$TC_TP11[TNo]=0 ;Tool info
$TC_DP1[TNo,DNo]=120 ;Tool type: (all of the offset data is provided here)
$TC_MPP6[MagNo,LocNo]=TNo ;Tool with the determined T number is written/loaded
to the location

Tool Management
152 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.6 Loading

The tool described here also occupies adjacent locations. The tool management automatically
assigns/reserves the adjacent locations.
It is also possible to delay assignment of a tool to a location, in which case the command
$TC_MPP6 is not required. After execution of the part program the tools are contained in the
tool list and can be loaded at a later time.

3.6.5 Retroload tool data

Procedure
When tool data is "reloaded" this means that the offset data is not entered or loaded until after
the tool loading operation.
● The tools are already located in the magazine, both physically as well as their data, i.e. the
"Tool ←→ Location" assignment has taken place.
● There is either no tool offset data in the NC or it is no longer up to date.
The offset data is assigned via the part program, i.e. the existing data is overwritten. If not
already known, the internal T number of the particular tool first has to be determined in the
"retroload" program to do this.
The internal T number is the tool number that the NC works with. It is unique and describes a
tool. All parameters of this tool are addressed by this T number.
The T number can be assigned either by the operator when creating a tool or by the NC.
If the operator knows the T number (e.g. specified by the entries made at the measuring
station), then this number can be retrieved in the retroload program.
If the T number is not known, then it has to be determined for each tool to be retroloaded and
be supplied from a variable. This reduces the overhead for the user and also reduces the scope
for errors.

Create the retroload program

The tool is measured at a measuring station and the measured data stored. For this purpose,
the tool must already be defined, i.e. by both an identifier ("Drill 12 mm" or "Miller 23" in the
following) and the relevant duplo number. (The combination of tool identifier and duplo number
uniquely defines the tool.) The internal T number of this tool is determined prior to the data
record using the command GETT("Identifier", duplo No.) and saved a variable ("T No." here).
The data required for the tool is written and then the entire program is transferred to the NC
where it is processed.
Only the variables for which data is entered have to be written. The first tool in the following
example contains all the data, the second tool only contains the relevant data.
The T number does not have to be determined in the retroload program if already specified
during loading because the data can then be assigned directly.
For example, for tool "1", writing length L1 looks like this:

$TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ;Tool type

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 153
Description of functions
3.6 Loading

$TC_DP3[1,1]=67.032 ;Length

Program for retroloading tool offset data

DEF INT Tno ;Definition of variable TNo

tl1:
TNo=GETT ("Drill 12mm",1)
if TNo==-1 goto tl2
$TC_DP1[TNo,1]=120 ;Tool type
$TC_DP2[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP3[TNo,1]=67.032 ;Length1
$TC_DP4[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP5[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP6[TNo,1]=24 ;Radius
$TC_DP7[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP8[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP9[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP10[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP11[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP12[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP13[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP14[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP15[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP16[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP17[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP18[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP19[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP20[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP21[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP22[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP23[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP24[TNo,1]=0
$TC_DP25[TNo,1]=0
$TC_MOP1[TNo,1]=0
$TC_MOP2[TNo,1]=0
$TC_MOP3[TNo,1]=0
$TC_MOP4[TNo,1]=0
tl2: ;Next tool
TNo=GETT ("Miller23",2)
if TNo==-1 goto error ;Possible error routine if tool does not exist
$TC_DP1[TNo,1]=120
$TC_DP3[TNo,1]=82.51
$TC_DP6[TNo,1]=25
Fault: ;Error
:
:

Tool Management
154 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.6 Loading

M17

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 155
Description of functions
3.7 Unloading

3.7 Unloading

3.7.1 Overview
Unloading removes the tool from the magazine. It always involves transporting a tool from a
real magazine into the loading magazine. In so doing, the owner location of the tool as well as
all reservations made in the real magazine are deleted. The job is initiated via PI service
(initiated via the HMI user interface) or language command. In so doing, NCK generates a
CMD1, this means that the DB71 is used.

3.7.2 PLC function when unloading

Overview
When unloading, here in the example, this is initiated by an HMI operator action – the target
address of the tool is specified to FC8/FC6 with the identifier of the loading/unloading point
(DB71.DB(n+16) and DBW(n+18), start address "n" is included in the interface list). The target
address is communicated to the FC8/FC6 as parameters "OldToolMag", "OldToolLoc" and
"Status = 1" or "Status = 10" once the unload operation has been successfully completed. The
"NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc" parameters must be assigned the value zero.

Unloading sequence
Unloading is controlled via DB71. The unloading sequence is as follows:
1. The PLC receives the command to unload the selected tool. The information is transferred
to the PLC in DB71. Example of the data in DB71 when unloading for the 2nd interface
Location 7 of magazine no. 1 must be unloaded at loading location 2.
Example:

DB71.DBX0.1=1 ;Interface 2 active

DB71.DBX34.1=1 ;Command: Unloading
DB71.DBW50=9999 Magazine no. of the unloading point
DB71.DBW52=2 ;Location no. of the unloading point
DB71.DBW54=1 ;Magazine no. for unloading
DB71.DBW56=7 ;Location no. for unloading
DB71.DBW58=0 ;Magazine no. target for loading
DB71.DBW60=0 ;Location no. target for loading

1. Generally, the PLC must now position "Location 7" from "Magazine No. 1" (from which the
tool should be unloaded) to the "loading/unloading point 2" and then unload the tool.
2. When the tool is removed from the magazine, FC8/FC6 must be called from the user
program and the unloading operation acknowledged.

Tool Management
156 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.7 Unloading

Example: Call FC8/FC6 when unloading

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB71 interface
TaskIdentNo 2 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 0 During unloading = 0
NewToolLoc 0 During unloading = 0
OldToolMag 9999 Mag. No. 9999
OldToolLoc 2 Location no. 2
Status 1/10 Operation completed
Ready Feedback from FC8
Error Feedback from FC8

The PLC user program then has to traverse the magazine to the correct unloading point and
execute unloading. If the tool comes via a buffer location (gripper, loader) to the unloading
point or station, then the NCK is to be notified of each position change by means of the FC8/
FC6 with status 104, 105. Status "1" is not set via FC8 until the tool is in the specified unloading
point/station. This means that the unload operation has been completed; the magazine position
is also automatically aligned. In this example, do not take into account possibly existing offsets
at location_7.

Positioning for unloading (with OP177 and SINUMERIK Operate)

This means that the HMI sends two tasks to the NCK (and this in turn to the PLC). First
positioning (which is described in the following), then unloading.
When a magazine is being positioned at a loading magazine, the target address is stored in
DB71.DBW(n+16) and DBW(n+18). This target address is passed to FC8/FC6 as parameters
"NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc" and "Status" = 1 once the magazine has been successfully
positioned. Parameters "OldToolMag", "OldTool-Loc" must be set to 0.
The magazine and magazine location to be positioned are stored in DB71.DBW(n+20) and
DBW(n+22). Positioning here only concerns magazine positioning a free location or a location
with a tool to a loading/unloading station. The number of the active interface identifies the
loading magazine (location No.).

Example: Positioning for unloading

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB 71 interface
TaskIdentNo 2 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9999 Mag. No. 9999
NewToolLoc 3 Loc. No. 3
OldToolMag 0 During positioning = 0
OldToolLoc 0 During positioning = 0
Status 1 Operation completed

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 157
Description of functions
3.7 Unloading

3.7.3 Unloading by deleting the T number from the magazine location

By directly writing to parameter $TC_MPP&[magazine No.,location No.] = 0, a tool can be
removed from this magazine location (whether it is a real magazine, buffer or loading
magazine). All reservations of the removed tool are automatically deleted.
This does not involve an associated command output to the PLC.

Tool Management
158 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.8 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

3.8 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

3.8.1 Relocate (task from TM system)

Basics
When relocating, the target address is the magazine and the loading location for the tool to be
relocated (DB71.DBW(n+24) and DBW n+26). The source of the tool is specified in
DB71.DBW(n+20) and DBW(n+22). The target address is passed to FC8/FC6 as parameters
"NewToolMag" and "NewToolLoc" and status = 1 when relocation has been successfully
completed. Parameters "OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc" must be set to zero because the tool
management recognizes the location of the old tool.
All relocation tasks are handled via the 1st interface.

Example of relocating a tool

FC 8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB71 interface
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 2 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 17 New location no.
OldToolMag 0 Old magazine number not used
OldToolLoc 0 Old location number not used
Status 1 Operation complete

3.8.2 Relocation by the PLC

Task from PLC

The PLC can also issue a task to tool management to relocate a tool. This is done by notifying
a new location for the tool to the tool management. The FC8/FC6 block (TaskIdent := 4) is
called with the following parameters:
● Old magazine no. (OldToolMag)
● Old location no. (OldToolLoc)
● New magazine no. (NewToolMag)
● New location no. (NewToolLoc)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 159
Description of functions
3.8 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

Example 1
The tool in magazine No. 1, location No. 5 is to be relocated to magazine No. 2, location No.
17. The PLC takes responsibility for ensuring that the location type is correct for the transfer.
This example for calling an FC8 does not take into consideration any checkback signal to tool
management for intermediate positions of tools.

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 2 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 17 New location No.
OldToolMag 1 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 5 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

Example 2
Example: The tool is to be relocated from mag. No. 1, location No. 5 via grippers 3 and 4 to
mag. No. 2, location No. 17.
FC8/FC6 must be called four times in this procedure. Only the important parameters are listed.
All other parameters are as for the example above.
The tool is transported in 4 steps:
1. From magazine 1, location 5 to gripper 3 (location no. 4)

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 9998 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 4 New location No.
OldToolMag 1 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 5 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

2. From gripper 3 to transfer location 2, location no. 6

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 9998 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 6 New location No.
OldToolMag 9998 Old magazine No.

Tool Management
160 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.8 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

OldToolLoc 4 Old location No.

Status 1 Operation completed

3. From transfer location 2, location no. 6 to gripper 4, location no. 5

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 9998 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 5 New location No.
OldToolMag 9998 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 6 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

4. From gripper 4, location no. 5 to magazine 2, location 17

FC8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 4 Task from PLC
TaskIdentNo 1 Channel No. for tool management
NewToolMag 2 New magazine No.
NewToolLoc 17 New location No.
OldToolMag 9998 Old magazine No.
OldToolLoc 5 Old location No.
Status 1 Operation completed

Note
TaskIdent 5 may be programmed only for a tool transfer (magazine → buffer location).
Otherwise an error message is output, even though the tool is transferred.

The reservation is automatically reset when the tool is transferred from the buffer back into the
magazine.

3.8.3 Positioning the magazine

Overview
When positioning, a traversing block is sent to the PLC by the tool management. Bit 3 is set
in DB71.DBB(n+0) "Position to the loading point". The magazine No. and the location No. (as
target) are transferred in the parameters DB71.DBW(n+20) and (n+22) during positioning.
The PLC then has to move this location to the loading point. The number of the loading point
is entered in DB71.DBW (n+18) or determined by the number of the interface. If the PLC has
moved the magazine location to the loading point, FC8/FC6 must be called and the operation
acknowledged with status 5 "Position changed".

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 161
Description of functions
3.8 Relocating tools and positioning the magazine

Example:
Location 5 in magazine 1 (source) must be moved to the loading magazine 2 (target).

DB71.DBX0.1 =1 Interface 2 active

DB71.DBX34.3 =1 Positioning has been initiated (n+0)
DB71.DBW50 =9999 Magazine No. of the loading magazine (n+16)
DB71.DBW52 =2 Location No. of new loading magazine (n+18)
DB71.DBW54 =1 No. of the magazine to be positioned (n+20)
DB71.DBW56 =5 No. of the location to be positioned (n+22)
DB71.DBW58 Magazine No. to which positioning is to be carried (n+24)
out
DB71.DBW60 Location No. to which positioning is to be carried (n+26)
out
Parameters "OldToolMag" and "OldToolLoc" in FC8/FC6 are not required for positioning
because only the PLC requires the information for traversing the magazine. The values for
NewToolMag and NewToolLoc are from DB71(n+24 and n+26). The PLC has to execute the
positioning task and acknowledge it with an FC8/FC6 call as follows:

Example: FC8/FC6 call for positioning

FC 8 parameters Values Comment

Start Starts task
TaskIdent 1 DB71 (loading/unloading, positioning, relocating)
TaskIdentNo 2 No. of active interface
NewToolMag 9999 Magazine no. 9999 (loading magazine)
NewToolLoc 2 Location 2
OldToolMag 0 During positioning = 0
OldToolLoc 0 During positioning = 0
Status 5 Operation completed
Ready Feedback from FC8
Error Feedback from FC8

Tool Management
162 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

3.9.1 Monitoring types

Quantity
The quantity monitoring, initiated by the language command SETPIECE, considers the cutting
edges of all of the tools that have been used. In this case, it must be observed that there can
be several spindles.

Service life
Tool life monitoring is only performed on the tool edge that is currently in use. As soon as the
path axes are moved (with the exception of G00), then monitoring time of the active cutting
edge is decremented. If the tool life for a cutting edge expires during machining, the tool is
disabled as a whole.

Wear
As is the case for the time and workpiece count (quantity) monitoring, the prerequisite for using
the wear monitoring function is that tool monitoring is enabled in the machine data. In addition,
wear monitoring must be enabled via an MD. The wear parameters of the cutting edge
correspond to the local offsets (additive offset parameters), see Section "Location-dependent
offsets, fine (additive offsets) (Page 231)".

Service life, quantity

The monitoring value runs from a value greater than 0 to 0. The monitoring setpoint has no
affect on the monitoring, this value is only evaluated when reactivating a tool.

Tool life, workpiece count and wear

The monitoring type for the tools is generally set when creating or loading. You can change
the monitoring type at any time by changing the setting for system variable MD $TC_TP9.
The tool management monitors a tool for tool life, workpiece count, tool wear state or additive
offset with prewarning limit.
The monitoring counter triggering the tool status change depends on the system variable
$TC_TP9 (= type of monitoring):
● $TC_TP9 = 0 → No monitoring
● $TC_TP9 = 1 → Time-monitored tool
● $TC_TP9 = 2 → Workpiece count-monitored tool
● $TC_TP9 = 4 → Wear-monitored tool
● $TC_TP9 = 8 → Additive offset

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 163
Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

Several monitoring types can be activated simultaneously for one tool. Of the monitoring types,
only wear monitoring and additive offset monitoring are mutually exclusive.
If the monitoring criterion (tool life/workpiece count and wear) for a tool that is currently located
in the spindle expires, it remains in use. Machining is not automatically interrupted to replace
the tool with a replacement tool. The tool is not disabled until the next time it is selected. Since
it is no longer "available", a search is made for a replacement tool and the replacement tool is
then loaded into the spindle. The tool change has to be organized by the PLC or come from
the NC cycle.
The monitoring counters count from a set value > 0 down to zero. Once a monitoring counter
has reached the value ≤ 0, the limit value is considered to have been reached. When a tool's
cutting edge (one of maximum 12 cutting edges) has reached its limit value, the whole tool is
set to status "disabled".

Prewarning limit reached

If a cutting edge has reached its prewarning limit, then the whole tool is set to the status
"Prewarning limit reached" (SLTD_SUSPENDED ($TC_TP8[i]=4)).
At the same time a message is issued to inform the operator that a replacement tool may be
required. If an operator action resets the monitoring counter from zero or the prewarning limit
back to a value > 0, or > prewarning limit, then the tool status changes automatically to reflect
the change in the data. This allows the operator to selectively withdraw a "disabled" status
caused by the tool expiring when its monitoring limit was reached.
If the tool has several cutting edges, all of the cutting edges must be beyond the monitoring
limits.

Tool monitoring alarms

When the prewarning limit or the monitoring limit of a tool is reached, one of the alarms 6010,
6011, 6012, 6013 (cancel clear delete condition) is output for information purposes.
With the NC language command SETPIECE(...) or PI command _N_TMPCIT (= other
workpiece counters) it is possible for several tools to reach a limit value and therefore result
in multiple alarms being issued.
No alarm is output if a limit value is reached as the result of data manipulation via variable
service (OPI).

Check monitoring status

A check can be made during program execution by issuing the programmed tool change
command (e.g. "M06" for milling) without a T call to see whether a monitoring function has
responded. If it has, tool life management will search for a replacement tool and a request for
a tool change issued.

Tool Management
164 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

Enable memory and function

In general, in machine data
● MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and
● MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
at least the bits 0 and 1 (3) must be set. This prepares the memory for the monitoring data and
enables the function.

Enabling tool life monitoring

For the tool life monitoring, in addition, in the channel-specific MD20320
$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK, the spindle (the tool holder) or the spindles must be
specified, for which a tool life check should be performed. This machine data is bit-coded.
Example: MD20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
● Value = 1, only spindle number 1
● Value = 2, only spindle number 2
● Value = 3, spindle numbers 1 and 2

3.9.2 Tool life monitoring

Monitoring of tool cutting edge

Tool life monitoring is only performed on the tool edge that is currently in use. The spindle (tool
holder) must have been activated beforehand (MD20320
$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK = spindle no.).
If MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER is > 0, then for MD 20320, the tool
holder number is selected and not the spindle number.

Service life Data backup during unloading takes place in milliseconds.

Disabled If the remaining tool life is less than or equal to 0, the tool is set to "disabled".
After the next tool change it is no longer used.
Monitoring from the The residual tool life is decreased whenever one of the 3 path axes is traversed
NCK at machining feedrate (e.g. G01). G00 traversing blocks are not "counted".
Monitoring from PLC The user can start and stop the time monitoring using PLC signal "Time moni‐
toring active" (DB21DBX1.3). Machine data 20310 is used to select whether
this control type is active.
Prewarning limit Entered during loading or via part program with $TC_MOP1=50. When the
prewarning limit has been reached, the tool is assigned the status "Prewarning
limit reached" (display in the magazine list).
Special case, limit val‐ The tool life of a tool expires while it is in use. A check is made as to whether
ues this disabled tool is re-programmed by a change operation (e.g. M06 without
T word), and whether the monitoring time has already elapsed. If yes, a re‐
placement tool is located.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 165
Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

$A-MONIFACT factor
By entering a channel-specific factor which is set before a tool is used for the first time, it is
possible to monitor the different degrees of tool wear resulting from machining different types
of workpiece material. The value is multiplied by the current time unit before the time value of
the cutting edge is decremented. The write operation is performed synchronously with the main
run.

Start and stop the tool life decrementation

Tool life monitoring runs when geometry axes are not traversed with G00 (default setting).
The user can start and stop the time monitoring using PLC signal "Time monitoring active"
(DB21 DBX1.3).
Which type of control is active is set via MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit
17. The default setting (bit 17=0) is standard; i.e. traversing blocks not equal to G00 will
increment the time counter.

Time monitoring hierarchy

The combination of system variable $A_MONIFACT and function "Program test active"
produces the following nested time monitoring structure:
Machine data MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK defines the monitoring control
via G00 or via a PLC signal. Tools on spindles that are activated by machine data MD20320
$MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK, are time-monitored.
The VDI signal "Program test active" switches the momentarily valid time monitoring on or off;
i.e. "Program test active" has a higher priority than the actual time monitoring.
When time monitoring is active, the real time (as defined by the internal clock) is multiplied by
the factor $A_MONIFACT and the result subtracted from the current time count of a tool edge
mounted on the spindle.

3.9.3 Workpiece count monitoring

Changing the number of workpieces

The number of workpieces can be changed by:
● Operator action at the HMI
● With a part program command (SETPIECE)
● PI service (TMPCIT) by PLC or HMI-OEM

Workpiece counter per spindle

Every spindle has a "memory" for the cutting edges used on it. With program command
SETPIECE (1) the workpiece counter for the cutting edges that are used on the main spindle
is decremented by 1. The workpiece counter of each spindle can be addressed individually.

Tool Management
166 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

The workpiece counter must count all the tools that are used to produce a workpiece. Take
into account that the machine may have several spindles and that different tools can be used
simultaneously.
The cutting edge of a tool is only counted once per spindle.
The part program programmer who programmed SETPIECE can program the parameter as
a function of the material.
SETPIECE (factor * no. of workpieces)
Like the factor for time monitoring, this function allows a workpiece count that depends on the
process, the workpiece material or other factors.
Workpiece count can be deactivated via the channel DB.DBX29.5.

Monitoring from the NCK The workpiece counter is decremented each time that SETPIECE is
programmed. When the prewarning limit is reached, an information
alarm is output. When the counter reaches the value=0, the tool is
disabled and an alarm is output. The next time the tool is called, the
replacement tool is loaded at change.
Set workpiece counter Entered when creating or loading the tool or via the part program with
e.g. $TC_MOP4=500.
Decrement number of work‐ The number of workpieces must be decremented at the relevant point
pieces in the part program with the NC language command SETPIECE (x, y)
(e.g. SETPIECE(1) → workpiece counter for main spindle tools is de‐
cremented by 1).
The function for decrementing the workpiece count is activated from
die PLC program using a PI command (TMPCIT).
Disabled When the workpiece count has reached zero the tool is disabled.
Prewarning limit Entered when creating or loading the tool or via part program with e.g.
$TC_MOP3=50. When the prewarning limit has been reached, the tool
is assigned the status "Prewarning limit reached".
Special case, limit values It is not possible to realize a workpiece count for any number of cutting
edges simultaneously! If the monitoring function has been enabled and
activated by machine data, then all spindles can be monitored together
at a time = "Number of cutting edges in the TO area" (= MD) for the
number of cutting edges.
An edge of a tool is only counted once per spindle.

3.9.4 Wear monitoring

The wear monitoring function is only available if the "Tool monitoring" system has been enabled
via machine data.
In addition, wear monitoring must be enabled using machine data (MD18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 5).

Definition
$TC_TP9 = 4; Wear monitoring is active for the tool.
$TC_TP9 = 8 can be set to select the "Additive offset" monitoring function if this is required.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 167
Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

$TC_TP9 = 4
The wear parameters for a tool edge are defined with system variables $TC_DP12, ...,
$TC_DP20.
These are assigned directly to the edge geometry values TC_DP3, ...,$TC_DP11.
$TC_DP10 and $TC_DP11 describe "angles". The other parameters stand for the tool edge
lengths and radii.
Only these values are included in the monitoring, i.e. wear parameters $TC_DP19 and
$TC_DP20, which are analogous to system variables $TC_DP10 and $TC_DP11, are not
taken into account.

Note
Wear monitoring is performed automatically by the NCK when the user changes the cutting
edge offsets.

Note
Wear monitoring does not monitor every single value but rather only the largest absolute value
of each of these maximum seven wear parameters ($TC_DP12, ..., $TC_DP18).

$TC_TP9 = 8
Wear parameters (system variables) of the cutting edge can be found in the additive offset
parameters.
Analog to wear, the following system variables are monitored for the additional offsets that are
dependent on the location (location-specific offsets) of the cutting edge:
● $TC_SCP12, ... $TC_SCP18
first additive offset for the cutting edge (if defined)
● $TC_SCP22, ... $TC_SCP28
second additive offset for the cutting edge (if defined) etc. for the other additive offsets for
the cutting edge
Note
Wear monitoring does not monitor every single value but rather only the high contribution
of each of these maximum seven additive offset parameters * number of defined additive
offsets for the cutting edge ($TC_SCP12, …, $TC_SCP18, $TC_SCP22, …, $TC_SCP28,
…).

Most tool geometries are described by a subset of the named data records.
If a parameter is changed (written), the NCK then checks whether the new value is higher than
any of the other parameters and, if necessary, this value is subtracted from the wear setpoint.
The result is the new actual value for the wear.
Analogous to other monitoring variables, the actual wear runs from the positive setpoint
towards zero.

Tool Management
168 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

Monitoring parameters (system variables)

$TC_MOP15 Wear setpoint or additive offset value

$TC_MOP5 Wear pre-warning limit or additive offset pre-warning limit
$TC_MOP6 Wear value or additive-offset setpoint
The physical quantity of the new monitoring parameters is "Length". The unit is the same as
for the wear values.
Wear monitoring can be deactivated via the channel DB.DBX29.6.
The signal only acts on changes in wear data that occur during execution of the NC program.
The PLC signal is suppressed if this data is changed via the OPI (e.g. during HMI operation).

Reset to setpoints
Resetting the actual values of wear and additive offset "fine" means that all the parameters for
wear offset and additive offset used for monitoring are set to zero.

Example
For the tool with T No.=3, the wear monitoring is active and

$TC_MOP5[3,1]=0.002 ;= Wear prewarning limit

$TC_MOP6[3,1]=0.003 ;= Wear actual value
$TC_MOP15[3,1]=0.007 ;= Wear setpoint

It was already set

$TC_DP12[3,1]=0.004 ;= Wear component 1

$TC_DP13[3,1] =+0.00 ;= Wear component 2

Wear component 3 is now set

$TC_DP14[3,1] := -0.006.
Thus the maximum absolute value is given for the wear components = 0.006.
The resulting new actual value is
$TC_MOP15[3,1] - 0.006 = 0.001 = $TC_MOP6[3,1].
The prewarning limit has been reached.
Note: The wear components can be negative or positive - or a mixture of each.

Note
The VDI signal "Activate program test" has no effect on wear monitoring since new wear values
are only entered during machining and not during the program test (provided that wear was
not changed by the machining program itself).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 169
Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

3.9.5 Signals to and from the PLC

Overview
Previously, an alarm message was output as soon as the prewarning limit or limit value was
reached. Alarms 6410 and 6411 are output when the prewarning limit is reached and 6412 and
6413 when the limit value is reached. Alarms 6410 and 6412 are triggered via the OP interface
and alarms 6411 and 6413 via the NC program. The alarm texts identify the affected tool via
the tool ID, duplo number and D number.
The following information is returned to the channel interface for one OB1 cycle (internal T
numbers):
● Prewarning limit reached
● Limit reached
A strobe signal is set for one PLC cycle (DB channel.DBB344) which indicates that new data
is available.

VDI signal "Warning limit reached" channel DB.DBD348

If a tool reaches its prewarning limit with tool life, workpiece count or wear monitoring, the
internal T No. of the tool is entered here and the associated strobe signal is set.

VDI signal "Limit value reached" channel DB.DBD352

If the tool life, workpiece count or wear value has expired for a monitored tool, the internal T
No. of the tool is entered and the associated strobe signal is set.

Note
If machining is being performed with tools that are monitored for their workpiece count, it is
possible for several tools to reach their prewarning limit or limit value simultaneously
(SETPIECE is programmed at the end of program).
In this case, only the T No. of the tool that was last programmed is output.

VDI signal "T number of new replacement tool" - channel DB.DBD356

The transition to a new replacement tool is initiated by the tool status "was in use". This means
that when searching for a tool in the NCK, if a (usable) tool was found that had still not been
used, then it is evaluated as being the first selection and the interface signal set.
This process state change is output to the PLC via the T number of the replacement tool.
The action of the operator changing the tool status does not cause any change to the signal.

Tool Management
170 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

VDI signal "Last replacement tool in the tool group" - channel DB.DBD360
If, during the tool change when searching for a tool in the NCK a tool is found, and at this point
in time there are no further replacement tools available for the programmed spindle / tool
holder, then this is evaluated as the "Last replacement tool found in the tool group".
If there is only one tool (i.e. there is no replacement tool) it is also a tool group. When this tool
is programmed, the interface signal is set immediately.
This process state change is output to the PLC via the T number of the replacement tool.
The action of the operator changing the tool status does not cause any change to the signal.

Note
For tool groups containing many tools, the function increases the time required in the NCK for
the main run when the tool is selected.
The function must be enabled MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 18=1.

Disable monitored tools - PLC-controlled by the VDI signal

In earlier versions, a tool assumed the status "disabled" as soon as the actual value of the
active monitoring function reached the value zero. A tool being used for machining that is set
to "disabled" remains operational until the next tool change takes place. After that the tool can
no longer be used.
The PLC can also determine when a disabled tool can no longer be used, i.e. when the
"disabled" status is taken into account in the tool search.
● With the VDI signal "Tool disable not active" = 1
(channel DB.DBX29.7 = 1) the NCK does not take the tool status "disabled" into account
during the tool search.
● With the VDI signal "Tool disable not active" = 0
(channel DB.DBX29.7 = 0) the NCK takes the tool status "disabled" into account during the
tool search.
The bit is channel-specific.

"Search for active tool" strategy

This search strategy can ensure that a machining operation is not performed with different
tools from the same tool group.
When the tool is disabled, a monitoring function and the set VDI signal "Tool disable not active"
mean that the status "active" is not canceled.
This tool is therefore assigned the status "active" and "disabled".
If the required machining operation is terminated without a tool change, the status of all
disabled tools must be checked. A PI service (_N_TMRASS, in PLC TMRASS) is provided for
this. This service can be used to cancel the status "active" for all tools that have been disabled
(e.g. by the PLC program at the end of the program).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 171
Description of functions
3.9 Tool monitoring (workpiece count, tool life, wear)

The other tool-search strategies

A disabled tool can still be used with the other tool-search strategies when the VDI signal "Tool
disable not active" (channel DB.DBX29.7 = 1) is set. The tool selected solely depends on the
search strategy.
The search strategy therefore takes precedence over the VDI signal "Tool disable not active".
Both the last tool to be disabled or any other disabled tool can be selected.
Another tool which is not disabled might also exist, but is not selected because of the search
strategy!

TO unit active in several channels

If a TO unit is assigned to several channels (tool and magazine data are "visible" in several
channels), then the setting of the channel-specific VDI signal "Tool disable" is effective in each
channel.

Tool Management
172 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.10 Tool monitoring without active tool management

3.10 Tool monitoring without active tool management

3.10.1 Tool monitoring overview

General information

Note
The function is designed for simple applications, only 1-channel systems are supported

The tool monitoring without active tool management is activated via the following machine data:
● MD18080 $MN_MMTOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 1=1
● MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 1=1
Note
Monitoring without active tool management
The "Monitoring without active tool management" function (TMMO) is set with the same
option date as the tool management (TMMG).

The tool monitoring without active tool management function allows the following monitoring
types of the active cutting edge of the active tool:
● Monitoring the tool life
● Monitoring the workpiece count
● Monitoring the wear
● Monitoring the additive offset
The function allows tool identifiers to be used and it is also possible to use replacement tools.

Monitoring counter
Monitoring counters exist for each monitoring type. These count from a set value > 0 down to
zero. When a counter has decremented to a value of ≤0, the limit value is reached. A
corresponding alarm is issued. The same applies if a cutting edge of a tool has reached its set
prewarning limit.

Note
The monitoring function cannot be used with the "flat D numbers" function.

State and type of tool monitoring

System parameter $TC_TP8 can be used to determine the state for the particular tool,
$TC_TP9 to determine the monitoring function type.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 173
Description of functions
3.10 Tool monitoring without active tool management

Contrary to the magazine management (see Section "Magazines (Page 29)"), in the tool
monitoring function without active tool management, only the following states are of
significance:
● $TC_TP8[t] - State of the tool with the number t
Bit 0 = 1: Tool is active
Bit 0 = 0: Replacement tool
Bit 1 = 1: Tool is enabled
Bit 0 = 0: Tool is not enabled
Bit 2 = 1 Tool is disabled
Bit 2 = 0: Tool is not disabled
Bit 3: Reserved
Bit 4 = 1: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 4 = 0: Prewarning limit not reached
● $TC_TP9[t] - Type of the monitoring function for the tool with the number t
= 0: No monitoring
= 1: Time-monitored tool
= 2: Workpiece count-monitored tool
= 4: Wear-monitored tool
= 8: Additive offset
Several monitoring types are possible for a tool. Wear and additive offset monitoring cannot
be simultaneously selected (only alternatively).

System variables for active tool

The active cutting edge of the active tool can be determined using an existing system/OPI
variable:
● $P_TOOL / actDNumber: Active tool offset D
● $P_TOOLNO / actTNumber: Active tool number T

3.10.2 Tool life monitoring

Overview
Tool life monitoring is done for the tool cutting edge that is currently in use (active cutting edge
D of the active tool T).
As soon as the path axes traverse (G1, G2, G3, ... but not for G00), the residual tool life
($TC_MOP2[t,d]) of this tool cutting edge is updated. If the remaining tool lifetime of a tool
cutting edge expires during a machining operation, an alarm is output. The tool changes to the

Tool Management
174 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.10 Tool monitoring without active tool management

"disabled" condition and cannot be programmed as long as the "disabled" condition is present.
The operator must intervene and ensure that an operational tool for machining is provided.

Note
As standard, the time is counted if the geometry axes are traversed - but not equal to G00. As
an alternative, using MD $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 17, the time monitoring can
be started and stopped from the PLC.
The channel-specific system parameter $A_MONIFACT allows the clock to be either run
slower or faster.

Time monitoring and reference to the spindle or to the tool holder

For MD $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE, only the time for the active tool is
counted whose programmed spindle number has a value that is set is by selecting the bit in
MD $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK.
The value of MD $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK has no significance, if MD
$MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE. In this case, the time is counted and
monitored for each active cutting edge.

3.10.3 Workpiece count monitoring

General
The active cutting edge of the tool that has been loaded at change is monitored for the
workpiece count without reference to the spindle number (standard).
Monitoring the workpiece count registers all the tool edges that are used to produce a
workpiece. If the workpiece count is changed by an operator input, the monitoring data of all
the cutting edges that have become active since the last workpiece count is adjusted. It is
taken into account that several tool cutting edges can be simultaneously used.
The workpiece count can be updated by the PLC, using the PI command _N_TMPCIT or from
the NC program using the language command SETPIECE.

Workpiece count monitoring and reference to the spindle or to the tool holder
If MD $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE is used, the address extension of T is
interpreted as spindle number. The workpiece counter monitoring is then realized separately
for the spindles; further, the SETPIECE command requires the "spindle number" parameter.
If MD $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE is used, the parameter "spindle
number" in SETPIECE and/or the analog PI service is ignored.
The workpiece count monitoring can be activated and deactivated by the PLC using an
interface signal.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 175
Description of functions
3.10 Tool monitoring without active tool management

3.10.4 Wear monitoring

The wear monitoring must be enabled using MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK,
bit 5. As default, the function is not activated.
The wear parameters for a cutting edge are defined with system variables $TC_DP12 ...20.
The highest value of parameter $TC_DP12 ...18 - responsible for the lengths and radii of the
cutting edge - is monitored.
The wear monitoring can be activated and deactivated by the PLC using an interface signal.

3.10.5 Monitoring the additive offset

When using the "additive offset" function, using $TC_TP9=8 for the wear monitoring, additive
offset monitoring can be selected. Instead of wear parameters $TC_DP12 ... 18, the additive
offset parameters $TC_SCP12 ...18 are monitored. This corresponds to a defined 1st additive
offset of the cutting edge. In turn, only the highest value of the additive offset parameter of all
defined additive offsets is monitored.

3.10.6 Working with replacement tools

If replacement tools are used, it is necessary to define the rules relating to the transition to the
replacement tool.
When changing a tool, only the name of the tool group is specified in the part program. This
comprises several tools, that differ by their duplo number. The NCK selects, if available, the
tool with the "active" state. If there is no tool with the "active" state, the next tool that can be
used is selected whose value of the system variable $TC_TP10 regarding the other tools in
the tool group is the lowest. The user allocates the parameter values so that tools are used in
the required sequence. If values are not allocated, then the NCK automatically selects some
sort of suitable tool.

3.10.7 Examples

Precondition
Activating the tool monitoring without active tool management for the option "tool monitoring":
MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x02
MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 0x02
Service life monitoring for tool 2, cutting edge 1 in the NC program

$TC_TP9[2,1]=1 ;Activation of the service life monitoring

$TC_MOP1[2,1]=100 ;Prewarning limit in minutes
$TC_MOP2[2,1]=245 ;Residual tool life in minutes
$TC_MOP11[2,1]=800 ;Setpoint service life in minutes

Tool Management
176 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.10 Tool monitoring without active tool management

Service life monitoring for the active tool with active D number in the NC program

$TC_TP9[$P_TOOLNO, $P_TOOL]=1 ;Activation of the service life monitoring

$TC_MOP1[$P_TOOLNO, $P_TOOL]=200 ;Prewarning limit in minutes
$TC_MOP2[$P_TOOLNO, $P_TOOL]=602 ;Residual tool life in minutes
$TC_MOP11[$P_TOOLNO, $P_TOOL]=700 ;Setpoint service life in minutes

3.10.8 NC language commands

General
The NC language commands, which apply for tool monitoring without tool management, are
only listed here. A detailed description is provided in this documentation under the appropriate
index entry.
● SETPIECE
Decrement workpiece counter.
● RESETMON
Language command for setpoint activation
● $A_MONIFACT
Read factor for tool life monitoring.
● NEWT
Create new tool.
● DELT
Delete tool.
● GETT
Read T number
● GETACTT
Read the active internal T No.
The associated PI commands can also be used:
● _N_TMCRTO
● _N_TMCRTC
● _N_TMGETT
● _N_TRESMO

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 177
Description of functions
3.11 Variants of D-number assignments

3.11 Variants of D-number assignments

3.11.1 Relative D No. for each T - standard

D numbers ranging from 1 to max. 12 are available for every T = "identifier" (with TM) or for
every T number (without TM). These D numbers are assigned directly to the tool cutting edges.
An data record ($TC_DPx[t,d]) belongs to each D number (= cutting edge number).
D0 is the offset deselection code.

7
7
7
' 7\SH *HRPHWU\ :HDU %DVLV

'

'

'
&XWWLQJHGJHVWR

2QHPHPRU\ZLWKXSWRFXWWLQJHGJHVSHUWRRO

2IIVHWVHOHFWLRQGHSHQGLQJRQWRROQXPEHU

Image 3-20 Structure of the tool offset memory

3.11.2 Absolute D No. without reference to the T number (flat D No.)

Independence between D number and T number can be selected as an alternative to relative
D numbers in systems without tool management.
The reference of T number, cutting edge and offset by the D number is defined by the user.
The range of D numbers is between 1 and 32000. D0 is the offset deselection code.

Note
The T number is always output to the PLC with an extended address (= spindle or tool holder
number) with this type of tool offset.
Uniform system support is not available for this function.
(SINUMERIK Operate does not support the function)

Tool Management
178 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.11 Variants of D-number assignments

' 7\SH *HRPHWU\ :HDU %DVLV

'

'

'Q

&XWWLQJHGJHVWRQ

8QLTXHFXWWLQJHGJH'QXPEHUDVVLJQPHQW

'LUHFWDFFHVVWRFXWWLQJHGJHYDOXHV

Image 3-21 Structure of the tool offset memory

3.11.3 Free selection of D numbers for every T

D numbers can be freely assigned to tool edge numbers in systems with and without tool
management. A maximum of 12 cutting edges are possible for each tool "T". The upper limit
for the D numbers used is limited by the machine data.
This assignment option is an extension of the process to relative D numbers.
With this setting ($MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO >
$MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL) additional program commands can be used
that make a check for unambiguous assignment of D numbers to T numbers or identifiers
possible. With this setting, the cutting edge number $TC_DPCE[T-No,D-No] is also created
The same D numbers shall be assigned in each case for the cutting edges for duplo tools
(same identifiers).

7
7
&( 7
 '[ 7\SH *HRPHWU\ :HDU %DVLV

 '\

 ']

 '[\

8QLTXH'QXPEHU

7RROHGJHQXPEHUWR

2QHPHPRU\ZLWKXSWRFXWWLQJHGJHVSHUWRRO

Image 3-22 Structure of the tool offset memory

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 179
Description of functions
3.11 Variants of D-number assignments

Note
Uniform system support is not available for this function.

Machine data for user (unique) assignment of D numbers

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO = Maximum permissible D number
Example:

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO=1 A maximum of 1 offset (D1) can be defined per

tool.
$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO=9999 Tools can be assigned unique D numbers as
follows:
T1 with D1, D2, D3
T2 with D10, D20, D30
T3 with D100, D200, D300

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL =Assignment of tool edges per tool

Example:

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL=1 Only tools used with 1 cutting edge

$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL=12 Up to 12 cutting edges per tool.

Check for uniqueness (CHKDNO)

The NC language command CHKDNO checks the D numbers assigned within the NCK for
uniqueness. The D numbers of all tools defined within a TO unit may not occur more than
once. No allowance is made for replacement tools.

Check within the magazine (CHKDM)

Exactly like CHKNO, the NC language command CHKDM checks the D numbers assigned
within the NCK for an activated tool management for uniqueness. This check function can be
restricted to individual magazines.

D number to T number (GETACTTD)

Using the NC language command GETACTTD if tool management is active, the T number in
which the D number occurs can be searched for.
Precondition for this is that the D numbers have been uniquely assigned in the TO unit being
considered.

GETDNO, SETDNO when re-equipping

The NC language commands GETDNO and SETDNO permit reading and writing the offset
number D for a specified cutting-edge number CE.

Tool Management
180 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.11 Variants of D-number assignments

GETDNO (T, CE): Read the D number for the cutting edge CE of the tool T
SETDNO (T, CE, D): Set the D number for the cutting edge CE of the tool T
$TC_DPCE[T, D]=...: Assignment of tool edge number CE to offset number D

Example:
Rename cutting edge CE=3 from D2 to D17
● With initial situation:
Internal T number 1
D number: 2
Tool 1 cutting edge with:
$TC_DP2[1, 2]=120 ;tool radius T1, D2: 120 mm
$TC_DP3[1, 2]=5.5 ;tool radius T1, D2: 5.5 mm
$TC_DPCE[1, 2]=3 ;cutting edge number T1, D2: 3
(programming: T1,...D2)
● using variable definition:
DEF INT DNoOld, DNoNew=17
DnOld=GETDNO (1, 3) ;value 2 is read in DnOld
SETDNO (1, 3, DNoNew) ;the new D no. is assigned to the cutting edge
● The new D value 17 is assigned to cutting edge CE=3
$TC_DP2[1,17]=120
$TC_DP3[1, 17]=5.5
$TC_DPCE[1, 17]=3

3.11.4 Location-dependent offsets (additive offsets)

Overview
Location-dependent offsets are a generalized form of wear. They are part of the cutting edge
data. The parameters of the additive offset refer to the geometrical data of a cutting edge.
Location-dependent offset can in general be used, i.e. with active/inactive tool management;
with flat D-number function.
To meet the requirements of special machine operating modes, the location-dependent offsets
can be subdivided into the following categories by setting the appropriate machine data:
● Location-dependent offset, fine
● Location-dependent offsets, coarse = setting-up offset
The purpose of the setting-up offset is to allow the operator to set values prior to the machining
operation. These values are stored in their own memory in the NCK, the operator can access
the location-dependent fine offsets via the HMI. Location-dependent offsets "fine" and location-
dependent offsets "coarse" are added NCK-internally and then act like the additive offset itself.
Several location-dependent offsets can be defined per D number. Machine data define the
absolute number of location-dependent offsets, the maximum number of location-dependent

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 181
Description of functions
3.11 Variants of D-number assignments

offsets per cutting edge and specify which additive offsets are active after the end of program
or when the Reset key is pressed.
Applicable only when tool management is active:
MD18112 $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCOR can be set to define which additive offset must be
operative if a tool is assigned the "active" status in the part program in the coarse of a
programmed tool change:
● Additive offset values "fine" of the tool cutting edges remain unchanged or
● Additive offset values "fine" of the tool cutting edges are set to the value 0
The function is enabled by setting bit 8 = 1 in machine data
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

DL - programming the additive/setting-up offset

Programming the additive offset is always relative to the active D number and is executed
using the command
DL ="n"
The additive offset with the relative number "n" with respect to the active D number is activated
by this. This means that the additive offset "n" is added to the wear of the active D number.
The additive offset is deselected with the command
DL = 0

Configuration of additive/setting-up offset

$MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4=0
Corresponds to the default setting; only one data record of additive offset available per DL
number. In this case, the term "additive offset" merely refers to the data represented by
$TC_SCPx.

$GGLWLYHRIIVHW
7&B6&3>W@


'RIIVHW 7&B6&3>W@
7&B'3>W@

7&B'3>W@

7&B'3>W@ $GGLWLYHRIIVHW
 7&B6&3>W@
7&B'3>W@ 
7&B'3&(>W@ 
7&B6&3>W@

Image 3-23 $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4=0

Tool Management
182 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.11 Variants of D-number assignments

The data in the diagram is used when programming (the tool with T=t is active):

D2 ;Cutting edge offsets

;i.e. $TC_DP3,...$TC_DP11 + wear ($TC_DP12,...$DP29) + adapter dimen-
sion
...
DL=1 ;Additive offset 1 is added to the existing offsets of D2
;i.e. $TC_SCP13,...$TC_SCP21
...
DL=2 ;Additive offset 1 is no longer added to offset D2, but additive off-
set 2 instead
;i.e. $TC_SCP23,...$TC_SCP31
...
DL=0 ;Deselection of additive offset; only the data of D2 is still effec-
tive

$MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4=1

Setting-up offsets are available. The general term "additive offset" refers to a combination of
the "fine" additive offset, represented by $TC_SCPx, and the additive offset, represented by
$TC_ECPx. There are two data records for one DL number. The additive offset equals the
product of the corresponding components $TC_SCPx + $TC_ECPx.

$GGLWLYHRIIVHW
6HWWLQJXSRIIVHW ILQH
7&B(&3>W@ 7&B6&3>W@
 
 
7&B(&3>W@ 7&B6&3>W@
'RIIVHW
7&B'3>W@

7&B'3>W@
 $GGLWLYHRIIVHW
7&B'3>W@ 6HWWLQJXSRIIVHW
 7&B(&3>W@ ILQH
7&B'3>W@  7&B6&3>W@
7&B'3&(>W@  
7&B(&3>W@
7&B6&3>W@

Image 3-24 $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 4=1

The data in the diagram is used when programming (the tool with T=t is active):

D2 ;Cutting edge offsets

;i.e. $TC_DP3,...$TC_DP11 + wear ($TC_DP12,...$DP29) + adapter dimen-
sion
...
DL=1 ;Additive offset 1 is added to the existing offsets of D2
;i.e. $TC_ECP13 + $TC_SCP13 ,...$TC_ECP21 + $TC_SCP21
...

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 183
Description of functions
3.11 Variants of D-number assignments

DL=2 ;Additive offset 1 is no longer added to offset D2, but additive off-
set 2 instead
;i.e. $TC_ECP23 + $TC_SCP23,... $TC_ECP31 + $TC_SCP31
...
DL=0 ;Deselection of additive offset; only the data of D2 is still effec-
tive

The new NC language command DELDL can be used to delete location-dependent offsets
from cutting edges.

Tool Management
184 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

3.12 Adapter data

3.12.1 Overview

Purpose
With the system variables $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22 and $TC_DP23, the standard data record
for the tool offset offers the option of entering the dimensions for an adapter (length1, length2
and length3).
This data is defined offset-specific.
If tool management is active the additional adapter data can also be assigned to specific
magazine locations.
This function is used for adapters that are fixed to a magazine location for a long period and
used by different types of tool.
In individual cases, it is also possible to use identical adapters on several magazine locations.
To do this it makes sense to define and store the adapter data records separately from the
magazine locations.

1HXWUDO 7UDQVIRUPHG
'HIDXOWJHRPHWU\ 7RROJHRPHWU\

4:
6/ 7XUUHWORFDWLRQ
ZLWK
DGDSWHU
 
/:   7RROOHQJWK
//

  &XWWLQJHGJHSRVLWLRQ
DGDSWHUV  

/$

Image 3-25 Adapter transformation

Adapter transformation
Adapter data "adapter transformation" allows fixed orientation of the tool on the adapter or
orientation of the adapter including its tool with reference to the machine.
This function can be used as an alternative to the previous one. If adapter data are used,
system variables $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22 and $TC_DP23 have a different reference and are
therefore only formally part of the cutting edge data record in the NCK.

3.12.2 Description of function

The adapter data function must be enabled via machine data (MD18104:
$MN_MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 185
Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

In order to activate the setting, bit 7 must be set in MD18080

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Definitions
The machine data can be used to set two definition types of adapter data:
● One adapter data record is assigned to each magazine location as standard.
● Adapter data records can be defined independently of magazine locations. The magazine
locations are then assigned as an additional step.
The magazine location is the reference point for adapter and tool. Both are assigned to the
magazine location.
The following elements are implemented when programming D numbers in the part program:
● The offset must be assigned to a real tool.
● The tool is assigned to a magazine location.
● It is possible to assign an adapter to the magazine location, for which a transformation
(orientation) of the tool it contains can be defined.
Thus, the working offset can be clearly computed and the tool path accordingly adjusted.
If an additive offset is programmed, then its value refers to the active D offset.

3.12.3 Activation

Preconditions
● In order to be able to use magazine location oriented adapter data, machine data MD18104
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER must have a value that is not equal to zero.
● Adapter data records must be defined.
● If the values of the machine data are > 0 ,the adapters must be linked to the magazine
locations or assigned to them (can be automated via the HMI or using a cycle).
As a result, the adapter data including the defined transformations are always taken into
account for the tool located on the magazine location in question. The working offset is
calculated including the transformation and the adapter data.
The offset data can then be displayed as follows:
● Geometrical data for the tool (system variable $TC_DP3,...DP11); designated as neutral
default geometry
● Non-transformed working offset (sum of the values from tool geometry, wear, additive
offset, tool base dimension or adapter)
● Non-transformed working offset (transformation of the sum of the values from tool
geometry, wear, additive offset) and tool base dimension of the adapter).
The quantities to be transformed can be selected via machine data. The mode of
transformation of the additive offset can be set.

Tool Management
186 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

Magazine-location-related adapter data records

Create new
MD18104 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1:
One magazine location and one adapter data record are created. Default values are stored in
the adapter data record which is automatically linked to the magazine location.
It is not possible to create a new free adapter at this point. The adapter numbers are assigned
automatically (1 ... max. number of available magazine locations).
Delete
If an adapter data record is linked to a magazine location (MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1),
it cannot be deleted.

Note
Only the setting $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1 is currently supported by HMI
Operate.

Free adapter data records

Create new
MD18104 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER > 0:
The adapter data can be created freely. Adapter data can be created by the user with a write
operation to a non-existent data record.
$TC_ADPTi[n] = value;i = T, 1 2, 3, ..., n (number of the adapter)
If data record n does not yet exist and the maximum number of adapter data records that have
already been defined is less than the value of MD18104 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER,
a new adapter data record is created and assigned specific values.
The value "value" is assigned to parameter i. The following applies, 0 < n ≤ 3 2000. The index
value 0 is reserved.

Note
The adapters must be assigned explicitly to the magazine locations for
MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER > 0.

Delete
If, MD18104 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER has the value > 0, then the adapter data can be
deleted as required provided it is not assigned to a magazine location.
$TC_ADPTT[n] = -1
Adapter data record n is deleted and the memory becomes free again.
Deleting an assigned adapter data record:
The assignment to the magazine location must be undone first. You can only do this if the
magazine location is empty. An alarm is issued if deletion fails.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 187
Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

Please proceed as follows:

● Remove the tool from the magazine location
(unload, relocate).
● Remove the adapter from the magazine location.
● Delete the adapter data record (with $TC_ADPTTi[n] = -1).
Adapter data record n is deleted and the memory becomes free again.

Deleting all adapter data records

For MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER > 0, you can delete the adapter data if it is not assigned to
a magazine location:
$TC_ADPTT[0] = -1
All non-assigned adapter data of the TO units is deleted. If you want to delete assigned
adapters, you must first undo the assignment of those adapters to magazine locations. An
alarm is issued if deletion fails.

Read/write adapter parameters

You can modify adapter data at any time even if an adapter is assigned to a magazine location
and/or a tool is located in the magazine location with the adapter.

Magazine location assignment/release

For MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER > 0, an adapter record must be assigned to a magazine
location explicitly:
$TC_MPP7[m,p] = "adapter no."
Adapter number "adapter no." is assigned to magazine location p of magazine m. For "adapter
no." = 0 any previous assignment is removed.

Note
An assignment can only be established or released if no tool is assigned to the magazine
location.

Determination of the adapter

When determining the relevant adapter, a distinction is made between a turret and the other
magazines.
The following applies for a turret:
The adapter is used on the owner location (i.e. the source location, whereby the tool only
leaves the magazine location in the data) of the selected tool.
The following applies for chain and box-type magazines:

Tool Management
188 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

The adapter of the current magazine location containing the tool (usually the spindle) is used.
Example:
A tool magazine is changed from Magazine_1/Location_1 into the spindle. The adapter from
Magazine_location_1 is not read now, but rather from the spindle location. This means that in
the change cycle, the adapter data from the magazine location must be copied to the spindle
location.

Example of an adapter transformation

A turning tool with lengths L and Q is described below.

7  LGHQWLW\ 7  7  7 

O O O
O O
O
O
O O
, 4 O /
O

7  7  7  7 
O O O 4
O
O 
 O

O O O /
O O
 O

Image 3-26 The 8 defined transformations (T = 1...8) for the adapter with G 18 and for a turning tool.
The assignments of tool lengths I1, I2, I3 are shown on the geometry axes x, y, z.

Transformations for numbers 1 to 8 are defined. Number 1 is the identity: no transformation

of input data.
Other transformations can be implemented. The available transformations are designed
initially for turning tools. These are typically defined by Q=I1=$TC_DP3 and L=I2=$TC_DP4.
The transformation numbers correspond to the transformations shown in the table. In general:
Length1t, length2t, length3t = f(length1, length2, length3) = f(l1,l2,l3) = f(Q,L,l3)

Transformation GEO
number
X Y Z Turning tool with G18 transformation
1 +L1 +L3 +L2 -
2 +L1 -L3 -L2 ROT X 180
3 -L1 -L3 +L2 ROT Z 180
4 -L1 +L3 -L2 ROT X 180 Z 180
5 +L2 -L3 +L1 ROT Y 90 Z 180
6 -L2 +L3 +L1 ROT Y -90

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 189
Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

7 +L2 +L3 -L1 ROT Y 90

8 -L2 -L3 -L1 ROT Y -90 Z 180

L1, L2 and L3 are working offsets of the tool prior to transformation with or without adapter
(depending on machine data settings). They are assigned to the geometry axes during
compensation.

Note
In turning, L and Q are also used to describe a tool. In the above table, l1 corresponds, for
example, to variable Q (or x direction) and l2 to variable L (or z direction), assuming the plane
G18 is selected (default setting for turning machines).

As standard, activation of an offset is calculated as follows:

Offset = D offset + xi(e.g. wear, additive offset)

Length1 $TC_DP3 + xi
Length2 $TC_DP4 + xi+1
Length3 $TC_DP5 + xi+2
Length4 $TC_DP6 + xi+3

The adapter transformation then acts on the transformed tool offset values and is added to the
transformed offset values.
The transformation number of the adapter causes a transformation of the tool (the cutting
edges) located in this adapter (orientation according to the transformation number).
Working offset = f(offset) + adapter dimension of the magazine location

aLength1 Length1t + $TC_ADPT1

aLength2 Length2t+ $TC_ADPT2
aLength3 Length3t + $TC_ADPT3
ARadius1 Radius1

Depending on the programmed plane selection G17, G18, G19, these values are added to the
geometry axes.

G17, G18, G19 - plane selection (declarations)

The following agreements (different for machining and milling tools) apply for assigning tool-
length parameters of the tools to the geometry axes:

Machining plane System variables for tool length description

$TC_DP3(I1) $TC_DP4(I2) $TC_DP5(I3)
G17 Milling Z Y X
Turning Y X Z

Tool Management
190 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

G18 Milling Y X Z
Turning X Z Y
G19 Milling X Z Y
Turning Z Y X

Transformation of cutting edge position

The cutting edge position described by system variable $TC_DP2 is also transformed.
Transformations for the cutting edge position are performed as shown in the table below:

Transformation number Cutting edge position

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 2 1 4 3 7 6 5 8 9
3 4 3 2 1 5 8 7 6 9
4 3 4 1 2 7 8 5 6 9
5 1 4 3 2 6 5 8 7 9
6 4 1 2 3 8 5 6 7 9
7 2 3 4 1 6 7 8 5 9
8 3 2 1 4 8 7 6 5 9

7&B'3
,RU4 3 7&B'3
,
7XUQLQJ 0LOOLQJ
7&B'3
6 5DGLXV 6

7&B'3 7&B'3
,RU/ ,

Image 3-27 Turning and milling tools - relationship between cutting edge position and radius
compensation

Turning tool geometries (I1, I3 or L, Q) are described in terms of P, the point of approach at the
workpiece. However, the center point of cutting edge S with reference to the tool nose radius
must be known for radius compensation.
This center point can only be accurately calculated if the cutting edge position is known. Point
S can then be derived from point P.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 191
Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

The position of the tool to the workpiece coordinate system is defined using the cutting edge
position (values 1 ... 8). Cutting edge position 9 corresponds to S = P.

Note
The cutting edge position is only used for turning tools because their geometry is described
with reference to P and not with reference to S as is the case for milling tools.

Adapter transformation for tools with three length components

The transformations defined here constitute a subset of all conceivable transformations. Only
certain discrete values are considered here - in particular those that meet the requirements
for turning tools (2 length components only).

System variables $TC_DP21 ... 23 and $TC_ADPT

If the function "Adapter" is active, then there is no further cutting-edge specific data for the
"Base adapter dimension".
In order to keep cycles that operate with adapter data compatible, the following rules apply:
If a tool is at a magazine location with an adapter and the adapter data can be accessed by
system variable $TC_DP21...23, then the adapter parameters of the location can be read and
written.

'.RUUHNWXUHQ
'RIIVHWV :HUN]HXJ
7RRO
'1UG  LQWHUQH71UW
,QWHUQDO7QRW
'QRG
&(1UFH
&(QRFH  G
G
 
7&B'3>WG@
7&B'3>WG@ 
7&B'3>WG@
7&B'3>WG@ 
GQ
0DJD]LQSODW]
0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQ
GQ
 7&B033>PS@
7&B033>PS@ WW
 7&B033>PS@
7&B033>PS@ DD

'.RUUHNWXUHQ
'RIIVHWV $GDSWHU
$GDSWHU
'1UGQ $GDSWHUQUD
$GDSWHUQRD
'QRGQ
&(1UFHQ
&(QRFHQ
7&B$'37>D@
7&B$'37>D@
7&B'3>WGQ@
7&B'3>WGQ@ 7&B$'37>D@
7&B$'37>D@
7&B'3>WGQ@
7&B'3>WGQ@ 7&B$'37>D@
7&B$'37>D@
7&B$'377>D@
7&B$'377>D@

Image 3-28 Fig. 3-30 $TC_DP21, ...23 - Contents for an active "Adapter" function

Specifications:
● Tool t
● Magazine location p
● Magazine m
● Adapter a
● Tool with D offsets d1, ... dn

Tool Management
192 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

The adapter is assigned to the magazine location. If, for example, system variable
$TC_DP21[t,d1] is read or written in the part program, the programming accesses system
variable $TC_ADPT1[a] of the adapter, i.e. the same machine data is accessed for all d1, ...
dn.
If the assignment of the tool to the magazine location is released or the adapter is removed
from the magazine location, no more data can be assigned to the parameters. A read operation
returns the value 0, a write operation does not change the data (nor does it generate an alarm).

Transformed and non-transformed offset values

The values included in the path offset are usually the transformed working offsets.
It can generally be said that the data that describes a tool is subject to transformation. The
transformation of the adapter is communicated to the tool (orientation in which it is positioned
in the adapter). The adapter data itself is not transformed.

Data transfer to the NCK

You need to declare how the data is transferred to the NCK.
● You can transfer the data via the part program by programming the system variable $TC_...
The parameters are defined as non-transformed values.
● The transfer can take place via the OPI using the variable services. In this case, the data
can be transferred either as transformed or non-transformed values.

3/&9', 1&. 23,

00&3/&
7QXPEHU 'DWDRIFXWWLQJHGJH
'QXPEHU *HRPHWU\ *HRPHWU\
1HXWUDOGHIDXOWJHRPHWU\ :HDU
:HDUEDVHGLPHQVLRQ %DVHGLPHQVLRQ
6&QXPEHU $GDSWHU
(&QXPEHU $GGLWLYHRIIVHW $GGLWLYHRIIVHWILQH
6HWWLQJXSRIIVHW
1&SURJUDP $SSOLHGRIIVHW
'LVSOD\
7&B'3[ 7UDQVIRUPHGRIIVHW WUDQVIRUPHGRU
7&B$'37[ 7UDQVIRUPDWLRQRIWKHVXP QRWWUDQVIRUPHG
7&B6&3[ RIWKHFXWWLQJHGJHVSHFLILF GHSHQGLQJRQGHILQLWLRQ
RIIVHWYDOXHV
7&B(&3[ :RUNLQJRIIVHW
7UDQVIRUPHGRIIVHWYDOXHV
7KHV\VWHPSDUDPHWHUV DGDSWHUGDWDRUWUDQV
IRUPHGRIIVHWDQG
FRQWDLQ
QRQWUDQVIRUPHG DGDSWHUGDWD
YDOXHV

Image 3-29 Geometry of a tool edge and applied offsets

Boundary conditions
When using the function (magazine-location-oriented) "adapter data" the user must ensure
that the old data records of all the data records with edge-specific adapter data are adapted
to the requirements of the new function.
However, using the described edge-specific adapter parameter definition (system variables
$TC_DP21,...23), it is possible that all old data is converted to the adapter data function by the
NCK.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 193
Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

The function "Adapter data" excludes the existence of the cutting-edge specific data "base /
adapter dimension".
The function "adapter data" is better suited to the applications of an adapter because it defines
the adapter as part of the magazine location and not as part of the tool or cutting edge.

Example 1
Specifications:
● MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = -1
● MM_NUM_MAGAZIN_LOCATION = 20
● One chain with 16 locations, magazine number = 1
● Two grippers
● One spindle
● One loading and unloading point
● Assignment
When creating the 20 locations in all, 20 adapters should be assigned, i.e. exactly one adapter
assigned to each location.

Note
It does not matter if the real locations are not actually fitted with an adapter. Preassigned
adapter locations have no effect on the offset. When equipping a location with a real adapter
make sure that the appropriate values are assigned to the adapter data.

The transformation number of the adapter in location 3 of the chain magazine (No. 1) is to be
changed to the new value 8:

$TC_ADPTT[$TC_MPP7[1,3]] = 8 ;$TC_MPP7 contains the number of the adapter at the new

magazine location

Once adapter data records have been automatically generated and assigned, operations such
as undoing an assignment, renewed definition of an assignment and deletion of an adapter
data record are possible.

Example 2
Specifications:
● MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER = 4
● MM_NUM_MAGAZIN_LOCATION = 20
● One chain with 16 locations
● Two grippers

Tool Management
194 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.12 Adapter data

● One spindle
● One loading and unloading point
There are 4 different adapter geometries in this case. Adapters must be configured for the
chain only.
Assignment
These locations (20 in total) are initially created without adapters. Locations 1 to 4 of the chain
are equipped with adapters of the same geometry (here adapter 1). 4 chain locations are to
be equipped with adapters with the same geometry.
First, you must define the 4 adapter data records. Now you assign them:

$TC_MPP7[1,1] = 1 $TC_MPP7[1,13] = 4
$TC_MPP7[1,2] = 1 $TC_MPP7[1,14] = 4
$TC_MPP7[1,3] = 1 $TC_MPP7[1,15] = 4
$TC_MPP7[1,4] = 1 $TC_MPP7[1,16] = 4
….

In this way you can assign one adapter data record to several magazine locations.

Note
If you want to delete an adapter data record with a multiple assignment you must make sure
that you first undo all the adapter assignments.

3.12.4 Transformed data of the active tool $P_ADT[n]

A new system variable is introduced that reads the offset parameters of the active tool offset
transformed according to the tool adapter $TC_DP1,... etc. Refer here to the system variable
$P_AD (Section "Additional language commands (Page 350)") that reads the non-transformed
parameters.
$P_AD and $P_ADT have the same meaning without the function "Tool adapter" - as sub-
function of the function TMMG. In other words, the system variable application is only
meaningful within the scope of the TMMG function.
With active function "Tool adapter", the $P_ADT provides when reading the offset parameters,
transformed values of those parameters that are subject to the tool-adapter transformation in
the event that the active tool is on a tool adapter at the point in time the parameters are read.
The parameters not subjected to the transformation still provide the same values during
reading as $P_AD.
When writing, the transformed parameter values subject to the tool-adapter transformation are
accordingly transformed back by the NCK and are subsequently saved in a non-transformed
form in the NCK. Non-transformed values are still written with $P_AD.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 195
Description of functions
3.13 Power failure while tool command is in progress

3.13 Power failure while tool command is in progress

If a power failure occurs during an action requested by tool management, defined strategies
are executed by the PLC or special part programs, in order to establish a defined and consistent
status on the machine and the tool management system. These strategies are machine-
specific. SINUMERIK control systems thereby support the following measures:

Buffered data
All tools, magazine data as well as all magazine assignments are buffered.

Data initialized for control "Power On"

The following data is set to zero:
● Tool status "Tool change in progress"
● Magazine status "Motion is active"
● Magazine location status "Reserved for tool to be loaded"
● The PI-command status with respect to magazine operations like e.g. "Motion is active".
● The tool status selected for 1:1 exchange

Task of the manufacturer's configuration

The PLC must send the last unacknowledged FC 7 or FC 8/FC 6 prior to power failure (READY
did not change to TRUE before power off) back to the NC when the power supply is restored.
The function "Asynchronous transfer" is used for tool transfer in FC 8/FC 6.
Without receiving the request from the tool management system, the PLC initiates a relocation
of tool data from one location to another. For example, relocation of tool data from gripper to
magazine if the tool needed to be returned manually to the magazine when the tool change
operation was aborted.
Changes in position of the tools involved must be communicated via FC 8. The NC then
updates the data for this tool in the tool management.
Further strategies may be necessary, e.g. if a tool change was interrupted. Tools stored in the
buffer must be returned to the magazine for this purpose.

Tool Management
196 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

3.14 PLC description

3.14.1 Interfaces

Overview
The interfaces in the PLC consist of data blocks that are updated by the basic program. Tasks
such as load tool or prepare tool change are stored in the data blocks with the source and
target for the particular tool. For the interfaces for spindle or turret, in addition to the tool
numbers (internal number, which is assigned by the NCK when loading), tool size and tool
status are transferred.
If the position of the tool changes (e.g. from magazine to gripper...), the new positions must
be transferred to the tool management on the NCK. Three function blocks FC6 (TM_TRANS2),
FC7 (TM_REV) and FC8 (TM_TRANS) are provided for this purpose. The PLC programmer
can call these blocks and supply them with the required parameters.
If a magazine or a turret is not driven by an auxiliary axis, the shortest direction of rotation can
be calculated with FC22 (TM_DIR) and the positioning time optimized. FC18 is available if
positioning is performed using an auxiliary axis of the 840D sl.

Commissioning tool management

The precondition for commissioning the PLC is that the NC commissioning has been
completed. The machine data must be correctly and completely set and the magazine
configuration loaded. The basic program sets-up the user interface (DB 71 ... DB 73, DB1071 ...
DB1073) as well as the internal data block (DB74) when it boots. For information about this,
which magazine, number of loading points, etc. is in DB 4 or is automatically entered by the
NCK (see Section "Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks (Page 215)").
If tool management is configured using HMI Adv, the entry in the DB is made using the softkey
"Create PLC data"; DB4 can also be "manually" supplied (see Section "Signal description of
the PLC interface (Page 509)").

Note
If data blocks DB71...DB74 are already available, then the basic program first automatically
deletes them, and then the new DB is set-up.
Data blocks DB1071 - DB1073 are automatically set-up by the basic program for the multitool.
This means that the blocks are also set-up, if the "Multitool" function has not been set using
the appropriate machine data.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 197
Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

Overview of data blocks

Block number Length in byte Meaning

DB71 4 + 30 bytes * B Interface for loading/unloading points
DB72 4 + 48 bytes * W Interface for spindle as change position
DB73 4 + 44 bytes * R Interface for tool turrets as change position
DB1071 20 byte * B Extended data for the multitool
DB1072 50 byte * W Extended data for the multitool
DB1073 50 byte * R Extended data for the multitool
DB74 Length depends on configu‐ Internal data block for tool management
ration

B = number of loading locations

W= Number of spindles as change positions
R= Number of turrets
DB71 to DB74 occupy approximately 550 bytes for simple configurations of magazines, buffers
and loading/unloading points.
There is one interface (data record) per data block for each loading/unloading point, spindle
and turret. The data blocks are assigned to the respective tasks.

DB71
DB71 assumes the functions of loading and unloading, positioning and relocating. The
relocating and positioning functions (no matter from which NC channel) are generally mapped
on the 1st interface.

DB72
DB72 is the interface for changing tools into the spindle. This change procedure also includes
preparation of the tool. (Setting: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1)

DB73
DB73 is the interface for tool changes with a circular magazine. (Setting:
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0)

DB1071
Extended data for the multitool
Loading/unloading, relocating and positioning. The structure is analog to DB 71.

DB1072
Extended data for the multitool
T preparation and M06. The structure is analog to DB 72.

Tool Management
198 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

DB1073
Extended data for the multitool
Change with T command. The structure is analog to DB 73.

DB74
DB74 is an internal tool management data block used for communication control. You must
not write to this data block.
For all the interfaces listed here, source and target positions are available for the tools
associated with the machining operation.
FB15 is called in the basic program for communication between the NCK and the PLC when
tool management is active. This block informs the user interfaces (DB71 to DB73 and DB1071
to DB1073) if a tool management function is activated via the part program or operator input.

Interfaces within DB71 to DB73

A bit field for the active and passive status of each interface is contained in bytes 0 and 1 of
the respective data block (DB71 to DB73). DBX 0.0 represents the first interface, DBX 0.1 the
second, etc. A total of 16 interfaces can be addressed. If one of these bits is set to the value
= 1 by the tool management, the associated interface is activated. If set to 0, the interface may
not be processed by the user.
Principle of the interfaces DB71-73

No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1

No. 16 No. 15 No. 14 No. 13 No. 12 No. 11 No. 10 No. 9
1st interface
2nd interface
....................................
14th interface
15th interface
16th interface

If the value = 1, the user must evaluate the commands at this interface and initiate the
necessary actions (e.g. position magazines, change tools, etc.). After activation, user
programmers can also write access this interface (e.g. in order to delete the "prepare change"
bit). Communication with the tool management is realized exclusively via FC8 or FC7 or FC6,
not via DB 71, 72, 73, ... (the only exception is the fast acknowledgement). For each change
to tool positions and/or status information from an interface request, FC8/FC6 should be called
with these modified values.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 199
Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

Tasks from NCK tool management

Tasks Interface Acknowledgement Applications, special features

Loading DB71 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 1, TaskIdentNo = NewToolPlace = target destination of the
interface no. tool
NewToolMag = target magazine
OldToolPlace = No. of the loading or un‐
loading point
OldToolMag = 9999
or:
OldToolMag/OldToolPlace = 0
Status = 1
Unloading DB71 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 1, TaskIdentNo = NewToolPlace = No. of the loading or un‐
interface no. loading point
NewToolMag = 9999
OldToolPlace = Location of the tool to be
unloaded.
OldToolMag = Magazine No. of the tool
to be unloaded (real or also buffer maga‐
zine)
or: OldToolMag/OldToolPlace = 0, status
=1
Relocating DB71 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 1, TaskIdentNo= NewToolPlace = target position of the tool
1 NewToolMag = target magazine
OldToolPlace source location
OldToolMag = source magazine
Status = 1
Positioning DB71 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 1, TaskIdentNo = Positioning at the loading magazine cor‐
interface no. responding to the interface number - any
positioning, always via interface 1
NewToolPlace = LMG or BL
NewToolMag = 9999 or 9998
OldToolPlace = magazine location to be
positioned
OldToolMag = magazine to be positioned
Status = 5

Prepare change for tool DB72 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 2, TaskIdentNo = Positioning NewTool to change position,
in spindle interface no. OldTool remains in spindle to complete
status 1, in order that the change com‐
mand can be output.
OldToolPlace = BL (spindle)
NewToolPlace = NewTool location
Change in spindle DB72 FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 2, TaskIdentNo = OldTool is unloaded (gripper or directly
interface no. into magazine), NewTool is loaded to
spindle. Status 1 required, so that part
program processing is continued.
NewToolPlace = BL (spindle)
OldToolPlace = OldTool location
Without NCK FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 4, TaskIdentNo = The OldTool may need to be transferred
Command: Return Old‐ channel asynchronously to the location specified
Tool to magazine in the prepare change command to move
the tool from the gripper to the magazine.

Tool Management
200 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

Tasks Interface Acknowledgement Applications, special features

Change with turret DB73 Normally FC7 or FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = When turret has finished swiveling, FC 7
3, TaskIdentNo = turret no. is called with turret No. As parameter
ChgdRevNo.

LMG: Loading point

BL: Buffer location
T: Tool
NewToolPlace: FC8/FC6 parameter NewToolMag, NewToolLoc
OldToolPlace: FC8/FC6 parameter OldToolMag, OldToolLoc

Position changes of tools without task from NCK

Tasks Acknowledgement Applications, special features

Asynchronous transfer FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 4, General tool transport from the PLC
TaskIdentNo = channel no. NewToolMag/NewToolLoc = target
Status = 1 OldToolMag/OldToolLoc = source
Asynchronous transfer with location res‐ FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 5, Tool transport from PLC
ervation for tool transport from a real TaskIdentNo = channel no. NewToolMag/NewToolLoc = buffer
magazine into the buffer Status = 1 OldToolMag/OldToolLoc = source in the
real magazine
Asynchronous transfer without tool FC8/FC6, TaskIdent = 4, Communicates the actual magazine po‐
movement to align the magazine posi‐ TaskIdentNo = channel no. sition (e.g. after turret cycles) to the NCK
tion Status = 5 NewToolMag/NewToolLoc = actual lo‐
cation
OldToolMag/OldToolLoc = change or
loading point

Further interfaces in the channel interfaces for the ToolMan function

DBD348 T number for tool pre-alarm limit

DBD352 T number for tool limit value
DBD356 T number of the new replacement tool
DBD360 T number of the last replacement tool

Change bits in DBB344

The information can be evaluated within one OB 1 cycle on the basis of a change bit. The PLC
can use this information to derive appropriate measures.

Note
The last replacement tool monitoring must be set in machine data
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 201
Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

Other signals are as follows:

Channel DB
Tool missing DBX317.7 From NCK
Do not disable tool (ignore disabled state) DBX29.7 to NCK
Deactivate wear monitoring DBX29.6 to NCK
Deactivate workpiece counter DBX29.5 to NCK
Activate time monitoring by PLC DBX1.3 to NCK
The function must be set in machine data
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

Additional interfaces in the NCK interface (DB10) for the tool management function

DB10.DBX105.0 Abort of all tool commands in the NCK

The signal is intended for commissioning. While the negative acknowledgement
(status 3) specifically interrupts a command, with DB10.DBX105.0, all NCK
commands are interrupted, i.e. in all channels.

3.14.2 Definitions of acknowledgement status

Magazine identifier
Real magazines
The number range from 1 ...9997 is available for the real magazine, defined when generating
the magazine configuration (the numbering must not be ascending).
Buffer magazine
The buffer magazine always has the number 9998. The number of locations in the buffer
magazine is defined using the magazine configuration. The locations with the "spindle / tool
holder" identifier correspond to an interface
Loading magazine
The loading magazine always has the number 9999. A magazine location corresponds to a
loading point (defined when generating the magazine configuration), every loading point
corresponds to an interface (loading point 1 = interface 1, etc.). Loading point 1 has a special
significance. Every relocation operation, unloading and loading a manual tool and manual
loading, unloading is generally managed via this as basis.
Status value 1 - 10
The status information 1 to 10 (current upper limit 10) leads to the command being terminated.
As a consequence, the "active bit" of the interface is reset to 0 and the operation is completed.
Status value > 100
When acknowledging this status information (FC8/FC6), the "active" bit of the relevant interface
remains at "1". Further processing is required by the user program in the PLC (e.g. continuation
of magazine positioning). This item of status information is generally used to transfer changes
in position of one or both tools while the operation is still in progress.

Tool Management
202 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

Synchronization
There are various methods by which the PLC and NCK can be synchronized. Synchronization
is forced by MD20310 $MC_ TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK using bits 5, 6, 7, 8 and 19. For
internal communication between the PLC and NCK, the devices wait for an acknowledgement
after each command. We distinguish between two types of acknowledgement:
● Transport acknowledgement
The transport acknowledgement indicates to the NCK that the issued command has been
accepted by the basic PLC program. Before a new command is output, the system checks
whether the previous command was accepted. If this is not the case, no output is made.
The NCK waits for the acknowledgement before a new command is output.
● End acknowledgement
Status feedback signal of the PLC for an NCK command that has been accepted with
acknowledgement status 1, 10 or acknowledgement status 3.

Output of the command

Synchronization of the NCK and PLC is implemented in three steps:
● The interpolation task from NCK has prepared a command on the basis of the programming
and outputs this to the NCK-internal image of the VDI interface.
● The NCK-internal image of the VDI interface is transferred in the same cycle to the VDI.
● The basic PLC program accepts the command from the VDI interface.
,VWKHUHDWUDQVSRUW
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW"
,VWKHUHDWUDQVSRUW
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW"

&RPPDQG

&RPPDQG
,QWHUQDOWUDQVSRUW
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW &RPPDQG

7UDQVSRUW
DFNQRZO
(QGDFNQRZO HGJHPHQW &RPPDQG
HGJHPHQW

1&. ,QWHUQDO1&.9', 9', %DVLF3/& 3/&XVHUSURJUDP

,327$6. LPDJH SURJUDP

Image 3-30 Transport and end acknowledgement

Acknowledgement of output commands

Acknowledgements from the basic PLC program and from the VDI are returned while the
command that has been output is being executed.
● The basic PLC program outputs the transport acknowledgement to the NCK once the
command has been accepted.
● An internal transport acknowledgement is issued after the internal VDI image has been
transmitted.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 203
Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

The PLC user program can only process one command at a time. It determines how long it
takes until a command is processed. If the NCK provides the command faster than can be
processed by the PLC user program, then the NCK is put into the waiting state.
The NCK can also output commands which do not originate from the part program over the
interface. Included here are PI services that are synchronously superimposed over the part
program processing.

Completion of the command

Depending on how bits 5-8 and 19 of the MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MNAGEMENT_MASK are
set, the command output is considered to have been completed at various points in time.
● If bit 5 (or bit 6 for the secondary spindle) is set, the command output is completed when
the internal transport acknowledgement and the transport acknowledgement are available.
The command has been accepted by the basic PLC program.
● If bit 7 is set (or 8 for the secondary spindle), this means that the command output is only
completed when the end acknowledgement is received from the PLC.
● If the bits are not set, then the output of the command is considered as being completed
when the NCK has output the command to the NCK-internal VDI image. This is the default
setting.
Note
From the viewpoint of the tool-change command, the block change can take place as soon
as the NCK has output the command.
The set bit 19 in conjunction with set bits 5-8 permit a block change to be prevented as long
as the extended acknowledgements are not present.

Changing the acknowledgement data

When acknowledging a command from the NCK, the PLC can change the parameters of this
command in the acknowledgement data.
The following sequence is implemented to allow acknowledged commands from the PLC to
be assigned in the NCK:
● Using the ID number in the acknowledgement command (this is tracked by the basic
program), the tool in the NCK is determined.
● The data of the current tool location are obtained from the tool.
● This current tool location is checked against the address specified in the command.

Tool Management
204 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

● If this data does not match, then after the acknowledgement data of the PLC has been
checked, it is accepted in the NCK data management.
● Acknowledgement of the command in the NCK is continued.
Note
If the tool to be loaded at change is transported from the magazine to the tool holder in
multiple individual steps, the PLC acknowledgement number 105 applies.
With the PI command _N_TMMVTL or the analog language command "MVTOOL", a tool
in status "being changed" cannot be moved.
The following applies for loading, relocating, reloading and positioning: The PLC must not
change the target positions specified by the NCK for the NewTool as they have to be
identical with those in the NCK.

Example 1
A tool is being prepared and already with the preparation is to be brought into gripper_1
(preparation). The change moves the new tool from gripper_1 to the spindle and moves the
old tool into gripper_2. This completes the change.
The NCK command looks like this:
Bring the new tool (T No.6) from magazine_3, location_6 to the spindle and the old tool from
the spindle (9998/1) into magazine_3, location_11.
ID:00000/00000-------- CMD:00002
NewTool:
from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00006 Spindle: 00001
OldTool:
from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00003 P: 00011
As a result of this change sequence, this task is not executed like this. When acknowledging,
the PLC program must change the data shown in bold.
There are two options to do this:
Case_1
The PLC synchronously acknowledges the preparation command
ID:00000/00001-------- ACK:00002 St: 00001
NewTool:
from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00002
OldTool:
from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
Case_2
The PLC asynchronously transports the prepared tool to the gripper and now synchronously
acknowledges the preparation command to the end.
ID:00000/00001-------- ACK:00008 St: 00001
NewTool:
from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00002

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 205
Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

OldTool:
from M: 00000 P: 00000 to M: 00000 P: 00000
ID:00000/00002-------- ACK:00002 St: 00001
NewTool:
from M: 09998 P: 00002 to M: 09998 P: 00002
OldTool:
from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
In both cases, using the end acknowledgement, the NCK checks the tool data acknowledged
by the PLC against the data in the command - and after an internal command assignment,
corrects the command data, in order that additional acknowledgements are made with valid
data (new tool located on 9998/2). The source file ("from") for the old tool and the new tool are
managed by the basic program, a change is not possible.

3.14.3 Simplified acknowledgement of tool management commands

Overview
Previously, it was only possible to acknowledge tool management commands via the user
program with FC8/FC6 or FC7. Now, for the standard acknowledgement with the end status
per interface, there is a bit available within DB71, DB72, DB73 which can be used to
acknowledge the command using the cyclic basic program. For this purpose,
acknowledgement bits are defined in DB71, DB72, DB73 in DBW2, which the user program
must set to acknowledge an active command for one PLC cycle. When the acknowledgement
bit is set for the pending task, then end acknowledgements are generated.
The acknowledgement parameters used are described in the following table:

Function New tool Old tool Status

Loading Target position (n+24, n+26) 0 1
Unloading 0 Specified loading point 1
Relocating Target position (n+24, n+26) 0 1 or 6
Positioning Target position (n+24, n+26) 0 5
Prepare change Actual position or 0 Actual position or 0 1
Change Target position (n+16, n+18) or 0 (for T0) Target position (n+24, n+26) 1
Change with preparation Target position (n+16, n+18) or 0 (for T0) Target position (n+24, n+26) 1
Change with turret Target position (n+16, n+18) or 0 (for T0) Target position (n+24, n+26) 1

If active commands with fault are to be acknowledged, this can also be realized using the
acknowledgement bit in DBW2. In addition, for the particular task, in DBX(n+1.0) the value 1
must be connected in parallel to set the acknowledgement bit. The acknowledgement
parameters are listed in the following table.
For DBX(n+1.0), n is the start address of the interface in the particular data block.

Function New tool Old tool Status

Loading Current position 0 3
Unloading 0 Current position 3

Tool Management
206 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

Function New tool Old tool Status

Relocating Current position 0 3
Positioning Current position 0 3
Prepare change Actual position or 0 (for T0) Actual position or 0 3
Change Actual position or 0 (for T0) Actual position or 0 3
Change with preparation Actual position or 0 (for T0) Actual position or 0 3
Change with turret Actual position or 0 (for T0) Actual position or 0 3

When processing an acknowledgement using the acknowledgement bits, the

acknowledgement bit and also DBX(n+1.0) are automatically reset by the basic program.

Note
Before setting the acknowledgement bit, additional intermediate acknowledgements (with the
status > 100), are realized from the user program via the FC8/FC6 (e.g. re-storing in the
gripper).
Relocating
If a tool is relocated from the real magazine into the spindle or to a buffer location,
acknowledgement is with Status_6, i.e. the source location in the real magazine is reserved
for the tool.

3.14.4 Diagnostics for communication between NC and PLC

General
The NCL-PLC communication can be logged in a file as part of the tool change procedure.

Note
The diagnostics data is saved with the reset or cancel key.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 207
Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

Precondition
● Bit 13 of MD20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK must be set.
● The trace is a ring buffer (_NTCTRA'xx'MPF, with 'xx' = channel number 01, 02, ...). Free
memory space must be available on the NC for saving the data. The number of files in the
file system must be below the maximum number of files.
● The trace size can be set using the machine data
$MN_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_BUFFER_SZ[Index] = number of commands
Index 0 = buffer size of the IPO trace (prepare, change commands and acknowledgements,
asynchronous transfers).
Index 1 = buffer size of the preparatory trace (commands and acknowledgements due to
PI services).
The Trace representation with index 0 also assumes the commands and
acknowledgements due to PI services, the trace file with index 1 is then irrelevant.

Example
Milling machine with a chain magazine, a spindle and double gripper (any tool is located on
the spindle)

T="Miller_30mm" - The tool remains at its location, after positioning the mag-
azine, the preparation is acknowledged with "end"
M06 Step 1 (is acknowledged with Status_105)
- Old tool comes from the spindle into Gripper_1
- New tool comes from the magazine into Gripper_2
Step 2 (is acknowledged with Status_1 (end))
- New tool comes from the Gripper_2 into the spindle
- Old tool comes from the Gripper_1 into the magazine

The recorded trace (TCTRA'xx'_MPF), looks like this:

ID:00002/00002 ------------ CMD:00002
NewTool: from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00006 Spindle: 00001
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00003 P: 00002
ID:00002/00003 ------------ ACK:00002 St: 00001
NewTool: from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 00003 P: 00006
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00001
ID:00003/00003 ------------ CMD:00003
NewTool: from M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00001 TNo: 00006 Spindle: 00001
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 00003 P: 00002
ID:00003/00004 ------------ ACK:00003 St: 00105
NewTool: from: M: 00003 P: 00006 to M: 09998 P: 00003
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00001 to M: 09998 P: 00002
ID:00003/00005 ------------ ACK:00003 St: 00001
NewTool: from: M: 09998 P: 00003 to M: 09998 P: 00001
OldTool: from M: 09998 P: 00002 to M: 00003 P: 00002
Explanation

Tool Management
208 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

The ID number is used by the NCK to assign acknowledgements. The first number specifies
the command ID of the output command. The second number specifies the command
identification with which the PLC had acknowledged the command.
Definition of command identification: Every command via the tool management interface from
the NCK to the PLC is allocated a unique identification number. PLC (the basic program, not
the user program) acknowledges a command with this command number. This means that it
is possible to assign the acknowledged command to the command that was output.
Every NCK command (CMD) has the following structure:
1. The command ID (this is incremented at each command output)
2. The command no. (CMD preparation, change, ...)
3. The transport for the tool to be loaded at change (from - to)
4. The internal T No. of the tool to be loaded at change
5. The number of the requesting spindle or tool holder
6. The transport for the tool to be replaced (from - to)
Every PLC acknowledgement (ACK) has the following structure:
1. From the ID No. The ID of the NCK is returned + a PLC ID
2. The command no. (NCK sends a CMD:00002, PLC responds with an ACK:00002)
3. The acknowledgement status (see FC8/FC6 description)
4. The transport for the tool to be loaded at change (from - to)
5. The transport for the tool to be replaced (from - to)

List of values and meanings for CMD and ACK

CMD Explanation
1 A tool is transported from ... to ... . Loading, unloading, relocating, positioning.
2 Tool change is to be prepared (setting MD22550 = 1)
3 Tool change is to be executed (setting MD22550 = 1)
4 Tool change is to be prepared and carried out (setting MD 22550 = 0)
5 Tool change is to be prepared and carried out (setting MD 22550 = 1)

ACK Explanation
1 Tool is/was transported. Loading, unloading, relocating, positioning.
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 1
2 Tool is/was prepared (setting MD22550 = 1)
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 2
3 Tool is/was executed (setting MD22550 = 1)
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 2
4 Tool change is/was prepared (setting MD22550 = 0)
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 3

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 209
Description of functions
3.14 PLC description

ACK Explanation
5 Tool change is/was prepared (setting MD22550 = 1)
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 2
7 Terminate canceled tool command
DB10.DBX105.0=1
8 Tool was transported. If a tool is present at the source address, its data is transported to the target address.
Otherwise, only the current magazine position is changed. If the tool transport is from a real magazine, the location
to which the source address points is reserved.
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 5
9 Tool was transported. If a tool is present at the source address, its data is transported to the target address.
Otherwise, only the current magazine position is changed.
FC8/FC6 - parameter TaskIdent = 4

3.14.5 Function blocks

Overview

Block number Meaning

FC7 Transfer block for tool change with turret
FC8 Transfer block for tool management, call at position and status changes
FC6 Transfer block for tool management, call at position and status changes. FC 6
is required for the "multitool" function. The block corresponds to the FC8. It has
an additional parameter "MultitoolPosition". The FC6 includes the complete
FC8 functionality, so that the FC6 can completely replace the FC8.
FC22 Direction selection for shortest path

All function blocks are described in: /FB1/ P3, Basic PLC Program

Additional PLC services

In addition to the function blocks given above, there are further PLC services available for more
complex requirements on the part of the PLC user program to influence tool management.
These services are possible using FB2, FB3, FB4 and FB7 (read and write variables or PI
services). A description of these function blocks is part of the basic PLC program description.
The PI services (program instances) of the tool management are also described in the basic
PLC program description regarding FB4 and FB7. The tool management variables are
described in the lists in the section on variables.

Tool Management
210 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Commissioning 4
4.1 Input of the machine data

General machine data

Machine data for memory partitions, assignment of channels to TO units have to be set for
tool management. Also, memory will be needed in the battery-buffered RAM. When "memory-
influencing" machine data is changed, i.e. at next power on, restart or cold restart (reboot),
this memory area is deleted and configured again. Therefore, data must be backed up prior
to reset/cold restart.

Order when releasing memory using the machine data

Option: More than three magazines (if required)
Activate the function "Tool management" (tool monitoring+magazine management)

MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Activate the memory for tool management

MD17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS
Maximum number of replacement tools
MD17510 TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK
Behavior of tool data at unloading
MD17515 TOOL_RESETMON_MASK
Behavior of tool data at RESETMON
MD17520 TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK
Create new tool: Data default setting
MD17530 TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER
Identifying tool data change for HMI
MD17540 TOOLTYPES_ALLOWED
Permitted tool types
MD18074 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ
Maximum size of the tool management diagnostics ring buffer
MD18075 MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS
Max. number of tool holders
MD18076 MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE
Max. number of magazine locations per TOA with distance connections
MD18077 MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC
Max. number of magazines in the distance table of a magazine location

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 211
Commissioning
4.1 Input of the machine data

MD18078 MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES
Maximum number of definable hierarchies for magazine location types
MD18079 MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES
Maximum permissible number of entries in a magazine-location-type hierarchy
Definition of number of magazines and magazine locations

MD18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
Maximum number of magazines that NCK can manage (minimum of 3 maga‐
zines). Buffer and loading magazines must be added (i.e. for 2 real magazines,
"4" must be specified)!
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
Number of magazine locations that the NCK can manage. Buffer and loading
locations must be added!
Definition of tools and tool cutting edges

MD18082 MM_NUM_TOOL
Number of tools to be managed by the NCK
MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Number of cutting edges in NCK, tool offsets per TOA block
MD1810: MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PERTOOL
Maximum number of cutting edges (D offset) per tool (per T number)
Options for providing additional user data for magazines, magazine locations, tools and tool
edges

MD18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of additional magazine data $TC_MAPCx[n]
MD18091 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Type definition for magazine-oriented user data
MD18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of additional magazine location data $TC_MPPCx[n,m] generated
MD18093 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
Type definition for magazine location-oriented user data
MD18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
Number of additional tool-specific data per tool $TC_TPPCx[t] generated
MD18095 MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM
Type definition for tool-oriented user data
MD18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
Number of additional data per tool edge $TC_DPCx[t,d] generated
MD18097 MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM
Type definition for cutting edge-oriented user data

Tool Management
212 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Commissioning
4.1 Input of the machine data

MD18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
Number of additional monitoring data per tool edge $TC_MOPCx[t,d] generated
MD18099 MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM
Type definition for monitoring-related user data

Channel-specific machine data

Enabling of channel-specific functions for tool management.

MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Channel-specific activation of tool management
Specification of spindle number for tool life monitoring

MD20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
Activation of tool life monitoring for the spindle specified here (tool holder num‐
ber)
Tool change turret or spindle.

MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Change with M06 or with T selection
MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_MODE
M function for tool change
Cutting edge selection after tool change.

MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT
Offset selection or deselection at tool change
Definition of tool with which tool offset is to be selected as a function of MD20110 and MD20112
during power-up and reset.

MD20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME
Definition for selection of tool length compensation
Definition of the active tool holder number.

MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
Definition of the active tool holder number
Assignment of TO units to channels.

MD28085 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT
Allocation of a TOA range to a channel

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 213
Commissioning
4.1 Input of the machine data

Definition of initial setting for control after boot, reset, end of part program in relation to G code,
tool length compensation and transformation.

MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
Definition of the control basic setting. Relevant bit = 0: The actual value remains
valid.

Note
For machine data 20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and 18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bits 0-3 must always be set the same.

Tool Management
214 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Commissioning
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

4.2.1 Overview

Overview

1&. 3/&

)% '% 8VHU

7RRO '% SURJUDP
PDQDJHPHQW '%
'%
'%
'%

'%

$FNQRZO
HGJH
PHQW
)& 6WDWXV
)&
)&

Image 4-1 Commissioning the PLC Program

The basic program supplies the tool management interfaces (data blocks DB71-DB73) with
information for the new and old tool. The user must process this data from the active interface
in the user program and ensure that the tools (old and new) are placed on the respectively
associated positions (magazine, location). In order for the tool management to always know
where a tool is located, each time a tool changes location the new location must be transferred
to the tool management via the FC7 or FC8/FC6 acknowledgement status.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 215
Commissioning
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

4.2.2 Create PLC data

Commissioning tool management

If the magazine configuration was created (for all channels involved), the PLC data must be
generated. This is done as follows
● a) Manually, by pre-assigning DB4
● b) By pressing the "Generate PLC data" softkey on HMI-Advanced if the magazine
configuration was generated with it.
● c) The PLC user interface is set-up automatically
During run-up, the NCK checks the magazine configuration in all channels and transfers
the magazine description via the VDI interface directly to the basic PLC program.
The following sequence is defined:
Is the magazine description from the NCK available (and no entry in DB4)?
– This is used and the user interface set-up accordingly; the magazine description is NOT
copied to DB4
Is a magazine description available in DB4?
– This is used and the user interface set-up accordingly
This means that the entry in DB4 has priority. This ensures full compatibility.
If there is neither a magazine description from the NCK nor one in DB4, the user interface
is set-up with the maximum configuration (16 interfaces each).
FC8/FC6 (FC7 for circular magazines), TM_TRANS / TM_TRANS2 (transfer blocks) and if
required FC22 TM_DIR (selection of direction) must still be loaded and called by the user
program.
When commissioning has been completed, the next time the PLC is booted the following data
blocks are set up for the user (user interfaces for tool management) in addition to a data block
for the tool management FCs. The lengths of the data blocks are derived from the
commissioning parameters in tool management.

Tool Management
216 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Commissioning
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

Example of chain magazine

0DJ QR
0DJ EXIIHU
*ULSSHU *ULSSHU 0DJ ORDGLQJVWDWLRQ
6SLQGOH PDJORFDWLRQ
*ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ
    *ULSSHU PDJORFDWLRQ

6SLQGOH  
&KDQJH
SRVLWLRQIRU
 
VSLQGOH
0DJD]LQH
 

 

12   

/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ
1R

Image 4-2 Example of a magazine with gripper and loading station

"Drill120" is placed in location 6 and location 12 is reserved for the spindle tools to be
exchanged.

Execution example for tool change

1. Part program contains T="Drill120"
Output to the PLC:
"PREPARE CHANGE" DBB(n+0) bit 2=1
(bring new tool from Mag1, location 6 to Mag9998, location 1 and bring old tool from
Mag9998, location 1 to Mag1, location 12).
2. Location 6 is moved to the point of change.
3. The tool is taken from location 6 and placed into gripper 1. The user program resets
"PREPARE CHANGE" DBB(n+0) bit 2 to zero. The new position (9998, 2) of the new tool
("Drill120") is signaled via FC 8 with status 1. The old tool remains at position 9998,1. Bit
0.0 in DB72 is reset by FC8/FC6.
The magazine is moved with location 12 to the change position for the old tool to be placed
into it.
4. M06 is executed in the part program
Output to PLC. "CHANGE" DBB(n+0) bit 1=1
No new tool positions are entered in the interface with output of the M06 command. If
required, they can be later made by the user program at change of position.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 217
Commissioning
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

5. The PLC user program carries out the tool change and brings the tool into the spindle.
During this process, the old tool is removed from the spindle and placed into gripper 2. The
new tool in gripper 1 is placed into the spindle. FC8/FC6 acknowledges with status 105
(position of the new tool: 9998, 1; position of the old tool: 9998, 3).
6. The (old) tool is returned from gripper 2 to the new magazine location 12. This is
acknowledged using FC8/FC, status 1 (position of new tool: 9998, 1; position of old tool 1,
12). This represents the end of the tool change procedure. Bit 0.0 in DB72 is reset by FC8/
FC6.
Note
The timing of the tool change can be optimized by applying the following strategy for further
processing in the part program:
In step 5, use status 1 with FC8/FC6 instead of status 105. The old tool is then returned to
storage in step 6 with the asynchronous FC8/FC6 transfer function (status 1,
OldToolMag=9998, OldToolMag=1, NewToolLoc=12).

4.2.3 Description of the test blocks

Overview of test blocks

Block No. Structure Meaning

FC40 Subprogram Preparation of the data for a change with gripper via
asynchronous transfer
FC41 Block to be called in OB1 Global functions (task control, check commands, H de‐
coder, ...)
FC42 Subprogram Supply of data for FC 8/FC 6 if a task is active
DB62 Data for active tasks, control
parameter
DB63 Data for FC22
DB64 Data for asynchronous trans‐
fer

Tool Management
218 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Commissioning
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

Test blocks for tool management

To test the tool management function, blocks FC40, FC 41, FC 42 and data blocks DB62,
DB63 and DB64 must be loaded to the PLC. FC41 (without parameters) must also be called
in the organization block 1 (OB1). The following overall procedure is implemented by
integrating these blocks:
1. The tool management function is activated (acknowledgement of tasks) by programming
H9001 in the first channel (and deactivated with H9000).
The system can also be activated by setting data bit DB62.DBX15.7. The initial setting
when the PLC is rebooted is H9000. The other functions can only be used once the system
has been activated via H9001.
2. The direction selection function (FC22) can be activated with the machine control panel
(MCP) above the rapid traverse override key (the normal MCP connected via FC19 or
FC25). Data must be written to DB63 (e.g. via the variable status) before the function is
activated.
Structure of data block DB63:
Input parameters
DBW0 = Magazine number
DBW2 = Position setpoint
DBW4 = Actual position
DBW6 = Offset for special positioning
Output parameters
DBW8 = Differential position (shortest path)
DBB10 = Rotation in CW direction == 1
DBB11 = Rotation in CCW direction == 1
DBB12 = Position reached
DBB13 = Error == 1
If an error (e.g. parameterizing error) occurs, the LED for the key lights up.
3. Every user interface (DB71 to DB73) is checked for active status by block FC41.
If an interface is active, a transfer with new positions (usually target positions) and status
information "1" (completed) is passed to the NCK immediately.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 219
Commissioning
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

4. If H9003 is programmed in the first channel (corresponding to data block DB62.DBX15.6

set), the transfer operation described under point 3 is only executed after operating the
MCP key above the minus-direction key.
As a result, it is possible to intervene in the transfer values via a status function. The function
is deactivated via H9002 (default setting). The transfer blocks are provided in data block
DB62.
Input parameters:
DBB0 = Task identifier (1, 2, 3)
DBB1 = Task number
(only make changes in DBW2 to DBW10)
DBW2 = Magazine for new tool
DBW4 = Location for new tool
DBW6 = Magazine for old tool
DBW8 = Location for old tool
DBW10 = Status information (see description of FC8/FC6)
Output parameters:
DBW12 = Error has occurred
If an error occurs, the LED for the activation key lights up.
The following functions are implemented for command acknowledgement in DB71, DB72,
DB73:
Load/unload, relocate:
The required target positions are acknowledged with status 1 via FC8/FC6.
Position:
The required target position is acknowledged with status 5 via FC8/FC6 because the tool
remains in the magazine.
Prepare change (spindle interface):
"New tool" remains at the original location, "Old tool" remains in the spindle.
Special treatment is implemented for T0 or empty spindle.
Acknowledgement is via FC8/FC6 with status = 1.
Change (spindle interface):
"Old tool" is transferred to allocated magazine location, "New tool" is loaded into the spindle.
Acknowledgement is via FC8/FC6 with status = 1.
Special treatment is implemented for T0 or empty spindle.
Change (turret interface):
Acknowledgement is via FC7.
Optionally with DB62.DBX15.4 = 1 acknowledgement is via FC8/FC6 with status = 1.

Tool Management
220 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Commissioning
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

5. Values other than zero can be set in DB62.DBW20 and DB62.DBW22. DB62.DBW20
means the spindle number and DB62.DBW22 the buffer number of a gripper assigned to
the spindle.
It is thus possible to automatically allow for a gripper located between a spindle and a
magazine in the acknowledgement.
The following sequence is implemented (only for spindle as change position, M06 setting
as change command):
When preparing, the behavior is identical to "normal operation".
The "new tool" remains in the magazine, the "old tool" remains in the spindle. The "old tool"
must continue to machine.
On the change command:
"New tool" goes into the spindle, "old tool" goes into the gripper. An asynchronous transfer
is used to move the "old tool" to the suggested magazine location. A manual
acknowledgement is required for this purpose.
6. Asynchronous transfer (changes in a tool location can be communicated without an NCK
task)
DB64 can be used to communicate a change in position of a tool to the tool management
function in the NCK.
The position of the tool was changed by the PLC. Entries must be made in DB64 (e.g. via
variable status). Asynchronous transfer can then be subsequently started via
DB64.DBX14.0 = 1.
Asynchronous transfer with location reservation can be selected via the data
DB64.DBX15.4 = 1.
This corresponds to TaskIdent = 5.
For a value of zero in the specified data, TaskIdent = 4 is activated.
Input parameters:
DBB1 = Associated NC channel number
DBW2 = Original magazine of the tool
DBW4 = Original location of the tool
DBW6 = Target magazine of the tool
DBW8 = Target location of the tool
DBW10 = Status information (see description of FC8/FC6)
Only status = 1 and status = 5 are permitted.
Output parameters:
DBW12 = Error has occurred
Note
If incorrect values are communicated from the NCK, the following error signals causing PLC
stop are output and either displayed via the HMI or entered in the diagnostics buffer of the
PLC.
The test blocks only use FC7 and FC8/FC6. The multitool function is presently not
supported by the test blocks.
Alarm 400604:
In function 4 the specified magazine is not a turret.
Remedy: Machine data (tool change with M06 command)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 221
Commissioning
4.2 Load the machine manufacturer PLC blocks

4.2.4 Delete pending tasks

General
The communication initiated by the NC yet interrupted by the PLC task "Delete pending task"
(DB10.DBX105.0) can be terminated by the PLC during commissioning.
The function cancels all pending tool management tasks from the NCK (compare NC switch-
on). The NC tool management is reset in a defined manner. This is intended to be a pure
commissioning function. If a command must be cancelled in regular operation, then this is
done using FC8/FC6 and acknowledgement status "3" (negative acknowledgement).
This function enables direct intervention by the operator to, for example, take a tool out of the
gripper where a change is just about to take place, or if there is no acknowledgement from the
PLC program.

Note
Please ensure that the data consistency in the NC is maintained.

Boundary condition
The "Delete pending task" function can be activated only if the NC is in the "Channel not active"
state.

Tool Management
222 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Programming 5
5.1 Overview of OPI and system variables

Fundamentals
All the data required for the purpose of data management (e.g. to define a magazine or load
a tool...) is stored in the NCK. This data can be read and written via part programs with system
variables and via the PLC with FB2 and FB3. When configuring the machine, the user (machine
manufacturer) must determine the most efficient method of reading and writing tool
management data, i.e. in the PLC, the NC or in an ASUP.
Read and write access can generally be made to system variables.
When language commands are used, it may be necessary to program the "STOPRE"
command.
The $TC variables do not generate a preprocessing stop.
Tool identifiers can consist of the following characters:
a...z
A...Z
0...9
+-_.,
The names are case-sensitive, i.e. uppercase and lowercase characters are considered
different characters.

Note
Additional information on OPI variables can be found in the Help file for the NC variables
selector.

Overview
The following diagram shows an overview of all cutting edge, tool and magazine data ($TC_...)
when tool management is active.
Note:
The sequence of system variables shown in the diagram corresponds to the OPI numbering
sequence.

Note
System variables are available for OEM Siemens data. However, they are not described here
because they are not meaningful at present.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 223
Programming
5.1 Overview of OPI and system variables

&877,1*('*('$7$
(&3 /RFDWLRQGHSHQGHQWRIIVHWVFRDUVH
6&3 /RFDWLRQGHSHQGHQWRIIVHWVILQH
023& 8VHUFXWWLQJHGJHPRQLWRULQJ
023 &XWWLQJHGJHPRQLWRULQJ
'3&
8VHUFXWWLQJHGJHGDWD
'3 &XWWLQJHGJHGDWD

722/'$7$
73& 7RROUHODWHGXVHUGDWD
73* 7RROUHODWHGJULQGLQJGDWD
73 7RROUHODWHGGDWD

0$*$=,1('$7$ 0/65 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQDVVLJQPHQWWRVSLQGOHV

0$03 0DJD]LQHEORFNGDWD
0'3 'LVWDQFHWRFKDQJHSRVLWLRQ
037+ 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQW\SHKLHUDUFK\
033& 8VHUPDJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD
033 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD
0$3& 8VHUPDJD]LQHGHVFULSWLRQGDWD
0$3 0DJD]LQHGHVFULSWLRQGDWD

Image 5-1 Overview of cutting edge, tool and magazine data

The identifiers (DP,...PP,...MAP,...) are taken from the NC language. They are part of the
names of the system variables $TC_DP,...

Note
The gray data fields are only available if tool management is active.
Dark gray data fields are also available without tool management, but with monitoring function.
White data fields are available also even if tool management is not active.

$'$37(5'$7$

$'37

Image 5-2 Adapter data

Tool Management
224 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.1 Overview of OPI and system variables

722/+2/'(5'$7$

&$55

2IIVHWFRPSRQHQWVRIWRROKROGHUV

Image 5-3 Tool holder data

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 225
Programming
5.2 Cutting edge data

5.2 Cutting edge data

5.2.1 Cutting edge data

Cutting edge data

(&3 /RFDWLRQGHSHQGHQWRIIVHWVFRDUVH
6&3 /RFDWLRQGHSHQGHQWRIIVHWVILQH
023& 8VHUFXWWLQJHGJHPRQLWRULQJ
023 &XWWLQJHGJHPRQLWRULQJ
'3& 8VHUFXWWLQJHGJHGDWD
'3 &XWWLQJHGJHGDWD

Image 5-4 Overview of cutting edge data

This data exists for each cutting edge that is created (D1-D12). Tool management includes
the geometry and user data as well as the optional monitoring data for the cutting edges.
If the cutting edges are created via HMI, the D number is counted up from 1. It is possible to
program the D no. with gaps, e.g. D1, D3, D6 if cutting edges are set up using the NC program.

5.2.2 Cutting edge parameters

$TC_DPx[t,D]
Cutting edge parameters for geometry, technology and tool type.
Parameters:
● x: Parameters 1...25
The maximum value for x is displayed in the OPI variable "numCuttEdgeParams" in block
Y.
● t: T number 1...32000
● D: Cutting edge number 1...12 or D number
Depending on the tool type, up to 25 cutting edge parameters can be programmed for each
tool cutting edge.
References: /FB1/ W1, Tool Offset

Tool Management
226 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.2 Cutting edge data

OPI block TO
Address calculations:
● Line = (D - 1) * "numCuttEdgeParams" + parameter number
● Column = T number

Tool offset parameters (system variables)

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI varia‐ Type De‐
bles fault2)
$TC_DP1 INT Tool type edgeData REAL 9999
$TC_DP2 Double Cutting edge position* edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP3 Double Geometry length 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP4 Double Geometry length 2 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP5 Double Geometry length 3 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP6 Double Radius geometry edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP7 Double Geometry - corner radius edgeData REAL 0
(tool type 700; slotting saw)
$TC_DP81) Double Geometry length 4 edgeData REAL 0
(tool type 700; slotting saw)
$TC_DP91) Double Geometry length 5 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP10 1)
Double Geometry - angle 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP111) Double Geometry – angle 2 for tapered mill‐ edgeData REAL 0
ing tools
$TC_DP12 Double Wear - length 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP13 Double Wear - length 2 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP14 Double Wear - length 3 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP15 Double Wear - radius edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP16 Double Wear - slot width b/rounding radius edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP17 Double Wear - projection k edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP18 Double Wear - length 5 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP19 Double Wear - angle 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP20 Double Wear - angle 2 for conical milling edgeData REAL 0
tools
$TC_DP21 Double Adapter length 1 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP22 Double Adapter length 2 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP23 Double Adapter length 3 edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP24 Double Clearance angle edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DP25 Double ManualTurn: Cutting speed edgeData REAL 0
ShopMill: Status value of tool of type
1xx and 2xx.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 227
Programming
5.2 Cutting edge data

Tool offset parameters (system variables)

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI varia‐ Type De‐
bles fault2)
$TC_DPCE [t,d] INT System variable of an offset data re‐ - - 0
cord with T=t and D=d containing
cutting edge number CE. (Unique D
no. or user assignment of D no. for
cutting edge numbers)
Value range for permissible cutting
edge numbers: 1, 2, 3 ... MD18106.
$TC_DPH [t,d] INT H parameter (Y / extraCuttEdgePar‐ - - 0
ams), Bit0=1
$TC_DPV Double Tool cutting edge orientation - - -
$TC_DPV3 L1 component of the tool cutting - - -
edge orientation
$TC_DPV4 L2 component of the tool cutting - - -
edge orientation
$TC_DPV5 L3 component of the tool cutting - - -
edge orientation
1) The meaning of this data is different depending on the tool type.

$TC_DP11
$TC_DP11 contains the identification for the main direction of machining as is defined and
required by the Siemens Cycle950. $TC_DP11 assumes an intermediate position between
tool OEM parameter and NCK system variable:
● $TC_DP11 is a tool OEM parameter in so far as NCK does not evaluate the contents of
the value.
● $TC_DP11 is an NCK system variable in so far as when accessing via $P_ADT[ n ], with
n=11, NCK is subject to the special values 1, 2, 3, 4 of the tool adapter transformation if
TMMG and the subfunction "Tool adapter" are active. This system parameter property is
also used with the analog OPI block TOT.

5.2.3 User cutting edge data

$TC_DPCx[t,D]
Up to 10 additional cutting edge parameters can be programmed for each cutting edge. Setting
with MD18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2=1)
X = Parameter 1...10
T = T number 1...32000
D = Cutting edge number 1...12
D = D number

Tool Management
228 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.2 Cutting edge data

OPI block TUE/TUO

Calculation of line: (d-1)*numCuttEdgeParams_tu+parameterNo.
Calculation of column: T number

User-related cutting edge data

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_DPC1 Double CC_Cutting edge parame‐ edgeData REAL 0
ter 1
... Double ... edgeData REAL 0
$TC_DPC10 Double CC_Cutting edge parame‐ edgeData REAL 0
ter 10

Note
The data is displayed in the tool management. Here you could store "Max. cutting rate", for
example, which is then evaluated in the part program.

5.2.4 Cutting edge-related tool monitoring

$TC_MOPx[t,D]
Tool cutting edges are monitored according to tool life, workpiece count and/or wear.
X = Parameter 1...15
T = T_Number 1...32000
D = Cutting edge number 1...12
D = D number

OPI block TS
Calculation of line: (d-1)*numCuttEdgeParams_ts+parameterNo.
Calculation of column: T number

Tool management monitoring data

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MOP1 Double Prewarning limit for tool life in data REAL 0
min.
$TC_MOP2 Double Residual tool life in minutes data REAL 0
$TC_MOP3 INT Prewarning limit for count data REAL 0
$TC_MOP4 INT Residual unit quantity data REAL 0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 229
Programming
5.2 Cutting edge data

Tool management monitoring data

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MOP11 Double Setpoint for tool life data REAL 0
$TC_MOP13 INT Setpoint for workpiece count data REAL 0
$TC_MOP5 Double Wear prewarning limit - or loca‐ data REAL 0
tion-dependent offset fine pre‐
warning limit
$TC_MOP6 Double Actual wear or location-depend‐ data REAL 0
ent offset, fine actual value
$TC_MOP15 Double Wear setpoint - or location-de‐ data REAL 0
pendent offset, fine setpoint

5.2.5 User cutting-edge monitoring

$TC_MOPCx[t,D]
Tool monitoring user data (edge-specific)
Up to 10 additional tool monitoring parameters can be programmed for each cutting edge.
Setting with MD18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)
X = Parameter 1....10
T = T_Number 1....32000
D = Cutting edge number 1....12
D = D number

OPI block TUS

Calculation of line: (d-1)*numCuttEdgeParams_tus+parameterNo.
Calculation of column: T number

Tool monitoring user data (edge-specific)

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MOPC1 Int CC monitoring parameters userdata REAL 0
... Int ... userdata REAL 0
$TC_MOPC10 Int CC monitoring parameters userdata REAL 0

Tool Management
230 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.2 Cutting edge data

5.2.6 Location-dependent offsets, fine (additive offsets)

$TC_SCPx[t,D]
Location-dependent offsets fine (the term "additive offsets" is also frequently used) comprise
all the magnitudes of error which contribute to the total deviation between the actual workpiece
and the specified dimensions. The parameters for the location-dependent offsets refer to the
geometrical data of a cutting edge. DL stands for D Location, whereby Location refers to where
the cutting edge is used.
X = Parameter for DL=1...DL=6
T = T number 1...32000
D = Cutting edge number 1...12
D = D number

OPI block TOS, TOST

Calculation of line: (d-1)*(maxnumEdgeSC*numParams_SC) +
((EdgeSC_1)*numParams_SC)+ParameterNo.
Calculation of column: T number

Location-dependent offsets
Name Type Designation OPI variables Type
$TC_SCPx
x = 13-21 Double Can be activated with DL=1 edgeSCData REAL
x = 23-31 Double Can be activated with DL=2 edgeSCData REAL
x = 33-41 Double Can be activated with DL=3 edgeSCData REAL
x = 43-51 Double Can be activated with DL=4 edgeSCData REAL
x = 53-61 Double Can be activated with DL=5 edgeSCData REAL
x = 63-71 Double Can be activated with DL=6 edgeSCData REAL
Transformed location-dependent edgeSCData REAL
offsets fine, block TOST

5.2.7 Location-dependent offsets, coarse (setting-up offsets)

$TC_ECPx[t,D]
The location-dependent offsets, coarse (also setting-up offsets) can be set by the machine
setter before the machining operation (see also $TC_SCP).
X = Parameter for DL=1...DL=6
T = T number 1...32000
D = Cutting edge number 1...12

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 231
Programming
5.2 Cutting edge data

D = D number

OPI block TOE, TOET

Calculation of line: (d-1)*(maxnumEdge_SC*numParams_SC)+
((EdgeSC-1)*numParams_SC)+ParameterNo.
Calculation of column:T number

Setting-up offsets
Name Type Designation OPI variables Type
$TC_ECPx edgeECData REAL
x = 13-21 Double Can be activated with DL=1 edgeECData REAL
x = 23-31 Double Can be activated with DL=2 edgeECData REAL
x = 33-41 Double Can be activated with DL=3 edgeECData REAL
x = 43-51 Double Can be activated with DL=4 edgeECData REAL
x = 53-61 Double Can be activated with DL=5 edgeECData REAL
x = 63-71 Double Can be activated with DL=6 edgeECData REAL
Transformed setting-up offsets, edgeECData REAL
block TOET

Tool Management
232 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.3 Tool data

5.3 Tool data

5.3.1 Overview

73& 7RROUHODWHGXVHUGDWD

73* 7RROUHODWHGJULQGLQJGDWD

73 7RROUHODWHGGDWD

Image 5-5 Overview of tool data

5.3.2 Tool-related data

$TC_TPx[t]
General tool data
This data describes the tool in the magazine.
Programming of general tool data with tool management
x: = Parameter 1...11
t: = T number 1...32000

OPI block TD
Calculation of line: T number
Calculation of column: n.a.

Tool-related data, tool management

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_TP2 String Tool identifier toolldent String "T No."
$TC_TP1 INT Duplo number duploNo WORD T No.
$TC_TP3 INT Size on left toolsize_left WORD 1
$TC_TP4 INT Size on right toolsize_right WORD 1
$TC_TP5 INT Size above toolsize_upper WORD 1
$TC_TP6 INT Size below toolsize_down WORD 1
$TC_TP7 INT Magazine location type toolplace_spec WORD 9999

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 233
Programming
5.3 Tool data

Tool-related data, tool management

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_TP8 INT Status toolState WORD 0=not
Value 0 not enabled enabled
Bit 0 active tool
Bit 1 enabled
Bit 2 disabled
Bit 3 measure
Bit 4 prewarning limit reached
Bit 5 tool being changed
Bit 6 fixed-location coded
Bit 7 tool was in use
Bit 8 identifier for tools in buffer
Bit 9=1 ignore disabled state
Bit 9=0 do not ignore
Bit 10 to be unloaded
Bit 11 to be loaded
Bit 12 master tool
Bit 13 reserved
Bit 14 1:1 exchange
Bit 15, manual tool
$TC_TP9 INT Tool monitoring method toolMon WORD 0
Value 0 no tool monitoring
Bit 0 tool life
Bit 1 workpiece count
Bit 2 wear monitoring active
Bit 3 wear monitoring, location-dependent
offset fine active
$TC_TP10 INT Replacement change strategy toolSearch WORD 0
$TC_TP11 INT Tool information: toolInfo Integer 0
Allows tool groups to be divided into sub‐
groups. Tool selection, only with tools of
the lower group
$A_TOOLMN INT Magazine assignment tool toolInMag WORD
$A_TOOLMLN INT Location assignment tool toolInPlace WORD
$P_TOOLND INT Number of cutting edges numCuttEdges WORD
- Adapter No. Assignment adaptNo WORD
$A_MYMN INT Owner magazine for tool toolMyMag WORD
$A_MYMLN INT Owner magazine location for tool toolMyPlace WORD
$TC_TP_PROTA string Name of the three-dimensional protection
area for the tool or name of the file that
contains the description of the protection
area for the tool.

Tool Management
234 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.3 Tool data

Tool-related data, tool management

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_TP_MAX_VELO real Maximum speed of the tool, if the value is maxSpindVeloOf‐
> 0. If a speed limit is not defined (=0), then Tool
no monitoring is performed
$TC_TP_MAX_ACC real Maximum acceleration of the tool, if the maxSpindAccOfTool
value is > 0. If an acceleration speed limit
has not been defined (=0), then no moni‐
toring is performed

$TC_TP1 and $TC_TP2

Like the T No. is sufficient to identify a tool, a tool is equally unique in terms of its duplo number
and its tool name (identifier).
TO units may therefore only contain names that have different duplo numbers. The write
operations of $TC_TP1 and $TC_TP2 are checked for the above and rejected if collisions are
found.

$TC_TP3 to TP6
Size in terms of half locations:
Size 1 means that the tool exactly completely occupies its own magazine location. The
maximum programmable size is 7.
The tool size (half locations) can only be written or changed if the tool does not have an owner
location. This applies to the following situations:
● The tool has still not been loaded
● During loading, as long as the tool is not at its target location in a real magazine
● If the tool is at a location of the buffer or loading magazine and beforehand, the owner
location as well as the reservation in the magazine was deleted (exclusively using the
language commands DELMRES and DELMOWNER).

$TC_TP7
The magazine location type can only be written or changed if the tool does not have an owner
location. This applies to the following situations:
● The tool has still not been loaded
● During loading, as long as the tool is not at its target location in a real magazine
● If the tool is at a location of the buffer or loading magazine and beforehand, the owner
location as well as the reservation in the magazine was deleted (exclusively using the
language commands DELMRES and DELMOWNER).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 235
Programming
5.3 Tool data

$TC_TP8
The tool status is described with system variable $TC_TP8. The system variable is bit-coded.
In other words, a particular state of the tool is assigned to each bit of this data.
The status of a tool must be bit 1=1 ("enabled") so that it can be loaded within the scope of a
programmed tool change for machining in the toolholder.
During tool selection, the status of a tool that is loaded onto the toolholder (spindle, ...) is set
by the NCK to bit 0 ("active").
A tool cannot be loaded if its status is bit 2=1 ("disabled"). The status is set automatically by
the tool monitoring function, when the monitoring value of at least one cutting edge reaches
the limit value. The status bit 2=4 of the tool on the toolholder can or will be ignored when
generating the INIT blocks (see MD 20110 and 20112). The PLC also has the option to make
NCK ignore the status during tool selection.
The status bit 4=1 ("prewarning") is mainly for information purposes. With this status the tool
can still be loaded.
The status bit 7=1 ("was in use") is set by the NCK if the tool is removed from a magazine
location of the type spindle or toolholder.
The tool status bit 5=1 (="W"= is being change) is always reset by the software during buffered
booting. A tool receives/loses this status within the scope of a programmed tool change.
The following applies: All tools (new and old) involved in the tool change are given the status
bit 5=1 by the tool selection. The status is reset again by the end acknowledgement for each
tool command.
The following applies in particular:
The end acknowledgement of the PLC command 2 (programming the T address with
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1), resets the status "W" of the old tool.
With the end acknowledgement of the PLC command 3, 4, 5
(programming M06 in a block with $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1, T, M06 in a block with
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1
T address with $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0)
the status bit 5=1 of the old and the new tool is reset.
Tools that are in the buffer can be used for a new programmed tool command if the tool status
bit 5=! (being changed).
Tools that are in the real magazine and have this status can be used depending on bit 21 of
the MD 20310 or cannot be used for a competing tool-change command for another spindle.
The status bit 5=1 is generally not taken into consideration for a tool selection within the scope
of a block search or for init block generation.
For a RESET, the status is reset for those tools that are involved in a tool change at that point
in time.
The status bit 5=1 is not evaluated when a manual tool is selected.
The tool status bit 8=1 ("return transport") ensures that during the next tool change, a tool that
is at a buffer location and not intended for the next job in machining is returned to the real
magazine.
Bit 9 ignores disabled state.

Tool Management
236 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.3 Tool data

If this bit is set, the disabled state of this tool is ignored. This means the disabled tool can be
used (depending on the search strategy).
This state acts independently of the PLC interface signal:
"Tool disable not effective" (DB21.DBx29.7).
Status bit 11 (to be loaded)
Bit 11 is set for tools that are not in a magazine and are to be loaded. The following definitions
apply:
● The state remains for Power On.
● It is included in the data back-up and rewritten when transferred back to the NCK.
● When assigning a tool to a real magazine the tool status is reset by the NCK (applies to
locations of location type 1, i.e. not to internal magazines such as the loading magazine,
buffer magazine, etc).

Bit Value Meaning

11 0 "Not to be loaded"
1 "To be loaded"

Status bit 10 (to be unloaded)

Bit 10 is set for tools that are located in a magazine and are to be unloaded. The following
definitions apply:
● The state remains for Power On.
● It is included in the data back-up and rewritten when transferred back to the NCK.
● Unloading a tool via an unloading location causes the NCK to reset the tool status.

Bit Value Meaning

10 0 "Not to be unloaded"
1 "To be unloaded"

Status bit 12 (master tool)

Bit 12 is set for tools that are to be permanently assigned to a magazine. This status is only
set to provide information and has no effect on the NCK (e.g. does not disable a location). The
user defines via the unload program whether the tool can be unloaded.

Bit Value Meaning

12 0 "Not a master tool"
1 "Master tool"

State bit 14 (tool marked for 1:1 exchange)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 237
Programming
5.3 Tool data

NCK internal state, that indicates (for a selected search strategy, 1:1 interchange), that the
new and old tool should be interchanged 1:1.

Note
Take care when "manually" changing the tool status via the OPI during machining. This could
undo internal state changes by the NCK and result in incorrect machining.

$TC_TP9
If a monitoring type is activated for the tool with $TC_DP9, then the current monitoring
parameters are evaluated and, if necessary, the tool status set to ’disabled’ or ’prewarning
limit reached’. An existing tool disable is however not withdrawn. Not even then when the
monitoring function for this tool has been deactivated.

$TC_TP11
Tool subgroups
The system variable is bit-coded. Only bits 0...3 are evaluated. A tool group (the same identifier,
different duplo No.) can be split into a maximum of 4 subgroups in this way. A tool can also
be included in several subgroups.
If no bit is set, so $TC_TP11[x]=0, this means the same as "all bits set", i.e. the tool belongs
to all the defined subgroups.
Selection of the tool subgroup
1. With the language command $P_USEKT (UseKindofTool)
(only possible when not working with the setting T=location)
During tool search, only tools that have one of these bits in system variable $TC_TP11,
can be found. This means that it is possible to form so-called "Technology Groups", to
differentiate between tools with the same identifier and specifically release them for
machining.
Example 1:
$P_USEKT=4
i.e. the only tools to be taken into account are those with bit 2 in $TC_TP11 or
Example 2:
$P_USEKT=9
i.e. the only tools to be taken into account are those with bit 3 or 0 in $TC_TP11
2. By programming a tool
with the function T=location $P_USEKT is set automatically at every tool change and in
fact at the $TC_TP11 value of the loaded tool.
Example: T3 M06
the bit value of $TC_TP11 of T3 is now valid (is accepted in "USEKT").
During the transition to a spare tool (and there only) the only tools to be taken into account
are those with one of these bits set in system variable $TC_TP11.

Tool Management
238 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.3 Tool data

5.3.3 Tool-related grinding data

$TC_TPGx[t]
Technology-specific grinding data
The default setting for grinding data is 0. Tools with tool type 400 to 499 are always grinding
tools, i.e. have these additional data which take up additional memory space. If a tool of type
400-499 is set to a value outside this range, then its loses its grinding-specific data - the
associated memory is released again and can be used for other tools.
x: = Parameter 1....9
t: = T number 1...32000

OPI block TG
Calculation of line: T number
Calculation of column: n.a.

Tool-related grinding data

Name Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_TPG 1 INT Spindle number spinNoDress REAL
$TC_TPG 2 INT Chaining rule conntectPar REAL
$TC_TPG 3 Double Minimum grinding wheel radius minToolDia REAL
$TC_TPG 4 Double Minimum grinding wheel width minToolWide REAL
$TC_TPG 5 Double Current grinding wheel width actToolWide REAL
$TC_TPG 6 Double Max. speed maxRotSpeed REAL
$TC_TPG 7 Double Maximum peripheral speed maxTipSpeed REAL
$TC_TPG 8 Double Inclination angle of inclined wheel inclAngle REAL
$TC_TPG 9 INT Parameter number for radius calcu‐ paramNrCCV REAL
lation

5.3.4 Tool-related user data

$TC_TPCx[t]
User-related tool data
An additional 10 tool-specific parameters can be set up per tool. Setting with MD18094
MM_CC_TDA_PARAM and enable with MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set
bit 2)
x: = Parameter 1...10
t: = T number 1...32000

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 239
Programming
5.3 Tool data

OPI block TU/TUD

Calculation of line: T number
Calculation of column: Parameter number

Tool-related OEM user data

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_TPC1 Double data REAL
... Double data REAL
$TC_TPC10 Double data REAL

Note
The data is displayed in the tool management. In addition, e.g. tool status information can also
be stored here.

Tool Management
240 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

5.4 Magazine data

5.4.1 Overview of magazine data

Magazine data

0$*$=,1('$7$
 0/65 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQDVVLJQPHQWWRVSLQGOHV
 0$03 0DJD]LQHEORFNGDWD
 0'3 'LVWDQFHWRFKDQJHSRVLWLRQ
 037+ 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQW\SHKLHUDUFK\
 033& 8VHUPDJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD
 033 0DJD]LQHORFDWLRQGDWD
 0$3& 8VHUPDJD]LQHGHVFULSWLRQGDWD
 0$3 0DJD]LQHGHVFULSWLRQGDWD

Image 5-6 Overview of magazine data

5.4.2 Magazine description data

$TC_MAPx[n]
Magazine description data
This data identifies the real magazine
x: = Parameter 1...10
n: = Magazine number 1...3200

OPI block TM
Calculation of line: Magazine number
Calculation of column: n.a.

Magazine description data, tool management

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default set‐
ting
Magazine number magNo WORD 0
$TC_MAP2 String Identifier of the magazine magIdent String ""

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 241
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Magazine description data, tool management

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default set‐
ting
$TC_MAP1 INT Type of magazine magKind WORD 0
1 = Chain
3 = Turret
5 = Box magazine
7 = Tool buffer magazine
9 = Loading magazine
$TC_MAP3 INT Status of magazine magState WORD 2
Bit 0: Active magazine
Bit 1: Disabled
Bit 2: Magazine is at load position
Bit 3: Tool motion is active
Bit 4: Magazine or tool may be moved. Enabled
for loading
Bit 6: Magazine is fixed-location-coded, i.e. tools
in this magazine are considered fixed-location-co‐
ded tools and treated accordingly
Bit 8: Edge location must not be overlapped left
Bit 9: Edge location must not be overlapped right
Bit 10: Edge location must not be overlapped top
Bit 11: Edge location must not be overlapped bot‐
tom
$TC_MAP6 INT Number of lines (box magazines only) magDim WORD 1
$TC_MAP7 INT Number of columns - -
- - Number of locations for the magazine, corre‐ magNrPlaces WORD 0
sponds to $TC_MAP6*$TC_MAP7
$TC_MAP8 INT Current magazine position relative to change po‐ magActPlace WORD 0
sition
- magCmd WORD
- magCmdState WORD
- magCmdPar1 WORD
- magCmdPar2 WORD
$TC_MAP9 INT Current wear grouping number magWearCom‐ DINT 0
poundNo
$TC_MAP10 INT Current tool search strategies of magazine (see magToolSearch‐ WORD 0
(bit 0...7) $TC_MAMP2) Strat
$TC_MAP10 INT Current empty location search strategy of maga‐ magPlace‐ WORD 0
(bit 8...15) zine SearchStrat

$TC_MAP3
The magazine status bit 3 (tool motion is active) is always reset when the software is booted
with backup.
A magazine that has the status "Tool motion is active" cannot be deleted.

Tool Management
242 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Empty locations are not sought in magazines with the "disabled" status. If a disabled magazine
is explicitly defined for the empty location search, then the process is aborted with an error
message.
A tool that is in a "disabled" magazine cannot be loaded into the spindle or the tool holder.
Overlapping edge locations (bit 8...11=1)
For default setting (Bit 8 ...11 = 0), an oversized tool extends beyond the magazine edge
locations. If this has to be prevented (e.g. due to the mechanical situation at the machine),
then one or several of these bits can be set.
Example: Bits 8 and 9 are set, bits 10 and 11 are not set.
This means that an oversized tool must not overlap the magazine (typically a box-type
magazine) on its left and right sides, but an oversized tool may overlap / extend beyond the
magazine on its top and bottom sides.
The following applies:
Left and top regarding a reference location is where the magazine locations with the lower
magazine numbers are.
Right and bottom regarding a reference location is where the magazine locations with the
higher magazine numbers are.

$TC_MAP8
The current magazine position $TC_MAP8 is refreshed by the NCK every time the magazine
is moved.
When the magazine configuration has been loaded, variable $TC_MAP8 is assigned the value
zero. The position value is the number of the magazine location that is located at the zero
position of the magazine. As a maximum, the magazine position can have the number of
magazine locations in the magazine. Larger or negative values are rejected.

$TC_MAP10
Magazine-specific tool search
The bit settings correspond precisely to the system variables $TC_MAMP2.
For buffer magazines, the default setting "0" always applies, i.e. the search is made forwards
from the 1st magazine location.

5.4.3 Magazine user data

$TC_MAPCx[n]
Magazine user data
Up to 10 user data can be additionally created for each magazine. Setting in the MD18090
MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM and enable with MD18080
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 243
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

x: = Parameter 1...10
n: = Magazine number 1...32000

OPI block TUM

Calculation of line: Parameter number
Calculation of column: Magazine number

Magazine description data OEM user

Name Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_MAPC1 userData DINT
... userData DINT
$TC_MAPC10 userData DINT

5.4.4 Magazine location data

$TC_MPPx[n,m]
Magazine location data
The following data describes the magazine location
x: = Parameter 1..7
n: = Physical magazine number 1...32000
m: = Physical location number 1...1500
The maximum value of x is stored in OPI variable numMagPlaceParams in block Y.

OPI block TP
Calculation of line: (magazinLocNo-1)*numMagPlaceParams+parameterNo.

Tool Management
244 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Calculation of column: Magazine number

Magazine location data, tool management

NCK identifier Typ Designation OPI variables Type Default
e setting
$TC_MPP1 INT Location type placeData WORD 0
1 = Magazine location
2 = Spindle, tool holder
3 = Gripper
4 = Loader
5 = Transfer location
6 = Loading station
7 = Loading point
$TC_MPP2 INT Location type placeData WORD 9999
> 0: Location type for virtual location
= 0: Every tool fits in this location
9999: Not defined
$TC_MPP3 BO Consider adjacent location on/off placeData WORD FALSE
OL
$TC_MPP4 INT Location state placeData WORD 1
Bit 0: Disabled
Bit 1: Free to accept a tool (occupied)
Bit 2: Reserved for tool from buffer
Bit 3: Reserved for new tool to be loaded
Bit 4: Occupied in left half location
Bit 5: Occupied in right half location
Bit 6: Occupied in upper half location
Bit 7: Occupied in lower half location
Bit 8: Left half location reserved
Bit 9: Right half location reserved
Bit 10: Top half location reserved
Bit 11: Lower half location reserved
Bit 12: Wear group disabled
Bit 13: Overlapping permitted. Tools can
overlap disabled magazine locations. On‐
ly possible if consider adjacent location is
active (see also MD 17520).
- Reference of phys. magazine (r.t.) placeData WORD 0
$TC_MPP5 INT Location type index (location type num‐ placeData WORD 0
bering) or wear group number
$TC_MPP6 INT T No. of tool at this location placeData WORD 0
$TC_MPP7 INT No. of adapter in mag. location placeData WORD 0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 245
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Magazine location data, tool management

NCK identifier Typ Designation OPI variables Type Default
e setting
$TC_MPP_SP INT For tool speed and acceleration monitor‐ placeData
ing
Only relevant when $MC_TOOLHOLD‐
ER_MANAGEMENT > 0. Spindle no.
which is linked to the tool holder.
$TC_MPP66 INT T No. of the tool, for which the identifica‐ placeData
tion "reserved for tool in buffer" is set.
If a tool is transported into the spindle
within the scope of changing from the
magazine, the magazine location is re‐
served (identifier "reserved for tool in the
buffer"), the T No. of this tool is entered
into $TC_MPP6 and the tool has entered
this location in the variable $A_MYMN/
MYMLN.

Writing magazine location data

Points to be noted about writing magazine location data:
When writing to a $TC_MPP... parameter for the first time, all of the magazine locations defined
by magazine parameters are created with their default values (the memory for the locations is
therefore "used up"). i.e. the magazine must have been defined by this time ($TC_MAP...
parameter).

$TC_MPP1 (location type)

Only magazine locations of the type "Magazine location" ($TC_MPP1 = 1) may be defined at
magazines that are not of the type "internal" ($TC_MAP1 = 7 or = 9).
Location types:
1 = Magazine location
Only locations of type "1" can be defined on real magazines.
2 = Spindle / tool holder
3 = Gripper
4 = Loader
5 = Transfer location
The distinction gripper / loader / transfer location is intended for HMI applications. Here, NCK
does not make a distinction, loader and transfer location are treated just like a gripper.
6 = Loading station
After the tool moves to this location, the tool stays there. It can only be removed by explicit
operation (unloading).
7 = Loading point

Tool Management
246 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

If a tool is moved from the magazine or buffer to this location, after the PLC acknowledgement
of this motion command, the tool is automatically removed from this location.
Please note when writing the location status and number of the tool in this location that the
following dependencies on $TC_MPP2 to $TC_MPP4 apply; these are checked during the
write operation:
● If the location already contains a tool, the location type to be written must be checked
against the tool location type.
● The status "not occupied" may only be written when none of the "assigned" states is set
and there is no tool at the location.
● The "Disabled" state can be set irrespective of the other states.
● If there is no tool contained then the state "free" is automatically active; i.e. the state "not
free" cannot be set by the NC program or PLC, HMI.
● "Occupied" states can only be set by the NCK within the scope of the adjacent location
consideration; i.e. these states are ignored during writing by the NC program or PLC, HMI.
● The state "Reserved for tool from buffer" is set when a tool is removed by the NCK from
the real magazine during a tool change. This location is then not designated as "free" for
tools other than the tool removed.
● The states "reserved for tool from buffer" and "reserved for new tool to be loaded" of a
location are automatically reset when a tool is placed in this location.
● The states "reserved for tool from buffer" and "reserved for new tool to be loaded" of a real
magazine location are automatically reset when a tool from this location is placed at a
location in the loading/unloading magazine.
● The state "reserved for tool from buffer" is reset during an empty location search if the tool
for which the empty location is being sought is assigned a magazine location other than its
previous real magazine location. The newly found empty location is assigned the state
"Reserved for tool from buffer" and becomes the new owner of the tool being sought.
The magazine location state "Reserved for tool to be loaded" is always reset when the control
system is restarted. If "Consider adjacent location" is active, reservations of adjacent locations
are also considered.
Users only have to deal with these rules if they wish to define the magazine directly at the NC
program level. Data back-up is such that the rules are observed when data is imported to the
NCK.

$TC_MPP5 (location type index)

This data contains the spindle number for magazine locations of type "spindle" ($TC_MPP1)
and is thus made known to the tool management.
The value cannot be changed for location type = 1 ($TC_MPP1; i.e. for all locations of internal
magazines) if there is a tool at the location.

$TC_MPP6 (T No.)
● Tools can only be placed in magazine locations when both the tool and the magazine, plus
its magazine locations, have been defined.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 247
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

The tool may occupy only one magazine location!

Procedure:
It first attempts to find the tool associated with the T No.
● If it is already defined, then an attempt is made - subject to appropriate check procedure -
to add it to the magazine location.
● If it is not yet defined, then an error has occurred.
Checks:
● The type of the tool to be placed must match the type of the location. If the type has not
been set explicitly at the time of writing (default = 9999 = "Not defined"), then the tool is not
placed.
● The state of the location must be "free" and must not be "disabled".
● If the value T No.=0 is programmed, then this means that the present tool will be removed
from the magazine location.
Notice: $TC_MPP6 = 0 also changes the state of the location: a tool can only be placed in
a magazine location if the location does not already contain a tool. The old tool might first
have to be removed with $TC_MPP6 = 0.
Note
Because of this dependency of the individual data, it is mandatory for the T number of the
tool to be written as the last data in a magazine configuration. If you do not adhere to this
sequence, default values might be set which may result in unwanted data.

5.4.5 Magazine location user data

$TC_MPPCx[n,m]
Magazine location user data
Up to 10 user data can be additionally created for each magazine. Setting for number of
parameters in MD18092 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM and enable with MD18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (set bit 2)
x: = Parameter 1...10
n: = Magazine number 1...30
m:= Magazine location number 1...32000

OPI block TUP

Calculation of line: (m-1)*numMagLocParams_u+ParameterNo.

Tool Management
248 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Calculation of column: Magazine number

OEM user magazine location data

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MPPC1 INT userplaceData DINT 0
... INT userplaceData DINT 0
$TC_MPPC10 INT userplaceData DINT 0

5.4.6 Magazine location type hierarchy

$TC_MPTH[n,m]
Magazine location type hierarchy
The location types can be organized in a hierarchy by programming these system variables.
N: = Index of hierarchy, from 0...7
M: = Index within hierarchy n, location type 0...7
Magazine location types, refer also to $TC_TP7 and $TC_MPP2.

OPI block TT
Calculation of line: Number of location type+1
Calculation of column: Number of the location hierarchy+1

Magazine data: Magazine location type hierarchy

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI varia‐ Type Default setting
bles
$TC_MPTH[n,m] INT Location type hierarchy placeType WORD 9999
n: Hierarchy 0-7
m: Location type 0-7

If a tool is to be loaded into the magazine, then the location type determines the availability of
locations, i.e. $TC_TP7 and $TC_MPP2 must be defined.
If the location type of the tool is part of the location type hierarchy, then the location assignment
is carried out in accordance with this hierarchy.
Several such hierarchies can be set up in one TO-area unit, but a location type can only be
entered in one hierarchy.
Example
A chain magazine is to be split into 6 location types and the following hierarchy defined (the
magazine No. is "1", the numbers of the location types are selected at random).
Location type_124 < Location type_3 < Location type_15 < Location type_1080 < Location
type_5 <Location type_18

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 249
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Definitions:
Magazine:
$TC_MPP2[magazine no., location]
$TC_MPP2[1,1...6] = 124
$TC_MPP2[1,7...12] = 3
$TC_MPP2[1,13...18] = 15
$TC_MPP2[1,19...24] = 1080
$TC_MPP2[1,25...30] = 5
$TC_MPP2[1,31...36] = 18
Hierarchy:
$TC_MPTH[0,0] = 124
$TC_MPTH[0,1] = 3
$TC_MPTH[0,2] = 15
$TC_MPTH[0,3] = 1080
$TC_MPTH[0,4] = 5
$TC_MPTH[0,5] = 18
If a tool of type_15 ($TC_TP) is loaded, it is preferable for it to be stored at locations 13...18.
If none of these locations are free, the search for an empty location continues, in accordance
with the hierarchy, at locations of type_1080.

5.4.7 Distance to change position

$TC_MDPx[n,m]
Distance from magazine zero
$TC_MDPx[n,m]=value
x: = 1: Loading magazine: Loading points, loading station (1st int. mag.)
x: = 2 : Buffer magazine: Spindle, gripper,..(2nd int. mag.)
n: = Magazine no. of real magazine
m: = Location no. of internal magazine (loading point,..).
Value: = Distance in number of locations

OPI block TPM

Calculation of line:
(LocNo.-1)*numPlaceMulti*numPlaceMultiParams+ParameterNo.

Tool Management
250 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Calculation of column: Magazine number

Magazine data: Distance to change position

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_MDP1 INT Distance between tool change po‐ multiPlace WORD
sition of magazine n and location m
of 1st internal magazine (loading
magazine, 9999)
$TC_MDP2 INT Distance between tool change po‐ multiPlace WORD
sition of magazine n and location m
of 2nd internal magazine (loading
magazine, 9998)

Description
Magazine position
The current magazine position is required for tool change, loading and unloading. This position
refers to the magazine zero point established by the machine manufacturer. This is usually at
the change position.
The number of the location at the magazine zero point has to be given during initialization.
Otherwise, it is assumed that the non-existent location 0 is at the change position.
If the magazine is moved by a task, the current position is changed accordingly. The NC does
not know how many positions the magazine has moved but knows the targets of the relevant
commands. On the basis of the defined distance between and object (e.g. spindle 2) and the
change position, the NC is able to update the current position.
Comment:
The value of the distance and the current magazine position is also evaluated for box
magazines.
For empty location searches and tool searches, search strategies based on reference to the
current magazine position convert the position contained in system variable $TC_MAP8 to the
change position, loading point in each case at which the search is started. With search tasks,
the NCK always specifies internally which change position, loading point is to be used as
reference for the search.
Assignment
By defining $TC_MDPx[n,m], a connection or assignment (distance relationship) is established
between the real magazine and the buffers or the loading points. The HMI can only display
assigned buffer locations and loading points. A tool transport within the scope of a t preparation
or a change can only be realized via an assigned buffer (exception: asynchronous transfers).
The tool search, for T preparation and change is also only made in those magazines assigned
to a spindle or tool holder.
The maximum number of these distance relationships can be defined with machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 251
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Example: 1st TO unit, 1 magazine, 1x spindle, double gripper, 2x loading point. This is a total
of 5 distance relationships (3x $TC_MDP2 to assign the real magazine to the 3 buffers, 2x
$TC_MDP1 to assign the real magazine to the two loading points).

Note
Command $TC_MDP2[n,m]=9999 can be used to dissolve a distance relationship.

Example:
' 'LVWDQFHIURPPDJD]LQH]HURSRLQWWRORDGLQJVWDWLRQ!ORFDWLRQV 7&B0'3>@
' 'LVWDQFHIURPPDJD]LQH]HURSRLQWWRORDGLQJVWDWLRQ!ORFDWLRQV 7&B0'3>@

%XIIHUORFDWLRQ %XIIHUORFDWLRQ

6SLQGOH 6SLQGOH

&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ ' ' &KDQJHSRVLWLRQ

     

 

0DJD]LQH   0DJD]LQH
7&B0$3>@  7&B0$3>@ 

 

 

/RDGLQJVWDWLRQIRUPDJD]LQH
DQGPDJD]LQH 0DJD]LQH]HURSRLQW
/RFDWLRQLQORDGLQJPDJD]LQH

Image 5-7 Distance to change position $TC_MDPx[y,z]=value

The magazine zero point is usually the change position of the spindle. Therefore, the following
applies:
● If location 1 is located at zero position, the current magazine position = 1 ($TC_MAP8[1]).
Examples for programming the distance to the zero position:

$TC_MDP1[1,1] = 5 Distance between location 1 of the loading station and the zero position of mag‐
azine 1
$TC_MDP1[2,1] = 6 Distance between the same location and the zero position of magazine 2
$TC_MDP2[1,1] = 0 Distance between location 1 of 2nd internal magazine and zero position of mag‐
azine 1
$TC_MDP2[2,2] = 0 Distance between location 2 of 2nd internal magazine and zero position of mag‐
azine 2

Tool Management
252 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

5.4.8 Magazine blocks

$TC_MAMPx
Magazine block data
x: = Parameter 1, 2, 3

OPI block TMC

Calculation of line: n.a.
Calculation of column: n.a.

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MAMP1 String Identifier of the configuration magCBIdent String ""
magazine
Number of the loading magazine magBLMag WORD
Number of the buffer magazine magZWMag WORD
$TC_MAMP2 INT Type of tool search (bits 0...7) magSearch 0
and type of empty location
search (bits 8...15)
Bit 0=0 default strategy - take the
first available tool found in the
tool group. First search in the
magazine from which the last
change took place.
Bit 0=1: Select the "active" tool
in the magazine of the previously
changed tool; otherwise search
for replacement tool with lowest
duplo number. If no tool is found
in this magazine, continue
searching in the other associ‐
ated magazines
Bit 1: Search for next replace‐
ment tool at the shortest possible
distance from the current maga‐
zine position
Bit 2: Select the "active" tool oth‐
erwise the replacement tool with
the lowest number contained in
$TC_TP10
Bit 3: Search for tool in the group
with the lowest actual value for
the monitored quantity
Bit 4: Search for tool in the group
with the highest actual value for
the monitored quantity

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 253
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MAMP2 INT Bit 5: Only consider those tools magSearch 0
whose actual value is at least the
factor $AC_MONMIN of the set‐
point away from the limiting value
Bit 6: First search in the maga‐
zine currently being considered
(this is only effective in conjunc‐
tion with bit 7=1)
Bit 7=0: Start the tool search in
the magazine where the tool last
changed came from
Bit 7=1: Always start the search
in the 1st magazine of the dis‐
tance table
Bit 7= 1 + bit 0=1 or bit 2=1, if no
"activeTool" is found in the mag‐
azine, then - if available - the ac‐
tive tool is selected from another
magazine linked with the tool
holder
$TC_MAMP2 Bit 8
Search forwards starting at first
location number
Bit 9
Search forwards starting at cur‐
rent magazine position
Bit 10
Search backwards starting at
last location number

Tool Management
254 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MAMP2 Bit 11
Search backwards starting at
current magazine position
Bit 12
Symmetrical search starting at
the current magazine position
Bit 13
(1:1 exchange) behavior
If the 1:1 exchange is not possi‐
ble, the search strategy for an
empty location is considered
"symmetrical".
The 1:1 exchange acts in addi‐
tion to other set search strat‐
egies. If possible, the 1:1 ex‐
change is treated as a priority.
Bit 14 = 0 (hierarchy)
First searches the magazine with
a search run across the location
types of the hierarchy of the tool
type. If a location type is not
found, then a search run is per‐
formed across the magazine.
Bit 14 = 1 (hierarchies)
Search the location type of the
tool in the magazine, if nothing is
found, search run across the
magazine. If a location is still not
found, then a search run is re‐
peated across all magazines
with the next location type from
the type hierarchy.
Bit 15 = 0 (type, location type hi‐
erarchy)
Each location type can be inclu‐
ded as a maximum in one loca‐
tion type hierarchy.
Bit 15 = 1 (type, location type hi‐
erarchy)
For the listed location types, 1, ...
8, location type hierarchies can
be defined so that one location
type may be contained in several
hierarchies. The hierarchies for
location type 1 are defined with
$TC_MPTH[0,m], those for loca‐
tion type 8 with $TC_MPTH[7,m].

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 255
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Magazine block data, magazine control block

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI variables Type Default
setting
$TC_MAMP3 INT Procedure for tools in a wear mode‐ WORD 0
group (bit 0...7) WearGroup
Search strategies for wear
groups (bit 8...15)
Bit 0=0: When a wear group is
activated, the tool status re‐
mains unchanged
Bit 0=1: When a wear group is
activated, the tool status is
changed. One tool from each
tool group becomes active
$TC_MAMP3 Bit 1=0: When a wear group is
disabled, the tool status remains
unchanged
Bit 1=1: When a wear group is
disabled, the tool status is
changed
Bit 2...7 reserved
Search strategy for next wear
group
Bit 8=0: Find the next possible
wear group
Bit 8=1: Find the wear group with
the next highest group number
that can be activated
Bit 9...11 reserved
$TC_MAMP3 Search strategy within the tool
group for the tool to be set to ac‐
tive (language command SETTA
or PI_SETTST)
Bit 12=0: Lowest possible duplo
number
Bit 12=1: Lowest possible maga‐
zine location number
Bit 13=1: Lowest number con‐
tained in $TC_TP10

Interaction of the bits for the tool search strategy

The following strategies always start the search in the first magazine of the distance table.

$TC_MAMP2 = Meaning
Bit Hex value
7+0 'H80' Otherwise, the same as value 0

Tool Management
256 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

$TC_MAMP2 = Meaning
7+0 'H81' Otherwise, the same as value 1 - however, if an "active" tool is not found in the
magazine, then - if available - the "active" tool is selected from another magazine
linked with the tool holder. If no tool with the "active" state is available, then a
search is made for the replacement tool with the lowest duplo number.
7+6+0 'HC1' Otherwise, the same as value 1 - however, if an "active" tool is not found in the
magazine, then a search is made in the same magazine for any tool that can be
used; if no tool is available, then a search is made in another magazine linked
with the tool holder.
7+1 'H82' Otherwise, the same as bit 1 =1 ('H2')
7+6+1 'HC2'
7+2 'H84' Otherwise, the same as bit 2 = 1 ('H4') - however, if an "active" tool is not found
in the magazine, then - if available - the "active" tool is selected from another
magazine linked with the tool holder. If no tool with the "active" state is available,
then a search is made for the replacement tool with the lowest number in
$TC_TP10.
7+6+2 'HC4' Otherwise, the same as bit 2 =1 ('H4') - however if no "active" tool is found in the
magazine, then a search is made in the same magazine for a tool that can be
used, if available, then a search is made for the replacement tool in another mag‐
azine linked with the tool holder with the lowest number in $TC_TP10.
7+3 'H88' Otherwise, the same as bit 3 =1 ('H8')
7+6+3 'HC8'
7+4 'H90' Otherwise, the same as bit 4 =1 ('H10')
7+6+4 'HD0'

Search operation for $TC_MAMP2, bit 0=1, bit 6=0, bit 7=1
A search is made for the appropriate tool in the magazine according to the tool search strategy
that has been set (defined using parameter $TC_MAMP2). The search is considered to have
been successful if a tool was found according to the search strategy.
Search operation for $TC_MAMP2, bit 0=1, bit 6=1, bit 7=1
A search is first made for the appropriate tool in the magazine according to the tool search
strategy that has been set (defined using parameter $TC_MAMP2). The search is considered
to have been successful if a tool according to the search strategy was found - or all tools of
the group were checked and no tool was found according to the search strategy - but in spite
of this, a tool that can be used was found among the tools that were searched.
If a search is made according to the strategy, bit 2=1 (sequence of use $TC_TP10) then the
same principle applies. The criterion is also "active tool" and instead of the duplo number, the
number in $TC_TP10.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 257
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Example to clarify the principle of operation of bit 6 and bit 7

0DJD]LQH 0DJD]LQH

7/ 7/
 
0LOOHUB 0LOOHUB
 
7/ 7/ DFWLYH
7/ 7/
 
7/ 7/
7/ 7/ DFWLYH
 

6SLQGOH

7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 

Assumption:
● All tools can be used
● Basic setting of the search strategy is bit 0 = 1 - search for the active tool, if there is no
active tool, take the tool with the lowest duplo No.
● Spindle_1 is linked to both magazines, magazine_1 is the first in the distance table
Example_1:
Bit 6 = 0
Bit 7 = 0

T="Miller_15"M06 There is only one "miller_15" tool, it was found in magazine_1 and was
loaded
...
T="Tool3" MThe last change was performed from magazine_1. Therefore, the search
06 is first made in magazine_1. There is no active "Tool3" there, but there are
two tools in this group that can be used. The tool with the lowest duplo no.
is selected. Magazine_2 is no longer considered.
Example_2:

Tool Management
258 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Bit 6 = 0
Bit 7 = 1

T="Miller_20"M06 There is only one "Miller_20" tool, it was found in Magazine_2 and was
loaded
...
T="Tool3" MThe last change was performed from Magazine_2. As a result of bit 7 = 1,
06 the tool search is however started in Magazine_1. But this setting also
means that the search strategy "active tool" has priority over a magazine-
specific approach. This means that: No active tool from the group "Tool3"
was found in Magazine_1, i.e. the search is continued in the next magazine
(corresponding to the sequence in the distance table). An active "Tool3" is
there - and this is selected.
Example_3:
Bit 6 = 1
Bit 7 = 1

T="Miller_20"M06 There is only one "Miller_20" tool, it was found in Magazine_2 and was
loaded
...
T="Tool3" MThe last change was performed from Magazine_2. As a result of bit 7 = 1,
06 the tool search starts in Magazine_1. However, no tool of this group is
present there. As a result of bit 6 = 1 (considers the actual magazine with
priority), a search is now made for a "Tool3" that can be used in Magazine_1
(for this search, this is also the actual magazine); this tool is also found.

$TC_MAMP2
For software releases less than 2.5, the tool search is always made magazine for magazine,
starting in the magazine from which the last change was made.
With bit 7 there is an additional option to select the tool search.
Bit 7=1
The search always starts in the 1st magazine of the distance table. If the search for the active
tool is set using either bit 0 or bit 2, then a search is made for the active tool across all of the
magazines linked with the spindle. A search is only made for a replacement tool if no active
tool was found in all of these magazines.

Note
The tool sequence in a tool group is not defined (e.g. ascending duplo number). This means,
if the default strategy is used for the search (MAMP2=0), then any tool that is capable of being
used is found.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 259
Programming
5.4 Magazine data

5.4.9 Assigning buffers to spindles

$TC_MLSR[x,y]
Assignment of buffer locations to spindles - $TC_MLSR[x,y]
x: = Location no. in buffer 1 ... 32000
y: = Location no. of the spindle in buffer magazine 1 ... 32000

OPI block n.a.

Calculation of line: n.a.
Calculation of column: n.a.

NCK identifier Type Designation OPI varia‐ Type Default set‐

bles ting
$TC_MLSR[x,y] INT System variable for assigning maga‐ - - 0
zine locations of the buffer magazine
to the spindle

Description
This assignment is important when searching for tools. The search is always made, viewed
from the requesting spindle, initially in the associated buffers, then in the assigned magazines.
This means that a tool, which is located in the buffer, can only be found if there is an assignment
to the spindle via parameter $TC_MLSR.
The number of possible links between the spindle and the buffer can be set using machine
data $MN_MM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC.
Example: 1st TO unit, 1 magazine, 1x spindle, double gripper, 2x loading point. The double
gripper is linked to the spindle via $TC_MLSR[2,1]=0 and $TC_MLSR[3,1]=0. The correct value
for the MD is "2".
The sequence when programming is decisive for the sequence when automatically returning
tools.

Note
The content value of the system variable is not evaluated. The assignment is defined via indices
x and y. In order to check via the part program whether a certain assignment exists, a read
operation has to return the value zero.

Note
No more than 16 magazines or buffer locations can be assigned to one spindle.

Tool Management
260 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.4 Magazine data

Magazine distance to buffer via tool holder / spindle

$TC_MDP2 and $TC_MLSR establish a relationship between the buffer locations and
magazines.

0DJD]LQH EXIIHUPDJD]LQH

*ULSSHU
0DJD]LQH /RFDWLRQ 

7&B0/65>@ 

7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0'3>@ 
0DJD]LQH 7RROKROGHU 7RROKROGHU
/RFDWLRQ  /RFDWLRQ 

7&B0'3>@ 

7&B0/65>@ 
7&B0/65>@ 

*ULSSHU
/RFDWLRQ 

Image 5-8 Magazine distance to the buffer

Configuration
Two magazines are defined with numbers 1 and 2.
Four locations 1, 2, 3 and 4 are defined in buffer 9998; two tool holders 5, 7 and two grippers
4, 5.

$TC_MPP1[9998,1] = 2 ;Location type = spindle or tool holder

$TC_MPP5[9998,1] = 7 ;Tool holder no. = 7
$TC_MPP1[9998,2] = 3 ;Location type = gripper
$TC_MPP5[9998,2] = 4 ;Gripper no. = 4
$TC_MPP1[9998,3] = 3 ;Location type = gripper
$TC_MPP5[9998,3] = 5 ;Gripper no. = 5
$TC_MPP1[9998,4] = 2 ;Location type = spindle or tool holder
$TC_MPP5[9998,4] = 5 ;Tool holder no. = 5

Both grippers are linked to tool holder 5 via $TC_MLSR. They do not require their own distance
definition for the magazines. They are linked to the magazines via tool holder 5 with the
distance relations defined there. However, it is also possible to define separate distance
relationships for the grippers.
Tool holder 5 is linked with both magazines via $TC_MDP2.
Tool holder 7 is only linked with magazine 2; gripper 5 is assigned to it.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 261
Programming
5.5 Adapter data

5.5 Adapter data

$TC_ADPTx[n]
If machine data $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER is set to a value = -1 or > 0, the adapter
data is defined, deleted, read and written via the following variables
x: = Parameter 1...3, T
n: = Number of the adapter

OPI block AD
Calculation of line: Length 1, 2, 3 = line 1, 2, 3, transformation = line 4
Calculation of column: Adapter number

Adapter data
Name Type Designation OPI VAR Type
$TC_ADPT1 Double Adapter geometry: Length 1 adaptData REAL
$TC_ADPT2 Double Adapter geometry: Length 2 adaptData REAL
$TC_ADPT3 Double Adapter geometry: Length 3 adaptData REAL
$TC_ADPTT[n] Double Adapter transformation number adaptData REAL

The adapter geometry values act on the geometry values of the cutting edge in the same way
as system variables $TC_DP 21, $TC_DP 22 and $TC_DP 23. The parameters are available
only when the tool management is active.
Transformation numbers 1 to 8 can be programmed for the adapter transformation function.
The parameter is available only when the tool management is active.
$TC_MPP7[m,p]: Number of the adapter assigned to magazine location
Value=0 : No adapter assigned to location
Value>0 : Number of the assigned magazine

Tool Management
262 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.6 Toolholder data

5.6 Toolholder data

Overview
The orientation of the tool can be changed for a class of tool machines. The orientation once
set is however subsequently fixed during operation and in particular cannot be changed during
traversing. Therefore, a kinematic orientation transformation for this type of machine is neither
necessary nor meaningful.
It is however necessary to consider the changes in the tool length components attributable to
the change in the orientation. These calculations are assumed by the control.
The following must be available to calculate the change of tool length components:
● Tool data (geometry, wear ...)
● Tool holder data (data for the geometry of the tool holder with orientation capability).
A defined tool holder must be specified for the control for the function "orientable tool holder":

$TC_CARRx
x: = Parameter 1...33
The maximum number of tool holders can be defined in MD18088
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER. The value is divided by the number of active TO units. The
integer result indicates how many tool holders can be defined per TO unit. Values not set by
the user are preset to 0.

OPI block TC
Calculation of line: Number of the tool holder
Calculation of column: n.a.

Tool holder data

Name Type Explanation/description OPI VAR Type
$TC_CARR1 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr1 REAL
x component of offset vector L1
$TC_CARR2 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr2 REAL
y component of offset vector L1
$TC_CARR3 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr3 REAL
z component of offset vector L1
$TC_CARR4 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr4 REAL
x component of offset vector L2
$TC_CARR5 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr5 REAL
y component of offset vector L2
$TC_CARR6 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr6 REAL
z component of offset vector L2
$TC_CARR7 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr7 REAL
x component of rotary axis V1

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 263
Programming
5.6 Toolholder data

Tool holder data

Name Type Explanation/description OPI VAR Type
$TC_CARR8 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr8 REAL
y component of rotary axis V1
$TC_CARR9 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr9 REAL
z component of rotary axis V1
$TC_CARR10 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr10 REAL
x component of rotary axis V2
$TC_CARR11 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr11 REAL
y component of rotary axis V2
$TC_CARR12 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr12 REAL
z component of rotary axis V2
$TC_CARR13 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr13 REAL
Angle of rotation alpha1
$TC_CARR14 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr14 REAL
Angle of rotation alpha2
$TC_CARR15 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr15 REAL
x component of offset vector L3
$TC_CARR16 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr16 REAL
y component of offset vector L3
$TC_CARR17 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr17 REAL
z component of offset vector L3
$TC_CARR18 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr18 REAL
x component of offset vector L4
$TC_CARR19 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr19 REAL
y component of offset vector L4
$TC_CARR20 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr20 REAL
z component of offset vector L4
$TC_CARR21 Axis No. of tool holder TcCarr21 String
Axis name of the 1st rotary axis
$TC_CARR22 Axis No. of tool holder TcCarr22 String
Axis name of 2nd rotary axis
$TC_CARR23 Char No. of tool holder TcCarr23 String
Kinematic type
$TC_CARR24 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr24 REAL
Offset of 1st rotary axis in degrees
$TC_CARR25 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr25 REAL
Offset of 2nd rotary axis in degrees
$TC_CARR26 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr26 REAL
Offset of Hirth joint in degrees for 1st rotary
axis
$TC_CARR27 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr27 REAL
Offset of Hirth joint in degrees for 2nd rota‐
ry axis

Tool Management
264 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.6 Toolholder data

Tool holder data

Name Type Explanation/description OPI VAR Type
$TC_CARR28 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr28 REAL
Increment of Hirth joint in degrees for 1st
rotary axis
$TC_CARR29 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr29 REAL
Increment of Hirth joint in degrees for 2nd
rotary axis
$TC_CARR30 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr30 REAL
Minimum position of 1st rotary axis
$TC_CARR31 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr31 REAL
Minimum position of 2nd rotary axis
$TC_CARR32 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr32 REAL
Maximum position of 1st rotary axis
$TC_CARR33 Double No. of tool holder TcCarr33 REAL
Maximum position of 2nd rotary axis

Additional references:
/FB1/ Description of Functions, Basic Machine; Tool Offset (W1) and
/PGA/ Programming Guide Advanced

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 265
Programming
5.7 User-definable variables

5.7 User-definable variables

User-definable parameters
These programmable variables provide the user with three user-definable parameters. These
system variables are transferred via the user interface with the T selection signal and the
change command to the PLC. They allow the user to send additional tool management
information to the PLC. The parameters can be read and written by the NC program. They are
not buffered and are set to "0" on Reset or end of program.

$P_VDITCP[x]
x: = Parameter 0, 1, 2

NCK identifier Description Format

$TC_VDITCP[0] Tool management VDI user-definable parameter 0 int
$TC_VDITCP[1] Tool management VDI user-definable parameter 1 int
$TC_VDITCP[2] Tool management VDI user-definable parameter 2 int

Interface DB72, DB73

The user parameters are output in DB72 and DB73 on the tool management interface. They
are only valid when the status of the interface is active. The format is DINT.

Example
$P_VDITCP[0]=12; DB72.DBD(n+4) =12 or
$P_VDITCP[1]=33; DB72.DBD(n+8) =33 or
$P_VDITCP[2]=2000; DB72.DBD(n+12) =2000
T="Tool"
The variables must be set in the part program before the T call or M06 if these shall be
transferred for a tool to the PLC as well.

Programming
The parameters can be programmed as required in the NC program. The output to the PLC
is however always realized in conjunction with the tool preparation or change command
programmed in the following.
Example:
T= "Tool1"
$P_VDITCP[0] = 1
M06
$P_VDITCP[0] = 2
T= "Tool2"

Tool Management
266 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.7 User-definable variables

Exactly the value = 2 is also given to the PLC with the command output of T = "Tool2" to the
PLC and not the value 1 when the M06 command is output to the PLC.
The output of the programmed value also takes place when M6 is programmed, i.e. the output
can now also be realized with the command number 3 provided $MC_CHANGE_MODE=1 has
been set.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 267
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8 NC language commands

5.8.1 CHKDNO - Uniqueness check for D number

Overview
D number uniqueness is understood here (not for replacement tools) as being that the D
numbers of all tools defined in the TO unit may occur exactly only once ⇒ the D numbers in
the TO unit are unique and absolute. This is known in the tool-management function as the
possibility of assigning "unique" D numbers only. The distinction is made on the basis of
replacement tools that are generally present.
Status = CHKDNO (T1, T2, D)
Parameters used:

TRUE Unique D numbers have been assigned for the checked area
FALSE A D-number collision is the result or the parameterization is invalid
The parameters are optional.

CHKDNO (T1,T2) All D numbers of the specified tools are checked.

D numbers of replacement tools

Replacement tools can be defined and used when tool management is active. The machining
part program does not generally indicate whether any replacement tools are available. As a
rule, the machining program addresses tools with T="Identifier" (the programming T="location
number" is referred back to T="identifier" internally). The program otherwise only contains the
actual programming of the offset (the D number). Therefore, the D number for the tool and
replacement tool must be identical.

Example
Active tool and replacement tools for T="drill_5mm"
● T No. = 10 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (active)
● T No. = 11 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (replacement)
● T No. = 12 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (replacement)
Active tool and replacement tools for T="drill_3mm"
● T No. = 20 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (active)
● T No. = 21 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (replacement)
● T No. = 22 with D numbers 1, 2, 3 (replacement)
CHKDNO without parameters specified, detects a collision of D numbers 1, 2 and 3 for
"drill_5mm" with D numbers 1, 2 and 3 for "drill_3mm", but not between the D numbers of the
active and replacement tools.

Tool Management
268 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

The collisions are displayed as individual alarms, e.g.:

● "Channel 1 D number 1 defined for tool T no. 10 and 20""
● "Channel 1 D number 1 defined for tool T no. 10 and 21"
The state = FALSE is also returned in the event that the parameterization is invalid (the T or
D number called is not defined in the channel).
If the following applies: MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO ≤ MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL,
then CHKDNO always returns the TRUE state, irrespective of the parameter settings.

5.8.2 CHKDM - Uniqueness check within a magazine

With active tool management, the command CHKDM checks the data in NCK for D number
uniqueness within one or more magazines. The functionality corresponds to CHKDNO. The
parameters are optional.
state = CHKDM (magazine no., D no., tool holder no.)
Result of check:
Value = TRUE: Checked D numbers are unique.
Value = FALSE: Check not OK.
Meaning of the parameters:

MagNo Magazine number of magazine to be checked

Omitting the parameter or programming with a value=0 means that the tools of
all the connected magazines of the spindle numbers or tool holder numbers
specified in the 3rd parameter are checked.
D No. The D number against which the check will be made.
Omitting the parameter or programming with a value=0 means that all D numbers
of the specified magazine are checked for uniqueness.
Tool holder no. Indicates which spindle numbers or tool holder numbers the magazines shall be
checked for.
Omission of the parameter means that the magazines are obtained for the check
from the distance table of the spindle location for the master spindle or the master
tool holder.

5.8.3 GETACTTD - Determining the T No. for a unique D No.

For an active tool management (e.g. measuring-cycle programs), this command serves to
conclude the associated T number of the tool active in the tool group starting from a D number.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 269
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

status = GETACTTD (T No., D No.)

D No. D number for which the T number shall be searched. The D numbers are not checked for
uniqueness.
If the same D numbers are defined in different tool groups of the same TO unit, then the
T number of the first tool group that is found determines the tools that have the specified
number.
T No. T number found
status Result of search
0 T number found, T No. is assigned the value
-1 No T number exists for the specified D number, T No. assigned the value 0.
-2 D number is not unique; T no. is assigned the value of the D number that was first
determined.
-3 The tool group does not contain any tools that have the desired status and the
specified D number, T no. is assigned the value 0.
-4 The tool group contains several tools that have the desired status and the D num‐
ber that has been sought; T no. contains the value of the first tool found with the
desired D number.
-5 Function could not be executed for other reasons.

5.8.4 GETDNO - Rename D numbers

The language command
d = GETDNO(t, ce)
allows the offset number d to be read for the cutting edge ce of the tool with the T number t.
If t or ce are parameters which have no data record, d=0 is returned. Any parameters violating
the syntax rules will generate an alarm.
The command is only available if $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO >
$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL.
$MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO ≤ $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL returns
GETDNO d=ce as D number.

5.8.5 SETDNO - Rename D numbers

The language command
state = SETDNO(t, ce, d) allows the offset number d of cutting edge ce of tool t to be set or
changed. If t or ce are parameters which have no data record, state = FALSE is returned. Any
parameters violating the syntax rules will generate an alarm.
t, ce, d must be specified > 0; d=0 cannot be set.

Tool Management
270 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.6 DZERO - Invalidate D numbers

Marks all D numbers of the TO unit as invalid. This command is used for support during
conversion or re-equipping.
Offset data records tagged with this command are no longer verified by the CHKDNO language
command. The D numbers have to be set with SETDNO again in order to make these
accessible again.

5.8.7 DELDL - Delete additive offsets

This command deletes the additive offsets for the cutting edge of a tool (to release memory
space). Both the defined wear values and the setup values are deleted.
status = DELDL( t, d )
Explanation of the parameters:

DELDL(t, d) All additive offsets of the cutting edge with D number d of tool t are deleted.
DELDL(t) All additive offsets of all cutting edges of tool t are deleted.
DELDL All additive offsets for all cutting edges of all tools of the TO units are deleted
(of the TO unit of that channel where the command is programmed)
status Result of search
0 Offsets have been successfully deleted
-1 Offsets have not been deleted (if the parameter settings specify exactly
one cutting edge), or not deleted completely (if the parameter settings
specify several cutting edges)

5.8.8 NEWT - Create a new tool

Overview
A new tool can bet set up in a number of ways by NC commands in NCK. Either by programming
T No.=NEWT("Tool", duplo no.) or by programming a system variable $TC_...
Note that NEWT automatically generates a cutting edge with CE no. = 1, D no. = 1. If you want
the tool to have a different CE no., you need to change this number after it has been generated.
The NEWT function allows a new tool to be created without specifying a T No. The function
returns the automatically generated T No. with which the tool can subsequently be addressed.
The 1st cutting edge is automatically created when a new tool is created. All offsets are set to
0 by default.
Return parameter = NEWT ("Tool", duplo no.)
If it is not possible to create a new tool for any reason, the NEWT(...) function generates an
alarm.
Specification of a duplo number is optional. It is generated in the NCK if it is not specified.
(duplo no.= old duplo no. +1)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 271
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Examples
Example 1:
Create a new tool with NEWT and the CE/D numbers = 2, 47

def int tno

tno = NEWT("tool", 111) ;Tool with Ident/DuploNo.="Steel"/111, T no.=tno=1 in
the example and a cutting edge CE=1, D=1 is created
;however, the cutting edge is to be named CE=2, D=47
$TC_DPCE[tno, 1]=2 ;Rename the CE number
SETDNO(tno,2,47) ;Rename the D number
;Assign the remaining data for the tool / cutting edge

Example 2:
Create tool "Steel"/111, T No.=tno=1 with $TC... and CE numbers = 2 4 (let us assume that T
No.=1 does not yet exist)

$TC_TP1[1] = 111 ;Create new tool with T no.=1, duplo no.=111

$TC_TP2[1] = "Steel" ;Assign tool identifer="Steel"
$TC_TPCE[1,47] = 2 ;Create new offset, D=47, assign CE no.=2
;Assign the remaining data for the tool / cutting edge

The function is used for creating tools in a loading program (load cycle).

5.8.9 NEWMT - create new multitool

The language command is available with TMMG.
The language command creates a new multitool with the specified "name" and the MT "number
of locations".
mtNo = NEWMT(name, location number)
An implicit STOPRE is initiated at the end of the block.
The MT number is created automatically and returned as result value. If the "Several tools at
magazine location" function is not activated, Alarm 6436 "Command cannot be programmed.
Function is not activated." is output. If the name parameter is already in use, alarm 14020
"Illegal parameter value" is output.
If the number of locations parameter is outside the permissible range, alarm 14020 "Illegal
parameter value" is output. If the command is interrupted with alarm, then for mtNo the value
equal 0 is returned.
Example:
A tool with the name "A" and the T number 1 and a magazine with the name "B" and the number
2 already exist. The following is now programmed:
def int mtNr
mtNr = NEWMT("C", 2)
The command is executed successfully, mtNr has the value 3. The multitool has been created
for two locations. However, the locations were still not created. A call with the name "A" or "B"

Tool Management
272 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

would have resulted in an alarm, as the names have already been allocated to a tool and a
magazine.
After creating using NEWMT additional parameters of the multitool can be defined, e.g.
$TC_MTP7[ 3 ] = 12 ; Multitool can be loaded to magazine location with this location type
number
$TC_MTP_POS[ 3 ] = 2 ; Position value = location 2
$TC_MTP_KD[ 3 ] = 3 ; Angle-coded distance
$TC_MTPPA[ 3, 1 ] = 0.0 ; The two locations are created with this write operation
$TC_MTPPA[ 3, 2 ] = 180.0
$TC_MTP8[ 3 ] = 2 ; Released (multitool definition has been completed)
The two parameters $TC_MTPN and $TC_MTP2 were already defined using the NEWMT
command. Parameters $TC_MTP3,..., 6 were not programmed. The default values are
effective.

5.8.10 DELT - Delete tool

A tool can be deleted with the DELT(...) function by specifying the tool identifier and duplo
number. Only tools that have been unloaded can be deleted.
DELT("TL",DUPLO_NO)
All tool-related data is set to 0 (user data, hierarchy data, ...).
Example:
DELT("DRILL", DUPLO_NO)
The function is for deleting tools in the part program.

5.8.11 DELMT - deleting a multitool

The language command is available with TMMG.
The DELMT command can delete a multitool.
DELMT (name)
Deletion is only possible if the multitool is not contained in a magazine (is unloaded) and none
of the tools contained in the multitool is an active tool regarding offset selection. If there are
still tools in the multitool at the time of deletion, they are automatically removed from the
multitool before the delete operation, i.e. the tools are not deleted.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 273
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

If a name is specified, for which a multitool has not been defined, then the command is rejected
with Alarm 17220 "Tool does not exist".

Note
After the multitool was unloaded, the tools contained in it are also unloaded. After the multitool
has been deleted, the tools contained in it are again available to be loaded into a magazine -
or into another multitool.

5.8.12 $TC_MTPN - Deletion of one or all multitools

The delete command is defined analogously to $TC_TP1[TNr] = 0:
$TC_MTPN[MTNr] = 0 ; Delete multitool with the number MTNr > 0
$TC_MTPN[0] = 0 ; Delete all multitools
For MTNr > 0, the multitool with the number MTNr is deleted. For MTNr = 0, all multitools are
deleted. The same rules apply as defined for the DELMT command.

Note
The delete commands to delete all tools ($TC_TP1[0] = 0 and $TC_DP1[0,0] = 0) also delete
all multitools.
Only with the deletion of the multitool, are the MT locations also deleted.

5.8.13 GETT - Read T No.

The GETT function returns the associated T number on the basis of the tool identifier and its
duplo number.
The command can be used for tools as well as for multitools. A duplo number cannot be
programmed for multitools.
Result value = GETT("TOOL", DUPLO_NO);
Result value

> Tool or multitool number associated with the programmed name

-1 The name is neither a tool nor a multitool name
-2 A multitool name was programmed with duplo number

If the tool identifier or duplo number cannot be assigned to a tool, value -1 is returned.
Specification of the duplo number is optional.
If a duplo number has not been specified, the T number of any tool from the group of tools with
the specified identifier or the number of a multitool is returned (the sequence is not defined
within a tool group).
Example:

Tool Management
274 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Determine the T number for drill with duplo number

R10=GETT("DRILL", DUPLO_NO) ;The T number is in R10

$TC_TPx,[GETT("DRILL",DUPLO NO)]=value ;Write tool-related data

This function is used for example to retroload tools via the part program.

5.8.14 SETPIECE - decrementing the workpiece counter

Overview
With the SETPIECE function, the user can update the count monitoring data of the tools
associated with the machining process. Each tool that has been loaded since the last activation
of SETPIECE is acquired. The function serves as a rule for programming at the end of the NC
part program to decrement the count from all the tools associated with count monitoring.

Note
The command is not active in the block search (with/without calculation). If the value for the
count = 0, the internal table for flagged tools/cutting edges is deleted.

Programming
SETPIECE(x,y)

x := 0 ... 32000 Value used when decrementing

y := 0...8 Spindle index, value 0 means index of main spindle
(must not be programmed)
Example:

SETPIECE(1); Workpiece counter of main spindle is decremented by 1

SETPIECE(1,1); Workpiece counter of spindle no. or tool holder no. 1 is decremented
by 1
SETPIECE(4,2); Workpiece counter of spindle no. or tool holder no. 2 is decremented
by 4

Example of SETPIECE with M06 tool change command:

The tools involved in a workpiece (program) should be decremented by a value of 1.

T1 ;T1 is preselected (with regard to main spindle)

M06 ;T1 is changed
D1 ;D1 becomes active
T2 ;T2 is preselected
: ;Machining program

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 275
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

:
M06 ;T2 is changed
D1 ;D1 from T2 is activated
T3 ;T3 is preselected
: ;Machining program
:
:
M06
T0 ;Preparation for clearing the spindle
:
M06 ;Clearing the spindle
SETPIECE(1) ;SETPIECE on all tools
M30

The counter is to be decremented for each tool

In this example, tools T1, T2 and T3 are to machine a program. All three tools are monitored
for workpiece count. The aim is to decrement tool T1 by the value 1, T2 by the value 2 and not
to decrement T3.
The following programming is required:

N500 T1
N600 M06
N700 D1 ;With the offset selection, the tool that was loaded is
stored in the SETPIECE memory
N900 T2 ;Preparing the next tool
;Machining command
:
N1000 setpiece(1) ;SETPIECE acts on T1, SETPIECE memory is cleared
N1100 M06
N1200 D1
N1400 T3
: ;Machining commands
:
N1500 setpiece(2) ;Only acts on T2
N1600 M06
N1700 D1
: ;Machining commands
:
N1800 setpiece(0) ;Only acts on T3, not decremented
N1900 T0
N2000 M06
N2100 D0
N2300 M30

Tool Management
276 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Note
SETPIECE works through the table "blindly". This means that every cutting edge entered in
the table is recorded. Whereby, it is irrelevant where the tool is located at the time of the
SETPIECE programming, whether it is stored in the magazine, remains on the spindle or has
been unloaded.
If it is set that the tool remains active after a reset and there is a tool in the spindle at the start
of the program, then this tool is selected internally and an entry made in the Setpiece table.

5.8.15 GETSELT - Read the selected T No.

The function is available with TMBF, TMMO and TMMG.
This language command is used to access the offset data of the selected tool between the T
programming and the cutting edge selection. It must establish synchronization with the main
run earlier. The GETSELT language command returns the selected tool with regard to the
individual tool holders or spindles from the NC program viewpoint.
GETSELT (Tno, th, ssl);

Tno = 0 the selected T number in int format

=0 There is no T number or the tool has been deleted in the meantime (occurs only with ssl="S").
= -1 If the alarm delay is active and GETSELT is called between the T and the M06 programming.
th = 0, 1, ..., ≤ 20 = spindle / tool holder number
=0 If ssl="" or is not set, the command refers to the currently active main spindle / active main tool holder
If ssl="S", during the block search and test mode, the command refers to the tool holder that determined the D
offset before the block search.
ssl = "" Function as previously, i.e. the current state according to the NC program
= Block search: Returns the tool selected before the block search or test mode
"S"

th and ssl must be specified optionally. If th is not specified, this acts as th=0.
If "ssl" is set (="S" for "searchrun"), during the block search or test mode, the GETSELT
language command returns the T no. of the selected tool on the specified tool holder before
the block search or before the test mode. At the end of the block search or test mode, the
GETSELT language command returns the value independent of ssl after the first T
programming for the specified tool holder.
After the program end / abort, the "getselt" T numbers of all tool holders are set to the value
= 0. For the master tool holder, the value is then set to the corresponding setting in
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, or after a program restart to the corresponding setting in
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.
If required, the function makes an implicit preprocessing stop if the main run has not received
the tool preparation command.
If the GETSELT language command is programmed when the "TMFD" (flat D number)
functionality is active, then alarm 6437 "%?C{channel %1: %} block %2 command '%3' cannot
be programmed. Function '%4' is activated".

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 277
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

OPI variable
The values supplied by the "GETSELT" function are available in the OPI variable
"toolHolderData" of the C/S block.
Parameter no. 2 returns the value of GETSELT(tNo, Th).
Parameter no. 4 returns the value of GETSELT(tNo, Th, "S").
The OPI variable is available in all versions of the tool management except in the "Flat D
number" version.
Example 1:
There is no tool holder location in the magazine management for the programmed value of
tool holder no. = 3

Example 1:
N110 GETSELT ( tNo, 3 ) ; tNo = 0 is the result.

Example 2:
Tool preparation has not been programmed for the programmed tool holder with the number
= 4, and no tool has been loaded:
N110 GETSELT ( tNo, 4 ) ; tNo = 0 is the result.

NOTICE
Alarm delay
If an alarm delay is active ($MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 0 = 1) and an alarm
occurs during the tool preparation, which is to be delayed until after M06 and programmed
before the programming of M06 GETSELT, then the T number found by GETSELT has the
value = –1.

Example 3:
There is a tool with the name "disabled" and the T number = 5.

def int tNo

N100 T="disabled" ; Alarm 'No tool ready for use' is
; delayed until the associated M06 is
programmed
; or until T is programmed again.
N110 GETSELT ( tNo ) ; tNo = –1 is the result
N120 M06 ; The delayed alarm from N100 is output
OPI:
In this case, the OPI variable "progTNumber" in the C/S variable block displays the previously
programmed T number or the value = 0 if no other T selection has been programmed before
the faulty T selection.

Example 4:
The basic functionality is active (TMBF):

Tool Management
278 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

In the reset state, the tool with the T number = 5 is loaded into the main spindle. A block search
is started on block "N100" in the following NC program.

def int tNo, tNo1

N70 T7
N80 GETSELT( tNo ) ; tNo = 7
N90 GETSELT(tNo1,,"S") ; tNo1=5
N100 X1 G0 ; Target block
N110 GETSELT( tNo ) ; tNo = 7
N120 GETSELT(tNo1,,"S") ; tNo1=5, because no new T has been
programmed
; after the target block
N130 T8
N140 GETSELT( tNo ) ; tNo = 8
N150 GETSELT(tNo1,,"S") ; tNo1=8, because a new T has been
programmed
OPI:
In this case, the OPI variable "progTNumberSSL" in the C/S variable block displays the
previously programmed T number or the value = 0 if no other T selection has been programmed
before the faulty T selection.

5.8.16 GETEXET - Reading of the loaded T number

The function is available with TMBF, TMMO and TMMG.
The command GETEXET is specifically designed for block search. Its parameters are set in
the same way as for GETSELT. It returns the T number of the tool that is active from the point
of view of the NC program.
GETEXET(Tno, th, ssl)

Tno = the active T number in int format

= 0: There is no loaded T number or the tool has been deleted in the meantime
(occurs only with ssl="S").
th = 0, 1, ..., ≤ 20 = spindle / tool holder number
= 0: If ssl="" or is not set, the command refers to the currently active main spindle /
tool holder
If ssl="S", the command refers to the tool holder that determined the D offset
before the block search.
ssl = "": Function as previously, i.e. the current state according to the NC program
= "S":Block search function: Returns the tool loaded before the block search or test
mode
The specification of th and ssl is optional. If th is not specified, GETEXET refers to the current
master spindle.
If "ssl" is set (="S" for "searchrun"), during the block search or test mode, the GETEXET
language command returns the T number of the loaded tool on the specified tool holder before

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 279
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

the block search or before the test mode. At the end of the block search or test mode, the
GETEXET language command returns the value independent of ssl after the first programming
of a tool change for the specified tool holder.
If required, the function makes an implicit preprocessing stop if the main run has not received
the tool change command.
After the program end / abort, the "getexet" T numbers of all tool holders are set to the value
= 0. For the master tool holder, the value is then set to the corresponding setting in
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, or after a program restart to the corresponding setting in
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.

Note
If the tool change is only programmed with T ($MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE), then GETSELT
and GETEXET return the same T number.
If the tool change is programmed with T (selection) and M06 (change), the two commands
have different contents.

If the GETEXET language command is programmed when the "TMFD" (flat D number)
functionality is active, then alarm 6437 "%?C{channel %1: %} block %2 command '%3' cannot
be programmed. Function '%4' is activated".

OPI variable
The values supplied by the "GETEXET" function are available in the OPI variable
"toolHolderData" of the C/S block.
Parameter no. 3 returns the value of GETEXET(tNo, Th).
Parameter no. 5 returns the value of GETEXET(tNo, Th, "S").
The OPI variable is available in all versions of the tool management except in the "Flat D
number" version.

Example 1:
Three tools are defined with Tno. = 5 / Name = "Tool5" , Tno. = 7 / Name = "Tool7" and Tno.
= 9 / Name = "Tool9".
The tool change is programmed with T + M6.
Two tool holders have been defined. Tool holder 2 is the master tool holder.
At the start, there is neither a tool on the tool holder nor a tool active or programmed:

def int tNo1,

tNo2
T="Tool5" ; tool selection for master too holder
getselt ( tNo2, ;tNo2 = 5 preselected tool for master tool holder
2 )
getselt ( tNo1, ;tNo1 = 0
1 )

Tool Management
280 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

getselt ( tNo2, ;tNo2 = 0 no active tool for master tool holder

2 )
getexet ( tNo1, ;tNo1 = 0
1 )

M6 ; tool change for master tool holder

getselt ( tNo2, ;tNo2 = 5
2 )
getselt ( tNo2, ;tNo2 = 5
2 )

T="Tool9"; tool selection for master tool holder

getselt ( tNo2, ;tNo2 = 9
2 )
getselt ( tNo2, ;tNo2 = 5
2 )

T1="Tool7" ; tool selection for secondary tool holder

getselt ( tNo2, ;tNo2 = 9 preselected tool for master tool holder
2 )
getselt ( tNo1, ;tNo1 = 7 preselected tool for secondary tool holder
1 )

getselt ( tNo2, ;tNo2 = 5 active tool for master tool holder

2 )
getexet ( tNo1, ;tNo1 = 0 active tool for secondary tool holder
1 )

M1=6 ; tool change for secondary tool holder

getexet ( tNo1, ;tNo1 = 7 active tool for secondary tool holder
1 )

Example 2:
The basic functionality is active (TMBF):
In the reset state, the tool with the T number = 5 is loaded into the main spindle. A block search
is started on block "N100" in the following NC program.

def int tNo, tNo1

N70 T7 M6
N75 T8
N80 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo =7
N90 GETSELT(tNo1, ;tNo1=5
,"S")
N100 X1 G0 ;Target block
N110 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo =7

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 281
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

N120 GETEXET(tNo1, ;tNo1=5, because no new tool has been programmed

,"S") ;after the target block
N130 M6
N140 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo=8
N150 GETEXET(tNo1, ;tNo1=8, because a new tool has been loaded
,"S")
OPI:
In this case, the OPI variable "progTNumberSSL" in the C/S variable block displays the
previously programmed T number or the value = 0 if no other T selection has been programmed
before the faulty T selection.

Example 4:
The basic functionality (TMBF) is active.
In the reset state, the tool with the T number = 5 is loaded into the
main spindle. A block search is started on block "N100" in the
following NC program.

def int tNo, tNo1

N70 T7 M6
N75 T8
N80 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo=7
N90 GETSELT(tNo1 ,, ;tNo1=5
"S")
N100 X1 G0 ;Target block
N110 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo=7
N120 GETEXET(tNo ,, ;tNo1=5, because no new tool has been
"S") programmed
;after the target block
N130 M6
N140 GETEXET(tNo) ;tNo=8
N150 GETEXET(tNo ,, ;tNo1=8, because a new tool has been loaded
"S")
OPI:
In this case, the OPI variable "progTNumberSSL" in the C/S variable block displays the
previously programmed T number or the value = 0 if no other T selection has been programmed
before the faulty T selection.

Use of $P_TOOLNO - GETEXET

With active tool management, GETEXET should generally be used.
If the following specification are complied with, $P_TOOLNO can also be used:

Tool Management
282 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

After programming D, $P_TOOLNO always returns the correct value of the active T number.

T2 M6 D1 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. =

2
r1 = $P_TOOLNO ;r1 = 2
For $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=-1, >0, $P_TOOLNO always returns the correct value
of the active T number.

T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2

r1 = $P_TOOLNO ;r1 = 2
There are exceptions for $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=-2 and 0.

a) $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = 0

T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno.

= 2
r1 = $P_TOOLNO ;!!!r1 = ? - the T no. is not defined until the
main run.
;!!!This means that it is generally not available
here.

def int tNo

T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno.
= 2
GETEXET(tNo, ;Safe determination of the active Tno. tNo = 2
$PMTHSDC)

b) $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2

N10 T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2
r1 = $P_TOOLNO ;!!!r1 = 22 - if T no.=22 was the active tool before N10

def int tNo

N10 T2 M6 ;Tool group "2" has precisely one tool with Tno. = 2
GETEXET(tNo, $P_MTHSDC) Safe determination of the active Tno. to be loaded
tNo =2 - the Tno. becomes the active Tno. at the
;next programming of D>0.
This means that for $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=-2, $P_TOOLNO and also GETEXET
can be used, and with a different meaning.
See also Section "Block search (SSL) in conjunction with active tool management (Page 109)".

5.8.17 $P_MTHSDC - master tool holder with regard to the D offset selection
This function is available with TMMG.
Settings:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 283
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2,
i.e. the old tool offset remains active with M06 if D has not been explicitly programmed.
$MN_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 2

N10 SETMTH
( 1)
N20 T="Tool5" ;T no. = 5 is the only tool in the tool group
;tool change to the current master tool holder (tool
holder 1)
N30 D5 ;Offset of the tool last changed on a master tool holder
;(T no. 5 in this case)
N10 SETMTH ;Change of the master tool holder
0 ( 2)
N11 T="Tool7" ;T no. = 7 is the only tool in the tool group
0 ;tool change to the current master tool holder (tool
holder 2)
N12 SETMTH ;Change of the master tool holder
0 ( 1)
... ;Further blocks without T, M6, D
N13 D5 ;Offset with D5 of the tool that was loaded last on to a
0 ;master tool holder (T=7 on tool holder 2
;in this case). Only now is a new tool specified
In order that after a block search on a block between N120 and N130 the D selection in N130
refers to the correct tool ("Tool7" here), the tool change for "Tool7" on tool holder 2 must be
performed as master tool holder and must be performed as the last tool change. This may
have to be ensured via ASUPs. This information cannot be determined with the previously
available language commands and variables. The variable contains the information on which
tool holder the last tool change was performed as this was master tool holder.
The system variable $P_MTHSDC (Master tool holder regarding selected Dcorrection) returns
the number of the tool holder / spindle on which the last tool change was performed on a master
tool holder / spindle. This means that this is the tool holder on which the tool is located that
determines the next D offset and therefore becomes the active tool (if this tool was not already
active).
In the above case, the variable $P_MTHSDC has the value 2, because on this tool holder the
last tool change was performed on a master tool holder. With the aid of GETEXET(TNo,2) or
if ($P_MTHSDC > 0) GETEXET(TNo,$P_MTHSDC), the tool can be determined which belongs
on this tool holder so that the program can be continued correctly.
$P_MTHSDC = 0 means that currently no tool holder has been defined that has the active tool
after D programming.

5.8.18 $P_TH_OF_D - master tool holder with regard to the current D offset
The function is available with TMBF, TMMO and TMMG.

Tool Management
284 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

The system variable $P_TH_OF_D (Tool holder of active D correction) returns the number of
the tool holder / spindle on which the tool is or was located that determines the active D offset.
Settings:
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = -2, i.e. the old tool offset remains active with M06 if D
has not been explicitly programmed.
$MN_TOOLCHANGE_MODE = 0
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 2

N00 ;No tool active → $P_TH_OF_D = 0

N10 SETMTH(1)
N20 T="Tool5" ;T no. = 5 is the only tool in the tool group
;tool change to the current master tool holder (tool
holder 1)
N30 D5 ;Offset is from the tool that is located on tool
holder 1
;→ $P_TH_OF_D = 1
N100SETMTH(2) ;Change of the master tool holder
N110T="Tool7" ;T no. = 7 is the only tool in the tool group
;tool change to the current master tool holder (tool
holder 2)
N120SETMTH(1) ;Change of the master tool holder
... ;Further blocks without T, M6, D
N130D5 ;Offset with D5 of the tool that was loaded last on
to a
;master tool holder (T=7 on tool holder 2
;in this case) → $P_TH_OF_D = 2
In a ProgEvent program, after a block search, the situation is to be established with regard to
tools and tool offset that would have been existed without a block search.
After a block search on a block between N100 and N130, it is determined how the currently
active "D5" from block N30 is established. For this purpose, it must be recognized that "D5"
comes from the tool on tool holder 1. The last tool change on a main tool holder was performed
on block N20 on tool holder 1. This information is provided by system variable $P_TH_OF_D.
The variable $P_TH_OF_D specifies on which tool holder the tool is located that determines
the currently active D offset.
The variable $P_MTHSDC specifies on which tool holder the tool is located that determines
the offset at the next D programming.
$P_TH_OF_D = 0 means that currently no tool holder is defined to which the current tool offset
"D" refers. The active tool is then also T=0 and the active D no. =0.

5.8.19 GETACTT - Read the active internal T No.

This function provides the possibility, from a tool group with the identifier "name", to obtain the
T No. of the tool with the status "active" (a tool becomes "active" immediately before it is loaded
into the tool holder) and "was in use" via parameter "TNo".

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 285
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

status=GETACTT(Tno,name)
The return parameter "status" indicates whether the call was successful or not:

0 Function successful; T No. contains the desired value

-1 No tool matching the specified identifier exists; T No. contains value = 0
-2 The tool group does not contain a tool with the desired status; T no. contains value = 0
-3 There are several tools with the desired status in the tool group; T No. contains the value of the
first tool with the desired status

GETACTT can have several meanings! It is always conceivable that there are several tools in
the tool group that have the same status. The command will only then meaningfully function
if the user ensures there is exactly one tool with the desired status in the tool group.
The command does not initiate a main run synchronization. It may be necessary to enter
STOPRE before the call.
Example:
Tool group "Drills" contains three tools with the duplo numbers 1, 2, 3 and the T numbers 1,
2, 3:

def int Tno, status ;Initially, there is no active tool in the tool group "Drill"
status=GETACTT(Tno, "Drill") ;status=-2, Tno=0
T="Drill" ;Preparation sets tool status to "active"
status=GETACTT(Tno, "Drill") ;status=0, Tno=0
;the tool is active, but the identifier "was in use" is not
yet applied
M06 ;Change
T="Hugo" ;Preparation
status=GETACTT(Tno, "Drill") ;status=-2, Tno=0
;the tool is active, but the identifier "was in use" is still
not yet applied
M06 ;Change
status=GETACTT(Tno, "Drill") ;status=0, Tno=1
;read job is performed
;The "Drill" tool is now assigned the status "was in
use" as it was removed and the "active" status re‐
mains unchanged

Note
GETACCT cannot detect a tool which is positioned in the spindle for its first use.
The tool sequence in a group is not defined. This means GETACCT will read any random tool
in the group where the status bits "active" and "was in use" are set.

Tool Management
286 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.20 SETMS - Spindle can be declared a master spindle

Available with TMBF, TMFD, TMMO, TMMG.
Command SETMS(n) declares the spindle specified in n to be the master spindle. A spindle
can also be defined as the master via a machine data.
The programmed values from SETMS can remain active beyond program end/reset/Start.
When SETMS is programmed without a spindle name, the spindle programmed in the machine
data used instead.

5.8.21 SETMTH - Set master toolholder number

Available with TMMG.
Machine data MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER can be set to determine
whether a tool holder number can be assigned to define the location of the tool to be loaded
instead of a spindle number. It only makes sense to use this language command if MD is >
0.
Programming example:

T="Miller" M06 No address extension programmed → this refers to the master tool
holder; i.e. tool holder 1 (value of machine data TOOL_MANAGE‐
MENT_TOOLHOLDER).
The tool change is performed at the buffer location with
$TC_MPP5=1.
The path is corrected with the tool offsets.
...
T2="Drill" ..M2=6 Address expansion for the secondary tool holder was programmed.
The tool change is performed at buffer location 2. The path is not
corrected.
...
SETMTH (2) declares tool holder 2 to the master tool holder
T="Miller_2""M06 No address extension programmed → this refers to the master tool
holder; i.e. tool holder 2.
Tool change is performed at buffer location 2.
The path is corrected with the tool offsets.
...
T1="Drill_1" M1=6 Address extension for the secondary tool holder has been program‐
med.
The tool change is performed at the buffer location with
$TC_MPP5=1.
The path is not corrected.
...

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 287
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

SETMTH Declare the tool holder specified in TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐

HOLDER as the master tool holder
T="Miller_3" M06 No address extension programmed → this refers to the master tool
holder; i.e. tool holder 1 (value of MD TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOL‐
HOLDER).
Tool change is performed at buffer location 1.
The path is corrected with the tool offsets.

Note
SETMTH does not change the active tool. The new master tool holder definition cannot be
taken into account until the tool change is programmed.

The programmed values from SETMS can remain active beyond program end/RESET/START.
Example 1:
The following applies:
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK = "H18041"
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 2
After the end of program/RESET both the active tool offset and the programmed values for
SETMTH and SETMS remain active. The tool change still does not take place at the spindle,
but rather at the tool holder instead.

T="Drill" M06 D2 ;Tool change change on master tool holder=2

SETMS(3) ;New master spindle=3
SETMTH(1) ;New master tool holder=1
T="Miller" M06 D1 ;Tool change on master tool holder=1
M17

After end of program or RESET,

Spindle no. = 3 is the master spindle,
tool holder no. = 1 is the master tool holder and a
tool = "Miller" with offset D1 determines the path correction.
After Power On, the settings for the machine data take effect:
Spindle no. = 1 is the master spindle,
tool holder no. = 2 is the master tool holder.
The tool offset is derived from the lowest D number of the tool that is located in the master tool
holder; i.e.
T="Drill" with D1
(assuming that the tool has two D offsets D1, D2).
Example 2:
The following applies:

Tool Management
288 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK = "H41"
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1
$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER = 0
After the end of program/RESET both the active tool offset and the programmed value for
SETMS remain active. The tool change takes place at the spindle which now becomes the
tool holder.

T="Drill" M06 D2 ;Tool change on master tool holder = 1

SETMS(3) ;New master spindle = master tool holder = 3
T="Miller" M06 D1 ;Tool change on master tool holder = 3
M17

After end of program or RESET,

Spindle no. = 1, the master spindle and a
tool = "Miller" with offset D1 (on spindle with no. = 3) determines the path correction.
After Power On, the settings for the machine data take effect:
Spindle no. = 1 is the master spindle / the master tool holder.
The tool offset is derived from the lowest D number of the tool that is located in the master tool
holder; i.e.
T="Drill" with D1
(assuming that the tool has two D offsets D1, D2).

5.8.22 POSM - Positioning the magazine

Overview
This NC language command enables you to initiate a magazine positioning operation to a
particular location in an internal magazine (e.g. spindle, tool holder, loading magazine),
irrespective of how the location is assigned or the status of the tool it contains. The language
command includes parts of the OPI PI service _N_TMPOSM.
The complete command is: POSM (p, m, ip, im)

Description of function

p: Location number which is to be positioned to.

m: Magazine number of the magazine to be moved.
The parameter is optional.
If it is not set, the location number refers to the magazine contained in the distance table
as the first magazine for the specified internal location.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 289
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

ip: Location number for the specified internal magazine (spindle location, loading magazine,
etc.)
The parameter is optional.
If it is not specified, the positioning operation refers to the main spindle location or the
main tool holder location.
im: Magazine number of internal magazine in relation to location number ip to which the
magazine must be moved. An internal magazine is either a loading or a buffer magazine.
The parameter is optional.
If it is not specified, then the command refers to the buffer magazine.
The magazine (number m) must be linked by a distance relationship with the selected loading
or buffer-magazine location. Alarms are generated when incorrect parameters are specified
(e.g. undefined location numbers).

Example of parameter settings

Specified configuration:
● Magazine (magazine number = 1),
● Spindle (buffer magazine = 9998, location 1),
● Loading magazine (loading magazine = 9999, location 2).
It should be moved from magazine 1, location number 4 to the spindle.
Command:
N100 POSM(4, 1, 1, 9998)
Command for traversing to loading magazine:
N100 POSM(4, 1, 1, 9999)

Example with result check

A magazine is specified as shown in the following diagram.
Location 12 is to be positioned at the change position and the program must not be continued
until positioning has been successfully completed (simplest case with only one magazine and
one defined change position).

Tool Management
290 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

7RROKROGHU
EXIIHUPDJD]LQHORFDWLRQ

7&B0'3>@ 

 


 &KDQJHSRVLWLRQ 

 

 0DJD]LQH 
7&B0$3>@ 









Image 5-9 Magazine positioning with a check of the positioning operation result

In this example, the magazine zero point is the location in front of tool holder 1. It is defined
by system variable $TC_MDP2. Tool holder 1 is assigned to the master spindle of the channel.

N100 POSM(12) ;Moves location 12 to the change position, any non-programmed pa‐
rameters are set internally to POSM (12, 1, 1, 9998)
N200 wait:
N300 G4 F1 ;Waiting time according to the conditions prevailing at the machine
(exit possibly necessary if reaction is required to positioning errors)
N400 if ( $TC_MAP8[1] <> 12 ) ;goto wait;
;After POSM(12) is executed, the current magazine position must be
equal to 12.

Note
The language command POSM(...) is terminated without waiting for an acknowledgement from
the PLC.

Multitool
The definition of the language command POSM remains unchanged. The magazine location
to be positioned to is programmed independent of whether the location is empty, contains a
tool or a multitool.
The PI service _N_TMPOSM offers various options to program magazine positions; for
instance, a tool can be programmed using its tool number or its name and duplo number. If
this tool is at a magazine location, then the system positions to this magazine location. If the
tool is in a multitool, which in turn is at a magazine location, then the system positions to this
magazine location. If, instead of a tool number, an MT number is programmed and the multitool
is at a magazine location, then the system positions to this magazine location.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 291
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.23 POSMT - positioning a multitool on a toolholder to the location number

Overview
This function is available for TMMG.
The POSMT positions a multitool, which is located on a tool holder, to the programmed MT
location number. At the time that the command is executed, it is not permissible that any tool
offset is active for the programmed tool holder, i.e. D0 must have been previously executed.
The complete command is: POSMT(state, MTlocno, THno)

state Success status of the command

0 Successful execution of the command. Command successfully completed at the
PLC. (PLC acknowledgement may still be pending.)
-1 Command cannot be used because TMMG and/or multitool function is not active.
-2 Function is not executed because of block search, program test.
-3 MT cannot be positioned, because a tool offset associated with the programmed
tool holder is (still) active.
-4 MT cannot be positioned, because the programmed tool holder does not contain
an MT, but a tool.
-5 MT cannot be positioned, because the programmed tool holder neither contains
an MT nor a tool.
-6 MTlocno has an invalid value.
-7 THno has an invalid value.
MTlocno MT location number of the MT, which is located on the programmed tool holder.
THno Tool holder number on which the MT to be positioned is located. This parameter is op‐
tional.
If it is not programmed, then the number of the master tool holder is automatically used.

Note
Selecting an offset or deselecting a possibly active tool offset is not linked with the command.
The command initiates an implicit STOPRE.

Example 1
The tool with the name "Tool1" / duplo number = 5 or T number = 33 is loaded in multitool 555
at MT location = 2. The MT has been created with 6 locations.

DEF INT state = 0

T="Tool1" M06 D1
;The PLC changes MT 555 on tool holder 1 and positions
it on MT location 2
;The PLC acknowledges the change, axis movements are
programmed ...
D0 ;Deselect tool offset

Tool Management
292 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

POSMT(state, 5, 1)
;Position the MT on location 5
;The previously active tool with T number 33 is still
active (however, due to the POSMT command is no longer
in the machining position)
M17

The following is still configured - "activate tool of the tool holder and activate its offset D1".
With RESET (end of program) a tool change command is generated for the PLC, which has
the following initial data:
● Bring the multitool from tool holder 1 from the tool holder to tool holder 1 (i.e. the MT is
already located on the tool holder)
● Position the multitool at location 5
In the NCK, after the input, the PLC end acknowledgement is initiated:
● Activate the tool with tool number 34 and select its offset D1

Example 2
The same data applies as in example 1, with the difference that now there is no tool at location
5 of the multitool.

DEF INT state = 0

T="Tool1" M06 D1
;The PLC changes MT 555 on tool holder 1 and
positions it on MT location 2
;The PLC acknowledges the change, axis movements
are programmed ...
D0 ;Deselect tool offset
POSMT(state, 5, 1)
;Position the MT on location 5
;The previously active tool with T number 33 is
still active (however, due to the POSMT command is
no longer in the machining position)
M17

The following is still configured - "activate tool of the tool holder and activate its offset D1".
With RESET (end of program) a tool change command is generated for the PLC, which has
the following initial data:
● Bring the multitool from tool holder 1 from the tool holder to tool holder 1 (i.e. the MT is
already located on the tool holder)
● Position the multitool at location 5
In the NCK, after the input, the PLC end acknowledgement is initiated:
● Activate the tool with tool number 0 (tool deselection) and deselect its offset D0.
The multitool remains on the tool holder - and neither a tool nor D offset are active.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 293
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Example 3
If, in example 1, POSMT is not programmed before the end of the program, but only the MT
position is set to the value 5 in the NCK with $TC_MTP8, then the command to the PLC -
generated in the init block - would specify this MT position and the PLC would have to position
the MT according to the position data. When acknowledging the MT position specified by the
NCK in the init block, the PLC must not change this.

PLC
To process the command, NCK command = 1 to the PLC is prepared, which is output via the
tool management interface. The PLC must handle and acknowledge this command, in order
that it can be correctly completed by the NCK.
PLC acknowledgement
In the NCK, the language command generates the command for the PLC - and outputs the
command within the scope of executing the active block to the PLC. The active block is only
considered to have been executed if the end acknowledgement of the command is available
from the PLC. This can be PLC status = 3 or 5. Only then can a new block be loaded for
execution.
Status = 5, "The sequence has been completed. The MT is in position." With regard to the MT
configuration, means "The sequence has been completed. The MT is in position."
Example of parameter settings
The following configuration applies:

Multitool MT-No. =5, MT locations 1, ...10,

The multitool has location coding
The tool with tool number = 4711 and tool name "4711" is at location 4
The tool with tool number 815 and tool name "815" is at location 7
There is no tool at location 8
Tool holder Buffer magazine no. = 9998, location 1 is the master tool holder with no. = 3
The MT with MT No.=5 is on the tool holder
Tool 4711 is active, active D No.=0 (no offset active)
Buffer magazine no. = 9998, location 2 is tool holder with no. = 9
There is no tool and no MT at tool holder 9

At the start, the MT position is equal to 4 (tool with tool number=4711 from MT location 4 is
the active tool), this means that MT location 4 is in the machining position.
def int state
POSMT(state, 7, 3) ; position MT of tool holder 3 to location 7 (with tool "815")
has the same contents as
POSMT(state, 7) ; position MT of tool holder 3 to location 7
The two commands are correctly programmed. The status value is state = 0.
The block remains active in the HL until the end acknowledgement from the PLC is available.
Tool "815" with tool number=815 at location 7 does not become active with the positioning

Tool Management
294 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

In order that tool "815" becomes active (and an offset D), then
● either a program must be started (and $MC_START_MODE_MASK appropriately set), or
● RESET executed ($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 14 = 1 and
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK appropriately set), or
● in the program after POSMT, the tool should be programmed to the positioned MT location
with a tool change command (T="815" M06 D1).
With
POSMT(state, 8, 3) ; position MT of tool holder 3 to location 8,
the empty MT location is positioned to the machining position, if a D offset is still not active.
The following init blocks are implicitly programmed with "T0 M06 D0" if the corresponding
machine data has been appropriately set. The mechanical MT transport "MT from tool holder
back into the magazine" is associated with this.
Programming of
POSMT(state, 3, 9) ; position MT of tool holder 9 to location 3,
Supplies the status value state=–5, as there is no MT and no tool holder at the programmed
tool holder 9.
POSMT(state, 77, 3) ; position MT of tool holder 3 to location 77,
Supplies the status value state=-6, as MT location number=77 on tool holder 3 is not defined.

5.8.24 MVTOOL - Language command to move tool

Overview
This function is available for TMMG.
The function MVTOOL allows tools to be loaded and unloaded via NC programming only. It
can also be used to transport a tool from one magazine location to another - regardless of
where.
It is mandatory for a tool to be positioned at the source magazine location.
This language command does not generate an alarm.
Whether MVTOOL was carried out with or without error(s) must be checked via the return
value of parameter "state".
The command can also be applied to multitools.
MVTOOL (state, magFrom, locFrom, magTo, locTo)

state Success status of command

0 Execution was successful (PLC acknowledgement may still be pending)
-1 Command cannot be used because TMMG is not active
-2 Function is not carried out because of block search, program testing
-3 Tool cannot be moved (because e.g. tool status "being changed" is set)
-4 No tool located in source location

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 295
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

-5 magFrom has invalid value

-6 locFrom has invalid value
-7 magTo has invalid value
-8 locTo has invalid value
-9 No distance relation defined (if exactly one magazine is an internal magazine)
-10 No empty location found (if parameter locTo is not programmed)
-11 Target location for tool occupied
-12 The parameter locTo must be programmed, as magTo is an internal magazine

magFrom Magazine number of magazine in which the tool to be moved is located

locFrom Location number of location in which the tool to be moved is located
magTo Target magazine number of magazine to which the tool is to be moved. This can be a
loading magazine, buffer magazine or another real magazine.
This parameter is optional.
If it is not programmed, the value from magFrom is used.
locTo Target location number of location to which the tool is to be moved.
This parameter is optional.
If it is not programmed or the value = 0 is programmed, an empty location search is
conducted in magazine magTo - if this is a real magazine. A location search cannot
be performed in an internal magazine. If magTo is the number of an internal magazine
and locTo is not programmed or programmed with a value=0, then the status=-8 is set.

Note
The command MVTOOL always reserves the target location with "reserved for tool to be
loaded".
The command sets the tool status of the tool to be moved to "tool is being changed", bit value
"H20" from the command preparation to the command completion (acknowledgement with
status 1 or 3).
Command completion means the successful completion with PLC status = 1 or 10 - or the
command is interrupted with PLC status = 3.
If a tool is moved from a real magazine to an internal magazine (or vice versa), the respective
magazine distance relation must be defined.
If the programmed parameters are invalid or if a tool is not located at the source magazine
location, or if the programmed target location cannot be occupied by the tool, or if the empty
location search does not find a location because parameter locTo has not been programmed,
or if a magazine distance relationship that is required has not been defined, then the
appropriate error code is returned via state.
Deselecting an active tool offset is not linked with the command.

Tool Management
296 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

PLC
In the NCK, the language command generates the command for the PLC, outputs the
command within the scope of executing the active block to the PLC. The active block is only
considered to have been executed if the end acknowledgement of the command is available
from the PLC. This can be the PLC status = 1, 3 or 5. Only then can a new block be loaded
for execution.

Example of parameter settings

The following configuration is present:
Magazine (magazine no. = 5, locations 1,...10),
a spindle (buffer magazine no. = 9998, location 1),
a loading point (loading magazine no. = 9999, location 1)
The magazine is linked to the spindle and the loading point via a distance relation (see
$TC_MDP1/$TC_MDP2).
Example 1
The tool from loading location 9999/1 is to be loaded in magazine 5. The following is
programmed to this effect:
def int state
$TC_MPP6[9999, 1] =123; place tool with internal T no.=123 onto loading location
MVTOOL(state, 9999, 1, 5);search for a suitable empty location in magazine 5
If the tool is to be loaded onto precisely location 7:
MVTOOL(state, 9999, 1, 5, 7);before loading, a check is performed to ensure location 7 is
empty
Example 2
The tool with T No.=123 is to be loaded from the loading location to spindle 1 (magazine
No.=9998, location No.=1):
$TC_MPP6[9999, 1] =123
MVTOOL(state, 9999, 1, 9998, 1) ;
Example 3
With the same configuration, a tool that is loaded on location 7 is to be moved to another
suitable location in the same magazine.
MVTOOL(state, 5, 7, 5)
or to location 3 in the same magazine
MVTOOL(state, 5, 7, 5, 3)
or to any location in magazine 11
MVTOOL(state, 5, 7, 11)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 297
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.25 SETTIA - Deactivate tool from wear group

The SETTIA function cancels the "active" status for all active tools in the selected wear group.
By parameterizing the language command, this can be either magazine-specific or wear group-
specific.
SETTIA(STATUS, MNR, VNR,USEKT)

STATUS Return parameters

0 Function was able to be executed correctly.
-1 Function was not executed because there is no active wear group in the selec‐
ted magazines.
-2 Function was not executed because the programmed wear group number does
not exist.
-3 Function was not executed because the programmed magazine number does
not exist.
-4 Function was not executed because the function "wear group" is not enabled
(MN_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK).
-5 Function was not executed.

All parameters are optional.

If SETTIA is not parameterized, the inactive setting refers to all loaded tools in the TO area
which are in "active" state.

MNR Magazine number

0 The inactive setting refers to all magazines regardless of any assignment to a
spindle. In this case, the tools in the buffer are also considered as well as the
tool holder.
>0 Magazine number in which the inactive setting is to be applied. Tools in this
magazine which are in the buffer are not considered. This means that if these
tools are placed back into the magazine, they still have "active" status.
-1 All magazines with a distance relationship to a spindle or tool holder.
VNR Wear group number
0 The inactive setting refers to all tools which are not assigned to a wear group.
If no wear group is defined, the inactive setting is applied to all tools in the
magazine.
>0 Wear group number in which the active setting is to be applied.
-1 Active wear group ($TC_MAP9).
USEKT Tool subgroup
0 All tools in the group are considered.
>0 The tools are considered that have a bit set in the value programmed in USEKT
in parameter $TC_TP11.
-1 The currently programmed value of USEKT is used.

A search strategy can be set in parameter $TC_MAMP3 for the tool to be activated by SETTIA.

Bit 12 = 0 Smallest possible duplo number (default)

Bit 12 = 1 Smallest possible magazine location
Bit 13 = 1 Smallest possible number contained in parameter $TC_TP10 (sequence of use)

Tool Management
298 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Note
It is mandatory to set the wear group for the function SETTIA.

Multitool
If SETTA is programmed for a multitool instead of for a magazine, alarm 6462 "[Channel %1:]
block %2 command %' can only be programmed for magazines. '%4' means no magazine".

5.8.26 SETTA - Activate tool from wear group

Overview
With the function SETTA all not disabled tools from the desired wear group are activated.
However, from a tool group, a max. of one tool referred to a spindle or tool holder becomes
active.
If, at the call instant, no wear groups have been defined or if the function "wear group" via
machine data has not been activated, then the command can still be used. The call parameters
must then be set accordingly.
If the selection criteria of the SETTA command match several tools within a tool group, then
selection criterion $TC_MAMP3, bits 12-15 is applied.

Description of function:
SETTA (STATUS, MNR, VNR, USEKT)

STATUS Return parameter which can consist of the following values:

0 Function was able to be executed correctly.
1 Function was executed, but another tool is active in the group (e.g. an unloaded
tool).
-1 Function was not executed because there is no active wear group in the selec‐
ted magazines.
-2 Function was not executed because the programmed wear group number does
not exist.
-3 Function was not executed because the programmed magazine number does
not exist.
-4 Function was not executed because the function wear group is not enabled
(MN_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK).
-5 Function was not executed for other reasons.

All parameters are optional.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 299
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

If SETTA is not parameterized, the active setting refers to all loaded tools that are ready for
use in the TO area.

MNR Magazine number

0 Or not specifying the parameter means that activation refers to all magazines
- independent of whether a distance relationship to a spindle location exists.
-1 All magazines with a distance relationship to a spindle or tool holder.
-2 An active tool from every tool group represented in the magazine is set in the
magazine of each spindle or each tool holder (corresponds to calling SETTA
several times with the specific magazine numbers that are involved). This
means there can be e.g. 2 tool holders with 1 magazine assigned to each. The
tools of a group can be distributed in any configuration among the two maga‐
zines. If both magazines include tools of a group, then this means that 2 tools
from the tool group are allocated the active state.
If several magazines are addressed (MNR ≤ 0), then the magazines are regarded as a unit and a tool
from the tool group is activated across all of the magazines that are being considered. Magazines
($TC_MPP4 Bit 1=1) are not taken into account.
VNR Wear group number
0 The active setting refers to the entire magazine.
-1 Active wear group ($TC_MAP9). If there is no active wear group in any of the
magazines, then status -1 is returned and the status of the tools is not changed.
-2 Or if the parameter is not specified, then this means that activation applies to
the whole magazine. Especially parameter VNR is not specified or set to -2, if
the system does not operate with the wear group function.
USEKT Tool subgroup
0 Or if the parameter is not specified, then all tools in the group are considered.
-1 The currently programmed value of USEKT is used.

A search strategy can be set in parameter $TC_MAMP3 for the tool to be activated by SETTA.

Note
It is mandatory to set the wear group for the function SETTA.

If SETTA is programmed for a multitool instead of for a magazine, alarm 6462 "[Channel %1:]
block %2 command %' can only be programmed for magazines. '%4' means no magazine".

5.8.27 RESETMON - Language command for setpoint activation

RESETMON (state, t, d, mon, resetStates)
Sets the actual value of the tool to the setpoint.
The command is used for tools as well as for multitools.

state Return parameter which can consist of the following values:

0 Command was successfully executed
-1 The cutting edge with the specified D number d does not exist.
-2 The tool with the specified T number t does not exist.

Tool Management
300 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

-3 There is no monitoring function defined for the specified tool. This status
is only possible if t has been specified explicitly.
-4 Monitoring function is not active in the NCK, i.e. the command has not
been executed.
t Internal T number
t=0 All tools are handled.
t>0 Precisely this tool is handled.
t<0 The absolute value of t is formed and all replacement tools of this tool
are handled.
d D number of the tool (optional parameter).
If the parameter is not specified at all or is assigned the value 0, all D numbers or all
cutting edges of the tool are handled.
d>0 The command applies specifically to the specified D number.
mon Optional bit-coded parameter.
If the parameter is either not specified at all or assigned the value 0, all actual values
of the active, tool-specific monitoring functions for the designated edge(s) are set to
the setpoints.
mon > 0 Precisely the actual value of the specified monitoring type is handled.
Possible values are the positive values of the system parameter
$TC_TP9 (1, 2, 4, 8) or the corresponding bit combinations when sev‐
eral monitoring types are activated.
mon < 0 Precisely the actual value in the monitoring type specified in "absolute
value mon" is handled. There is no restriction by the system variable
values $TC_TP9. The values of non-activated monitoring types can also
be reset in this way too. In particular, it is also possible to simultaneously
reset the actual values of wear and additive offset monitoring values.
resetStates Optional bit-coded parameters
Bit 0 Tool status "active" is deleted
Bit 1 Tool status "enabled" is set
Bit 2 Tool status "disabled" is reset if
a) the monitoring data permit this
b) parameter "mon" is set accordingly
Bit 3 Tool status "measure" is set
Bit 4 Tool status "prewarning limit" is reset if
c) the monitoring data permit this
d) parameter "mon" is set accordingly
Bit 5 Not permitted
Bit 6 Not permitted
Bit 7 Tool status "was in use" is deleted
Bit 8 Not permitted
Bit 9 Not permitted
Bit 10 Tool status "to unload" is deleted
Bit 11 Not permitted
Bit 12 Not permitted
Bit 13 Not permitted
Bit 14 Not permitted

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 301
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

The parameter "resetStates" allows selective modification of the tool status in addition to the
monitoring parameters. The bit coding for "resetStates" corresponds to that for the tool status
parameter $TC_TP8[x].
If this parameter is not specified, machine data $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK is accessed.
The bit coding for this data is identical to that for parameter "resetStates". With the analog PI
service PI_TRESMO, this machine data is also effective.

Note
There is no explicit generation of alarms. Users can carry out the error handling themselves
via the state parameter.

Multitool
The command is extended for a multitool:
RESETMON (state, MTno, d, mon, resetStates)
State specifies the status of the command execution:
0 = command successfully executed
-1 = the cutting edge with the specified number Dno does not exist
-2 = the multitool with the specified number MTno does not exist
In this case, MTno is the multitool number with the following values:

MTno = T-no. = 0 Or tools are handled and therefore also all multitools.
MTno > 0 Precisely this multitool is handled.
MTno < 0 Not defined.
d is an optional parameter and designates the D number of the tool cutting edges in the multitool
that should be reset.

Dno = 0 If the parameter is not specified, or if the tool is programmed with 0, then all
cutting edges of the tools are handled in the multitool.
Dno > 0 The command refers precisely to the cutting edges of the tools in the multitool
with the specified D number.
mon refers to the tools in the multitool.
resetStates refers on one hand to states of the individual tool, which when reset to the setpoints
must be additionally changed; however here, for this special programming, also the
corresponding MT states, that are changed if at least the same state was changed in one of
the tools loaded in the multitool. This includes:

Bit Value Meaning

1= 0 Multitool status "enabled" remains unchanged
1 Multitool status "enabled" is set
2= 0 Multitool status "disabled" remains unchanged
1 Multitool status "disabled" is deleted if permitted by the monitoring data
and the 4th parameter is set accordingly.
10 = 0 Multitool status "to unload" remains unchanged
1 Multitool status "to unload" is deleted

Tool Management
302 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Note
If this optional parameter is not programmed, then the value of MD
$MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK is valid as implicit value.
Analog to this, the MT number can be programmed for the parameter T number of the
corresponding PI service _N_TRESMO.
The MD $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK available to parameterize the RESETMON
command, with the description "behavior of the tool data for RESETMON", keeps its effect on
the tools - even if they are located in a multitool and are reset using RESETMON.

The selectable state changes also affects the multitool, if this has been programmed and the
appropriate state has been defined.

T MT
Bit 0 Delete "active" status X -
Bit 1 Set the "enabled" status X X
Bit 2 Conditionally delete "disabled" status if monitoring data permit this X X
Bit 3 Set the "measured" status X -
Bit 4 Conditionally delete "Pre-warning limit" status if monitoring data X -
permit this
Bit 7 Delete "was in use" status X -
Bit 10 Delete "to unload" status x x

Note
Bit 2 = 1, bit 16 = 1 of $TC_MTP8:
This state is then deleted in the tool if the monitoring values of the active monitoring of the
cutting edges permit this. This state is then deleted in the multitool if the tool loaded last has
deleted its "disabled" state.
Bit 2 = 1, bit 16 = 0 of $TC_MTP8:
This state is then deleted in the tool if the monitoring values of the active monitoring of the
cutting edges permit this. This state is then deleted in the multitool if at least one loaded tool
has deleted its "disabled" state with the programming of RESTMON.

Example 1:
The actual time monitoring value (4th parameter = 1) of the cutting edges with the D number
2 (3rd parameter) of all tools that have been loaded to the MT with the number 500, is reset
to the setpoint. Whereby, the state value of the tools whose time monitoring has been changed,
is changed in accordance with specifications of the last parameter.
As 500 is the number of a multitool, the state of this multitool is also changed in accordance
with specifications of the last parameter. Note that only the programmed bits 1, 2, 10 are
relevant for the MT state change.
The success of the command is indicated in the "state" reference parameter.
int state=0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 303
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

RESETMON(state, 500, 2, 1, "H49F")

MT 500 in the example is equipped with three tools. Each tool has two cutting edges with D
no. = 1 and 2. Two are time-monitored and are disabled due to the time limit in the cutting
edges with D number = 2; the third tool is workpiece count-monitored and is also disabled
because the workpiece count limit has been reached in the cutting edge with the D number =
2. The two time-monitored tools are now reset with RESETMON, the tool state "disabled" is
canceled and the MT state "disabled" is also cancelled (although the workpiece count-
monitored tool is still disabled). The other programmed tool and MT states except "disabled"
are changed according to the definition.
If the following had been programmed:
RESETMON(state, 500, 2, 0, "H49F")
all the monitoring actual values of all tools in the MT would have been reset to their setpoints
(4th parameter = 0) and all tools would have reset the "disabled" state and the MT would have
reset its "disabled" state. The other programmed states would also have been changed.
Example 2:
The actual values of the time monitoring of all cutting edges and all tools are set to the setpoints
of the time monitoring.
The states of the tools are changed in accordance with the programming (last parameter =
"H405"; reset "disabled" state conditionally and reset states "active" and "to be unloaded"
unconditionally). The state of the multitool is also changed in accordance with the programming
(the MT state "disabled" conditionally, the state "to be unloaded" unconditionally).
int state=0
RESETMON(state, 0, 0, 1, "H405")

5.8.28 DELTC - Delete toolholder data record

The function "Tool holder orientation" must be active. The function can be additively
superimposed over the functions TMBF, TMFD, TMMO and TMMG.
DELTC(n,m)

n First number of the tool holder data area the values of which shall be set to zero.
This parameter is optional. If it is not specified, all tool holder data records are set to zero starting
at the lowest through to the highest number.
m Last number of the tool holder data area the values of which shall be set to zero.
This parameter is optional. If it is not specified, then the tool holder data record specified by n
is set to zero.
If m is greater than the highest number of a tool holder data record in this channel, then those
data records up to the highest number are set to zero.

The tool holder data records are defined by the system variables $TC_CARRx. Only the
command $TC_CARR1[0] was available up to now for setting all data records to zero. With
DELTC a range of numbers for the tool holder data from n to m can now be set to zero.
In particular, the contents of DELTC() are the same as $TC_CARR1[0]=0= set all data records
to zero.

Tool Management
304 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

The parameters n, m have to be programmed with values larger than zero. Other values lead
to an alarm.
Parameter n must be less than m. Programming otherwise leads to an alarm.
Also, n must lie in the range of numbers permitted for tool holder data.
The selected range of numbers must include the range of numbers for the tool holder data
records on the channel. Programming is otherwise rejected and an alarm is issued.
If the function "Tool holder data" is not activated ($MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER 0 0), then
DELTC will also generate an alarm.

Example
In the TO unit there are 14 tool holder records defined with the numbers 1 to 14.
DELTC(5,8) ;sets the values of the data records 5, 6, 7, 8 to zero
DELTC(5,20) ;sets the values of the data records 5, 6, 7, ..., 14 to zero
DELTC(9) ;sets the values of the data record 9 to zero
DELTC() ;sets the values of the data records 1, ..., 14 to zero
DELTC(0,1) ;error → alarm - n, m must be greater than zero
DELTC(0,-2) ;error → alarm - n, m must be greater than zero
DELTC(0) ;error → alarm - n must be greater than zero
DELTC(15,20) ;error → alarm - n may be max. 14
DELTC(20) ;error → alarm - n may be max. 14

5.8.29 TCA - Tool selection/tool change irrespective of tool status

Overview
This function is only available for TMMO and TMMG.
It is necessary for certain routines (e.g. measuring cycles) to load a specific tool onto the
spindle / the tool holder for tool change regardless of its status (e.g. a disabled tool).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 305
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

TCA("Tool name", duplo no., tool holder no.)

"Tool name" Identifier of the tool to be loaded

Duplo no. Duplo number of tool to be loaded.
This parameter is optional.
If it is not specified, then the tool with the lowest duplo number is loaded.
Tool holder no. Tool holder or spindle on which the change is to take place.
This parameter is optional.
If it is not specified, the change refers to the currently set or programmed master
spindle / master tool holder.
The following applies for TMMO without TMMG:
The parameter corresponds to the address extension of the T command.
(The setting for MD $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO is taken into account.)

TCA behaves like the T command in respect of alarm and command output.
If neither TMMG nor TMMO are active, an alarm is generated.
Any alarms occurring during programming are handled in the same way as the alarms during
T programming.

Note
Offset selection, in accordance with $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, acts in the same way
as for the T command. TCA and D must not be programmed in the same block.

Tool Management
306 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Examples
1. Preparation and change with T command (i.e. $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0)
Configuration 1x turret, 1x tool holder
There are 2 tools with the identifier "Finish cutter" and duplo numbers 1 and 2.
TCA("Finish cutter", 1.1)
The tool "Finish cutter" with duplo number 1 is loaded onto tool holder 1.
With the machine configuration assumed above, the following programming would have
the same result:
TCA("Finish cutter")
The duplo number is not specified, this means that the tool with the lowest duplo number
is changed, i.e. duplo "1".
The tool holder no. is not specified. Therefore, the change is effective for the current master
tool holder, i.e. "1".
2. Change with M06 ($MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1)
Configuration: 1x chain magazine, 2x spindles, spindle_1 is the master spindle. 4 tools are
loaded, "MILLER_20MM", with duplo numbers 4, 5, 8 and 15.
"MILLER_20MM", duplo "8" was disabled and must be measured. Measuring takes place
on spindle 2.
TCA("MILLER_20MM", 8.2)
M2=6
The tool "MILLER_20MM", duplo "8" is prepared for spindle "2" and changed.
In this case, the following programming would lead to a different result:
TCA("MILLER_20MM")
M06
Tool "MILLER_20MM" with duplo "4" (lowest duplo number) is prepared for spindle "1" (this
is the master spindle) and changed with M06.
Note
The following special issues apply for TCA when compared to T commands:
TCA and D cannot be programmed in the same block.
TCA renders the set search strategies ($TC_MAMP2 and/or $TC_MAP10) ineffective and
ignores the programmed values of $P_USEKT.
The tool must have status "enabled".
The PLC interface signals "Transition to new replacement tool" and "Last replacement tool
of group" are not set.

PLC
The PLC is not allowed to reject a tool prepared with "TCA".
Notice: Currently the interface does not have any criteria as to whether a tool may be rejected
or not.
If this function is being used, an additional identifier must be used to indicate this to the PLC.

Example: $TC_VDITCP[2]=101 ("101" - identifier that the PLC is not allowed to

reject)
TCA("Miller",1)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 307
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Supplement to the definition if the programmed tool is a multitool

Using the TCA command, a specific tool with "tool name"/"duplo number" can be changed to
the tool holder independent of the tool state. If this tool is a multitool, the state of the multitool
as well as the state of the tool is ignored for the command. This especially allows a tool to be
selected and/or removed from a disabled multitool.

Note
The command can only be programmed for tools - also those that are loaded in a multitool;
however it cannot be programmed for a multitool. If the programmed name is e.g. an MT name,
then Alarm 6460 "[Channel%1: ] block %2 command %3 can only be programmed for tools.
%4 means no tool." is generated.

5.8.30 Replacement of the TCA command

With the TCA command, it is possible to select a tool by specifying the duplo number.
Substitution of the command is possible, a description of this can be found in Section "Function
replacement (Page 103)".
Up until then, it is only possible to substitute using the procedures predefined using the general
replacement function MD10712 $MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB.
In order to use the same replacement subprogram for the TCA and T replacement, the following
replacement is inserted for the TCA command – analogous to the T function:
With MD15710 $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME, the replacement of the TCA command can be
activated by specifying a program name. The parameters of the TCA command are transferred
to the replacement subprogram in the following system variables:

$C_TS Tool identifier (as in the existing T replacement)

$C_DUPLO Duplo number
$C_THNO Tool holder / spindle number
In addition, there are system variables, which can be used to query whether the substitution
of the TCA command is active and which parameters have actually been programmed:

$C_TCA TRUE : Replacement of the TCA command is active

$C_TS_PROG TRUE: $C_TS contains the programmed tool identifier
$C_DUPLO_PROG TRUE: $C_DUPLO contains the programmed duplo number
$C_THNO_PROG TRUE: $C_THNO contains the programmed tool holder / spindle num‐
ber
Behavior regarding other replacements:
In the TCA replacement subprogram, tool programming replacement is not carried out. All
other replacements are carried out. Conversely, no TCA replacement is carried out in a
replacement subprogram for tool programming.
If the TCA command is programmed when the tool management or tool monitoring is not active,
then the part program processing is interrupted with Alarm 6431 "Tool management or tool

Tool Management
308 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

monitoring not active" (this is the existing behavior). If TCA replacement is configured, then in
this case, part program processing is also aborted with alarm 6431.
Note regarding MD10712 $MN_NC_USER_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB:
If the TCA command is renamed, e.g. to "_TCA", by appropriately configuring MD10712, then
the TCA replacement is realized with the interpretation of the "_TCA" command.
Example with a common replacement cycle for T and TCA replacement:
Machine data:
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME = "T_SUB_PROG"
$MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME = "T_SUB_PROG"
Replacement subprogram for T and TCA replacement:
N1000 PROC T_SUB_PROG DISPLOF SBLOF
;common part
...
;different tool selection:
N2000 IF ($C_TCA == 1)
N2010 ; TCA replacement active
N2020 IF ( $C_DUPLO_PROG == 1) AND ( $C_THNO_PROG == 1)
N2030 TCA( $C_TS, $C_DUPLO, $C_THNO )
N2040 ELSE
N2050 IF ( $C_DUPLO_PROG == 1) AND ( $C_THNO_PROG == 0)
N2060 TCA( $C_TS, $C_DUPLO)
N2070 ELSE
N2080 IF ( $C_DUPLO_PROG == 0) AND ( $C_THNO_PROG == 1)
N2090 TCA( $C_TS, ,$C_THNO)
N2100 ELSE
N2110 TCA( $C_TS)
N2120 ENDIF
N2130 ENDIF
N2140 ENDIF
N2150 ELSE
N2160 IF ( $C_T_PROG == 1) OR ( $C_TS_PROG == 1)
N2170 ; T–replacement active
N2180 IF ( $C_T_PROG == 1)
N2190 T[ $C_TE ] = $C_T
N2200 ELSE
N2210 T[ $C_TE ] = $C_TS
N2220 ENDIF
N2230 ENDIF
N2240 ENDIF
...
M17

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 309
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.31 TCI - Change tool from buffer into magazine

Overview
This function is available for TMMG.
The command TCI returns the tools from buffer locations back to the magazine. Tool holder
locations are however excepted from this. Generally, applications are for complex machines
with several grippers.
The necessary empty location search is carried out in the same way as for a programmed tool
change with T (see Section "Prepare a tool change (Page 72)").

Note
TCI cannot be programmed together with M06 in one NC block. Tool change preparation and
execution are carried out in one operation.
The TCI command cannot be substituted (T function replacement).

TCI(locNo, tool holder no.)

locNo Number of the buffer whose tool is to be returned to the magazine.

Since the locNo cannot be the location number of a tool holder, returning the tool
has no effect on active tool offset.
Tool holder no. This specifies the number of the tool holder from where the tool is to be removed.
This parameter is optional. If this parameters is not specified, then the current mas‐
ter tool holder is automatically selected.

Alarm 6403 is generated if an invalid location number is programmed.

The location number locNo is invalid
● if locNo indicates a tool holder / spindle (alarm 6450)
● if locNo indicates a non-defined buffer location (alarm 6403)
● if locNo is not linked with the programmed tool holder or master tool holder by $TC_MLSR
(alarm 6454)
● if no distance table is defined either for the buffer locNo or the tool holder / spindle (alarm
6454)
Alarm 6451 is generated if no buffer magazine has been defined.
Alarm 6452 is generated if the specified tool holder is not defined.
Alarm 6431 is generated if TMMG is not active.
In order to successfully program TCI it is necessary that the specified location number locNo
is assigned to the tool holder via $TC_MLSR. Empty locations are searched for in the
magazines defined in the distance table (defined by $TC_MDP2) of the buffer locNo or of the

Tool Management
310 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

tool holder. If both the buffer locNo and the tool holder have a distance table, the buffer distance
table is the one that is used. Alarm 6454 is generated if neither has a distance table.

Note
The command TCI contains as parameter, the number of a location (gripper, loader, transfer
point) of the buffer magazine. In order to use this language command in your own cycle
programs, the location number can be identified using the system variable $P_MAGNREL,
$P_MAGREL.

Example
The following magazine configuration is present:
● Magazine 1
In the buffer magazine with 5 locations, the following is defined:
● Spindle 2 (location 1) with grippers 1 and 2 (locations 3 and 4 coupled with the spindle
through $TC_MLSR[3,1] = 0 and $TC_MLSR[4,1] = 0)
● Spindle 1 (location 2) with gripper 3 (location 5 coupled with the spindle through
$TC_MLSR[5,2] = 0)
The following is programmed:
TCI(2): generates alarm 6450
TCI(5): changes the tool from location 5 (gripper 3) back to the magazine
TCI(9): Alarm 6403 (buffer only has the numbers 1 to 5)
The user determines the sequence in which the buffer locations are cleared by programming.

PLC
TCI is executed in the PLC like the programming of T0 M06.
The buffer number transferred in the DB72 has to be evaluated.
Multitool
The TCI command also changes multitools from internal magazines into the magazine.

5.8.32 GETFREELOC - Search for empty location

Overview
This function is available for TMMG.
For a given tool, search for an empty location in those magazines assigned to the specified
loading location or the specified spindle / tool holder by an entry in the distance table. The
strategy set by $TC_MAMP2 or $TC_MAP10 is used as the search strategy. The Search
strategy can be programmed with:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 311
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Defined location type hierarchies are taken into consideration when searching for an empty
location by the PI service or for a programmed tool change.
Alarm 14020 is generated if less than three parameters are programmed.

Note
GETFREELOC only reserves the empty location that is found if the optional 6th parameter is
programmed with "L" or "S".

GETFREELOC(magNo&, locNo&, T No., refMag, refLoc, withReserv)

Find/check empty location for specified tool regarding specified loading / buffer magazine and
location number. Reserve the location found corresponding to the programming of the
parameter withReserve.

magNo The parameter is not only an input parameter, but also a result parameter.
Input value
>0 Magazine number of the magazine in which the search is to be made. In
so doing, it should be noted that only magazine numbers are valid that
can be reached from the programmed reference location (parameter re‐
fMag/refLog).
0 The magazine in which the search is to be made is not specified. Search
starts in the magazine, which corresponding to the selected search strat‐
egy, is the first.
Result val‐
ue
>0 Magazine number of the magazine where the empty location is found.
0 If no empty location is found.
-1 TMMG not active
-2 Invalid magazine number specified
-3 Invalid magazine location number specified.
The location number is also regarded as invalid when the magazine num‐
ber is invalid.
-4 Invalid T number tNo specified.
-5 Invalid letter for "refMag".
-6 If "refMag" = = "S", invalid tool holder number "refLoc" specified.
If "regMag" = = "L", invalid loading location number "refLoc" specified.
-7 Parameter "withReserv" has an illegal value.
-8 Parameter "withReserv" = "reserved for new tool to be loaded" cannot be
programmed for tools that are in the buffer (irrespective of the value of
this owner magazine for this tool).
-9 Parameter "withReserv" = "reserved for tools in the buffer" is only possible
for tools that are in the buffer.
-10 The value of parameter "withReserv" is not compatible with the pro‐
grammed value of parameter "refMag".
-11 First parameter has the value of a multitool number (i.e. empty location
search in the MT). Only three parameters can be programmed.
-99 Other (unexpected) problem in the programming.
locNo The parameter is not only an input parameter, but also a result parameter.

Tool Management
312 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Input value
>0 Magazine location number of the location which should be checked for
accepting the specified tool.
If magNo=0 is programmed, then a value locNo > 0 is ignored.
0 No specification of the magazine location. Search starts with the location
which is the first according to the set search strategy.
Result val‐
ue
>0 Magazine location number of the empty location that was found or
checked.
0 If no empty location is found.
-1, -2, ..., Have the same meaning as the error status values of parameter magNo.
-99
tNo T number of the tool for which an empty location is to be searched. The
searched location must be suitable for the tool size and the type of magazine location
defined in the tool.
If an invalid T number is programmed, parameters magNo, locNo each return the value
-4.
refMag Reference magazine referred to for the empty location search (optional parameter).
"S" = buffer magazine
"L" = loading magazine
"-" = no reference magazine. Is used if a magazine definitely has to be specified.
If a value not equal to "S", "L" is programmed, parameters magNo, locNo each return
the value -5. If the specified reference magazine is not yet defined, parameters magNo,
locNo also return the value -5.
refLoc If refMag equals "S", then the spindle number / tool holder number is specified here for
empty location search.
If an invalid tool holder number is programmed, parameters magNo, locNo each return
the value -6.
If refMag equals "L", then the number of the location in the loading magazine is specified
for which a search should be made for an empty location.
If an invalid number is programmed, parameters magNo, locNo each return the value
-6.
This parameter is optional. If it is not programmed then the search for the master tool
holder is carried out for refMag = "S".
When refMag = "L", the search is carried out for location number = 1 in the loading
magazine.
When refMag = "-", the parameter is not taken into account.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 313
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

withReserv "L" = reserves the found/checked empty location in the real magazine with "reserved
for tool to be loaded" (this is in system parameter $TC_MPP4, the bit value "H8)
The reservation is only set when the programmed tool has not been loaded yet, i.e. the
owner address of the tool is zero.
Otherwise the status is set to the value = -8.
"S" = if the tool for the programmed T number is already located at a location in the
buffer: Reserve the found/checked empty location in the real magazine with "reserved
for tool in the buffer" (in system parameter $TC_MPP4, the bit value "H4"; this is gen‐
erally automatically set if the tool change is programmed with T/M6).
If the owner magazine address of this tool is = 0 and the tool is on a magazine location
(i.e. current magazine address of the tool is not 0): Also set this owner address to the
value of the found/checked empty location.
If the tool already has an owner magazine address, then this is replaced by the new
magazine address, if the new address is different to the old address. If the location of
the old owner magazine address is reserved, the reservation is cancelled.
If a location is already reserved for the programmed tool, this reservation is cancelled
before the new reservation is set.
"-" = leave the reserved status of the found/checked empty location unchanged.
The parameter is optional. If it is not programmed, then "-" is implicitly interpreted as
programmed; i.e. the reserved status remains unchanged.

Note
If several parameters are incorrect, the value of magNo, locNo will depend on which parameter
NCK checks first.
If an empty location is sought for a tool with fixed coding, GETFREELOC always returns the
owner location of this tool.
Locations on internal magazines (loading magazine, buffer magazine) cannot be reserved.

An alarm is generated if the TMMG is not active.

Examples
There are two magazines with the magazine numbers 1 and 2 - each with five locations. There
are also two spindles (spindle numbers 1 and 2 with location numbers 1 an 2) and a gripper
(assigned location number 3, spindle number 1) in the buffer magazine and two loading
locations (location numbers 1 and 2) in the loading magazine.
Both magazines are linked to the locations of the buffer and the locations of the loading
magazine (via the distance relationships). The following examples are independent of one
another.

Empty location search / reservation for loading via loading location

def int magNo=0, locNo=0
def int tNo=44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 is defined
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "L", 2 )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44 regarding loading location 2, a search is made for
an empty location.

Tool Management
314 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

; The suitable empty location is in magazine 2, location 5. The references magNo/locNo

; return the values 2/5.
; The state of the magazine location is not changed.
def int magNo=0, locNo=0
def int tNo=44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 is defined
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "L", 2, "L")
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44 regarding loading location 2, a search is made for
an empty location.
; The suitable empty location is in magazine 2, location 5. The references magNo/locNo
; return the values 2/5.
; The location 2/5 is reserved "for the tool to be loaded".
def int magNo=0, locNo=0
def int tNo=44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 is defined
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "L", 2, "S" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44 regarding loading location 2, a search is made for
an empty location.
; The programming is illegal because for refMag = "L", the programming
; with Reserv = "S" is not defined
; The references magNo/locNo return the status values = -10 /-10 = the value of
; parameter "withReserv" is not compatible with the value of
; parameter "refMag".
def int magNo=0, locNo=0
def int tNo = 44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 is defined
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "L", 2, "e" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44 regarding the tool holder with location no. = 1,
;a search is made for an empty location.
; The programming is illegal because parameter "withReserv" has been programmed
; with the wrong value.
; The references magNo/locNo ; return the status values = -7 / -7 = parameter "withReserv"
; has an illegal value.

Empty location search / reservation for loading via tool holder / spindle
def int magNo = 0 locNo = 0
def int tNo = 4 ;Tool is defined with T no. = 4
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S" )
or with the same function
GETFREELOC ( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", "-" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 4, regarding the master spindle, a search is made for
an empty location.
; The suitable empty location is in magazine 1, location 3. The references
; magNo/locNo return the values 1/3.
; The state of the magazine location is not changed.
def int magNo = 2 locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 315
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined, is on the tool holder and does not have an
; owner location in the magazine yet (is therefore not considered as loaded),
; or already has an owner location in a magazine (loaded)
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 1, "L" )
; for the tool with T no. = 44, regarding the tool holder with location number1, a
; search is made for an empty location. The programming is illegal because an attempt
is made
; to set the reservation "reserved for new tool to be loaded" for a tool in the
; buffer. The references magNo/locNo return the status values -8 / -8 = "Parameter value
; cannot be programmed for tools that are in the buffer".
def int magNo, locNo
def int tNo = 44 ;Tool with T no. = 44 is defined, is on the tool holder
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 1, "S" )
; the same starting position applies as for the programming of the previous
; command. The suitable empty location is in magazine 2, location 5. The references
magNo/locNo
; return the values 2/5. Location 2/5 is reserved "for tool in the buffer".
def int magNo = 0 locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44
; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined and is in the gripper which is connected via $TC_MLSR with
; the tool holder of the location with number 1
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 3, "S" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44, regarding the tool holder with location number 1, a
; search is made for an empty location. The suitable empty location is in magazine 2,
location 5. The references magNo/locNo
; return the values 2/5.
; The location 2/5 is reserved "for tool in the buffer".
; (This state is retained during NCK run-up if the reserving tool is still in the
; buffer at this time)
def int magNo = 0 locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44 ; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined and is not in the buffer
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 2, "S" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44, regarding the buffer location number 2, a
; search is made for an empty location.
; The programming is illegal because an attempt is made to set the
; reservation "reserved for tool in the buffer" for a tool search of the buffer.
; The references magNo/locNo return the status values -9 / -9 = "Parameter value is only
; possible for tools that are in the buffer".
def int magNo = 0 locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44 ; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined, but not (yet) loaded.
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 1, "S" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44, regarding the tool holder with location number 1, a
; search is made for an empty location. The suitable empty location is in magazine 2,
location 5. However, since the tool is not loaded
; the last parameter cannot be programmed with the value "S".

Tool Management
316 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

; The references magNo/locNo return the status values -8 / -8 = "Parameter cannot be

; programmed for tools that are in the buffer".
def int magNo = 0 locNo = 0
def int tNo = 44 ; Tool with T no. = 44 is defined, but not (yet) loaded.
GETFREELOC( magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 1, "L" )
; for the defined tool with T no. = 44, regarding the tool holder with location number 1, a
; search is made for an empty location. The suitable empty location is in magazine 2,
location 5. The references
; magNo/locNo return the values 2/5.

5.8.33 DELMLRES - Delete location status "reserved for tool in the buffer"

Overview
This function is available for TMMG.
Cancel the location reservation, type resType of the location with the number magNo.
DELMLRES (magNo, locNo, resType)

state Result of the command execution

0 Command successfully executed (even if the location was not reserved).
-1 TMMG is not active
-2 invalid magazine number specified
-3 invalid magazine location number specified
-4 invalid letter for resType
magNo Magazine number of the magazine that contains the location.
locNo Magazine location number of the location whose reservation should be deleted.
resType Type of reservation to be deleted.
"L" Reservation for "tool to be loaded" ("L "= "Tool to be Loaded")
"S" Reservation for "tool in the buffer" ("S" = tool in Spindle" or general tool in the buffer).
The parameter is optional. If it is not programmed, then the reservation that is set is
deleted - either "L" or "S". If no reservation is set, then the command has no effect.

If the reservation of adjacent locations is also reserved for an oversized tool, then also these
(sub) location reservations are cancelled.
Example 1
For the oversized tool located in gripper 1 (magazine No. 9998, location No. = 4), the location
reservation, for tool in the buffer, is to be deleted.
def int tNo, magNo, locNo
tNo = $TC_MPP6[ 9998, 4 ]
magNo = $A_MYMN[ tNo ] ; owner magazine
locNo = $A_MYLN[ tNo ] ; owner magazine location, which
; was reserved
; when loading the tool
state = DELMLRES ( magNo, locNo, "s" )

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 317
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

; the same meaning would be

"DELMLRES(magNo, locNo)"
if (state < 0 ) gotof error
If it should be ensured that the location is also reserved for the tool that is intended to be loaded
on change, then the following additional check can be made:
if ( $TC_MPP66[ magNo, locNo ] GOTOF ERROR
Example 2
Load programmed tool via tool holder (magazine No. 9998, location No. = 2). The loading
operation is programmed using the commands GETFREELOC, MVTOOL.
def int tNo, magNo, locNo
tNo = 3 ; this tool should be loaded
GETFREELOC (magNo, locNo, tNo, "S", 2, "L") ; search for empty location with reservation
if ( (magNo > 0) and (locNo > 0)
and ( "something is not as required") )
state = DELMLRES ( magNo, locNo, "L" )
if ( state < 0 ) GOTOF ERROR
endif
MVTOOL( state, 9998, 2, magNo, locNo )

5.8.34 DELMLOWNER - Delete owner magazine location of the tool

Overview
This function is available for TMMG.
Delete the tool or the multitool in the buffer magazine - owner magazine location.
DELMLOWNER(t)

state Result of the command execution

0 Command was successfully executed.
-1 TMMG is not active
-2 Tool with the T no. = t does not exist - not for t = 0 either
-3 The tool is not loaded (does not have an owner location)
-4 The tool is not in the buffer magazine
t T number of the tool in which the owner location is deleted

If the owner location is reserved for this tool, then implicitly, the location reservation "for tool
in buffer" is also deleted.
The system parameters $A_MYMN [ t ] and $A_MYMLN [ t ] read, after the delete operation,
the value = 0.
Remark:
If the t number of the tool is not known, then it can be determined with one of the following
commands:
def int tNo
tNo = GETT( name, duplo )

Tool Management
318 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

; if only the name and duplo number of the tool are known
tNo = $TC_MPP&[ magNo, locNo ]
; if only the magazine location is known, where the tool is
contained
tNo = $TC_MPP&&[ magNo, locNo ]
; if only the magazine location is known,
; whose reservation is to be deleted
Multitool
The command can also be programmed for multitools.
state = DELMLOWNER(INT MTno)
In multitool with number MTno, delete the owner magazine location in the buffer magazine
Therefore, also delete the owner location of the tools - contained in the multitool - with numbers
Tnoi; i=1, ..., $P_MTOOLNT.
After the deletion operation, system parameters $A_MYMN [MTno] / $A_MYMLN [MTno] and
$A_MYMN [Tnoi] / $A_MYMLN [Tnoi] read the value = 0.

Note
After the deletion, the system parameters $A_TOOLMTN [Tnoi], $A_TOOLMTLN [Tnoi] and
$A_MYMTN [Tnoi], $A_MYMTLN [Tnoi] still read the values of the multitool, of the MT location
on which the tool with T number Tnoi has been loaded.

Note
The command cannot be programmed with the T number of a tool, which is loaded in a
multitool. This programming is rejected with state = -5.

5.8.35 $P_USEKT - Tool change only with tools of subgroup

Overview
This function is only available for TMMO and TMMG.
This command selects a subset of tools of a tool group which is then taken into account for
the subsequent tool changes (tool technology group).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 319
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

The subgroups are set via system variables $TC_TP11[t].

Name $P_USEKT
Meaning $P_USEKT is a bit-coded value. Only the contents of the bits 0 - 3 are of signifi‐
cance.
All tools having the parameter $TC_TP11 that have set one of the bits of
$P_USEKT are available in the following tool changes. The value 0 means that
"all bits are set".
An alarm is generated if there is no such tool in a tool group for which a tool change
was programmed.
Data type INT
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
x x - -
Implicit prepro‐ - -
cessing stop

Machine data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, bit 20 sets whether after a reset or end of program,
the last programmed value of $P_USEKT is retained or whether $P_USEKT is set to the value
entered in $MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE.

Behavior at NC reset
For a more precise definition of the behavior at NC reset and NC start, a further bit is defined
in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK:
The newly defined bit 20 = 1 together with bit 0 = 1 of the same machine data specifies that
the programmed $P_USEKT value is retained at NC reset.
In the other three possible combinations of bit 0 and bit 20, the value is taken from MD
$MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE.

Behavior at NC start
The last set $P_USEKT value remains effective. As $P_USEKT can only be changed by an
NC program, the $P_USEKT that was set at the last NC reset is effective.
It is possible, for example, to program a desired value n in $P_USEKT by using ASUPs at the
program start (ProgEvents).
If the tool change is programmed with the function T="location", the $P_USEKT command can
also be used. However, it is then necessary that the tool has set at least one bit of the
programmed $P_USEKT value on the programmed magazine location in parameter
$TC_TP11. Otherwise, the tool of another magazine location is selected. The following still

Tool Management
320 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

applies for this setting: At NC start the value of $P_USEKT = 0 is pre-assigned, irrespective
of $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and $MC_USEKT_RESET_VALUE.

Note
The system variable $TC_TP11 was not evaluated in NCK up to now. The value is
automatically assigned 0. A check should be made in existing data records whether the values
included here are suitable.
The programming $P_USEKT = 0 means that all tools of the tool group are considered in the
tool selection.
The value $TC_TP11[t] = 0 means "the tool belongs to all defined tool groups". This ensures
compatibility with existing data records.
If working with the function T=location, $P_USEKT cannot be programmed.

Overview of the behavior for various settings:

The value from $MN_USEKT_RESET_VALUE is 8.
The values from $P_USEKT results in the following programs
1st program:
N10 $P_USEKT=2
N20 M00
N30 M02
M02
2nd program:
N100 R0=$P_USEKT

Setting of $MC_RE‐ Bit 0 = 0 Bit 0 = 1 Bit 0 = 0 Bit 0 = 1

SET_MODE_MASK Bit 20 = 0 Bit 20 = 0 Bit 20 = 1 Bit 20 = 1
Sequence of actions
After run-up 8 8 8 8
For "N20 M00" (after setting 2 2 2 2
P_USEKT)
After end of program 8 8 8 2
For "N100 M00" (after program start) 8 8 8 2

Bit coding makes it possible for a tool to belong to several tool subgroups. Maximum four
different tool subgroups can be implemented through the configuration of NCK; i.e. only bits
0, 1, 2, 3 are taken into account – not only during the programming of $P_USEKT, but also for
$TC_TP11. Tools with $TC_TP11[ t ] = 0 do not count as a tool subgroup.

Example
The tool group "Miller_25" comprises four tools.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 321
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

(The following applies: Tool_Change_Mode=1)

Miller_25 Duplo 1 T_No. 1 TP11=1

Miller_25 Duplo 2 T_No. 2 TP11=2
Miller_25 Duplo 3 T_No. 3 TP11=4
Miller_25 Duplo 4 T_No. 4 TP11=8
%MPF
…
T="Miller_25"

M06 Every tool in this group can be loaded, as no selection has been made.
The search strategy that has been set prevails.
…
$P_USEKT=2
…
T="Miller_25"
M06 "Miller_25", duplo 2 loaded at change
…
$P_USEKT=9
…
T="Miller_25"
M06 "Miller_25", duplo 1 or duplo 4 loaded at change (depending on the se‐
lected search strategy)
…
$P_USEKT=0
…
T="Miller_25"
M06 Every tool in this group can be loaded, as USEKT=0 has canceled the
selection. The search strategy that has been set prevails.
…
$P_USEKT=15
…
T="Miller_25"
M06 Every tool in this group can be loaded, as all bits are set. The search
strategy that has been set prevails.

T=location, automatic tool selection

First the attempt is made to load the tool from the programmed magazine location,
independently of the value in $TC_TP11. With the selection of the tool, the TP11 value of this
tool is taken into $P_USEKT and is considered as programmed. This means that only tools of
this subgroup can be selected.
However, if the tool on the programmed location is disabled, then the $TC_TP11 value of the
tool at the programmed magazine location is considered in order to access the replacement

Tool Management
322 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

tool. Only tools that have one of the bits of the disabled tool in $TC_TP11 can be replacement
tools.

5.8.36 TOOLGNT/TOOLGT - Tool groups

Comment
This function is only available for TMMO and TMMG.
The abbreviation TOOLGNT means: TOOLGroupNumberOfTools - number of tools of the
group.
The abbreviation TOOLGT means: TOOLGroupToolNumber - T no. of the i-th tool of tool group
with i = 1, ...TOOLNTG.
The language commands allow information to be obtained about the tools in the tool group.
TOOLGNT("identifier")
TOOLGT("identifier", i)

Result Result value

>0 Successful read access
0 i is a value outside of the permitted range
-1 Neither function TMMG nor function TMMO active
-2 No tool exists for the name "identifier"

The NCK defines the sequence of the tools in the tool group and this changes in the course
of the programmed tool change with tools from this group.
Example
The following tool is available "Drill_6mm"/Duplo_1, "Drill_6mm"/Duplo_2 and "Drill_6mm"/
Duplo_3.
The number of tools of the group "Drill_6mm" is read-out first.
R1=TOOLGNT("Drill_6mm") R1=3
The T number of this tool is then determined.
R11=TOOLGT("Drill_6mm,1)
R12=TOOLGT("Drill_6mm,2)
R13=TOOLGT("Drill_6mm,3)

5.8.37 $P_TMNOIS - is a number, T number, magazine number or MT number

This function is available with TMBF, TMFD, TMMO and TMMG.
Individual tools, magazines as well as multitools use the number range 1–32000 for numbering.
As a consequence, a distinction must be made as to what the number actually refers to. This
system parameter does this.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 323
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

def int result

def int no=4711
result = $P_TMNOIS[ no ] ; is no a T no., an MT no., or a magazine no.?;

Result Description
3 no is the number of a defined tool and the number of a defined magazine
2 no is the magazine number of a defined magazine
1 no is the T number of a defined tool
0 no is the MT number of a defined multitool
-3 Invalid number. no is neither the number of a tool, a magazine nor a multitool.
If the command is programmed in the TMFD function, then the result is also –3.
If no = 0 then the result is –3

5.8.38 $P_TOOLEXIST - define the existence of a tool

$P_TOOLEXIST is parameterized with the internal T number. Either true or false is returned.
If the T no. that returns a multitool is $P_TOOLEXIST=false, then the T no. that returns an
existing tool is
$P_TOOLEXIST=true. $P_TMNOIS can be used as an alternative.

Example of $P_TMNOIS / $P_TOOLEXIST

The two commands are each available in all function versions of the tool management. The
following still applies: The result value True from $P_TOOLEXIST is equivalent to the result
value 1 from $P_TMNOIS. Settings for the following examples:
N1 DEF INT no=2 ; Number to be checked
Example 1: A new tool is to be created (with a T number which is not identical to that of a
multitool or an already existing tool).
N5 if ( ( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 0 ) and
( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 1 ) )
N6 $TC_TP2[ no ] = "Tool_2" ; Create new tool
N7 endif
Example 2: A new MT is to be created (with a T number which is not identical to that of an
already existing multitool, or an already existing tool, or an already existing magazine):
N5 if ( ( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 0 ) and
( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 1 ) and
( $P_TMNOIS[ no ] != 2 ) )
N6 $TC_MTPN[ no ] = 5 ; Create new MT with five locations
N7 endif
Example 3: An explicit number is to be checked as to whether it belongs to a defined tool:
N5 if ( $P_TOOLEXIST[ no ] == true )
N6 $TC_TP9[ no ] = 1 ; Defines the type of tool monitoring
N7 endif

Tool Management
324 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.39 $A_TOOLMN - Read magazine No. of tool

Comment: TOOLMN stands for = "tool magazine number". The name component $A_TOOL
was selected to show the association with the existing system variables.

Name $A_TOOLMN[t]
Meaning Returns the magazine number of the tool with T no.=t. If the tool is not assigned
to a magazine, 0 is returned. If the tool management function is not active, -1 is
returned. If there is no tool with T no.=t, -2 is returned.
An alarm is issued if the value range for the T number was violated.
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
The index specifies the T number 1-32000
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
x - x -
Implicit prepro‐ x -
cessing stop

5.8.40 $P_MTOOLN / $P_MTOOLMT - determine the number of multitools /MT number

This function is available for TMMG.
The following system parameters can be used to obtain an overview of the multitools defined
in the TO unit assigned to the channel.
result = $P_MTOOLN Number of multitools known to the channel.
MultiTOOLNumberOf

Result Result value

>0 Number of defined multitools
0 No multitool defined
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
Example

def int number = 0

def int i = 0
def string[32] mtName
number = $P_MTOOLN
for i = 1 to number
r[i] = $P_MTOOLMT[i] ;write all MT numbers of the defined multitool :in con‐
secutive R parameters

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 325
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

endfor
mtName = $P_MTP2[$P_MTOOLMT[i]] ;write the name of the last multitool after mtName

5.8.41 $P_MTOOLNT / $P_MTOOLT - number of tools in the multitool

This function is available for TMMG.

Note
Also refer to the analog tool-specific system parameters $P_TOOLNT, $P_TOOLT.

The following system parameters can be used to obtain an overview of the multitools defined
in the TO unit assigned to the channel.
result = $P_MTOOLNT[mt] Number of tools in the multitool
mt = Multitool number
MultiTOOLNumber Of Tools
Result value

Result Result value

>0 Number of tools in the multitool
0 No tool contained in the multitool with the number mt
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
-3 mt is not the number of a defined multitool
result = $P_MTOOLT[mt , i] T number of the i–th tool in the multitool with
mt = Multitool number
i = i–th tool in the multitool; i = 1, ..., $P_MTOOLNT
MultiTOOLTnumber

Result Result value

>0 Number of the i-th tool in the multitool
0 i is a value outside of the permitted range
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
-3 mt is not the number of a defined multitool
Example
Multitool with number 500 has 6 locations. Three tools with the T numbers 11, 22 and 33 are
loaded to the locations 1, 2 and 5.

def int number = 0

def int i = 0
number = $P_MTOOLNT[500] ;the number of tools is 3
for i = 1 to number ;Loop over three tools and not over six MT locations

Tool Management
326 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

r[i] = $P_MTOOLT [500, i] ;Write the T numbers of the loaded tools to successive R
parameters
;r1=11, r1=22, r3=33
endfor

5.8.42 $A_TOOLMLN - Read magazine location No. of tool

Comment
TOOLMLN stands for = "toolmagazine location number".

Name $A_TOOLMLN[t]
Meaning Returns the magazine location number of the tool with T no.=t. If the tool is not
assigned to a magazine, 0 is returned. If the tool management function is not
active, -1 is returned. If there is no tool with T no.=t, -2 is returned.
An alarm is issued if the value range for the T number was violated.
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
The index specifies the T number 1-32000
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
x - x -
Implicit prepro‐ x -
cessing stop

Comment: It is not possible that the following applies $A_TOOLMLN[t]==0 and

$A_TOOLMN[t]>0, or $A_TOOLMLN[t]>0 and $A_TOOLMN[t]==0.

5.8.43 $P_TOOLND - Read number of cutting edges for tool

Comment
TOOLND stands for = "tool number of Ds".

Name $P_TOOLND[t]
Meaning Returns the number of cutting edges for tool with T no.=t. A tool always has at
least one cutting edge.
Default: If there is no tool with T no.=t, -1 is returned.
The value 0 is rejected as index error.
Data type INT
Value range Standard: -1, 1 - 9
"Flat D number" function: -1, 1 - "Machine data value for the maximum number of
D numbers"

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 327
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_TOOLND[t]
Indices Meaning Value range
The index specifies the T number 1-32000
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
x - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - -
cessing stop

Function "flat D numbers" (only without active tool management)

If the function "flat D numbers" is active, the behavior differs somewhat. With parameter t=1
the total number of offset data records of the TOA unit is returned. Other values for t return -1.
If no offset data record is defined in the TOA unit, -1 is returned.

5.8.44 $A_MONIFACT - Factor for reading tool life monitoring

Overview
If different tool materials are to be machined with the same tool, it may be necessary to increase
or reduce the time intervals for monitoring in order to detect the varying degrees of tool wear.
The factor is set accordingly before the tool is used. The write operation is performed
synchronously with the main run.
A channel-specific parameter, used to multiply the actual time measurement, has been
defined.
Setting a value = 0 deactivates the time monitoring function for all tools used on the channel
via the part program.

Name $A_MONIFACT
Meaning Only relevant when time monitoring is active in the tool management.
Factor for influencing the time measurement for tracking time for time-monitored
tools.
Values < 1 and > 0 slow down time measurement (the clock "runs slower").
Values > 1 speed up the time measurement (clock "runs faster"). Value 1 is active
after the control has been powered up, after Reset and M30 (default) and corre‐
sponds to real time. Value 0 is also permitted and disables time measurement of
all time-monitored tools that are operated on a time-monitored spindle on this
channel.
Comment: You can get the monitoring time to "run backwards" by using negative
values.
Data type REAL
Value range Value range of type REAL
Indices Meaning Value range
-

Tool Management
328 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $A_MONIFACT
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
x x x x
Implicit prepro‐ - x
cessing stop

Tool life counter on monitor

If system variable $A_MONIFACT is set accordingly, the tool life counter on the monitor can
run at a speed other than real time. The time values of the OPI block TS are thereby converted
at the interface. In the NCK, the values are retained as before. These values are real-time
values.
Reading the OPI:
The time values are divided by the current value of $A_MONIFACT and transferred.
Writing the OPI:
The time values output by the OPI are multiplied by the current value of $A_MONIFACT and
stored in the NCK.

Example
The actual values are specified (units in real time, i.e. normalized to $A_MONIFACT = 1).
Setpoint tool life: 10 minutes
Actual tool life: 2 minutes - in one minute, the pre-warning limit is reached
Prewarning limit: 1 minute
The values 10, 2, 1 are displayed on the screen.
$A_MONIFACT = 2 is programmed in the part program (clock runs faster). The actual tool life
displayed on the monitor jumps and continues to run in real time. The setpoint tool life and
prewarning limit displayed also jump as soon as $A_MONIFACT = 2 takes effect.
Setpoint tool life: 5 minutes
Actual tool life: 1 Minute - in half a minute the prewarning limit is reached
Prewarning limit: 0.5 minutes

5.8.45 $AC_MONMIN - Factor for tool search

General
The following is defined by the variable $AC_MOMIN:
Only consider those tools whose actual value is at least a factor $AC_MONMIN (0, ...1) of the
setpoint away from the limiting value.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 329
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Definition of lowest/highest actual value

Absolute lowest/highest actual values are, in accordance with the tool-search strategy "Search
for the tool with the lowest/highest actual value" used for the tool search exactly then when all
tools of a tool group have the same monitoring type defined (via $TC_TP9).
This means all tools of the tool group are either time-monitored or count-monitored, or are
wear or alternatively additive offset monitored.
Relative lowest/highest actual values are, in accordance with the tool-search strategies
"Search for the tool with the lowest/highest actual value" used for the tool search exactly then
when the tools of a tool group have different monitoring types defined in $TC_TP9.
This means one tool can be time-monitored, the other tool can be count-monitored. A third tool
could be both wear as well as time-monitored.

Lowest/highest actual value for exactly one monitoring type

This is the standard application.
Each lowest/highest actual value here of the monitored variable ($TC_MOP2, $TC_MOP4,
$TC_MOP6 for time, count, wear or additive offset) corresponds to lowest/highest actual value
of the tools in the tool group.
Example:
A tool group "Tool1" is defined. For example, $TC_MAMP2="H108" applies - lowest actual
value:

Duplo no. Actual value Setpoint Absolute

$TC_TP1 $TC_MOP2 $TC_MOP11 Lowest actual value = $TC_MOP2
1 9 10 9
2 8 10 8
3 6 6 6 lowest actual value in the tool group

Therefore the order of tools for use is: Duplo no.= 3 → 2 → 1.

Lowest/highest actual value with several parallel monitoring types

Tools in a tool group can be monitored in different ways.
Or different types of tool monitoring can be defined for a tool. These situations are detected
by the NCK and handled accordingly:
The definition of the lowest/highest actual value is determined for these cases by the quotient
of dividing actual value and setpoint; i.e.
Quotient (Q)= actual value / setpoint
The tool with the lowest quotient has the lowest actual value of the tools in the tool group.
The tool with the highest quotient has the highest actual value of the tools in the tool group.
Example 1:
Tool group "millers" has two tools with T Nos. =1 and 2 each with a cutting edge D1.
Time monitoring is active for T1; $TC_TP9[1]=1.

Tool Management
330 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Workpiece count monitoring is active for T2; $TC_TP9[2]=2.

Q(T1) = $TC_MOP2[1,1] / $TC_MOP11[1,1] = 0.5
Q(T2) = $TC_MOP4[2,1] / $TC_MOP13[2,1] = 0.9
Therefore, T1 has the lower actual value.
Example 2:
A tool group "Tool1" is defined. For example, $TC_MAMP2="H108" applies - lowest actual
value:

Duplo no. Actual value Setpoint Absolute

$TC_TP1 $TC_MOP2 $TC_MOP11 Lowest actual value = $TC_MOP2
1 9 10 0.9
2 8 10 0.8 lowest actual value
3 6 6 1

Therefore the order of tools for use is: Duplo no.=2 → 1 → 3.

$AC_MONMIN
The above definition of the actual value applies for the actual value that is checked against
the setpoint where a factor of $AC_MONMIN has been applied.
The following check is made for the absolute actual-value comparison (time monitoring taken
here as the example):
$TC_MOP2 = $AC_MONMIN * $TC_MOP11.
This is the criterion for the usability of the tool.
The following check is made for the relative actual value comparison (time monitoring taken
here as the example):
$TC_MOP2 / $TC_MOP11 = $AC_MONMIN
This is the criterion for the usability of the tool.
The result is the same in each case.

Note
The lowest of the actual values (both absolute as well as relative) of the cutting edges of a tool
is used for the comparison with the actual values of other tools.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 331
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $AC_MONMIN
Meaning Only when tool management is active
Gives the factor for the tool-search strategy "Only consider those tools whose
actual value is at least a factor $AC_MONMIN* of the setpoint away from the lim‐
iting value".
The programmed value is ignored if the tool status "disabled" shall be ignored
during the tool search. This can be initiated either by the command TCA, PLC
signal or machine data for start/reset.
See also the system variables $TC_MOPx, $TC_MAMP2.
Data type REAL
Value range 0-1
Indices Meaning Value range

Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X X X
Implicit prepro‐ - X -
cessing stop

Boundary conditions
If different types of tool monitoring are selected for the tools of a tool group, then the decision
has to be made whether it is meaningful for the specific application to use the tool-search
strategy "Search tool with lowest or highest actual value" in this tool group.
Similar conditions apply when working with multiple-edge tools. Also, it is necessary to consider
whether it is meaningful to apply the tool search strategy "Search tool with lowest or highest
actual value" in this tool group.

Note
As for the other tool search strategies, that tool is preferred for use that is on the spindle or in
one of the assigned buffer at the time of the tool search; i.e. the tool search strategy is not
applied.
The PLC signal "Do not disable tool" renders the tool search strategy ineffective in accordance
with $AC_MONMIN.

Activation
The following must apply so that the tool-monitoring-specific tool search strategies can be
effective:
● The sub-function "Tool-monitoring function" must be active within the tool management
function
● The appropriate monitoring parameter values ($TC_MOP1, ....) must have been set for the
cutting edges of the tools

Tool Management
332 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

● The monitoring must be activated for the appropriate tool (system variable $TC_TP9)
● $AC_MONMIN can be programmed in the part program as well. The programmed value is
only meaningful if points 1, 2, and 3 are met.

5.8.46 $P_TOOLNG - Number of tool groups

This function is only available for TMMO and TMMG.

Name $P_TOOLNG
Meaning Number of defined tool groups that are assigned to the channel.
> 0: Successful read access
0: No tool group defined
(tool group is defined by writing the tool name)
-1: Neither function TMMG nor TMMO active
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range

Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

5.8.47 $A_MYMN / $A_MYMLN - Owner magazine/location of the tool

This function is available for TMMG.
System variables $A_TOOLMN and $A_TOOLMLN contain definitions which magazine/
magazine location the specified tool is currently located at. This can be a real or an internal
magazine.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 333
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

The system variables $A_MYMN and $A_MYMLN indicate the magazine/magazine location
(real magazine only), at which the specified tool was loaded or from which a tool contained in
an internal magazine was loaded.

Name $A_MYMN[t] / $A_MYMLN[t]

Meaning Use:
$A_MYMN[t] - number of the owner magazine of the tool with the T no. = t
> 0: Tool is loaded
0: Tool is not loaded
-1: Function TMMG is not active
-2: Tool with the T no. = t does not exist - not for t = 0 either
$A_MYMLN[t] - number of the owner-magazine location of the tool with the T no.
=t
> 0: Tool is loaded
0: Tool is not loaded
-1: Function TMMG is not active
-2: Tool with the T no. = t does not exist - not for t = 0 either
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range

Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - X -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

1. The following applies for tools that are not loaded:

$A_MYMN = $A_MYMLN = $A_TOOLMN = $A_TOOLMLN = 0
2. The following applies for manual tools that were loaded or for tools newly loaded on tool
holders:
$A_MYMN = $A_MYMLN = 0
$A_TOOLMN 1 = 0, $A_TOOLMLN 1 = 0
3. The following applies for tools that have been loaded but are not in an internal magazine:
$A_MYMN = $A_TOOLMN > 0
$A_MYMLN = $A_TOOLMLN >0
For fixed-location-coded tools in buffers, the two parameters indicate where the respective
tool shall be brought when returning to the magazine.

5.8.48 $A_MYMTN / $A_MYMTLN - $A_TOOLMTN / $A_TOOLMTLN - tools in the

multitool
In addition to the already defined parameters $A_MYMN / $A_MYMLN and $A_TOOLMN /
$A_TOOLMLN parameters
$A_MYMTN / $A_MYMTLN - or with the same contents $A_TOOLMTN / $A_TOOLMTLN -
specify in which MT and at which location in the MT the tool is located.

Tool Management
334 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

The following applies:

$A_MYMTN = $A_TOOLMTLN
and
$A_MYMTLN = $A_TOOLMTLN.
This therefore states that the tool remains permanently in the MT.
result = $A_MYMTN [t] Tool Tno. t = 1, ..., 32000
MYMultiToolNumber
result = $A_TOOLMTN [t] Tool Tno. t = 1, ..., 32000
TOOLisOnMultiToolNumber

Result Result value

>0 The tool with the T number t is on the multitool with the result number
0 The tool with Tno.= t is not in a multitool
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
-3 Is not a tool T no. (outside of range, not defined, or it is an MT no. or a magazine no.)
result = $A_MYMTLN [t] Tool Tno. t = 1, ..., 32000
MYMultiToolLocationNumber
result = $A_TOOLMTLN [t] Tool Tno. t = 1, ..., 32000
TOOLisOnMultiToolLocationNumber

Result Result value

>0 The tool with the T number t is on the location with the result number within a multitool
0 The tool with Tno.= t is not in a multitool
-1 TMMG function not active
-2 Multitool function not active
-3 Is not a tool T no. (outside of range, not defined, or it is an MT no. or a magazine no.)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 335
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.49 $P_TOOLNT / $P_TOOLT - T numbers

This function is available for TMMO, TMMG, TMFD and TMBF.

Name $P_TOOLNT / $P_TOOLT[i]

Meaning These system variables enables an overview of the tools defined in NCK.
$P_TOOLNT
Number of defined tools that are assigned to the channel.
> 0:Successful read access
0: No tool defined
$P_TOOLT[i]
i-th tool number T
> 0: T number
0: i is a value outside of the permitted range
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
N = number of tools that are assigned to the channel
i = i-th T no.; i=1, ..., $P_TOOLNT
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

The following applies specifically for TMFD:

$P_TOOLNT returns value 1 provided D offsets have been defined and returns value 0 when
there are no D offsets.
The system variable $P_TOOLT returns value 1 for index i = 1 if at least one D offset has been
defined and returns value 0 for other values of i.

5.8.50 $P_TOOLD - D numbers

This function is available for TMMO, TMMG, TMFD and TMBF.

Name $P_TOOLND / $P_TOOLD[t,i]

Meaning Determine the defined D numbers of a tool. The command can generally be pro‐
grammed.
i-th number of tool compensations D of the tool with the T no. = t
> 0: D number
0: i is a value outside of the permitted range
-2: t is the value of a non-defined tool
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range

Tool Management
336 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_TOOLND / $P_TOOLD[t,i]

t = T number
i = i-th T no.; i=1, ..., $P_TOOLND
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

5.8.51 $P_TOOLNDL - Number of defined DL offsets

This function is available for TMMO, TMMG, TMFD and TMBF. The function "additive offset"
must have been activated via MD.

Name $P_TOOLNDL[t,d]
Meaning Determine the number of defined DL numbers of a D offset. The command can gener‐
ally be programmed.
Number of DL offsets for D offset provided by T no. = t, D no. = d
> 0: Number of DL offsets
0: No DL offsets for this D offset
-1: Additive offset function not active
-2: t is the value of a non-defined tool
-3: d is the value of a non-defined D offset
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
t = T number
d = D number
Access Read in part program Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit pre‐ - - -
processing
stop

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 337
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.52 $A_USEDND - Workpiece counting

This function is available for TMMO.

Name $A_USEDND[s]
Meaning Number of different cutting edges used on tool holder s since the last workpiece
count including the currently used active cutting edge on s. Each tool used is in‐
cluded at least once. Index s means:
TMMG + TMMO
Spindle number / tool holder number
s = 0 means that the currently active master tool holder is selected.
TMMO active without TMMG
a) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE: s is not evaluated. It is not
possible to count the workpieces separately according to tool holders.
b) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE: Spindle number. s = 0 means
that the currently active master spindle is selected.
> 0: Number of cutting edges used
0: No more tools used since the last workpiece count
-1: TMMO is not active
-2: s is the value of a non-defined tool holder
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
s = 1, ...., MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN
s = 0 indicates the master tool holder
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "$A_USEDT - Workpiece counting (Page 339)".

Tool Management
338 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.53 $A_USEDT - Workpiece counting

Overview
This function is available for TMMO.

Name $A_USEDT[i,s]
Meaning T number of the tool of the i-th cutting edge that has been used on tool holder s
since the last workpiece count or is still being used.
Example: For i=$A_USEDND, the T number of the first cutting edge or D offset is
obtained, which was selected on the programmed tool holder s since the last work‐
piece count. Index s means:
TMMG + TMMO
Spindle number / tool holder number
s = 0 means that the currently active master tool holder is selected.
TMMO active without TMMG
a) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE: s is not evaluated. It is not
possible to count the workpieces separately according to tool holders.
b) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE: Spindle number. s = 0 means
that the currently active master spindle is selected.
>0: T number (can also exist multiple times if different D offsets of the tool were in
use)
0: No more cutting edges used since the last workpiece count
-1: TMMO is not active
-2: s is the value of a non-defined tool holder
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
S = 1, ...., MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN
I = 1, ...., $A_USEDND
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example
Two tool holders are defined with numbers 1 and 2. Tool holder no. 1 is the master tool holder.
On tool holder 1, previously three tools with T numbers 10, 20, 30 were used; on tool holder
2, one tool was used with T number 666. Each tool only has offset D1 defined.
The following program section is run in the status:

def int n1, n2, i, tNo

n1 = $A_USEDND[1] ;n1 = 3 same content would have been
$A_USEDND[0]
n2 = $A_USEDND[2] ;n2 = 1

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 339
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

for i = 1 to n1
tNo = $A_USEDT[1,i]
MSG ("T no. participating in workpiece machining =" << tNo
endfor
;The loop displays T numbers 10, 20, 30
T2=0 ;Bits 7, 8, 19 are set for synchronization
in $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK. (Automatic
read-in disable until tool change is
acknowledged with "End".)
setpiece(5,2)
if (n2 == 1) tNo = $A_USEDT[1,1]
;Sets tNo to value 0. Setpiece was
programmed since determination of n2. This
deletes the list of tools used and there is
currently no entry for the specified Index1
in the list of tools used.

5.8.54 $A_USEDD - Workpiece count

This function is available for TMMO.

Name $A_USEDD[i,s]
Meaning D number of the i-th cutting edge that has been used on the tool holder s since the
last workpiece count or is still being used.
Example: For i=$A_USEDND, the D number is obtained for the first cutting edge
or D offset that was selected after the last workpiece count on the programmed
tool holder. Index s means:
TMMG + TMMO
Spindle number / tool holder number
s = 0 means that the currently active master tool holder is selected.
TMMO active without TMMG
a) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE: s is not evaluated. It is not
possible to count the workpieces separately according to tool holders.
b) $MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE: Spindle number. s = 0 means
that the currently active master spindle is selected.
>0: D number
0: No more tools used since the last workpiece count
-1: TMMO is not active
-2: s is the value of a non-defined tool holder
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
S = 1, ...., MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN
I = 1, ...., $A_USEDND

Tool Management
340 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $A_USEDD[i,s]
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

5.8.55 $P_MAGN / $P_MAG - Magazine

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGN / $P_MAG[i]

Meaning $P_MAGN
Number of defined magazines that are assigned to the channel.
> 0: Successful read access
0: No magazine defined
-1:TMMG is not active
$P_MAG
i-th magazine number
> 0: Successful read access
0: i is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
i = 1, ...., $P_MAGN
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "Example of magazine configuration system variables (Page 345)".

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 341
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.56 $P_MAGNDIS / $P_MAGDISS / $P_MAGDISL - magazine distance tables

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNDIS[n,m] / $P_MAGDISS[l,i] / $P_MAGDISL[l,i]

Meaning $P_MAGNDIS[n,m]
Number of magazines that are linked to the internal magazine n by the location m
> 0: Successful read access
0: No magazine linked with the buffer
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: n is not the number of an internal magazine
-3: m is not the number of an internal magazine location
$P_MAGDISS[l,i]
Number of the i-th magazine that is linked with location l of the buffer magazine.
> 0: Successful read access
0: i is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: m is not the number of a buffer location
-3: No buffer location defined
$P_MAGDISL[l,i]
Number of the i-th magazine that is linked with location l of the loading magazine.
> 0: Successful read access
0: i is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: m is not the number of a loading magazine location
-3: No buffer location defined
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
i = 1, ...., $P_MAGNDIS
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "Example of magazine configuration system variables (Page 345)".

Tool Management
342 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.57 $P_MAGNS / $P_MAGS - Toolholder

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNS / $P_MAGS[n]

Meaning $P_MAGNS
Number of spindle locations / tool holder locations in the buffer assigned to the
channel.
> 0: Successful read access
0: no spindle location defined
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: No buffer magazine defined
$P_MAGS[n]
n-th number of the spindle / tool holder in the buffer
> 0: Successful read access
0: n is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
-3: No buffer magazine defined
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
n = 1, ...., max. tool holder number
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "Example of magazine configuration system variables (Page 345)".

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 343
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.58 $P_MAGNREL / $P_MAGREL - Assigned buffer

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNREL[n] / $P_MAGREL[n,m]

Meaning $P_MAGNREL[n]
Number of buffers assigned to the spindle no. / tool holder no.
> 0: Successful read access
0: Spindle location has not been assigned buffer location
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: n is not the number of a spindle location
-3: No buffer magazine defined
$P_MAGREL[n,m]
m-th buffer number of the n-th spindle no. / tool holder no.
> 0: Successful read access
0: m is outside of the permitted range
-1: TMMG is not active
-2: n is not the number of a spindle location
-3: No buffer magazine defined
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
m = 1, ...., $P_MAGNREL
n = 1, ...., max. tool holder number
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example, see "Example of magazine configuration system variables (Page 345)".

Tool Management
344 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.59 Example of magazine configuration system variables

Specifications
The magazine configuration selected in the following example is selected. Information about
the current magazine configuration can be obtained by reading the system variables described
here.


 



,QVWLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH ,QQGLQWHUQDOPDJD]LQH
ORDGLQJPDJD]LQH EXIIHU
 
0DJD]LQH
7&B0'3>@ 
7&B0$3>@ 

 *ULSSHU
/RFDWLRQ
/RDGLQJSRLQW
 &KDQJHSRVLWLRQ
/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ 
/RFDWLRQ 7&B0/65>@ 

7&B0'3>@  

 7&B0'3>@ 
 6SLQGOH
/RFDWLRQ

7&B0'3>@ 

7&B0'3>@  

/RDGLQJVWDWLRQ
/RFDWLRQ  /RDGLQJSRLQW  7&B0/65>@ 
&KDQJHSRVLWLRQ
*ULSSHU
  /RFDWLRQ

0DJD]LQH 7&B0'3>@ 
 7&B0$3>@ 


 





 LVWKHPDJD]LQH]HURSRLQW

Image 5-10 Magazine configuration

N10 def int noOfMag=0, noOfLoc=0, noOfDist=0, noOfRel=0,

noOfSpindles=0, spindleNo=0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 345
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

N20 def int i=0

; Total number of defined magazines

N100 noOfMag = $P_MAGN ;noOfMag is assigned value =4 - 2 real

magazines
;1, 2+2 internal magazines 9998, 9999
; Display all magazine numbers

N200 for i=1 to noOfMag

N220 MDG ("Magazine no.="<<$P_MAG[i])
;Display numbers 1, 2, 9998, 9999
N240 endfor
; Total number of defined magazine locations

N300 for i=1 to noOfMag

N320 noOfLoc=noOfLoc + $TC_MAP7[$P_MAG[i]]
N340 endfor ;noOfLoc now contains value 16+16+3+2=37
; Number of magazines linked with Spindle 1

N400 noOfDist=$P_MAGNDIS[9998,3]
;; noOfDist is assigned value=2 - Mag.1, 2 are linked with
the spindle location
; Display the magazine numbers linked with Spindle 1 (=location 3)

N500 for i=1 to noOfDist

N520 MSG ("Magazine no.=" << $P_MAGDISS[ i ] )
;Display numbers 1, 2
N540 endfor
; Number of magazines linked with Loading station 2

N410 noOfDist = $P_MAGNDIS[9999,1]

;noOfDist is assigned value=1 - Mag. 2 is
linked with loading station 2
; Display the magazine numbers linked with loading station 2 (=location 1)

N510 for i=1 to noOfDist

N530 MSG ("Magazine no.="<< $P_MAGDISL[i] )
;Display number 2
N550 endfor
; Total number of defined spindles

N600 noOfSpindles= ;noOfSpindles contains value = 1

$P_MAGNS ;- one spindle location is defined

Tool Management
346 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

; Display the numbers of the spindles defined in the magazine configuration

N620 for i=1 to noOfSpindles

N640 MSG ("Magazine no.="<< $P_MAGS[i])
;Display number 1
N660 endfor
: Total number of buffer locations assigned to spindle 1
(=gripper in example)

N700 noOfRel=$P_MAGNREL[1]
;noOfRel contains value=2, grippers 1 and
2 are assigned to the spindle
; Display the numbers of the grippers of spindle no. 1 defined in the magazine configuration

N720 for i=1 to noOfRel

N740 MSG ("Magazine no.="<< $P_MAGREL[1,i] )
;Display numbers 1, 2
N760 endfor

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 347
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

5.8.60 $P_MAGNH / $P_MAGNHLT / $P_MAGHLT - Location type hierarchies

Overview
This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNH / $P_MAGNHLT[n] / $P_MAGHLTn,m]

Meaning $P_MAGNH
Number of defined magazine location type hierarchies that are assigned to the
channel.
> 0 Successful read access
0 No location type hierarchies are defined
-1 TMMG is not active
$P_MAGNHLT[n]
Number of the defined location types in the n-the defined hierarchy
> 0 Successful read access
0 n is outside of the defined range
-1 TMMG is not active
$P_MAGHLTn,m]
m-th location type of hierarchy n
> 0 Successful read access
0 m is outside of the defined range
-1 TMMG is not active
-2 Hierarchy n does not have any defined location types
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
n = 1, ...., $P_MAGNH
m = 1, ...., $P_MAGNHLT
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Example
The following three hierarchies are defined:
Hierarchy 1: 5 < 4 < 3:
$TC_MPTH[0,0] = 5
$TC_MPTH[0,1] = 4
$TC_MPTH[0,2] = 3
Hierarchy 2: 7 < 8:
$TC_MPTH[1,0] = 7

Tool Management
348 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

$TC_MPTH[1,1] = 8
Hierarchy 3: 1 < 2 < 9 < 6:
$TC_MPTH[2,0] = 1
$TC_MPTH[2,1] = 2
$TC_MPTH[2,2] = 9
$TC_MPTH[2,3] = 6
We want to know how many hierarchies in total are defined and how many magazine location
types are contained in each hierarchy.

N10 def int noOfH, noOfTypes[8], locTypeNo

N100 noOfH=$P_MAGNH ;noOfH is assigned value = 3
N220 for i=1 to noOfH
N240 noOfTypes[i - 1]=$P_MAGNHLT[ i ]
;Set the values 3, 2, 4 in the
array
N260 endfor
We also want to know which magazine location types are defined in the 2nd hierarchy

N220 for i=1 to noOfTypes[1]

N240 MSG ("Magazine no.="<<$P_MAGHLT[2, i])
;Display values 7, 8
N260 endfor

5.8.61 $P_MAGNA / $P_MAGA - Tool adapter

This function is available for TMMG.

Name $P_MAGNA / $P_MAGA[i]

Meaning $P_MAGNA
Number of defined adapters that are assigned to the channel.
> 0 Successful read access
0 No adapter defined
-1 Function "Adapter" or TMMG is not active
$P_MAGA[i]
i-th adapter number
> 0 Successful read access
0 n is outside of the defined range
-1 Function "Adapter" or TMMG is not active
Data type INT
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 349
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_MAGNA / $P_MAGA[i]

i = 1, ...., $P_MAGNA
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

5.8.62 Additional language commands

Name $P_TOOLNO
Meaning Active tool numbers T0 to T32000, with TMFD, T can have eight digits. Generally,
the command should not be used when magazine management is active. When
magazine management is active GETTEXET should be used instead. For
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=0, the incorrect T number can be determined.
If the programming was implemented after programming D > 0, then it is also
reliable
Data type Integer
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TOOLP
Meaning Tool number last programmed
Command is available for TMBF, TMFD and TMMO.
It is analogous to the TMMG-specific command GETSELT.
Data type Integer
Value range 1-32000
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TOOL
Meaning Active tool cutting edge (Dx)
Data type Integer
Value range

Tool Management
350 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_TOOL
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_DLNO
Meaning Active additive offset number DL=0-DL=max;
max=value of $MN_MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
$P_DLNO is analogous to the already existing parameters $P_TOOL,
$P_TOOLNP and active D and T numbers.
Data type Integer
Value range 0-6
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TOOLL[n]
Meaning Active tool total length; n = 1...3
Data type REAL
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TOOLR
Meaning Active radius
Data type REAL
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 351
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_TC
Meaning Active tool holder
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TCANG[n]
Meaning Active angle of a tool holder axis; n = 1-2
Data type REAL
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TCDIFF[n]
Meaning Difference between calculated and used angle of a tool holder axis for grid (Hirth
tooth system) of the angle
Data type REAL
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Tool Management
352 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_AD[n]
Meaning Active tool offset; n = 1...31
n=1-25 $TC_DP1 to $TC_DP25
n=26 $TC_DPCE (optional)
n=27 $TC_DPH (optional)
n=28 $TC_DPV (optional)
n=29 $TC_DPV3 (optional)
n=30 $TC_DPV4 (optional)
n=31 $TC_DPV5 (optional)
Data type DOUBLE
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_ADT[n]
Meaning $P_ADT[n] - Transformed data of the active tool
When compensation parameters are read, this parameter returns transformed val‐
ues of the parameters controlled by the tool adapter transformation - if the active
tool is attached to an adapter.
n=1-25 $TC_DP1 to $TC_DP25
n=26 $TC_DPCE (optional)
n=27 $TC_DPH (optional)
n=28 $TC_DPV (optional)
n=29 $TC_DPV3 (optional)
n=30 $TC_DPV4 (optional)
n=31 $TC_DPV5 (optional)
Data type DOUBLE
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
n: Parameter numbers 1 to 31
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 353
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $AC_MSNUM
Meaning Master spindle, return value
0: No spindle configured
1...n: Number of master spindle
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - X -
Implicit prepro‐ X - -
cessing stop

Name $P_MSNUM
Meaning Master spindle
0: No spindle configured
1...n: Number of master spindle
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - -
cessing stop

Name $AC_MTHNUM
Meaning Master tool holder
Value=0 no master tool holder defined
Value>0 number of the master tool holder
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - X -
Implicit prepro‐ X - X -
cessing stop

Tool Management
354 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_MTHNUM
Meaning Master tool holder
Value=0 no master tool holder defined
Value>0 number of the master tool holder
Data type Integer
Value range
Indices Meaning Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_TP_MAX_VELO
Meaning Maximum tool speed
Data type REAL
Value range [0, DBL_MAX]
Indices Internal T number Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_TP_MAX_ACC
Meaning Maximum rotary acceleration of the tool
Data type REAL
Value range [0, DBL_MAX]
Indices Internal T number Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X X - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $TC_MPP_SP_MAX_ACC
Meaning Only relevant, if $MC_TOOLHOLDER_MANAGEMENT>0: Spindle no. which is
linked to the tool holder.
Data type Integer
Value range [0, MAXNUM_SPIND_PER_CHAN]
Indices Magazine no., magazine location no. Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Write in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 355
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $TC_MPP_SP_MAX_ACC
X X - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_MTHSDC
Meaning Master tool holder no. or master spindle no. is determined with reference to the
active tool for the next D offset selection.
> 0 Successful read access
0 No master tool holder or no master spindle available.
The next D offset works with T0.
-1 TMMG not available
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN]
Indices Magazine no., magazine location no. Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_TH_OF_D
Meaning Tool holder or spindle on which the active tool is located that contains the active
D offset.
> 0 Successful read access
0 No tool holder or spindle available as reference because, for example, no D offset
is active.
-1 Function is not available because TMFD is active.
If read as OPI variable, this applies for the state in the current main run block.
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN]
Indices Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Tool Management
356 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH
Meaning Master tool holder or master spindle before the block search or the test mode was
started.
>0: Successful read access
0: No tool holder or spindle available as reference because, for example, no D
offset is active.
-1: Function is not available because TMFD is active.
If the block search or test mode is completed, this variable contains the same value
as $P_MTHNUM, as of the next D programming.
If read as OPI variable, this applies for the state in the current main run block.
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, MAXNUM_AXES_PER_CHAN]
Indices Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Name $P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH
Meaning The active D offset before the block search or the test mode was started.
>0: Successful read access
0: No tool holder or spindle available as reference because, for example, no D
offset was or is active.
-1: Function is not available because TMFD is active.
If the block search or test mode is completed, this variable contains the same value
as $P_TOOL, as of the next D programming.
If read as OPI variable, this applies for the state in the current main run block.
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, 32000]
Indices Value range
Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchron‐ Write in synchron‐
gram gram ized action ized action
X - - -
Implicit prepro‐ - - - -
cessing stop

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 357
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Name $P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH
Meaning The active DL offset before the block search or the test mode was started.
>0: Successful read access
0: No tool holder or spindle available as reference because, for example, no D offset was or is active.
-1: Function is not available because TMFD is active.
If the block search or test mode is completed, this variable contains the same value as $P_DLNO,
as of the next D or DL programming.
If read as OPI variable, this applies for the state in the current main run block.
Data type Integer
Value range [-1, 6]
Indices Value range
Access Read in part program Write in part program Read in synchronized Write in synchronized
action action
X - - -
Implicit preprocessing - - - -
stop

5.8.63 Variables for subroutine replacement technique

Tool management language Functions

command
$C_T Value of the programmed address T for cycle parameterization and T
function replacement
$C_T_PROG Address T is programmed in a block with cycle call of T function re‐
placement
$C_TS For T or TCA replacement, supplies the programmed tool identifier
($C_TS_PROG == TRUE).
$C_TS_PROG Supplies TRUE, if a tool identifier has been programmed for the T or
TCA replacement.
$C_TE Address extension for address T for subprogram call per T function
$C_D Value of the programmed address D in the ISO mode for cycle param‐
eterization
$C_D_PROG Address is programmed in a block with cycle call
$C_DL Value of the programmed address DL (additive tool offset) for a subpro‐
gram call per M/T function replacement
$C_DL_PROG Queries whether, for a subprogram call per M/T function replacement,
address DL (additive tool offset) was programmed
$C_TCA Supplies TRUE, if the TCA replacement is active
$C_DUPLO_PROG Supplies TRUE, if the duplo number for the TCA replacement has been
programmed
$C_DUPLO Supplies the value of the programmed Duplo number for TCA replace‐
ment ($C_DUPLO_PROG == TRUE)

Tool Management
358 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Tool management language Functions

command
$C_THNO_PROG Supplies TRUE, if the tool holder / spindle number for the TCA replace‐
ment has been programmed
$C_THNO Supplies the value of the programmed tool holder / spindle number for
TCA replacement ($C_THNO_PROG == TRUE)

5.8.64 Variables for tool change in synchronized action

Tool management lan‐ Functions

guage command
$AC_TC_FCT Command number
-1: At the instant of reading, no tool management command is active
1: Move (load, unload,...)
2: Prepare change
3: Change ON
4: Change ON (turret, without M06)
5: Prepare change and change ON (with M06)
$AC_TC_STATUS Acknowledgement status of PLC FC8/FC6
$AC_TC_THNO Number of the tool holder or the spindle where the new tool shall be loaded
$AC_TC_TNO The internal T number of the tool to be loaded at change
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_MFN Source magazine number of the new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_LFN Source location number of the new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_MTN Target magazine number of new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_LTN Target location number of the new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_MMYN Owner magazine of new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_LMYN Owner location magazine of new tool
0: There is no new tool
$AC_TC_MFO Source magazine number of the old tool
0: There is no old tool
$AC_TC_LFO Source location number of the old tool
0: There is no old tool
$AC_TC_MTO Target magazine number of old tool
0: There is no old tool
$AC_TC_LTO Target location number of the old tool
0: There is no old tool

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 359
Programming
5.8 NC language commands

Tool management lan‐ Functions

guage command
$AC_TC_CMDT Trigger variable to NCK command output
Set for one interpolation cycle when NCK outputs a new command.
$AC_TC_CMDC Counter for NCK command output
This variable is incremented by 1 at each NCK command output. Can
also be written (zero setting).
$AC_TC_ACKT Trigger variable to PLC command
Set for one interpolation cycle when PLC outputs a command to NCK.
Command acknowledgement or independent message (asynchronous
transfer).
$AC_TC_ACKC Counter for PLC commands
This variable is incremented by 1 at each PLC command. Can also be
written (zero setting).

Access Read in part pro‐ Write in part pro‐ Read in synchro‐ Read in synchro‐
gram gram nous action nous action
X - X -
Implicit prepro‐ X -
cessing stop

Tool Management
360 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.9 Definitions when programming data

5.9 Definitions when programming data

5.9.1 Tool and cutting edge data

Overview
If a parameter for a cutting edge, tool or magazine that does not exist is written, a new cutting
edge, tool or magazine is created.

Note
When a tool is created, all the cutting-edge-specific data of cutting edge D1 are created with
it. (DP, DPC, MOP, MOPC are preset to "0".) The grinding-specific tool data ($TC_TG1...) is
not created until one of the tool types ($TC_DP1) 400-499 has been programmed for one of
the cutting edges of the tool.

Deleting data
When data is deleted the memory area is deleted with it and automatically released again.
A tool can only be deleted if it is not active (offset-determining) and is not in a magazine, i.e.
it must have been removed or unloaded.

Note
If tool management is active you must ensure that the tool being deleted is not assigned to a
magazine location ($TC_MPP6). This assignment must be removed before the tool is deleted.

The grinding-specific tool data ($TC_TG1...) is created as soon as one of the tool types
($TC_DP1) 400-499 has been programmed for any of the cutting edges of the tool.
If the tool type is set from the current value taken from the range 400-499 to a value outside
this range, the grinding data memory is enabled again, i.e. the grinding-specific data is lost.

Action Program command Description

Create a tool Without tool management: Create tool T if T does not yet exist!
$TC_DPx[y,z] = value; y = T number
z = D number
With active tool management:
T_NO = NEWT("tool identifier", duplo num‐
ber)
or
$TC_TP1[y] = duplo number; y = T number
$TC_TP2[y] = "tool identifier"
Create a cutting $TC_DPx[y,z] = value Create cutting edge D = z if D = z does not yet exist!
edge y = T number
z = D number

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 361
Programming
5.9 Definitions when programming data

Action Program command Description

Set tool data With active tool management:
$TC_TPx[y] = value; y = T number
or
$TC_TPx,[GETT("DRILL",DUPLO NO)] = Write tool-related user data
value
or
$TC_TPCx[y] = value; Write tool-related grinding data
$TC_TGx[y] = value;
Set data of a cutting $TC_DPx[y,z] = value Write offset data
edge $TC_DPCx[y,z] = value Write cutting edge-related user data
$TC_MOPx[y,z] = value Write cutting edge-related monitoring data
$TC_MOPCx[y,z] = value Write CC (OEM) cutting edge monitoring data
y = T number
z = D number
Delete cutting edge Without tool management: All tools of the channel are deleted, the memory is re‐
data $TC_DP1[0,0] = 0; leased.
With tool management: When deleting tools, the entries for the location data
$TC_TP1[0,0]; must also be corrected.
Delete tool data Without tool management:
$TC_DP1[y,0] = 0; y = T is deleted, memory is released.
With tool management:
$TC_TP1[y] = 0; All tool-related data is set to "0" (user data, hierarchy
or data, ...). When deleting a tool, the entries for the loca‐
tion data must also be corrected.
$TC_TP1[GETT("tool identifier", duplo num‐
ber)] = 0;
or
DELT["tool identifier", duplo number]
Delete data for all Without tool management:
tools $TC_DP1[0,0] = 0; All tools of the channel are deleted and the memory is
released.
With tool management:
$TC_TP1[0,0] = 0; When deleting tools, the entries for the location data
must also be corrected.

5.9.2 Magazine data

Sequence for defining data

The "Assign tool to a magazine location" sequence creates an interdependency between the
tool data and the magazine/magazine location data.

Tool Management
362 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.9 Definitions when programming data

Example:
The tool contains the magazine location type for which it is intended. The magazine type
contains its own magazine location type. If the tool is assigned to the magazine location, as a
rule the location type cannot be changed again as this can cause inconsistencies.
The resulting requirement is for tools and magazines to be loaded by a special routine into the
PLC and that the structure-determining definitions may no longer be changed during the
preparation (these are e.g. magazine dimension, magazine location type, duplo no., tool
name, ...). They do not include: Cutting edge data, magazine location status, tool status, ...

Loading data
Because tools are linked to magazines via magazine location parameter $TC_MPP6, the
following rules for correct definition of tools and magazines must be adhered to:
1. Load tool data
2. Load magazine data
3. Load $TC_MPP6 parameters (⇒ places tool in magazine location)
The same sequence is used for data backup.
The grinding data of a tool cannot be written until tool type = "grinding tool" has been defined
for at least one cutting edge.
The distance parameter ($TC_MDPx) and the buffer assignment parameter ($TC_MLSR)
cannot be written until the magazines and their locations have been defined.

Delete data
A tool cannot be deleted while it is still contained in a magazine. The following sequence of
operations must be followed when deleting:
1. Delete the magazine data (this removes tools from the magazine); or remove the tool
explicitly from the magazine.
2. Delete tool data
In addition, a magazine cannot be deleted if it has the state $TC_MAP3[i]= 8 (motion is active).
The delete command is rejected for all magazines even if only one magazine is preventing the
command from being executed.

Note
If a single tool is to be deleted it must first be removed from the magazine location with an
unload operation and then it can be deleted.
Tools that are currently selected cannot be deleted! You can ensure that no tool is selected
beyond a part program by programming T0 before the end of a part program independently of
the settings in the machine data (see MD for selecting tools beyond the end of a program).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 363
Programming
5.9 Definitions when programming data

Action Program command Description

Creating a new magazine $TC_MAPx[y] = value; Value <>0, y = magazine no. of a magazine not yet set
up
Delete a magazine $TC_MAP1[y] = 0; The data of the magazine and its magazine locations as
well as any defined distances to change positions are
deleted. The associated memory is released.
Delete a magazines and the $TC_MAP6[y] = 0; The data of the magazine and its magazine locations as
tools contained in it well as any defined distances to change positions are
deleted. Any tools contained in the magazine are also
deleted.
The associated memory is released.
Delete all magazines $TC_MAP1[0] = 0; All data of all magazines of the selected TO area unit is
deleted and the associated memory is released again.
The magazine data block is then empty.
Create new magazine location $TC_MPPx[y,z] = value; Value <>0, y = location number not yet available.
Before the data of the first location can be created, the
associated magazine must be defined.
When the first parameter of the first magazine location to
be set up is written, then all magazine locations belonging
to the magazine are set up using their default values in
accordance with the requirements for number of lines and
columns for the magazine.
Set magazine location type hi‐ $TC_MPTHx[y] = value;
erarchy
Set magazine distances (dis‐ $TC_MPTHx[y] = value;
tance to change position)
Delete magazine distances $TC_MDPx[y,0] = 0 Delete all defined distances of the magazine with the
(distance to change position) number "y", i.e. the magazine is no longer "seen" during
a tool search and an empty location search.
$TC_MDPx[0,0] = 0; Delete all defined distances of all magazines of the TO
unit.
Delete the assignments of the $TC_MLSR[x,0] = 0; Delete all defined assignments of a buffer location with
buffer to the spindles the number "x", i.e. the magazine is no longer "seen" dur‐
ing the tool search.
$TC_MLSR[0,0] = 0; Delete all defined assignments of buffer locations of the
TO unit to spindles
Set magazine block data $TC_MAMPx = value;

5.9.3 Tool change

Programming the tool selection

Tool selection can be divided into two different steps:
1. Tool change preparation
2. Tool change execution

Tool Management
364 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.9 Definitions when programming data

Steps 1-2 can be programmed separately or together in the NC program (see MD22550
TOOL_CHANGE_MODE).
Examples
Tool change in one step: (turret)
Tx; Make new tool x available and execute tool change
Tool change in two steps:
1. Tx; Prepare tool change (select the tool)
2. M06; Execute tool change
Note
If tool management is active, a tool can only be selected with the tool identifier (name). If
a T number is now programmed, then the number is used as the identifier (name). The tool
must then receive a T number as name during loading.

Tool change with identifier:

T="DRILL"; A search is performed for tool with identifier "DRILL".
Tool change with number as identifier:
T="123"; A search is performed for tool with identifier "123". Alternatively, T123 can also be
programmed.

5.9.4 Cutting edge selection

Cutting edge selection after tool change

When a tool change has been completed, the tool cutting edge can be selected in one of the
following ways:
1. The offset number D is programmed.
2. The offset number D is not programmed and is specified by MD20270
$MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT.
= 0: No automatic cutting edge selection after M06.
> 0: Number of the cutting edge, which is selected after M06.
= -1 The cutting edge no. of the old tool remains valid and also selected for the new tool
after M06.
= -2 The offset of the old tool remains valid and also selected for the new tool after M06.

Examples:
Tool selection with the following cutting edge selection

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 365
Programming
5.9 Definitions when programming data

Cutting edge selection always refers to the tool that is changed with command M06.

T1 M06 Tool change - no D programmed; therefore offset selection according to

MD 20270
T5 Tool preselection
X .. Y.. Z... Working with T1 and the offset from MD 20270
D2 Offset D2 from T1 !!!
M06 Tool change; T5 is loaded at change - offset selection according to MD
20270
T1 Tool preselection
X.., Y... Working with T5 and the offset from MD 20270
When programming tool commands, main spindles and secondary spindles are programmed
differently. Only tool offset values of the main spindle tool are taken into account by the
geometry because only one active offset can be processed per channel. Processing of tool
commands for a secondary spindle is only relevant for signal output to the PLC and the function
GETSELT(...).
Spindle no. 2 = main spindle:

T2 = "DRILL"
M2 = 06
T1 = "MILLER" Select tool for secondary spindle
M1 = 06 Tool change: load tool in the secondary spindle
D1 Select cutting edge of "DRILL" (main spindle)
Spindle no. 2 = main spindle:

T2 = "DRILL" Select a tool for the main spindle.

As an alternative, T= "DRILL" could also be specified.
T1 = x; Select a tool for a secondary spindle
M2 = 06 Tool change
As an alternative, M06 could also be specified.
D1 Select cutting edge of a tool with identifier "DRILL"

5.9.5 Tool transfer from program test

With MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, bit 3, you can set whether the active tool and
tool offset are to be taken
● (= 1) from the test program which was last terminated in test mode
or
● (= 0) from the program which was last terminated before the test program was activated

Precondition: Bits 0 and 6 must be set in MD20110.

$P_ISTEST

Tool Management
366 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.9 Definitions when programming data

The system variable $P_ISTEST is for checking from the part program whether a program test
is active. The system variable returns the value TRUE when program testing is active.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 367
Programming
5.10 Programming T=location number

5.10 Programming T=location number

This function is only available when tool management is active. This type of programming is
not only suitable for turrets, but for all other types of magazine.

/RFDWLRQQR  7RROZLWKWKHQDPHGULOOKDVD
'ULOOGLVDEOHG
GLIIHUHQWGXSORQR
7 7LVLQWHUQDO7QR

/RFDWLRQQR  /RFDWLRQQR 

Turret

/RFDWLRQQR  7 /RFDWLRQQR 

'ULOOHQDEOHG

7

/RFDWLRQQR  /RFDWLRQLVHPSW\ KDV

'ULOODFWLYH VLPLODUHIIHFWWR7LQ1&.

Image 5-11 Programming of T=location number

The programming type is set using machine data MD20310

$TC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 16=1:
● T = "x" with x as tool identifier
● Tx, with x as location number of the magazine containing the tool used for machining
When the function is active, T1 selects the tool in location number 1 instead of the tool with
identifier "1". The first magazine linked with the tool holder is accessed here. The identifier of
the tool in this location is then determined ("Drill").
The subsequent procedure is as if T="Drill" had been programmed. Which of the three tools
from the "Drills" group is determined as the first step of the tool change process.
The set tool search strategy is taken into consideration:
● When the strategy "Take the first available tool from the group" is applied, T10 from location
3 is loaded.
● When the strategy "Take the first tool with active status from the group" is applied, T1 is
"loaded".
T15 on location no. 1 cannot be used, because it is disabled.
No alarm is generated if the programmed location does not contain a tool. The change is output
as usual, with T no.=0. In this way, for example, the turret can be positioned to an empty
location.
If more than one magazine is assigned to the tool holder, then the programmed location number
refers to the magazine that is the first magazine defined in the distance table.

Tool Management
368 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.10 Programming T=location number

If the tools of the tool group are located in different magazines of the tool holder, the search
procedure is the same as with the standard tool management.

Note
With the T=location function, alternatively T= "Drill" can also be programmed.
T=1; tool
T="Drill"; tool with the identifier, drill

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 369
Programming
5.11 Call multiple turrets with "T=location number"

5.11 Call multiple turrets with "T=location number"

7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ 7&B033>@  VSLQGOHORFDWLRQ
7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQR 7&B033>@  WRROKROGHUQR

7RROKROGHU 7RROKROGHU

3DUWSURJUDP
7 0DJD]LQHIRUWRROKROGHU  ORFDWLRQ
7 0DJD]LQHIRUWRROKROGHU  ORFDWLRQ
 7  
  7  

7XUUHW 7XUUHW
   
 
 

Image 5-12 T=location number as tool management function on turning machines

The programming option "T = location number" and several magazines can be used to work
in one channel or in one TO unit.
● The NC address T can be programmed with an address expansion T1 =...
● Tool management then interprets this as the spindle number or as the toolholder number.
● T without address extension then refers to the main spindle.

Tool Management
370 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.12 Programming examples

5.12 Programming examples

Action Program command Description

Create tool DEF INT DUPLO_NO Create new tool called Drill with duplo
DEF INT T_NO no.= 7. The automatically generated T
no. is stored in "T_NO".
DUPLO_NO = 7
T_NO=NEWT("DRILL", DUPLO_NO)
T_NO = GETT("DRILL", DUPLO_NO) Determine the T number of tool "DRILL"
or with duplo no. 7 that has already been
created.
$TC_TP2[1] = "DRILL" ;
The T No is however also assigned here
$TC_TP1[1] = DUPLO_NO
by the programming.
Tool data $TC_DP1[GETT("DRILL", Write tool type for the 2nd cutting edge
read / write DUPLO_NO), 2] = 210 of the tool "Drill"/ DUPLO_NO
$TC_DP1[T_NR, 2] = 210 Write tool type for the 2nd cutting edge
of the tool "T number"
Select T="DRILL" If there are several tools with this iden‐
tool or: tifier, then the T no. is returned for the
first tool possible.
T=GETT("DRILL", DUPLO_NO)
Determines T number for "DRILL" with
or
duplo number = DUPLO_NO and se‐
Tx lects it.
Call with T no. e.g. T1,T2,T3,....
Delete tool $TC_TP1[T_NR,0]=0 Tool with T_NO is deleted
or Tool "DRILL"
DELT ( "DRILL", DUPLO_NO) DUPLO_NO is deleted
$TC_TP1[GETT("DRILL"),0]=0
or alternatively:
DELT("DRILL")

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 371
Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

5.13.1 Magazine data, directory

OPI block TMV

Calculation of line: Magazine number, if a field[ ] is present
Calculation of column: n.a.

NCK identifier Designation OPI variables Type

None Number of magazines numActMags WORD
Number of the magazine magVNo[ ] WORD
Identifier of the magazine magVIdent[ ] String

5.13.2 Tool data, directory

OPI block TV
Calculation of line: Sequential no. of the tools, if [ ] present
Calculation of column: n.a.

NCK identifier Designation OPI variables Type

None Duplo number nrDuplo[ ] WORD
Number of cutting edges numCuttEdges[ ] WORD
Number of tools in TO area numTools WORD
Last T number assigned for tool manage‐ TnumWZV WORD
ment
Tool identifier toolIdent[ ] String
Current magazine toolInMag[ ] WORD
Actual location toolInPlace[ ] WORD
T number toolNo[ ] WORD
Number of tool groups numToolsGroups WORD

5.13.3 Parameterization, return parameters _N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC

OPI block TF
Calculation of line: Refer to table

Tool Management
372 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

Calculation of column: n.a.

Designation OPI variables Calculation of line Type

Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTD Parameter index of block TD WORD
OPI block TD
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTO Parameter index of block TO DOUBLE
OPI block TO
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataToolI‐ Parameter index of block TD String
OPI block TD dentTD
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTS Parameter index of block TS DOUBLE
OPI block TS
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTU Parameter index of block TU DOUBLE
OPI block TU
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTUE Parameter index of block TUE DOUBLE
OPI block TUE
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parDataTUS Parameter index of block TUS DOUBLE
OPI block TUS
Mask for search criterion of PI TSEARCH (OPI block TD) parMasksTD Parameter index of block TD WORD
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTO Parameter index of block TO WORD
OPI block TO
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTS Parameter index of block TS WORD
OPI block TS
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTU Parameter index of block TU WORD
OPI block TU
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTUE Parameter index of block TUE WORD
OPI block TUE
Comparison value for PI TSEARCH of variables of the parMasksTUS Parameter index of block TUS WORD
OPI block TUS
D number of cutting edge used resultCutting Number of cutting edges of WORD
EdgeNrUsed tool
Number of cutting edges used resultNrOfCut 1 WORD
EdgesUsed
Return: found tools resultNrOfTools 1 WORD
Return: T numbers of found tools resultToolNr[ ] 1... WORD
resultNrOfTools
T number of cutting edge used resultToolNr Number of cutting edges of WORD
Used tool

5.13.4 Working offsets

OPI block AEV

Calculation of line: Cutting edge number if [ ] available

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 373
Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

Calculation of column: n.a.

NCK identifier Designation OPI VAR Type

None Number of D numbers in block numActDEdges WORD
D numbers Dno[...] WORD
Internal T number toolNo[...] WORD
Cutting edge number cuttEdgeNo[...] WORD
Tool identifier toolIdent[...] STRING
Duplo number duploNo[...] WORD
Magazine toolInMag[...] WORD
Location toolInPlace[...] WORD

5.13.5 PI services and language commands for tool management

Overview
FB4 (PI_SERV) or FB7 can be used to start program instance services (PI services) in the
NCK area. A program section which carries out a particular function (e.g., with tool
management, search for empty location in a magazine), is executed in the NCK by making a
request via the PI service.

PI service Functions NC language command

MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services
DELETO Delete tool DELT("Tool", Duplo)
DELECE Delete a cutting edge $TC_DP1[t,d]=0
CREATO Generate tool NEWT("Tool", Duplo)
CRTOCE Create tool specifying cutting edge no. $TC_DPx[t,D]
$TC_DPCx[t,D]
$TC_DPCSx[t,D]
$TC_MOPx[t,D]
$TC_MOPCx[t,D]
TMCRTO Create tool $TC_TPx[t]
TMCRTC (not available in Create tool by specifying cutting edge no. $TC_DPx[t,d]
PLC)
CREACE Create cutting edge $TC_DP[t,d]=value
CRCEDN Create new cutting edge $TC_DPx[t,d]
TMFDPL Empty location search for loading GETFREELOC(magNo, locNo, T
no., refMag, refLoc, withReserv)
TMMVTL Prepare magazine location for loading, unload tool
TMPCIT Set incremental value for workpiece counter, decre‐ SETPIECE(SpinNo,y)
ment count by y
TMPOSM Position magazine location or tool POSM(p,m,ip,im)
TMFPBP Empty location search acc. to properties
TSEARC Complex search using search screen forms User cycle program

Tool Management
374 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

PI service Functions NC language command

TMRASS Reset active status
TMGETT Confirm T number for specified tool identifier with du‐ GETT("Tool", Duplo)
plo number
Read the preset T number GETSELT(SpinNo)
CHKDNO (not available in PLC) Check the uniqueness of D numbers of the tool data Status=CHKDNO (t1,t2,d)
TMCHKD (not available in PLC) of the TO unit assigned to the executing channel. Pa‐
rameters t1, t2, d are optional.
DZERO (not available in PLC) Set D numbers for all tools of the TO unit assigned to DZERO
the channel to "invalid". On the OPI, such D numbers
are displayed with the value 0. The invalid D number
is generated NCK-internally by assigning the value
"old D number" + 32000 to the D number.
For the offset number D=d, specify the associated in‐ Status=GETACTTD (t,d)
ternal T no. = t of the tool. The tool that has the status
"active" and "was in use" is taken from the tool group.
Specify the D no. for tool t and its cutting edge ce d=GETDNO(t,ce)
Set the D no. of tool t and its cutting edge ce to value Status=SETDNO (t,ce,d)
d
Read the active T no. and status Status=GETACTT (Tno,"Tool")
Delete command for all location-dependent/setup off‐ Status = DELDL( t, d )
sets of a cutting edge or tool if d is not specified
SETTST (not available in PLC) Set tool status to "active" SETTA(Stat,m,vnr)
SETTST (not available in PLC) Set tool status to "not active" SETTIA(Stat,m,vnr)
CHKDM (not available in PLC) Check uniqueness of D nos. in magazine; m=Maga‐ Status=CHKDM(m)
zine
Set tool holder no. (h=holder no.) SETMTH(h)
Set master spindle (s=spindle no.) SETMS(s)
TRESMO Tool life / quantity / wear setpoint activation RESETMON
TMAWCO (not available in Set a wear group to active $TC_MAP9
PLC)
Location-dependent offsets, coarse $TC_EPx[t,d]
Technological grinding data $TC_TPGx[t]
Read the loaded T number GETEXET
Language command to move tool MVTOOL
Delete tool holder block DELTC
Tool deselection/tool change irrespective of tool status TCA
Delete the location status "reserved for tool in the buf‐ DELMLRES
fer"
Delete owner magazine location of the tool DELMLOWNER

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 375
Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

NC language commands
NCK states are read with the following language commands.

Functions NC language command

Active tool no. T $P_TOOLNO
Last programmed tool no. (without magazine management) $P_TOOLP
Active tool cutting edge $P_TOOL
Active total tool length; n=1-3 $P_TOOLL[n]
Active tool holder $P_TC
Active angle of a tool holder axis; n=1-2 $P_TCANG[n]
Difference between calculated and used angle of a tool holder axis $P_TCDIFF[n]
for Hirth gearing of the angle
Active tool radius; n=1-2 $P_TOOLR
Number of cutting edges for tool t; t=T number 1 32000 $P_TOOLND[t]
Tool with T number t exists $P_TOOLEXIST[t]
Active tool offsets D, n=1...31 $P_AD[n]
Active tool offsets; transformed; n=1-31 $P_ADT[n]
Active additive offset number $P_DLNO
T number of the tool (numerical) $C_T
Tool identifier (string) $C_TS
Bool variable that shows whether a T word is available in $C_T $C_T_PROG
Parameter for tool name as string $C_TS_PROG
Address extension of the T word $C_TE
Programmed D no. $C_D
Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_D_PROG
$C_D
Programmed additive/setup offset $C_DL
Bool variable that shows whether an offset number is available in $C_DL_PROG
$C_DL
Command number, specifies the required operation: $AC_TC_FCT
1: Move (load/unload, relocate);
2: Prepare change
3: Change ON;
4: Change ON (turret, without M06);
5: Prepare change and change ON (with M06); -1 At the read instant,
no tool management command is active
Acknowledgement status of PLC FC8/FC6 $AC_TC_STATUS
Tool holder or spindle number onto which the new tool should be $AC_TC_THNO
loaded
Source magazine number of the new tool $AC_TC_MFN
Source location number of the new tool $AC_TC_LFN
Target magazine number of new tool $AC_TC_MTN
Target location number of the new tool $AC_TC_LTN
Source magazine number of the old tool (to be removed) $AC_TC_MFO
Source location number of the old tool (to be removed) $AC_TC_LFO

Tool Management
376 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

Functions NC language command

Source magazine number of the old tool (to be removed) $AC_TC_MTO
Target location number of the old tool (to be removed) $AC_TC_LTO
Returns the number of the actual master spindle $AC_MSNUM
Returns the number of the master spindle $P_MSNUM
Returns the number of the master tool holder $AC_MTHNUM
Trigger variable to output command of the NCK (is set for one IPO) $AC_TC_CMDT
Trigger variable for acknowledgement of the PLC (is set for one IPO) $AC_TC_ACKT
Counter for the command output $AC_TC_CMDC
Counter for the acknowledgements $AC_TC_ACKC
Owner magazine of the new tool $AC_TC_MMYN
Owner location of the new tool $AC_TC_LMYN
Returns the number of the master tool holder $P_MTHNUM
Magazine number of tool t $A_TOOLMN[t]
Magazine location of tool t $A_TOOLMLN[t]
Number of the owner magazine $A_MYMN
Number of the owner magazine location $A_MYMLN
Number of defined magazines that are assigned to the channel $P_MAGN
Number of defined magazines, i-th magazine number $P_MAG[i]
Number of defined adapters that are assigned to the channel $P_MAGNA
Number of defined adapters, i-th adapter number $P_MAGA[i]
Number of magazines n that are linked to location n $P_MAGNDIS[m,n]
Number of the i-th magazine that is linked with location l of the buffer $P_MAGNDISS[l,i]
magazine
Number of the i-th magazine that is linked with location l of the load‐ $P_MAGDISL[l,i]
ing magazine
Number of defined magazine location type hierarchies $P_MAGNH
Number of the defined location types in the n-the defined hierarchy $P_MAGNHLT[n]
m-th location type of hierarchy n $P_MAGHLT[n,m]
Number of buffers assigned to the spindle numbers, tool holder $P_MAGNREL[n]
numbers n
m-th buffer number of the n-th spindle no., tool holder no. $P_MAGREL[n,m]
Number of spindle locations / tool holder locations in the buffer mag‐ $P_MAGNS
azine that are assigned to the channel
n-th number of the spindle / tool holder in the buffer $P_MAGS[n]
Determine the defined D numbers of a tool $P_TOOLD
Determine existence of a tool $P_TOOLEXIST
Number of DL offsets of the D offset given by T number T and D $P_TOOLNDL[t,d]
number D
Number of defined tool groups that are assigned to the channel $P_TOOLNG
Number of defined tools that are assigned to the channel $P_TOOLNT
i-th tool number T $P_TOOLT[i]
The following tool changes are available for all tools, whose param‐ $P_USEKT, $TC_TP11
eter $TC_TP11 have set one of the bits of $P_USEKT. The value
zero has the same contents as "all bits are set"

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 377
Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

Functions NC language command

Factor for tool search $AC_MONMIN
Workpiece count $A_USEDND
Workpiece count $A_USEDT
Workpiece count $A_USEDD
Read factor for tool life monitoring $A_MONIFACT

Multitool and tool specifications in PI services

The following PI services refer to tools and multitools:

PI service Meaning
TMFDPL Empty location search for specified tool or multitool for loading or equipping. The empty location search
in the MT only makes sense for tools that have not been loaded, i.e. as part of the equipping of the MT
with tools.
TMFPBP Empty location search for specified tool or multitool (location found is not reserved).
TMMVTL Load or unload tool or multitool. It is not possible to program tools of a multitool for the move command.
It is also not possible to move a tool in an MT with the command.
TMGETT T number of the tool with the specified tool identifier / duplo number or the MT number of the multitool
with the specified identifier (multitool: The duplo number is programmed with the parameter value 00000).
TRESMO Reset monitoring values. If an MT number is programmed, only the tools of the multitool treated.
TMPOSM Position magazine on the specified magazine location, specified tool or multitool.

The following PI services are available functionally for tools and multitools, but with different
names:

PI service Meaning
Create
CREATO Create tool with specified T number
CRTOCE Create tool with specified T number and D number
TMCRTO Create tool with specified identifier / duplo number
TMCRTC Create tool with specified identifier / duplo number and D number
Delete
DELETO Delete tool with specified T number
TMDLTO Delete tool with specified identifier / duplo number

Note
If these tool-specific PI services are called with MT-specific names or MT numbers, the
respective PI service is aborted with error status.

The following PI services are defined functionally only for tools (i.e. there are no similar PI
services for multitools):

PI service Meaning
CHEKDM Check the D numbers for uniqueness
CHKDNO Check whether the tools have unique D numbers

Tool Management
378 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

PI service Meaning
DZERO Set all D numbers invalid with the "Unique D number" function
CRCEDN Create new tool cutting edge by specifying the D number
CREACE Create tool cutting edge
DELECE Delete a tool cutting edge
SETTST Activate tool from tool group (set tool state "active")
TMRASS Reset active status
TMAWCO Set active wear group in a magazine
TMPCIT Set increment value for workpiece counter
TSEARC Complex search using search screen forms

Note
During the search, the PI service only considers tools, also those contained in a multitool, i.e.
the PI service does not consider multitools. A "Complex multitool search" PI service is not
defined.
If the tool-specific PI services are called with MT-specific names or MT numbers, the PI service
is aborted with error status.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 379
Programming
5.13 Overview of the remaining OPI blocks of tool management

Tool Management
380 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection
(option) 6
6.1 Installation

6.1.1 System requirements

Tool Ident Connection is intended for the SINUMERIK 840D sl target system with SINUMERIK
Operate.

Note
TooI Ident Connection is only available in conjunction with the SINUMERIK Operate operating
software as of SW 4.5 SP2.

PLC interface "ParmaTM"

Assignment of the PLC interface for the Parameter area (see DB19).
Assignment of the PLC interface for the Parameter area (Page 431)
Functional scope of the PLC interface (K codes) (Page 439)

NCU
● As of NCU 7x0.3
● SINUMERIK Operate as of SW 4.5 SP2

PCU
● PCU 50.5 or higher
● SINUMERIK Operate as of SW 4.5 SP2

Tool management
An active magazine management is required in order to use the Tool Ident Connection option.

Expanding the DB19

If the PLC data block DB19 is not available via the PLC interface for "Tool Ident Connection",
then this must be expanded by "Tool Ident Connection" before commissioning the system for
the first time, see PLC interface in the DB19 (Page 425)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 381
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.1 Installation

6.1.2 Installation of Tool Ident Connection

Note
We recommend that you backup your system before setting-up.
According to the system preconditions, if necessary, additional components must be first
installed.

The storage medium for software applications for SINUMERIK 840D sl with SINUMERIK
Operate is a CompactFlash card with a fixed directory structure. The "Tool Ident Connection"
application is stored within this structure in the "addon" directory.

6.1.2.1 Activation of Tool Ident Connection

Configuration files
The following files are available to configure Tool Ident Connection:

Standard configuration Directory: CompactFlash card Directory: PCU 50 WinXP Directory: PCU 50 Win7
files
tdiidentcfg.xml /card/siemens/sinumerik/hmi/ F:\hmisl\siemens\sinumerik\hmi C:\ProgramFiles(x86)\Sie‐
toolSpec.xml template\toolidentconnection \template\toolidentconnection mens\MotionControl\siemens
\sinumerik\hmi\template\tooli‐
wkonvert.mcx dentconnection
DefToolDat.txt
wkonvert.mcc
systemconfiguration.ini
oem_sltmlistconfig.xml

Setup of the Tool Ident Connection option

The following entry must be made in the "systemconfiguration.ini", in the section [services] to
set up the software:
SVCxxx=name:=SlMcisTdiIdentConnectionService,
implementation:=slmcistdiidentconnectionservice.SlMcisTdiIdentConnec
tionService,
process:=SlHmiHost1, timeout:=5000, shutdowntime:=5000

Note
The xxx in SVCxxx must be replaced by the free number of a service. Only numbers as of
200 can be used.

Tool Management
382 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.1 Installation

To adapt the Tool Ident Connection configuration function, the systemconfiguration.ini and, if
adapted, the configuration files (from the directory mentioned above) must be copied to the
following directory:
● CompactFlash card: /card/addon/sinumerik/hmi/cfg
● PCU 50 (WinXP): F:\hmisl\addon\sinumerik\hmi\cfg
● PCU 50 (Win7): C:/Programs(x86)\Siemens\MotionControl\/addon\sinumerik\hmi\cfg
The oem_sltmlistconfig.xml file must be renamed, depending on the technology. This is
explained in the Commissioning Manual IM9, Section "Tool management", Section
"Configuring the user interface".
A detailed description of the configuration options for the oem_sltmlistconfig.xml can be found
in the Commissioning Manual IM9, Section "Tool management", Section "Configuring the code
carrier connection".
The files wkonvert.txt, DefToolDat.txt and wkonvert.mcc are configuration files. They must be
compiled after every change with the wkonvert wizard. The result of the compile action is a
wkoonvert.mcx. This must be copied to the appropriate target directory for the settings to take
effect.

6.1.2.2 Installation of Wkonvert wizard

The Wkonvert wizard PC application is available when creating the required conversion rules
for the Tool Ident Connection.
In order to be able to use the Wizard, the application must be installed on the configuring
computer.

Installation procedure
To install the Wkonvert wizard, execute the setup.exe which is on the SINUMERIK CNC
Software DVD.

Image 6-1 Language selection dialog

The individual installation steps follow after selecting the installation language.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 383
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.1 Installation

Image 6-2 Preparing setup

After reading the license agreement, this must be accepted. If you are not in agreement with
the license agreement, then setup is exited.

Image 6-3 License agreement dialog

After acknowledging the license agreement, you are prompted for a user name and
organization.

Tool Management
384 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.1 Installation

Image 6-4 User information dialog

You can then select either a complete or a user-defined installation.

Image 6-5 Setup type dialog

For a user-defined installation, you have the possibility of defining the target directory of the
application.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 385
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.1 Installation

Image 6-6 Adapted setup dialog

Image 6-7 Target directory selection dialog

If you have selected a complete installation, click "Next" or click "Next" in the component
selection dialog to begin the installation.

Tool Management
386 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.1 Installation

Image 6-8 Installation dialog

Now click "Install" to start the installation.

Image 6-9 Installation dialog

When required, setup installs the windows components ".NET Framework" and "Windows
Installer 3.0".

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 387
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.1 Installation

Image 6-10 Completing the installation

When you have successfully run through the setup procedure, the Wkonvert wizard can be
started via Start > Programs > MCIS > TDI > TDI Ident Connection Wizard.

Tool Management
388 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

6.2 Configuration

6.2.1 Configuration schematic

The following figure displays the configuration scheme of Tool Ident Connection:

7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ

'DWDFRQYHUVLRQ 6O7P6HUYLFH

3/& '% '%[[[

1&.:=9

6,180(5,.'VO 6,180(5,.2SHUDWH
/'3

FRGHFDUULHU

Image 6-11 Configuration principle of Tool Ident Connection

6.2.2 Configuration of the tool lists

<IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> tag
The entries used for configuring the code carrier connection in the tool list of the user interface
are located in the <IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION> tag. The code carrier
connection is implemented via Tool Ident Connection.
For detailed information, please refer to:
References: SINUMERIK Operate Commissioning Manual (IM9), Section 12.2.16 "Configuring
the code carrier connection"

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 389
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

6.2.3 TDIIdentCfg.xml
The following entry must be made in the "systemconfiguration.ini", in Section [services] to
activate the software:
[services]
SVCxxx=name:=SIMcisTdiIdentConnectionService,
implementation:=slmcistdiidentconnectionservice.SIMcisTdiIdentConnec
tionService,
process:=SIHmiHost1, timeout:=5000, shutdowntime:=5000

Note
xxx in SVCxxx must be replaced by the free number of a service.

Tool Ident Connection is parameterized using a configuration file based on xml. This
configuration file allows the integration and parameterization of various read/write devices via
different communication technologies.

Tool Management
390 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Structure
The configuration file is structured as follows:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTP-8"?>

<!-- SIEMENS AG 2010 - GER I IA&DT WEST TSS 7C APC MT - ZN Köln - All rights reserved -->
<!-- Configuration-File for MCIS TDI Ident Connection sl -->
<!-- E-Mail @ kulik.michael@siemens.com -->
<!-- Do not manipulate this file -->
<Configuration>
<Logging>
<ErrorFile size="3" enable="0">/var/tmp/TDIIdentLog.log</ErrorFile>
<TraceFile size="3" enable="0">/var/tmp/TDIIdentTrace.log</TraceFile>
<Logging>
<GlobalParam>
<InterfaceDB>19</InterfaceDB>
<InfaceOffset>250</InfaceOffset>
<DisableInface>false</DisableInface>
<TimeOut>1000</TimeOut>
<InputDB>19</InputDB>
<InputOffset>140</InputOffset>
<OutputDB>19</OutputDB>
<OutputOffset>198</OutputOffset>
</GlobalParam>
<!-- Parametrierung des ParamTM-Interface -->
<ParamTMInterface enable="1">
<InterfaceDB>19</InterfaceDB>
<InfaceOffset>256</InfaceOffset>
<ParamTMInterface>
<!-- Pfadangabe zur mcx-Datei und ToolSpec.xml -->
<Logic>
<!-- Aktivierung wenn TDI IdentConnection auf NCU -->
<mcxPath>/card/addon/sinumerik/hmi/cfg/wkonvert.mcx</mcxPath>
<specPath>/card/addon/sinumerik/hmi/cfg/ToolSpec.xml</specPath>
<!-- Aktivierung wenn TDI IdentConnection auf PCU 50.5 -->

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 391
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

<mcxPath>C://Program Files/Siemens/MotionControl/addon/sinumerik/
hmi/cfg/wkonvert.mcx</mcxPath>
<specPath>C://Program Files/Siemens/MotionControl/addon/sinumerik/
hmi/cfg/wkonvert.mcx</specPath>
<Logic>
<MergeMode>
<LoadPlaceNo>1</LoadPlaceNo>
<UnloadPlaceNo>1</UnloadPlaceNo>
</MergeMode>
<!-- Parametrierung des Schreib-/Lesegerätes -->
<!-- Type = 1-> PLC Type = 2 -> USB Type = 3 -> RJ45 -->
<Device Type="1">
<Units>1</Units>
<Data Unit="1">
<DataDB>300</DataDB>
<Offset>0</Offset>
<MaxData>1138</MaxData>
<EOT>0*2F2F</EOT>
</Data>
</Device>
</Configuration>

Description

Note
Depending on whether Tool Ident Connection is activated on an NCU or on a PCU50.5, the
required program lines must be activated in the <Logic> area.

Note
Only the entries - described in the following table - can be changed/used to parameterize and
configure Tool Ident Connection.
Always generate a backup before making any change.

The configuration file can be changed using a text editor, e.g. Notepad. It is sub-divided into
various nodes which contain different entries. The sections and their entries are described in
the following table.

Section Parameter Significance

GlobalParam InterfaceDB Data block information for the PLC interface
InfaceOffset Offset for the PLC interface
TimeOut Execution monitoring time
DisableInterface De/activation of the PLC interface
InputDB Data block for transfer parameters
InputOffset Offset for transfer parameters
OutputDB Data block for return parameters
OutputOffset Offset for return parameters

Tool Management
392 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Section Parameter Significance

Logic mcxPath File + path data to the configured mcx file
specPath File + path data to ToolSpec.xml
MergeMode LoadPlaceNo Default loading position
UnloadPlaceNo Default unloading position
Device Units Number of read heads used
Type="1" -> PLC DataBlock Data block of the read head
Offset Offset of the read head data
MaxDataBytes Maximum data of the read head in bytes
EOT End of the read head character string

If the execution of the PLC services for Tool Ident Connection is to be canceled because of a
timeout, a longer time can be defined using the "TimeOut" entry. A timeout can occur, for
example, if the operator does not acknowledge a tool being loaded within the parameterized
time window.
The default loading and unloading location number of the loading magazine can be changed
using the entries of "LoadPlaceNo" and "UnloadPlaceNo" using the "MergeMode" parameter.
The "Device" node has the "Type" attribute; the type of the read device being used is saved
there. The attribute defines the entries below this range. The parameters of the range contain
the configuration data of the read/write device.
Overview of the "Type" attribute of the "Device" parameter:

Type Designation
1 PLC read device → connection via PROFIBUS

6.2.4 Read/write device at the PLC

Configuration of the PLC connection

In the configuration for Tool Ident Connection, the "Type" attribute must be set to significance
"1" for a PLC read/write device. The following parameters must be supplied with valid values
below the node:

Parameter Data type Range of values

Units int 1-4
DataBlock int 0-32767
Offset int 0-32767
MaxDataBytes int 0-32767
EOT string 10 characters

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 393
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

"Device" extract from a configuration file (TDIIdentCfg.xml) with PLC connection:

<Device Type="1">
<Units>2</Units>
<Data Unit="1">
<DataDB>300</DataDB>
<Offset>0</Offset>
<MaxData>140</MaxData>
<EOT>0*2F2F</EOT>
</Data>
<Data Unit="2">
<DataDB>300</DataDB>
<Offset>141</Offset>
<MaxData>40</MaxData>
<EOT>0*2F2F</EOT>
</Data>
</Device>

6.2.5 Data conversion

The tool data is saved in the code carrier as a sequence of bytes. The PLC user program writes
the code carrier data to the previously defined data block (TDIIdentcfg.xml). The data
conversion accesses the data block and generates the tool data record and vice versa.
The following figure displays the scheme for the configuration of the conversion rules for Tool
Ident Connection:

Tool Management
394 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

&RQILJXUDWLRQ3&

&RQYHUVLRQUXOHIURP :.219(57 0&,6&VRXUFHWH[WRIWKH

7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ 7;7
&RQYHUVLRQUXOH
0&&

'HI7RRO'DWW[W

:NRQYHUWZL]DUG

:.219(57 &RQYHUVLRQUXOH
0&;

6,180(5,.'VO

:.219(57
0&;

7RRO,GHQW
FRGHFDUULHU
&RQQHFWLRQ

7RROPDQDJHPHQW
VHUYLFH

Image 6-12 Configuring the conversion rules

Generating conversion rules

As part of the commissioning of Tool Ident Connection, a conversion file must be created with
the Wkonvert wizard application on a configuration PC. The binary file wkonvert.mcx is created.
It contains the conversion rules and default tool data.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 395
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

The following conversion rules can be processed:

● Conversion rule from Tool Ident Connection
Files: wkonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt
Benefits: Guarantee of compatibility with earlier versions of Tool Ident Connection
Note
The structure of the wkonvert.txt file is described in Section Structure of the description file
wkonvert.txt (Page 398).
The structure of the DefToolDat.txt file is described in Section Tool data initialization file
DefToolDat.txt (Page 406).

● Conversion rule in the form of source text in the MCIS-C script language.
Benefits: Extended conversion functionality.
Note
If you want Siemens to create a customer-specific conversion rule for Tool Ident
Connection, please contact your Siemens sales partner.

6.2.5.1 Using the Wkonvert wizard

After installation, the Wkonvert wizard can be started via
Start > Programs > MCIS > TDI > TDI Wkonvert Wizard.

After executing the application, the basic screen form for this application is displayed:

Image 6-13 Wkonvert wizard screen form

Tool Management
396 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

One of the following alternatives can be selected in the basic screen form of the application:
● "convert wKonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt"
Create conversion rule from Tool Ident Connection (files: wkonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt).
● "compile existing MCC-file"
Conversion rule is generated in the form of source text in the MCIS-C script language.
The target directory to output the result file wkonvert.mcx corresponds to the directory in which
the wkonvert.txt file is located.

Note
After creating the conversion rule, the mcx file must be copied to the "/card/addon/sinumerik/
appl/" directory. The operating software must be rebooted in order that the new conversion
rule becomes effective.

6.2.5.2 Messages of the Wkonvert wizard

Messages of the Wkonvert wizard application that can occur while interpreting the wkonvert.txt
and DefToolDat.txt or MCIS-C scripts, are described in this section.
All of the messages are displayed in the final dialog.

Image 6-14 Final dialog

For error messages, the line as well as the source file, in which the error occurred, as well as
additional information on the error profile are displayed in a text box that can be scrolled. To
resolve the error, the error that has occurred must be removed in the source file.
The following table lists possible error messages:

ErrorCode ErrorMessage Meaning

200 File <abcd> could not be read! File: DefToolDat.txt; file cannot be read. Additional information is specified.
201 Unknown data type. File: DefToolDat.txt; for one item, no value has been assigned.
202 Line has no value. File: DefToolDat.txt; "=" missing.
203 Invalid line format. File: DefToolDat.txt; "[" or "]" missing.
100 File <abcd> could not be read! File: wKonvert.txt; file cannot be read. Additional information is specified
101 Error in value ‚DataLen’ File: wKonvert.txt; error when specifying the value 'DataLen'.
102 New block before BlockEnd File: wKonvert.txt; BlockEnd identification missing.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 397
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

ErrorCode ErrorMessage Meaning

103 Missing block numer <xx> File: wKonvert.txt; Block <xx> missing.
104 Line is empty File: wKonvert.txt; the specified line is empty.
105 No item number defined File: wKonvert.txt; the item has no number.
110 Missing item: act=<x>, File: wKonvert.txt; item numbering is incorrect.
last=<y>.
111 Finishing block number <xx> File: wKonvert.txt; block number is incorrect.

After a successful compilation of the source file(s), the following message is output:

Image 6-15 MessageBox

6.2.6 Conversion files wkonvert.txt and DefToolDat.txt

For Tool Ident Connection, the conversion rules are used for the files Wkonvert.txt and
DefToolDat.txt. There are also the code carrier data formats: REAL and DOUBLE.

6.2.6.1 Structure of the description file wkonvert.txt

The data on the code carrier is stored in a particular order. A conversion rule in the form of a
description file is provided so that the tool management can read or write this data flow.
This description file consists of correctly defined tool and cutting edge dialog data. Only this
dialog data can actually be processed by the tool management. All the other data on the code
carrier must not be assigned to any dialog variables; they will then not be processed by the
standard version.
Tool Ident Connection enables the connection of optional software components. These
components are used to adapt this special code carrier data to the SINUMERIK standard. This
means that customer-specific code carrier formats can be read and written by the tool manager;
also, special logic can be implemented in the transport operations of the tool data (e.g.
replacement tools can be taken into account in the NC, additional cutting edges can be created,
etc.).
The description file can be generated as an ASCII file using a standard text editor. This
description file is called wkonvert.txt. It represents the precise image of the data which is on
the code carrier.

Tool Management
398 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Tool dialog data

The tool dialog data is defined as follows:

Table 6-1 Tool dialog data

Dialog variable Data type Designation Assignment $TC...

T1 String Tool name, max. 32 characters $TC_TP2
T2 Integer Duplo number $TC_TP1
T3 Integer Number of cutting edges $P_TOOLND[tno]
tno=tool number
T4 Integer Tool size to the left in half locations $TC_TP3
T5 Integer Tool size to the right in half locations $TC_TP4
T6 Integer Tool size upwards in half locations $TC_TP5
T7 Integer Tool size downwards in half locations $TC_TP6
T8 String Magazine location type $TC_TP7 1)
T9 Integer Tool status $TC_TP8
T10 Integer Type of tool monitoring $TC_TP9
T11 Integer Type of tool search $TC_TP11
T12 2)
Integer Magazine location type $TC_TP7
1)
The character string which is stored there, is an internal control location type that is assigned to the value in $TC_TP7.
This text is defined via the tool management start-up and stored in the database.
2)
This number corresponds to the string from T8 and should be used as an alternative to T8.

Cutting edge dialog data

Table 6-2 Cutting edge dialog data

Dialog variable Data type Designation Assignment $TC...

C1 Integer Subtype $TC_DP1
C4 Integer Cutting edge position $TC_DP2
Geometry tool length compensation
C5 Double Length 1 $TC_DP3
C6 Double Length 2 $TC_DP4
C7 Double Length 3 $TC_DP5
Geometry tool radius compensation
C8 Double Length 1 $TC_DP8
C9 Double Length 2 $TC_DP9
C10 Double Radius 1 $TC_DP6
C11 Double Radius 2 $TC_DP7
C12 Double Angle 1 $TC_DP10
C13 Double Angle 2 $TC_DP11
Wear tool length compensation
C14 Double Length 1 $TC_DP12
C15 Double Length 2 $TC_DP13

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 399
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Dialog variable Data type Designation Assignment $TC...

C16 Double Length 3 $TC_DP14
Wear tool radius compensation
C17 Double Length 1 $TC_DP17
C18 Double Length 2 $TC_DP18
C19 Double Radius 1 $TC_DP15
C20 Double Radius 2 $TC_DP16
C21 Double Angle 1 $TC_DP19
C22 Double Angle 2 $TC_DP20
Base dimension/adapter dimension tool length compensation
C23 Double Basic length 1 $TC_DP21
C24 Double Basic length 2 $TC_DP22
C25 Double Basic length 3 $TC_DP23
C26 Double Undercut angle $TC_DP24
C27 Integer Reverse insert $TC_DP25
C28 Integer Cutting edge number for addressing variables
C29 *) Integer Tool life in minutes $TC_MOP2
C30 *)
Integer Pre-warning limit for tool life in minutes $TC_MOP1
C31 *) Integer Unit quantity $TC_MOP4
C32 *) Integer Prewarning limit unit quantity $TC_MOP3
C33 Double Setpoint tool life in minutes $TC_MOP11
C34 *) Integer Setpoint unit quantity $TC_MOP13
C35 Double Pre-warning limit for wear $TC_MOP5
C36 Double Wear $TC_MOP6
C37 Double Setpoint wear $TC_MOP15
C38 *) Double Tool life in minutes $TC_MOP2
C39 *)
Double Pre-warning limit for tool life in minutes $TC_MOP1
C40 *)
Double Unit quantity $TC_MOP4
C41 *) Double Prewarning limit unit quantity $TC_MOP3
C42 *) Double Setpoint unit quantity $TC_MOP13
A1 - A10 Double User tool data $TC_TPCx
U1 - U10 Double User cutting edge data $TC_DPCx
S1 - S10 Double User monitoring data $TC_MPOCx
*)
C38 and C39 can only be used as an alternative to C29 and C30; C40, C41 and C42 can only be used as an alternative
to C31, C32 and C34.
That data on the code carrier, which is not relevant for tool management, but which may not
be changed when writing to the code carrier, is shown in the description file with a hyphen ( - )
instead of the dialog variable (data gaps).

Tool Management
400 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Data types
The following data types are defined for dialog variables:
● Integer: Value range -32768 to +32767
● Double: Floating point - double the accuracy
● String: String made up of ASCII characters

Keywords
The code carrier description file is structured line-by-line, whereby each line starts with one of
the following keywords:
● Inverted comma
The apostrophe (') marks the beginning of a comment. The characters that follow up to the
end of the line are skipped. Example:
' This is a comment
● Datalen
DATALEN=CONST | VARIABLE 0x<delimiter>
The following data has a constant (CONST) or a variable (VARIABLE) data length. Data
with variable length is terminated with 0x<delimiter>. Example:
DATALEN=VARIABLE 0x0A ’ variable data length, delimiter LF
● Item
Item<n>=<line>
<n> := Consecutive number of the code carrier data, ascending from 1 without gaps
<line> := <(max.) Length in bytes> <code carrier data format> <dialog
variable>
<code carrier data format> : See table, Code carrier data formats
<dialog variable> : Assignment to the dialog variable, see table, Cutting edge dialog
data
Example:
Item1 32 ASCII T3 ’ tool identifier
Item2 3 BCD T2 ’ duplo number
● Bltem
BItem<n>=<line>
<n> := Consecutive number of the code carrier data, ascending from 1 without gaps
<line> := analog Item<n>
Conversion rule for code carrier data <n> within a block. If the code carrier data is assigned
a tool dialog data T<n>, the dialog data is assigned the first value of the code carrier data
in the block.
Example:
BItem1 1 BCD C1 ' subtype
BItem2 1 BCD C4 ' cutting edge position

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 401
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

● Block
Block<n> <repetition rule>
<n> := Consecutive number of block, ascending from 1 without gaps
<repetition rule> := * Item<n>
A block of data BItem<n> follows (up to keyword End_Block<n>) which is stored on the
code carrier according to the <repetition rule>.
In the case of Block <n> * Item <n> Item <n> must be defined before Block <n> .
Example:
Block1 * Item6 ’ Block1 corresponds to repeating the value from
Item6
End_Block<n>
● End_Block
End_Block<n>
<n> := consecutive block number
End identifier for a data block defined with "Block".

Code carrier data formats - <code carrier data format>

The following code-carrier data formats are supported (see Item/BItem).

Table 6-3 Code carrier data formats

Data format Explanation Range of values

ASCII ASCII character set -
INT 16-bit integer (Intel format) -32768 to +32767
BCD Binary-coded decimal number (if necessary, with sign and decimal point): -
Non-relevant decades are preassigned the value 0, left-justified.
REAL 16-bit floating-point number (Intel format): Accuracy, 7 digits ±1.5×10-45 to ± 3.4×1038
DOUBLE 32-bit floating-point number (Intel format): Accuracy, 15-16 digits ±5.0×10-324 to ±1.7×10308
FPX2 Bit integer (SINUMERIK): Least significant byte at the higher order ad‐ -32768 to +32767
dress (inverse to the Intel format)

Assignment between code carrier data and dialog data - <dialog variable>
The conversion rule for Item<n> or BItem<n> also contains the assignment to none/one/
several dialog variables, if necessary with a conversion that is explained in detail in this section.

<dialog variable> := <dvar1>[=(<uv>)] [, <dvar2>[=(<uv>)]

[,<dvar3>[&<dvar4>]=(<uv>)]
[,dvarN>[=(<uv>)]
<dvar> := T<index> | C<index> | _
T = tool data
C = cutting edge data
index = index within tool / cutting edge dialog data
– = no assignment to a dialog variable
<dvar1>&<dvar2>= <uv>
Conversion rule applies to <dvar1> and <dvar2>

Tool Management
402 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

uv := <Tetn>
Tetn := nth tetrad in byte sequence
Byte1, = Tet1 and Tet2
Byte2, = Tet3 and Tet4
Example of the tetrad allocation of the code carrier variables (in BCD format) to dialog variables:
T4=(Tet1), T5=(Tet2), T6=(Tet3), T7=(Tet4)
If the code carrier variable has the value 0x1234, for example, dialog variable T4 is assigned
the value 1, dialog variable T7 the value 4.

6.2.6.2 Examples for the description files wkonvert.txt

After installation, the name of the file is "wkonvert.txt".

Table 6-4 Wkonvert.txt Items

Code carrier Length Data for‐ Dialog vari‐ Comment

variable (bytes) mat able
Item1 32 ASCII T1 ’ Identifier
Item2 3 BCD T2 ’ Duplo
Item3 2 BCD T4=(Tet1), ’ Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom
T5=(Tet2),
T6=(Tet3),
T7=(Tet4)
Item4 32 ASCII T8 ’ Location type
Item5 2 BCD T9 ’ Status
Item6 1 BCD T3 ’ Qty. Cutting edges
Item7 1 BCD T10 ' Type of tool monitoring
Item8 1 BCD T11 ' Type of tool monitoring
’ Cutting edge data Block1 * Item6
BItem1 2 BCD C1 ’ Subtype, type
BItem2 3 BCD C4 ’ Cutting edge position
' Tool length compensation
BItem3 4 BCD C5 ' Length 1
BItem4 4 BCD C5 ' Length 2
BItem5 4 BCD C7 ' Length 3
' Tool radius compensation
BItem6 4 BCD C8 ' Length 1
BItem7 4 BCD C9 ' Length 2
BItem8 4 BCD C10 ' Radius 1
BItem9 4 BCD C11 ' Radius 2
BItem10 4 BCD C12 ' Angle 1
BItem11 4 BCD C13 ' Angle 2
' Wear length compensation
BItem12 4 BCD C14 ' Length 1

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 403
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Code carrier Length Data for‐ Dialog vari‐ Comment

variable (bytes) mat able
BItem13 4 BCD C15 ' Length 2
BItem14 4 BCD C16 ' Length 3
' Wear radius compensation
BItem15 4 BCD C17 ' Length 1
BItem16 4 BCD C18 ' Length 2
BItem17 4 BCD C19 ' Radius 1
BItem18 4 BCD C20 ' Radius 2
BItem19 4 BCD C21 ' Angle 1
BItem20 4 BCD C22 ' Angle 2
' Basic dimension length compensation
Bltem21 4 BCD C23 ’ Basic length 1
Bltem22 4 BCD C24 ’ Basic length 2
Bltem23 4 BCD C25 ’ Basic length 3
Bltem24 4 BCD C26 ' Undercut angle
Bltem25 1 BCD C27 ' Reverse insert
Bltem26 2 BCD C29 ’ Tool life in minutes
Bltem27 2 BCD C30 ’ Pre-warning limit tool life
Bltem28 2 BCD C33 ’ Setpoint tool life in minutes
Bltem29 2 BCD C31 ’ Unit quantity
Bltem30 2 BCD C32 ’ Pre-warning limit unit quantity
Bltem31 2 BCD C32 ’ Setpoint unit quantity
End_Block1

Example with tool and cutting edge OEM data as well as data gaps:

Table 6-5 OEM data for Wkonvert.txt

Code carrier Length Data for‐ Dialog vari‐ Comment

variable (bytes) mat able
Item1 32 ASCII T1 ’ Identifier
Item2 3 BCD T2 ’ Duplo
Item3 2 BCD T4=(Tet1), ’ Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom
T5=(Tet2),
T6=(Tet3),
T7=(Tet4)
Item4 32 ASCII T8 ’ Location type
Item5 2 BCD T9 ’ Status
Item6 1 BCD T3 ’ Qty. Cutting edges
Item7 1 BCD T10 ' Type of tool monitoring
Item8 1 BCD T11 ' Type of tool monitoring
Item9 5 ASCII - ‘ Tool data gap
Item10 4 BCD A1 ’ Tool OEM data 1
’ Cutting edge data Block1 * Item6

Tool Management
404 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Code carrier Length Data for‐ Dialog vari‐ Comment

variable (bytes) mat able
BItem1 2 BCD C1 ’ Subtype, type
BItem2 1 BCD C4 ’ Cutting edge position
' Tool length compensation
BItem3 4 BCD C5 ' Length 1
BItem4 4 BCD C5 ' Length 2
BItem5 4 BCD C7 ' Length 3
' Tool radius compensation
BItem6 4 BCD C8 ' Length 1
BItem7 4 BCD C9 ' Length 2
BItem8 4 BCD C10 ' Radius 1
BItem9 4 BCD C11 ' Radius 2
BItem10 4 BCD C12 ' Angle 1
BItem11 4 BCD C13 ' Angle 2
' Wear length compensation
BItem12 4 BCD C14 ' Length 1
BItem13 4 BCD C15 ' Length 2
BItem14 4 BCD C16 ' Length 3
' Wear radius compensation
BItem15 4 BCD C17 ' Length 1
BItem16 4 BCD C18 ' Length 2
BItem17 4 BCD C19 ' Radius 1
BItem18 4 BCD C20 ' Radius 2
BItem19 4 BCD C21 ' Angle 1
BItem20 4 BCD C22 ' Angle 2
' Basic dimension length compensation
Bltem21 4 BCD C23 ’ Basic length 1
Bltem22 4 BCD C24 ’ Basic length 2
Bltem23 4 BCD C25 ’ Basic length 3
Bltem24 4 BCD C26 ' Undercut angle
Bltem25 1 BCD C27 ' Reverse insert
Bltem26 2 BCD C29 ’ Tool life in minutes
Bltem27 2 BCD C30 ’ Pre-warning limit tool life
Bltem28 2 BCD C33 ’ Setpoint tool life in minutes
Bltem29 2 BCD C31 ’ Unit quantity
Bltem30 2 BCD C32 ’ Pre-warning limit unit quantity
Bltem31 2 BCD C32 ’ Setpoint unit quantity
Bltem32 4 BCD U1 ’ Cutting edge OEM data 1
Bltem33 3 BCD - ’ Cutting edge data gap
End_Block1

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 405
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

6.2.6.3 Tool data initialization file DefToolDat.txt

The default data contained in the "DefToolDat.txt" file initializes the tool data that is not
available in the data source for the services of Tool Ident Connection. This situation can occur
when reading data from the code carrier from an import file or from the production host
computer. The data of a default tool with a cutting edge in the known NC-$ syntax is located
in this file.
The contents of "DefToolDat.txt" must be adapted by the user when configuring Tool Ident
Connection. By removing the comment character in front of the appropriate optional tool data,
its quantity should be adapted to the existing NCK configuration. Also these values assigned
to the tool data in the file can be modified according to the users requirements.

Example of a description file DefToolDat.txt

; Example of a tool default data file.
; NOTICE: Certain data values may not be practical
in this example!
;
;Tool Data
$TC_TP1[1]=1 ; Duplo Number
$TC_TP2[1]=1 ; Tool Name
$TC_TP3[1]=1 ; Tool size left
$TC_TP4[1]=1 ; Tool size right
$TC_TP5[1]=1 ; Tool size up
$TC_TP6[1]=1 ; Tool size low
$TC_TP7[1]=1 ; Mag. location type
$TC_TP8[1]=2 ; Tool Status
$TC_TP9[1]=0 ; Watchdog type
$TC_TP10[1=0 ;
;
;OEM Tool Data
;$TC_TPC1[1]=1.0
;$TC_TPC2[1]=2.0
;$TC_TPC3[1]=3.0
;$TC_TPC4[1]=4.0
;$TC_TPC5[1]=5.0
;$TC_TPC6[1]=6.0
;$TC_TPC7[1]=7.0
;$TC_TPC8[1]=8.0
;$TC_TPC9[1]=9.0
;$TC_TPC10[1]=10.0
;
;Cutting Edge Data

Tool Management
406 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

$TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ; Tool Sub-Type

$TC_DP2[1,1]=0 ; Cutting Edge Orientation
$TC_DP3[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Length 1
$TC_DP4[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Length 2
$TC_DP5[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Length 3
$TC_DP6[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Radius 1
$TC_DP7[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom Radius 2
$TC_DP8[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom-Radius Length 1
$TC_DP9[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom-Radius Length 2
$TC_DP10[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom-Radius Angle 1
$TC_DP11[1,1]=0.0 ; Geom-Radius Angle 2
$TC_DP12[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear Length 1
$TC_DP13[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear Length 2
$TC_DP14[1.1] =0.0 ; Wear Length 3
$TC_DP15[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear Radius 1
$TC_DP16[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear Radius 2
$TC_DP17[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear-Radius Length 1
$TC_DP18[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear-Radius Length 2
$TC_DP19[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear-Radius Angle 1
$TC_DP20[1,1]=0.0 ; Wear-Radius Angle 2
$TC_DP21[1,1]=0.0 ; Base Length 1
$TC_DP22[1,1]=0.0 ; Base Length 2
$TC_DP23[1,1]=0.0 ; Base Length 3
$TC_DP24[1,1]=0.0 ; Tool clearance angle
$TC_DP25[1,1]=0 ; Use of tool reversed
;
;OEM Cutting Edge Data
;$TC_DPC1[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_DPC2[1,1]=20.0
;$TC_DPC3[1,1]=30.0
;$TC_DPC4[1,1]=40.0
;$TC_DPC5[1,1]=50.0
;$TC_DPC6[1,1]=60.0
;$TC_DPC7[1,1]=70.0
;$TC_DPC8[1,1]=80.0
;$TC_DPC9[1,1]=90.0
;$TC_DPC10[1,1]=100.0
;
;Edge monitoring Data
$TC_MOP1[1,1]=0.0 ; Prewarning limit [min]
$TC_MOP2[1,1]=0.0 ; DownTime [min]
$TC_MOP3[1,1]=0 ; Prewarning limit [part]
$TC_MOP4[1,1]=0 ; Part countdown
$TC_MOP5[1,1]=0 ; Wear prewarning limit
$TC_MOP6[1,1]=0 ; Wear
$TC_MOP11[1,1]=0 ; Target service life [min]
$TC_MOP13[1,1]=0 ; Target number of parts
$TC_MOP15[1,1]=0 ; Target wear

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 407
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

;OEM edge monitoring data

;$TC_MOPC1[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC2[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC3[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC4[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC5[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC6[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC7[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC8[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC9[1,1]=0
;$TC_MOPC10[1,1]=0
;
;Location-dependent additive cutting edge offsets
;$TC_SCP13[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP14[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP15[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP16[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP17[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP18[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP19[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP20[1,1]=0.0
;$TC_SCP21[1,1]=0.0
M17

6.2.7 Conversion rule based on the MCIS-C script language

Tool Ident Connection enables conversion rules to be created for the code carrier based on
the MCIS-C script language. Using the script language, the user obtains additional functions
to interpret the data on the code carrier.
Complex code carrier formats can also be processed by using control structures (e.g. if) in
conjunction with relational operators (e.g. >, <).

6.2.7.1 Structure of the conversion rule

The conversion rule is generated as ASCII file with the MCC extension (MCIS-C). The file has
the following structure:

Line Program code

1 _VersionInfo := "Sample for WKONVERT-Logic";
2
3 TmTool Tool = new TmTool(); // Tool-Object
4 unsigned char ToolArray[0]; // Array-Object
5
6 void DecodeToolData()
7 {
8 Tool.TC_TP2 = readASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10 );
9 ...
10 }
11

Tool Management
408 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

12 void EncodeToolData()
13 {
14 writeASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10, Tool.TC_TP2 );
15 ...
16 }

Line 1: Using the construct _VersionInfo, users can save their own version information
within the conversion rule.
Line 3: A TmTool object is defined with the name Tool in this line. Using this object, it is
possible to access individual tool / cutting edge data of a tool.
Line 4: An array object with the ToolArray name is defined in this line. Using this object,
data on the code carrier can be accessed (reading or writing). Initially, the data
carrier size is pre-assigned 0. The actual size of the code carrier is determined
during the run time and can be read with the construct: ToolArray.ArraySize().
Individual bytes of the code carrier are accessed using the construct: ToolAr‐
ray[offset], whereby the value of the offset may assume values from 0 to ToolAr‐
ray.ArraySize()-1.
In addition to directly accessing the individual bytes of the code carrier, additional
help functions can be used. The help functions are always required if data is to be
read or written in a specific coding (e.g. readBCD() / writeBCD()).
Line 6: The function with the name DecodeToolData() is always called from Tool Ident
Connection if data has been read from the code carrier. When this function is
called, the array object contains: ToolArray where all of the code carrier data is
saved. The tool object: Tool initially does not contain any data and is "filled" with
data within these functions.
Line 8: This line represents as example the procedure within the DecodeToolData() func‐
tion. Here, the tool identifier – using the help function readASCII() – is read-out of
the code carrier data and assigned to the data element TC_TP2 of the tool data
set.
Line 12: Tool Ident Connection always calls the function with the name EncodeToolData()
if data is to be written to the code carrier. When this function is called, the array
object contains: ToolArray the actual data from the code carrier (this is initially read
each time before writing to the code carrier). The tool object contains data of the
tool, which should be written to the code carrier.
Line 14 This line represents as example the procedure within the EncodeToolData() func‐
tion. Here, the tool identifier TC_TP2 is written to the code carrier using the help
function writeASCII(). This line represents as example the procedure within the
EncodeToolData() function. Here, the tool identifier TC_TP2 is written to the code
carrier using the help function writeASCII().
The identifiers used: Tool, ToolArray, DecodeToolData, EncodeToolData must not be changed.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 409
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

6.2.7.2 Access to tool data

Within the conversion rule, individual tool data can be accessed reading and writing via the
tool object. All of the data elements that are available are listed in this section. The identifiers
used are oriented to the tool manager (e.g. Tool.TC_TP2 - tool identifier). The meaning of the
individual tool data should be taken from the description of the tool management in Section
"Programming (Page 223)". Cutting edge-related data is accessed by specifying the cutting
edge number (e.g. Tool.TC_DP2[2] – cutting edge position of the cutting edge with cutting
edge number 2).

Identifier Designation MCIC-C

data type
Tool-related data
TC_TP1 Duplo number long
TC_TP2 Tool identifier string
TC_TP3 Size on left long
TC_TP4 Size on right long
TC_TP5 Size above long
TC_TP6 Size below long
TC_TP7 Magazine location type long
TC_TP8 Status long
TC_TP9 Tool monitoring method long
TC_TP10 Replacement change strategy long
TC_TP11 Tool information long
TC_TP_PROTA Name for the protection area string
TC_TP_MAX_VELO Maximum tool speed double
TC_TP_MAX_ACC Maximum tool acceleration double
Tool-related user data
TC_TPC1 OEM user data 1 double
... ... ...
TC_TPC10 OEM user data 10 double
Cut parameters
TC_DP1 [EdgeNo] Tool type long
TC_DP2 [EdgeNo] Cutting edge position double
TC_DP3 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 1 double
TC_DP4 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 2 double
TC_DP5 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 3 double
TC_DP6 [EdgeNo] Geometry radius double
TC_DP7 [EdgeNo] Geometry - corner radius double
TC_DP8 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 4 double
TC_DP9 [EdgeNo] Geometry length 5 double
TC_DP10 [EdgeNo] Geometry - angle 1 double
TC_DP11 [EdgeNo] Geometry - angle 2 double
TC_DP12 [EdgeNo] Wear - length 1 double
TC_DP13 [EdgeNo] Wear - length 2 double
TC_DP14 [EdgeNo] Wear - length 3 double

Tool Management
410 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Identifier Designation MCIC-C

data type
TC_DP15 [EdgeNo] Wear - radius double
TC_DP16 [EdgeNo] Wear - rounding radius double
TC_DP17 [EdgeNo] Wear - projection double
TC_DP18 [EdgeNo] Wear - length 5 double
TC_DP19 [EdgeNo] Wear - angle 1 double
TC_DP20 [EdgeNo] Wear - angle 2 double
TC_DP22 [EdgeNo] Adapter - length 1 double
TC_DP23 [EdgeNo] Adapter – length 2 double
TC_DP24 [EdgeNo] Adapter – length 3 double
TC_DP25 [EdgeNo] Clearance angle double
TC_DPCE [EdgeNo] Cutting edge number CE long
TC_DPH [EdgeNo] H parameter double
TC_DPV [EdgeNo] Tool cutting edge orientation double
TC_DPV3 [EdgeNo] L1 component of the tool cutting edge orientation double
TC_DPV4 [EdgeNo] L2 component of the tool cutting edge orientation double
TC_DPV5 [EdgeNo] L3 component of the tool cutting edge orientation double
TC_DPVN3 L1 component of the orientation normals double
TC_DPVN4 L2 component of the orientation normals double
TC_DPVN5 L3 component of the orientation normals double
TC_DPNT Number of teeth of this cutting edge long
Cutting edge supplementary information
TC_DPC1 [EdgeNo] OEM cutting edge user data 1 double
... ... ...
TC_DPC10 [Edge‐ OEM cutting edge user data 10 double
No]
Cutting edge-related tool monitoring
TC_MOP1 [EdgeNo] Prewarning limit service life double
TC_MOP2 [EdgeNo] Residual tool life double
TC_MOP3 [EdgeNo] Prewarning limit unit quantity long
TC_MOP4 [EdgeNo] Residual unit quantity long
TC_MOP11 [Edge‐ Reference tool life double
No]
TC_MOP13 [Edge‐ Unit quantity reference long
No]
TC_MOP5 [EdgeNo] Wear prewarning limit double
TC_MOP6 [EdgeNo] Wear actual value double
TC_MOP15 [Edge‐ Wear setpoint double
No]
User cutting edge monitoring
TC_MOPC1 OEM user cutting edge monitoring[1] long
... ...
TC_MOPC10 OEM user cutting edge monitoring[10] long
Help attributes

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 411
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Identifier Designation MCIC-C

data type
EDGE_NUM Number of cutting edges (read only) long
EDGE_NO [Edge‐ Cutting edge number (read only) long
Idx] Supplies the cutting edge number of a cutting edge using the cut‐
ting edge index.
The cutting edge index is a value between 1 and
Tool.EDGE_NUM .
Example: Tool with three cutting edges:1, 3, 5
Tool.EDGE_NUM supplies 3
Tool.EDGE_NO[1] supplies 1
Tool.EDGE_NO[2] supplies 3
Tool.EDGE_NO[3] supplies 5
Tool.TC_DP2[5] cutting edge position of the cutting edge with cut‐
ting edge number 5.

6.2.7.3 Auxiliary functions for numerical coding

Tool data can be saved on the code carrier using various codings. The following auxiliary
functions are available when reading and writing this data within MCIS-C:

Note
Syntax
All of these functions always have as the first parameter, the array object: Array and an offset
within this array as second parameter. The offset can assume values between 0 and
ToolArray.ArraySize()-1. For data types with a variable length, the length of the data on the
code carrier is also transferred, (e.g. readASCII(array, offset, length)).

readASCII() / writeASCII()
string readASCII ( array, offset, length )
writeASCII ( array, offset, length, string [,precision] )

The functions allow ASCII strings to be read and written to. When writing, the string is aligned
"right justified". If the string that is written is longer than the parameter length, then the excess
characters are cut off. If the string is shorter, then the written range is filled with spaces. When
reading, leading spaces and spaces at the end of a line are ignored. The writeASCII() function
contains an optional "precison" parameter with which the number of decimal places can be
specified. If this parameter is not used, then the number of decimal places configured in
SINUMERIK is used.
Examples:

writeASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5, "ABC" );

readASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "ABC"

Tool Management
412 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Hex value 41 42 43 20 20
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

writeASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5, "ABCDEFGH" );

readASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "ABCDE"

Hex value 41 42 43 44 45
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

writeASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5, 3.94 );

writeASCII ( ToolArray, 5, 5, 3.94, 0 );
writeASCII ( ToolArray, 10, 5, 3.94, 1 );
readASCII ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "3.94"
readASCII ( ToolArray, 5, 5 ); => "00004"
readASCII ( ToolArray, 10, 5 ); => "003.9"

Hex value 30 33 2E 39 34 30 30 30 30 34 30 30 33 2E 39
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readBCD() / writeBCD()
double readBCD ( array, offset, length )
writeBCD ( array, offset, length, val [,precision] )

The functions allow BCD numbers to be read and written.

Examples:

writeBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5, 3.11 );

readBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "3.11"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 5, 5, -47.11 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "-47.11"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 10, 5, 4711 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 10, 5 ); => "4711"

Hex value B0 00 00 3E 11 D0 00 04 7E 11 B0 00 00 47 11
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

writeBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5, -3.1234 );

readBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 5 ); => "-3.12"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 5, 5, 1.2 );

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 413
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

readBCD ( ToolArray, 5, 5 ); => "1.2"

Hex value D0 00 00 3E 32 B0 00 04 1E 20
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

writeBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 4, 3.94 );

readBCD ( ToolArray, 0, 4 ); => "3.94"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 4, 4, 3.94, 0 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 4, 4 ); => "4"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 8, 4, 3.94, 1 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 8, 4 ); => "3.9"
writeBCD ( ToolArray, 12, 4, 3.94, 2 );
readBCD ( ToolArray, 12, 4 ); => "3.94"

Hex value B0 00 3E 94 B0 00 00 04 B0 00 03 E9 B0 00 3E 94
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readINT() / writeINT()
int readINT ( array, offset )
writeINT ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow signed 16-bit numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in the S7
format (Big Endian).
Example:

writeINT ( ToolArray, 0, 1 );
readINT ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "1"
writeINT ( ToolArray, 2, 4711 ); // hex: 1267
readINT ( ToolArray, 2 ); => "4711"
writeINT ( ToolArray, 4, -300 ); // hex: FED4
readINT ( ToolArray, 4 ); => "-300"
writeINT ( ToolArray, 6, -1 ); // hex: FFFF
readINT ( ToolArray, 6 ); => "-1"

Hex value 00 01 12 67 FE: D4 FF FF

Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readDINT() / writeDINT()
long readDINT ( array, offset )
writeDINT ( array, offset, val )

Tool Management
414 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

The functions allow signed 32-bit numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in the S7
format (Big Endian).
Example:

writeDINT ( ToolArray, 0, 1234 ); // hex: 4D2

readDINT ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "1234"
writeDINT ( ToolArray, 4, -1234 ); // hex: FFFFFB2E
readDINT ( ToolArray, 4 ); => "-1234"

Hex value 00 00 04 D2 FF FF FB 2E
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readWORD() / writeWORD()
long readWORD ( array, offset )
writeWORD ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow unsigned 16-bit numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in the
S7 format (Big Endian).
Example:

writeWORD ( ToolArray, 0, 1 ); // hex: 1

readWORD ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "1"
writeWORD ( ToolArray, 2, 50000 ); // hex: C350
readWORD ( ToolArray, 2, ); => "50000"

Hex value 00 01 C3 50
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readDWORD() / writeDWORD()
unsigned long readDWORD ( array, offset )
writeDWORD ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow unsigned 32-bit numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in the
S7 format (Big Endian).
Example:

writeDWORD ( ToolArray, 0, 12345678 ); // hex: 075BCD15

readDWORD ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "12345678"
writeDWORD ( ToolArray, 4, 987654321 ); // hex: 3ADE68B1
readDWORD ( ToolArray, 4, ); => "987654321"

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 415
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Hex value 07 5B CD 15 3A DE 68 B1
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

readREAL() / writeREAL()
float readREAL ( array, offset )
writeREAL ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow 32-bit floating-point numbers to be read and written. The data is stored in
the S7 format (REAL).
Example:

writeREAL ( ToolArray, 0, 3.11f );

readREAL ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "3.11"
writeREAL ( ToolArray, 4, 08.15f );
readREAL ( ToolArray, 4, ); => "08.15"

Hex value 40 47 0A 3D 41 02 66 66
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Note
The notation 3.11f ensures that the constant 3.11 is interpreted as 32-bit floating-point number
(float). 64-bit (double) is used as default.

readDOUBLE() / writeDOUBLE()
double readDOUBLE ( array, offset )
writeDOUBLE ( array, offset, val )

The functions allow 64-bit floating-point numbers to be read and written. The data correspond
to the IEEE 754 standard.
Example:

writeDOUBLE ( ToolArray, 0, 3.11 );

readDOUBLE ( ToolArray, 0, ); => "3.11"
writeDOUBLE ( ToolArray, 8, 08.15 );
readDOUBLE ( ToolArray, 8, ); => "08.15"

Hex value 40 08 E1 47 AE 14 7A E1 40 20 4C CC CC CC CC CD
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Tool Management
416 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

ReverseByteOrder ()
ReverseByteOrder ( val )

The functions xxxINT(), xxxDINT(), xxxWORD() and xxxDWORD() read and write values in
the Big-Endian format. This corresponds to S7 formats. If values are to be read / written in the
Little-Endian format, then the function ReverseByteOrder() can be used for this purpose.
Example:

writeINT ( ToolArray, 0, 1 );
writeINT ( ToolArray, 2, ReverseByteOrder(1) );
ReverseByteOrder( readINT( ToolArray, 2 ) ); => "1"
writeDINT ( ToolArray, 4, 4711 );
writeDINT ( ToolArray, 8, ReverseByteOrder(4711L) );
ReverseByteOrder( readDINT( ToolArray, 8 ) ); => "4711"

Hex value 00 01 01 00 00 00 12 67 67 12 00 00
Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Note
The notation 4711L ensures that the constant 4711 is interpreted as 32-bit constant. 16-bit
(int) is used as default.

PlaceTypeToString () / PlaceTypeFromString ()
The location type of a tool (TC_TP7) is managed in SINUMERIK Operate exclusively as a
numerical value. In HMI Advanced, a string value is managed for the location type. The
assignment between the numerical value and the string value is realized in the database
WZACCESS.MDB.
To guarantee the compatibility of code carrier formats between HMI-Advanced and
SINUMERIK Operate, the "ToolSpec.xml" configuration file is introduced in Tool Ident
Connection. This file must be saved in the control in the same directory as the mcx file.

Table 6-6 Example, ToolSpec.xml

<!--The following data structure is used to convert the location type
information ($TC_TP7) from a numeric value to a string value and vice versa.
The string comparison is case-sensitive in the conversion from text → code--
>
<ToolSpecConversion>
<ToolSpec code="1" text="normal"/>
<ToolSpec code="2" text="large"/>
<ToolSpec code="3" text="small"/>
</ToolSpecConversion>

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 417
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

It is possible to access ToolSpec.xml within the conversion rule using the auxiliary functions
PlaceTypeToString() and PlaceTypeFromString() .

PlaceTypeToString ( NumType )
PlaceTypeFromString ( StrType )

Example:

PlaceTypeToString ( 1 ); ⇒ "normal"
PlaceTypeToString ( 2 ); ⇒ "large"
PlaceTypeToString ( 3 ); ⇒ "small"

PlaceTypeFromString ("normal" ); ⇒ 1
PlaceTypeFromString ("large" ); ⇒ 2
PlaceTypeFromString ("small" ); ⇒ 3

6.2.7.4 Configuration of ToolSpec.xml

PlaceTypeToString () / PlaceTypeFromString ()
The location type of a tool (TC_TP7) is always listed as a numeric value in SINUMERIK
Operate. A string value is used for the location type in HMI-Advanced. The assignment
between the numeric value and the string value is performed in the WZACCESS.MDB
database.
To guarantee the compatibility of code carrier formats between HMI-Advanced and
SINUMERIK Operate, the "ToolSpec.xml" configuration file is introduced in Tool Ident
Connection. This file must be saved in the control in the same directory as the mcx file.

Example 1:
<!--The following data structure is used to convert the location type
information ($TC_TP7) from a numeric value to a string value and vice
versa. The string comparison is case-sensitive in the conversion from
text → code-->
<ToolSpecConversion>
<ToolSpec code="1" text="normal"/>
<ToolSpec code="2" text="large"/>
<ToolSpec code="3" text="small"/>
</ToolSpecConversion>
The ToolSpec.xml can be accessed within the conversion rule with the
PlaceTypeToString() and PlaceTypeFromString() auxiliary functions.
PlaceTypeToString ( NumType )
PlaceTypeFromString ( StrType )

Example 2:
PlaceTypeToString ( 1 ); ⇒ "normal"
PlaceTypeToString ( 2 ); ⇒ "large"
PlaceTypeToString ( 3 ); ⇒ "small"

PlaceTypeFromString ("normal" ); ⇒ 1
PlaceTypeFromString ("large" ); ⇒ 2

Tool Management
418 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

PlaceTypeFromString ("small" ); ⇒ 3

6.2.7.5 Description of the MCIS-C script language

In this section, relevant MCIS-C specific subjects are discussed, which must be taken into
account when configuring logical functions.

Keywords
Keywords are reserved for the compiler as language elements and must not be used as names
of classes, variables and functions.

bool do if true
break double int unsigned
case else long void
char false return while
continue float string
default for switch

Data types
The following table lists all of the data types for the MCIS-C script language, which can be
used for programming:

Data type Variable Range of values

bool 1 bit true / false
char 8 bits -128 - 127
int 16 bits -32768 - 32767
long 32 bits -2147483648 - 2147483647
unsigned char 8 bits 0 - 255
unsigned int 16 bits 0 - 65535
unsigned long 32 bits 0 - 4294967295
float 32 bits 1.175494351e-38 - 3.402823466e+38F
double 64 bits 2.2250738585072014e-308 - 1.7976931348623158e+308
string up to 64KB Dynamic up to 64KB

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 419
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

Operators and special characters

The MCIS-C script language supports the following operators and special characters:

! * -= <= [ }
!= *= / = ] ~
% + /= == ^
%= ++ : > ^=
& += ; >= {
&& , < >> |
&= - << >>= |=
( -- <<= ? ||
) .

Special features of the "string" data type

Contrary to the programming language C, MCIS-C has a dynamic string-data type. The data
type is comparable with the string data type of the Java or C# programming languages. A
"string" type variable can include a character string of up to 64KB. Strings can be linked using
the ± operator. Assigning binary data types to a string variable means that the binary value is
converted into a string.
Example:

string s;

s = "Hello"; // s= "Hello"
s = s + " "; // s= "Hello "
s += "World!"; // s= "Hello World!"

6.2.8 Examples

Overview
The following source code examples are based on the MCIS-C script language to create
conversion examples for Tool Ident Connection. These examples are included on the data
carrier of the Wkonvert wizard.

Tool Management
420 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

SampleWkonvert.mcc

_VersionInfo := "SampleWkonvert.mcc: Example for WKONWERT logic";

TmTool Tool = new TmTool(); // tool object

unsigned char ToolArray[0]; // data of the data carrier

void DecodeToolData()
{

Tool.TC_TP1 = readWORD( ToolArray, 0 ); // Duplo number byte 00-01

Tool.TC_TP2 = readASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10); // tool name byte 02-11
Tool.TC_TP3 = ToolArray[12]; // size to the left byte 12
Tool.TC_TP4 = ToolArray[13]; // size to the right byte 13
Tool.TC_TP5 = ToolArray[14]; // size to the top byte 14
Tool.TC_TP6 = ToolArray[15]; // size to the bottom byte 15
Tool.TC_TP7 = readINT(ToolArray, 16 ); // location type byte 16-17

int EdgeCount = readINT(ToolArray, 18 ); // number of cutting edges byte 18-19

int EdgeIndex; // running variable for cutting edges

for ( EdgeIndex = 1 ; EdgeIndex <= EdgeCount ; EdgeIndex++ )

{
int EdgeOffset = 20 + (EdgeIndex-1) * 24; // offset at the beginning of the particular cutting edge
// 24: Size of the cutting edge data

int EdgeNo = readINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 0 ); // cutting edge number byte 20-21
Tool.TC_DP1[EdgeNo] = readINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 2 ); // tool type byte 22-23
Tool.TC_DP2[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 4 ); // cutting edge position byte 24-27
Tool.TC_DP3[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 8 ); // geometry length 1 byte 28-31
Tool.TC_DP4[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 12 ); // geometry length 2 byte 32-35
Tool.TC_DP5[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 16 ); // geometry length 3 byte 36-39
Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 20 ); // geometry radius byte 40-43
}
}

void EncodeToolData()
{
writeWORD ( ToolArray, 0, Tool.TC_TP1 ); // Duplo number byte 00-01
writeASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10, Tool.TC_TP2 ); // tool name byte 02-11

ToolArray[12] = Tool.TC_TP3; // size to the left byte 12

ToolArray[13] = Tool.TC_TP4; // size to the right byte 13
ToolArray[14] = Tool.TC_TP5; // size to the top byte 14
ToolArray[15] = Tool.TC_TP6; // size to the bottom byte 15

writeINT ( ToolArray, 16, Tool.TC_TP7 ); // location type byte 16-17

int EdgeCount = Tool.EDGE_NUM;

writeINT ( ToolArray, 18, EdgeCount ); // number of cutting edges byte 18-19

int EdgeIndex;

for ( EdgeIndex = 1 ; EdgeIndex <= EdgeCount ; EdgeIndex++ )

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 421
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

{
int EdgeNo = Tool.EDGE_NO[EdgeIndex]; // cutting edge number
int EdgeOffset = 20 + (EdgeIndex-1) * 24; // offset to the beginning of the particular cutting edge
// 24: Size of the cutting edge data

writeINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 0, EdgeNo ); // cutting edge number byte 20-21

writeINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 2, Tool.TC_DP1[EdgeNo] ); // tool type byte 22-23
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 4, Tool.TC_DP2[EdgeNo] ); // cutting edge position byte 24-27
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 8, Tool.TC_DP3[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 1 byte 28-31
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 12, Tool.TC_DP4[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 2 byte 32-35
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 16, Tool.TC_DP5[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 3 byte 36-39
writeREAL ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 20, Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo] ); // geometry radius byte 40-43
}
}

Tool Management
422 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

SampleToolSize.mcc

_VersionInfo := "SampleToolSize.mcc: Example for WKONWERT logic";

TmTool Tool = new TmTool(); // tool object

unsigned char ToolArray[0]; // data of the data carrier

void DecodeToolData()
{

Tool.TC_TP1 = readWORD( ToolArray, 0 ); // Duplo number byte 00-01

Tool.TC_TP2 = readASCII( ToolArray, 2, 10); // tool name byte 02-11
Tool.TC_TP7 = readINT(ToolArray, 12 ); // location type byte 12-13

int EdgeCount = readINT(ToolArray, 14 ); // number of cutting edges byte 14-15

int EdgeIndex; // running variable for cutting edges

int ToolSize = 1; // tool size in half locations

for ( EdgeIndex = 1 ; EdgeIndex <= EdgeCount ; EdgeIndex++ )

{
int EdgeOffset = 16 + (EdgeIndex-1) * 24; // offset that the beginning of the particular cutting edge
// 24: Size of the cutting edge data

int EdgeNo = readINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 0 ); // cutting edge number byte16-17

Tool.TC_DP1[EdgeNo] = readINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 2 ); // tool type byte 18-19

Tool.TC_DP2[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 4 ); // cutting edge position byte 20-23
Tool.TC_DP3[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 8 ); // geometry length 1 byte 24-27
Tool.TC_DP4[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 12 ); // geometry length 2 byte 28-31
Tool.TC_DP5[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 16 ); // geometry length 3 byte 32-35
Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo] = readREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 20 ); // geometry radius byte 36-39

double to radius = Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo];

if ( to radius > 30.0 && ToolSize < 4 ) ToolSize = 4;

else if ( tool radius >= 20.0 && ToolSize < 3 ) ToolSize = 3;
else if ( tool radius >= 10.0 && ToolSize < 2 ) ToolSize = 2;
}

Tool.TC_TP3 = ToolSize; // size to the left

Tool.TC_TP4 = ToolSize; // size to the right
Tool.TC_TP5 = ToolSize; // size to the top
Tool.TC_TP6 = ToolSize; // size to the bottom
}

void EncodeToolData()
{
writeWORD ( ToolArray, 0, Tool.TC_TP1 ); // Duplo number byte 00-01
writeASCII ( ToolArray, 2, 10, Tool.TC_TP2 ); // tool name byte 02-11
writeINT ( ToolArray, 12, Tool.TC_TP7 ); // location type Byte 12-13

int EdgeCount = Tool.EDGE_NUM;

writeINT ( ToolArray, 14, EdgeCount ); // number of cutting edges Byte 14-15

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 423
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.2 Configuration

int EdgeIndex;

for ( EdgeIndex = 1 ; EdgeIndex <= EdgeCount ; EdgeIndex++ )

{
int EdgeNo = Tool.EDGE_NO[EdgeIndex] ; // cutting edge number
int EdgeOffset = 16 + (EdgeIndex-1) * 24; // offset at the beginning of the particular cutting edge
// 24: Size of the cutting edge data

writeINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 0, EdgeNo ); // cutting edge number byte 16-17

writeINT ( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 2, Tool.TC_DP1[EdgeNo] ); // tool type byte 18-19
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 4, Tool.TC_DP2[EdgeNo] ); // cutting edge position byte 20-23
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 8, Tool.TC_DP3[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 1 byte 24-27
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 12, Tool.TC_DP4[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 2 byte 28-31
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 16, Tool.TC_DP5[EdgeNo] ); // geometry length 3 byte 32-35
writeREAL( ToolArray, EdgeOffset + 20, Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo] ); // geometry radius byte 36-39
}
}

Tool Management
424 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3.1 Structure
Tool Ident Connection has a parameterizable PLC interface with which defined services/
functions can be triggered or executed. Data for the services/functions is saved in a defined
data area of the PLC interface; the area for the return value of the services/functions is also
provided there.

'%





7UDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV

5HWXUQSDUDPHWHUV

3/&LQWHUIDFH

3DUDPHWHUVRSHUDWLQJDUHD





Image 6-16 Structure of the PLC interface

6.3.2 Function call of the PLC interface

The interface occupies six bytes in the PLC, has a fixed structure and the following assignment
(the table refers to the default parameterization of the interface in DB19 with offset 250):

Table 6-7 Structure of the PLC interface

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DB19.DBX250.0 Request BOOL True,False Requesting the task
DB19.DBB251 K_Code BYTE 0…127 Command code
DB19.DBX252.0 Done BOOL True,False Task successfully completed
DB19.DBX252.1 Error BOOL True,False Task ended with error
DB19.DBX252.2 Active BOOL True,False Task is being processed
DB19.DBX252.7 Ident_Ready BOOL True,False Status for power up
DB19.DBB253 K_CodeError BYTE 0 ... 127 K-Code in case of an error
DB19.DBW254 Error_Code INT -3276 ... 32767 Error code

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 425
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

Note
The PLC interface can only function and accept tasks after the status bit Ident_Ready has
been set to "1".
If the request bit has already been set, it is reset and error code 0xFFFF is written into the
Error_Code word in the PLC.

6.3.3 Assignment of the PLC for transfer parameters

Various transfer parameters are required, depending on the command code, to execute certain
functions. The required transfer parameters are also stored in the PLC; this data area occupies
56 bytes and has the following fixed structure (the table refers to the default parameterization
of the interface in DB19 with offset 140):

Table 6-8 Assignment of the PLC for transfer parameters

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DB19.DBW140 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DB19.DBW142 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DB19.DBB144 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DB19.DBW178 T number INT -1…32000 T number of the tool
DB19.DBW180 Magazine location INT -1…32000 Magazine location number of the tool
DB19.DBW182 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Tool size
DB19.DBB184 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DB19.DBB185 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half locations
DB19.DBB186 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DB19.DBB187 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half locations
DB19.DBB188 Channel BYTE 1…127 Channel number of the tool
DB19.DBB189 Loading Place BYTE 1…127 Number of the loading/unloading loca‐
tion
DB19.DBW190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DB19.DBB192 Unit BYTE 1…127 Code carrier number
DB19.DBB193 NCU_Index BYTE 1…127 Name of the NCU
DB19.DBW194 FileIndex INT 0…32000 File index (Import/Export)
DB19.DBX196.0 Active Enable BOOL True, False Hide status bit "Tool active"
DB19.DBX196.1 Override BOOL True, False Overwrite file
DB19.DBX196.2 LoadTool BOOL True, False Load tool after being created
DB19.DBX196.3 DeleteTool BOOL True, False Delete tool after unloading

Note
The "NCU_Index" parameter is currently not evaluated by Tool Ident Connection.

Tool Management
426 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3.4 Assignment of the PLC for return values

To execute certain functions, various return parameters are supplied, depending on the
command code. They are also stored in the PLC; this data area occupies 50 bytes and has
the following fixed structure (the table refers to the default parameterization of the interface in
DB19 with offset 198):

Table 6-9 Assignment of the PLC for return parameters

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DBW 198 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DBW 200 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DBB 202 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 236 T number INT -1…32000 T number of the tool
DBW 238 ToolState INT -1…32000 Tool status
DBW 240 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Tool size
DBB 242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DBB 243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half locations
DBB 244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DBB 245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half locations
DBW 246 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number of the tool
DBW 248 Magazine Place INT 0…32000 Magazine location number of the tool

6.3.5 Executing functions

6.3.5.1 General sequence when executing functions

The following chronological sequence is defined (positive execution) for executing functions
for the PLC interface:
PLC interface user:
1. Transfer parameters required are written in the PLC (DB19 – offset 140)
2. Command code is defined (DB19.DBB251)
3. Request bit is set (DB19.DBX.250.0)
Tool Ident Connection:
1. Reads out the command code (DB19.DBB251)
2. Checks whether the value read-out is valid
3. Sets the active bit (DB19.DBB251.2)
4. Request is executed
5. Writes the value "0" to the error code word (DB19.DBW253)
6. Sets the done bit (DB19.DBX251.0)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 427
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

PLC interface user:

1. Evaluates done bit or error bit and possibly the error code
2. Resets the request bit (DB19.DBX.250.0)
Tool Ident Connection:
1. Resets the done bit and error bit back to "0" (DB19.DBX251.0, DB19.DBX251.1)
2. Deletes the error code word (DB19.DBW253)

Tool Management
428 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3.5.2 Pulse diagram for positive execution of a function

The following pulse diagram clearly shows the chronological sequence when executing a
function via the PLC interface:

5HTXHVW%LW '%'%; 

$FWLYH '%'%;


'RQH '%'%; 

 
(UURU '%'%;

① Function initiated by the user

● Before initiating, the user writes the required transfer parameters and the K code into the PLC
● When triggered, Tool Ident Connection evaluates the K code
② Feedback from Tool Ident Connection
● The active bit is set if the K code is valid
③ Processing period
● Tool Ident Connection reads the required transfer parameters and performs the desired operation / PI service
● Depending on the function, return parameters are written to the PLC
④ Feedback, processing
● After successful execution of the function, Tool Ident Connection writes "0" to the error code word and sets the
done bit
● Resets the active bit
⑤ User responds to the falling edge of the active bit
● The user evaluates the done bit or error bit and possibly the error code word, reads possible return parameters
and resets the request bit
⑥ Tool Ident Connection reacts to the falling edge of the request bit
● Sets the done bit and error bit to "0"
● Error code word is set to "0"

Image 6-17 Pulse diagram for positive execution

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 429
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3.5.3 Pulse diagram when negative execution of a function

The following pulse diagram clearly shows the chronological sequence when executing a
function via the PLC interface with negative output:

5HTXHVW%LW '%'%; 

$FWLYH '%'%;


 
'RQH '%'%;


(UURU '%'%;

① Function initiated by the user

● Before initiating, the user writes the required transfer parameters and the K code into the PLC
● When triggered, Tool Ident Connection evaluates the K code
② Feedback from Tool Ident Connection
● The active bit is set if the K code is valid
③ Processing period
● Tool Ident Connection reads the required transfer parameters and performs the desired operation / PI service
● Depending on the function, return parameters are written to the PLC
④ Feedback, processing
● After unsuccessful execution of the function, Tool Ident Connection writes the returned error code to the error
code word and sets the error bit
● Resets the active bit
⑤ User responds to the falling edge of the active bit
● The user evaluates the error bit and error code word and resets the request bit
⑥ Tool Ident Connection reacts to the falling edge of the request bit
● Sets the done bit and error bit to "0"
● Error code word is set to "0"

Image 6-18 Pulse diagram for negative execution

6.3.5.4 Pulse diagram "Ident_Ready" signal

The "Ident_Ready" signal serves as the ready signal of Tool Ident Connection. The PLC user
sets the parameter "Ident_Ready" (DB19.DBX252.7) in the PLC interface to the value "1".
Tool Ident Connection reacts to the rising edge of the "Ident_Ready" signal and resets the
significance of the parameter to the value "0".

Tool Management
430 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

,GHQWB5HDG\  

① Function initiated by the user

● The PLC user sets the PLC data "Ident_Ready" to a value of "1"
② Feedback from Tool Ident Connection
● Tool Ident Connection reacts to the rising edge and resets the significance of the PLC data
to "0".

Image 6-19 Pulse diagram of the status signal Ident_Ready

6.3.6 PLC interface for the Parameter operating area

6.3.6.1 Assignment of the PLC interface for the Parameter area

ParamTM PLC interface

The "ParamTM" PLC interface is used in conjunction with the following functions:
● New tool from code carrier
● Unload tool/delete from code carrier

Configuration
In addition, this interface must be configured in the "tdidentcfg.xml" file in the
"ParamTMInterface" section.

Table 6-10 Structure of the "ParamTM-Interface" PLC interface

PLC address Identifier Type Range of values Significance

DB19.DBX256.0 Request BOOL True, False Requests the task
DB19.DBB257 Reserve BYTE
DB19.DBX258.0 Done BOOL True, False Task successfully completed
DB19.DBX258.1 Error BOOL True, False Task ended with error
DB19.DBX258.2 Active BOOL True, False Task is being processed
DB19.DBX258.3 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX258.4 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX258.5 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX258.6 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX252.7 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX259.0 Read BOOL True, False Read tool data from CT
DB19.DBX259.1 Write BOOL True, False Write tool data to CT

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 431
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

PLC address Identifier Type Range of values Significance

DB19.DBX259.2 Cancel BOOL True, False Operator has canceled read/write op‐
eration
DB19.DBX259.3 Write BOOL True, False Selective writing of CT data
DB19.DBX259.4 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX259.5 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX259.6 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBX259.7 Reserve BOOL
DB19.DBW260 Error_Code INT 32768 … 32767 PLC error code
Transfer parameters
DB19.DBW262 PMagazine INT 32768 … 32767 Magazine number
DB19.DBW264 PPlace INT 32768 … 32767 Magazine location number
DB19.DBW266 PTnumber INT 32768 … 32767 T number

6.3.6.2 Load the tool

"New tool from code carrier" function

The "New tool from code carrier" function is executed on the SINUMERIK Operate in the
"Parameter" area. As a consequence, the "Read" function is executed in the PLC interface.
The following pulse diagrams are shown in the following:
Sequence (Page 433)
Sequence when canceled by the PLC (Page 434)

Tool Management
432 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3.6.3 Sequence

Sequence
The following pulse diagram clearly shows an error-free sequence of the
"New tool from code carrier" function.

6,180(5,.2SHUDWH
5HDG '%'%;

5HTXHVW '%'%; 

3/&
$FWLYH '%'%; 


'RQH '%'%;

(UURU '%'%;

 

① Function initiated by the user

With the "New tool from code carrier" function, in the PLC interface, the signals are set to Read = 1" and Request = 1.
② Feedback from the PLC
The PLC then sets the signal to Active = 1".
③ Machining time
The PLC reads the tool data from the code carrier, and saves it in the configured data block.
④ Feedback, machining time
● If all of the tool data is in the data block, the PLC sets the following signals "Active = 0" and "Done = 1".
● SINUMERIK Operate then resets the "Read" and "Request" signals.
● The PLC also resets the "Done" signal.
⑤ Machining time
The HMI reads the tool data from the data block and the tool is loaded.

Image 6-20 Pulse diagram for positive execution

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 433
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3.6.4 Sequence when canceled by the PLC

Sequence
The following pulse diagram shows an incorrect sequence of the
"New tool from code carrier" function.

6,180(5,.2SHUDWH
5HDG '%'%;

5HTXHVW '%'%; 

3/&
$FWLYH '%'%; 

'RQH '%'%;

(UURU '%'%;

① Function initiated by the user

In the PLC interface, the signals "Read = 1" and "Request = 1" are set.
② Feedback from the PLC
The PLC sets the signal "Active = 1".
③ Machining time
The PLC reads the tool data from the code carrier, and saves it in the configured data block.
④ Feedback, machining time
If the code carrier was not read, then the following happens in the PLC interface:
● The error cause is written into the "Error_Code" element.
● The PLC sets the signals "Active = 0" and "Error = 1".
● SINUMERIK Operate then resets the "Read" and "Request" signals.
● The PLC also resets the "Error" and the "Error_Code" signal.

Image 6-21 Pulse diagram when canceled by the PLC

Tool Management
434 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3.6.5 Unloading a tool

"Unload tool / delete on code carrier" function

The "Unload tool / delete on code carrier" function is executed on the SINUMERIK Operate in
the "Parameter" area. As a consequence, the "Read" function is executed in the PLC interface,
and then the "Write" function is executed.
This sequence ensures that the content on the code carrier, which is not written to with the
current tool data as result of the conversion rule, is retained.
Please refer to the following sections for the sequence of the "Read" function.
The sequence of the "Write" function corresponds to the "Read" sequence, with the difference
that the "DB19.DBX259.1" signal is used.
Sequence (Page 433)
Sequence when canceled by the PLC (Page 434)

6.3.6.6 Diagnostics

Settings
The following settings must be made in order to set the diagnostics of the described sequences.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 435
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

Procedure
1. Select the "Startup" operating area.
2. Press the "SINUMERIK Operate", "Diagnostics", and "Extended" softkeys.
3. Make the following settings:

Image 6-22 Activate trace

Image 6-23 Activate trace

Note
Diagnostics are only available when the manufacturer's password has been entered.
Within a conversion rule, using the print() command, the user can generate an output in the
diagnostics, for example: print( "Radius", Tool.TC_DP6[EdgeNo], " EdgeNo:=", EdgeNo, "\r\n");

Tool Management
436 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

6.3.6.7 Restrictions
The following restrictions apply:
● The "Active (DB19.DBX258.2)" signal is optional. SINUMERIK Operate does not evaluate
the signal.
● The "Cancel (DB19.DBX259.2)" signal is not used. A function cannot be canceled by
SINUMERIK Operate.
● SINUMERIK Operate does not use the following transfer parameters:
– PMagazine
– PPlace
– PTnumber
● Several units can be configured in the "tdiidentcfg.xml" file. However, in the data block only
the "Unit = 1" is used.

6.3.6.8 Error messages

Error messages that are transferred in the PLC are displayed on the user interface in the form
of an error code, for example, Error_Code (DB19.DBW260)
Further, the following error codes can occur:

Error code Description

-602 The user initiates a new function, while an active function has still not been completed.
-603 The PLC interface is not ready.
The "Done" signal is present, and prevents a new function from being initiated.

6.3.7 PLC data types

The used PLC data types and how they are interpreted by "Tool Ident Connection" is described
in the following table.

Table 6-11 PLC data used

Data type Range of values Note

BOOL TRUE, FALSE Is used if individual bits should be set in the PLC.
(TRUE: Bit = 1, FALSE: Bit = 0)
BYTE -128...127 PLC byte

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 437
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.3 PLC interface in the DB19

Data type Range of values Note

INT -32768...32767 PLC word, whose first byte contains the high byte and the
second byte contains the low byte.
Example: PLC word 140 comprises the two PLC bytes 140
and 141 together and should be allocated the value 120.
Byte 140: 0 byte 141: 120
String xx character Strings occupy xx+2 bytes in the PLC as the first two bytes
contain the maximum length and the actual length of the
string. The actual string therefore does not start until the 3rd
byte. The individual characters are saved in the correspond‐
ing bytes as ASCII code.
PLC strings do not have to end with a zero because the actual
length is always specified in the 2nd byte of the string.
Example:
"Hello" should be saved in a string, which starts at PLC byte
144 and may only have a maximum length of 32 characters.
This results in the following assignment of the bytes:
Byte 144 = 32 max. length of the string
Byte 145 = 5 actual length of the string
Byte 146 = 72 H
Byte 147 = 97 a
Byte 148 = 108 l
Byte 149 = 108 l
Byte 150 = 111 o

Tool Management
438 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

6.4 Command codes

6.4.1 Functional scope of the PLC interface (K codes)

Functional scope of the PLC interface

The PLC interface has a permanently defined range of functions. Every defined function/
service is assigned a unique command code (K code). Depending on the command to be
executed, before setting the request bit, various transfer parameters must be written to the
PLC.
The following functions can be executed via Tool Ident Connection using the PLC interface:

K code Description
0 Loading from the code carrier
1 Unloading from the code carrier
4 Unloading to the tool cabinet
5 Loading from the production control system
7 Loading from the tool list
8 Unloading a tool from the tool list
9 Empty location search
10 Delete tool in the NCK
14 Update code carrier
15 Read data from code carrier

The individual functions of Tool Ident Connection are described in detail in the following
sections. The optional and the mandatory transfer parameters are listed for each service.
There is also an overview of the return parameters supplied by Tool Ident Connection after
the successful execution of a command code.

6.4.2 Parameter description

Transfer parameters for the services

The terms of the transfer parameters are described in the following table:

Parameter Description
ActiveEnable Transfer of the tool status bit from the database in the NCK (TRUE) / hiding
the status bit during the transfer (FALSE)
Channel Channel number
DeleteTool Delete tool after unloading (TRUE) / do not delete (FALSE)
Duplo Duplo number

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 439
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

Parameter Description
FileIndex Index of the file from which data is to be imported or to which data is to be
exported. The file name which is extended by the index can be specified in
the INI file.
Ident Tool name
LoadingPlace Number of the loading/unloading location in the loading magazine
LoadTool Load tool after reading (TRUE) / do not load (FALSE)
Magazines Magazine number
MagazinePlace Magazine location number of the tool
MagazinePlaceType Magazine location type
NCU_Index NCU index (parameter is presently not used)
Override Overwrite export file (TRUE) / extend (FALSE)
Subtype Subtype or type
TNumber T number
ToolSize_Down Tool size downwards in half locations
ToolSize_Left Tool size to the left in half locations
ToolSize_Right Tool size to the right in half locations
ToolSize_Upper Tool size upwards in half locations
ToolState Tool status
Unit Code carrier unit (read/write head) from which data is read or to which data
should be written. Depending on the unit: 1...4.

6.4.3 Loading from the code carrier (K code = 0)

Reads tool data from the code carrier; whose unit is specified with "Unit". The tool is then
created if it is not already available in the NCK. It is also loaded if "LoadTool" has been set.
The number of the loading location (place) in the loading magazine from "LoadingPlace" is
used during this process, if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. However, if "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, the
value from "LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as loading location (place)
number.
The channel number (channel) and the number of the read head (unit) must be specified.
If the parameter "Magazine" is assigned with ">0" and "MagazinePlace" with "0", then an
attempt is made to load the tool into an appropriate empty location in the specified magazine.
If the values for "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace" are > 0, then an attempt is made to load the
tool to this magazine location.
In all other cases, the tool is loaded into the magazine in which an empty location is found.

Table 6-12 PLC parameters for "loading from code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW 180 Magazine location INT -1…32000 Magazine location number of the
tool
DBB 188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area

Tool Management
440 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DBB 189 Loading Place BYTE 1…127 Number of the loading/unloading
location
DBW 190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBB 192 Unit BYTE 1…127 Code carrier number
DBX 196.2 LoadTool BOOL True, False Load tool after being created
Return parameters
DBW 198 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DBW 200 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DBB 202 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 236 T number INT -1…32000 T number of the tool
DBW 238 ToolState INT -1…32000 Tool status
DBW 240 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Tool size
DBB 242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DBB 243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half loca‐
tions
DBB 244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DBB 245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half loca‐
tions
DBW 246 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number of the tool
DBW 248 Magazine place INT 0…32000 Magazine location number of the
tool

6.4.4 Unload to code carrier (K code = 1)

Unloads the tool that was parameterized using the transfer parameters. The channel number
and the number of the write head must be specified. If the "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace"
parameters are > 0, then an attempt is made to unload the tool, which is at this location.
Otherwise the tool is selected with the parameters "Duplo" and "Ident" or via the parameter
"TNumber".
In this case, the number of the unloading location in the loading magazine from "LoadingPlace"
is used, if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. If "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, then the value from the
"LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as unload location number (loading point).
If "DeleteTool" is set, then the tool is also deleted from the NCK after the unload operation.

Table 6-13 PLC parameters for "unload to the code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW 142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB 144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBW 180 MagazinePlace INT 0…32000 Magazine location
DBB 188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 441
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DBB 189 Loading Place BYTE 1…127 Number of the loading/unloading
location
DBW 190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBB 192 Unit BYTE 1…127 Code carrier number
DBX 196.3 DeleteTool BOOL True, False Delete tool after unloading
Return parameters
None

0DJD]LQH!
12
0DJD]LQH3ODFH!

12 71XPEHU! <(6

<(6
'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Image 6-24 Flowchart to identify tools

6.4.5 Loading a tool from the tool list (K code = 7)

Loading a tool from the tool list which was parameterized using the transfer parameters. The
tool can be selected with the parameters "Duplo" and "Ident" or via the parameter "TNumber".
To load, the number of the loading location (place) in the loading magazine from
"LoadingPlace" is used, if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. However, if "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, the
value from "LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as loading location (place)
number. The channel number must be specified for the operation.
If the parameter "Magazine" is assigned with ">0" and "MagazinePlace" with "0", then an
attempt is made to load the tool into an appropriate empty location in the specified magazine.

Tool Management
442 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

If the values for "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace" are > 0, then an attempt is made to load the
tool to this magazine location. In all other cases, the tool is loaded into the magazine in which
an empty location is found.

Table 6-14 PLC parameters for "Load tool - tool list"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW 142 Duplo INT 1…32000 Duplo number
DBB 144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBW 180 MagazinePlace INT 0…32000 Magazine location number
DBB 188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBB 189 Loading Place BYTE 1…127 Number of the loading/unloading
location
DBW 190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
Return parameters
None

12 71XPEHU!

'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Image 6-25 Flowchart to identify tools

6.4.6 Unloading a tool in the tool list (K code = 8)

Unloads the tool in the tool list that was parameterized using the transfer parameters. The
channel number must be specified for this operation.
If the "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace" parameters are > 0, then an attempt is made to unload
the tool, which is at this location. Otherwise the tool is selected with the parameters "Duplo"
and "Ident" or via the parameter "TNumber".

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 443
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

In this case, the number of the unloading location in the loading magazine from "LoadingPlace"
is used, if "LoadingPlace" is > 0. If "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, then the value from the
"LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as unload location number (loading point).
If "DeleteTool" is set, then the tool is also deleted from the NCK after the unload operation.

Table 6-15 PLC parameters for "Unload tool - tool list"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW 142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB 144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBB 188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBB 189 LoadingPlace BYTE 0…127 Number of loading point
DBW 190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBW 180 MagazinPlace INT 0...32000 Magazine location
DBX 196.3 DeleteTool BOOL True, False Delete tool after unloading
Return parameters
None

0DJD]LQH!
12
0DJD]LQH3ODFH!

12 71XPEHU! <(6

<(6
'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Image 6-26 Flowchart to identify tools

Tool Management
444 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

6.4.7 Empty location search (K code = 9)

For the tool specified with "TNumber" or with "Ident" and "Duplo", an empty location search or
target location check is performed. For "TNumber" = 0 an empty location is searched for the
tool specified using "Ident" and "Duplo"; for "TNumber" > 0 using the T number.
A valid value must be set for the "Channel" parameter in order to execute the function. Using
the specified loading point, an attempt is made to find an empty location in the magazines with
which the loading point is connected. To do this, the number of the loading point in the loading
magazine from "LoadingPlace" is used. However, if "LoadingPlace" is set to 0, the value from
"LoadPlaceNo" node is used in the configuration file as loading location (place) number.
If "Magazine" =0, a search is made for an empty location in any magazine; if a magazine
number is specified, then a search is made in the corresponding magazine. If, in addition, a
magazine location >0 is specified, then the function performs a target location check. This is
required for tools that are coded for specific locations.

Table 6-16 PLC parameters for "empty location search"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW 142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB 144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBB 188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBB 189 LoadingPlace BYTE 0…127 Number of loading point
DBW 190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBW 180 MagazinPlace INT 0...32000 Magazine location
Return parameters
DBW 198 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DBW 200 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DBB 202 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 236 T number INT -1…32000 T number of the tool
DBW 238 ToolState INT -1…32000 Tool status
DBW 240 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Tool size
DBB 242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DBB 243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half loca‐
tions
DBB 244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DBB 245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half loca‐
tions
DBW 246 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number of the tool
DBW 248 MagazinePlace INT 0…32000 Magazine location number of the
tool

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 445
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

12 71XPEHU!

'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Image 6-27 Flowchart to identify tools

6.4.8 Deleting a tool in the NCK (K code = 10)

Deletes the tool specified with "TNumber" or with "Ident" and "Duplo" in the NCK if this is not
loaded.
If a T number > "0" is specified, an attempt is made to delete the tool with this number in the
NCK.
If "TNumber = 0" is set, an attempt is made to delete the tool with the specified "Ident" and
"Duplo" in the NCK.

Table 6-17 PLC parameters for "Delete tool in the NCK"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW 142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB 144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBB 188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
Return parameters
None

Tool Management
446 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

12 71XPEHU!

'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Image 6-28 Flowchart to identify tools

6.4.9 Updating the code carrier (K code = 14)

Updates the code carrier with the data of the tool, which was parameterized using the transfer
parameters.
The channel number and the number of the read head must be specified.
If the "Magazine" and "MagazinePlace" parameters are > 0, then an attempt is made to write
the data of the tool, which is at this location, to the code carrier. Otherwise the tool is selected
with the parameters "Duplo" and "Ident" or "TNumber".

Table 6-18 PLC parameters for "Update code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBW 142 Duplo INT 0…32000 Duplo number
DBB 144 Ident String 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 178 TNumber INT 0…32000 T number
DBB 188 Channel BYTE 1…127 TO area
DBW 190 Magazines INT 0…32000 Magazine number
DBW 180 MagazinPlace INT 0...32000 Magazine location
DBB 192 Unit BYTE 1...127 Number of the code carrier
Return parameters
None

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 447
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

0DJD]LQH!
12
0DJD]LQH3ODFH!

12 71XPEHU! <(6

<(6
'XSOR!
<(6
,GHQW!

12

(UURUPHVVDJH 6WDUWRIWKHRSHUDWLRQ

Image 6-29 Flowchart to identify tools

6.4.10 Reading data from the code carrier (K code = 15)

Reading tool data from the code carrier and writing return parameters into the PLC. The code
carrier is identified using "Unit".
It is then possible, for example, to read these two data from a code on which only the "Duplo"
number and the tool identifier are saved. The "Loading/unloading from the tool list" service can
then be called, for example.
This means that also favorably-priced "read only" code chips can be used.

Table 6-19 PLC parameters for "Reading data from the code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

Transfer parameters
DBB 192 Unit BYTE 1…127 Number of the read head
Return parameters
DBW 198 Subtype INT -1…32000 Subtype of the tool
DBW 200 Duplo INT -1…32000 Duplo number of the tool
DBB 202 Ident STRING 32 characters Tool identifier
DBW 238 ToolState INT -1…32000 Tool status
DBW 240 Magazine location type INT -1…32000 Tool size
DBB 242 ToolSize_Upper BYTE 1…127 Tool size upwards in half locations
DBB 243 ToolSize_Down BYTE 1…127 Tool size downwards in half loca‐
tions

Tool Management
448 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

PLC data Identifier Type Range of values Meaning

DBB 244 ToolSize_Left BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the left in half locations
DBB 245 ToolSize_Right BYTE 1…127 Tool size to the right in half loca‐
tions

6.4.11 Error codes

The error codes that are saved in the PLC byte "K_CodeError" or PLC word "Error_Code" of
the PLC interface are in the hexadecimal format and refer to the location where the task
execution was canceled with an error.
If the error code is to be shown in the decimal notation, then this must be converted into the
hexadecimal format in order to determine the error cause from tables A-1 to A-8.
The error code in "K_CodeError" identifies the command code, where the error occurred.

Table 6-20 Command codes of the task in the case of an error

K_code error Service

00 No error
01 Load from the code carrier
02 Unload to the code carrier
03 Load from the tool cabinet
04 Unload into the tool cabinet
05 Load from production host computer
06 Unload to the production host computer
07 Unload all tools in the tool cabinet
08 Load tool
09 Unload tool
0A Empty location search
0B Delete tool in the NCK
0C Delete tool in the database
0D Export tool data
0E Import tool data
0F Update code carrier
10 Read data from code carrier
11 Save tool data in the NCK
... Reserved

The error codes "Error_Code" comprise a high byte and low byte, which have a different
significance. The high byte (XX) identifies the error type group, in which the error occurred.
The low byte (YY) specifies the cause of the error, which is responsible for canceling the task.

Format of the Error_Code

;; <<

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 449
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

The contents of XX = 00 and YY = 00 mean that no error has occurred.

XX = 01: General group error

Table 6-21
Low byte (YY) of the function error code

Cause of the error

01 Error when reading parameter from DB19
02 Error when calling the internal service
03 Timeout when executing the service
04 Still no data determined
05 Error when executing the internal service
... Reserved
Transfer parameter error
10 Subtype
11 Duplo
12 Ident
13 TNumber
14 MagazinePlace
15 MagazinePlaceType
16 ToolSize_Upper
17 ToolSize_Down
18 ToolSize_Left
19 ToolSize_Right
1A Channel
1B Magazines
1C Unit
1D NCU_Index
1E FileIndex
1F ActiveEnable
20 Override
21 LoadTool
22 DeleteTool
23 Length of Ident
... Reserved

Tool Management
450 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

XX = 02: Code carrier error group

Table 6-22
Low byte (YY) of the function error code

Cause of the error

01 No code carrier available
02 Error when reading code carrier
03 Reading interrupted as code carrier was removed
04 Error when writing to code carrier
05 Writing interrupted as the code carrier was removed
0C Command string unknown
0D Number of bytes illegal
0E Non-BCD characters found in the received write data
17 Invalid data
18 Device not available
19 Timeout
1A Hardware faults
1B Invalid head number
1C Read head not connected
1E Device is read only
1F General read error
20 General write error
28 Unknown error
68 Data carrier not recognized (reading/writing, first page)
69 Data carrier not recognized (reading/writing, following page)
6D Data carrier not recognized (writing, first page)
6E Data carrier not recognized (reading before writing)
6F Data carrier not recognized (writing the last page)
73 Non-BCD characters found in the received write data
74 Read BCD format: Non-BCD characters found on the data carrier
8D Data carrier access error
8E Data in the data carrier incomplete

XX = 05: NCK error group

Table 6-23
Low byte (YY) of NCK error code

Cause of the error

00 Connection not established to the requested NCU
05 Reading the NCK configuration unsuccessful
0A An invalid channel number was specified in the task
3C An invalid magazine number was specified in the task
3E An invalid magazine location number was specified in the task

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 451
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

Cause of the error

3F An invalid cutting edge OEM monitoring parameter number was specified in the task
41 The MMC semaphore for the search/create tool is already assigned
46 The tool specified with ident and duplo was not found in the NCK
47 The tool specified with the T number was not found in the NCK
48 No tool was found in the specified magazine
49 No tool is loaded at the specified magazine location
4A The tool specified with ident and duplo was not able to be uniquely determined in the NCK
4B Number of found tools was not able to be read in the NCK
50 The tool specified with ident and duplo was not created in the NCK
55 The specified tool is already loaded into the magazine
5A The tool cutting edge with the specified number has not been created in the NCK
5B The tool cutting edge with the specified number has not been deleted in the NCK
5C The specified cutting edge does not exist in the NCK
5D The specified tool cutting edge number is not valid.
5E The specified cutting edge is already in the NCK
5F Tool state was not able to be read in the NCK
64 The MMC semaphore for the empty location search is already assigned
69 An empty magazine location was not able to be found when loading into the NCK
6E Checking the specified magazine location to load negatively acknowledged
6F Tool deletion was exited with error
70 The empty location search was exited with error
71 Creating a tool was exited with error
72 Operation to relocate tools unsuccessful
73 The MMC semaphore for tool unloading/unloading already assigned
74 Alarm extension was exited with error
78 The magazine is disabled or has not been enabled for loading
7D Tool loading was exited with error
82 The magazine number of the tool was not able to be read in the NCK
87 The specified tool is not loaded into the NCK
8C The specified tool is loaded in a different magazine
8E The specified tool is loaded at a different magazine location
91 Magazine state not able to be read in the NCK
96 Magazine not in the loading position or not enabled for unloading
9B The tool unload operation was exited with error
A0 The tool was not able to be deleted in the NCK
A5 The tool is active in the NCK! The tool was not able to be deleted in the NCK
D2 The specified tool is loaded into the NCK! The tool was not deleted in the DB

Tool Management
452 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

XX = 0B: Tool conversion error group

Table 6-24
Low byte (YY) of the function error code

Cause of the error

01 1401 Error when opening the MCX file
02 1402 Error when reading the MCX file
03 1403 Error when reading the MCX file
04 1404 Error when reading the MCX file
05 1405 Error when reading the MCX file
06 1406 Error when reading the MCX file
07 1410 Error when reading the MCX file
08 1628 System error
09 1801 System error
0A 1803 System error
0B 1804 System error
0C 1805 Incorrect version of the MCX file
0D 1806 MCX file contains functions that are not not supported
0E 1807 System error
0F 1808 Error when reading the MCX file
10 1809 System error
11 1810 System error
12 2401 System error
13 2402 System error
14 2501 System error
15 2502 System error
16 2503 System error
17 2701 System error
18 2702 System error
19 2703 Index error when accessing the array
1A 2801 System error ConvertFunctions::CheckAccess()
1B 2802 System error
1C 2803 Error in conjunction with the conversion functions readXXX()/writeXXX(). Basis type
of the array parameter must be 'unsigned char'.
1D 2804 Error in the function writeBCD(). The data length (val) exceeds the size of the target
range.
1E 2805 Error in the function PlaceTypeFromString(). ToolTypeText used is not defined in the
ToolSpec.xml.
1F 2806 Error in the function PlaceTypeToString(). ToolTypeCode used is not defined in the
ToolSpec.xml.
20 2807 Error in the function writeREAL(). Data loss due to rounding.
21 2901 System error
22 2903 System error
23 2904 System error

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 453
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.4 Command codes

Cause of the error

24 2905 System error
25 2908 System error
26 2909 System error
27 2910 System error
28 2912 System error
29 2913 Error when accessing SlTmService. setVal()
2A 2914 Error when accessing SlTmService. setVal()
2B 2915 Error when accessing SlTmService. setVal()
2C 2917 Error when accessing SlTmService. rData().val()
2D 2918 Error when accessing SlTmService. rData().val()
2E 2919 Error when accessing SlTmService. setVal()
2F 2921 Error when accessing SlTmService. val()
30 2922 System error
31 2923 Error when accessing SlTmService. val()
32 2924 System error
33 7001 System error
34 7002 The conversion rule must contain an object with the 'Tool' name.
35 7003 The 'Tool' object must be the 'TmTool' type.
36 7004 The conversion rule must contain an object with the 'ToolArray' name.
37 7005 The 'ToolArray' object must be an array.
38 7006 The 'ToolArray' object must be an array, basis type 'unsigned char'.
39 7007 The 'DecodeToolData' function was not found in the conversion rule.
3A 7008 The object 'DecodeToolData' must be a function.
3B 7009 The 'DecodeToolData' function was not found in the conversion rule.
3C 7010 The object 'EncodeToolData' must be a function.
3D 7011 System error
3E 7012 System error
3F 7013 System error
40 7014 System error
41 7015 Error when reading ToolSpec.xml'
42 7016 Error when interpreting ToolSpec.xml
43 7017 The ToolSpec.xml. The document element should have the name: "ToolSpecConver‐
sion".
44 7018 Format error in the ToolSpec.xml. Attribute code="" or text="" are not included.
45 System error when converting data

Tool Management
454 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.5 Examples

6.5 Examples

6.5.1 Loading the code carrier via PLC interface

In this case, the data of the imaginary tool "WZ_Test13" is read from a code carrier, the tool
is then created in the NCK and loaded. The tool should be loaded into Magazine "1" of the
standard NCU in channel "1". The operation should be administered via loading location "1"
of the loading magazine.
The parameters required for this service are listed in the following table.
Before executing the service, the PLC writes a "0" into the command code byte (K_code) of
the PLC interface in data block DB19. This service is then started by setting the "Request" bit.
If the "Active" bit is reset and the "Done" bit was set, then the PLC can evaluate the "Error"
byte. The "Request" bit must then be reset again.

Table 6-25 Transfer parameters for "Loading from code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Value

DBW 180 MagazinePlace 0
DBB 188 Channel 1
DBB 189 LoadingPlace 1
DBW 190 Magazines 1
DBB 192 Unit 1
DBB 193 NCU_Index 0
DBX 196.2 LoadTool TRUE

Table 6-26 Return parameters from Tool Ident Connection for "Loading from the code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Value

DBW 198 Subtype 120
DBW 200 Duplo 1
DBB 202 Ident Tool_Test13
DBW 236 TNumber 289
DBW 238 ToolState 14
DBW 240 MagazinePlaceType 1
DBB 242 ToolSize_Upper 1
DBB 243 ToolSize_Down 1
DBB 244 ToolSize_Left 1
DBB 245 ToolSize_Right 1
DBW 246 Magazines 1
DBW 248 MagazinePlace 1

The sequence of the individual operations can be clearly seen in the following flowchart:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 455
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.5 Examples

7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ

+RWOLQNB'DWD&KDQJH

+RWOLQN
5LVLQJIDOOOLQJ
HGJH

5LVLQJ
UHTXHVWELW! '%

5HDGRXWWKH.FRGHIURPWKH3/& '%'%;
UHTXHVWELW

9DOLG '%'%%
.FRGH" 12 :ULWHHUURUFRGH .FRGH

'%'%;
<(6 6HWHUURUELW HUURUELW

6HWDFWLYHELW
'%'%:
HUURUFRGH
5HDGRXWWUDQVIHU
SDUDPHWHUVIURPWKH3/&

'%'%;
DFWLYHELW
3DUDPHWHU
YDOLG" 12 :ULWHHUURUFRGH
'%
<(6 2IIVHW
)DOOLQJ 7UDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV
UHTXHVWELW! 5HDGRXWFRGHFDUULHUGDWD 6HWHUURUELW

'DWDFRQYHUVLRQPHUJLQJ

7ULJJHUWKHUHTXLUHG3,VHUYLFHV
'%
YLDWKH6,7P6HUYLFHV

)HHGEDFN
6,7P6HUYLFHV 12 :ULWHHUURUFRGH
SRVLWLYH"

'%
6HWHUURUELW 2IIVHW
5HWXUQSDUDPHWHUV
<(6

'%'%;
:ULWHUHWXUQSDUDPHWHUV GRQHELW

6HWGRQHELW
5HVHW
GRQHELW HUURUELW
6HWHUURUFRGH 

Image 6-30 Flowchart: Loading from the code carrier via the PLC interface

Tool Management
456 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.5 Examples

3/&XVHU 3/&LQWHUIDFH 7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ

:ULWHVWUDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV
'%
2IIVHW
:ULWHV.FRGH! FUHDWH ORDG
'%'%
6HWVUHTXHVWELWWR
+RWOLQNWRUHTXHVWELW
'%'%;

5HDGVRXW.FRGH
'%'%%
&KHFNYDOLG.FRGH

6HWDFWLYHELWWR
'%'%%

'% 5HDGVRXWWUDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV
2IIVHW

&KHFNWKHWUDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV

5HDGRXWGDWDFDUULHUVWUHDP
'%

'DWDFRQYHUVLRQRIWKHVWUHDP

&UHDWHWKHWRROLQWKHWRROOLVWYLD
6,7P6HUYLFHV
5HWXUQRIWKH7QXPEHUV

:ULWHWKHWRROGDWDWRWKH1&

(PSW\ORFDWLRQVHDUFKWDUJHWORFDWLRQ
FKHFNYLD67,P6HUYLFHV
5HWXUQRIPDJD]LQHDQGORFDWLRQ

/RDGWKHWRROYLD6,7P6HUYLFHV

:ULWHWKHUHWXUQSDUDPHWHUV
'%
2IIVHW
:ULWHHUURUFRGHZRUG
'%'%:
6HWGRQHELWWR
'%'%;
5HVHWDFWLYHELWWR
'%'%;

5HDGRXWGRQHELW
'%'%;
5HDGRXWHUURUFRGHZRUG
'%'%:

5HDGRXWWKHUHWXUQSDUDPHWHUV '%
2IIVHW
5HVHWVUHTXHVWELWWR +RWOLQNWRUHTXHVWELW
'%'%;

'%'%; 5HVHWHUURUELWDQGHUURUELWWR
'%'%;
:ULWHWRHUURUFRGHZRUG
'%'%:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 457
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.5 Examples

6.5.2 Unloading to the code carrier via PLC interface

The tool loaded in the previous example should be unloaded and the actual data written to the
code carrier. The tool is deleted in the NCK after being unloaded. The procedure should be
managed via unload location "2" of the loading magazine.
The transfer parameters required for this are listed in the following table. The service does not
return any parameters, and as a result, there are no new values in the return parameters of
the PLC interface.
Before executing the service, command code "1" must be written to the corresponding PLC
byte (K code). Starting the service and the procedure are equivalent to the procedure in
Loading the code carrier via PLC interface (Page 455).

Table 6-27 Transfer parameters for "Unloading from code carrier"

PLC data Identifier Value

DBW 142 Duplo 1
DBB 144 Ident Tool_Test13
DBW 180 MagazinePlace 1
DBB 188 Channel 1
DBB 189 LoadingPlace 2
DBW 190 Magazines 1
DBB 192 Unit 1
DBB 193 NCU_Index 0
DBX 196.3 DeleteTool TRUE

The sequence of the individual operations can be clearly seen in the following flowchart:

Tool Management
458 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.5 Examples

7RRO,GHQW&RQQHFWLRQ

+RWOLQNB'DWD&KDQJH

+RWOLQN
5LVLQJIDOOOLQJ
HGJH

5LVLQJ
UHTXHVWELW! '%

5HDGRXWWKH.FRGHIURPWKH3/& '%'%;
UHTXHVWELW

9DOLG '%'%%
.FRGH" 12 :ULWHHUURUFRGH .FRGH

'%'%;
<(6 6HWHUURUELW HUURUELW

6HWDFWLYHELW
'%'%:
HUURUFRGH
5HDGRXWWUDQVIHU
SDUDPHWHUVIURPWKH3/&

'%'%;
DFWLYHELW
3DUDPHWHU
YDOLG" 12 :ULWHHUURUFRGH
'%
<(6 2IIVHW
)DOOLQJ 7UDQVIHUSDUDPHWHUV
UHTXHVWELW! 6HWHUURUELW
7ULJJHUWKHUHTXLUHG3,VHUYLFHV
YLDWKH6,7P6HUYLFHV

5HDGRXWWRROGDWDIURP1& 5HDGRXWFRGHFDUULHUGDWD

'DWDFRQYHUVLRQ '%

:ULWLQJWKHGDWD

:ULWHHUURUFRGH

)HHGEDFN 12
6,7P6HUYLFHV
SRVLWLYH" '%
6HWHUURUELW 2IIVHW
5HWXUQSDUDPHWHUV

<(6
'%'%;
:ULWHUHWXUQSDUDPHWHUV GRQHELW

6HWGRQHELW
5HVHW
GRQHELW HUURUELW
6HWHUURUFRGH 

Image 6-31 Flowchart: Unloading from the code carrier via the PLC interface

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 459
Code carrier connection - Tool Ident Connection (option)
6.5 Examples

Tool Management
460 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Machine data 7
7.1 NC-specific machine data

15710 TCA_CYCLE_NAME
MD number Name of subprogram for TCA replacement
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 7/2 Unit: -
Data type: STRING
Meaning: Program name for the replacement program when calling the TCA command. If the TCA
command is programmed in a part program block, then at the end of the block, the subprogram
defined in $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME is called. The programmed tool can be queried in the
replacement program using the system variables $C_TS_PROG / $C_TS, the duplo number
using $C_DUPLO_PROG / $C_DUPLO and the tool holder / spindle number using
$C_THNO_PROG / $C_THNO. In the replacement program, the system variable $C_TCA
supplies the value TRUE.
If $MN_TCA_CYCLE_NAME contains an empty string, then the replacement is deactivated
(default setting).
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

17500 MAXNUM_REPLACEMENT_TOOLS
MD number Maximum number of replacement tools
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Only meaningful if tool management function or tool monitoring function are active
0: The number of replacement tools is not monitored.
1: There can be exactly one replacement tool for each identifier.
This data does not affect memory requirements, but merely has a monitoring function.
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

17504 MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
MD number Multitool function. Number of tool locations per multitool
Default setting: 6 Min. input limit: 2 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: "Several tools at a magazine location" function (multitool). Maximum number of locations or
tools per multitool.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 461
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

17504 MAX_TOOLS_PER_MULTITOOL
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

17510 $MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK
MD number Behavior of tool data at unloading
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xF
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: When the tool is unloaded, some tool data can be assigned fixed values:
Bit 0 = 0: Tool status "active" remains unchanged
Bit 0 = 1: Tool status "active" is deleted ($TC_TP8, bit 0)
Bit 1 = 0: Tool status "was in use" remains unchanged
Bit 1 = 1: Tool status "was in use" is deleted ($TC_TP8, bit 7)
Bit 2 = 0: Tool parameter $TC_TP10 remains unchanged
Bit 2 = 1: Tool parameter $TC_TP10 is set to value 0. This means the tool replacement strategy
is reset.
Bit 3 = 0: Tool parameter $TC_TP11 remains unchanged
Bit 3 = 1: Tool parameter $TC_TP11 is set to value 0. This means the assignment to the tool
subgroup is canceled.
If a multitool is unloaded, then also the tools contained in it corresponding to MD
$MN_TOOL_UNLOAD_MASK are unloaded from the magazine location and therefore the
tools states are also changed according to the specifications of the MD. When unloading the
MT, the tools remain in the MT.
Data defined in the MD, which is also defined for the MT - that is previously the MT state
$TC_MTP8, bit 7 "was in use" - is also changed for the unloaded MT.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

17515 $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK
MD number Behavior of tool data at RESETMON
Default setting: 0x14 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x69F
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
462 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

17515 $MN_TOOL_RESETMON_MASK
Meaning: The RESETMON command specifies in the 5th parameter which tool status is to be reset. If
the 5th parameter is omitted, it is replaced with the value from this MD. This value is always
used with PI service "_N_TRESMON".
The bits are assigned like the bits in tool status $TC_TP8[x].
Bit 0 = 0: Tool status "active" remains unchanged
Bit 0 = 1: Tool status "active" is deleted
Bit 1 = 0: Tool status "enabled" remains unchanged
Bit 1 = 1: Tool status "enabled" is set
Bit 2 = 0: Tool status "disabled" remains unchanged
Bit 2 = 1: Tool status "disabled" is deleted if permitted by the monitoring data and the 4th
parameter is set accordingly.
Bit 3 = 0: Tool status "measured" remains unchanged.
Bit 3 = 1: Tool status "measured" is set.
Bit 4 = 0: Tool status "prewarning limit" remains unchanged
Bit 4 = 1: Tool status "prewarning limit" is deleted if permitted by the monitoring data and the
4th parameter is set.
Bit 5: Not permitted (tool status "tool being changed")
Bit 6: Not permitted (tool status "tool is fixed-location-coded")
Bit 7 = 0: Tool status "was in use" remains unchanged
Bit 7 = 1: Tool status "was in use" is deleted
Bit 8 = 0 not permitted (tool status "being transported back")
Bit 9: Not permitted
Bit 10 = 0: Tool status "to unload" remains unchanged
Bit 10 = 1: Tool status "to unload" is deleted
Bit 11: Not permitted (tool status "to load")
Bit 12 = 0: Not permitted (tool status "master tool")
Bit 13: Not permitted
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange (not permitted)
The default setting corresponds to behavior up to now.
The bits that are not permitted are filtered and hidden by the limit screen.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

17520 $MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK
MD number Create new tool: Data default setting
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x1F
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 463
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

17520 $MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK
Meaning: When a tool is redefined, some tool data can be assigned fixed default values. This way simple
applications do not need to process data which does not necessarily need to be assigned
individual values.
Bit 0 = 0: Default value of tool status ($TC_TP8), Bit1=0="not enabled"
Bit 0 = 1: Default value of tool status ($TC_TP8), Bit1=1="enabled"
Bit 1 = 0: Default value of tool status ($TC_TP8), bit 6=0="not fixed-location-coded"
Bit 1 = 1: Default value of tool status ($TC_TP8), bit 6=1="fixed-location-coded"
Bit 2 = 0: The tool is only included in the tool group with the explicit write command for the tool
name. Only then can it be loaded at change using the appropriate programming.
Bit 2 = 1 The tool is automatically included in the tool group when redefined. (Now the tool
change can be performed with the default name ("t"=t no.).
The "tool name" ($TC_TP2) can be hidden to the user. (This only makes sense if replacement
tools are not being used for machining or if the tool name is not explicitly written. Then, data
inconsistency problems could occur.)
Bit 3 = 0: Only with TMMG: Default value of location type ($TC_TP7)=9999=not defined
Bit 3 = 1: Significance, only with TMMG: Default value of location type ($TC_TP7)=1 and
associated default values of magazine location type (TC_MPP2)=1. All magazine locations
can now accept all tools.
Bit 4 = 0: Only significant with TMMG + active adjacent location consideration: When setting/
resetting the magazine location status "disabled", the magazine location status "overlapping
permitted" remains unchanged.
Bit 4 = 1: Only significant with TMMG + active adjacent location consideration: When setting/
resetting the magazine location status "disabled", the magazine location status "overlapping
permitted" is also automatically set/reset.
If a multitool is generated, then the data defined by MD $MN_TOOL_DEFAULT_DATA_MASK
and for the MT are set to the required values.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

17530 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER
MD number Identifying tool data change for HMI
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xF
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
464 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

17530 $MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER
Meaning: HMI display support. This data allows explicit inclusion/exclusion of individual data in the OPI
variables (block C/S) toolCounter, toolCounterC, toolCounterM to be taken into account.
Bit 0 = 0: Value changes to tool status ($TC_TP8) are not taken into account in toolCounterC
Bit 0 = 1: Value changes to the tool status ($TC_TP8) are taken into account in toolCounterC
Bit 1 = 0: Value changes to remaining tool count ($TC_MOP4) are not taken into account in
toolCounterC
Bit 1 = 1: Value changes to the remaining tool count ($TC_MOP4) are taken into account in
toolCounterC.
Bit 2 = 0: Value changes to the tool data is not taken into account in the tool data update service
Bit 2 = 1: Value changes to the tool data is taken into account in the tool data update service
Bit 3 = 0: Value changes to the magazine data is not taken into account in the tool data update
service
Bit 3 = 1: Value changes to the magazine data is taken into account in the tool data update
service
"Value changes to tool status" and "Value changes to remaining tool count" are relative to the
value changes which are caused by internal processes in the NC, as well as to value changes
caused by writing the respective system variables.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

17540 TOOLTYPES_ALLOWED
MD number Permitted tool types
Default setting: 0x3FF Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x3FF
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of tool types (see $TC_DP1) permitted in the NCK for tool offset selection. This
means tools of any tool type can be loaded to the NCK, however, only the tool types specified
here can be defined in the tool determining the offset. A bit value = 1 means that the specified
tool type range is permitted for the offset selection. A bit value = 0 means that the specified
tool type range is not permitted for the offset selection. When an attempt is made to select an
offset for a cutting edge of this type, the selection is rejected and an offset-capable alarm is
issued. Value = 0, 9999 for the tool type means "not defined". In general, it is not possible to
select tool offsets with this value for the tool type.
Bit 0 = 0x1: Tool types 1 to 99 permitted
Bit 1 = 0x2: Tool types 100 to 199 permitted (milling tools)
Bit 2 = 0x4: Tool types 200 to 299 permitted (drilling tools)
Bit 3 = 0x8: Tool types 300 to 399 permitted
Bit 4 = 0x10: Tool types 400 to 499 permitted (grinding tools)
Bit 5 = 0x20: Tool types 500 to 599 permitted (turning tools)
Bit 6 = 0x40: Tool types 600 to 699 permitted
Bit 7 = 0x80: Tool types 700 to 799 permitted
Bit 8 = 0x100: Tool types 800 to 899 permitted
Bit 9 = 0x200: Tool types 900 to 999 permitted
Corresponding to... MD18100 $MN_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 465
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18074 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ
MD number Maximum size of the tool management diagnostics ring buffer
Default setting: 25, 25 Min. input limit: 4 Max. input limit: 500
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of entries in the diagnostics ring buffer of the tool management.
Index 0 = buffer size of the IPO trace.
Index 1 = buffer size of the prep trace.
There is a dedicated IPO trace buffer in each channel, and there is only a prep trace buffer in
channel 1.
The memories are only allocated if bit 0 (0x0001) for a warm restart is at ON - and more
precisely in both MD18080: MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and MD20310: TOOL_MAN‐
AGEMENT_MASK for each channel.
Trace data is written to the buffer if bit 13 (0x2000) is at ON in MD20310: TOOL_MANAGE‐
MENT_MASK for each channel.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18075 MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS
MD number Max. number of tool holders per TOA
Default setting: 16 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit:
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
466 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18075 MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS
Meaning: Maximum number of definable tool holders per TO area.
The maximum value is 20. The number 20 is derived from the maximum number of axes per
channel in the 840D sl.
The address extension e of the commands Te=T, Me=6 (*) is the number of the tool holder.
t=T number / tool name - depending on the function, which is activated in the NCK.
(*) if the following applies: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1 and
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE=6
In milling machines, the tool holder is generally not a spindle, see also
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND.
In turning machines, the tool holder is generally not a spindle axis, see also $MC_TOOL_MAN‐
AGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
Then the following should apply $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS greater or equal to
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND/$MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.
If bit 0 = 1 in $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and $MC_TOOL_MANAGE‐
MENT_MASK is set (= magazine management (TMMG)) is only applicable for sensible values
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS less than or equal to $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DIS‐
TANCE. Then, a maximum of $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS buffer locations, type spindle
($TC_MPP1[9998,x]=2) can be defined.
Example: TMMG not active
Assuming $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND=3, $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS = 3.
Then T1=t, T2=t, T3=t, T=t can be programmed.
Example: TMMG active, milling machine with Me=6 as tool change command
Assuming $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS=14, $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DIS‐
TANCE=20, 10 channels are active, all channels have TMMG active and have the same tool
and machine data (=one TO area for all channels). $MC_SPIND_DEF_MAS‐
TER_SPIND=1,....,10 for the channels. Then, in the magazine buffer, up to 14 locations, type
"tool holder"/"spindle" can be defined.
In addition, 6 other grippers or similar can be defined.
These locations (a maximum of 20) can be linked to magazines.
T1=t,....T14=t and Tt or M1=6,....M14=6 and M06 can be programmed in the channels.
The PLC version used can limit the maximum number of tool holders.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18076 MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE
MD number Max. number of magazine locations per TOA with distance connection
Default setting: 32 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit:
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 467
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18076 MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE
Meaning: The machine data makes sense if the magazine management function TMMG is active - see
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK; in each
case bit 0 = 1
Maximum number of magazine locations (spindles, loading locations, etc.) per TOA, that can
have a distance connection to a magazine defined using $TC_MDPx[n,m].
Example: TMMG is active: $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE is = 5 and
$MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 2.
Two TOA units are defined each with three tool holders / spindles, two loading points.
Further, there are two grippers defined in each TO unit.
This means that in total there are 14 locations defined in the buffer magazine / loading mag‐
azine for which distances and assignments should be defined. TO unit 1 has 4 magazines
defined, TO unit 2 has 6 magazines defined.
With the set value of $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE = 5, each tool holder and
each loading point can be linked; (see $TC_MDP1 and $TC_MDP2) and up to two grippers
can be additionally assigned to each tool holder ($MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC
= 2); (see $TC_MLSR).
As a consequence, a tool holder / a spindle location can have two tables - a distance table to
magazines and an assignment table to grippers and similar locations.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18077 MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC
MD number Max. number of magazines in the distance table of a magazine location
Default setting: Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit:
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The machine data is only active, if the magazine management function, TMMG is active - see
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Two quantities are defined with the data:
1.) Max. number of magazines in the distance table of a magazine location (spindle, loading
location, etc.)
2.) Maximum number of locations (gripper, ...) in the connection table of a spindle / tool holder.
Example: $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC = 3.
Two TOA units are defined each with two tool holders / spindles and one loading point each.
Further, four grippers are defined in each TO unit.
TO unit 1 has 4 magazines defined, TO unit 2 has 6 magazines defined.
Then, each tool holder can define up to three distances to the magazines (see $TC_MDP2)
and in addition, can define up to three relationships to grippers ($TC_MLSR).
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18078 MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES
MD number Maximum number of definable hierarchies for magazine location types
Default setting: 8 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit:
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -

Tool Management
468 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18078 MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The machine data is only active, if the magazine management function, TMMG is active - see
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Maximum number of definable hierarchies for magazine location types
The permissible value of index n of system parameter $TC_MPTH[n,m] is from 0 to
"$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES - 1".
(The maximum of index m can be specified using machine data $MN_MM_MAX_HIERA‐
CHY_ENTRIES.)
A value = 0 means that the "Magazine location type hierarchy" function is not available.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18079 MM_MAX_HIERARCHY_ENTRIES
MD number Maximum permissible number of entries in a magazine-location-type hierarchy
Default setting: 8 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit:
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The machine data is only active, if the magazine management function, TMMG is active - see
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK - and if
$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES is greater than zero.
Maximum number of entries in a magazine location type hierarchy.
The permissible value of index m of system parameter $TC_MPTH[n,m] is from 0 to
"$MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HIERARCHIES - 1".
(The maximum of index n can be specified using machine data $MN_MM_MAX_NUM_OF_HI‐
ERARCHIES.)
A value = 0 means that the "Magazine location type hierarchy" function is not available.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD number Memory for the tool management is reserved step-by-step
Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFF
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 469
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Meaning: Activation of the tool management memory with "0" means:
The set tool management data does not occupy any memory, tool management is not avail‐
able.
Bit 0=1: Memory for data specific to tool management is available; the MDs for reserving
memory must be set accordingly (MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION, MD18084
MM_NUM_MAGAZINE)
Bit 1=1: Memory is available for monitoring data (TMMO)
Bit 2=1: Memory is available for user data (CC data)
Bit 3=1: Memory is available for considering the adjacent location
Bit 4=1: Memory and function release for PI service _N_TSEARC = "Complex search for tools
in magazine" is available.
Bit 5=1: Wear monitoring active
Bit 6=1: Wear group available
Bit 7=1: Reserve memory for adapter of magazine locations
Bit 8=1: Memory for machining and/or setting up offsets
Bit 9=1: Tools in a turret no longer vacate their turret location during a tool change. Only
relevant for HMI adv.
Bit 10 = 1: The multitool function is available. The configuration can be changed by other
machine data.
Bit 10=0: The multitool function is not available. The function version set by other machine
data is not active.
The coded type of memory reservation enables economic use of memory management for
the functionality provided.
Example:
Standard memory reservation for tool management:
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 3 (Bit 0 + 1=1) means tool management and tool mon‐
itoring data is made available
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 1 means tool management without tool monitoring
function data
MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 2 means tool management without tool monitoring
function data
Special cases, errors,...

18082 MM_NUM_TOOL
MD number Number of tools the NCK can manage
Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1500
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The NC can manage as a maximum the number of tools entered in the MD. A tool has at least
one cutting edge.
A buffered (backed-up) user memory is used.
The maximum number of tools possible correspond to the number of cutting edges. The MD
should also be set even if no tool management is being used.
If this machine data is altered the buffered data is lost.
A maximum of 1500 tools are possible per TO unit and in the entire NCK.

Tool Management
470 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18082 MM_NUM_TOOL
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory Configuration (S7), Tool Offset (W1)

18083 MM_NUM_MULTITOOL
MD number Multitool function. Number of multitools that the NCK can manage
Default setting: 15 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1500
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: "Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)" function. Number of multitools (multiple tools)
that the NCK can manage.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
MD number Number of magazines the NCK can manage
Default setting: 4 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Tool management (TMG or TMMG) only if MD tool management and option tool management
are set:
Number of magazines that the NCK can manage (active and background magazines).
The buffered memory for the magazines is reserved with this machine data.
Important: One load magazine and one buffer magazine are set up in the tool management
for each TOA unit. These magazines must be taken into account.
Value = 0: Tool management cannot be activated because no data can be created.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

18085 MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS
MD number Multitool function. Number of multitool locations that the NCK can manage
Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1500
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: "Several tools at a magazine location (multitool)" function. Number of multitool locations that
the NCK can manage.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 471
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
MD number Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage
Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1500
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: TMMG - only if MD for tool management and tool management option are set:
Number of magazine locations that the NCK can manage.
The buffered memory for the magazine locations is reserved with this MD.
Important: The number of all buffer locations and loading points must be taken into account
here.
Value = 0: Tool management cannot be activated because no data can be created.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
MD number Maximum number of defined tool holders
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 99999999
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Maximum number of definable tool holders for tools that can be oriented in the TO area. The
value is divided by the number of active TO units. The integer result indicates how many tool
holders can be defined per TO unit.
The data to define a tool holder is set using the system variables $TC_CARR1, ...
$TC_CARR14. The data is located in the buffered memory.
Example:
2 channels are active, with one channel per TO unit (=default).
3 holders must be defined in channel 1 and one holder in channel 2. The value to be set is 6
because 6/2 = 3. This means a max. of 3 holder definitions in each TO unit.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offsets (S7)

18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD number Number of OEM magazine data
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of magazine parameters (of the integer type) that are made available to the user or
the Compile Cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(int) *
max. number of magazines.

Tool Management
472 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
Additional references:

18091 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM magazine data type
Default setting: 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Only the standard default values may be applied.
Used to assign individual types to the parameters. The array index n can assume values
between 0 and the setting in machine data MD18090: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM.
The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 denote the NC command types BOOL,
CHAR, INT, REAL, STRING and AXIS. The type FRAME cannot be defined here. Type
STRING must not be longer than 31 characters.
Example:
MD18090: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM=1
MD18091: MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM=5
= "UserMagazine" can be programmed for parameter $TC_MAPC1.
The buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result
in reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
MD18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
Additional references:

18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
MD number Number of OEM magazine location data
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of magazine-location data parameters (of the integer type) that are made available
to the user or the Compile Cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(int) *
max. number of magazine locations.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
Additional references:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 473
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18093 MM_TYPE_CC_MAGLOG_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM magazine location data type
Default setting: 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Only the standard default values may be applied.
Used to assign individual types to the parameters. The array index n can assume values
between 0 and the setting in machine data MD18090: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM.
The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 denote the NC command types
1 BOOL
2 CHAR
3 INT
4 REAL and
6 AXIS
Here, the STRING type is not explicitly possible. The value 5 is treated just like 2. The type
FRAME cannot be defined here.
Example:
MD18090: MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM=1
MD18091: MM_TYPE_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM=2
= "UserMagazineLocation" can be programmed for parameter $TC_MPPC1.
The buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result
in reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOG_PARAM
Additional references:

18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
MD number Number of OEM tool data
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Changes effective after POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of tool-specific data that can be created for each tool (of type integer) and are available
to the user or compile cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(dou‐
ble) * max. number of tools.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18082 MM_NUM_TOOL
Additional references:

18095 MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM tool data type
Default setting: 4 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -

Tool Management
474 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18095 MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM[n]
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Only the standard default values may be applied.
Used to assign individual types to the parameters. The array index n can assume values
between 0 and the setting in machine data MD18094: MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM.
The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 denote the NC command types.
1 BOOL
2 CHAR
3 INT
4 REAL
5 STRING and
6 AXIS
The type FRAME cannot be defined here. Type STRING must not be longer than 31 charac‐
ters.
Example:
MD18094: MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM=1
MD18095: MM_TYPE_CC_TDA_PARAM=5
= "UserCuttingEdge" can be programmed for parameter $TC_TPC1.
The buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result
in reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM
MD18082 MM_NUM_TOOL
Additional references:

18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
MD number Number of data per tool cutting edge for compile cycles
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of TOA data that can be created for each tool (of type Double) and are available to
the user or compile cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(dou‐
ble) * max. number of cutting edges.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references:

18097 MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM data type per cutting edge
Default setting: 4 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 475
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18097 MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM[n]
Meaning: Only the standard default values may be applied.
Used to assign individual types to the parameters. The array index n can assume values
between 0 and the setting in machine data MD18096: MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM.
The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 denote the NC command types
1 BOOL
2 CHAR
3 INT
4 REAL
6 AXIS
The type STRING cannot be used explicitly here, value 5 is treated like value 2.
The type FRAME cannot be defined here.
Example:
MD18096: MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM=1
MD18097: MM_TYPE_CC_TOA_PARAM=5
= "UserCuttingEdge" can be programmed for parameter $TC_DPC1.
The buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result
in reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18096 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM
MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references:

18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
MD number Number of monitoring data per tool for compile cycles
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of monitoring data that is created for each tool (of type integer) and is available to the
user or compile cycle.
If this machine data is set, the amount of buffered memory required increases by sizeof(int) *
max. number of cutting edges.
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Additional references:

18099 MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM[n]
MD number OEM monitor data type
Default setting: 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
476 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18099 MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM[n]
Meaning: Only the standard default values may be applied.
Used to assign individual types to the parameters. The array index n can assume values
between 0 and the setting in machine data MD18098: MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM.
The possible values of the MD = 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 denote the NC command types
1 BOOL
2 CHAR
3 INT
4 REAL and
6 AXIS
The type FRAME cannot be defined here.
(Type STRING is not explicitly possible here; the value 5 is treated just like 2).
Example:
MD18098: MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM=1
MD18099: MM_TYPE_CC_MON_PARAM=2
= "UserCuttingEdge" can be programmed for parameter $TC_MOPC1.
The buffered work memory is used. Changing the value can, but does not necessarily, result
in reconfiguration of the buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD18098 MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
Additional references:

18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD number Tool cutting edges per TO area
Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 3000
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Defines the number of tool cutting edges in a TO area.
For each tool edge approx. 250 bytes per TOA block of the battery-backed memory are re‐
served with this machine data irrespective of the tool type.
Tools with type 400-499 cutting edges (=grinding tools) also occupy the location of a cutting
edge.
Example:
Define 10 grinding tools with one cutting edge each.
Then, as a minimum, the following must apply:
MM_NUM_TOOL = 10
MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA = 20
See also MM_NUM_TOOL
A buffered (backed-up) user memory is used.
Special cases, errors,...: If this machine data is altered the buffered data is lost!
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 477
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18102 MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
MD number Type of D number programming
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The "flat D number management" is activated with the MD.
The individual values can determine the type of D programming
- direct or
- indirect programming.
The default value is 0. This setting means that the NCK manages the T and D numbers.
A value > 0 is only accepted by the NCK if bit 0 is not set in MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGE‐
MENT_MASK, i.e. the tool management function must not be simultaneously active.
0: No "flat D number management" active
1: D numbers are directly and absolutely programmed
Notice: SINUMERIK Operate does not support the function "Flat D numbers".
Special cases, errors,...:
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

18104 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
MD number Tool adapter in TO area
Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 600
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
478 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18104 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
Meaning: Number of tool adapters in the TO area.
This function can only be used if magazine locations are available in the NCK. The tool man‐
agement function must be active. In order to activate the setting, bit 7 (=0x80) must be set in
MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT _MASK.
Adapter data records and the cutting-edge-specific basis / adapter data records mutually ex‐
clude one another, i.e. when adapter data is defined, then parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22,
$TC_DP23 or their values in NCK are available.
-1:
Every magazine location is automatically assigned an adapter.
This means that internally there are just as many adapters foreseen as are foreseen by the
magazine locations set in machine data $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION.
-2
Every magazine location and each multitool location is automatically assigned an adapter.
This means that internally there are just as many adapters foreseen as are foreseen by the
magazine locations set in machine data $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION and multi‐
tool locations set in $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS.
0:
No adapter-data definition possible. Cutting-edge-specific parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22
and $TC_DP23 are available in cases where adapters are utilized outside the active TM.
> 0:
Number of adapter data records. By this, adapters can be defined independently of magazine
locations. An additional step following definition of the data assigns the adapters to magazine
locations.
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
Additional references:

18105 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
MD number Maximum value of D number
Default setting: 9 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 479
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18105 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
Meaning: Maximum value of D number.
The maximum number of D numbers per cutting edge is not affected by this.
The monitoring of the D number assignment associated with this value is only effective for
new definitions of D numbers. This means the existing data records are not checked later - if
the MD is changed.
Advisable setting:
$MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO equal to $MN_MM_MAX_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_PER_TOOL. If $MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO > $MN_MM_MAX_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_PER_TOOL is set, you should familiarize yourself with the difference between
offset number D and the tool edge number CE.
See also language commands CHKDNO, CHKDM, GETDNO, SETDNO, DZERO.
The MD is not evaluated with the function "flat D number" and accordingly is not meaningful
there.
The MD can change the memory requirements:
A change from "less than equal to" to "greater than" - or vice versa - in the values of both the
above mentioned MDs can influence the demand for non-buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18106 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

18106 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
MD number Maximum number of D numbers per tool
Default setting: 9 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 12
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Maximum number of cutting edges (D offset) per tool (per T number)
This allows greater security with the data definition. A value of 1 can be set if only tools with
one cutting edge are to be used. This will avoid the problem of assigning more than one cutting
edge to the tool when data is defined.
Logically the same value is set for MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO as for MM_MAX_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_PER_TOOL. If MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO is set greater than
MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL, you should familiarize yourself with the difference
between offset number D and the tool edge number CE.
See also language commands CHKDNO, CHKDM, GETDNO, SETDNO, DZERO.
The MD is not evaluated with the function "flat D number" and accordingly is not meaningful
there.
The MD can change the memory requirements:
A change from "less than equal to" to "greater than" - or vice versa - in the values of both the
above mentioned MDs can influence the demand for non-buffered memory.
Corresponding to... MD18105 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

18108 MM_NUM_SUMCORR
MD number Additive offsets in the TO area
Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 9000
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -

Tool Management
480 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18108 MM_NUM_SUMCORR
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Total number of additive offsets in NCK.
A value of -1 means that the number of additive offsets equals the number of cutting edges *
number of additive offsets per cutting edge.
A value > 0 and < "Number of cutting edges * number of additive offsets per cutting edge"
means that per cutting edge, a maximum "Number of additive offsets per cutting edge" additive
offsets can - but does not need to - be defined, i.e. this provides an option of using the buffered
memory sparingly. Only the cutting edges defined for the explicit data have a additive offset
data record.
Buffered memory is reserved. The memory requirements for additive offset are doubled if
"Setup offset" is also configured and active; see MD $MN_MM__KIND_OF_SUMCORR.
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGE_IN_TOA
MD18110 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

18110 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
MD number Maximum number of additive offsets per cutting edge
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Maximum number of additive offsets per cutting edge
The following applies for MM_NUM_SUMCORR > 0:
This data does not define the memory, but is used for monitoring purposes only.
The following applies to MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1:
This data defines the memory.
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD18108 MM_NUM_SUMCORR
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

18112 MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR
MD number Properties of additive offsets in the TO area
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x1F
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 481
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18112 MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR
Meaning: Properties of additive offsets in NCK.
Bit 0=0: "Additive offsets fine" are saved when the tool data is backed up.
Bit 0=1: "Additive offsets fine" are saved when the tool data is not backed up.
Bit 1=0: Set-up offsets are saved when the tool data is backed up.
Bit 1=1: Set-up offsets are not saved when the tool data is backed up.
Bit 2=0: If the function tool management (TMMG) or tool monitoring (TMMO) are used, then
setting the tool status to "active" has no effect on the "additive offsets fine"/setup offsets al‐
ready in use.
Bit 2=1 When the tool status is set to "active", the existing additive offsets are set to the value
0. This does not influence the setup offsets.
Bit 3=0: If the functions "TMG" = "Adapter" are in use: "Additive offsets fine"/setup offsets are
transformed.
Bit 3=1: "Additive offsets fine"/setup offsets are not transformed.
Bit 4=0: No setting up offset data records.
Bit 4=1: Setting up offset data records are additionally created. The additive offset is thus the
sum of the setting up offset + additive offset fine.
Changing the states of bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 does not alter the memory configuration. Changing
the status of bit 4 causes the buffered memory to be reconfigured with the next POWER ON.
Corresponding to... MD18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
MD18108 MM_NUM_SUMCORR
MD18110 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE
MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20310 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
MD18104 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

18192 MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
MD number Number of multitool-specific parameters $TC_MTPCn per multitool
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of multitool-specific parameters $TC_MTPCn, that can be created for each multitool
and that are available to users or the compile cycle.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18193 MM_TYPE_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
MD number OEM multitool data type
Default setting: 3, 3, 3, 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 10
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
482 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18193 MM_TYPE_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
Meaning: User or OEM data in the tool management.
Type of the multitool-specific Siemens user data $TC_MTPCn configured using MD18192
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM.
Every parameter can be allocated its own type. The following types are permissible: Type
value of the machine data (see types of the NC language)
BOOL 1
CHAR 2
INT 3
REAL 4
STRING 5 (Permits identifiers of up to 31 characters)
AXIS 6
FRAME Not defined
Corresponding to... MD18192 MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
MD18083 MM_NUM_MULTITOOL
MD18085 MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS
Additional references:

18194 MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PARAM
MD number Number of OEM multitool location data parameters $TC_MTPPCn per multitool location
Default setting: 3, 3, 3, 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 64
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Number of multitool location-specific parameters $TC_MTPPCn that can be created for each
multitool location and that are available to users or the compile cycle.
Corresponding to...
Additional references:

18195 MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PARAM
MD number OEM multitool location data type
Default setting: 3, 3, 3, 3 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 10
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 1/1 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 483
Machine data
7.1 NC-specific machine data

18195 MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PARAM
Meaning: User or OEM data in the tool management.
Type of the multitool location-specific Siemens user data $TC_MTPCn configured using
MD18194 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MTLOC_PARAM.
Every parameter can be allocated its own type. The following types are permissible: Type
value of the machine data (see types of the NC language)
BOOL 1
CHAR 2
INT 3
REAL 4
STRING 5 (Permits identifiers of up to 31 characters)
AXIS 6
FRAME Not defined
Corresponding to... MD18192 MM_NUM_CC_MULTITOOL_PARAM
MD18083 MM_NUM_MULTITOOL
MD18085 MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS
Additional references:

Tool Management
484 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND[<channel>]
MD number Initial setting of master spindle in channel
Default setting: 1, 1, … Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 20
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE
Meaning: Definition of master spindle in channel. The number of the spindle is set.
Example:
1 corresponds to spindle S1. When S is programmed, the current master spindle is automat‐
ically addressed.
The SETMS(n) command can be programmed to declare the spindle number as the master
spindle. SETMS declares the spindle defined in the MD to be the master spindle again.
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Spindles (S1)

20096 T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO[<channel>]
MD number Meaning of the address extension with T, M tool change
Default setting: FALSE Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit:
Data type: Boolean
Meaning: The MD is only of significance when the "Tool management" / "Flat D numbers" are inactive.
FALSE
The contents of the address extension of the NC addresses T and M "change-command
number" are not evaluated by the NCK. The PLC determines the meaning of the programmed
extension
TRUE
The address extension of NC addresses T and M "tool change command number" - tool
change command number" = TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE with 6 as default value - are inter‐
preted as spindle number. NCK handles the extension essentially the same as the active
functions "tool management" or "flat D number management".
This means that the programmed D number always refers to the T number of programmed
main-spindle numbers.
Corresponding to... MD20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND
MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Additional references:

20110 RESET_MODE_MASK[<channel>]
MD number Determination of basic control settings after Reset/TP End
Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x7FFFF
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: HEX
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 485
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20110 RESET_MODE_MASK[<channel>]
Meaning: Definition of the basic PLC setting after booting and reset/end of part program with respect to
the G codes (especially current level and settable work offset), tool length compensation and
transformation by setting the following bits.
Bit 0: Reset mode
Bit 1: Suppress auxiliary function output for tool selection
Bit 2: Selection of the reset response after Power On; e.g. of tool offset
Bit 3: Only of significance without active tool management: Selection of the reset response at
the end of the test mode for active tool offsets. The bit is only of significance if bits 0 and 6
are set.
It defines to what "current setting for the active tool length compensation" refers;
- the program that was active at the end of test mode
- the program that was active before switching-on test mode
Bit 4: Reserved! Setting is now made via $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[.]
Bit 5: Reserved! Setting is now made via $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[.]
Bit 6: Reset behavior, "active tool length compensation"
Bit 7: Reset behavior, "active kinematic transformation"
Bit 8: Reset behavior, "coupled-motion axes"
Bit 9: Reset behavior, "tangential tracking"
Bit 10: Reset behavior, "synchronous spindle"
Bit 11: Reset behavior, "revolutional feed rate"
Bit 12: Reset behavior, "geo axis exchange"
Bit 13: Reset behavior, "master value coupling"
Bit 14: Reset behavior, "basic frame"
Bits 4 to 11 are evaluated only if bit 0=1.
Bit 15: Function for electronic gears, not relevant for tool management.
Bit 16=0: After end of program/reset, the number given by the MD SPIND_DEF_MAS‐
TER_SPIND is the number of the master spindle
Bit 16=1: The programmed value of SETMS is retained after end of program/reset
Bit 17=0: After end of program / reset, the tool holder number provided in MD TOOL_MAN‐
AGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER is the number of the master tool holder
Bit 17=1: The programmed value of SETMTH is retained after end of program / reset
Bit 18: Reset behavior, "reference axis for G96/G961/G962"
The bits 4 to 11, 16 and 17 are only evaluated for bit 0=1. Bit value=0 is set so that the behavior
applicable up to now is retained with bit 0=1. (The effect of bit 0=0 was and is that the values
programmed for SETMTH/SETMS are retained at end of program.)
Bit 20=1: Reset behavior, "$P_USEKT"
Corresponding to... MD20120 TOOL_RESET_VALUE
MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES
MD20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE
MD20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
MD20121 TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE
MD20118 GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Tool Management
486 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20112 START_MODE_MASK[<channel>]
MD number Definition of the initial state of the control after part program start
Default setting: 0x400 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0x7FFFF
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the initial state of the control for part program start with respect to the G codes
(especially current level and adjustable work offset), tool length compensation, transformation
and axis coupling setting the following bits (only the bits in bold are relevant for tool manage‐
ment):
Bit 0: Not assigned: $MC_START_MODE_MASK is evaluated every time the part program is
started
Bit 1: Suppress auxiliary function output for tool selection
Bit 4: Starting behavior, G code "current plane"
Bit 5: Starting behavior, G code "settable work offset"
Bit 6: Starting behavior, "active tool length compensation"
Bit 7: Starting behavior, "active kinematic transformation"
Bit 8: Starting behavior, "coupled-motion axes"
Bit 9: Starting behavior, "tangential tracking"
Bit 10: Starting behavior, "synchronous spindle"
Bit 11: Reserved
Bit 12: Starting behavior, "geo axis exchange"
Bit 13: Starting behavior, "master value coupling"
Bit 14: Starting behavior, "basic frame"
Bit 15: Function for electronic gears, not relevant for tool management.
Bit 16=0: The current value SETMS is retained (depends on the settings in RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK)
Bit 16=1: At program start, the spindle defined in MD $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND is
the master spindle.
Bit 17=0: The current value SETMTH is retained (depends on the settings in RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK)
Bit 17=1: At program start, the number defined in MD $MC_Tool_Management_Toolholder is
the number of the master tool holder
Bit 18=1: Reference axis for G96/G961/G962
Bit value=0 is set so that the behavior applicable up to now is retained.
Bit 2: Reserved
Corresponding to... MD20120 TOOL_RESET_VALUE
MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES
MD20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE
MD20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE
MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20121 TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE
MD20118 GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 487
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20120 TOOL_RESET_VALUE[<channel>] (only without tool management)

MD number Tool length compensation at power-up (Reset/TP end)
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the tool where the tool length compensation is selected at power up and for reset
or TP end depending on MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK and for TP depending on MD
20112: START_MODE_MASK.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

20121 TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE[<channel>] (only without tool management)

MD number Preselect tool on Reset
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the preselected tool with MD 20310=1. A tool is preselected after power-up and
at reset or end of part program depending on MD20110 and on start of part program depending
on MD20112.
This data is only valid without tool management.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME[<channel>]
MD number Active tool at reset/start with tool management
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: STRING
Meaning: This data is valid only if the TM function is active.
Definition of the tool holder with which the tool length compensation is selected during power
up and for a reset or an end of the part program depending on MD20110 RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK and for a part program start depending on MD20112
START_MODE_MASK.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
Additional references:

Tool Management
488 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20123 USEKT_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Preselected value of $P_USEKT at RESET
Default setting: 0x0,... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xF
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit:
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: This data is valid only if the TM function is active.
The system variable $P_USEKT is preassigned with the value of this MD:
- after reset or part program end: depending on $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
Additional references:

20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER[<channel>]
MD number Tool holder number
Default setting: 0,0,0,... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 16
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: This MD is only of significance when tool management is active.
Tool management must know on which tool holder the tool is to be loaded. The data is only
evaluated if the value is greater than zero.
Then, $TC_MPP5 numbers are no longer seen as "spindle numbers", but as tool holder num‐
ber.
The automatic address extension of T and of M06 is then the value for this MD and no longer
the value of $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND. The MD is used to define the master tool
holder number to which a tool preparation or a tool change refers.
When determining the tool on the tool holder for the setting "keep old offset" of MD $MC_RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK, then reference is also made to this value.
If a machine has several tool holders, but no specific master spindle, then the MD serves as
a default value to determine the tool holder to which the tool should be loaded at a tool change
(reset, start, T="identifier", M06). When defining the magazine locations of internal magazines,
locations, type "spindle" - $TC_MPP1=2=spindle-location - are assigned a "location type in‐
dex" ($TC_MPP5). This allocates a specific tool holder to the location.
The tool holder with number n can be declared the master tool holder using the language
command SETMTH(n). This means that the offsets of a tool that is loaded to a buffer location,
type "SPINDLE" and with the value $TC_MPP5=n, correct the tool path.
Tool management change to "SPINDLE" locations with $TC_MPP5 not equal to the number
of the master tool holder have no effect on the path.
The command SETMTH is used to declare the tool holder defined in the MD as the master
tool holder again.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
MD20122 TOOL_RESET_NAME
MD20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 489
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20126 TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Operative tool holder on Reset
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: Reset Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the tool holder with which the tool length compensation is selected during power
up and for a reset or an end of the part program as a dependency on the machine data
$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and for a main program start as a dependency on the machine
data $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
This data is valid without tool management.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

20128 COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE[<channel>]
MD number Tool change commands to the PLC after block search
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: immediately Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: This MD is only of significance when magazine management is active.
($MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK)
It determines whether, after a block search with calculation of the tool change command, tool
preparation commands (general tool change commands) are output to the PLC or not.
1: Tool change commands and tool preparation commands are collected and output to the
PLC when the program starts after the search target has been reached
0: All tool/magazine-specific commands, which were collected in the block search, are not
output to the PLC with the subsequent program start! This means that also programmed
POSM, TCI, TCA commands are also not output.
Comment 1:
Without active magazine management the tool change M code is not collected if it is not
assigned to any auxiliary function group. With active magazine management, the machine
data value corresponds to =0
Comment 2:
The value =0 is, e.g. practical, if, after reaching the search target, the collected tool change
commands are output to the PLC in an ASUP program using the commands GETSELT, GE‐
TEXTET.
Corresponding to... MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Additional references:

20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Tool cutting edge length compensation at power-up (Reset/TP end)
Default setting: 0, 0, 0, ... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
490 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20130 CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
Meaning: Definition of the tool cutting edge with which the tool length compensation is selected during
power up and for a reset or an end of the part program depending on MD20110 $MC_RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK and for a part program start depending on MD20112
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.
When tool management is active and bits 0 and 6 set in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, the last
offset of the tool which was active on power-off - generally the tool in the spindle - is operative
after power up.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)

20132 SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Additive offset effective at reset
Default setting: 0, 0, ... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Definition of the additive offset with which the additive offset is selected during power up and
for a reset or an end of the part program as a dependency on the machine data $MC_RE‐
SET_MODE_MASK and for a part program start as a dependency on the machine data
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.
Machine data 18110 $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE determines the maximum
meaningful value which can be entered.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references:

20140 TRAFO_RESET_VALUE[<channel>]
MD number Transformation data record at power up (Reset/TP end)
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 20
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE
Meaning: Definition of the transformation data record selected during power up and for a reset or an
end of the part program depending on MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and for a part
program start depending on MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK.
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Axes, coordinate systems,... (K2)

20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][n]
MD number Initial setting of G group
Default setting:{2, 0, 0, 1, 0...} Min. input limit:- Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 491
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][n]
Meaning: Specification of the G code of every G group that takes effect at:
● Run-up, reset and end of part program depending on MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
● Start of part program depending on MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][<G group index>] = <group-specific number of the G command>
with:
● <G group index> = (number of the G group) - 1
● <group-specific number of the G command>: See References: Programming Manual, Fundamentals;
Section "Tables" > "G commands"
Machine data Group Default value for 840D sl
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[0] 1 2 (G01)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[1] 2 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[2] 3 2 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[3] 4 2 (STARTFIFO)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[4] 5 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5] 6 1 (G17)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[6] 7 1 (G40)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[7] 8 1 (G500)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[8] 9 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[9] 10 1 (G60)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[10] 11 0 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[11] 12 1 (G601)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[12] 13 2 (G71)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13] 14 1 (G90)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[14] 15 2 (G94)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[15] 16 1 (CFC)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[16] 17 1 (NORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[17] 18 1 (G450)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[18] 19 1 (BNAT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[19] 20 1 (ENAT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[20] 21 1 (BRISK)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[21] 22 1 (CUT2D)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[22] 23 1 (CDOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[23] 24 1 (FFWOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[24] 25 1 (ORIWKS)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[25] 26 2 (RMI)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[26] 27 1 (ORIC)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[27] 28 1 (WALIMON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[28] 29 1 (DIAMOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[29] 30 1 (COMPOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[30] 31 1 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[31] 32 1 (inactive)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[32] 33 1 (FTCOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[33] 34 1 (OSOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[34] 35 1 (SPOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[35] 36 1 (PDELAYON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[36] 37 1 (FNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[37] 38 1 (SPIF1)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[38] 39 1 (CCPRECOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[39] 40 1 (CUTCONOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[40] 41 1 (LFOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[41] 42 1 (TCOABS)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[42] 43 1 (G140)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[43] 44 1 (G340)

Tool Management
492 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES[<channel>][n]
Meaning: GCODE_RESET_VALUES[44] 45 1 (SPATH)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[45] 46 1 (LFTXT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[46] 47 1 (G290 Sinumerik mode)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[47] 48 3 (G460)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[48] 49 1 (CP)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[49] 50 1 (ORIEULER)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[50] 51 1 (ORIVECT)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[51] 52 1 (PAROTOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[52] 53 1 (TOROTOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[53] 54 1 (ORIROTA)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[54] 55 1 (RTLION)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[55] 56 1 (TOWSTD)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[56] 57 1 (FENDNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[57] 58 1 (RELIEVEON)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[58] 59 1 (DYNNORM)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[59] 60 1 (WALCS0)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[60] 61 1 (ORISOF)
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[61] 62 1 (not defined)
....
GCODE_RESET_VALUES[69] 70 1 (not defined)
Corresponding MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
to... MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional refer‐ (K1, G2)
ences: The complete list of all G groups with the G functions contained therein can be found in:
References: Programming Manual, Fundamentals

20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE[n]
MD number Reset behavior of G groups
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: RESET Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE
Meaning: This MD is only evaluated if bit 0 is set in $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK.
This MD is used to define for each entry in MD $MN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES (i.e. for each
G group), whether a setting according to the $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES is undertaken
again for a reset/part program end (MD=0) or whether the current setting is retained (MD=1).
Example:
The normal position of the 6th G group (current level) is read from the machine data
$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES for each reset / part program end here:
$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5]=1; reset value of 6th G group is M17
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[5]=0; initial state for the 6th G group after
;reset/part program end according to
;$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5]
However, if the current setting of the 6th G group (current level) is to be retained beyond reset /
part program end, then the following setting is obtained:
$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[5]=1; reset value of 6th G group is M17
$MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[5]=1; current setting for the 6th G group
; is also kept after reset/part program end

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 493
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE[n]
Corresponding to... MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20112 START_MODE_MASK
Additional references: Description of functions: Axes, coordinate systems,... (K2)

20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT
MD number Initial state of tool cutting edge without programming
Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: -2 Max. input limit: 32000
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Default tool cutting edge after tool change
If no cutting edge is programmed after a tool change, then the edge number preset in CUT‐
TING_EDGE_DEFAULT is applied.
Value = 0: No cutting edge is initially active after a tool change. Cutting-edge selection only
takes place at D programming.
Value = 1: No. of the cutting edge
Value = -1: Cutting edge number of old tool also applies to new tool.
Value = -2: Cutting edge (offset) of the old tool remains active until D is programmed.
Example:
MD: CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT = 1;
after a tool change, without programming a cutting edge, the first cutting edge is active
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

20272 SUMCORR_DEFAULT
MD number Initial state of additive offset without programming
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 6
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The number of the additive offset for the cutting edge that is active when a new cutting-edge
offset is activated without a programmed DL value.
The MD18110 $MN_MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTEDGE determines the maximum
meaningful value which can be entered.
Value: Meaning
> 0: Number of additive offset
= 0: No additive offset active with D programming
= -1: The additive offset number for the previously programmed D is used.
Corresponding to... MD20270 CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

Note
The output of the DL number is controlled by the MD AUXFU_DL_SYNC_TYPE.

Tool Management
494 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD number Channel-specific activation of tool management functions
Default setting: 0x0,... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFFFF
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: HEX
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: MD = 0: Tool management inactive
Bit 0=1: Tool management active
The tool management functions are enabled for the current channel.
Bit 1=1: TM monitoring function active
Functions for monitoring tools (tool life and workpiece count) are enabled.
Bit 2=1: OEM functions active
The memory can be used for the user data (see also M 18090 to18098)
Bit 3=1: Adjacent location consideration active
Bit 0 to bit 3 must be set just like MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Meaning: Bit 4=1: The PLC has the option to request another T preparation with modified parameters.
Acknowledgement status "2", "7" and "103" is enabled with this bit. This causes the tool se‐
lection to be repeated in the NCK
Bits 5 to 8
Bit 5 and bit 7 refer to the main spindle
Bit 6 and bit 8 refer to the secondary spindles
Bit 5 = 1: The command output is considered completed if the internal transport acknowledge‐
ment + the transport acknowledgement are present, i.e. if the command was received by the
basic PLC program.
Bit 19=1 additionally allows the block change to be prevented (main run) until the required
acknowledgements are received.
Bit 7 = 1: The command output is not considered completed until the end acknowledgement
from the PLC is received, i.e. the command was acknowledged by the PLC user program with
status "1".
Bit 19=1 additionally allows the block change to be prevented (main run) until the required
acknowledgements are received.
Bit 5 and bit 7 (alternatively bit 6 and bit 8) are mutually exclusive!
Only the following combinations are permitted:
Bit 5: …0…1…0
Bit 7: …0…0…1
With the default setting, i.e. bit 5 to 8 = 0, synchronization is performed in the block in which
a cutting edge was first selected.
Setting these bits delays block processing.
Meaning: Bit 9: Reserved for test purposes
(no command output to the PLC)
can also be used by the machine manufacturer in the test phase, as long as the PLC program
does not yet change tools
Meaning: Bit 10=1: M06 is delayed until the preparation is taken over by the PLC user program.
The change command is only output when the preparation acknowledgement is received. This
can be, for example status "1" or "105".
Bit 10=0: The change command is output without delay, immediately after the preparation
command.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 495
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Meaning: Bit 11=1: The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers = 2, 4, 5) is carried out
even if the same tool preparation command has taken place! (Commands 4, 5 contain the tool
preparation)
Example: (tool change takes place with M06 (PLC command number=3):
T="Tool1"; Tool preparation
M06; tool change
T="Tool2"; 1st tool preparation after M6 (for the same tool holder)
; is always output to PLC
T="Tool2"; 2nd tool preparation, is only output as command to PLC if bit 11 = 1
; This tool preparation counts as the first one if the status of the tool has changed since the
previous tool preparation such that it can no longer be used.
A possible reason for this would be, e.g. asynchronous unloading of a tool. This tool prepara‐
tion them attempts to select a replacement tool.
Bit 11=0: The preparation command can be output only once for each tool.
Meaning: Bit 12=1: The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers = 2, 4, 5) is carried out
even if the tool is already positioned in the spindle /tool holder.
T="Tool1"; Tool preparation
M06; tool change
T="Tool1"; Tool is already placed on the tool holder
; 1st tool preparation after M06 (for the same tool holder)
; is only output to PLC if bit 12 = 1
; A tool that cannot be used (e.g. disabled due to tool monitoring) on the tool holder does not
count as if placed on the tool holder. This tool preparation then attempts to select a replace‐
ment tool.
T="Tool2"; 2nd tool preparation - the following rules applies for bit 11 for output
Bit 12=0: The preparation command is not executed if the tool is already positioned in the
spindle.
Bit 13=1: Trace
For reset, the command output of the NCK and the acknowledgements of the PLC are saved
in a trace file (TCTRAxx.mpf, xx=channel no.).
Corresponds with $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TRACE_SZ..
Bit 14=1: Reset mode
Tool and offset selection according to the settings in MD $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK and
$MC_START_MODE_MASK.
Bit 14=0: No reset mode

Tool Management
496 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Meaning: Bit 15=1: The tool is not returned if several preparation commands have been issued (Tx->Tx).
Bit 15=0: Tool is returned from possibly defined buffers.
Bit 16=1: T=location number is active
Bit 16=0: T="Tool name"
Bit 17=1: Tool life monitoring is controlled by the PLC (DB21.DBX1.3).
Bit 18=1: Activation of monitoring "last tool of tool group"
Bit 18 extends the search for a suitable tool, especially if there are many disabled replacement
tools.
Bit 18=0: No monitoring for "Last tool in tool group"
Bit 19=1: The synchronizations defined by bits 5...8 are relative to the main run block, i.e. there
is no block change until the required acknowledgements are received
Bit 19 in conjunction with bits 5, 6, 7, 8 set delays the block processing.
Bit 19=0: The synchronizations defined by bits 5...8 are relative to the tool management com‐
mand output, i.e. there is no block change delay
Meaning: Bit 20=0: The commands generated on PLC signal "program testing active" are not output to
the PLC. NCK acknowledges the commands automatically. Magazine and tool data is not
changed.
Bit 20=1: The commands generated for PLC signal "program testing active" are output to the
PLC. Depending on the type of acknowledgement, tool/magazine data can be changed in the
NCK. If the acknowledgement parameters for the "target magazine" are set to the same values
as the "source magazine", the tool is not transported and thus no data modified in the NCK.
Bit 21=0: Default setting: Ignore the tool status "W" at tool selection
Bit 21=1: Tools in status "W" cannot be selected by another tool change, tool preparation
command.
Bit 22=1: "Tool subgroups" function
$TC_TP11[x] is the grouping or selection parameter
Bit 23=0: Default setting
The tool management optimally and reliably selects the tool in the main run, i.e. the interpreter
may have to wait for the end of the tool selection for offset selection.
Bit 23=1: For basic applications
The interpreter selects the tool itself, i.e. no synchronization is required with the main run for
offset selection. (If the tool becomes no longer useable after selection, but before loading, an
uncorrectable alarm may result.)
Bit 24=0: Default setting
If the PLC commands 8 and 9 (asynchronous transfer) want to move a tool to a location that
is reserved for another tool, this is rejected and an alarm is issued.
Bit 24=1: If the PLC commands 8 and 9 are to move a tool to a location that is reserved for
another tool with "Reserved for tool from buffer" (bit values="H4"), this is possible. This location
reservation is then removed before the movement is executed ("Reserved for new tool to be
loaded" (bit value="H8") remains effective).
Corresponding to... MD18080 MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
MD20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
MD20122 MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME
MD20110 MC_RESET_MODE_MASK
MD20124 MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER
MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Additional references:

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 497
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

20320 TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK
MD number Time monitoring for tool in the tool holder
Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: HEX
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Activation of tool time monitoring for tool holder or spindle 1....x.
As soon as the path axes are moved (not for G00, always for G63), the tool time monitoring
data for the tool which is located in the selected tool holder – which is at the same time the
master tool holder – is updated.
Bit 0...x-1: Monitoring of active tool in spindle 1...x
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
MD number New tool offset for M function
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: BYTE
Meaning: A tool is selected in the program with the T function. The setting in this machine data deter‐
mines whether the new tool is loaded immediately on execution of the T function:
MD: TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0
The new tool data becomes effective directly when T or D is programmed.
This setting is used mainly for turning machines with tool turret.
If there is no D programmed in the block with T, the tool offset which is defined in $MC_CUT‐
TING_EDGE_DEFAULT becomes effective.
MD: TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1
The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function. This setting is used mainly on milling
machines with a tool magazine, in order to bring the new tool into the tool change position
without interrupting the machining process. With the M function set in MD 22560:
TOOL_CHANGE_MODE, the old tool is removed from the spindle and the new tool is loaded
into the spindle. According to DIN 66025, this tool change must be programmed with the M
function M06.
Corresponding to... MD22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
MD number M function for tool change
Default setting: 6 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 99999999
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
498 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE
Meaning: If the T function is used only to prepare a new tool for a tool change (this setting is used mainly
on milling machines with a tool magazine, in order to bring the new tool into the tool change
position without interrupting the machining process), the tool change must be initiated with an
additional M function. The M function entered in TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE initiates the tool
change (remove old tool from the spindle and load the new tool in the spindle).
This tool change is required to be programmed with M function M06, in accordance with
DIN66025.
Corresponding to... MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
Additional references: Functional description for tool offset (W1)

22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
MD number Behavior when errors occur at tool change
Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFF
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 499
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
Meaning: Behavior in the case that faults/problems occur for a programmed tool change.
Bit 0=0: Standard behavior: Stop on faulty NC block
Bit 0=1: If the error occurs in the block containing the tool change preparation command, the
alarm activated by the preparation command (T) is delayed until the program run reaches the
point at which the associated tool change command (M06) is interpreted. Only then is the
alarm output that is triggered by the preparation command. The operator can make corrections
in this block. When execution of the program is continued, the faulty NC block is interpreted
again and the preparatory command is internally executed again automatically.
The value = 1 is only of significance if the setting MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1 is
used.
Bit 1 is only meaningful if tool management is active.
Bit 1=0: Standard behavior: During the tool-change preparation only those tools are recog‐
nized whose data is assigned to a magazine.
Bit 1=1: Manual tools can be loaded at change.
A tool will also be loaded at change if its data is registered in the NCK, but not assigned to a
magazine. In this case, the tool data is automatically assigned to the programmed tool holder.
The user is prompted to place tools into the tool holder or remove tools from it.
Bit 2 Qualifying the offset programming
Bit 2=0: Active D no. > 0 and active D no.=0 results in offset 0
Active D no. > 0 and active D no.=0 result in additive offset 0
Bit 2=1: Active D no. > 0 and active D no.=0 generates an alarm message
Active D no. > 0 and active D no.=0 generates an alarm message
Bits 3 and 4 are only meaningful if tool management is active.
Function:
Control of behavior of Init block generation at program start if disabled tool is positioned in the
spindle and needs to be activated.
For further details, see: MD 20112: START_MODE_MASK, MD 20110: RESET_MODE_MASK
At RESET the behavior of "keep disabled tool on spindle active" is not affected by this.
Bit 3=0: Default: If the tool on the spindle is disabled: Generate a tool-change command that
requests a replacement tool. If there is no replacement, then an alarm is produced.
Bit 3=1: The disabled status of the spindle tool is ignored. The tool is active. The following part
program should be formulated such that no parts are machined with the disabled tool.
Bit 4=0: Default: An attempt is made to activate the spindle tool or the replacement tool
Bit 4=1: If the tool on the spindle is disabled, T0 is programmed in the start init. block.
The following statements are made for the combination of bit 3 and bit 4:
0 / 0: Behavior as before, automatic change at NC start if the disabled tool is in the spindle
1 / 0: Is not changed automatically
0 / 1: A T0 is generated automatically for a disabled tool in the spindle at NC Start
1 / 1: No statement

Tool Management
500 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 6=0: Default: with T0 or D0 then precisely only T0 or D0 are programmed. In other words,
the MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT define the value of
D, DL when T0 is programmed.
For example, $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=1, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT=2,
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0 (tool change with T programming)
N10 T0; T no. 0 has active number D1 and DL=2 which results in an offset of zero. If, in addition,
bit 2 is also set:
Programming of
a) T0; to deselect tool
b) D0; for offset deselection
generates an alarm, if
a) At least one of MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT is not
equal to zero (T0 D0 DL=0 is the correct programming).
b) The MD $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT is not equal to zero (D0 DL=0 is the correct program‐
ming).
Bit 6=1: Controls the NCK behavior with programming of (x, y, z all greater than zero), if at
least one of MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT is not equal
to zero.
a) Tx Dy -> T0
with T0 - D0 or D0 DL=0 is automatically programmed in the NCK; i.e. values not equal to
zero for MD $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT, $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT are processed
as if the value were equal to zero.
b) Tx Dy >T0 Dy, or T0 DL =z, or T0 Dy DL=z, or T0 D0 DL=z explicitly programmed values
of D, DL are not influenced.
c) Dy DL=z -> D0
with D0 - DL=0 is automatically programmed in the NCK; i.e. values not equal to zero for MD
$MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT are processed as if the value were equal to zero.
d) Dy DL=z -> D0 DL=z
explicitly programmed values of DL are not influenced.
If in addition bit 2 is also set:
only T0/D0 have to be programmed for tool/offset deselection and therefore no alarm is output.
The statements regarding $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT or DL are only valid if the additive
offset function is active (see $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 8).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 501
Machine data
7.2 Channel-specific machine data

22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE
Bit 7=0: Programming Tx checks whether a tool with the T number x is known in the TO unit
of the channel. If it is not, processing stops in this block and alarm 17190 is issued.
Bit 7=1: Only if tool basic functionality is active ($MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit
0.1=0) and ($MN_MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE=0):
If Tx is programmed, any unknown Tx is first ignored and the alarm for the preparation com‐
mand (Tx) is ignored until D selection is interpreted in the program execution. Only then is
alarm 17191 output that was triggered by the preparation command. This means that in this
block, the operator could use the D selection to make corrections. When execution of the
program is continued, the faulty NC block is interpreted again and the preparatory command
is internally executed again automatically.
(It is interesting for cutting edge default=0 or =-2 or D0 programming, otherwise when changing
the tool, the D from cutting edge default is deselected.)
This variant can be required if you want to program "Tool number=Location" (turret as tool
holder) without tool management. The turret can only be positioned at a location for which
there is no tool defined (yet).
If bit 0=1 is set, this bit is irrelevant.
Bit 8=0: A tool that is on a disabled magazine location is not taken into account for the tool
selection, i.e. it cannot be selected (default setting).
Bit 8=1: Also a tool that is on a disabled magazine location is taken into account for the tool
selection (corresponds to earlier behavior).
Additional references: Description of functions: Tool Offset (W1)

28085 MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT
MD number Allocation of a TO unit to a channel
Default setting: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ... Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 10
Change becomes effective after: POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit:
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: The area T0 includes all tool, magazine, ... data blocks, which the NCK knows. The maximum
number of units in the TO area match the maximum number of channels.
If MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT = default, then each channel is individually assigned a TO unit.
The channel is assigned to the TO unit i with MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT = i. It is thus possible to
assign one TO unit to several channels.
Notice
The upper limit value does not imply that the value is always meaningful or without conflict. If
one channel (the first) is active and the other not on a system with a total of 2 channels, the
MD on channel 1 can be formally set to a value of 2. However, the NCK cannot work with this
setting. This setting would mean that channel 1 possesses no data blocks for tool offsets since
a channel with Id=2 does not exist.
The NCK detects this conflict during power-on or a warm restart and reacts by independently
changing the (incorrect) setting to the default setting for the MD.
Corresponding to...
Additional references: Description of functions: Memory configuration (S7)

Tool Management
502 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.3 Machine data for function replacement

7.3 Machine data for function replacement

10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD number M function to be replaced by a subprogram
Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Change valid after POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: M number with which the subprogram is called.
The name of the subprogram is stored in $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n]. If the M func‐
tion defined using $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] is programmed in a part program block, then
the subprogram defined in M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] is started at the end of block.
If the M function is re-programmed in the subprogram, then there is no longer any replacement
by a subprogram call.
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] acts both in the Siemens mode G290 as well as in the external
language mode G291.
The subprograms configured with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] and
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME may not be effective in one block (part program line) at the
same time, i.e. max. one M/T function replacement can be effective per block. Neither an M98
nor a modal subprogram call may be programmed in the block with the M function replacement.
A subprogram return jump or end of part program is also not permitted. Alarm 14016 is gen‐
erated in the case of a conflict.
Constraints:
M functions with a fixed meaning and configurable M functions are checked for competing
settings. A conflict is signaled with an alarm. The following M functions are checked:
- M0 to M5,
- M17, M30,
- M40 to M45,
- M function for selecting spindle/axis mode according to $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAP‐
PING_M_NR (default M70)
- M functions for nibbling/punching as configured in $MC_NIBBLE_PUNCH_CODE if activated
by $MC_PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION.
- for applied external language ($MN_MM_EXTERN_LANGUAGE) M19, M96-M99.
Exception: The M functions defined by $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE for the tool change.
Corresponding to...
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD number Subprograms for M function replacement
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/4 Unit: -
Data type: STRING

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 503
Machine data
7.3 Machine data for function replacement

10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
Meaning: The cycle name is stored in the machine data. This cycle is called if the M function was
programmed from machine datum $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE.
If the M function is programmed in a motion block, then the cycle is executed after the motion.
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE acts both in the Siemens mode G290 as well as in the external
language mode G291.
If a T number is programmed in the calling block, the programmed T number
can be queried in the cycle under the variable $P_TOOL.
M and T function replacement may not be effective in one block at the same time, i.e. max.
one M/T function replacement can be effective per block. Neither an M98 nor a modal sub‐
program call may be programmed in the block with the M function replacement. A subprogram
return jump or end of part program is also not permitted.
Alarm 14016 is generated in the case of a conflict.
Corresponding to... MD10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD10717 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

10717 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD number Name of tool change cycle for T function replacement
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 2/4 Unit: -
Data type: STRING
Meaning: Cycle name for tool change routine during call via T function.
If a T function is programmed in a part program block, then the subprogram defined in
t_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is called at the end of block.
The programmed T number can be queried in the cycle via the system variables $C_T/
$C_T_PROG as decimal value and via $C_TS / $C_TS / $C_TS_PROG as string (only in tool
management).
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME acts both in the Siemens mode G290 as well as in the ex‐
ternal language mode G291.
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME and $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME may not be effec‐
tive in one block at the same time, i.e. max. one M/T function replacement can be effective
per block.
Neither an M98 nor a modal subprogram call may be programmed in the block with the T
function replacement. A subprogram return jump or end of part program is also not permitted.
Alarm 14016 is generated in the case of a conflict.
Corresponding to... MD10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE
MD10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

10718 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR
MD number M function replacement with parameters
Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 7/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD

Tool Management
504 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.3 Machine data for function replacement

10718 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR
Meaning: If a M function replacement was configured with $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] /
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n], then $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR can be used for
specifying parameter transfer for one of these M functions per system variable as is the case
for the T function replacement. The parameters stored in the system variables always refer to
the part program line in which the M function to be replaced is programmed.
The following system variables are available:
$C_ME: Address extension of the substituted M function
$C_T_PROG: TRUE if address T has been programmed
$C_T: Value of address T (integer)
$C_TE: Address extension of address T
$C_TS_PROG: TRUE if address TS has been programmed
$C_D_PROG: TRUE if address D has been programmed
$C_D: Value of address D
$C_DL_PROG: TRUE if address DL has been programmed
$C_DL: Value of address DL
Corresponding to...
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

10719 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE
MD number Parameter assignment for T function replacement
Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 7
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 7/2 Unit: -
Data type: DWORD
Meaning: Processing of the substitution program is parameterized in this MD for the tool selection/tool
offset selection.
Bit 0 = 0:
The D or DL number is transferred to the substitution program (default value)
Bit 0 = 1:
The D or DL number is not transferred to the substitution program if the following conditions
are fulfilled: $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 1 programming of D/DL with T or M function with
which the tool change cycle is called, in one part program line
Bit 1 = 0:
Execution of substitution subprogram at end of block (default value)
Bit 1 = 1:
Processing of substitution subprogram at start of block
Bit 2 = 0:
Processing of substitution subprogram according to setting for bit 1
Bit 2 = 1:
Execution of substitution subprogram at start of block and end of block
Corresponding to...
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

11717 D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
MD number Subprogram name for D function replacement
Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 505
Machine data
7.3 Machine data for function replacement

11717 D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME
Changes effective after Power On Protection level: 7/2 Unit: -
Data type: STRING
Meaning: Cycle name for D function replacement routine.
If a D function is programmed in a part program block, the subprogram defined with
$MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is called in accordance with the machine data
$MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME, $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE and
$MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR.
The programmed D number can be queried in the cycle via the system variables $C_D /
$C_D_PROG.
$MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME can only run in Siemens mode (G290).
A maximum of one M/T/D function replacement can be effective for each part program line.
A modal subprogram call may not be programmed in the block with the D function replacement.
It is also not permissible to program a subprogram return jump or end of part program.
Alarm 14016 is generated in the case of a conflict.
Corresponding to...
Additional references: ISO dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

Tool Management
506 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Machine data
7.4 Machine data for the Siemens user data

7.4 Machine data for the Siemens user data

The numbers of the Siemens machine data are listed in the following. This data is defined by
Siemens and must not be used by users. No detailed description of them is given for this reason.
18200
18201
18202
18203
18204
18205
18206
18207
18208
18209

Note
A detailed description of machine data 18091, 18093, 18095, 18097 and 18099 has been
provided, but these MD may be used only if they are set to their respective defaults.

Multitool machine data

18196
18197
18198
18199

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 507
Machine data
7.4 Machine data for the Siemens user data

Tool Management
508 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Signal description of the PLC interface 8
8.1 Overview of data blocks

General
The table below shows an overview of the data blocks used for data management.

DB71 For loading/unloading points

DB1071 Extended data for multitools
DB72 For spindle as change position
DB1072 Extended data for multitools
DB73 For turret as change position
DB1073 Extended data for multitools
DB74 Internal data block of basic program for tool management

1. There is a separate interface area in DB71 for each loading point configured in the magazine
configuration. The interface area for loading point 1 generally has the task of loading into
the spindle.
Relocation- and positioning tasks are always handled via loading point_1 (spindle loading
point).
2. DB72 contains a separate interface area for every spindle defined in the tool management
function.
3. A separate interface area is provided in DB73 for each turret of the magazine configuration.
The turret numbers are numbered without any gaps from the lowest up to the highest
magazine number.
4. Data for multitools is available in data blocks DB1071, DB1072 and DB1073 (analog to
DB71, DB72 and DB73 loading and unloading, spindle change positions, turret).
All interfaces are designed for receiving tool-management commands (load, tool change, ...).
Basic program blocks FC6 (multitool), FC7 and FC 8 are used to communicate the current
positions of tools.
One of the interfaces is updated by NCK via the basic program in accordance with a command
(e.g. by operating the function "Load" or by a part-program function like "Tool change").

Note
The PLC must also be adapted if data of magazines, buffers or loading/unloading positions is
changed in the commissioning branch.
Either automatically after the next Power On by changing DB4 or with HMI-Advanced.
With the next restart, the basic PLC program automatically clears DB71 ... DB73, DB1071 ...
1073 and DB74 and creates the blocks again.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 509
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine

8.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine

DB71 Signals of loading/unloading points

Data block NCK -> PLC interface
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Interfaces
DBB0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
DBB2 Ackn INT 8 Ackn INT 7 Ackn INT 6 Ackn INT 5 Ackn INT 4 Ackn INT 3 Ackn INT 2 Ackn INT 1
DBB3 Ackn INT 16 Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT 9
15 14 13 12 11 10
DBBn+0 Res. Positioning Positioning Positioning Relocating Unloading Loading
a multitool from the a multitool
NC pro‐
gram
DBBn+1 Data in the Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Acknowl‐
extended edgement
range status = 3
(DB 1071)
DBBn+2 Assigned channel (8bit-Int)
DBBn+3 Tool management number (8bit-Int)
DB n+4 Reserved
DBDn+8 Reserved
DBDn+12 Reserved
DBWn+16 Identifier for loading/unloading point (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBWn+18 Location no. of loading/unloading point (Int)
DBWn+20 Magazine no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning (Int)
DBWn+22 Location no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning (Int)
DBWn+24 Magazine no. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning (Int)
DBWn+26 Location no. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning (Int)
DBWn+28 Loading/un‐
HMI to PLC loading with‐
out moving
magazine
DBWn+29 Spare

Starting addresses of loading/unloading points:

Loading/unloading point 1: n = 4
Loading/unloading point 2: n = 34
Loading/unloading point 3: n = 64
Loading/unloading point 4: n = 94
Example of calculating address DBWn+24 (target magazine no.)
n=(m-1)*len+4 m = location no. of loading station/point

Tool Management
510 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine

len = 30 (length of loading point)

m = 2; len = 30 n= (2-1)*30+4 --> n = 34
DBW (34+24) = DBW 58
Address for magazine no. target of 2nd loading point is DBW58.
Loading point 1 is intended for loading/unloading in all spindles. Loading point is also used to
relocate/position tools in any location (e.g. buffer location).

DB71.DBX0.0 - 1.7 Active status of interface 1- 16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The active interface has a valid data record. A task bit has been set
in DBB (n+0). There are 16 interfaces. Address "n" must always be
calculated for the active interface.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by FC8 or FC6.

DB71.DBX2.0 - 3.7 "auto" acknowledgement of interface 1 - 16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 When setting (edge) the bit, the pending command is acknowl‐
edged with status_1. Unless it is a relocation operation from a real
magazine to a buffer. Then acknowledgement is with status_6. This
reserves the source location.
For example
U DB71.DBX0.0
U DB71.DBX4.1 (unloading)
S DB71.DBX2.0
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.

DB71.DBX(n+0).0 Command: Loading

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Loading operation for a tool is initiated. The magazine location into
which the tool is to be loaded is defined in DBW(n+26). The loading
point in question is the location number of the loading point. It is
also located in DBW(n+18)
Corresponding to... DB71DBX(n+16) and (n+18) and (n+26)

DB71.DBX(n+0).1 Command: Unloading

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Unloading operation is initiated for a tool; the magazine location
from which it is to be unloaded is in DBW (n+20) and DBW (n+22).
The number of the unloading point is in DBW(n+18).
Corresponding to... DB71DBX(n+16) and (n+18) or (n+20) and (n+22)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 511
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine

DB71.DBX(n+0).2 Command: Relocating

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Relocate operation for a tool is initiated. From magazine/location (n
+20, n+22=source) to magazine/location (n+24, n+26=target)

Note
The bits in DBB(n+0) (loading, unloading,....) are not updated by the basic program until a new
task exists for this interface. They are current only if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0
is set to "1''. If required, the user can reset bits DBB(n+0).

DB71.DBX(n+0).3 Command: Positioning to the loading point

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 A magazine location is to be positioned at the loading point (maga‐
zine no. 9999). The magazine location that is to be moved to the
loading point is in DB71.DBW(n+20) and (n+22). The loading point
is in DB71.DBWn+18.

DB71.DBX(n+0).4 Command: Task comes from the NC program

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The signal is set if the task is received from the part program or via
a cycle.
1. Positioning task with the language command POSM
2. A relocation task or tool transport using the language command
MVTOOL
3. Positioning a multitool using the language command POSMT

DB71.DBX(n+0).5 Command: Positioning a multitool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Positioning a multitool has been initiated.
This can be realized using a language command, PI service or the
HMI user interface.

DB71.DBX(n+1).0 "auto" ackn negative

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set,
then the auto acknowledge is negative, i.e. with status_3.

DB71.DBX(n+1).7 Command: Data in the extended range

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The signal is set if a multitool is loaded, unloaded or positioned. The
multitool data is then available in DB 1071.

Tool Management
512 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine

DB71.DBB(n+2) Assigned channel

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Number of the channel for which the active interface is valid.

DB71.DBB(n+3) Tool management no.

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Associated tool management number; corresponds to the number
of the TO unit within a TO area.

DB71.DBW(n+16) Identifier for loading/unloading point (fixed value 9999)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning The identifier for the loading/unloading point is fixed to the value
9999.

DB71.DBW(n+18) Location no. of the loading/unloading point

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning The location no. of the loading/unloading point is displayed.

DB71.DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Unloading: Magazine from which the tool is to be unloaded
Relocating: Magazine from which the tool comes
Positioning: Magazine that is to be positioned
Corresponding to... DBW(n+22)

DB71.DBW(n+22) Location no. (Source) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Unloading: Location from which the tool is to be unloaded
Relocating: Location from where the tool comes
Positioning: Location that should be positioned
Corresponding to... DBW(n+20)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 513
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.2 Interface for loading/unloading magazine

DB71.DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Loading: Magazine into which the tool is to be loaded
Relocating: Magazine into which the tool comes
Positioning: Magazine to be positioned to
Tool remains in the original magazine
Only meaningful for interface 1. If values other than 0 are entered
here, the data defines the magazine or location for positioning (lan‐
guage command POSM).
Corresponding to... DBW(n+26)

DB71.DBW(n+26) Location no. (Target) for unloading/relocating/positioning

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Loading: Location into which the tool is to be loaded
Relocating: Location into which the tool comes
Positioning: Location to be positioned to
Tool remains at the original location
Only meaningful for interface 1. If values other than 0 are entered
here, the data define the magazine or location for positioning (lan‐
guage command POSM).
Corresponding to... DBW(n+24)

DB71.DBX(n+28) Bit0 Loading/unloading without moving magazine

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning HMI / Jobshop sets/deletes this signal when requested by the oper‐
ator. If the bit is active, there must be no traversing motion of the
magazine, only a mechanical unlocking/locking of the location. The
loading/unloading command must be acknowledged after the ac‐
tion. For a positioning and relocating request, this signal is not valid
for a traversing motion.

Tool Management
514 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.3 Interface for spindle as change position

8.3 Interface for spindle as change position

DB72 Spindle as change position

data block Interface NCK -> PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Interfaces
DBB0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
DBB2 Ackn INT 8 Ackn INT 7 Ackn INT 6 Ackn INT 5 Ackn INT 4 Ackn INT 3 Ackn INT 2 Ackn INT 1
DBB3 Ackn INT 16 Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT 9
15 14 13 12 11 10
DBB(n+0) Tool remains Remove Load man‐ OldTool in T0 Prepare Change Obligatory
in spindle manual tool ual tool at BL no. (n change tool (initi‐ change
change +42) ated by
M06)
DBB(n+1) Data in the Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Acknowl‐
extended edgement
range (DB status = 3
1072)
DBB(n+2) Assigned channel (8bit-Int)
DBB(n+3) Tool management number (8bit-Int)
DBD(n+4) $P_VDITCP[0]
User-definable parameter 0 (DWord)
DBD(n+8) $P_VDITCP[1]
User-definable parameter 1 (DWord)
DBD(n+12) $P_VDITCP[2]
User-definable parameter 2 (DWord)
DBW(n+16) Buffer identifier (Int), (fixed value 9998)
corresponds to "Target position for new tool"
DBW(n+18) Relative location (target) in buffer magazine (Int)
DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (Source) for new tool (Int)
DBW(n+22) Location no. (Source) for new tool (Int)
DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (Target) for old tool (Int)
DBW(n+26) Location no. (Target) for old tool (Int)
DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type (Int)
DBW(n+30) New tool: Size on left (Int)
DBW(n+32) New tool: Size on right (Int)
DBW(n+34) New tool: Size at top (Int)
DBW(n+36) New tool: Size at bottom (Int)
DBB(n+38) Tool status for new tool
Manual 1:1 ex‐ Master tool Tool to be Tool to be Disabled, Identifier for
tool change loaded unloaded but ignore tools in the buf‐
fer
DBB(n+39) Tool status for new tool
Tool was Tool, fixed- Tool is be‐ Prewarn‐ Measure Tool disa‐ Enable tool Active tool
in use location- ing ing limit tool bled
coded changed reached

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 515
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.3 Interface for spindle as change position

DB72 Spindle as change position

data block Interface NCK -> PLC
DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T number of NCK (Int)
DBW(n+42) If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then the buffer location of the old tool must be entered here
DBW(n+44) Original magazine of new tool
DBW(n+46) Original location of the new tool

Start address of the spindle:

Spindle 1: n = 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
Spindle 3: n = 100
n = (m-1)*len + 4
m = location number of the change position
len = 48

Note
If only M06 is programmed, only free parameters, channel, tool management number and the
bit for "Perform change" are updated.

DB72.DBX0.0 - 1.7 Active status of interface 1- 16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Associated interface has a valid data record, a tool change request
of tool preparation has been initiated.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by FC 8/FC 6.

DB72.DBX2.0-3.7 "auto" acknowledgement of interface 1-16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 When setting (edge) the bit, the pending command is acknowl‐
edged with status_1.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.

DB72.DBX(n+0).0 Command code: Obligatory change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The new tool is fixed-location-coded.

DB72.DBX(n+0).1 Command code: Perform change with M06

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 M06 command was programmed for tool change, the tool change
can now take place

Tool Management
516 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.3 Interface for spindle as change position

DB72.DBX(n+0).2 Command code: Prepare change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Prepare new tool for change. If necessary, move location for old
tool to spindle.

DB72.DBX(n+0).3 Command code: T0

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Indicates that T0 has been programmed (no-load traversing of spin‐
dle).

DB72.DBX(n+0).4 Command code: Old tool in buffer

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The buffer number of the tool to be changed is written in DB72.DBW
(n+42)

DB72.DBX(n+0).5 Command code: Load manual tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 A manual tool is to be loaded. The HMI displays the tool which is to
be loaded.

DB72.DBX(n+0).6 Command code: Unload manual tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The tool is to be changed via manual operation.

DB72.DBX(n+0).7 Command code: Tool remains in spindle

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The bit is set at change from spindle to spindle. Initiated, e.g. by
reset and start mode or block search.

Note
The bit in DBB (n+0).2 (prepare change) is not reset by the system with a change command.
The bits in DBB(n+0) ... are current only if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0 is set to "1''.
However, the user can reset the bits when required.
If DBX(n+0).1 and DBX(n+0).2 are present at the same time, it means that T and M06 were
programmed in one block.

DB72.DBX(n+1).0 "auto" ackn negative

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set,
then the auto acknowledge is negative, i.e. with status_3.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 517
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.3 Interface for spindle as change position

DB72.DBX(n+1).7 Command: Data in the extended range

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The signal is set if a tool is prepared in a multitool or is loaded into
a multitool. DB 72 contains the data of the multitool, the data of the
selected tool is available in DB 1072.
For T0 the signal is not set.

DB72.DBB(n+2) Assigned channel

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Number of channel for which active interface applies.

DB72.DBB(n+3) Tool management no.

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Associated tool management no. (TO area)

DB72.DBD(n+4) User-definable parameter 0 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[0];. Values are trans‐
ferred at T call.

DB72.DBD(n+8) User-definable parameter 1 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[1];.

DB72.DBD(n+12) User-definable parameter 2 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[2]

DB72.DBW(n+16) Buffer magazine no. (fixed value 9998)

Target position for new tool
Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Magazine no. 9998 (buffer magazine); target magazine for new tool.

Tool Management
518 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.3 Interface for spindle as change position

DB72.DBW(n+18) Location in buffer magazine (spindle)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location no. of buffer magazine to which the new tool must be loa‐
ded. This is normally the spindle. The location number defined for
this particular buffer during commissioning is output.

DB72.DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (source) for new tool to be loaded

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning No. of magazine from which the new spindle tool comes.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+22)

DB72.DBW(n+22) Location no. (source) for new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location no. of the magazine from which the new spindle tool
comes.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+20)

DB7.2DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (target) for old tool to be removed

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Number of magazine in which the tool to be removed at change will
be placed.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+26)

DB72.DBW(n+26) Location no. (target) for new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Magazine location for tool that is unloaded at change.

DB72.DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning The location type of the new spindle tool is entered here.
Corresponding to ... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom.

DB72.DBW(n+30) New tool: Size left

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size left in half locations for the new spindle
tool.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 519
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.3 Interface for spindle as change position

DB72.DBW(n+32) New tool: Size right

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size right in half locations for the new spin‐
dle tool.

DB72.DBW(n+34) New tool: Size top

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size top in half locations for the new spindle
tool.

DB72.DBW(n+36) New tool: Size bottom

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size bottom in half locations for the new
spindle tool.

DB72.DBW(n+38) Tool status for new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Bit 0: = Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 2: Tool disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 5: Tool is being changed
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool was in use
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Ignore disabled
Bit 10: To be unloaded
Bit 11: To be loaded
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool

DB72.DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T number of NCK

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Display of internal T number of NCK for the new spindle tool.
Signal state 0 .

Tool Management
520 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.3 Interface for spindle as change position

DB72.DBW(n+42) Buffer location of old tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning If DB72.(n+0.4) = 1, the buffer location of the old tool must be en‐
tered here. This can be any buffer (also a gripper).

DB72.DBW(n+44) Original magazine of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Owner magazine of the new tool
Corresponds to NCK variables $A_MYMN[T-No]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is located in the buffer (e.g. gripper), then the mag‐
azine no. is entered here from where the tool originally came.

DB72.DBW(n+46) Original location of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Owner location of the new tool
Corresponds to NCK variable $A_MYMLN[T-No]
Signal state 0 .

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 521
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.4 Interface for turrets as change position

8.4 Interface for turrets as change position

DB73 Turret as change position

data block Interface NCK -> PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Interfaces
DBB0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1
DBB1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9
DBB2 Ackn INT 8 Ackn INT 7 Ackn INT 6 Ackn INT 5 Ackn INT 4 Ackn INT 3 Ackn INT 2 Ackn INT 1
DBB3 Ackn INT 16 Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT Ackn INT 9
15 14 13 12 11 10
DBB(n+0) Res. Remove Res. Res. T0 Res. Perform Obligatory
manual tool change, ini‐ change
tiation: T
no.
DBB(n+1) Data in the Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Res. Acknowl‐
extended edgement
range status = 3
(DB1073)
DBB(n+2) Assigned channel (8bit-Int)
DBB(n+3) Tool management number (8bit-Int)
DBD(n+4) $P_VDITCP[0]
User-definable parameter 0 (DWord)
DBD(n+8) $P_VDITCP[1]
User-definable parameter 1 (DWord)
DBW(n+12) $P_VDITCP[2]
User-definable parameter 2 (DWord)
DBW(n+16) Reserved
DBW(n+18) Reserved
DBW(n+20) Magazine no. of turret (Int)
DBW(n+22) Location no. of new tool (Int)
DBW(n+24) Reserved
DBW(n+26) Location no. of old tool (Int)
DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type (Int)
DBW(n+30) New tool: Size on left (Int)
DBW(n+32) New tool: Size on right (Int)
DBW(n+34) New tool: Size at top (Int)
DBW(n+36) New tool: Size at bottom (Int)
DBB(n+38) Tool status for new tool
Manual 1:1 ex‐ Master tool Tool to be Tool to be Disabled, Identifier for
tool change loaded unloaded but ignore tools in the buf‐
fer
DBB(n+39) Tool status for new tool
Tool was Tool, fixed- Tool being Prewarn‐ Measure Tool disa‐ Enable tool Active tool
in use location- changed ing limit tool bled
coded reached

Tool Management
522 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.4 Interface for turrets as change position

DB73 Turret as change position

data block Interface NCK -> PLC
DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T number of NCK (Int)
DBW(n+42) Original location of new tool in this circular magazine

Start address of the turret:

Turret, 1: n = 4
Turret 2: n = 48
Turret 3: n = 92
n = (m-1)*len + 4
m = location no. of the change position
len = 44
Example for change position 3: n = (3-1)*n44 + 4 = 2*44 + 4= 88 + 4 = 92

DB73.DBX0.0 - 1.7 Active status of interface 1- 16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Associated interface has a valid data record.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by FC 7.

DB73.DBX2.0 - 3.7 "auto" acknowledgement of interface 1-16

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning When setting (edge) the bit, the pending command is acknowl‐
edged with status_1.
Signal state 0 Operation for this interface has ended. Is reset by the basic program.

DB73.DBX (n+0).0 Command code: Obligatory change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1
Signal state 0
Corresponding to ... Position of participating tools

DB73.DBX(n+0).1 Command code: Perform change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Execute tool change

DB73.DBX(n+0).3 T0
Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 Indicates that T0 has been programmed

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 523
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.4 Interface for turrets as change position

DB73.DBX(n+1).7 Command: Data in the extended range

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Signal state 1 The signal is set if a tool is loaded into a multitool. DB 73 contains
the data of the multitool, the data of the selected tool is available in
DB 1073.
For T0 the signal is not set.

DB73.DBX(n+1).30 "auto" ackn negative

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning The bit is only evaluated in conjunction with "auto" ackn. If it is set,
then the auto acknowledge is negative, i.e. with status_3.

DB73.DBB(n+2) Assigned channel

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Number of channel from which the T word was programmed.

DB73.DBB(n+3) Tool management number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Associated tool management number (TO area) of channel.

Note
The bits in DBB(n+0) (obligatory change, execute change, ...) are not reset by the system.
They are current only if the corresponding interface bit in DBB0 is set to "1''. However, the bits
can be reset by the user if necessary.

DB73.DBD(n+4) User-definable parameter 0 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[0] = value. Parame‐
ters 0-2 are transferred with the T command.

DB73.DBD(n+8) User-definable parameter 1 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[1] = value.

DB73.DBD(n+12) User-definable parameter 2 (DInt)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning If you need to send a value to the PLC via the part program, the
transfer can be programmed with $P_VDITCP[2] = value.

Tool Management
524 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.4 Interface for turrets as change position

DB73.DBW(n+16) Reserved
Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning

DB73.DBW(n+18) Reserved
Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning

DB73.DBW(n+20) Magazine no. of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Magazine no. of the new tool, which should be processed.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+22)

DB73.DBW(n+22) Location no. of new tool to be loaded at change

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location no. of the new tool, which should be processed.
Corresponding to ... DBW(n+20)

DB73.DBW(n+24) Reserved
Edge evaluation
Meaning

DB73.DBW(n+26) Location no. of old tool to be unloaded

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location no. of the old tool (used up to now for machining).
Signal state 0 .

DB73.DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning The location type of the new tool is entered here.
Corresponding to ... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom

DB73.DBW(n+30) New tool: Size left

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size left in half locations for the new tool.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 525
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.4 Interface for turrets as change position

DB73.DBW(n+32) New tool: Size right

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size right in half locations for the new tool

DB73.DBW(n+34) New tool: Size top

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size top in half locations for the new tool

DB73.DBW(n+36) New tool: Size bottom

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size bottom in half locations for the new tool

DB73.DBW(n+38) Tool status for new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Bit 0: Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 2: Disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 5: Tool being changed
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool was in use
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Ignore disabled
Bit 10: To be unloaded
Bit 11: To be loaded
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bi 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool

DB73.DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T no. of NCK

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Display of internal T no. of NCK for the new tool. Tool management
variables can be read/written via FB2/FB3 using this T no.

DB73.DBW(n+42) Original location of new tool in this circular magazine

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning

Tool Management
526 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.5 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (multitool) (DB 1071)

8.5 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (multitool) (DB 1071)

DB1071 Magazine, loading/unloading (multitool)

data block NCK -> PLC interface
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBW(n+0) Distance coding
DBW(n+2) Multitool location number
DBD(n+4) Multitool distance
DBW(n+8) Multitool number
DBW(n+10) Multitool location number
DBW(n+12) Tool holder
DBW(n+14) Reserved
DBW(n+16) Reserved
DBW(n+18) Reserved

Starting address of loading/unloading points:

Loading/unloading point 1: n = 0
Loading/unloading point 2: n = 20
Loading/unloading point 3: n = 40
Loading/unloading point 4: n = 60

DB1071.DBW(n+0) Distance coding

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to
$TC_MTP_KD
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle
Signal state 0

DB1071.DBW(n+2) Multitool location number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Number of locations of the multitool
Signal state 0

DB1071.DBD(n+4) Multitool location distance

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference
location (real value). In accordance with the distance coding
Signal state 0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 527
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.5 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (multitool) (DB 1071)

DB1071.DBW(n+8) Multitool number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Internal T number of the multitool
Signal state 0

DB1071.DBW(n+10) Multitool location number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location number within the multitool (which the system positions to)
Signal state 0

DB1071.DBW(n+12) Tool holder

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Spindle or tool holder number
Signal state 0

Tool Management
528 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB 1072)

8.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB 1072)

DB1072 Spindle (multitool)

data block Interface NCK -> PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBW(n+0) Distance coding
DBW(n+2) Multitool location number
DBD(n+4) Multitool distance
DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)
DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)
DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)
DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)
DBW(n+16) Location type
DBW(n+18) Tool size, left
DBW(n+20) Tool size, right
DBW(n+22) Tool size, top
DBW(n+24) Tools size, bottom
DBW(n+26) Tool status
DBW(n+28) T number of the tool
DBW(n+30) Tool holder
DBW(n+32) Original magazine of new tool
DBW(n+34) Original location of new tool
DBW(n+36) Reserved
to
DBW(n+48)

Start addresses of the spindles:

Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

DB1072.DBW(n+0) Distance coding

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to
$TC_MTP_KD
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+2) Multitool location number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Number of locations of the multitool
Signal state 0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 529
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB 1072)

DB1072.DBD(n+4) Multitool location distance

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference
location (real value). In accordance with the distance coding
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Internal T number of the (new) multitool
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location number within the multitool (where the new tool is located
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Internal T number of the (old) multitool.
The T number is entered here if the preparation or the change to a
tool is realized within the same multitool (which, due to a previous
change, is located on the tool holder). It is identical with DB
1072.DBW(n+8)
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location number within the multitool (where the old tool is located).
The location number - where the old tool is located - is entered here
if the preparation or the change to a tool is realized within the same
multitool (which, due to a previous change, is located on the tool
holder).
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+16) New tool: Location type

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location type of the new tool (of the programmed tool in the multi‐
tool).
Corresponding to ... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom

Tool Management
530 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB 1072)

DB1072.DBW(n+18) New tool: Size left

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the left in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+20) New tool: Size right

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the right in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+22) New tool: Size top

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the top in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+24) New tool: Size bottom

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the bottom in half locations of the
new tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 531
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB 1072)

DB1072.DBW(n+26) Tool status for new tool:

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Tool status of the programmed tool in the multitool
Corresponds to parameter $TC_TP8[T_No]
Bit 0: = Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 2: Tool disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 5: Tool is being changed
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool was in use
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Ignore disabled
Bit 10: To be unloaded
Bit 11: To be loaded
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+28) New tool: Internal T number of NCK

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Display of internal T number of NCK for the new spindle tool (of the
programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+30) Tool holder

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Spindle or tool holder number to which the change refers (the mul‐
titool that is to be changed)
Signal state 0

Tool Management
532 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.6 Interface for spindle (multitool) (DB 1072)

DB1072.DBW(n+32) Original magazine of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional

Meaning Owner magazine of the new tool
Corresponds to NCK variables $A_MYMN[T-No]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer (e.g. gripper), then the magazine no.
is entered here from where the tool originally came.
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto
which it is loaded.
Signal state 0

DB1072.DBW(n+34) Original location of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional

Meaning Owner location of the new tool
Corresponds to NCK variable $A_MYMLNT[T-No]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer (e.g. gripper), then the magazine no.
is entered here from where the tool originally came.
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto
which it is loaded.
Signal state 0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 533
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.7 Interface for revolver (multitool) (DB 1073)

8.7 Interface for revolver (multitool) (DB 1073)

DB1073 Turret (multitool)

data block Interface NCK -> PLC
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBW(n+0) Distance coding
DBW(n+2) Multitool location number
DBD(n+4) Multitool distance
DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)
DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)
DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)
DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)
DBW(n+16) Location type
DBW(n+18) Tool size, left
DBW(n+20) Tool size, right
DBW(n+22) Tool size, top
DBW(n+24) Tools size, bottom
DBW(n+26) Tool status
DBW(n+28) T number of the tool
DBW(n+30) Tool holder
DBW(n+32) Original magazine of new tool
DBW(n+34) Original location of new tool
DBW(n+36) Reserved
to
DBW(n+48)

Start addresses of the turrets:

Spindle 1: n = 0
Spindle 2: n = 50
Spindle 3: n = 100

DB1073.DBW(n+0) Distance coding

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Type of distance coding of the multitool (corresponds to
$TC_MTP_KD
1 = location number
2 = distance
3 = angle
Signal state 0

Tool Management
534 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.7 Interface for revolver (multitool) (DB 1073)

DB1073.DBW(n+2) Multitool location number

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Number of locations of the multitool
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBD(n+4) Multitool location distance

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Distance of the MT location to be positioned from the reference
location (real value). In accordance with the distance coding
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+8) Multitool number (new tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Internal T number of the (new) multitool
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+10) Multitool location number (new tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location number within the multitool (where the new tool is located
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+12) Multitool number (old tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Internal T number of the (old) multitool.
The T number is entered here if the preparation or the change to a
tool is realized within the same multitool (which, due to a previous
change, is located on the tool holder). It is identical with DB
1072.DBW(n+8)
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+14) Multitool location number (old tool)

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location number within the multitool (where the old tool is located).
The location number - where the old tool is located - is entered here
if the preparation or the change to a tool is realized within the same
multitool (which, due to a previous change, is located on the tool
holder).
Signal state 0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 535
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.7 Interface for revolver (multitool) (DB 1073)

DB1073.DBW(n+16) New tool: Location type

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Location type of the new tool (of the programmed tool in the multi‐
tool).
Corresponding to ... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom

DB1073.DBW(n+18) New tool: Size left

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the left in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+20) New tool: Size right

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the right in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+22) New tool: Size top

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the top in half locations of the new
tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+24) New tool: Size bottom

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Specification of the tool size to the bottom in half locations of the
new tool (of the programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

Tool Management
536 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.7 Interface for revolver (multitool) (DB 1073)

DB1073.DBW(n+26) Tool status for new tool:

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Tool status of the programmed tool in the multitool
Corresponds to parameter $TC_TP8[T_No]
Bit 0: = Active tool
Bit 1: Enable tool
Bit 2: Tool disabled
Bit 3: Measure tool
Bit 4: Prewarning limit reached
Bit 5: Tool is being changed
Bit 6: Tool is fixed-location-coded
Bit 7: Tool was in use
Bit 8: Tool in the buffer
Bit 9: Ignore disabled
Bit 10: To be unloaded
Bit 11: To be loaded
Bit 12: Master tool
Bit 13: Reserved
Bit 14: 1:1 exchange
Bit 15: Manual tool
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+28) New tool: Internal T number of NCK

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Display of internal T number of NCK for the new spindle tool (of the
programmed tool in the multitool)
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+30) Tool holder

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning Spindle or tool holder number to which the change refers (the mul‐
titool that is to be changed)
Signal state 0

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 537
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.7 Interface for revolver (multitool) (DB 1073)

DB1073.DBW(n+32) Original magazine of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional

Meaning Owner magazine of the new tool
Corresponds to NCK variables $A_MYMN[T-No]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer (e.g. gripper), then the magazine no.
is entered here from where the tool originally came.
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto
which it is loaded.
Signal state 0

DB1073.DBW(n+34) Original location of new tool

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional

Meaning Owner location of the new tool
Corresponds to NCK variable $A_MYMLNT[T-No]
If the new tool is located in the magazine, then this value is identical
with DB72.DBW(n+20).
If the new tool is in the buffer (e.g. gripper), then the magazine no.
is entered here from where the tool originally came.
The new tool has the same owner location as the multitool onto
which it is loaded.
Signal state 0

Tool Management
538 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.8 Interface NC channels

8.8 Interface NC channels

Signals are also contained in the channel data blocks for tool management functions. The data
relevant for tool management is in bold formatting.

DB21-30 Signals to/from NC channel

data block Interface PLC -> NCK
Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DBB1 Activate PLC action CLC over‐ CLC stop Time moni‐ Synchro‐ Enable pro‐ Activate ref‐
program completed ride toring active nous action tective area erencing
test off
DBB29 Tool disa‐ Deactivate Deactivate Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate
ble not ef‐ wear moni‐ workpiece PTP traver‐ fixed feed 4 fixed feed 3 fixed feed 2 fixed feed 1
fective toring counter sal
Cyclic signals from NC channel
DBB317 Tool miss‐ PTP traver‐ External
ing sal active language
mode active
Change signals TM functions
DBB344 Last re‐ Transition Tool pre‐ Tool pre‐
placement to new re‐ warning lim‐ warning lim‐
tool of the placement it reached it reached
tool group tool
Transferred tool management functions
DBD348 T number for tool management prewarning limit (DInt)
DBD352 T number for tool limit value (DInt)
DBD356 T number of new replacement tool (DInt)
DBD360 T number of last replacement tool (DInt)

DB21.DBX1.3 The user can start and stop tool life monitoring time using PLC signal "Time monitor active". The effec‐
tiveness of this control is set via MD20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 17.

DB21.DBX29.5 Switches workpiece count monitoring on/off.

DB21.DBX29.6 Switches wear monitoring on/off.

DB21.DBX29.7 VDI signal "Tool disable ineffective" (bit value=1) means that the NCK does not process the tool status
"Disabled" during tool search.
The signal is not effective, if the tool selection is realized using the Init blocks (Reset- and
Start_Mode_Mask). If, for instance, it is to be possible to select a disabled spindle tool, then this must
be set in machine data $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE.

DB21.DBX317.7 Display in PLC that the programmed tool is missing. (Tool is either not available or cannot be used.)

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 539
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.8 Interface NC channels

DB21.DBX 344.0 - 344.3 Modification signals of the tool management functions

Edge evaluation Signal(s) updated: Conditional
Meaning A T number for tool prewarning limit, limit value, new replacement
tool, last replacement tool has been output with a value at the in‐
terface at the beginning of an OB1 cycle together with the associ‐
ated modification signal. In this case, the change signal indicates
that the appropriate value is valid.

Tool Management
540 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Signal description of the PLC interface
8.9 Interface magazine configuration

8.9 Interface magazine configuration

DB4 Interface HMI -> PLC

Address Meaning Data type
DBB64 Number of magazines including buffer magazines BYTE
and loading magazines
< Beginning of repeat loop; number of repeats from
DB4.DBB64
DBW65 (70, 75, ...) Magazine number INT
DBB67 (...) Magazine type BYTE
DBW68 (...) Number of locations INT
> Return loop end
Address = Number of spindles BYTE
(contents DBB64*5) +65

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 541
Signal description of the PLC interface
8.9 Interface magazine configuration

Tool Management
542 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Alarms 9
9.1 Overview

Alarm No. Brief description

6402 Tool change not possible, magazine number does not exist.
6403 Tool change not possible, specified magazine location does not exist.
6404 Tool change not possible because the tool is not available or cannot be used.
6405 Command has invalid PLC acknowledgement parameter.
6406 PLC acknowledgement missing.
6407 Tool is to be set down at a location that does not meet the requirements for loading.
6410 One cutting edge of the monitored tool has reached a prewarning limit.
6411 One cutting edge of the monitored tool has reached a prewarning limit.
6412 One cutting edge of the monitored tool has reached a monitoring limit.
6413 One cutting edge of the monitored tool has reached a monitoring limit.
6421 No free location for tool in the magazine.
6422 Tool motion is not possible because the magazine has not been defined.
6423 Tool motion is not possible because no location in the magazine.
6424 Tool motion is not possible because tool not available or cannot be used.
6425 Tool motion is not possible because tool cannot be placed at the specified location in the magazine
6430 Workpiece counter: Overflow in table of monitored cutting edges.
6431 Function not permitted because TOOLMAN / TOOLMAN monitoring not activated.
6432 Function cannot be executed because there is no tool in the spindle.
6433 System variable not available for active tool management.
6436 The command cannot be programmed
6438 Inconsistent data change not permitted
6441 Writing of $P_USEKT not allowed.
6450 Tool change not possible because magazine-location number is not valid.
6451 No buffer magazine defined.
6452 Tool holder number / spindle number not defined.
6453 No relationship defined between tool holder number / spindle number and buffer magazine.
6454 Neither spindle nor buffer location has a distance relationship.
6460 Command can only be programmed for tools
6462 Command can only be programmed for magazines
6464 Command cannot be programmed for the actual multitool distance coding
6924 Tool data changed for program test.
17001 No more memory for tool magazine data.
17020 Illegal array index 1
17160 No tool selected.
17180 Illegal D number.
17181 D no. not known.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 543
Alarms
9.1 Overview

Alarm No. Brief description

17182 Illegal additive offset number.
17188 The D number specified in the channel TO unit is not unique.
17189 D number is not unique.
17191 Unknown tool identifier.
17192 No further replacement tools possible.
17193 The active tool is no longer in the tool holder
17194 No suitable tool found.
17200 Tool cannot be deleted
17202 Magazine data cannot be deleted.
17212 Manual tool must be changed.
17214 Remove manual tool from tool holder.
17215 Remove manual tool from buffer
17216 Manual tools must be changed.
17218 Tool cannot become a manual tool
17220 Tool does not exist.
17224 It is not possible on this system to select tool offsets for tools of the specified tool type.
17230 Duplo no. already assigned.
17240 Invalid tool definition.
17242 Manual tool cannot be set, as the function is not active
17250 Invalid magazine definition.
17255 Magazine location hierarchies have been deleted
17260 Invalid magazine location definition.
17262 Incorrect tool-adapter assignment
20150 PLC terminates the interrupted command.
20160 PLC can terminate only incorrectly aborted commands.
22066 Tool motion not possible because specified tool is not in magazine.
22067 Tool change not possible because no tool ready for use in the tool group.
22068 No tool ready for use in the tool group.
22069 No tool ready for use in the tool group.
22070 Change tool into magazine. Repeat data backup.
22071 Tool has the status "active" in an "inactive" wear group.
400601 Incorrect configuration of loading points
400602 Incorrect spindle configuration
400603 Incorrect turret configuration
400604 Set change with M06 in machine data.
410141 Number of loading points too high
410142 Number of tool holders too high
410143 Number of turrets too high
410151 Magazine data for tool management missing in PLC.

Tool Management
544 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.1 Overview

With machine dates MD11410 SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK und MD11415

SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK_2 it can be defined bit by bit which alarms should be
suppressed.

Bit Alarm number

2 16924
4 17189
5 22071
7 22070
8 6411, 6413
9 6410, 6412

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 545
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6402 Channel %1 tool change not possible because magazine no. %2 not available
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine number
The desired tool change is not possible. The magazine with the specified number is not available.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Check whether the magazine is connected to the required spindle via a distance relationship
The user PLC program may have supplied incorrect data to the NCK.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Alarm No.
6403 Channel %1 tool change not possible because magazine no. %2 in magazine %3 not available
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine number, %3 = magazine location number
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified magazine location is not available in the specified
magazine.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
The user PLC program may have supplied incorrect data to the NCK.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Alarm No.
6404 Channel %1 tool change not possible. Tool %2 not available or cannot be used
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier)
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified tool does not exist or cannot be used.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Check whether the part program is written correctly.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Check whether there is a replacement tool which can be used for the specified tool.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Tool Management
546 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6405 Channel %1 command %2 has an invalid PLC acknowledgement parameter %3 identification %4
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = command no. %3 = PLC acknowledgement parameter, %4 = error identification
The specified command has been answered by the PLC with an invalid acknowledgement in the actual
combination. The following assignments are defined for command number:
1 Move tool, load or unload magazine
2 Prepare tool change
3 Execute tool change
4 Prepare tool change and execute with T command
5 Prepare tool change and execute with M command
7 Terminate interrupted tool command
8 Check tool motion with reservation
9 Check tool motion
0 Transport acknowledgement
Parameters 2 and 3 specify the PLC command and the status number of the acknowledgement.
Example:
Parameter 4 of the alarm message is =10. It is not defined for asynchronous tool motion, to reserve a
buffer location. In the example, the NCK ignores the parameter. Additional possible reasons for the alarm:
The tool change defined by the command cannot be executed. The magazine location specified in the
invalid parameter does not exist in the magazine.
The error code (%4) defines the alarm in more detail:
0 Not defined
1 Status now not permitted, or non-defined status received from PLC
2 Source and/or target magazine no. / location no. not known
3 Not defined
4 Target magazine no. and/or target location no. for tool move command not final destination
5 Not defined
6 Source and/or target magazine no. / location no. not known for tool change
7 PLC command with inconsistent data: Either magazine addresses inconsistent in VDI or NCK command
not the same as the PLC acknowledgement, or both
8 PLC command with inconsistent data: When lifting a tool, asynchronous tool to be rejected was unloaded.
NCK cannot execute a new selection.
9 PLC command with inconsistent data: The command acknowledgements want to move a tool to a loca‐
tion where another tool is already located.
10 The asynchronous tool motion with reservation is only defined for movement from a magazine to a
buffer.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Notify authorized personnel / service
Faulty PLC communication: Correct the PLC program
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 547
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6406 Channel %1 PLC acknowledgement for command %2 is missing
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = command no.
There is still no acknowledgement from the PLC for the tool change. The NCK cannot continue processing
until it receives this acknowledgement for the specified command number. Possible command no. values
are described under alarm 6405
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Notify authorized personnel / service
Faulty PLC communication: Correct the PLC program.
It is possible to release NCK from the wait condition with the PLC command 7. This aborts the waiting
command.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Alarm No.
6407 Channel %1 The tool %2 cannot be placed in magazine %3 on location %4. Invalid magazine definition!
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier), %3 = magazine number, %4 = magazine location number
A tool change task or a verification task was issued to place the tool in a location whose definition does
not satisfy the prerequisites for filling.
The following causes for the error are possible:
Location is disabled or not free
Tool type does not match the location type
Tool possibly too large, adjacent locations are not free
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined (especially the location type)
Check whether the tool data is correctly defined (especially the location type)
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with the RESET button and start the part program again.
gram

Tool Management
548 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6410 TO unit %1 tool %2 with duplo no. %3 has reached tool prewarning limit with D=%4
Explanation %1 = TO unit, %2 = tool identifier (name), %3 = duplo number, %4 = D number
Indicates that the specified D offset of the time, workpiece quantity or wear-monitored tool has reached
its prewarning limit. If possible, specify the D number - if not, then the 4th parameter is assigned the value
0.
If the "additive offset" function is being used, then instead of the wear monitoring, an additive offset mon‐
itoring can also be active. The specific type of tool monitoring is a property of the tool (see $TC_TP9).
The duplo no. specification has no additional significance if replacement tools are not being used. The
alarm is triggered via the OPI interface (HMI, PLC). The channel context is not defined. The TO unit is
therefore specified (see $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT).
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only. The user must decide what to do.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6411 Channel %1 Tool %2 Prewarning limit reached with D=%4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = tool identifier (Name), %4 = D number
Indicates that the specified D offset of the time, workpiece quantity or wear-monitored tool has reached
its prewarning limit. If possible, specify the D number - if not, then the 4th parameter is assigned the value
0.
If the "additive offset" function is being used, then instead of the wear monitoring, an additive offset mon‐
itoring can also be active. The specific type of tool monitoring is a property of the tool (see $TC_TP9).
The duplo no. specification has no additional significance if replacement tools are not being used.
Limit is detected in the context of the channel.
The alarm is caused while the NC program is being executed.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only. The user must decide what to do.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6412 TO unit %1 tool %2 with duplo no.%3 has reached tool monitoring limit with D=%4
Explanation %1 = TO unit, %2 = tool identifier (name), %3 = duplo number, %4 = D number
Indicates that the specified D offset of the time, workpiece quantity or wear-monitored tool has reached
its prewarning limit. If possible, specify the D number - if not, then the 4th parameter is assigned the value
0.
If the "additive offset" function is being used, then instead of the wear monitoring, an additive offset mon‐
itoring can also be active. The specific type of tool monitoring is a property of the tool (see $TC_TP9).
The duplo no. specification has no additional significance if replacement tools are not being used. The
alarm is triggered via the OPI interface (HMI, PLC).
The channel context is not defined. The TO unit is therefore specified (see $MC_MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT).

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 549
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only. The user must decide what to do.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6413 Channel %1 Tool %2 has reached its monitoring limit with D=%4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = tool identifier (Name), %4 = D number
Indicates that the specified D offset of the time, workpiece quantity or wear-monitored tool has reached
its prewarning limit.
If possible, specify the D number - if not, then the 4th parameter is assigned the value 0.
If the "additive offset" function is being used, then instead of the wear monitoring, an additive offset mon‐
itoring can also be active. The specific type of tool monitoring is a property of the tool (see $TC_TP9).
The duplo no. specification has no additional significance if replacement tools are not being used. The
alarm originates during NC program execution.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only. The user must decide what to do.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6421 Channel %1 Tool motion not possible. There is no empty location for tool %2 duplo no. %3 in magazine
%4.
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier), %3 = duplo number, %4 = magazine number
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible.
The tool cannot be moved into the specified tool magazine. There is no appropriate location available for
this tool.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is defined correctly (e.g. the magazine must not be disabled).
Check whether the tool data is correctly defined (e.g. the tool location type must match the permitted
location types in the magazine).
Check whether the magazine simply no longer has any space to accept an additional tool due to operator
actions.
Check whether a location type hierarchy is defined and whether it, for example, does not allow insertion
of a type "A" tool in a free location with type "B".
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool Management
550 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6422 Channel %1 Tool motion not possible because magazine no. %2 not available!
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine number
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible.
The magazine with the specified number is not available.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
If the PLC issued the command for motion: check whether the PLC program is correct.
If the HMI issued the command for motion: check whether the HMI command was assigned correct pa‐
rameters.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6423 Channel %1 Tool motion not possible because magazine location no. %2 in magazine %3 not available!
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = magazine location number, %3 = magazine number
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible.
The specified magazine location is not contained in the specified magazine.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6424 Channel %1 Tool motion not possible. Tool %2 not available or cannot be used
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier)
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible. The state of the
specified tool does not permit the tool to be moved. The specified tool is not defined or is not permitted for
the command.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the tool state "being changed" is set. If yes, then initially the corresponding tool change
command from the PLC must be terminated. The tool should then be able to be moved.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Check whether the move command has been correctly parameterized.
Check whether the tool is already loaded (if the alarm occurs when the tool is loaded).
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 551
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6425 Channel %1 The tool %2 cannot be placed in magazine %3 on location %4. Invalid magazine definition
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = string (identifier), %3 = magazine number, %4 = magazine location number
The requested tool motion command - initiated from the HMI or PLC - is not possible.
Using a movement task, the tool is to be placed down at a location whose definition does not fulfill the
preconditions for loading a tool. The following causes for the error are possible:
Location is disabled or not free
Tool type does not match the location type.
Tool possibly too large, adjacent locations are not free.
If loading/unloading
- the loading/unloading location must be of type "loading point".
If loading/unloading
- is the relevant magazine linked with the loading/unloading location?
See $TC_MDP1, $TC_MDP2
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Check whether the magazine simply no longer has any space to accept an additional tool due to operator
actions.
Check whether a location hierarchy is defined and whether it, for example, does not allow insertion of a
type "A" tool in a free location with type "B".
Check whether the relevant magazine is linked with the loading/unloading location or has a defined dis‐
tance.
Check whether the loading/unloading location is of type "loading point".
See also $TC_MPP1
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6430 Workpiece counter: Overflow in table of monitored cutting edges
Explanation No more cutting edges can be entered in the workpiece counter table. As many cutting edges can be noted
for the workpiece counter as a whole as the total number of cutting edges that are possible in the NCK.
This means that if every cutting edge of each tool is precisely used for one workpiece, then the limit is
reached.
If several workpieces are machined simultaneously at several tool holders / spindles, then across all
workpieces, 18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA cutting edges can be noted for the workpiece
counter.
If the alarm is present, then this means that the cutting edges that will now be used are no longer monitored
from a workpiece number perspective; and more precisely, until the table is emptied again, e.g. using the
NC language command SETPIECE or the corresponding task from the HMI, PLC (PI service).
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable

Tool Management
552 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Have you forgotten to decrement the workpiece counter?
Then program SETPIECE in the part program or correctly insert the corresponding command in the PLC
program.
If the part program or the PLC program is correct, then more memory should be set for tool cutting edges
using machine data $MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA (this is only possible for those with the ap‐
propriate access authorization).
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6431 Function not allowed. Tool management/tool management monitoring not activated
Explanation Occurs when a data management function is called which is not available because tool management is
deactivated or tool monitoring is not available. For example, the language commands GETT, SETPIECE,
GETSELT, NEWT, DELT.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Please inform the authorized personnel / service department.
Verify how the NC control shall be configured. Is tool management or tool monitoring required, but not
activated?
Is a part program used that has been designed for NC control with tool management / tool monitoring?
Either run a part program on the suitable NC control or modify the part program.
Activate tool management / tool monitoring by setting the corresponding machine data. See
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
Check whether the required option is set accordingly.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6432 Function cannot be executed. There is no tool on the spindle
Explanation An attempt was made to perform an operation that requires a tool to be located on the spindle. This can
be the workpiece count monitoring function, for example.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Select another function, select another tool holder / spindle or locate a tool on the tool holder / spindle.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 553
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6433 Channel %1 block %2 variable %3 not available with tool management
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, Label, %3 = source symbol
The system variable specified in %3 is not available with active tool management.
The function GETSELT should be used with $P_TOOLP.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Change program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the delete key.
gram

Alarm No.
6436 Channel %1 block %2 command %3 cannot be programmed. Function %4 is not activated.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, %3 = command, %4 = function
The command cannot be programmed due to a missing function enable or activation.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6438 Channel %1 block %2 inconsistent data modification is not permitted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number
For example, in a defined multitool, after creating the multitool location it is not permissible to change the
distance coding $TC_MTP_KD.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6441 Writing of $P_USEKT not allowed.
Explanation An attempt was made to write the value from $P_USEKT. This is not possible because the programming
T="location number" with automatic setting of $P_USEKT is active.

Tool Management
554 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable in this channel
Remedy Verify how the NC control should be configured (bit 16 and bit 22 in $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK)
Is a part program used that is configured for an NC control without T="location number" with automatic
setting of $P_USEKT? It is not possible to start this program on the NC control with T="location number"
with automatic setting of $P_USEKT.
Either run a part program on the suitable NC control or modify the part program.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6442 Channel %1 Function cannot be executed. No tool at the required magazine/location %2
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 magazine/location
It is probable that the PLC logic is incorrect. Tool change with reject tool is configured. Preparation com‐
mand present. Selected tool is unloaded from its location (e.g. from the PLC). PLC acknowledges prepa‐
ration command with "repeat tool selection" (e.g. status=7). NCK does not find the tool in the magazine
location specified in the PLC command.
Or: Illegal operator intervention in a tool selection that is presently being executed (unloading the tool to
be selected) has taken place. This is the reason that the PLC acknowledgement was unsuccessful.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy PLC programmers must observe the following:
Ensure that the tool is not removed from the specified magazine location (e.g. PLC program incorrect).
Do not withdraw (=unload) the programmed tool change before a command has been finally acknowledged.
However, it is possible to change the location of the tool to be loaded. The alarm supplements alarm 6405,
if it contains the ID 8.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
6450 Channel %1 Tool change not possible. Invalid magazine location number %2 in the buffer magazine
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 magazine location number
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified magazine location is a tool holder / spindle or is
empty.
Using the language command TCI, only the buffer numbers may be programmed which are not tool hold‐
ers / spindles; i.e. the location number of a gripper is permitted.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the magazine data ($TC_MPP1) is correctly defined.
Check whether the programmed command that was the cause has been correctly parameterized - e.g.
TCI.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 555
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6451 Channel %1 Tool change not possible. No buffer magazine defined.
Explanation %1 Channel number
The desired tool change is not possible. No buffer has been defined.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6452 Channel %1 block %2 tool change not possible. The tool holder no. / spindle no. = %3 is not defined.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 tool holder no. / spindle no.
The desired tool change is not possible. The tool holder number / spindle number is not defined.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the tool holder no. / spindle no. and magazine data is correctly defined. (See also the
system variables $TC_MPP1, $TC_MPP5 of the buffer magazine).
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6453 Channel %1 Tool change not possible. No assignment between tool holder / spindle no. = %2 and buffer
location %3
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 tool holder no. / spindle no. %3 buffer location
The desired tool change is not possible. No relationship has been defined between the tool holder / spindle
number and the buffer location LocNo.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the magazine data ($TC_MLSR) is correctly defined.
Check whether the program command causing the error (e.g. TCI) is programmed correctly.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6454 Channel %1 Tool change not possible. There is no distance relationship available.
Explanation %1 Channel number
The desired tool change is not possible. Neither spindle nor buffer location has a distance relationship.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set

Tool Management
556 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Check whether the magazine data ($TC_MDP2) is correctly defined.
Check whether the program command causing the error (e.g. TCI) is programmed correctly.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6455 Channel %1 block %2 tool change not possible. Magazine location no. %3 not available in magazine %4
Explanation %1 channel number %2 block number %3 magazine location number %4 magazine
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified magazine location is not available in the specified
magazine.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Check whether the magazine data ($TC_MAP6 and $TC_MAP7 of the buffer magazine) is correctly de‐
fined.
Check whether the program command causing the error (e.g. TCI) is programmed correctly.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6460 Channel %1 block %2 command %3 can only be programmed for tools. %4 means no tool.
Explanation %1 channel number %2 block number %3 command parameter
The specified command can only be programmed for tools. The command parameter is not a T number
or not a tool name. If a multitool was programmed: The command cannot be programmed for multitools.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6462 Channel %1 block %2 command %3 can only be programmed for magazines. %4 means no tool.
Explanation %1 channel number %2 block number %3 command parameter
The specified command can only be programmed for magazines. The command parameter is not a mag‐
azine number or not a magazine name. If a multitool was programmed: The command cannot be pro‐
grammed for multitools.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 557
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
6464 Channel %1 block %2 command %3 cannot be programmed for the actual multitool distance coding %4.
Explanation %1 channel number %2 block number %3 command parameter
$TC_MTPPL can only be programmed, if $TC_MTP_KD has the value 2.
$TC_MTPPA can only be programmed, if $TC_MTP_KD has the value 3.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
6924 Channel %1 caution: Program test changes tool management data
Explanation %1 = channel number
Tool data is changed during program testing. You cannot automatically correct the tool data again on
termination of program test.
This alarm prompts you to create a backup of the tool data which must be loaded again when you have
finished testing the program.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Please inform the authorized personnel / service department.
Save tool data on HMI and load again after "ProgtestOff".
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool Management
558 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17001 Channel %1 block %2 no more memory for tool / magazine data
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
The number of following tool/magazine data variables in the NC is specified by machine data:
- number of tools + number of grinding data blocks: MD18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL
- number of cutting edges: MD18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
Tools, grinding data blocks, cutting edges can be used independently of the tool management.
The memory for the following data is only available if the corresponding bit has been set in MD18080
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.
- Number of monitoring data blocks: MD18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA
- Number of magazines: MD18084 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE
- Number of magazine locations: MD18086 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION
The following variable is determined by the software configuration: Number of magazine distance data
blocks: P2 permits 32 such distance data blocks.
Definition:
- "Grinding data blocks": Grinding data can be defined for a tool of type 400 to 499. A data block of this
type occupies as much additional memory as that provided for a cutting edge.
- "Monitoring data blocks": Each cutting edge of a tool can be supplemented with monitoring data.
If the alarm occurs when writing from one of the parameters $TC_MDP1/$TC_MDP2/$TC_MLSR, check
whether the machine data MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC / MD18076
$MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE has been set correctly.
MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC defines the number of different Index1 statements
that may be made for an Index2 value.
MD18076 $MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE defines the number of different buffer locations that
may be named in Index2.
If a multitool is to be created - or its locations - then the alarm indicates that either more multitools are to
be created than is permitted in MD18083 $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL - or if the alarm is generated when
creating the multitool locations, then the alarm indicates that more multitool locations are to be created
than permitted via MD18085 $MN_MM_NUM_MULTITOOL_LOCATIONS.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Please inform the authorized personnel / service department.
Change machine data
Change NC program, i.e. reduce the number of rejected variables
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 559
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17020 Channel %1 block %2 illegal array index 1
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number
General:
A read or write access was programmed to a field variable with invalid 1st field index. The valid field indices
must be within the defined field size and the absolute limits (0 - 32 766).
[DPA]: PROFIBUS I/O:
[DPA]: When reading/writing data, an invalid slot / I/O range index was used.
[DPA]: Cause:
[DPA]: 1.: Slot / I/O range index >= max. available number of slots / I/O ranges.
[DPA]: 2.: Slot / I/O range index references a slot / I/O range that is not configured.
[DPA]: 3.: Slot / I/O range index references a slot / I/O range that is not released for system variables.
[DPA]: The following specifically applies: If the alarm occurs when writing from one of the parameters
$TC_MDP1/$TC_MDP2/$TC_MLSR,
[DPA]: then it must be checked as to whether MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC has
been set correctly.
[DPA]: MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC defines the number of different Index1
statements that may be made for an Index2 value.
If an MT number is programmed, then the value can collide with an already defined T number or an already
defined magazine number.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the data relating to the field elements for the access instruction corresponding to the defined size.
When using an SPL in Safety Integrated, additional restrictions can apply to the field index via the option
data.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Tool Management
560 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17050 Channel %1 block %2 impermissible value
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number
A value has been programmed that exceeds the value range or a limit value of a variable or a machine
data item.
For example
- In a string variable (e.g. GUD or LUD), a string needs to be written that exceeds the agreed string length
in the variable definition.
- If an illegal value is to be written to a tool or magazine management variable (e.g. illegal cutting edge
number in $TC_DPCE[x,y] or illegal magazine location number in $TC_MDP2[x,y]).
- An illegal value is to be written to $P_USEKT or $A_DPB_OUT[x,y].
- An illegal value is to be written to a machine data (e.g. MD10010 $MN_AS‐
SIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP[0] = 0).
- When accessing an individual frame element, a frame component other than TRANS, ROT, SCALE or
MIRROR was addressed or the CSCALE function was assigned a negative scale factor.
A multitool number has been programmed that collides with a previously defined T number or a previously
defined magazine number.
When programming DELMLOWNER: The command cannot be programmed with the T number of a tool
that is part of a multitool.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Only address frame components with the keywords intended for the purpose; program a scale factor within
the limits 0.000 01 to 999.999 99.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Alarm No.
17160 Channel %1 block %2 no tool selected
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt has been made to access the current tool offset data via the system variables:
$P_AD[n]: Contents of parameter (n: 1 - 25)
$P_TOOL: Active D number (cutting edge number)
$P_TOOLL[n]: Active tool length (n: 1 - 3)
$P_TOOLR: Active tool radius
although no tool was previously selected.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 561
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Program or activate a tool offset in the NC program before using the system variables.
Example:
N100 G.. ... T5 D1 ...LF
The channel-specific machine data:
22550: TOOL_CHANGE_MODE
new tool offset for M function
22560: TOOL_CHANGE_M_MODE
M function for tool change
is set to define whether activating a tool offset in the block is carried out with the T word or whether the
new offset values are only computed with the M word for the tool change.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Alarm No.
17180 Channel %1 block %2 illegal D number
Explanation %1 = channel number %2 = block number, label
In the displayed block, access is made to a D number (tool edge number) that is not defined and therefore
not available.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Check tool call in the NC part program:
Correct cutting edge number programmed? If a cutting edge number is not specified, then the D number
D1, set using machine data $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT is automatically active.
Tool parameters defined (tool type, length, …)? The dimensions of the tool cutting edge must have been
previously entered in the NCK either from the operator panel or using a tool data file.
Description of the system variables $TC_DPx[t,d] as to how they are contained in a tool data file, x ...offset
parameter number P, t ... associated tool number T, d ...tool offset number D.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Alarm No.
17181 Channel %1 block %2 T no.= %3, D No.= %4 does not exist
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = T number, %4 = D number
A D number has been programmed that the NCK does not recognize. As standard, the D number refers
to the given T number. If the "flat D number" function is active, T = 1 is output.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization

Tool Management
562 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy In case of a programming error, eliminate the error with a correction block and continue the program run.
If the data record is missing, then load the NCK with a data record for the specified T/D values (via HMI,
with overstore) and continue program.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17182 Channel %1 block %2 illegal additive offset number
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt was made to access a non-defined additive offset of the current tool edge.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Access the additive offset memory with $TC_SCP, $TC_ECP, check the additive offset selection DLx or
tool selection Ty or offset selection Dz.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17188 Channel %1 D number %2 defined in tool T No. %3 and %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = D number, %3 = T number for first tool, %4 = T number for second tool
The specified D number %2 in the TO unit of channel %1 is not unique. The specified T numbers %3 and
%4 each have an offset with number %2. If tool management is active, the following also applies: The
specified T numbers belong to tool groups with different identifiers.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Ensure uniqueness of the D numbering within the TO units.
Do not use the command that caused the problem if uniqueness is not needed in the following - CHKDNO.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is for information purposes. You can suppress the alarm output by setting bit 4 in MD $MN_SUP‐
gram PRESS_ALARM_MASK.

Alarm No.
17189 Channel %1 D number %2 of tools defined on magazine/location %3 and %4
Explanation %1 = channel ID, %2 = D number, %3 = magazine no./ magazine location no. – "/" as separator, %4 =
magazine no. / magazine location no. – "/" as separator
The specified D number %2 in the TO unit of channel %1 is not unique. The tools in the specified magazine
locations %3 and %4 each have an offset with the number %2. If tool management is active, the following
also applies: The specified T numbers belong to tool groups with different identifiers.
Reaction Alarm display
Set interface signals

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 563
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Ensure the uniqueness of the D numbering within the TO unit, e.g. by renaming the D numbers
If the uniqueness is not required, do not use the command that caused the problem.
The alarm is for information purposes. It can be suppressed by setting bit 4 of MD 11410 SUP‐
PRESS_ALARM_MASK.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17191 Channel %1 block %2 T= %3, does not exist, program %4
Explanation A tool identifier which the NCK does not recognize was programmed.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy If the program pointer is at an NC block that contains the specified T identifier:
If the program is incorrect, resolve the error with a correction block and continue the program.
If the data record is missing, then create a data record, i.e. load the data record of the tool with all defined
D numbers to the NCK (via HMI, with overstore), then continue the program.
If the program pointer is at an NC block that does not contain the specified T identifier:
The error already occurred earlier in the program when programming T, the alarm is however is only output
with the change command.
If the program is incorrect, e.g. T5 is programmed instead of T55, then the actual block can be corrected
with a correction block; i.e. if only M06 is there, then the block can be corrected to become T55 M06. The
incorrect T5 line remains in the program until it is terminated by a RESET or end of program.
In complex program structures with indirect programming, it may not be possible to correct the program.
Then, it is only possible to provide help locally using an overstore block - in the example with T55.
If the data record is missing, then create a data record, i.e. load the data record for the tool with all defined
D numbers to the NCK (via HMI, with overstore), program T with overstore and then continue the program.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17192 TO unit %1 invalid tool name of %2, duplo no. %3. No further replacement tools in %4 possible
Explanation %1 = TO units number, %2 = tool identifier, %3 = duplo number of the tool to be renamed, %4 = group
identifier
The tool with the specified tool identifier, duplo number cannot accept the group identifier.
Reason:
The maximum number of permitted replacement tools has already been defined.
By allocating a name for the tool, a new allocation or reallocation of the tool takes place in a tool group,
which already has the maximum permitted number of replacement tools for this machine.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set

Tool Management
564 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Define fewer replacement tools.
Unload replacement tools that are no longer required and delete their data in the NCK.
Contact the machine manufacturer and request that the maximum number should be modified.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17193 Channel %1 block %2 the active tool is no longer on tool holder no. / spindle no. %3, program %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = tool holder no., spindle no., %4 = program name
The tool on the specified tool holder / spindle on which the last tool change was performed as the master
tool holder or master spindle, has been replaced.
Example:N10 SETHTH(1)
N20 T="Tool1" ;tool change to master tool holder 1
N30 SETMTH(2)
N40 T1="Tool2" ;tool holder1 is only adjacent tool holder.
;Exchanging the tool does not result in the offset being deselected.
N50 D5 ;New offset selection. There is currently no active tool to which D can refer.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy Change program:
Set the required spindle as the main spindle or the tool holder as the master tool holder.
Then reset any possible main spindle or master tool holder.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17194 Channel %1 block %2 no suitable tool found
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt was made to access a tool which has not been defined.
The specified tool does not permit any access
A tool with the required properties is not available.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Check access to tool:
Is the language command parameterization correct?
Does the state of the tool prevent access?
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 565
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17200 Channel % 1 block % 2 tool data cannot be deleted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt has been made to delete the tool data for a tool currently being used for machining from the
part program. Tool data for tools involved in the current machining operation may not be deleted. This
applies both for the tool preselected with T or that has been changed in place of another, and also for tools
for which the constant grinding wheel peripheral speed or tool monitoring is active.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Check access to tool offset memory by means of $TC_DP1[t,d] = 0 or deselect tool.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17202 Channel %1 block %2 magazine data cannot be deleted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
You have attempted to delete magazine data that presently cannot be deleted. It is not possible to delete
a magazine that currently has the state "Tool is moving". A tool adapter currently assigned to a magazine
location cannot be deleted. A tool adapter cannot be deleted if machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER has the value -1.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy If an attempt to delete a magazine is rejected
$TC_MAP1[m]=0 ; Delete magazine with m=magazine no.
$TC_MAP1[0]=0 ; Delete all magazines
$TC_MAP6[m]=0 ; Delete magazines and the tools contained in them,
make sure that the magazine does not have the "Tool is moving" state when the magazine is called.
If an attempt to delete a tool adapter is rejected
$TC_ADPTT[a]=-1 ; Delete adapter with the number a
$TC_ADPTT[0]=-1 ; Delete all adapters,
then it has to be removed from the magazine location or the magazine locations by clearing the data.
Continue pro‐ Cancel the alarm with NC START and continue processing.
gram

Alarm No.
17212 Channel %1 tool management: Load manual tool %3, duplo no. %2 onto spindle / tool holder %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = duplo number, %3 = tool identifier, %4 = spindle / tool holder number
Indicates that the specified manual tool must be brought to the specified tool holder or spindle before the
program is continued. A manual tool is a tool whose data is registered in the NCK, but which is not assigned
to a magazine location. As a result, it is not fully accessible for the purpose of automatic tool changes by
the NCK and generally speaking, also the machine.
The specified manual tool can also be a tool in a multitool. Then, the MT should be loaded.
Reaction Alarm display

Tool Management
566 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Ensure that the specified tool is placed on the tool holder. The alarm is automatically canceled once the
tool change ON command has been acknowledged by the PLC.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17214 Channel %1 tool management: Remove manual tool %3 from spindle / tool holder %2.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = tool holder number %3 = tool identifier,
Indication that the specified manual tool must be removed from the specified tool holder or spindle before
the program is continued. A manual tool is a tool whose data is registered in the NCK, but which is not
assigned to a magazine location. As a result, it is not fully accessible for the purpose of automatic tool
changes by the NCK and generally speaking, also the machine.
The specified manual tool can also be in a multitool. Then, the MT should be removed.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Ensure that the specified tool is removed from the tool holder. The alarm is automatically canceled once
the tool change ON command has been acknowledged by the PLC. Manual tools can only be used effi‐
ciently if appropriately supported by the PLC program.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17215 Channel %1 tool management: Remove manual tool %3 from buffer %2.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = buffer location %3 = tool identifier,
Indication that the specified manual tool must be removed from the specified buffer before the program is
continued. A manual tool is a tool whose data is registered in the NCK, but which is not assigned to a
magazine location. As a result, it is not fully accessible for the purpose of automatic tool changes by the
NCK and generally speaking, also the machine.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Ensure that the specified tool is removed from the tool holder. The alarm is automatically canceled once
the tool change OFF command has been acknowledged by the PLC. Manual tools can only be used
efficiently if appropriately supported by the PLC program.
Continue pro‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
gram required.

Alarm No.
17216 Channel %1 tool management: Remove manual tool from tool holder %4 and load manual tool %3, duplo
no. %2.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = duplo number, %3 = tool identifier, %4 = tool holder (spindle) number
Indicates that the specified manual tool must be loaded in the specified tool holder or spindle before the
program is continued and that the manual tool located there must be removed. A manual tool is a tool
whose data is registered in the NCK, but which is not assigned to a magazine location. As a result, it is
not fully accessible for the purpose of automatic tool changes by the NCK and generally speaking, also
the machine.
Reaction Alarm display

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 567
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Make sure that the manual tools are exchanged. The alarm is automatically canceled once the tool change
ON command has been acknowledged by the PLC. Manual tools can only be used efficiently if appropri‐
ately supported by the PLC program.
Program contin‐ The alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm cause has been removed. No further operator action
uation required.

Alarm No.
17218 Channel %1 block %2 tool number %3 cannot become a manual tool.
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, %3 = tool number
The specified tool has an owner location or there is a location in a real magazine reserved for this tool. As
a consequence it cannot become a manual tool.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Correct the NC program
By programming "DELRMRES" ensure that there is no reference to a real magazine location
Program contin‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
uation

Alarm No.
17220 Channel %1 block %2 tool does not exist
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
If an attempt is made to access a tool using a T number, the tool name or the tool name and duplo no.
that has not (yet) been defined, e.g. if tools are to be placed at magazine locations by programming
$TC_MPP6 = "toolNo". This is possible only when both the magazine location and the tool specified by
"toolNo" have been defined.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC start or RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17224 Channel %1 block %2 tool T/D=%3 - tool type %4 is not permitted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = contested T/D number, %4 = contested tool type
It is not possible on this system to select tool offsets for tools of the specified tool type. The multitude of
tool types can be restricted by the machine manufacturer or by the individual control models.
Only use tool types permitted for this system. Check whether an error occurred when defining the tool.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable

Tool Management
568 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
Remedy Correct NC program or tool data
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17230 Channel %1 block %2 duplo no. already assigned
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
The attempt was made to write the duplo number of a tool using a duplo number that has already been
assigned to another tool (different T number).
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17240 Channel %1 block %2 illegal tool definition
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt was made to change tool data, which would subsequently destroy the data consistency or
would result in a contradictory definition.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17242 Channel %1 block %2 manual tool cannot be set as the function is not active
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
The manual tool function is not active. The tool cannot accept the state "manual tool" ($TC_TP8[Tool-No],
bit 15=1 or "H8000"). The "manual tool" function is activated using machine data
$MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit 1.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 569
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17250 Channel %1 block %2 illegal magazine definition
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
An attempt was made to change magazine data, which would subsequently destroy the data consistency
or would result in a contradictory definition.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Interpreter stop
NC start disable
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17255 %?C(channel %1) block %2 magazine location hierarchies have been deleted
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
If $TC_MAMP2, bit 15 is changed, any existing hierarchies are changed because of the change in meaning.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Redefine magazine location hierarchies
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
17260 Channel %1 block %2 illegal magazine location definition
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number
An attempt was made to change magazine location data, which would subsequently destroy the data
consistency or would result in a contradictory definition.
Example:
If parameter $TC_MPP1 (= location type) is written with "spindle / tool holder location, then a conflict is
possible with the adjacent machine data $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS. In this case, the remedy is
either – if the control model permits it – to increase the value of $MN_MM_NUM_TOOLHOLDERS, or to
correct the magazine definition.
A tool must not be in two different magazine locations simultaneously - and a tool must not be contained
in a multitool and a magazine location simultaneously.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Correct the NC program
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Tool Management
570 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
17262 Channel %1 block % illegal tool-adapter operation
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2= block number, label
This alarm is generated if you attempt to define or cancel the assignment between a tool adapter and a
magazine location and the selected location already has another tool adapter and/or is already holding a
tool or, if you are canceling the assignment, there is still another tool in the location.
If machine data $MC_MM_NUM_SUMCORR has the value -1, then adapters cannot be created using a
write operation to an adapter that has still not been defined. While the machine data has this value, you
can only write adapter data to adapters which have already been (automatically) assigned to magazine
locations.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy Assign a maximum of one adapter to a magazine location.
There must be no tool on the magazine location.
Machine data $MC_MM_NUM_SUMCORR with value -1: If the alarm is generated when you are writing
one of the system parameters $TC_ADAPTx (x=1,2,3,T), then you must change the write operation to
ensure that it includes only adapter data which is already assigned to magazine locations.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
20150 Channel %1 tool management: PLC terminates interrupted command
Explanation %1 = channel number
Indication that the PLC has terminated an interrupted command (with alarm output) from the tool man‐
agement - "tool change".
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
20160 Channel %1 tool management: PLC can only terminate incorrectly canceled commands
Explanation %1 = channel number
Indication that the PLC wanted to cancel an active command from the tool management (tool change); or
that there is no command active to be canceled. NCK rejects because the channel status is either "active"
(cancel is then not allowed), or "reset" (then there is nothing to cancel).
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy For information only
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 571
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
22066 Channel %1 tool management: Tool change not possible because tool %2 with duplo no. %3 is not in
magazine %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = string (identifier), %3 = duplo number, %4 = magazine number
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified tool is not contained in the specified magazine.
(NCK cannot contain tools that are not assigned to a magazine. No operations (movement, change) can
be performed with these tools).
Reaction NC start disable
Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC stop for alarm
Remedy Please inform the authorized personnel / service department.
Ensure that the specified tool is contained in the required magazine - or program a different tool, which
should be changed.
Check whether machine data $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, $MC_START_MODE_MASK - and in turn the
coupled machine data $MC_TOOL_RESET_NAME - match the actual definition data.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
22067 Channel %1 tool management: Tool change not possible because no tool ready for use in tool group %2
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = string (identifier)
The desired tool change is not possible. The specified tool group does not contain a "ready to use" re‐
placement tool which could be loaded. The tool monitoring function may have set all potentially suitable
tools to the "disabled" status.
Reaction NC start disable
Alarm display
Interface signals are set
NC stop for alarm
Remedy At the time of the requested tool change, ensure that there is a tool that can be used in the specified tool
group.
This can be achieved, e.g. by replacing disabled tools, or by manually releasing a disabled tool.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined. Have all intended tools in the group been defined
with the specified identifier and loaded?
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the RESET key. Restart the part program.
gram

Tool Management
572 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
22068 Channel %1 tool management: No tool ready for use in tool group %3
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = string (identifier)
The specified tool group does not contain a "ready to use" replacement tool which could be loaded. The
tool monitoring function may have set all potentially suitable tools to the "disabled" status. The alarm can
occur in conjunction with alarm 14710 (error when generating the INIT block). In this special situation, for
instance, the NCK attempts to replace the disabled tool located in the spindle by an available replacement
tool (which in this particular error case is not available).
The operator must resolve this conflict, for instance by removing the tool located in the spindle using a
movement command from the spindle (e.g. with an operator action via the HMI).
Reaction NC start disable
Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Remedy At the time of the requested tool change, ensure that there is a tool that can be used in the specified tool
group.
This can be achieved, for example, by replacing disabled tools, or by manually releasing a disabled tool.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined. Have all intended tools in the group been defined
with the specified identifier and loaded?
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Alarm No.
22069 Channel %1 block %2 tool management: No tool available in tool group %3, program %4
Explanation %1 = channel number, %2 = block number, label, %3 = string (identifier), %4 = program name
The specified tool group does not contain a "ready to use" replacement tool which could be loaded. The
tool monitoring function may have set all potentially suitable tools to the "disabled" status. Parameter %4
= program name facilitates the identification of the program containing the programming command (tool
selection) that caused the error. This can be a subprogram or cycle, etc., which can no longer be identified
from the display. If the parameter has not bee specified, then it is the currently displayed program.
Reaction Alarm display
Interface signals are set
Correction block with reorganization
Remedy At the time of the requested tool change, ensure that there is a tool that can be used in the specified tool
group, e.g. by
replacing disabled tools, or by manually releasing a disabled tool.
Check whether the magazine data is correctly defined. Have all intended tools in the group been defined
with the specified identifier and loaded?
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with NC START or the RESET key and continue the program.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 573
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
22070 TO unit %1 Please load tool T= %2 into magazine. Repeat data backup
Explanation %1 = TO unit, %2 = T number of the tool
Only issued if tool management is active.
A data backup of the tool/magazine data has been started. The system has detected that the buffer mag‐
azine still contains one or more tools. During backup, these tools lose the information assigning them to
a magazine and a location in the magazine. Therefore, it makes sense that all tools have been loaded the
magazine at the time the data backup is performed.
If this does not apply, when re-importing data, the magazine locations have the "reserved" status. You
may have to reset this status manually.
In the case of tools with a fixed-location coding, the loss of information about their location in the magazine
is equivalent to a general empty location search on any subsequent change back to the magazine.
Reaction Interface signals are set.
Alarm display
Remedy Make sure that there are no tools stored in the buffer magazine before you start to back up data. Repeat
the data backup after removing the tools from the buffer magazine.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
22071 TO unit %1 tool %2 duplo no. %3 is active but not in the current wear group
Explanation %1 = TO units, %2 = T number of the tool, %3 = duplo number
The "Wear group" function is active. In addition, the "Set tool to active status" setting is applied if a new
wear group is activated. This setting can also be programmed with language command SETTA or started
via similar functions on the OPI.
It has been detected that more than one tool from the tool group has the "active" status. The tool which
has the "active" status in an "inactive" wear grouping is named in the alarm.
The alarm is for information purposes. It can be suppressed by setting bit 5 of MD 11410 SUP‐
PRESS_ALARM_MASK.
Reaction Alarm display
Set interface signals
Remedy Before you start the machining operation, make sure that the "active" status is not set for any of the tools
in the magazine. You can do this by programming command SETTIA.
Continue pro‐ Clear the alarm with the cancel key. No further operator action required.
gram

Alarm No.
400601 Incorrect configuration of loading points
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Power-down the control and power-up again
gram

Tool Management
574 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
400602 Incorrect spindle configuration
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Power-down the control and power-up again
gram

Alarm No.
400603 Incorrect turret configuration
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Power-down the control and power-up again
gram

Alarm No.
400604 Set change with M06 in machine data
Explanation Change is possible only with M06 for the magazine type used (box-type, chain). Check for invalid settings
when using turret magazines.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy In the channel-specific data 22550: TOOL_CHANGE_MODE should be set to the value 1.
Continue pro‐ Internal
gram

Alarm No.
410141 Number of loading points too high
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB 4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Switch control system OFF and ON again.
gram

Alarm No.
410142 Number of tool holders too high
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB 4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Switch control system OFF and ON again.
gram

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 575
Alarms
9.2 Alarm description

Alarm No.
410143 Number of turrets too high
Explanation The PLC configuration in DB 4 does not match the NC Configuration.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Correct tool management commissioning.
Continue pro‐ Switch control system OFF and ON again.
gram

Alarm No.
410151 Magazine data for tool management missing in PLC
Explanation No magazine data available in the PLC. Commissioning has not been completed although tool manage‐
ment option has been activated.
Reaction Alarm display
Remedy Press the "Create PLC data" softkey via SINUMERIK Operate when commissioning tool management.
Continue pro‐ Internal
gram

Tool Management
576 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Appendix A
A.1 List of abbreviations

ASUB Asynchronous subroutine

OPI Operator Panel Interface
CC Compile cycle or OEM or user area
CUTOM CUTter radius cOMpensation: Tool radius compensation
DB Data Block in the PLC
DBB Data Block Byte in the PLC
DBW Data Block Word in the PLC
DBX Data Block Bit in the PLC
DDE Dynamic Data Exchange: Dynamic Data Exchange
DW Data Word
ENC Encoder: Actual value encoder
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory: Erasable, electrically program‐
mable read-only memory
FB Function Block
FC Function Call: Function block in the PLC
GUD Global User Data: Global user data
HEX Abbreviation for hexadecimal number
HMI Human Machine Interface
MSD Main Spindle Drive
IBN Commissioning
INC Increment: Increment
INI Initializing Data: Initializing data
ISO code Special punched tape code, number of holes per character always even
K1 ... K4 Channel 1 to channel 4
C Bus Communication bus
MD Machine Data
MDI Manual Data Input: Manual input
Machine Machine coordinate system
NCK Numerical Control Kernel
OA Open Architecture
OB Organization Block in the PLC
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer: Manufacturer whose products are marke‐
ted under a different name
OP Operator Panel: Operating equipment
PI Program Invocation: Programming Instance
PLC Programmable Logic Controller: Interface control
PLC Programmable logic controller

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 577
Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

TCA ToolChangeAbsolute
TCI ToolChangeIntermediateLocation
TO Tool Offset: Tool Offset
TOA Tool Offset Active: Identifier (file type) for tool offsets
TOOLGNT ToolGroupNumber OfTools
TOOLGT TOOLGroupToolNumber
USEKT UserKindOfTools
VDI Virtual Device Interface: Virtual interface
V.24 Serial interface (definition of the exchange lines between data terminal equip‐
ment and data communication equipment)
Work Workpiece coordinate system
T Tool
TLC Tool Length Compensation
TRC Tool Radius Compensation
TO Tool Offset
TMBF Tool Management Basic tool function (basic function)
TMFD Tool management flat D number
TMMO Tool monitoring function or monitor
TMMG Tool magazine management
TM Tool Management

Tool Management
578 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Appendix
A.2 Documentation overview

A.2 Documentation overview

*HQHUDOGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO
'

6DOHVEURFKXUH &DWDORJ1& &DWDORJ1& &DWDORJ30b &RQILJXUDWLRQ0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO

ದ6,180(5,.'bVO 6,180(5,.'VO 6,180(5,.' 6,027,21 (0&GHVLJQJXLGHOLQHV &WUO(QHUJ\
ದ6,180(5,.' W\SH% %$6,&7%$6,&0 6,1$0,&66
ದ6,180(5,.' 6,1$0,&66FRPEL DQGPRWRUVIRU
%$6,&7 PRWRUV).DQG3+ SURGXFWLRQPDFKLQHV
8VHUGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO '
' ' '
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
6 6

2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO

ದ8QLYHUVDO ದ%DVLFV ದ,62WXUQLQJ
ದ7XUQLQJ ದ-RESODQQLQJ ದ,62PLOOLQJ
ದ0LOOLQJ ದ0HDVXULQJF\FOHV
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO ' 'VO 'VO ' 'VO
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
6 6 6

0DQXDO 0DQXDO &RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO /LVW0DQXDO /LVW0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO

ದ1&8 &RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO ದ&1&1&.3/& ದ0DFKLQHGDWD ದ0DFKLQHGDWD *XLGHOLQHVIRU
ದ2SHUDWLRQFRPSRQHQWV 6HUYLFH0DQXDO GULYH ದ,QWHUIDFHVLJQDOV ದ,QWHUIDFHVLJQDOV PDFKLQH
DQGQHWZRUNLQJ ದ%DVLFVRIWZDUHDQG ದ9DULDEOHV ದ3DUDPHWHUV FRQILJXUDWLRQ
RSHUDWLQJVRIWZDUH ದ9DULDEOHV
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,1$0,&6 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO 'VO 6 'VO '
'
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
6 6

)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO

ದ%DVLFIXQFWLRQV 7RROPDQDJHPHQW 'ULYHIXQFWLRQV 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
ದ([WHQGHGIXQFWLRQV
ದ6SHFLDOIXQFWLRQV
ದ6\QFKURQL]HGDFWLRQV
ದ,62GLDOHFWV
,QIRWUDLQLQJ (OHFWURQLFGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'2&RQ&' 0\'RFXPHQWDWLRQ ,QGXVWU\0DOO

0DQDJHU
7UDLQLQJGRFXPHQWV 0DQXDO
ದ(DV\PLOOLQJ 7RRODQG
ZLWK6KRS0LOO PROGPDNLQJ
ದ7XUQLQJPDGHHDV\
ZLWK6KRS7XUQ

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 579
Appendix
A.2 Documentation overview

Tool Management
580 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Glossary

Access rights
Programs and other data are protected internally by a system of access rights based on seven
levels: Three password levels for system manufacturers, machine manufacturers and users
as well as a maximum of four keyswitch settings, which can be evaluated via the PLC.

Alarms
All messages and alarms are displayed on the operator panel in plain text. Alarms additionally
with date and time as well as the appropriate symbol for the reset criterion. Alarms and
messages are displayed separately.

Approach fixed machine point

Approach motion towards one of the predefined fixed machine points.

Archiving
Reading out data and/or directories to an external memory device.

Asynchronous subprogram (ASUP)

A part program which can be started asynchronously (independently) to the current program
status by an interrupt signal (e.g. "rapid NC input" signal).

Auxiliary functions
Auxiliary functions can be used to transfer parameters to the PLC in -> part programs, where
they trigger reactions which are defined by the machine manufacturer.

Axes
In accordance with their functional scope, the CNC axes are subdivided into:

Axis identifier
In accordance with DIN 66217, axes for a right-handed, rectangular -> coordinate system are
identified using X, Y, Z. The identifiers A, B, C are used for rotary -> axes turning around X,
Y, Z. Other letters can be used to identify additional parallel axes.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 581
Glossary

Axis/spindle interchange
An axis/spindle is permanently assigned to a specific channel via machine data. Using program
commands it is possible to enable an axis/spindle and assign it to another channel.

Backup
Copies of the contents of storage medium (hard disk) are stored to an external memory device
for the purpose of backing up and/or archiving data.

Basic Coordinate System

Cartesian coordinate system, which is mapped by transforming the machine coordinate
system.
In the -> part program, the programmer uses the axis names of the Basic Coordinate System.
The basic coordinate system exists in parallel to the -> machine coordinate system when no -
> transformation is active. The difference between the systems relates to the axis identifiers.

Block
Block is the term given to any files required for creating and processing programs.
Part of a part program that is demarcated by a line feed. A distinction is made between main
blocks and subblocks.

Block
Block is the term given to any files required for creating and processing programs.
Part of a part program that is demarcated by a line feed. A distinction is made between main
blocks and subblocks.

Block search
The block search function allows any point in the part program to be selected, at which
machining must start or be continued. The function is provided for the purpose of testing part
programs or continuing machining after a program abort.

Booting
Loading the system program after power on.

Channel
A channel is characterized by the fact that it can process a part program independently of other
channels. A channel exclusively controls the axes and spindles assigned to it. Parts that
programs run on various channels can be coordinated by -> synchronization.

Tool Management
582 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Glossary

Channel structure
The channel structure makes it possible to process the programs of individual channels
simultaneously and asynchronously.

Contour monitoring
The following error is monitored within a definable tolerance band as a measure of contour
accuracy. Overloading of the drive, for example, may result in an unacceptably large following
error. In such cases, an alarm is output and the axes are stopped.

D number
Number for the tool offset memory.

Data block
Data unit of the PLC that HIGHSTEP programs can access.
Data unit of the NC: Data blocks contain data definitions for global user data. This data can
be initialized directly when it is defined.

Data word
A data unit, two bytes in size, within a PLC data block.

Dimensions, metric and inches

Position and pitch values can be programmed in inches in the machining program. The control
is set to a basic system regardless of the programmable dimensions (G70/G71).

Editor
The editor makes it possible to create, edit, extend, join, and import programs, texts and
program blocks.

File type
Possible types of files, e.g. part programs, zero offsets, R parameters, etc.

Fixed machine point

A point defined uniquely by the machine tool, such as the reference point.

Fixed-point approach
Machine tools can approach fixed points such as a tool change point, loading point, pallet
change point, etc. The coordinates of these points are stored in the control. The control
traverses the relevant axes, if possible in rapid traverse.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 583
Glossary

Frame
A frame is an arithmetic rule that transforms one Cartesian coordinate system into another
Cartesian coordinate system. A frame contains the components work offset, rotation, scaling,
mirroring.

Identifier
In accordance with DIN 66025, words are supplemented using identifiers (names) for variables
(arithmetic variables, system variables, user variables), subprograms, key words, and words
with multiple address letters. These supplements have the same meaning as the words with
respect to block format. Identifiers must be unique. It is not permissible to use the same
identifier for different objects.

Increment
Travel path length specification based on the number of increments. The number of increments
can be stored as setting data or be selected by means of a suitably labeled key (i.e. 10, 100,
1000, 10000).

Keyswitch
The keyswitch is the operating switch of the CPU. The keyswitch is operated using a key that
can be withdrawn.
The keyswitch on the machine control panel has four settings, to which functions are assigned
by the operating system of the control. Further, the keyswitch has three differently colored
keys, which can be removed in the specified positions.

Languages
The display texts of the operator navigation and the system messages and alarms are available
in five languages:
German, English, French, Italian and Spanish.
Two of the specified languages are available in the control and can be selected (commissioning
area).

Machine axes
Axes that are physically present in the machine tool.

Machine control panel

An operator panel on a machine tool with operating elements such as keys, rotary switches,
etc., and simple indicators such as LEDs. It is used to directly influence the machine tool via
the PLC.

Machine Coordinate System

A coordinate system, which is related to the axes of the machine tool.

Tool Management
584 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Glossary

Machine zero
Fixed point of the machine tool to which all (derived) measuring systems can be traced back.

Machining channel
Via a channel structure, parallel sequences of movements, such as positioning a loading gantry
during machining, can shorten unproductive times. Here, a CNC channel must be regarded
as a separate CNC control system with decoding, block preparation and interpolation.

Macro technique
Individual instructions in the programming language can be linked to create one overall
instruction. This condensed instruction sequence is called by a user-defined name in the CNC
program and the macro command executed in accordance with the individual instructions.

Magazine
In the tool management system, a distinction is made between:

Main block
A block preceded with ":" that contains all information to start the operating sequence in a ->
part program.

Main program
-> Part program identified by a number or identifier in which further main programs, subroutines
or -> cycles may be called.

Main run
The part program blocks which have been decoded and prepared in the preprocessing run
are executed in the main run.

MDI
Operating mode of the control: Manual Data Input. In the MDI mode, individual program blocks
or block sequences with no reference to a main program or subroutine can be input and
executed immediately afterwards through actuation of the NC start key.

Messages
All messages programmed in the part program and all alarms recognized by the system are
displayed on the operator panel in plain text. Alarms and messages are displayed separately.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 585
Glossary

Mirroring
Mirroring reverses the signs of the coordinate values of a contour, with respect to an axis. It
is possible to mirror several axes simultaneously.

NC
Numerical Control: Numerical control (NC) includes all components of machine tool control:
NCK, PLC, HMI, Com.

NCK
Numerical Control Kernel: Component of the NC that executes the part programs and basically
coordinates the motion operations for the machine tool.

NRK
Numerical Robotic Kernel (operating system of the NCK)

OEM
The scope for implementing individual solutions (OEM applications) has been provided for
machine manufacturers, who wish to create their own user interface or integrate technological
functions in the control.

Offset memory
Data range in the control, in which the tool offset data is stored.

Oriented spindle stop

Stops the workpiece spindle with a specified orientation angle, e.g. to perform an additional
machining operation at a specific position.

Override
Manual or programmable intervention features, which enable the user to override programmed
feedrates or speeds in order to adapt them to a specific workpiece or material.

Part program
Series of instructions to the NC that act in concert to produce a particular workpiece. Likewise,
this term applies to execution of a particular machining operation on a given raw part.

PLC
Programmable Logic Controller: Programmable logic controller, component of the NC
controller: Programmable controller for processing the control logic of the machine tool.

Tool Management
586 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Glossary

PLC program memory

The PLC user program, the user data and the basic PLC program are stored together in the
PLC user memory. The PLC user memory can be expanded up to 128 KB with memory
expansions.

R parameter
Arithmetic parameter that can be set or queried by the programmer of the part program for any
purpose in the program.

Reference point
Point on the machine tool with which the measuring system of the machine axes is referenced.

Reference point approach

If the utilized distance measuring system is not an absolute encoder then it is necessary to
perform a reference point approach to ensure that the actual values returned by the measuring
system match the machine coordinate values.

Replacement tool
Generally, a tool group contains several tools. Only the identifier is specified in the part program
for the tool change. The tool with the "active" status is generally selected as the new tool. But
if this is disabled, then one of the other -> twin tools, i.e. the replacement tool, is selected
instead.

Replacement tool, tool group

Replacement tools have the same identifier and only differ in the duplo number. The
replacement tools assigned to one identifier are also referred to as a tool group.

REPOS
● Repositioning to the contour per operator input
The REPOS function can use the direction keys to reposition at the point of interruption.
● Repositioning to the contour per program
Several approach strategies can be selected using program commands: Approach point
of interruption, approach start of block, approach end of block, approach a point on the path
between start of block and interruption.

Safety functions
The control has continually active monitoring functions, which detect malfunctions in the CNC,
the programmable controller (PLC) and the machine at an early stage, in order to minimize
the risk of damage to the tool, workpiece or machine. In the event of a fault, the machining
operation is interrupted and the drives stopped. The cause of the malfunction is logged and
output as an alarm. At the same time, the PLC is notified that a CNC alarm is pending.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 587
Glossary

Setting data
Data which communicates the properties of the machine tool to the NC, as defined by the
system software.

Softkey
A key whose name appears on an area of the screen. The choice of softkeys displayed is
dynamically adapted to the operating situation. The freely assignable function keys are
assigned defined functions in the software.

Spindles
● Spindle = toolholder
Toolholder is generally the location for the machining tool. However, the term “spindle” is
frequently used in this general context.
● Main spindle = master spindle
This is the spindle with the number defined by machine data MD
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND. Language command SETMS(n) can be
programmed to declare the spindle with number n as the master spindle. A channel has
exactly one master spindle.
● Secondary spindle
This term refers to all spindles that are not the master spindle.

Standard cycles
Standard cycles are provided for machining tasks which are frequently repeated:

Subblock
Block prefixed by "N" containing information for a machining step, such as a position parameter.

Subprogram
Sequence of statements of a part program that can be called repeatedly with different defining
parameters. Cycles are a type of subprogram.

Synchronization
Instructions in part programs for coordination of the operations in different channels at specific
machining points.

Tool Management
588 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Glossary

Synchronized axes
● Auxiliary function output
During workpiece machining, technological functions can be output from the CNC program
to the PLC. These auxiliary functions are used for example to control additional equipment
for the machine tool, such as quills, grabbers, clamping chucks, etc.
● Fast auxiliary function output
For time-critical switching functions, the acknowledgement times for the auxiliary functions
can be minimized and unnecessary hold points in the machining process can be avoided.

System variable
A variable that exists without any input from the programmer of a part program. It is defined
by a data type and the variable name preceded by the character $.

Tool nose radius compensation

Contour programming assumes that the tool is pointed. Because this is not actually the case
in practice, the curvature radius of the tool used must be communicated to the control which
then takes it into account. The curvature center is maintained equidistantly around the contour,
offset by the curvature radius.

Tool offset
By programming a T function (5 decades, integer) in the block, you can select the tool. Every
T number can be assigned up to 12 cutting edges (D addresses). The number of tools to be
managed in the control is set while configuring.

Tool radius compensation

In order to be able to directly program a required workpiece contour, the control must traverse
a path equidistant to the programmed contour, taking into account the radius of the tool used
(G41/G42).

Transformation
Programming in a Cartesian coordinate system, execution in a non-Cartesian coordinate
system (e.g. with machine axes as rotary axes).

User interface
The user interface (UI) is the display medium for a CNC in the form of a screen. It is laid out
with eight horizontal and eight vertical softkeys.

User memory
All programs and data, such as part programs, subprograms, comments, tool offsets, and work
offsets/frames, as well as channel and program user data, can be stored in the shared CNC
user memory.

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 589
Glossary

User program -> part program

User-defined variables
Users can define variables in the -> part program or data block (global user data) for their own
use. A definition contains a data type specification and the variable name. See also -> System
variable.

Variable definition
A variable definition includes the specification of a data type and a variable name. The variable
names can be used to access the value of the variables.

Working memory
The working memory is a RAM memory in the -> CPU which is accessed by the processor to
access the user program during program execution.

Workpiece
The part to be produced/machined by the machine tool or a workpiece as directory in which
programs and other data are saved. Workpieces should be resaved in a directory.

Workpiece Coordinate System

The workpiece zero is the origin of the workpiece coordinate system. In machining operations
programmed in workpiece coordinate system, the dimensions and directions refer to this
system.

Workpiece zero
The workpiece zero forms the origin for the workpiece coordinate system. It is defined in terms
of distances to the machine zero.

Tool Management
590 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
Index
$P_TOOLP, 350
$P_TOOLR, 351
$ $P_TOOLT, 336
$P_USEKT, $TC_TP11, 319
$A_MONIFACT, 328
$P_VDITCP[x], 266
$A_MYMLN, 333
$TC_CARRx, 263
$A_MYMN, 333
$TC_DPCx[t,D], 228
$A_TOOLMLN, 327
$TC_DPx[t,D], 226
$A_TOOLMN, 325
$TC_MAMPx [n], 253
$A_USEDD, 340
$TC_MAP10, 243
$A_USEDND, 338
$TC_MAP3, 242
$A_USEDT, 339
$TC_MAP8, 243
$AC_MONMIN, 329
$TC_MAPCx[n], 243
$AC_MSNUM, 354, 377
$TC_MDPx[n,m], 250
$AC_MTHNUM, 354, 377
$TC_MLSR[x,y], 260
$A-MONIFACT, 166
$TC_MOPCx[t,D], 230
$P_AD[n], 353
$TC_MOPx[t,D], 229
$P_ADT[n], 353
$TC_MPP1, 246
$P_D_BEFORE_SEARCH, 357
$TC_MPP5, 247
$P_DL_BEFORE_SEARCH, 358
$TC_MPP6, 247
$P_DLNO, 351
$TC_MPPCx[n,m], 248
$P_ISTEST, 367
$TC_MPPx[n,m], 244
$P_MAGA, 349
$TC_MPTH[n,m], 249
$P_MAGDISL, 342
$TC_SCPx[t,D], 231
$P_MAGDISS, 342
$TC_TP1 and $TC_TP2, 235
$P_MAGHLT, 348
$TC_TP3 to TP6, 235
$P_MAGNA, 349
$TC_TP7, 235
$P_MAGNDIS, 342
$TC_TP8, 236
$P_MAGNH, 348
$TC_TPCx[t], 239
$P_MAGNHLT, 348
$TC_TPGx[t], 239
$P_MAGNREL, 344
$TC_TPx[t], 233
$P_MAGNS, 343
$P_MAGREL, 344
$P_MAGS, 343
$P_MSNUM, 354, 377
A
$P_MTHNUM, 355, 377 Access protection, 27
$P_MTHNUM_BEFORE_SEARCH, 357 Acknowledgement
$P_MTHSDC, 356 Simplified, 206
$P_TC, 352 Activate (internally)
$P_TCANG[n], 352 Wear group, 34
$P_TCDIFF[n], 352 Activate wear group, 33
$P_TH_OF_D, 285, 356 Adapter transformation, 185
$P_TOOL, 350, 351 Adding tools during machining, 94
$P_TOOLD, 336 Asynchronous transfer, 201
$P_TOOLL[n], 351
$P_TOOLND, 327
$P_TOOLNDL, 337 B
$P_TOOLNG, 333
Background magazine, 34
$P_TOOLNO, 350
Block execution, 85
$P_TOOLNT, 336

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 591
Index

Block search, 107, 109 Disable wear group, 33

Block search with calculation, 107 DL - Programming, 182
Block search, program test, 95 Duplo number, 17, 18
Block splitting, 85 DZERO, 271
Buffer, 29

E
C Empty spindle, 91
Chain and box-type magazines, 30 End acknowledgement, 203
Changing the acknowledgement data, 204
CHKDM, 180, 269
CHKDNO, 180 F
Code carrier data
Failure search strategy, 138
Data conversion, 394
Free adapter data records, 187
Code carrier data formats ,
Free selection of D numbers for every T, 179
Code carrier data, dialog data
Assignment, 402
Code carrier description file ,
Commissioning, 197
G
Consider adjacent location, 35 GETACTT, 285
CRCEDN, 374 GETACTTD, 180, 269
CREACE, 374 GETDNO, 180, 270
CREATO, 374 GETEXET, 279
CRTOCE, 374 GETFREELOC, 311
Cutting edge selection after tool change, 365 GETSELT, 277
GETT, 274

D
D numbers of replacement tools, 268
H
Data, 17 HMI
DB 1071, 198 Overview, 21
DB 1072, 198
DB 1073, 198
DB 71, 198 I
DB 72, 198
IDENTCONNECTIONCONFIGURATION, 389
DB 73, 198
Identifiers, 17, 18
DB 74, 198
Internally assigned T numbers, 17
Decoupling the tool management from the spindle
number, 119
DefToolDat.txt, 382, 406
DELDL, 271
L
DELECE, 374 Loading magazine, 29
DELETO, 374 Loading points, 29
DELMLOWNER, 318 Loading stations, 29
DELMLRES, 317 Location coding, 75
DELMT, 273 Location-dependent offsets, 231
DELT, 273 Location-dependent offsets, coarse, 231
DELTC, 304
Disable (internally)
Wear group, 34 M
Disable monitored tools, 171
Magazine configuration, 26

Tool Management
592 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3
 Index

Magazine-location-related adapter data records, 187 PLC - NCK interfaces, 24

Magazines PLC at unloading, 156
Real, 26 PLC in test mode, 117
Main spindle, 86 PLC services, 210
Manual tools, 94 Positioning, 161
Manufacturer's configuration, 196 POSM, 289
MCIS-C script language , POSM (multitool), 291
MMCSEM, 374 Predecoding, 85
Monitoring status, 164 Prepare to change tool in a secondary spindle, 87
Monitoring types, 163 Preparing and changing a tool, 74
Multiple T selection, 91 Prewarning limit, 164
Program test, 116
Programming data
N Tool and cutting edge data,
Programming T/M06, 73
NCK
Programming the tool selection, 364
Overview, 21
Protection levels, 27
NEWMT, 272
NEWT, 271
Q
O Quantity, 163
oem_sltmlistconfig.xml, 382
Operator panels, 17
OPI, 22, 223
R
OPI block AD, 262 Relative D no. for each T, 178
OPI block C/S, 278, 280 Relocating, 159
OPI block TD, 233 Relocation by the PLC, 159
OPI block TG, 239 Replace tool search strategy, 144
OPI block TM, 241 Replacement tool, 85
OPI block TMC, 253, 260 Replacement tools, 92
OPI block TMV, 372 RESETMON ,
OPI block TO, 227, 229 RESETMON (multitool), 302
OPI block TOE, TOET, 232 Retroload program, 153
OPI block TOS, 231
OPI block TP, 245
OPI block TPM, 250 S
OPI block TS, 229
Search for tool, 137
OPI block TT, 249
Search procedure for empty locations, 143
OPI block TU, 240
Search strategies, 137
OPI block TUM, 244
Search strategy for empty locations, 140
OPI block TUP, 248
Secondary spindle, 87
OPI block TUS, 230
Service life, 163
Orientable tool holder, 263
SETDNO, 180, 270
Overview of data blocks, 198
SETMS, 287
SETMTH, 124, 287
SETPIECE, 167, 275
P SETTA (multitool), 300
ParamTM, 431 SETTIA, 298
PI services, 374 SETTIA (multitool), 299
PLC Setting-up offset, 181
Overview, 21 Setting-up offsets, 231

Tool Management
Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3 593
Index

Several magazines in one channel or one TO Tool command

unit, 126 Power failure., 196
Several spindles / tool holders, 125 Tool holder, 75
Several spindles in one channel or TO unit, 118 Tool holder numbers, 123
Special cases Tool Ident Connection
Empty spindle, 91 Configuration,
Multiple T selection, 91 PLC connection,
Spindle number, 119 Tool identifier, 17
Spindle/buffer DB 72, 87 Tool life decrementation, 166
SSL, 109 Tool life monitoring, 165
Subprogram replacement technique, 358 Tool return transport, 75
SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK, 545 Tool search, 137, 138
Synchronization, 203 Tool search in wear group ,
Synchronized actions, 100 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER, 119
System variables, 223 TOOLGNT, 323
systemconfiguration.ini, 382, 390 TOOLGT, 323
Tool-related data, 233
ToolSize.mcc, 423
T toolSpec.xml, 382
Configuration,
T number
Transport acknowledgement, 203
Internal, 18
Traverse axes while tool is being changed, 87
T=location, 63
TSEARC, 373, 374
T=location number, 368
Turret DB 73, 92
T=location, automatic tool selection, 322
Turret magazine, 32
TC_VAR, 117
TCA, 305
TCI, 310
TDIdentCfg.xml, 391
V
tdiidentcfg.xml, 382 VDI signal, 170
Time monitoring, 166
TMCRTC, 374
TMCRTO, 374 W
TMFDPL, 374
Wear group, 33
TMFPBP, 374
Wear monitoring, 167
TMGETT, 373, 375
Wkonvert wizard
TMMVTL, 374
Installation,
TMPCIT, 374
wkonvert.mcc, 382, 421
TMPOSM, 374
wkonvert.mcx, 382
TMRASS, 375
wkonvert.txt
TOA area, 23
Description file, 398
Tool change, 72
Workpiece count monitoring, 166
Programming, 364
Tool change at the secondary spindle, 86
Tool change in the spindle, 87
Tool change of the main spindle, 86
Tool change preparation in a main spindle, 86
Tool change with turret, 92
Tool changes in the NCK using synchronized
actions, 100
Tool changing errors, 93
Tool changing with T command, 74

Tool Management
594 Function Manual, 10/2015, 6FC5397-6BP40-5BA3